Yamaha AW2400 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: AW2400

Categorie: Muzikale uitrusting

Type: Handleiding

Owner’s Manual

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.

Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by Yamaha may

void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the prod-

uct.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to fol-

low instructions could void your FCC authorization to use

this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part

15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance

that your use of this product in a residential environment

will not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequen-

cies and, if not installed and used according to the

instructions found in the users manual, may cause inter-

ference harmful to the operation of other electronic

devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guar-

antee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and

“ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of

the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to dis-

tribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation

of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangetho-

rpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products dis-

tributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsid-

iaries.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Professional Audio Workstation

Model Name : AW2400

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus-

pected.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance

with the following code:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not

correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your

plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to

the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety

earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (3 wires)

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

The above warning is located on the rear of the unit.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of

uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of

sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an

equilateral triangle is intended to alert the

user to the presence of important operating

and maintenance (servicing) instructions

in the literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as

radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus

(including ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from the

apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table

speciﬁed by the manufacturer,

or sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/

apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or

when unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects

have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has

been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate

normally, or has been dropped.

(98-6500)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury.

Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from

electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not

limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the device. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the device.

• Use only the included power cord.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord,

place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

• Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding

connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.

• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If

it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and

have it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill

into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells

or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the

power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the

device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the

power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the

device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or

damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be

used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always

hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using

is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately

turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even

when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the

product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a

long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

•Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum.

Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may

cause feedback and may damage the speakers.

• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold

or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the

day) to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the

internal components.

• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• The plastic side panels do not provide a secure grip, and should not be

used as handles when moving or transporting the unit. Carrying the unit

by the plastic side panels can result in the unit being dropped, which

could damage the unit and/or cause personal injury.

• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top/front/

rear to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In

particular, do not place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate

ventilation can result in overheating, possibly causing damage to the

device(s), or even ﬁre.

• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Doing so may result in noise,

both in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it.

PRECAUTIONS

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Location

(5)-4 1/2

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all

devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume

levels to minimum.

• Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw

is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and

shock prevention. If the mains outlet is not grounded, be sure to connect

the ground screw to a conﬁrmed ground point before plugging the device

into the mains. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.

• When turning on the AC power in your audio system, always turn on the

power ampliﬁer LAST, to avoid speaker damage. When turning the power

off, the power ampliﬁer should be turned off FIRST for the same reason.

• Do not insert your ﬁngers or hands in any gaps or openings on the

device (vents, disc slots, etc.).

•Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.)

into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, disc slots, etc.) If this

happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from

the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha

service personnel.

• Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and

avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.

The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualiﬁed Yamaha

service personnel about replacing defective components.

Connections

Handling caution

XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).

Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows: sleeve: ground, tip: send, and ring: return.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.

(5)-4 2/2

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

This product utilizes a laser.

Use of control, adjustment or performance of procedures other than those speciﬁed herein may result in haz-

ardous radiation exposure.

Do not open covers and do not repair yourself. Refer servicing to qualiﬁed personnel.

The label shown below is located on the rear of this product.

The label shown below is located on the top of the internal CD-RW drive.

Please observe the following points when handling the disc.

Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost, the drive to malfunction, or the

printed label to become blurred.

• Do not place the disc in locations of direct sunlight, high temperature, or high humidity.

• Do not touch the recording surface of the disc.

Hold the disc at the edges.

• Gently wipe dust or dirt off of the recording surface of the disc.

Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust. Vigorously rubbing the surface of the disc with a dry cloth may

scratch the disc.

• If the disc surface needs cleaning, wipe gently from the center to the outside of the disc with a soft damp

cloth, then gently wipe off remaining moisture in the same way with a clean dry cloth.

• Do not write on the disc or afﬁx labels to it.

• Do not wipe the disc with chemicals or detergents.

• Do not bend or drop the disc.

Caution for Laser

Laser properties of the Drive

Laser Class : Class 1 (HHS and IEC 825-1)

Wavelength : for CD 784 nm

for DVD 662 nm

Handling the CD-R/RW media

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

CAUTION

CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

ATTENTION

CLASSE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D’OUVERTURE.

EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU.

VORSICHT

KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET.

NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

ADVARSEL

KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDS/ETTELSE FOR STRÅLING.

ADVARSEL

KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES. UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.

VARNING

KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG.

VARO!

KURSSI 3B NÄKYVÄ JA NÄKYMÄTÖN AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERSÄTEILYLLE, ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEN.

CAUTION: CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

• During some hard disk operations a small amount of vibration might be felt at the control panel and you

might hear some mechanical noises. This is normal.

• Do not subject the unit to strong physical shock. Excessive physical shock can damage the internal hard

disk.

•Always turn the power off when moving the unit from one location to another. Data on the internal hard disk

can be lost or corrupted if the unit is moved while the power is on.

als under certain requirements. The observance of applicable laws for use of this product, however, is your

responsibility. Yamaha disclaims any liability for violation of such laws in association with the use of this

product.

Although this product is designed for original music production, it can be utilized to make reproduction of

copyrighted music and other sound products. While certain reproduction and use of reproduced materials are

permitted under applicable laws, such reproduction and use without license may constitute copyright infringe-

ment and other violation of laws. Since violation of such laws can have serious consequences, you may wish

to consult a legal expert about your planned use of this product.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or

with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without lim-

itation, all computer software, styles ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use

of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of

Internal Hard Disk Precautions

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may

appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Contents

1. Before you start 11

Introduction................................................................. 11

Remember to back up your data ................................ 11

About the built-in CD-RW drive ..................................12

Using the CD-RW drive .............................................. 12

Installing an optional card........................................... 13

2. Introducing the AW2400 15

Features of the AW2400 ............................................15

AW2400 terminology .................................................. 17

Recorder section....................................................17

Mixer section..........................................................18

Overall.................................................................... 19

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do...................... 20

Top panel ...............................................................20

Rear panel ............................................................. 28

Front panel.............................................................29

Basic operation of the AW2400.................................. 30

Viewing the display ................................................30

Accessing a screen/page.......................................31

Switching a button on/off........................................ 31

Editing a value in the display ................................. 31

Using Additional Function Buttons .........................31

Entering text...........................................................32

Switching Mixing Layers ........................................ 33

Using the Selected Channel section ......................33

3. Connection and Setup 37

Connection .................................................................37

Turning the power on/off ............................................38

Adjusting the input level .............................................39

4. Listening to the demo song 41

Loading the demo song.............................................. 41

Playing the demo song............................................... 42

5. Recording to a sound clip 43

Recording a sound clip............................................... 43

Playing a sound clip ...................................................45

6. Track recording 47

Creating a new song ..................................................47

Direct recording and Mixed recording.........................49

Assigning input signals to tracks

(Direct recording)...............................................51

Assigning input signals to tracks

(Mixed recording) ..............................................54

Recording on a track...................................................56

Saving the current song..............................................57

Pairing channels .........................................................58

Applying EQ To an Input Signal..................................60

Applying Compression to an Input Signal...................61

Handy Recording Functions .......................................62

Using the Metronome .............................................62

Switching virtual tracks...........................................63

Using the Undo List ................................................64

7. Overdubbing 65

About overdubbing......................................................65

Assigning the input signal to a track ...........................66

Setting the mix balance and pan ................................67

Overdubbing ...............................................................68

Punch-in/out................................................................69

Manual punch-in/out...............................................69

Auto punch-in/out ...................................................70

8. Mixdown and bounce operations 73

About mixdown and bouncing.....................................73

Mixdown procedure ....................................................75

Playing back the stereo track......................................78

Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure ...................79

Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce .................82

Fader Group assignments......................................82

Mute Group assignments .......................................83

Using the Solo function ..........................................84

9. Transport/Locate Operation 87

The Transport Section Keys .......................................87

Move To a Specified Location ....................................87

Using the locator.........................................................88

Using markers.............................................................90

Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker.......91

Adjusting the position of a locate point...................91

Adjusting the position of a marker ..........................92

Erasing a locate point or marker.................................93

Repeat playback of a specific region

(the A-B Repeat function) ...........................................93

Finding a location while monitoring the sound

(the Nudge function) ...................................................94

Finding a location while viewing the waveform...........95

10. Meters 97

Level Meter Types ......................................................97

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Contents

11. Patching and signal flow 99

Input signal patching ..................................................99

Patching for Direct Recording ................................99

Patching for Mixed Recording..............................102

Output signal patching.............................................. 104

12. Channel Operation 105

Displaying the mix parameters

for individual channels.............................................. 105

Channel Library Operation .......................................108

Calling the Channel Library screen......................108

Changing Channel Library Names.......................109

Storing Channel Library settings..........................109

Recalling Channel Library settings ...................... 110

Erasing Channel Library settings .........................110

13. AUX 111

About the AUX buses ............................................... 111

AUX Send Level Adjustment .................................... 111

Using external effects with the AUX buses ..............113

14. Effects 115

About the Internal Effects ......................................... 115

Recalling Effect Library settings ............................... 116

Applying Effects via Send and Return...................... 117

Inserting an Effect Into a Channel ............................ 119

Editing Effects ..........................................................121

Effect Library Operations.......................................... 122

Call the Effect Library Screen ..............................122

Changing Effect Library Names ...........................122

Storing Effect Library settings ..............................123

Erasing Effect Library settings .............................123

Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)......................... 124

15. Track operations and editing 127

About the AW2400’s tracks ...................................... 127

Audio track operations.............................................. 128

About audio tracks ...............................................128

Viewing all audio tracks ....................................... 128

Muting a specific audio track................................ 129

Switching the virtual track of an audio track......... 129

Editing virtual track names for an audio track ......130

Stereo track operations ............................................130

About the stereo track..........................................130

Recording on the stereo track..............................131

Playing back the stereo track...............................131

Switching the virtual track of the stereo track ...... 132

Editing the name of a virtual track

for the stereo track ..........................................132

The Trigger Track Function ......................................133

About Trigger Track..............................................133

Using the Trigger Track Function .........................134

Editing tracks ............................................................135

Basic procedure for track editing ..............................136

List of editing command............................................138

ERASE .................................................................138

DELETE ...............................................................138

INSERT ................................................................138

COPY ...................................................................139

MOVE...................................................................140

EXCHANGE .........................................................141

TIME COMP (Time Compression/Expansion)......141

PITCH (Pitch Change)..........................................142

IMPORT CD AUDIO.............................................142

IMPORT CD WAV ................................................142

IMPORT USB WAV..............................................142

IMPORT TRACK ..................................................142

EXPORT...............................................................142

MERGE ................................................................142

Importing audio data/WAV files ................................143

Importing from the CD-RW drive ..........................143

Importing audio data from another song ..............145

16. Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing 147

Pan Control...............................................................147

4-band EQ ................................................................149

Dynamics Processing ...............................................151

Using the Gates....................................................151

Using the Compressors........................................152

EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation..............154

Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens ......154

Changing EQ/Dynamics Library Names...............156

Recalling EQ/Dynamics Library settings ..............156

Storing EQ/Dynamics Library settings..................157

Erasing EQ/Dynamics Library settings.................157

17. Scene Memory 159

About Scene Memory ...............................................159

Scene Memory Operation.........................................159

Renaming a scene ...............................................160

Recalling scene data............................................160

Storing scene data ...............................................161

Deleting scene data..............................................161

Protecting a scene................................................161

Using the Recall Safe function..................................162

Moving scenes..........................................................163

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Contents

18. Song management 165

About songs .............................................................165

Managing Your Songs.............................................. 167

Editing various settings for the song ........................174

Creating a tempo map.............................................. 175

Backing up songs ..................................................... 177

Restoring songs .......................................................178

Exchanging Song Data

With Other AW-series Audio Workstations............... 180

19. Automix 181

About Automix .......................................................... 181

Automix Operation.................................................... 181

Creating a New Automix Recording.....................182

Recording the Automix Data ................................ 183

Automix Playback ................................................ 185

Punch In and Out of Automix ............................... 185

Command Editing Automix data

In a Specified Region ...............................................186

Editing Individual Automix Events ............................188

Automix Library Operation........................................ 190

About the Automix Library Page ..........................190

Changing Automix Names ...................................190

Storing Automix settings ......................................191

Recalling Automix settings...................................191

Erasing Automix settings ..................................... 191

Protecting Automix Data ......................................192

20. MIDI 193

What you can do using MIDI ....................................193

Basic MIDI Settings .................................................. 194

MIDI Synchronization Message Setup .....................198

Connecting to External Equipment........................... 200

Synchronizing the AW2400

With External MIDI Devices.............................200

Switching AW2400 scenes

from an external MIDI device ..........................201

Recording/playing AW2400

mix operations on an external sequencer .......202

Using the MIDI Remote function ..............................204

About the MIDI Remote function..........................204

Using the MIDI Remote function presets .............204

Using User-defined Remote function ................... 206

Remotely controlling a tone generator module ....207

21. Utility functions 209

Using the test tone oscillator ....................................209

AW2400 Preferences ...............................................210

Initializing the internal hard disk ...............................212

22. Creating an audio CD 213

Creating an audio CD ...............................................213

Types of media that you can use

with the CD-RW drive ...............................................213

Writing an audio CD..................................................214

Basic settings for the CD-RW drive ..........................215

Writing audio data.....................................................216

Writing Track At Once ..........................................217

Writing Disc At Once ............................................218

Finalizing CD-R/RW media.......................................220

Erasing CD-RW media .............................................221

Playing an audio CD .................................................222

23. Digital Input/Output &

Optional Card Settings 223

Wordclock and Cascade Settings.............................223

Select the Wordclock Source ...............................223

Fine Adjustment Of Overall

Song Pitch (Vari-pitch).....................................226

Cascade-connecting External Devices.................226

Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal.............227

Plug-in Card Settings................................................228

24. USB 229

What You Can Do With USB ....................................229

WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) ..................230

Switching to the USB Storage Mode....................230

Exiting the USB Storage Mode.............................232

Copying Exported WAV Files

To the Computer..............................................233

Importing Copied WAV Files

From the Computer..........................................234

Appendix 237

Mastering library list..................................................237

EQ Parameter list .....................................................238

Dynamics Parameters ..............................................240

Gate Parameter list...................................................243

Compressor Parameter list .......................................243

Effects Parameters ...................................................245

Troubleshooting ........................................................258

Display message list .................................................263

About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 ........266

MIDI data format .......................................................272

MIDI Implementation Chart.......................................276

Specifications............................................................277

Dimensions ...............................................................279

Index .........................................................................280

Block diagram ...........................................................284

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Before you start

Chapter 1

Before you start

This chapter explains what you should know before you begin using the

AW2400.

The AW2400 package contains the following items. If any

are missing, please contact your dealer.

• The AW2400

•Power cord

• Owner’s manual (this book)

• CD-ROM

Copying of commercially available music sequence data

and/or digital audio ﬁles for any purpose other than your

own personal use is strictly prohibited.

• Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer,

Inc. USA in the United States and other countries.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corpora-

tion USA in the United States and other countries.

• Cubase SX and Nuendo are trademarks of Steinberg

Media Technologies AG.

• Logic is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

USA in the United States and other countries.

• SONAR is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone Sys-

tems, Inc.

• ProTools is a trademark or registered trademark of Avid

Technology, Inc. and afﬁliated companies.

• Other company names and product names in this docu-

ment are the trademarks or registered trademarks of

their respective owners.

http://www.yamahasynth.com/

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Produced data can be lost due to breakdown or mistaken

operation. We recommend that you store all important

data on your computer, CD-R/CD-RW discs, or other

external storage medium.

Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any damages

(including consequential or incidental) incurred by the

customer or any third party as a result of loss or impair-

ment of the data stored on the hard disk or CD-R media,

regardless of whether such loss could have been or actu-

ally was foreseen by Yamaha.

Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any defect

that may render it unusable.

Introduction

■ Check the included items

■ Copyright

■ Trademarks

■ Yamaha Website (English only)

■ Yamaha Manual Library

Remember to back up your data

■ Storing produced data

■ Responsibility for loss of data, etc.

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Before you start

A built-in CD-RW drive is a device that lets you create or

play audio CDs, backup and restore data from the internal

hard disk, and read data from a CD-ROM.

1 Never touch the objective lens.

B Be careful that the objective lens does not become

dusty or dirty.

C If the objective lens becomes dusty, use a commer-

cially available blower etc. to blow the dust off with

clean air.

D Since the inside of the drive contains powerful mag-

netic circuitry, do not allow any magnetic material to

come near the drive. (In particular, any metallic frag-

ments, screws, or pins that enter the drive mechanism

will cause operation to fail.)

To insert a disc into the CD-RW drive, press the eject

switch. The disc tray will open. Place the disc on the tray,

and gently push the disc tray in.

If you are unable to remove the disc by pressing the eject

switch, insert a wire of less than 2 mm diameter (such as a

straightened paper clip) into the eject hole, and push gen-

tly. However, pressing the eject switch will not eject the

disc when the AW2400 is in the following states, so do not

use this method in such cases.

• When the AW2400’s power is “OFF”

• When the disc is being accessed (data is being read,

written, or erased)

• While in CD PLAY mode

About the built-in CD-RW drive

• Even if a CD-RW drive is operating normally, it may fail a read

or write operation approximately once in ﬁve hundred times.

•Yamaha will take no responsibility for any damages, direct or

consequential, that may result from the use of the above CD-

RW drive.

IMPORTANT

■ Handling

Using the CD-RW drive

• The disc tray is ejected electrically. If the disc tray is not ejected

when you press the eject switch, turn on the power of the AW2400

and press the eject switch once again.

NOTE

Eject switchEject hole

■ Removing a CD in an emergency

• This removal method is for use in emergencies such as when

you cannot remove the disc due to a malfunction of the disc

tray or a power failure. Do not use this method unnecessarily,

since doing so will damage the CD-RW drive.

CAUTION

About the built-in CD-RW drive • Using the CD-RW drive

Installing an optional card

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Before you start

By installing a separately sold mini-YGDAI card in a rear-

panel slot, you can add analog input/output jacks to the

AW2400 or allow connection of external digital devices.

The following types of cards can be used.

Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the

most recent information on I/O cards.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com

Before installing a card, you must check the Yamaha web-

site to make sure that this device is compatible.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com

To install an optional mini-YGDAI card, proceed as

follows.

Make sure that the power is turned off.

Loosen the screws that hold the slot cover

in place, and remove the slot cover.

Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place.

Align the edges of the card with the guard

rails inside the slot, and insert the card into

the slot.

Push the card all the way into the slot so that the con-

nector at the end of the card is correctly mated with the

connector inside the slot.

Use the screws included with the card to

fasten the card in place.

Malfunctions or incorrect operation may occur if the

card is not fastened.

Installing an optional card

Card type Model

Number of

channels

Digital

format

Bit

depth

AD card

MY4-AD 4

—

24 bit

MY8-AD

20 bit

MY8-AD24

24 bit

MY8-AD96

DA card

MY4-DA 4

—

20 bit

MY8-DA96 8 24 bit

Digital I/O card

MY8-AE

AES/EBU

24 bit

MY8-AE96

MY8-AE96S

MY16-AE 16

MY8-AT 8

ADAT

MY16-AT 16

MY8-TD 8

TASCAM

MY16-TD 16

Waves Plug-in

DSP card

Y96K 8 ADAT 24bit

mLAN card MY16-mLAN 16 IEEE1394 24bit

■ Available optional cards

■ Installing an optional card

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Before you start

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

Chapter 2

Introducing the AW2400

This chapter describes the features of the AW2400, the name of each part

and its function, and introduces terminology you need to know when using

the AW2400.

The AW2400 is an audio workstation that combines a digital mixer, multi-effect processor, hard

disk recorder, and CD-RW drive.

The following diagram shows the signal ﬂow within the AW2400.

Now let’s take a more detailed look at each section of the AW2400.

● Plenty of input channels with professional

features

The AW2400 digital mixer features 24-bit AD/DA conver-

sion with 32-bit internal processing for uncompromised

sound quality. 16 input channels, 24 track channels, and 4

stereo effect return channels provide plenty of input

capacity for most mixing situations.

The 8 AD input ([MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8), chan-

nels 1–16 on an optional I/O card installed in I/O slot, or

the stereo [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector can be

selected for input.

The track channel 1–24 inputs are permanently assigned

to tracks 1–24, and the effect return channel 1–4 inputs are

permanently assigned to the outputs of internal effect pro-

cessors 1–4.

Features of the AW2400

Input channels 1–16

Track channels 1–24

Effect return channels 1–4

Bus1 L/R, Bus2 L/R

AUX buses 1–4

Effect buses 1–4

Stereo buses L/R

Stereo output channel

×8

×16

[MIC/LINE

INPUT]

jacks 1–8

×2

[DIGITAL

STEREO IN]

connector

I/O slot

Mixer

×2

Sound clip

24 ×24×2

Recorder input

patching

Recorder CD-R/RW drive

CD Write

Data Backup/Restore

WAV File Import

CD Play

×2

I/O card

[OMNI OUT] jacks 1-4

[DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector

[STEREO OUT] jacks

[MONITOR OUT] jacks

[PHONES] jack

I/O card

×2

Metronome

Effect 1

×2

Effect 2

×2

Effect 3

×2

Effect 4

Internal Effects

×2

×16

×4

×2

■ Mixer section

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Features of the AW2400

Introducing the AW2400

● Totally redesigned operation

The AW2400 is designed to be operated directly by the

musician (guitarist, vocalist, drummer etc.). Input signal

track assignment, mixdown and bounce recording set-

tings, tracking with effects/EQ/dynamics, compressor set-

tings, and much more can be easily handled with simple,

straightforward operation.

● Four-band EQ and dynamics processors on

each channel

Four-band full-parametric EQ and dynamics processing is

provided on virtually every channel. You can recall the

desired preset from the library, and use the panel knobs

and keys to quickly adjust the settings.

● Four high-quality multi-effect units built-in

The four built-in effect units deliver a wide variety of

effects including ambience effects such as reverb and

delay, modulation type effects such as chorus and ﬂanger,

and guitar-type effects such as distortion and amp simula-

tion. These effects can be used either via send/return, or

inserted into a desired channel.

● Automix capability

Full automix production power is provided with 13 motor

faders for comprehensive fader control, pan control, scene

recall and library recall capability.

● I/O slot for expansion with optional I/O cards

Expanded inputs and outputs can be provided in ADAT,

TASCAM, AES/EBU, and other formats. Optional DSP

cards can also be used to provide extra signal processing

capability via the I/O slot.

● 16-track Simultaneous Recording & 24-track

Simultaneous Playback (16-bit songs)

You can record multiple instrument tracks one by one, or

set up multiple mics to record a drum set or a live perfor-

mance by an entire band. A stereo track for direct mix-

down of all 24 tracks is also provided, letting you manage

the multi-track audio and the two-track mix as a single

data package.

8 virtual tracks are available for the recorder tracks as well

as the stereo track. When recording parts or when doing a

mix, you can switch virtual tracks to record multiple takes

and select the best take later.

The “bit depth” (number of quantization bits) of the audio

data recorded on each track can individually be set to 16

or 24 bits for each song. 16-bit songs allow simultaneous

recording of up to 16 tracks, and simultaneous playback of

up to 24 tracks. 24-bit songs allow simultaneous recording

up to 8 tracks, and simultaneous playback of up to 12

tracks (→ p. 165).

The recording sampling frequency can also be set to either

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz (the selected sampling has no effect

on the number of simultaneous record or playback tracks).

● Trigger track function

The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys

and faders to be used to start and stop playback of

recorded tracks. This is ideal for performance situations in

which you want to switch phrases or patterns in real time,

or when you need to start background music on cue, for

example.

● Versatile editing functionality

Audio data recorded on a track can be copied, moved, or

edited using a variety of commands. You can make

detailed edits, or even make radical changes to the struc-

ture of the song by using the same riff repeatedly or

increasing the number of choruses.

“Time Compression” lets you compress or expand the

time axis of the audio data over a range of 50%–200%.

“Pitch Change” lets you modify the pitch over a range of

up or down one octave. You can use the Undo function to

undo the results of as many as the last ﬁfteen editing oper-

ations.

● A variety of Locate methods, and auto

punch-in/out

Eight locate points (start/end, relative zero, A/B, in/out,

quick locator) and 99 markers can be assigned at any

desired point in the song for quick access via Locate oper-

ations. Auto punch-in/out and A-B repeat playback func-

tions are also provided. The AW2400 also has a

metronome that follows the tempo map.

● Sound Clip function

The Sound Clip function lets you record and play back an

input signal without using the recorder tracks. You can use

this function to make quick sketches of song or arrange-

ment ideas. You can transfer recorded sound clip data to

the recorder as required.

● Vocal Editing with Pitch Fix

A Pitch Fix function is provided to allow precise adjust-

ment of the pitch of a vocal track as well as the generation

of chorus parts from a main vocal line. This feature can

also be used to change the character of a vocal sound.

■ Recorder section

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

A dedicated CD-RW drive is installed in the AW2400. You

can produce an audio CD containing the stereo mixes of

songs recorded on the hard disk. Markers assigned within

a song can also be used as the CD track numbers. You can

even use advanced techniques such as assigning more than

one track number within a single song. The CD-RW drive

can also be used to backup/restore songs, to play back

audio CDs, and to load WAV data from a CD-ROM.

The AW2400 can be directly connected to a computer via

the built-in USB interface, which enables transferring

audio ﬁles as well as MIDI messages. This allows WAV-

format audio ﬁles to be copied between the AW2400 and

computer for convenient management and processing in

computer-based applications, and “backup” song ﬁles can

be stored on the computer’s memory media.

Here’s a quick overview of terminology used with the AW2400.

A location where data is recorded is called a “track.” The

AW2400’s recorder section uses the following types of

track.

● Audio tracks

The physical tracks used to record and play back audio

data are called “audio tracks,” or simply “tracks.” The

AW2400 has 24 audio tracks. You can record 16 tracks

simultaneously, and play back 24 tracks simultaneously

(16-bit songs).

● Stereo track

The AW2400 has a “stereo track” that is independent from

audio tracks 1–24, and which records and plays a stereo

audio signal. The stereo track is used mainly as a dedi-

cated mixdown track for recording the ﬁnal mix.

● Virtual tracks

Each of the 24 audio tracks and the stereo track consists of

eight “virtual” tracks. For the audio tracks and the stereo

track, only one virtual track can be recorded or played at

any time. However, you can switch virtual tracks to con-

tinue recording other takes while preserving the previ-

ously-recorded content.

The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks.

The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1–24, and the

vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1–8. The

shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently

selected for recording or playback.

● Trigger tracks

The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys

and faders to be used to start and stop playback of

recorded tracks. When the Trigger Track function is

engaged and you press a track channel [ON] key, the cor-

responding track will playback one time from the begin-

ning of the song to the end of the recorded data.

■ CD-RW drive

■ Connecting to a Computer

AW2400 terminology

Recorder section

■ Tracks

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

21 22 23 24

Audio tracks

Stereo track

Virtual tracksVirtual tracks

Features of the AW2400 • AW2400 terminology

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

AW2400 terminology

Introducing the AW2400

Locations within a song that you speciﬁed in order to exe-

cute a function such as auto punch-in/out or A-B repeat

playback are called “locate points.” Locate points include

in/out points and the A/B points. You can use the Locate

section keys to move instantly to these points.

You can assign “markers” at desired locations within a

song independently of the locate points so that you can

ﬁnd these locations quickly. The AW2400 lets you set up

to ninety-nine markers (1–99). By using the keys Locate

section you can move instantly to the previous or next

marker.

A signal path that processes a single signal within the

mixer and sends it to various sections is called a “chan-

nel.”

The mixer section of the AW2400 provides the following

channels.

● Input channels 1–16

Input channels provide level control, EQ, and dynamics

processing for signals that are input via the [MIC/LINE

INPUT] jacks 1–8, the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connec-

tor, and/or an I/O card installed in the rear-panel slot, and

send them to the recorder tracks or to the [STEREO OUT]

jacks.

● Track channels 1–24

These channels provide level adjustment, EQ, and dynam-

ics processing for the audio playback signals from audio

tracks 1–24 of the recorder, and send the signals to the ste-

reo track and the [STEREO OUT] jacks. You can also per-

form “bounce recording” by sending these channels to

different tracks.

● Effect return channels 1–4

These channels send the signals returned from the internal

effects to the stereo track and the [STEREO OUT] jacks.

● Stereo output channel

This channel provides level adjustment, EQ, and dynamics

processing for the stereo bus signal (which carries the mix

of the other channels), and sends it to the stereo track or to

the [STEREO OUT] jacks. The same signal is also output

from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and from the

[PHONES] jack.

● Bus master channels 1/2

Provide level adjustment, EQ, and dynamics processing

for the signals from bus 1 and bus 2, and sends the signals

to the audio tracks.

● AUX send master channels 1–4

Provide ﬁnal level adjustment for the AUX buses, as well

as EQ and dynamics processing.

● Effect send master channels 1–4

Provide ﬁnal level adjustment for the effect buses, as well

as dynamics processing.

In order to efﬁciently handle numerous input channels the

AW2400 mixer section channels are organized in “mixing

layers”. The diagram shows an overview of the AW2400’s

6 mixing layers.

The channels available in each of the mixing layers are as

follows.

1 Mixing Layer IN 1-8

Input channels 1–8 and effect return channels 1–4.

B Mixing Layer IN 9-16

Input channels 9–16 and effect return channels 1–4.

C Mixing Layer MASTER

Bus master channels 1/2, AUX send master channels 1–4,

and effect send master channels 1–4.

D Mixing Layer TRACK 1-12

Track channels 1–12.

E Mixing Layer TRACK 13-24

Track channels 13–24.

F REMOTE Layer

A special layer for remote control of external MIDI

devices.

■ Locate points/markers

Mixer section

■ Channels

■ Mixing Layers

AW2400 terminology

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

Channel pan, EQ, dynamics processor and other settings

are known as “mix parameters”. All mix parameters can

be saved together as “scenes” that can be recalled when-

ever necessary. Furthermore, specialized libraries are pro-

vided for various parameter groups – EQ, effects, etc. –

that can be saved and recalled individually for each chan-

nel.

For effect return channels 1–4, stereo output channel, and

bus master channel 1–2, the parameters (except for pan)

are always linked for adjacent pairs of channels. These are

called “paired channels.”

For input channels 1–16, track channels 1–24, and AUX

send master channels 1–4, you can also assign adjacent

odd-numbered/even-numbered channels to function as

paired channels. The parameters (except for pan and

phase) of paired channels will be linked, so that adjusting

one parameter will cause the same parameter of the other

channel to be adjusted accordingly.

A signal route that mixes the signals from multiple chan-

nels and sends them to an output jack or recorder track

input is called a “bus.”

Unlike channels, which handle only a single signal, a bus

can combine multiple signals into one or two (stereo) out-

puts and send them to a destination.

The AW2400’s mixer section provides the following

buses.

● Stereo bus

This bus mixes the input signals to stereo, and sends them

via the stereo output channel to the stereo track of the

recorder or to the [STEREO OUT] jacks. Normally the

same signal output via the [STEREO OUT] jacks is also

output via the [MONITOR OUT] and [PHONES] jacks.

● AUX buses 1–4

These buses mix the signals from the track, input, and

effect return channels and send them to the speciﬁed out-

put connector. Use these when you will use an external

effect processor, or to create a mix differing from the ste-

reo channel for musicians to monitor.

● Effect buses 1–4

These buses combine the signals from the track and input

channels, and input them to built-in effects 1–4.

● Bus 1, Bus 2

These buses mix track, input, and effect return channels

and send them to the inputs of free tracks. Bus 1 and bus 2

are used for bounce (ping-pong) recording.

The smallest unit by which the AW2400 manages a com-

position is called a “song.” When you save a song on the

hard disk, all data necessary for reproducing that song will

be saved; i.e., not just the audio data, but also the mixer

settings and the automix settings. You can return to the

original state at any time by loading the saved song.

A “scene” is a stored set of settings for the mixer section

and effects. The area of memory that holds the scenes is

called “scene memory,” and 99 scenes can be stored for

each song. Scene memories are saved on the hard disk as

part of the song.

A “library” is an area of memory that stores individual set-

tings such as for EQ or dynamics. The AW2400 has sepa-

rate libraries for EQ, dynamics, effect, channel, and

mastering settings.

Recalling a scene affects all mixer section settings, while

the libraries allow only speciﬁed settings to be recalled as

required. You can also save the settings from one channel

and copy them to other channels, for example.

Each library is saved on the hard disk as part of the song.

The “tempo map” records changes in tempo and time sig-

nature that occur during the course of a song. The tempo

map is saved on the hard disk as part of the song.

Various global settings that apply to all songs are collec-

tively referred to as “system data.” System data is stored

on the hard disk independently of the individual songs.

■ Mix Parameters

■ Paired channels

■ Buses

Overall

■ Songs

■ Scenes and scene memories

■ Libraries

■ Tempo map

■ System data

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

Introducing the AW2400

This section explains the names and functions of the various items on the AW2400’s top panel,

rear panel, and front panel.

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

Top panel

Work Navigate

section (P. 21)

Analog Input section (P. 21)

Quick Navigate section

(P. 21)

Display section (P. 22)

Mixer section (P. 23)

Selected Channel

section (P. 24)

Monitor section (P. 24)

Scene/Automix/USB section (P. 24) Data entry/control

section (P. 25)

Locate/Number section (P. 25)

Layer section (P. 26)

Locate section (P. 27)

Transport section

(P. 27)

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

1 [GAIN] knobs 1–8

These adjust the sensitivity of the rear panel MIC/LINE

INPUT jacks 1–8 to input signals.

B [PEAK] Indicators

These indicators will light red if the peak signal level after

the [GAIN] knob reaches or exceeds 3-dB below clipping.

To set the optimum record level, set the [GAIN] knob so

that the indicator ﬂashes only brieﬂy on the highest peaks

that will be encountered during the recording.

C [INPUT SEL] keys 1–8

These keys select the mixer input channel that you will

operate.

1 [SONG] key

This key accesses the SONG screen, where you can save

or load songs, and perform the shut-down procedure.

B [CD] key

This key accesses the CD screen, where you can write or

play an audio CD, and backup or restore data.

C [TRACK] key

This key accesses the TRACK screen, where you can

check whether each track contains data, and switch the

virtual tracks that will be used for recording and playback.

D [EDIT] key

This key accesses the EDIT screen, where you can copy or

erase tracks.

E [MIDI] key

Accesses the MIDI screen where you can set up MIDI

synchronization, scene change, and other settings.

F [UTILITY] key

Press this key to access the UTILITY screen with settings

for the unit’s test tone oscillator, digital inputs and out-

puts, and other utility parameters.

G [PATCH] key

Accesses the PATCH screen where you can patch output

signals as required.

H [DIO] key

The [DIO] key accesses the DIO screen which includes

the clock source and I/O card settings.

1 [RECORD] key

This key accesses the RECORD screen, where you can

quickly assign the signal to be recorded to the input of

each track, and make settings for recording.

B [MONITOR] key

The MONITOR screen, accessed by this key, includes set-

tings for fader grouping, the solo function, and more.

■ Analog Input section

■ Work Navigate section

■ Quick Navigate section

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

Introducing the AW2400

1 Display

The backlit display screen provides easy visual access to

all functions and parameters.

B Stereo Meters

These 12-segment levels meters show the ﬁnal output sig-

nals levels on the stereo bus.

C [METER] key

Calls the METER screen which includes the channel, bus,

and other level meters.

D Contrast

Adjusts the brightness of the display.

E Access indicator

This indicator indicates the access status of the internal

hard disk. When the hard disk is being read or written, this

indicator will light.

F [F1]–[F4] keys

These keys operate the “tabs” shown at the bottom of the

display screen. They can access other pages in a group of

functions, or in some cases execute speciﬁc functions.

G [SHIFT] key

“Shifts” the function of the tabs at the bottom of the dis-

play to show additional functions, when applicable. “Shift

functions” can be executed by pressing the appropriate

functions key – [F1] to [F4] – while holding the [SHIFT]

key.

■ Display section

•Never turn off the power of the AW2400 when the access indi-

cator is lit. Doing so will not only damage the data on the

internal hard disk, but may also damage the hard disk itself.

When you want to turn off the power of the AW2400, you must

perform the shutdown procedure (

→

p. 38).

CAUTION

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

1 [SEL] keys 1–12

B [STEREO SEL] key

Selects the channel to be operated. The [SEL] key of the

currently selected channel will light.

C [ON] keys 1–12

D [STEREO ON] key

Turns the corresponding channel ON or OFF. The [ON]

key will be lit when the corresponding channel is ON, and

out when the channel is OFF. The [ON] keys are also used

to specify solo channels when the solo function is on.

E Faders 1–12

The faders adjust recorder track playback levels, input

channel input levels, and effect return channel input levels

according to the mixing layer currently selected via the

LAYER section.

F [STEREO] fader

Adjusts the output level of the stereo bus.

G [SOLO] key

Turns the solo function ON or OFF.

■ Mixer section

1C B D G

• When Trigger Track mode is engaged, the [ON] key can be used to

start/stop playback of the corresponding track.

HINT

• The [STEREO SEL] keys, [STEREO ON] keys, and [STEREO]

faders always operate stereo channels. These keys and faders are

not affected by the LAYER section settings.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

Introducing the AW2400

1 [VIEW] key

This key accesses the CH VIEW screen, where you can

check the level of each channel, or perform on-screen

adjustments to the faders and other mix parameters of

each channel.

B [DYN] key

Calls the DYNAMICS screen for the currently selected

channel. You can then press any of the SELECTED

CHANNEL knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corre-

sponding dynamics parameters.

C [AUX] key

Calls the AUX screen for the currently selected channel.

You can then press any of the SELECTED CHANNEL

knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corresponding AUX

parameters.

D [EFFECT] key

Calls the EFFECT screen for the currently selected chan-

nel. You can then press any of the SELECTED CHAN-

NEL knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corresponding

EFFECT parameters.

E [PAN/EQ] key

Calls the PAN/EQ screen for the currently selected chan-

nel. After pressing the [PAN/EQ] key, you can press any

of the Selected Channel knobs 1 through 4 to switch the

PAN/EQ screen pages.

F SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1–4

These knobs are used to adjust the various parameters for

the selected channel. Press any of these knobs after press-

ing the [DYN], [AUX], [EFFECT] or [PAN/EQ] key to

call the corresponding parameter screen.

G [LOW], [LO-MID], [HI-MID], and [HIGH] keys

These keys specify the EQ band to be adjusted by the

SELECTED CHANNEL knobs when the EQ screen EQ

page is showing.

1 [MONITOR] knob

This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from

the [MONITOR OUT] jacks.

B [PHONES] knob

This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from

the [PHONES] jack.

1 [SCENE] key

This key accesses the SCENE screen, where you can save

or recall scene memories.

B [AUTOMIX] key

This key accesses the AUTOMIX screen which allows

control and editing of automix operations.

C [USB] key

The [USB] keys calls up the USB screen with parameters

related to USB operation.

■ Selected Channel section

■ Monitor section

■ Scene/Automix/USB section

1 2 3

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

1 [INC] key

Increments (increases) the selected value by 1.

B [DEC] key

Decrements (decreases) the selected value by 1.

C [Cursor] keys ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys)

These keys move the cursor (the blinking frame) around

the screen to select a speciﬁc item.

D [JOG ON] key

This key is an on/off switch for the Nudge function which

uses the [DATA/JOG] dial. When this function is on, the

key will light.

E [UNDO/REDO] key

This key cancels the results of a recording or track editing

operation (Undo), or re-executes a cancelled operation

(Redo).

F [ENTER] key

Use this key to operate an on-screen button, or to execute

a speciﬁc function.

G [DATA/JOG] dial

Use this dial to change the value of a parameter. If the

[JOG ON] key is on, this dial operates the Nudge function.

1 [LOCATE] keys

These keys allow you to move directly to preset “locate”

points. These keys are also used for character and number

entry.

B [NUM.LOCK] key

This key allows you to specify a destination locate point in

measures/beats.

■ Data entry/control section

• This key will light if Undo is possible.

• If you press and hold this key, the UNDO LIST screen will appear.

Here you can turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to revert to as many as the

last ﬁfteen operations (

→

p. 64).

HINT

■ Locate/Number section

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

Introducing the AW2400

1 [IN 1-8] key

B [IN 9-16] key

C [MASTER] key

D [TRACK 1-12] key

E [TRACK 13-24] key

Select the mixing layer to be operated by the [SEL] 1–12

keys, the [ON] 1–12 keys, and faders 1–12. The mixing

layers that can be controlled when each of these keys are

engaged are as follows:

F [REMOTE] key

This key accesses the REMOTE screen, where you can

use the front panel faders and [ON] keys to control an

external MIDI device or sequencer software on your com-

puter.

■ Layer section

5D F

ABC

● [IN 1-8] key

Input channels 1–8 Effect Return channels 1–4

● [IN 9-16] key

Input channels 9–16 Effect Return channels 1–4

● [MASTER] key

Bus Master 1–2 AUX Send Master 1–4

No Control Effect Send Master 1–4

● [TRACK 1-12] key

Track channels 1–12

● [TRACK 13-24] key

Track channels 13–24

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

1 [SOUND CLIP] key

This key accesses the SOUND CLIP screen, where you

can record or play sound clips.

B MARK SEARCH [ ]/[ ] keys

These keys search for markers placed within the song.

C [MARK] key

This key places a marker at the current location of the

song.

D [AUTO PUNCH] key

This key switches the audio punch-in/out function on/off,

letting you automate recording.

E [IN]/[OUT] keys

These keys specify the points at which auto punch-in/out

recording will begin (the In point) and end (the Out point).

These keys can also be used as locate keys to move

directly to the In point or Out point.

F [SET] key

Sets the in/out or A/B points in conjunction with the [IN]/

[OUT], [A]/[B], and [LOCATE] keys. Also sets the rela-

tive zero time point when pressed simultaneously with the

RTZ [ ] key.

G [REPEAT] key

This key switches the A-B repeat function on/off, letting

you repeatedly play a speciﬁed region.

H [A]/[B] keys

These keys specify the points at which the Repeat function

will begin (point A) and end (point B). These keys can

also be used as locate keys to move directly to point A or

point B.

I [CANCEL] key

Use this key in conjunction with the [IN]/[OUT] keys, the

[A]/[B] keys or the [LOCATE] key to cancel a locater that

you registered.

1 RTZ [ ] key

This key moves directly to the absolute zero time location

or the relative zero time location. Used in conjunction

with the [SET] key, this registers the current location as

the relative zero time.

B REW [ ] key

This key rewinds the song location. Press the key repeat-

edly to alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed.

Press the STOP[■] key or PLAY[ ] key to stop rewind.

C FF [ ] key

This key fast-forwards the song location. Press the key

repeatedly to alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed.

Press the STOP[■] key or PLAY[ ] key to stop fast-for-

ward.

D STOP [■] key

This key stops playback, recording, fast-forward, or

rewind. Trigger track playback will also stop.

E PLAY [ ] key

If you press this key while the recorder is stopped, play-

back will begin. If you press this key while holding down

the REC [●] key, recording will begin. If you press this

key during fast-forward or rewind, normal-speed playback

will begin. If you press this key during recording, record-

ing will stop and playback will resume (“punch-out”).

F REC [●] key

If you hold down this key and press the PLAY [ ] key

while the recorder is stopped, recording will begin. If you

hold down this key and press the PLAY [ ] key during

playback, you will switch from playback to recording

(“punch-in”).

■ Locate section

■ Transport section

1 B C

4 E F

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

Introducing the AW2400

1 [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (XLR)

These are XLR-3-31 type balanced input jacks. Nominal input level is

from -46 dBu to +4 dBu. Connector wiring is as shown below.

B [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (TRS phone)

These are TRS phone type balanced input jacks. Nominal input level is

from -46 dBu to +4 dBu. Connector wiring is as shown below.

C [INSERT I/O] jacks 1–2

These TRS phone jacks allow external signal processing gear to be inserted

into the signal received at the [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–2. Nominal

input level is 0 dBu, and the pin assignments are as follows:

D [STEREO OUT] jacks

These are TRS phone type balanced output jacks that out-

put the signals of the stereo bus. Nominal output level is

+4 dBu.

E [MONITOR OUT] jacks

These are TRS phone type balanced output jacks that out-

put the monitor signals of the stereo bus or the solo bus.

Nominal output level is +4 dBu.

F [OMNI OUT] jacks 1–4

The unbalanced phone jacks output the signals speciﬁed in

the PATCH screen Output page. Nominal output level is 0

dBu.

G [PHONES] jack

This is a 1/4" TRS phone output jack for connecting your

headphones for monitoring. This jack always outputs the

same signal as the [MONITOR OUT] jacks.

H [POWER] switch

Switches the power ON and OFF.

I [AC IN] connector

Connect the supplied power cord to this connector.

J Ground Screw

For maximum safety the ground screw should be properly

connected to a conﬁrmed ground point. Proper grounding

will also ensure minimum hum, noise, and interference.

Rear panel

4G EF

H I KJ O P

L M N

B1C

Male XLR connector

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

1/4" TRS phone plug

Ring (cold)

Tip (hot)

Sleeve (ground)

OUT

Sleeve (ground)

1/4" TRS

phone plug

1/4" TRS

phone plug

1/4" TRS

phone plug

Tip (OUT)

Sleeve (ground)

Tip (IN)

Sleeve (ground)

To the INSERT I/O

jack of the AW2400

To the input jack of the

external processor

To the output jack of the

external processor

• When switching the power of the AW2400 ON or OFF, always fol-

low the “Turning the power on/off” procedures described on

page 38.

NOTE

• Use only the supplied power cord for this unit. The use of an

inappropriate replacement may be a ﬁre and electrical shock

hazard.

CAUTION

Parts of the AW2400 and what they do

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

K PHANTOM +48V [CH1-4] and [CH5-8] switches

Independent phantom power switches are provided for the

XLR-type [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack groups 1 through 4

(CH1-4) and 5 through 8 (CH5-8). Turn phantom power to

the appropriate jacks ON when using one or more phan-

tom-powered condenser microphones.

L [MIDI IN] connector

M [MIDI OUT/THRU] connector

These connectors allow MIDI messages to be exchanged

with external devices.

MIDI IN receives MIDI messages.

MIDI OUT/THRU can be internally switched to function

either as a MIDI OUT (which transmits MIDI messages

generated within the AW2400) or MIDI THRU (which re-

transmits messages that are received at the MIDI IN con-

nector).

N FOOT SW jack

An optional foot switch (Yamaha FC5) can be connected

here to control transport operations such as start/stop, or to

perform punch-in/out operations.

O [DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT] connectors

This RCA pin jack allows digital-audio connection to

external equipment via coaxial cable. The connector sup-

ports IEC-60958 consumer-format digital audio.

P USB connector

This connector allows the unit to be directly connected to

a USB-equipped computer via a standard USB cable

(compatible with USB 2.0). When the USB Storage mode

is selected WAV ﬁles and song ﬁles can be transferred

between the AW2400 and the computer. In the “normal”

mode the USB connection can be used for MIDI control.

The USB interface does not directly handle audio signals.

Q SLOT

An optional card can be installed here.

1 Eject switch

This switch ejects the disc tray.

B Eject hole

This hole allows you to open the disc tray manually.

C Access indicator

This indicator will light while the CD inserted in the drive

is being accessed.

• Be sure to turn the phantom power switches off when phan-

tom power is not required.

• Make sure that no equipment other than phantom-powered

microphones is connected to the XLR inputs of the input

group for which phantom power is turned on. Applying phan-

tom power to devices that are not phantom-powered can

cause damage. Balanced dynamic microphones, however,

can usually be connected without adverse effect.

•To prevent speakers damage turn power ampliﬁers (or pow-

ered speakers) off when switching phantom power on or off.

It’s also a good idea to turn all master faders and output vol-

ume controls down to minimum. The noise generated when

phantom power is switched on or off can damage system

components and may even cause hearing damage if ampli-

ﬁed to sufﬁciently high levels.

CAUTION

• The appropriate operation may not occur if you use a foot switch

other than the Yamaha FC5 (or equivalent).

NOTE

Caution when using the USB connector

You must observe the following points when connect-

ing the AW2400 to your computer via the USB con-

nector. If you fail to observe these points, your

computer or the AW2400 may stop operating (“hang

up”), causing data to be corrupted or lost. If the com-

puter or the AW2400 stops working, turn the power

off and then on again, and restart the computer.

• Before connecting the computer via the USB con-

nector, disable the power management mode (sus-

pend/sleep/standby/hibernate) on your computer.

• Connect the USB connector to the computer before

you power-on the AW2400.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the

AW2400 on/off, connecting/disconnecting the USB

cable, or turning the USB Storage mode on/off.

• Close all application programs.

• If the USB Storage mode is off, make sure that data is

not being transmitted from and to the AW2400.

• If the USB Storage mode is engaged, make sure that

no read or write operations are in progress.

• If the USB Storage mode is engaged, safely remove

the AW2400 from the Windows taskbar or drag the

AW2400 icons from the Macintosh desktop to the

trash after closing all AW2400 windows.

• Leave an interval of at least six seconds between

powering the AW2400 on and off, or between dis-

connecting and connecting the USB cable.

• The USB interface cannot be directly connected to external hard

disks or CD-R/RW drives.

• The AW2400 can be connected to either a USB 2.0 or USB 1.1

interface, but data transfer will be slower if a USB 1.1 interface is

used.

• When connecting via USB 2.0 be sure to use a cable speciﬁed for

USB 2.0 use.

• The USB MIDI driver provided on the supplied CD-ROM must be

properly installed to allow MIDI message transmission and recep-

tion.

NOTE

Front panel

■ CD-RW drive

123

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Basic operation of the AW2400

Introducing the AW2400

This section explains basic operation of the AW2400.

The display of the AW2400 shows the following informa-

tion.

1 Screen name

This is the name of the currently selected screen.

B Selected channel

This indicates the mixer channel that is selected for opera-

tion.

C Song name

The name of the currently selected song.

D Counter (left side)

This indicates the current location within the song. The

current-time display format can be selected via the SONG

screen Setting page. The choices are standard time (hours

: minutes : seconds . milliseconds) or timecode (hours :

minutes : seconds : frames . sub-frames)

E Counter (right side)

This indicates the current location within the song in mea-

sures/beats. The measures/beats are calculated according

to the tempo and time signature speciﬁed in the tempo

map for the song. The current tempo and time signature

are displayed above this value.

F Scene information

The number and name (ﬁrst eight characters) of the cur-

rently selected scene.

G Sampling Rate/Quantization Bits

The sampling rate and quantization bits (bit depth) of the

currently selected song.

H Main screen

The information displayed in this area will depend on the

key/knob that was last pressed. The following types of

object are displayed in the main screen.

● Cursor

The blinking frame within the dis-

play is called the “cursor.” When an

object in the screen is enclosed by

the cursor, that object is selected for

operation.

● Buttons

Buttons in the display are used to

switch a parameter on/off, to select

one of multiple choices, or to execute

a speciﬁc function. A button that is

currently on will be displayed in

“inverse” form (black background

with white text). A button that is cur-

rently off will be displayed in normal

form (black text against a white

background).

● Knob/parameter display area

The knob/parameter display area

within the display is used to edit the

value of the corresponding parame-

ter.

I Tabs

When a screen includes a number of pages, corresponding

tabs will appear along the bottom of the display. The tabs

are used to switch between the various pages related to the

current screen.

In some cases the tabs also become “additional function

buttons” when the [SHIFT] key is pressed. When addi-

tional functions are available an mark will appear in

the lower left corner of the display.

Basic operation of the AW2400

Viewing the display

EFG

Off

Knob

parameter

display area

Basic operation of the AW2400

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

When you want to edit an internal setting of the AW2400,

or to edit a parameter that cannot be operated by a fader or

knob on the top panel, you will need to access the desired

screen and page.

Press the key or knob for the desired

screen.

The keys and knobs of various sections listed below

have their own screens, and the corresponding screen

will be displayed when you press a key or knob.

• All keys in the Work Navigate section

• All keys in the Quick Navigate section

• The [METER] key in the Display section

• The [VIEW]/[DYN]/[AUX]/[EFFET]/[PAN/EQ] keys of

the Selected Channel section

• All knobs of the Selected Channel section

• All keys of the Scene/Automix/USB section

• The [REMOTE] key of the Layer section

• The [SOUND CLIP] key of the Locate section

Use the [F1]–[F4] keys to select different

pages within a screen.

The [F1]–[F4] keys correspond to the tabs as follows.

Here’s how to switch a button in the screen on/off.

Use the [CURSOR] keys to

move the cursor to the

desired button in the screen.

Press the [ENTER] key.

The button will be switched on/off.

If you move the cursor to a button

that executes a speciﬁc function and

then press the [ENTER] key, that

function will be executed.

Here’s how to edit the value of a knob or parameter shown

in the display.

Use the [CURSOR] keys to

move the cursor to the

desired knob or parameter

value.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial or

press the [INC]/[DEC] keys to

edit the value.

When an mark appears in the lower left corner of the

display the tabs shown along the bottom of the display can

be switched to provide additional functions.

Press the [SHIFT] key when any screen with

an mark in the lower left corner is

showing.

The additional function buttons will appear in place of

the tabs along the bottom of the display while the

[SHIFT] key is held.

While holding the [SHIFT] key press the

[F1]–[F4] button to execute the correspond-

ing function.

Accessing a screen/page

• Press a SELECTED CHANNEL knob after pressing the

SELECTED CHANNEL [DYN], [AUX], [EFFECT, or [PAN/EQ]

key to access the related display screen.

• When you switch screens, the page that was last used in that

screen will be displayed.

HINT

[F1] key [F2] key [F3] key [F4] key

•You can access the pages in sequence by repeatedly press-

ing the key referred to in step 1, above.

HINT

Switching a button on/off

Editing a value in the display

Using Additional Function Buttons

Additional Function Buttons

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Basic operation of the AW2400

Introducing the AW2400

When you create a new song or save a scene memory or

library setting, a popup window will appear allowing you

to assign a name for the song or setting.

This popup window contains the following items and

functions.

1 Text input box

This box lets you input characters, numbers, and symbols.

The character currently selected for editing is shown

inverted (white on black). When you save the data for the

ﬁrst time, the box will contain a default name. The

inverted highlight can be moved as required by using the

[DATA/JOG] dial.

B CANCEL button

If you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, you will return to the previous screen with-

out changing the name.

C OK button

If you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the scene/library will be saved or the new

song will be created.

D SHIFT LOCK button

Switches between upper or lower case characters, or the

type of symbol to be entered at the current edit position in

the text entry box.

E / buttons

Move the inverted edit position left or right.

F INS button

Inserts an under-bar space (“_”) at the inverted edit posi-

tion. All characters following the insert are moved to the

right. Pressing the [INC] key has the same effect as the

INS button.

G DEL button

Deletes the character at the inverted edit position. All

characters following the delete are moved to the left.

Pressing the [DEC] key has the same effect as the DEL

button.

H Text palette

This displays the characters, numbers, and symbols that

can be input in the text input box. To enter a new character

at the inverted edit position, move the cursor to the desired

character in the text palette and press the [ENTER] key.

The available characters and symbols are as follows:

A–Z a–z SPC(space) , . ! " # & / * + - < > : ;

I Number Palette

Selects the number to be entered in the text entry box. To

enter a number at the inverted edit position, move the cur-

sor to the desired number in the palette and press the

[ENTER] key.

By repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] key you can sequen-

tially select and enter the characters displayed for each

number button. For example, if you move the cursor to “1”

in the number palette and then repeatedly press the

[ENTER] key you will sequentially select the following

number/characters for entry: 1 → P → Q → R → S → p →

q → r → s → 1, and then the cycle repeats.

The [LOCATE] keys in the LOCATE/NUMBER section

can be used to enter characters and numbers in the same

way as the number palette. Repeatedly press the appropri-

ate [LOCATE] key (0–9) to select the required number or

character.

The numbers and characters selected by each key are as

follows:

Entering text

H I

• The inverted edit position can also be moved left or right by using

the [DATA/JOG] dial.

HINT

•To add characters to a name that has less than the maximum

number of characters, move the cursor to the INS button and

press the [ENTER] key to insert “_”, then change the name as

required.

NOTE

[LOCATE]

Key Number

Selected Number/Character

(Arrows indicate selection sequence)

11 → P → Q → R → S → p → q → r → s

22 → T → U → V → t → u → v

33 → W → X → Y → Z → w → x → y → z

44 → G → H → I → g → h → i

55 → J → K → L → j → k → l

66 → M → N → O → m → n → o

88 → A → B → C → a → b → c

99 → D → E → F → d → e → f

■ Using the [LOCATE] Keys

To Enter Characters & Numbers

Basic operation of the AW2400

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

Switching mixing layers affects the functions of [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL]

keys 1–12, and faders 1–12, allowing efﬁcient control in a variety of signal-

routing conﬁgurations. Remote control of external equipment is also possi-

ble.

Different mixing layers are selected via the keys in the LAYER section. The

key corresponding to the currently selected mixing layer will be lit.

The mixer section controls correspond to the various mixing layers as fol-

lows:

* Operation depends on settings. Refer to page 204 for details.

For example, if the LAYER section [IN 1-8] key is engaged and the [SEL] 1

key is pressed, input channel 1 will be selected. If the LAYER section

[TRACK 1-12] is then engaged and the same [SEL] 1 key is pressed, track

channel 1 will be selected.

You can use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel section to directly

operate the mix parameters (EQ, dynamics, pan, etc.) of the currently

selected channel.

Use the [SEL] keys or [STEREO SEL] key to select the

channel that you want to operate.

The currently selected channel is indicated in the upper left of the

screen. The channels correspond to each key as follows.

• [SEL] keys 1–12............ Input channels 1–16, Track channels 1–24,

Effect Return channels 1–4

• [STEREO SEL] key....... Stereo output channel

LAYER

Section Key

Fader Section

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 STEREO

[IN 1-8] Input Channels 1–8 Effect Return Channels 1–4

Stereo Output

Channel Control

[IN 9-16] Input Channels 9–16 Effect Return Channels 1–4

[MASTER]

Bus Masters

1–2

No Control AUX Send Masters 1–4 Effect Send Masters 1–4

[TRACK 1-12] Track Channels 1–12

[TRACK 13-24] Track Channels 13–24

[REMOTE] *

Switching Mixing Layers

Layer Section

• The [STEREO SEL] key, [STEREO ON] key, and [STEREO] fader always control the

stereo output channel. These controls are not affected by layer switching.

HINT

Using the Selected Channel section

Currently selected channel.

• The channels to be selected by [SEL] keys 1–12 are switched via the LAYER

section.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Basic operation of the AW2400

Introducing the AW2400

Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYN], [AUX],

[EFFECT], or [PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator light,

according to the parameters you want to control.

With the default settings the screen corresponding to the pressed key will

appear automatically. The display will not change if the UTILITY screen

Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF (→ p. 211).

The parameters that can be controlled by the SELECTED CHANNEL

knobs are as follows:

Rotate SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1–4 to adjust the cor-

responding parameters as required.

If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to

OFF, a popup window showing the corresponding parameter name and

the value will appear while the knob is being operated.

Selected Key (Lit) Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4

[DYN]

Multiple compressor parame-

ters, or the last parameter

operated, depending on the

control status.

Compressor threshold. Compressor ratio. Compressor gain.

[AUX]

Send level from channel to

AUX 1.

Send level from channel to

AUX 2.

Send level from channel to

AUX 3.

Send level from channel to

AUX 4.

[EFFECT]

Send level from channel to

EFFECT 1.

Send level from channel to

EFFECT 2.

Send level from channel to

EFFECT 3.

Send level from channel to

EFFECT 4.

[PAN/EQ] Pan Equalizer Q. Equalizer frequency. Equalizer gain.

• After selecting a channel, press the SELECTED CHANNEL [VIEW] key to call

the CH VIEW screen where you can edit the channel signal routing and all of the

channel parameters. Refer to page 105 for details on the CH VIEW screen.

HINT

• The parameter controlled by SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 when the [DYN] key

is engaged depends on the current operating status (

→

p. 153).

• If you operate SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 immediately after recalling a setup

from the compressor preset library, multiple compressor parameters will be

adjusted simultaneously, changing the overall effect of the compressor (the type

of change depends on the recalled preset library setup).

• When individual compressor parameters for a channel have been adjusted via

the DYNAMICS screen, the last parameter adjusted is assigned to SELECTED

CHANNEL knob 1 (the last-adjusted parameter is individually retained for each

channel).

NOTE

Basic operation of the AW2400

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

If you want more precise editing control over the parame-

ter selected in step 2, above, press the corresponding

SELECTED CHANNEL knob (1–4) to call up the screen

containing the related parameters.

Move the cursor in the screen to the desired parameter,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [ENTER] key to oper-

ate the parameter.

Selected Key (Lit) Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4

[DYN] DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen

[AUX] AUX1 Screen AUX2 Screen AUX3 Screen AUX4 Screen

[EFFECT] EFFECT1 Screen EFFECT2 Screen EFFECT3 Screen EFFECT4 Screen

[PAN/EQ] PAN/EQ Screen PAN/EQ Screen PAN/EQ Screen PAN/EQ Screen

• The display will not change if the SELECTED CHANNEL knob is simply rotated.

To switch screens the knobs must be pressed.

• Other gate functions can be accessed via the DYNAMICS screen, but only

pages and parameters related to compressor operation can be accessed via the

SELECTED CHANNEL knobs.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Introducing the AW2400

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Connection and Setup

Chapter 3

Connection and Setup

This chapter will describe the AW2400 setup process from connection to

instruments and other external equipment up to getting sound from a monitor

system.

The following connection diagram shows a typical AW2400 setup. Connect your microphones,

instruments, and other external gear as shown in the diagram.

Connection

I/O SLOT

[INSERT I/O] jacks

[PHONES] jack

[USB] connector

[DIGITAL STEREO

IN/OUT] connectors

[MONITOR OUT] jacks

[OMNI OUT] jacks

[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks

Rhythm machine

Microphones

Headphones

Effect processor

DAW system Monitor system

HDR

Audio interface

Synthesizer

I/O card

Effect processor

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Turning the power on/off

Connection and Setup

Follow the procedure outlined below when turning the AW2400 power ON and OFF. Failure to fol-

low this procedure can result in damage to the internal hard disk or your external monitor system.

In a system that includes the AW2400, turn the power to

each device on in the following order.

1 External devices such as audio sources and effect

processors connected to the input/output jacks of

the AW2400

B The AW2400 itself

C The monitor system connected to the AW2400’s out-

put jacks

When you turn on the AW2400 power a startup screen will

appear brieﬂy, and then the following screen will appear.

In a system that includes the AW2400, turn the power to

each device off in the following order.

1 The monitor system connected to the AW2400’s out-

put jacks

B The AW2400 itself

C External devices such as audio sources and effect

processors connected to the input/output jacks of

the AW2400

When turning the AW2400 power off, be sure to perform

the following “shut-down” procedure.

Call the SONG screen Song List page by

pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG]

key located in the upper left of the top panel

as many times as necessary.

Using the CURSOR keys located in the

upper right of the top panel, move the cur-

sor (the blinking area in the screen) to the

SHUTDOWN button.

Press the [ENTER] key located in the mid-

dle right of the top panel.

A popup window will ask you whether you want to

save the current song.

Move the cursor to the YES button if you

want to save the current song, or to the NO

button if you do not want to save it. Then

press the [ENTER] key.

When the “Now safe to turn off...” message

appears, turn off the [POWER] switch

located on the rear panel.

Turning the power on/off

■ Turning the power on

• Before you turn on the power, make sure that the power cord

is securely connected to the AW2400 and to the AC outlet. If

the power is disconnected while the AW2400 is in use, the

AW2400 or it’s internal hard disk may be damaged.

CAUTION

■ Turning the power off (shut down)

SHUTDOWN button

• If you turn off the AW2400 power without performing the

above shutdown procedure, not only will any unsaved

changes be lost, but you also risk damaging the data on

the hard disk, and damaging or drastically shortening the

lifespan of the hard disk itself as well as the internal CD-

RW drive. Please use caution.

IMPORTANT

Adjusting the input level

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Connection and Setup

Here’s the basic procedure for setting up an input channel to which a microphone or instrument

is connected via [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack 1–8, and adjusting the input level while monitoring the

signal via the stereo bus.

Turn down the [GAIN] knob for the [MIC/

LINE INPUT] jack to which your instrument/

mic is connected. Also lower the [STEREO]

fader to the – ∞ position.

Connect a microphone or instrument to the

appropriate [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack.

[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 can be used with the

following sources.

● [MIC/LINE INPUT (XLR)] jacks 1–8

These are XLR-type balanced input jacks. Use a male

XLR ↔ female XLR cable to connect your micro-

phone, direct box, or a guitar/bass preamp that has a

balanced output jack.

● [MIC/LINE INPUT (TRS phone)] jacks 1–8

These are TRS-type balanced input jacks. Use a 1/4"

TRS phone ↔ female XLR cable to connect your

microphone, direct box, or a guitar/bass preamp that

has a balanced output jack.

These connectors will also accept unbalanced output

from instruments such as synthesizers or rhythm

machines via standard mono 1/4" phone ↔ 1/4" phone

jack cables.

While playing the connected

instrument or supplying

appropriate sound to the

connected microphone,

rotate the corresponding

[GAIN] knob clockwise to

adjust the input sensitivity

so that the [PEAK] indicator

lights only occasionally.

Adjusting the input level

[MIC/LINE INPUT]

jacks 1–8 (XLR)

Balanced cable

(male XLR ↔ female XLR)

Mic

Electric

guitar/bass

Preamp or effect proces-

sor with balanced output

Direct box

• When using condenser microphones or direct boxes that

require phantom power, turn on the rear-panel [CH1-4] switch

which supplies phantom power to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–

4, and/or the [CH5-8] switch which supplies phantom power to

[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 5–8 as required.

HINT

1/4" TRS phone ↔

female XLR cable

Mic

Electric

guitar/bass

Preamp or effect proces-

sor with balanced output

Direct box

[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks

1–8 (TRS phone)

1/4" phone ↔ phone cable

Synthesizer/

rhythm machine

[MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks

1–8 (TRS phone)

• The XLR and TRS phone jacks for the same channel cannot

be used simultaneously. Connecting sources to both inputs

on the same channel at the same time can result in interfer-

ence and a severely degraded input signal.

NOTE

• The [GAIN] knobs adjust the gain (sensitivity) of the analog

input stage. In order to make recordings with the greatest

dynamic range and minimum noise, set the [GAIN] knob as

high as possible without causing clipping.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Adjusting the input level

Connection and Setup

Call the METER screen Input/RTN page by

either pressing the Display section

[METER] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [METER] key.

The input channel input levels are displayed at the top

of this screen.

Move the cursor to the POST FADER button

in the lower area of the screen and press

the [ENTER] key.

When the POST FADER button is turned on the signal

levels immediately following the fader are displayed

on the meters.

Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] so that it’s

indicator lights to switch to the IN 1-8 mix-

ing layer.

You can now use [ON] keys 1–8, [SEL] keys 1–8, and

faders 1–8 to operate input channels 1–8.

Make sure that the [ON] key for the channel

receiving the microphone or instrument

signal is engaged and its indicator is lit,

then raise the channel fader to the 0dB

position.

If you play the instrument or

play into the microphone you

should see the level meter on

the display respond accord-

ingly, but you won’t hear any

output from your monitor sys-

tem yet because the [STE-

REO] fader is still all the way

down.

While playing the connected instrument,

raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-

tion.

With the initial default settings the

input channels are patched to the

AW2400’s stereo bus. Signals sent to

the stereo bus are output via the

[STEREO OUT], [MONITOR

OUT], and [OMNI OUT] jacks after

being adjusted by the [STEREO]

fader. When the [STEREO] fader is

raised the level of the stereo bus sig-

nal will be displayed on the Display

section stereo meter. You can now

rotate the [MONITOR] or

[PHONES] knob clockwise to hear

sound from your monitor system or

headphones.

That completes the initial setup and level adjustment pro-

cedure required to begin recording on the AW2400. Levels

will have to be readjusted whenever you change the

microphone or instrument input connections or change the

output level of an instrument (level changes will often

occur when you change synth patches).

By using the [GAIN] knob to raise the level as far as pos-

sible without allowing distortion to occur, you can ensure

that the input signal is converted into digital form with the

highest possible quality before it is input to the mixer sec-

tion.

Input channel input level display

• With the initial default settings the signals from [MIC/LINE

INPUT] jacks 1–8 are assigned to the corresponding input

channels 1–8. You can change these settings as required.

Refer to “Direct recording and Mixed recording” on page 49

for details.

HINT

• If the level meter goes into the “OVER” region, check that the

corresponding input fader is set to 0dB and reduce the level of

the [GAIN] knob.

HINT

• If the stereo meter does not respond even though the input

channel level meter is showing the presence of a signal when

the [STEREO] fader is raised, check that the input channel is

patched to the stereo bus (

→

p. 105).

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Listening to the demo song

Chapter 4

Listening to the demo song

When the AW2400 is shipped from the factory, its hard disk contains a demo song. This chapter

explains how to load and play back the demo song.

Here’s how to load the demo song from the hard disk.

Press the Work Navigate section [SONG]

key.

The SONG screen will appear, where you can save or

load songs.

Call the Song List page by either pressing

the [SONG] key as many times as neces-

sary, or by pressing the [F1] key after

pressing the [SONG] key.

In this page, you can select a song on the hard disk,

and load or delete it.

1 Song list

This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard

disk. The line enclosed by the dotted frame in the cen-

ter of the list indicates the song that is selected for

operations. The highlighted line indicates the song that

is currently loaded into the AW2400. (This is called

the “current song.”)

B LOAD button

Loads the selected song.

Move the cursor to the song list, and then

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys

to select the song “The_Only_One.”

Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the

screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window like the following will appear. This

window asks you whether you want to save the current

song.

Move the cursor to either YES (save the cur-

rent song) or NO (don’t save the current

song), and press the [ENTER] key.

The song data will be loaded, and “The_Only_One”

will become the current song.

“You’re the Only One”

Loading the demo song

• Each row of the list will display the song name, data size, bit

depth (16/24 bit), and sampling rate (44.1/48 kHz).

NOTE

• If you select NO, any changes that you made to the current

song since you last saved it will be lost.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Playing the demo song

Listening to the demo song

Here’s how to play back the demo song you loaded, and adjust the monitor level.

Make sure that the AW2400’s [MONITOR]

knob, [PHONES] knob, and the volume of

your monitor system are turned down.

Press the PLAY [ ] key.

The demo song will begin playing.

To adjust the monitor level appropriately,

use the AW2400’s [MONITOR] knob,

[PHONES] knob and the volume control of

your monitor system.

To stop the song, press the STOP [■] key.

Playing the demo song

• The demo song uses the Scene function to switch the settings

of the mixer. This means that playback will occur using the

pre-speciﬁed balance — you do not need to operate the fad-

ers.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Recording to a sound clip

Chapter 5

Recording to a sound clip

The AW2400 has a Sound Clip function that lets you record and play back

independently of the recorder section. You can use a sound clip to quickly

record and play back your performances on an audio source connected to

the AW2400. This is an ideal way to capture ideas for a song or arrangement,

or to record a simple accompaniment for practicing a part.

This chapter explains how sound clips can be recorded using an instrument

or microphone connected to an input jack.

The post-fader signal of the stereo output channel can be recorded directly to a sound clip. For

playback, the signal will be sent to the stereo output channel immediately before the stereo fader

(EQ and dynamics cannot be applied to sound clip playback).

● Signal ﬂow when using a sound clip

Recording a sound clip

Metronome

Sound

clip

Stereo

output

channel

Input

channels

Stereo bus

[MIC/LINE INPUT]

jacks

Mixer section

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Recording a sound clip

Recording to a sound clip

Connect the required instrument and/or

microphone input sources and set up the

levels as described in “Connection and

Setup” on page 37.

Press the Locate section [SOUND CLIP]

key.

The SOUND CLIP screen will appear, where you can

record and play sound clips.

1 Tempo

Sets the tempo of the metronome used when recording

sound clips.

B Time signature

Shows the time signature of the metronome.

C Metronome button

Switches the metronome on/off.

D Metronome knob

Adjusts the volume of the metronome. The value

above the knob shows the current setting in dB.

E START button

Speciﬁes the current location as the start point of the

sound clip (the location at which playback will begin).

The current location is shown in minutes/seconds/mil-

liseconds to the left.

F END button

Speciﬁes the current location as the end point of the

sound clip (the location at which playback will end).

The current location is shown in minutes/seconds/mil-

liseconds to the left.

G CLIP button

Turn this button on to enable the START button (

and END button (

F) settings.

To use the metronome, move the cursor to

the metronome button and press the

[ENTER] key.

To change the tempo of the metronome,

move the cursor to the tempo value and

turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.

Hold down the Transport section REC [●]

key and press the PLAY [ ] key.

The metronome will start and the counter display will

advance. The SOUND CLIP screen counter always

starts from 0 and indicates the current time in minutes/

seconds/milliseconds. This counter is separate from

the normal song counter.

Play the part to be recorded in time with the

metronome.

Press the STOP [■] key to stop recording.

and symbols on the display indicate the start and

end point.

EFG

• The Recorder section cannot be used for recording and play-

back while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing.

NOTE

• The time signature of the metronome is determined by the

tempo map setting that was active prior to accessing the

SOUND CLIP screen. Please be aware that the setting can-

not be edited from this screen. (For details on tempo map set-

tings

→

p. 62)

NOTE

• The metronome sound will not be recorded. If necessary, you

can move the cursor to the metronome knob and turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the volume of the metronome

sound.

• The knobs/keys of the selected channel are active even while

the SOUND CLIP screen is showing. If necessary, you can

apply EQ and dynamics processing to the signal being

recorded.

HINT

• With the default AW2400 settings a maximum of 30 seconds

can be recorded to a sound clip. If you continue recording for

longer than 30 seconds, the last 30 seconds recorded will be

retained (the counter display during recording will continue to

advance).

•You can specify up to 180 seconds as the maximum length

that can be recorded in a sound clip. You are free to make this

setting before creating a new song, but this cannot be

changed once the song has been created. (

→

p. 47)

HINT

Playing a sound clip

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Recording to a sound clip

Press the PLAY [ ] key to hear the

recorded sound clip.

The sound clip will play repeatedly from the start

point to the end point. To stop playback press the

STOP [■] key. If you record again, the previous data

will be overwritten.

The Transport section keys will have the following

functions while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing.

The playback region of a sound clip can be

changed by specifying new Start and End

points as described below.

● Specifying the Start point

Stop at the location that you want to specify as the

Start point, move the cursor to the START button, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The START button will be engaged and the current

location will be registered as the Start point.

● Specifying the End point

Stop at the location that you want to specify as the End

point, move the cursor to the END button, and press

the [ENTER] key.

The END button will be engaged and the current loca-

tion will be registered as the End point.

Stop playback, move the cursor to the CLIP

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The CLIP button will be engaged, and the speciﬁed

Start point and End point will be enabled.

To exit the SOUND CLIP screen, press the

Work Navigate section (except for [PATCH]

key) or Quick Navigate section keys,

[AUTOMIX] key, [USB] key, [REMOTE] key,

or [SOUND CLIP] key.

A popup window will ask you for conﬁrmation. Move

the cursor to the OK button to exit the SOUND CLIP

screen, or to the CANCEL button to cancel, then press

the [ENTER] key.

You can return to the SOUND CLIP screen by press-

ing the [SOUND CLIP] key even after having exited

the screen, then play back the previously recorded

content or record a new performance.

Playing a sound clip

Key Function

RTZ [ ] key

Returns to the location at which you

began recording. If the CLIP button is on,

this returns to the Start point.

REW [ ] key

Rewinds the current location toward the

beginning. You will stop when you reach

the location at which you began recording

or the Start point.

FF [ ] key

Fast-forwards the current location. You will

stop when you reach the location at which

you stopped recording or the End point.

STOP [■] key

Stops playback, recording, rewind, or fast-

forward.

PLAY [ ] key

Starts playback. Pressing this key during

playback does nothing.

REC [●] key

If you hold down this key while stopped

and press the PLAY [ ] key, recording

will begin. Pressing this key during play-

back does nothing.

•You will not hear the metronome while a sound clip is playing,

but you can still monitor the signals of input channels 1–16.

HINT

• The START button, END button, and CLIP button are disabled

while the sound clip is playing.

NOTE

• The data region between the speciﬁed Start and End points

can be copied to an audio track of the Recorder section by

using the EDIT screen COPY command (

→

p. 139).

HINT

• When you record a new sound clip, the previous recorded

sound clip will be erased. Please be aware that the Undo

function cannot be used to recover a deleted sound clip. Even

if you save the song immediately prior to recording a new

sound clip, the previous sound clip will not be restored if you

recall the song data.

NOTE

• The recorded contents of the sound clip are stored individu-

ally for each song.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Recording to a sound clip

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

Chapter 6

Track recording

This chapter explains how to record the audio signal from an instrument or

microphone connected to the AW2400 to the tracks of a song.

Before you can begin recording on the AW2400 you need to create a new song.

Call the SONG screen Song List page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or

by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[SONG] key.

The currently selected song in the Song List will be

highlighted (inverted).

Move the cursor to the NEW button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you whether you want to

save the current song.

Move the cursor to YES (to save the current

song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the

current song) and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window containing the various settings for

the new song will appear.

The following settings can be made via this popup

window.

•Fs............................... The sample rate of the new

song can be set to either

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

• Recbit ........................ The bit depth of the new

song can be set to either 16

or 24 bits.

• Sound Clip Time ....... The sound clip record time

can be set to between 30–

180 seconds.

Creating a new song

• When you start up the AW2400 for the ﬁrst time, an empty song will be loaded automatically.

If you use this automatically-loaded song, the procedure described here is not necessary.

HINT

NEW button

• Songs recorded with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz cannot

be written to an audio CD.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Creating a new song

Track recording

When each parameter has been set as

required, move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

Next, a popup window will appear allowing you to

specify settings that will be carried over from the cur-

rent song.

The following items are available:

• SCENE button............Scene memories

• TEMPO button ...........Tempo map

• LIBRARY button ........EQ, dynamics, effects, and

channel libraries

For example, if you have saved effect settings in a

library for the current song and would like to use these

settings for the new song as well, you would turn on

the LIBRARY button.

Select the buttons of the items you want to

carry over from the current song, move the

cursor to the OK button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to enter a name for the song.

Enter a name for the song (for details on

name entry refer to page 32).

To create the new song, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

A new song will be created, and you will return to the

SONG screen Song List page.

If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button

(instead of the OK button) and press the [ENTER] key,

you will return to the SONG screen Song List page

without creating a new song.

•A new song cannot be given the same name as an existing

song.

• The song name can also be edited later (

→

p. 169).

NOTE

Direct recording and Mixed recording

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

Instruments and/or microphones connected to the AW2400 can be recorded to tracks in one of

the following two ways.

With this method only one input channel is assigned to each recorder track. Although

direct recording requires the same number of tracks as the number of input channels

you use, it has the advantage that you will be free to adjust the volume, pan (stereo posi-

tion), and EQ of each individual instrument after it has been recorded.

Direct recording and Mixed recording

■ Direct recording

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Mixer section

Input

channels

Stereo

output

channel

[MIC/LINE INPUT]

jacks

Recorder section

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Direct recording and Mixed recording

Track recording

With this method, you can send multiple input channels to Bus 1 or Bus 2, and assign

the mixed signal to one through four tracks. Mixed recording requires fewer tracks, but

you will need to decide on the ﬁnal volume, pan, and tone of each instrument at the time

of recording (you will not be able to adjust these parameters independently after record-

ing.)

■ Mixed recording

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Bus 1

Mixer section

Input

channels

Stereo

output

channel

Recorder section

Bus 2

[MIC/LINE INPUT]

jacks

• The way in which you assign the input signals to tracks will depend on the

method you choose.

NOTE

Direct recording and Mixed recording

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

This section describes the patching procedure to assign

instruments and/or microphones connected to [MIC/LINE

INPUT] jacks 1–8 to independent tracks for direct record-

ing.

Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi-

tion.

Referring to “Connection and Setup” on

page 37, connect your instruments and/or

microphones and set up the input levels.

Call the RECORD screen Direct page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

Input channel signals can be directly patched to the

recorder’s tracks via the RECORD screen Direct page.

When this page is called the [INPUT SEL] keys in the

upper area of the top panel will ﬂash red.

Check that “AD1–8” appears in the input

select ﬁeld on the left side of the page.

Input channels 1–8 or 9–16 can be selected as the

input source via the input select ﬁeld. When “AD1–8”

is showing the AW2400’s AD inputs ([MIC/LINE

INPUT] jacks 1–8) are selected as the input source. If

a different input source is selected move the cursor to

the input select ﬁeld and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

[INC]/[DEC] keys to select “AD1–8”.

Press the [INPUT SEL] key for the input

channel to which your instrument/micro-

phone is connected.

The corresponding [INPUT SEL] key will light red,

and the remaining [INPUT SEL] keys will go dark.

If, for example, you have selected input channel 1 as

your record source the top panel keys will appear as

follows.

The display will appear as shown here.

Press the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key

so that its indicator lights.

This selects the TRACK 1-12 mixing layer so you can

use [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL] keys 1–12, and faders 1–

12 to operate track channels 1–12. At this point faders

1–12 will move to the current level settings for track

channels 1–12.

Press the [SEL] key of the track channel on

which you want to record.

The selected input channel and track will be connected

internally. At this time, only the selected [INPUT

SEL] key and [SEL] key will be ﬂashing red. The

ﬂashing [SEL] key indicates that the corresponding

track is in record-ready mode.

If, for example, you have patched input channel 1 to

track 1 the top panel keys will appear as follows.

Assigning input signals to tracks

(Direct recording)

• See page 99 for more details on patching for direct recording.

HINT

Tracks

Input channels

Input select

lit

•You can also select an input channel by

moving the cursor to the symbol of the

desired input channel and pressing the

[ENTER] key.

HINT

•To select the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] con-

nector as the record source you will need

to assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] con-

nector to an adjacent pair of odd- and

even-numbered tracks via the DIGITAL IN

ﬁeld (1.2–15.16). See page 100 for details.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Direct recording and Mixed recording

Track recording

The display will appear as shown here.

If you want to record more than

one instrument or microphone

simultaneously, assign other

input channels to tracks in the

same way.

Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-

tion.

At this point the track channel faders are set to – ∞, so

no sound will be heard from the monitor system.

Check that the Layer section [TRACK 1-12]

key is lit, then raise the fader of the track

selected as the record destination to an

appropriate monitor level.

Normally when recording you don’t monitor the input

channel signal before it is recorded, but rather via the

track channel after it has passed through the recorder.

This lets you monitor the signal that is actually being

recorded as well as adjust the volume and tone of the

monitor signal without affecting the signal that is

being recorded.

● To Adjust Volume/Balance

Set the fader of the corresponding track channel as

required.

● To Adjust Pan

After pressing the [SEL] key of the corresponding

channel press the Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ]

key so that its indicator lights. Selected Channel knob

1 can now be used to adjust panning for the channel

currently selected via the [SEL] keys. For more details

refer to “Pan Control” on page 147.

To check the level of a signal being applied

to a record-ready track press the [METER]

key and then the [F2] key.

This calls the METER screen Track page. In this page

you can monitor the levels of the signals at the inputs

of track channels 1–24, sent from the input channels to

the recorder tracks.

Move the cursor to the PRE EQ button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The input levels of the track channels corresponding to

the record-ready tracks will be displayed. If any of the

signals reach the “OVER” level the input level setting

will need to be reduced. Refer to “Connection and

Setup” on page 37 and readjust the input levels.

Track channels

(Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit)

ﬂash

• Input channels that are patched to tracks

will be automatically disconnected from the

stereo bus and their signal will not be out-

put via the [STEREO OUT] or [MONITOR

OUT] jacks (the signals being recorded can

be monitored via the track channel being

recorded).

• When an input is disconnected from a

track, that input is automatically re-patched

to the stereo bus.

•You can also select a track by moving the

cursor to the symbol of the desired track

and pressing the [ENTER] key.

HINT

• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as

(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.

• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (

→

p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.

NOTE

•To cancel a patched connection press the

[INPUT SEL] key so that it lights red, then

press the [SEL] key of the track that is

selected as the record destination. To can-

cel all connections, move the cursor to the

SAFE button and press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

• In the direct-record mode adjusting the pan of the record

source input channel has no effect.

NOTE

Direct recording and Mixed recording

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

● Monitor signal ﬂow during recording

This completes the patch setup for direct recording.

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Mixer section

Track

channels

Stereo

output

channel

Recorder section

from the input

channels

Stereo bus

• If you switch the RECORD display page after doing the patch setup all your patch

settings will be undone and lost (a conﬁrmation popup window will appear).

Remember to stay on the same RECORD page until recording is ﬁnished.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Direct recording and Mixed recording

Track recording

Use the following procedure to set up the patching so you

can mix and record the signals from multiple instruments/

mics connected to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 to one

or more tracks.

Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi-

tion.

Referring to “Connection and Setup” on

page 37, connect your instruments and/or

microphones and set up the input levels.

Call the RECORD screen Mixed page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

Via the RECORD screen Mixed page you can patch

multiple input channels to either of the AW2400’s ste-

reo buses (Bus1 and Bus2), allowing mixed signals to

be assigned to up to four tracks.

Check that “AD1–8” appears in the input

select ﬁeld on the left side of the page. If a

different input source is selected move the

cursor to the input select ﬁeld and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

select “AD1–8”.

Press the [INPUT SEL] key for the input

channel to which your instrument/micro-

phone is connected.

The currently selected [INPUT

SEL] key will light orange, and

that input channel will be selected

for operation.

The symbol for the correspond-

ing input channel will be high-

lighted in the screen, and a line

will appear indicating that this

channel is connected to the bus.

Repeatedly press the same [INPUT SEL]

key to select the bus to which you want to

send the signal from that input channel.

Each time you press the [INPUT SEL] key the screen

will change as follows.

Use the same procedure to specify other

input channels as recording sources as

required.

Assigning input signals to tracks

(Mixed recording)

• Refer to page 102 for more details on patching for mixed record-

ing.

HINT

Tracks

Input channels

Input select

AOff

Bus 2 L/R

BBus 1 L/R

CBus 1 L

FBus 2 L

GBus 2 R

DBus 1 R

• Input channels that are patched to Bus1 or Bus2 will be auto-

matically disconnected from the stereo bus and their signal

will not be output via the [STEREO OUT] or [MONITOR OUT]

jacks (the signals being recorded can be monitored via the

track channel being recorded).

• When an input is disconnected from Bus1 or Bus2, that input

is automatically re-patched to the stereo bus.

•You can also switch to Bus1/Bus2 by moving the cursor to the

symbol of the desired input channel and pressing the

[ENTER] key.

HINT

•To select the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector as the record

source you will need to assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN]

connector to an adjacent pair of odd- and even-numbered

tracks via the DIGITAL IN ﬁeld (1.2–15.16). See page 102 for

details.

NOTE

Direct recording and Mixed recording

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

Press the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key

so that its indicator lights.

This selects the TRACK 1-12 mixing layer so you can

use [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL] keys 1–12, and faders 1–

12 to operate track channels 1–12. At this point check

that all faders are set to their minimum –

∞ positions.

Press the [SEL] key(s) for the record-desti-

nation track(s).

You can select up to four tracks for recording. Bus1 L

and Bus2 L can be assigned to odd-numbered tracks,

while Bus1 R and Bus2 R can be assigned to even-

numbered tracks. The [SEL] keys of track channels to

which buses have been assigned will ﬂash red and the

record-ready mode will be engaged.

For example, the display will change as shown when

the track channel 1 [SEL] key is pressed repeatedly.

Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-

tion.

Check that the Layer section [TRACK 1-12]

key is lit, then raise the fader of the track

selected as the record destination to an

appropriate monitor level.

The signal sent to the track via Bus1/Bus2 will be out-

put via the [STEREO OUT] and [MONITOR OUT]

jacks.

To set the level and pan for input channels

1–8 press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so

that its indicator lights.

If multiple input channels are patched to the same bus

the individual level and pan settings for each input

cannot be changed after recording. For this reason it is

necessary to set up the individual channel levels and

pan applied to Bus1/Bus2 as required before record-

ing.

● To Adjust Volume/Balance

Set the input channel 1–8 faders as required.

● To Adjust Pan

After pressing the [SEL] key of the corresponding

input channel press the Selected Channel section

[PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Selected

Channel knob 1 can now be used to adjust panning for

the channel currently selected via the [SEL] keys. For

more details refer to “Pan Control” on page 147.

To A

No Connection

B Connected to Bus2 L

A Connected to Bus1 L

• This operation can also be carried out by moving the cursor to

the mark of the record track and repeatedly pressing the

[ENTER] key.

• When paired tracks (

→

p. 58) are selected as the record desti-

nation the pan settings of the odd- and even-numbered tracks

will automatically be set to left and right, respectively, allowing

the pair to be used as a stereo track.

• When a single track is selected as the record destination the

pan of the corresponding track channel will automatically be

set to center.

•To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as

(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.

• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (

→

p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.

NOTE

• When the outputs from multiple channels are mixed and

recorded it may be necessary to adjust the input channel fad-

ers to prevent the combined signal level from getting too high.

•We recommend that you not use the [GAIN] knob to adjust

the volume balance of the input channels. This will degrade

the S/N ratio, and may cause the sound to distort.

•To hear the input channel pan settings via the monitor system

the track channels corresponding to the two record-destina-

tion tracks should be assigned as a pair.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

To monitor the signal levels sent from

Bus1/Bus2 to the record-ready tracks press

the [METER] key and then the [F3] key.

This calls the METER screen Master page, allowing

visual monitoring of the output levels from Bus1 and

Bus2.

Move the cursor to the POST FADER button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The post-fader signal levels will be displayed.

If the signal levels reach “OVER” on the meters press

the Layer section [MASTER] key so that it lights to

select the MASTER mixing layer, and use fader 1

(Bus1) and fader 2 (Bus2) to adjust the master levels

for Bus1 and Bus2 as required.

Now that the necessary preparations have been completed, let’s record on a track.

Call the TRACK screen View page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

This page can be used to conﬁrm which tracks do and

do not contain recorded data. You can also make any

required metronome settings via this page (refer to

page 62 for metronome instructions).

Press the Transport section RTZ [ ] key to

return to the beginning of the song.

Hold down the Transport section REC [●]

key and press the PLAY [ ] key to start

recording.

Recording will begin on the track set up as the record

destination. In the track view within the screen, the

vertical line that indicates the current location will

advance towards the right.

To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key.

The recorded audio data will appear in bar-graph form

in the track view.

The data entry/control section [UNDO/REDO] key

will light. This indicates that you can press the

[UNDO/REDO] key to execute the Undo function.

To hear the recording from the beginning,

press the RTZ [ ] key to return the

counter display to zero and press the PLAY

[] key.

Bus1 and Bus2 output level.

• If you switch the RECORD display page after doing the patch

setup all your patch settings will be undone and lost (a conﬁr-

mation popup window will appear). Remember to stay on the

same RECORD page until recording is ﬁnished.

NOTE

Recording on a track

Track view

• Recording will not begin if no track is in the record-ready

mode.

NOTE

Direct recording and Mixed recording • Recording on a track

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

If you want to redo the recording, press the

[UNDO/REDO] key.

The [UNDO/REDO] key will go out, and you will

return to the state prior to recording. Repeat steps 2–5.

If you are satisﬁed with the recorded con-

tent, save the song. (For details on saving,

refer to “Saving the current song”.)

Please be aware that the recorded content will be lost

if you turn off the AW2400 power before saving the

song.

When you ﬁnish recording, press the Quick

Navigate Section [RECORD] key once

again, move the cursor to the SAFE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

When the conﬁrmation popup window appears so

move the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key. The input-to-track assignments will be

cancelled. The REC [●] key will be disabled to pre-

vent accidental recording.

This section explains how to save the current song to the hard disk. If you accidentally turn off

the AW2400 power without saving the song, all recordings or operations that you performed

since last saving the song will be lost. You should make a habit of saving the song at appropriate

breaks in your work.

Call the SONG screen Song List page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or

by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[SONG] key.

Move the cursor to the SAVE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that you

want to save the current song.

To save the song, move the cursor to the

YES button and press the [ENTER] key.

If you move the cursor to the NO button (instead of the

YES button) and press the [ENTER] key, the Save

operation will be cancelled.

Saving the current song

SAVE button

• The song save operation always saves the current song,

regardless of the song that is selected in the list.

•You cannot save a song that is protected. If, for example, you

have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song, you

must disable the protect setting and then save the song. (For

details on song protection, refer to page 172)

NOTE

•A number of other operations are available in the SONG

screen List page. Refer to “Managing Your Songs” on

page 167 for details.

• In the following situations a popup window will ask whether

you want to save the current song: when you load an existing

song from the hard disk, when you create a new song, or

when you shut-down the AW2400.

•We recommend that you frequently save the song you are

working on or enable the Auto Save function (

→

p. 211) as a

safeguard against accidents such as the AW2400’s power

cable being accidentally disconnected.

HINT

Recording on a track • Saving the current song

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Pairing channels

Track recording

Adjacent odd- and even-numbered input channels (1/2–15/16), track channels (1/2–23/24), and

AUX send master channels (1/2 and 3/4) can be set as pairs. When channels are paired most of

their parameters are linked for optimum efﬁciency and easy when handling stereo signals.

Channels can be set as pairs either via the MONITOR screen or by using the panel [INPUT SEL]

or [SEL] keys.

Call the MONITOR screen Pair page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[MONITOR] key as many times as neces-

sary, or by pressing the [F1] key after

pressing the [MONITOR] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 INPUT ﬁeld

Pairs or disengages pairing for input channels 1–16.

B TRACK ﬁeld

Pairs or disengages pairing for track channels 1–24.

C AUX OUT ﬁeld

Pairs or disengages pairing for AUX send channels 1–

D MONOx2 buttons

Indicate that the adjacent channels are functioning as

independent mono channels.

E STEREO buttons

Indicate that the two channels are functioning as a ste-

reo pair.

Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button of a

channel you want to assign as a stereo pair

and press the [ENTER] key.

A pairing conﬁrmation popup window will appear.

The popup window contains the following items.

• INPUT (TRACK, AUX OUT) x → y

(x= odd number, y= even number)

.................. Copy the settings of channel x

to y, and pair them.

• INPUT (TRACK, AUX OUT) y →x

(x= odd number, y= even number)

.................. Copy the settings of channel y

to x, and pair them.

• RESET BOTH ....... Initialize both channels, and

pair them.

• CANCEL ............... Cancel pairing.

Move the cursor to the appropriate button

in the popup window and press the

[ENTER] key.

The MONOx2 button will change to a STEREO but-

ton. The following parameters are linked for paired

channels.

● Input Channels

All mix parameters other than the [GAIN] knob and

phase/pan settings.

● Track Channels

All mix parameters other than the phase/pan settings.

● AUX Send Master Channels

All mix parameters.

Pairing channels

• When channels are paired always operate only the fader of one channel. Attempting to

operate both faders at once can result in damage to the faders’ motor drive system.

NOTE

■ Pairing Channels via

the MONITOR Screen

Pairing channels

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

To disengage a pair, move the cursor to the

corresponding STEREO button and press

the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that you

want to disengage the pair.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm and disengage

the pair.

The STEREO button will change to a MONOx2 but-

ton. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button

rather than the OK button and press the [ENTER] key

the disengage-pair operation will be aborted and the

channels will remain paired.

Use the Layer section keys to select the mix

layer containing the channels you want to

pair.

While holding the [SEL] key of one channel

that you want to pair, press the [SEL] key of

the adjacent channel.

A popup window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm

the pairing.

The popup window contains the same items as the

MONITOR screen used for channel pairing.

Move the cursor to the appropriate button

in the popup window and press the

[ENTER] key.

The channels speciﬁed via the [SEL] keys will be

paired.

To disengage pairing, press the [SEL] key

of one of the paired channels while holding

the [SEL] key of the other channel.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that you

want to disengage the pair.

To disengage the pair, press the OK button.

If you decide not to disengage the pair,

move the cursor to the CANCEL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

• All channel pairs can be disengaged at once by pressing the

[F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key.

•For paired channels set the pan control to either full left or

right to achieve nominal level (i.e. the same level before and

after the pan control). For channels that are not paired nomi-

nal level is achieved with the pan control set to center.

HINT

■ Channel Pairing Using

the Panel Keys

• The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to pair input

channels 1–8.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Applying EQ To an Input Signal

Track recording

The AW2400 provides versatile 4-band equalizers on every channel that can be directly operated

via the Selected Channel section keys and knobs.

This section describes the procedure for applying EQ to input channels 1–8.

Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so that

its indicator lights, the press the [SEL] key

for the channel to which EQ is to be

applied.

Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/

EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Press

Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the

PAN/EQ screen will appear.

Press the Display section [F3] key to call

the EQ/Att. page.

The EQ settings are available via this page.

To turn the EQ on, move the cursor to the

EQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER]

key.

Press the Selected Channel section [LOW],

[LO-MID], [HI-MID] or [HIGH] key to select

the EQ band to be adjusted.

Use Selected Channel section knobs 2–4 to

adjust the EQ as required.

When the [PAN/EQ] key is lit, Selected Channel

knobs 2–4 perform the following functions: knob 2

adjusts the Q, knob 3 adjusts the center frequency, and

knob 4 adjusts the gain of the selected band.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set all bands as

required.

Applying EQ To an Input Signal

• The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to select an

input channel for equalization.

HINT

EQ ON/OFF button

•Pages can also be selected by repeatedly pressing Selected

Channel section knobs 1–4.

HINT

• In addition to the ability for ﬁne EQ control as described

above, the supplied EQ library contains preset EQ setups for

a variety of instruments that can be recalled and used or

edited as required. Refer to “Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Pro-

cessing” on page 147 for details.

HINT

Applying Compression to an Input Signal

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

The AW2400 provides dynamics processing capability on all input and track channels: compres-

sion on the track channels, and both compression and gating on the input channels. The dynam-

ics processor parameters are adjusted manually via the Selected Channel section in the same

way as the EQ parameters. A range of dynamics presets for a variety of instruments is also pro-

vided in the dynamics library.

In this section we’ll see how to recall dynamics processor preset from the library and apply com-

pression to the channel 1–8 signals.

Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so that

its indicator lights, the press the [SEL] key

for the channel to which compression is to

be applied.

Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]

key so that its indicator lights.

The DYNAMICS screen will appear.

Press the Display section [F3] key, or press

the [DYN] key as many times as necessary

until the Comp Edit page appears.

The compressor settings are available via this page.

Move the cursor to the COMP ON/OFF but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key to turn the

compressor on.

This activates the compressor for the corresponding

input channel.

Press the Display section [F4] key.

The DYNAMICS screen Comp Lib. page will appear.

Compressor library presets can be recalled via this

page. The currently selected compressor type and its

graphic response curve are shown at the top of the dis-

play.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the library setting to be

recalled.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for recall.

Each setting has a name that indicates the instrument

or application it is intended to be used for. The com-

pressor types and response curves are displayed to the

left of the list.

Applying Compression to an Input Signal

• The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to select an

input channel for compression.

HINT

• If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF, the DYNAMICS

screen will not appear automatically when the [DYN] key is

pressed. In this case press one of the Selected Channel

knobs (1–4) after pressing the [DYN] key so that its indicator

lights. For details about the AUTO DISPLAY function refer to

“AW2400 Preferences” on page 210.

NOTE

COMP ON/OFF button

•Pages can also be switched by repeatedly pressing a

Selected Channel knob.

HINT

• If necessary the individual compressor parameters can be

adjusted via this page. Refer to “Using the Compressors” on

page 152 for details.

HINT

List RECALL button

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the recall operation will

appear.

To actually recall the selected setting move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The selected setting will be recalled and the compres-

sor type and parameters will change accordingly.

Repeat steps 6–8 as necessary to select various presets

until you ﬁnd one that best suits your application.

Use Selected Channel knob 1 to change the

overall effect of the compressor.

When the knob is operated the DYNAMICS screen

Comp Edit page will appear. If Selected Channel knob

1 is operated while the [DYN] key is engaged, multi-

ple compressor parameters are adjusted simulta-

neously to change the overall effect of the compressor

(the actual change will depend on the preset selected

from the library).

This section describes a number of functions that are handy for recording.

Activating the metronome and setting the tempo and vol-

ume.

Call the TRACK screen View page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

1 Metronome button

Switches the metronome on/off.

B Metronome knob

Adjusts the metronome volume level. The current

value is shown above the knob in dB units.

Move the cursor to the metronome button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The metronome will be turned on. In this state the

metronome will sound during recording and playback.

The metronome will begin sounding when

the PLAY [ ] key is pressed to begin play-

back.

Move the cursor to the metronome knob and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the

metronome level as required.

To change the tempo or time signature, ﬁrst

press the STOP [■] key to stop the

recorder. Call the EDIT screen Tempo Map

page by either pressing the Work Navigate

section [EDIT] key as many times as neces-

sary, or by pressing the [F2] key after

pressing the [EDIT] key.

The Tempo Map page lets you create a tempo map that

speciﬁes the tempo and time signature of the song.

The tempo and time signature that you specify here

will be the basis for the measure/beat display counter,

the internal metronome, and the MTC (MIDI Time

Code) transmitted and received by the AW2400.

• If a Selected Channel knob is operated while the AUTO DIS-

PLAY function is OFF, rather than the display switching to the

Comp Edit page a popup window containing the relevant

parameters will appear. For details about the AUTO DISPLAY

function refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 210.

NOTE

Handy Recording Functions

Using the Metronome

Applying Compression to an Input Signal • Handy Recording Functions

Handy Recording Functions

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track recording

1 Tempo map events

These are the events recorded in the tempo map. When

you create a new song, a tempo map event of time sig-

nature = 4/4 and tempo = 120 will be created at the

beginning of the song (measure 1, beat 1).

Move the cursor to the TEMPO ﬁeld of the

event, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/

[DEC] keys to set the tempo value.

The tempo can be set from 30 to 250 (BPM).

If necessary, move the cursor to the METER

ﬁeld and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/

[DEC] keys to change the time signature.

The time signature can be set from 1/4 to 8/4.

Each audio track contains eight virtual tracks. After over-

dubbing a solo part, you can switch the virtual track for

that track, and record a different take while preserving the

previously-recorded content.

Call the TRACK screen Virtual TR page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

1 Virtual tracks

Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1–8. The virtual

track that is currently selected for each track is indi-

cated by a “●” symbol. Of the virtual tracks that are

currently not selected, those that have been recorded

are indicated by “ ”, and those that have not yet been

recorded are indicated as “–”.

B Tracks

Use the cursor keys to select the virtual

track number that you want to assign to the

desired track.

Press the [ENTER] key.

The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of

the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will

now be used for recording/playback.

• It is also possible to change the tempo or time signature dur-

ing a song. For details, refer to “Creating a tempo map” (

→

p. 175).

HINT

Switching virtual tracks

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Handy Recording Functions

Track recording

By using the AW2400’s Undo list, you can not only cancel

the most recent recording or editing operation, but even

backtrack through your work for as many as ﬁfteen opera-

tions.

This is convenient when, for example, after performing

several overdubs you decide that you would rather go back

to the state immediately after you had recorded the third

solo.

Press and hold the [UNDO/REDO] key.

The UNDO LIST popup window will appear.

1 Undo list

This is a list of the previous recording and editing

operations. From the left, the list shows a step number

that indicates the order in which the operations were

performed, the content of the operation, and the track/

virtual track that was affected by the recording or edit-

ing operation.

The current song is now in the state of the step that is

highlighted.

The step enclosed by a dotted frame indicates the step

to which the song will be returned by the Undo func-

tion.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select a step number.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

The current song will revert to the state of the step you

selected.

Move the cursor to the EXIT button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The popup window will close, and you will return to

the previous screen.

Using the Undo List

• If you have already cancelled recent operations using the

Undo function before displaying the Undo list, previous steps

may not remain at all.

NOTE

• Please note that if you record or edit after “undoing” back to a

certain step, the undo/redo data subsequent to that step will

be erased. For example if you “undo” the previous three

steps, and then perform a recording or editing operation, the

undo/redo data for the previous steps 1 and 2 will be erased.

• If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key while it is lit the previous

operation will be undone without opening the Undo List (the

key indicator will go out when the UNDO operation is per-

formed). Press the [UNDO/REDO] key a second time to

“redo” the undone operation.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Overdubbing

Chapter 7

Overdubbing

This chapter explains how you can record additional performances on other

tracks while you listen to the previously-recorded tracks.

“Overdubbing” is the process of recording additional performances on other tracks while you

monitor the playback of previously-recorded tracks.

The diagram below shows the signal ﬂow when you play back tracks 1–4 and overdub track 5. In

this example, the signal that is input from [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack 1 is routed through recorder

track 5 and sent to track channel 5. This signal is then sent to the stereo bus, mixed with the play-

back sound of track channels 1–4, and output from the [STEREO OUT] jacks and the [MONITOR

OUT] jacks / [PHONES] jack.

● Signal ﬂow when overdubbing

About overdubbing

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Mixer section

Input

channels

Stereo output

channel

Recorder section

Track

channels

Stereo bus

[MIC/LINE

INPUT] jacks

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Assigning the input signal to a track

Overdubbing

In order to overdub, you must ﬁrst assign the mic or instrument to a new track. The basic proce-

dure is the same as when recording the ﬁrst track.

Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi-

tion.

Connect your instrument or mic to a [MIC/

LINE INPUT] jack.

Call the RECORD screen Direct page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

Assign the input channel to which your

instrument/mic is connected to a new track,

and adjust the level.

For details on this step, refer to “Assigning input sig-

nals to tracks (Direct recording)” (→ p. 51).

The diagram below shows an example of when input

channel 1 is assigned to track 5.

Assigning the input signal to a track

• In this example we will use “direct recording,” in which one

input channel is assigned to one track. However, you may

also use “mixed recording,” in which multiple input channels

are sent to the Bus 1/2 and recorded on one through four

tracks.

HINT

Setting the mix balance and pan

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Overdubbing

Here’s how to set the volume balance and pan for the previously-recorded tracks and the tracks

that you now will be overdubbing.

While you play back the song, raise the

track channel faders for the previously-

recorded tracks to an appropriate monitor-

ing level.

Press the [SEL] key for a previously-

recorded track, and press the Selected

Channel section [PAN/EQ] key so that its

indicator lights.

Rotate the Selected Channel knob 1 to

adjust the pan.

Adjust the pan in the same way for the other track

channels.

Stop the recorder, and while producing

sound on your instrument, adjust the fader

of the recording-destination track channel

so that the monitoring level is appropriate.

The track channel for the recording-destination track

will send the input signal to the stereo bus while

recording or stopped, and will send the track playback

signal to the stereo bus during playback. This means

that in order to monitor the input signal, you must stop

the recorder.

Press the [SEL] key for the recording-desti-

nation track channel, and press the

Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ] key so

that its indicator lights.

Rotate the Selected Channel knob 1 to

adjust the pan.

In the same way as for the input channel signal, you

can also use EQ and dynamics (compressor) to process

the track channel.

By operating the track channel you’ve selected as the

recording-destination, you can adjust the panning or

tone of the monitor signal without affecting the signal

that is actually recorded.

Setting the mix balance and pan

•For example if you’ve already recorded tracks 1–4, press the

Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key to make it light, and use the

top panel faders 1–4 to control track channels 1–4.

HINT

• The position of the track channel faders will not affect the

recording level. However if you set the faders to 0 dB, the

playback volume will be the same as when you recorded the

tracks.

HINT

•For details on how to adjust the pan, EQ, and dynamics pro-

cessing, refer to “Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing” (

→

p. 147).

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Overdubbing

Now you can overdub onto the track that you selected as the recording-destination.

Call the TRACK screen View page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

This page displays all tracks side by side, making it

easy to see the relationship between tracks and the cur-

rent location within the song.

In the transport section, hold down the REC

[●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key.

Recording will begin.

While monitoring the previously-recorded

tracks, play the instrument that you want to

overdub.

To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key.

The [UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control

section will light.

To listen to the recorded performance from

the beginning, press the RTZ [ ] key to

return the counter display to zero, and

press the PLAY [ ] key.

If you are satisﬁed with the recorded perfor-

mance, save the song. (For details on sav-

ing → p. 57)

If you decide to re-do the recording, press the [UNDO/

REDO] key to cancel the recording, and repeat steps

2–6.

Overdubbing

• If you recorded from the middle of the song, you can press the

[IN] key to move to the location at which you began recording.

HINT

Punch-in/out

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Overdubbing

If you make a mistake while overdubbing, you can re-record just the region in which you made

the mistake. This process is called “punch-in/out.”

Punch-in/out can be performed either as “manual punch-in/out” in which you switch between

recording and playback manually, or as “auto punch-in/out” in which recording and playback will

switch automatically when you reach the locations you specify beforehand.

Here’s how to perform punch-in/out using the keys of the

transport section or a foot switch.

If you want to perform punch-in/out using a

foot switch, connect a separately sold foot

switch (Yamaha FC5 or equivalent) to the

rear panel FOOT SW jack.

Call the RECORD screen Direct page, and

make sure that your instrument/mic is

assigned to the track on which you want to

punch-in.

Locate to a point earlier than where you

want to punch-in.

For details on Locate operation, refer to “Move To a

Speciﬁed Location” on page 87.

You may ﬁnd it convenient to register a marker at a

location one or two measures earlier than the point at

which you want to punch-in, so you can quickly return

to that point. (For details on registering a marker →

p. 90)

Press the Transport section PLAY [ ] key.

(Alternatively, press the foot switch.)

The song will begin playing. At this time, the track

playback sound of the recording-destination track

channel will be sent to the stereo bus, so you will not

be able to monitor the input signal.

At the point where you want to begin

recording, hold down the PLAY [ ] key

and press the REC [●] key (or press the

foot switch once again), and begin playing

your instrument.

The recording-destination track will switch from play-

back to recording (“punch-in”).

At the point where you want to stop record-

ing, press the PLAY [ ] key (or press the

foot switch).

The recording-destination track will switch from

recording back to playback (“punch-out”).

To stop playback, press the STOP [■] key

(or press the foot switch).

The [UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control

section will light.

To listen to the newly-recorded content,

locate to a point just before the punch-in

point, and press the PLAY [ ] key.

If you are satisﬁed with the newly-recorded

content, save the song. (For details on sav-

ing → p. 57)

If you decide to re-do the recording, press the [UNDO/

REDO] key to cancel the recording, and repeat steps

3–7.

The following diagram shows the manual punch-in/out

procedure.

Punch-in/out

Manual punch-in/out

• If no track has been enabled for recording, the foot switch will

alternate between Play and Stop operations.

HINT

play playrecord

punch-in punch-out

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Punch-in/out

Overdubbing

Auto punch-in/out is a function that performs the punch-in

and punch-out operations automatically. In order to use

this function, you must ﬁrst specify the punch-in location

(the In point) and the punch-out location (the Out point).

Call the RECORD screen Direct page, and

make sure that your instrument/mic is

assigned to the track on which you want to

punch-in.

Locate to the point at which you want to

punch-in.

Hold down the Locate section [SET] key

and press the [IN] key.

The current location will be registered as the In point.

Locate to the point at which you want to

punch-out.

Hold down the Locate section [SET] key

and press the [OUT] key.

The current location will be registered as the Out

point.

Press the Locate section [AUTO PUNCH]

key.

The [AUTO PUNCH] key will light, and the Auto

Punch-in/out function will be enabled. You will auto-

matically locate to a point a speciﬁc distance (the “pre-

roll time”) ahead of the In point. This point is called

the “pre-roll point.”

To rehearse the auto punch-in/out, press

the PLAY [ ] key.

When you press the PLAY [ ] key while the [AUTO

PUNCH] key is lit, the following will occur.

1 The PLAY [ ] key will light, and playback will

begin from the pre-roll point.

B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the REC

[●] key will begin blinking, and the signal that you

are monitoring from the recording-destination

track channel will switch from the track playback

to the input signal (recording-source). (However,

recording will not actually occur.)

C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the

REC [●] key will go dark, and the signal that you

are monitoring from the recording-destination

track channel will return to the track playback.

D When you reach a point that is a speciﬁc distance

(the “post-roll time”) after the Out point (this point

is called the “post-roll point”), you will return to

the pre-roll point and stop.

To perform the actual auto punch-in/out,

stop the recorder, then hold down the REC

[●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key.

When you press the REC [●] key + PLAY [ ] key

while the [AUTO PUNCH] key is lit, the following

will occur.

1 Only the PLAY [ ] key will light, and playback

will begin from the pre-roll point.

B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the REC

[●] key will light, and recording will begin

(“punch-in”).

C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the

REC [●] key will go dark, recording will stop, and

you will return to playback mode (“punch-out”).

D When you reach the post-roll point, you will return

to the pre-roll point and stop. At this time, the

[UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control sec-

tion will light.

To check the newly-recorded content, press

the [AUTO PUNCH] key to make it go dark,

and then press the PLAY [ ] key.

Auto punch-in/out

• If you want to set the In and Out points more precisely, you

can use the Nudge function (

→

p. 94) which repeatedly plays

a short region before or after the current location, or use the

WAVE DISPLAY popup window (

→

p. 69) which lets you view

the contents of the track as a waveform.

• The In point and Out point will be updated each time you

record. The location at which you last started recording will be

registered as the In point, and the location at which you last

stopped recording will be registered as the Out point.

HINT

• If the auto punch-in/out region is too short or too long (less

than approximately 100 msec or greater than one hour), an

error message will appear, and you won’t be able to specify

the Out point.

•You can’t change the In/Out points if the [AUTO PUNCH] key

is lit. If you need to change the In/Out points, you must ﬁrst

defeat the Auto Punch-in/out function.

NOTE

• If you turn the Locate section [REPEAT] key on before step 7,

operations 1–4 of step 7 will be repeated up to ﬁfteen times.

(The A-B Repeat function is disabled during this time.) If you

want to stop repeating the rehearsal, press the [REPEAT] key

once again or press the STOP [■] key.

• With the initial settings of the AW2400, the pre-roll and post-

roll times are each set to four seconds. You can adjust these

values in a range of 0–20 seconds (

→

p. 210, 211).

HINT

Punch-in/out

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Overdubbing

If you are satisﬁed with the newly-recorded

content, save the song. (For the Save pro-

cedure → p. 57)

If you decide to re-do the recording, you can go back

to the best take using the Undo list after performing

several overdubs by repeating steps 6–9 (→ p. 64).

The following diagram shows the auto punch-in/out

procedure.

play playrehearsal

punch-in punch-out

locate

rehearsal

actual recording

Pre-roll

point

Post-roll

point

Auto punch-out

point

Auto punch-in

point

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Overdubbing

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown and bounce operations

Chapter 8

Mixdown and bounce operations

This chapter explains mixdown operations, in which you mix previously-

recorded tracks and record the result on the stereo track. This chapter also

explains how bouncing (ping-pong recording), in which you combine multiple

tracks into one to four tracks.

“Mixdown” is the process by which the signals recorded on the recorder tracks are mixed to ste-

reo, and recorded on the internal stereo track to complete the song. The contents of the stereo

track can be used without further processing as material to create an audio CD.

The diagram below shows the signal ﬂow during mix-

down. The playback of each track is sent to the stereo bus,

passes through the stereo output channel, and is recorded

on the stereo track. At this time you can also add the sig-

nals from input channels.

● Signal ﬂow during mixdown

About mixdown and bouncing

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Stereo

track

Internal Effects

Stereo bus

[MIC/LINE

INPUT]

jacks

Effect

return

Effect

send

Recorder section

Mixer section

Input channels

Track channels

Effect return channels

Stereo output channel

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

About mixdown and bouncing

Mixdown and bounce operations

“Bouncing” is the action of mixing the signals recorded

on multiple tracks, and recording the mixed result into one

to four vacant tracks. (This action is also called “ping-

pong recording.”) For example if you’ve recorded individ-

ual instruments of a drum set on multiple tracks, you can

bounce these tracks down to two tracks, and then switch

the bounce-source tracks to different virtual tracks so that

they will be free to record new instruments.

Bouncing differs from mixdown in the following ways.

• The destination of the track channels is Bus 1/Bus 2

rather than the stereo bus.

• The recording-destination will be a vacant audio

track (or tracks).

•You can’t add the signals of input channels.

The diagram below shows the signal ﬂow during bounc-

ing. This diagram shows an example in which the track 1–

8 signals are bounced to tracks 9–12. After bouncing, you

can switch the virtual tracks for tracks 1–8, and use these

tracks to record other instrumental performances.

● Signal ﬂow during bouncing

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Track 12

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Internal Effects

Bus 1

Bus 2

Effect return

Recorder

section

Mixer section

Effect send

Effect return channels

Track channels

Stereo output channel

Mixdown procedure

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown and bounce operations

In this procedure you will select the channels that you want to mix down (track channels, input

channels, and effect return channels), and record them to the stereo track.

Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi-

tion.

Call the RECORD screen Mixdown page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

The Mixdown page is where you can perform mix-

down operations. In this page you can select the chan-

nels that will be recorded via the stereo bus onto the

stereo track.

1 DIGITAL IN

This lets you assign an input channel to the [DIGITAL

STEREO IN] connector.

Here you can choose from the following items.

• 1.2–15.16...... The signal from the [DIGITAL STE-

REO IN] connector will be assigned

to adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered input channels 1/2–15/16.

• ---- ................. The [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connec-

tor will not be used.

B Input Select

Here you can select the input sources that will be

patched to input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can select

the following input sources.

• AD1–8 ................. The input signals from the AD

inputs ([MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks

1–8)

• SLOT1–8............. The input signals from inputs

1–8 of the digital I/O card

• SLOT9–16........... The input signals from inputs

9–16 of the digital I/O card

• ----........................ Not selected

C Stereo bus

Indicates the on/off status of the channels being sent to

the stereo bus. The numbers within the screen corre-

spond to the following channels.

• INPUT 1–16......... Input channels 1–16

• RETURN 1–4 ...... Effect Return channels 1–4

• TRACK 1–24....... Track channels 1–24

D Tracks

This is the track channel number. Move the cursor to

the number and press the [ENTER] key to switch track

muting on/off.

E LIBRARY button

Accesses the mastering library, where you can recall

EQ and dynamics settings speciﬁcally for the stereo

output channel.

F DITHER ON/OFF button

This is an on/off switch for “dithering,” which is a pro-

cess that reduces the perceived quantization noise

when you convert a digital audio signal to a lower bit

depth.

G REC button

Puts the stereo track in record-ready mode.

H SAFE button

Defeats the record-ready state of the stereo track. This

will also execute MUTE CLEAR (

I).

I MUTE CLEAR button

This clears the Mute status of all tracks.

However depending on the bit depth of the song, there

may be cases in which some tracks cannot be

unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively

starting with the last-numbered track.

Mixdown procedure

F G HI

• In order for the digital audio signal sent from an external

device to the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to be assigned

to an input channel, the clock of the external device and the

AW2400 must be synchronized (

→

p. 223).

• The DIGITAL IN setting takes priority over the setting of the

Input Select ﬁeld. If you assign DIGITAL IN to an input chan-

nel, a symbol will be displayed for the two corresponding

input numbers in the Input Select ﬁeld. This symbol indicates

that DIGITAL IN is assigned.

• If the STEREO BUS CASCADE button in the DIO screen Set-

ting page is set to ENABLE, “ST BUS” will appear as the DIG-

ITAL IN assignment, and the assignment can’t be changed.

HINT

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown procedure

Mixdown and bounce operations

Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT

SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the

channels that you want to send to the ste-

reo bus.

For example, repeatedly pressing [INPUT SEL] key 1

(or the [SEL] key of input channel 1) will make the

screen change as follows.

Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi-

tion.

While you play back the song, raise the

track channel faders to an appropriate level.

Adjust the mix parameters of each channel,

such as EQ, dynamics, and pan.

If you want to use the mastering library,

move the cursor to the LIBRARY button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The MASTERING LIBRARY popup window will

appear.

You can use the mastering library to quickly recall

dedicated settings for the stereo output channel. These

settings include EQ and dynamics processor settings

that are appropriate for application to the ﬁnal mix.

Library numbers 0–13 are read-only, and library num-

ber 0 is data to initialize the stereo output channel.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the desired library data, then

move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The mastering library settings will be recalled. Play

back your song while you try various settings to ﬁnd

the best one.

To exit the MASTERING LIBRARY popup window,

move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the

[ENTER] key.

If necessary, you can press the [STEREO

SEL] key to select the stereo output chan-

nel, and use the Selected Channel section

to make ﬁne adjustments to the EQ and

dynamics processor settings.

Operations are the same as for an input channel,

except for the fact that the EQ and dynamics processor

of the stereo output channel always operate in stereo,

and that the dynamics processor has no gate.

• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as

(mute).

• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (

→

p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.

•You can switch track muting on/off by moving the cursor to the

track channel number and pressing the [ENTER] key.

• If you’re using effects via an effect bus, the mixdown will not

include the effect sound unless you add the corresponding

effect return channel to the stereo bus. For details on using

effects, refer to “Applying Effects via Send and Return” (

→

p. 117).

NOTE

• All channels will be turned on by default. However in order to

obtain the best S/N ratio, you should turn off any channels

that you are not using.

HINT

•You can use the CH VIEW screen View page to view a list of

the mix parameters (EQ, pan, effect send etc.) of a desired

channel (

→

p. 105).

HINT

Mixdown procedure

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown and bounce operations

To check the level of the signal that is being

output to the stereo track, press the

[METER] key, then press the [F3] key.

The METER screen Master page will appear.

Move the cursor to the POST FADER button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The post-fader signal level will be displayed.

If the level meter reaches the “OVER” position, lower

the [STEREO] fader.

Press the [RECORD] key to return to the

RECORD screen Mixdown page.

Move the cursor to the REC button, and

press the [ENTER] key to turn the button

on.

The top panel [STEREO SEL] key will blink red. This

blinking indicates that the stereo track is in record-

ready mode.

Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song.

Then hold down the REC [●] key and press

the PLAY [ ] key.

The song will begin playing, and the playback will be

recorded on the stereo track.

When you reach the end of the song, move

the cursor to the SAFE button in the screen

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that you

want to cancel record-ready mode. Move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

Save the song.

If the song is not saved after it has been recorded as a

stereo track, it cannot be selected for burning to a CD.

Indicates the output level of

the stereo output channel

• Instead of using the AW2400’s internal stereo track, you can

also mixdown to an external recorder connected to the [STE-

REO OUT] jacks or [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector. In

this case, start playback on the AW2400 after you’ve put your

external recorder in record mode.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Playing back the stereo track

Mixdown and bounce operations

When you’ve ﬁnished the mixdown, you can play back the stereo track as follows.

Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

Switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button ON.

When this button is on, the stereo track output will be

sent to a point directly before the [STEREO] fader,

and can be monitored from the [STEREO OUT] jack,

the [MONITOR OUT] jack, or the [PHONE] jack. At

this time, the record-ready status of all tracks will be

cancelled.

Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song,

and press the PLAY [ ] key.

The stereo track will be played back. Use the [STE-

REO] fader to adjust the monitor level.

When you are ready to return to normal

recording/playback of the audio tracks,

switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button off.

Playing back the stereo track

ST TR MODE ON/OFF button

• If any audio tracks are in record-ready mode, a popup window

will ask you to conﬁrm that you want to defeat the record-

ready status. If you want to play back the stereo track, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

• The EQ and dynamics processor of the stereo output channel

are disabled while the stereo track is playing back.

NOTE

Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown and bounce operations

Here’s how to bounce (ping-pong) multiple tracks down to one to four tracks.

Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi-

tion.

Call the RECORD screen Bounce page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

In the Bounce page you can select the bounce-source

tracks, and then record them via bus 1 or bus 2 onto

one to four tracks.

1 PLAY TRACK

Selects the bounce-source tracks.

B Bus 1, Bus 2

The four horizontal lines indicate the Bus1 L/R and

Bus2 L/R signal route. This lets you see the on/off sta-

tus of the signals that are sent from the bounce-source

tracks, and see the selected bounce-destination

track(s).

C RETURN

Selects the bounce-source effect return channels.

D RECORD TRACK

Here you can select the bounce-destination track(s).

E PITCH FIX button

Position the cursor at this button and press [ENTER]

to engage the PITCH FIX mode. Use PITCH FIX to

correct the pitch and other properties of a vocal track

(→ p. 124).

F MUTE CLEAR button

This button clears the mute status of all tracks.

However depending on the bit depth of the song and

on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording,

there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be

unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively

starting with the last-numbered track.

G SAFE button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, all bounce-source and bounce-destina-

tion assignments will be cancelled. This will also exe-

cute the MUTE CLEAR (

F) operation.

In the PLAY TRACK area, select a bounce-

source track, move the cursor to the

symbol for that track, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the screen will

change as follows.

Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure

E F G

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button.

HINT

AOff

Bus2 L/R

BBus1 L/R

CBus1 L

FBus2 L

GBus2 R

DBus1 R

• If a track channel is selected as a bounce-source, its assign-

ment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off.

• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as

(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.

• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (

→

p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.

•To switch track muting on/off, move the cursor to a track chan-

nel number and press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure

Mixdown and bounce operations

If you want to add an effect return channel

as a bounce-source, press the [SEL] key of

that effect return channel.

In the same way as for PLAY TRACK in step 3, you

can repeatedly press the [SEL] key to select the bus to

which the signal is sent.

In the RECORD TRACK area, select a

bounce-destination track, move the cursor

to the symbol for that track, and press

the [ENTER] key.

You can select up to four bounce-destination tracks.

The odd-numbered tracks can be connected to Bus1 L

or Bus2 L, and the even-numbered tracks can be con-

nected to Bus1 R or Bus2 R. The [SEL] key will blink

red, indicates that the corresponding track is selected

as the bounce-destination.

In the same way as for the PLAY TRACK, you can

repeatedly press the [ENTER] key to select the signal

of the desired input bus.

For example if you move the cursor to the symbol

for RECORD TRACK 1 and repeatedly press the

[ENTER] key, the screen will change as follows.

Raise the [STEREO] fader and the faders of

the track channel(s) you selected as the

bounce-destination to the 0 dB position.

Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song.

Then hold down the REC [●] key and press

the PLAY [ ] key.

The song will begin playing back, and will be

recorded on the bounce-destination track(s).

While you record the song, raise the faders

of the bounce-source track channels and

effect return channels to an appropriate

level. Adjust the pan, EQ, and dynamics of

each channel as necessary.

To check the level that is being output from

Bus 1/Bus 2 to the bounce-destination

tracks, press the [METER] key and then the

[F3] key.

The METER screen Master page will appear.

Here you can check the output levels for Bus 1 and

Bus 2.

• If you are using an effect via an effect bus, the bounce opera-

tion will not include the effect sound unless you add the signal

of the corresponding effect return channel to the bounce-des-

tination bus. For details, refer to “Applying Effects via Send

and Return” (

→

p. 117).

NOTE

•To control the effect return channels, make the Layer section

[IN 1-8] key (or [IN 9-16] key) light.

HINT

C No connection

B Connected to BUS2 L

A Connected to BUS1 L

•You can also select a track by repeatedly pressing the [SEL]

key of a track channel.

• If you move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the

[ENTER] key, all connections will be cancelled.

• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as

(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.

• If an unpaired track is selected as a recording-destination, the

pan of the corresponding track channels will be set to the cen-

ter. If two paired tracks are selected, the pan of the corre-

sponding odd-numbered/even-numbered track channels will

be spread to left and right respectively.

HINT

• The bounce-destination faders and pans will not affect the

content that is recorded.

• When Auto Punch-in/out is engaged, you can monitor the

bounce source track channels during playback even when not

recording.

NOTE

Bus 1 and Bus 2 output levels

Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown and bounce operations

Move the cursor to the POST FADER but-

ton, and press the [ENTER] key.

The post-fader signal levels will be displayed.

If the level meter reaches the “OVER” position, press

the Layer section [MASTER] key to make it light (the

MASTER mixing layer is selected), and lower fader 1

(Bus 1) and fader 2 (Bus 2).

To stop bounce-recording, press the STOP

[■] key.

To hear the bounce-recorded results from

the beginning, press the RTZ [ ] key to

return the counter display to zero, and then

press the PLAY [ ] key.

When playing back the bounce-destination tracks, be

careful not to switch the RECORD screen to a page

other than the Bounce page or to defeat the bounce set-

tings.

If you do so, the connection from the bounce-source

track channels to the stereo bus will automatically be

restored. This will cause the bounce-source and

bounce-destination signals to be duplicated.

When you’ve ﬁnished the bounce opera-

tion, press the Quick Navigation section

[RECORD] key once again, move the cursor

to the SAFE button in the screen, and press

the [ENTER] key.

A popup message will ask you for conﬁrmation. Move

the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key to defeat all bounce settings.

• All of the current patch settings will be erased if you switch the

RECORD screen page after making signal assignments. (A

popup window will ask you whether you really want to erase

the assignments.) Be careful not to switch the RECORD

screen page until you’ve ﬁnished recording.

NOTE

• If desired, you can use the [UNDO/REDO] key to cancel the

bounce-recording operation (

→

p. 64), or switch the virtual

track of the bounce-destination and record another take (

→

p. 63).

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce

Mixdown and bounce operations

Here we will explain some functions that you will ﬁnd convenient when performing mixdown or

bounce operations.

Fader Grouping is a function that links the fader opera-

tions of multiple channels. For example if you’ve recorded

multiple track channels of drums or chorus, you can

assign these drum channels or chorus channels to the same

fader group so that moving any one of the faders in the

group will adjust all of the levels together.

Call the MONITOR screen Fader Grp. page

by either pressing the Quick Navigate sec-

tion [MONITOR] key as many times as nec-

essary, or by pressing the [F2] key after

pressing the [MONITOR] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 ENABLE ﬁeld

Use these buttons to switch fader groups A–D on/off.

The A–D buttons will be highlighted to indicate fader

groups that are turned on. You will also use this ﬁeld to

select the fader group that you want to operate.

B INPUT ﬁeld

C TRACK ﬁeld

These areas indicate the fader group to which each

input channel 1–16 and track channel 1–24 is

assigned. The “●” symbol indicates channels that are

assigned, and the “...” symbol indicates channels that

are not assigned.

In the ENABLE ﬁeld, move the cursor to the

button A–D of the fader group that you want

to operate.

Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT

SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the

channels that you want to assign to this

fader group.

The assignment to the fader group will alternately be

switched on or off each time you press the [INPUT

SEL] key or [SEL] key.

Repeat steps 2–3 to make assignments for

other fader groups.

To enable a fader group, move the cursor to

the A–D buttons and press the [ENTER]

key.

Buttons A–D can be turned on/off independently.

Operate a channel that is assigned to a

fader group.

The faders of all channels assigned to that fader group

will move in tandem.

Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce

Fader Group assignments

CBA

• If you want to defeat all assignments for the fader group

you’re currently operating, hold down the Display section

[SHIFT] key and press the [F1] key.

• If you want to defeat all assignments in the Fader Grp. page,

hold down the [Display section [SHIFT] key and press the [F2]

key.

HINT

•You can’t assign a single channel to more than one fader

group.

NOTE

• When operating channels that are assigned to a fader group,

you must use only one fader. If you attempt to move two or

more faders simultaneously, the motor faders will be stressed,

and possibly damaged.

NOTE

• If you want to adjust the fader value for only a speciﬁc channel

that is assigned to a fader group, operate its fader while hold-

ing down the [SEL] key or [INPUT SEL] key for that channel.

• The fader group assignments are available even when Trigger

Track mode is engaged.

• The fader group assignments in the Fader Grp. page can be

copied to the Mute Grp. page by holding down the Display

section [SHIFT] key and pressing the [F4] key.

HINT

Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown and bounce operations

Mute Grouping is a function that links the [ON] key oper-

ations of multiple channels. This lets you mute multiple

instruments by pressing a single [ON] key, or press a sin-

gle key to alternate the on/off status of multiple track

channels.

Call the MONITOR screen Mute Grp. page

by either pressing the Quick Navigate sec-

tion [MONITOR] key as many times as nec-

essary, or by pressing the [F3] key after

pressing the [MONITOR] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 ENABLE ﬁeld

Use these buttons to switch mute groups E–H on/off,

or to select the mute group that you want to operate.

The E–H buttons will be highlighted to indicate mute

groups that are turned on.

B INPUT ﬁeld

C TRACK ﬁeld

These areas indicate the mute group to which each

input channel 1–16 and track channel 1–24 is

assigned. The “●” symbol indicates channels that are

assigned, and the “...” symbol indicates channels that

are not assigned.

In the ENABLE ﬁeld, move the cursor to the

button E–H of the mute group that you want

to operate.

Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT

SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the

channels that you want to assign to this

mute group.

The assignment to the mute group will alternately be

switched on or off each time you press the [INPUT

SEL] key or [SEL] key.

Repeat steps 2–3 to make assignments for

other mute groups.

To enable a mute group, move the cursor to

the E–H buttons and press the [ENTER] key.

Buttons E–H can be turned on/off independently.

Operate a channel that is assigned to a

mute group.

The [ON] keys of all channels assigned to that mute

group will operate simultaneously.

Mute Group assignments

CBA

• If you want to defeat all assignments for the mute group you’re

currently operating, hold down the Display section [SHIFT]

key and press the [F1] key.

• If you want to defeat all assignments in the Mute Grp. page,

hold down the [Display section [SHIFT] key and press the [F2]

key.

HINT

•You can’t assign a single channel to more than one mute

group.

NOTE

• If you make mute group assignments while the [ON] keys of

the assigned channels are in a mixed state (some on, some

off), the on/off setting of each channel will alternate.

• The mute group assignments in the Mute Grp. page can be

copied to the Fader Grp. page by holding down the Display

section [SHIFT] key and pressing the [F4] key.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce

Mixdown and bounce operations

Solo is a function that lets you monitor only a speciﬁc

channel. The AW2400 provides a versatile Solo function

that lets you make Solo settings that are best for your situ-

ation.

Call the MONITOR screen Solo page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[MONITOR] key as many times as neces-

sary, or by pressing the [F4] key after

pressing the [MONITOR] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 SEL MODE ﬁeld

This selects how you will select the signal(s) to be

monitored when the Solo function is on.

B SOLO MODE ﬁeld

This selects the mode in which the Solo function will

operate.

C SOLO SAFE CHANNEL ﬁeld

Here you can select channels that will be excluded

from the Solo function if MIXDOWN SOLO mode is

selected in the SOLO MODE ﬁeld.

In the SEL MODE ﬁeld, choose the way in

which the signal(s) to be monitored will be

selected when the Solo function is on.

You can turn on one or the other of the following but-

tons.

• LAST SOLO button

If this button is on, you will be monitoring only the

single channel whose [ON] key was last pressed.

• MIX SOLO button

If this button is on, you will be monitoring all chan-

nels whose [ON] key was pressed after enabling the

Solo function.

Use the SOLO MODE ﬁeld to choose the

operating mode for the Solo function.

You can turn on one or the other of the following but-

tons.

• RECORDING SOLO button

If this button is on, the soloed signal(s) will be sent

via the dedicated Solo bus and output from the

[MONITOR OUT] jacks and [PHONES] jack. This

will not affect the signals that are being output from

the stereo bus or Bus 1/Bus 2. With this setting,

even channels that are not assigned to the stereo

bus or Bus B/bus 2, or channels whose [ON] key is

off, can be monitored from the [MONITOR OUT]

jacks or [PHONES] jack.

This setting is convenient when you want to monitor

only speciﬁc channels without affecting the

recorded content while recording tracks or during

mixdown.

• MIXDOWN SOLO button

If this button is on, only the soloed signal(s) will be

sent via the stereo bus and output from the [STE-

REO OUT] jacks, [MONITOR OUT] jacks, and

[PHONES] jack; other channels will be muted. With

this setting, you won’t be able to monitor channels

that are not assigned to the stereo bus, or channels

whose [ON] key is turned off.

This setting is convenient when you want everything

except for the speciﬁed channel(s) to be muted.

If you selected RECORDING SOLO mode in

step 3, use the SOLO MODE ﬁeld to select

the point from which the soloed signal will

be sent.

Use the following two buttons of the SOLO MODE

ﬁeld to select the send point.

• PRE FADER button

If this button is on, the pre-fader signal will be sent

to the Solo bus. In this case, the fader and pan set-

tings of each channel will be ignored, and the signal

that is output from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and

the [PHONES] jack will be monaural.

• AFTER PAN button

If this button is on, the post-fader post-pan signal

will be sent to the Solo bus. In this case, the fader

and pan setting of each channel will affect the signal

that is sent from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and the

[PHONES] jack.

Using the Solo function

CBA

• If RECORDING SOLO mode is selected, you can turn the

SOLO MODE ﬁeld’s TRIM knob to adjust the signal level sent

to the Solo bus.

HINT

Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown and bounce operations

If you selected MIXDOWN SOLO mode in

step 3, you can (if desired) select channels

that will be excluded from Solo operations.

Use the buttons in the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL ﬁeld

to specify the channels that will be excluded from Solo

operations. Move the cursor to a desired button and

press the [ENTER] key (you may select more than

one). These buttons correspond to the following chan-

nels.

• INPUT .........................Input channels 1–16

• EFFECT RETURN......Effect return channels 1–4

• TRACK........................Track channels 1–24

The channels you select here will not be muted even if

you turn on the Solo function. If you select effect

return channels 1–4 here, you’ll be able to monitor

with effects even when the Solo function is on.

To activate the Solo function, press the

Mixer section [SOLO] key.

The [SOLO] key and the [ON] key of the selectable

channels will blink.

Use the Layer section keys and [ON] keys

to select the channels that you want to

solo.

The operations that are valid while Solo is activated

will depend on the settings in the MONITOR screen

Solo page.

To defeat the Solo function, press the

[SOLO] key once again.

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Mixdown and bounce operations

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Transport/Locate Operation

Chapter 9

Transport/Locate Operation

This chapter covers transport key operation, use of the locate/marker functions, and a range of

other playback features.

The functions of the Transport section keys change according to the current state of the recorder

(playback, stopped, etc.), as listed in the chart below.

The REC [●] key has no effect if no tracks are set to the record standby mode.

The AW2400 allows you to move directly to any location in a song by numerically specifying the

desired locate point.

With the recorder stopped, press the

Locate/Number section [NUM.LOCK] key so

that its indicator lights.

A popup window will appear into which you can enter

the destination locate point.

Enter the locate point in measures/beats.

You can use either of the following two methods to

enter the locate point.

● Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys

Move the cursor to the measure or beat ﬁeld, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set as

required.

Key

Recorder Status

Playing Stopped Rewinding Fast Forwarding Recording

PLAY[ ] key — Play Play Play

Stop record and play

(Punch Out)

STOP[■] key Stop — Stop Stop Stop

REW[ ] key Rewind Rewind

Rewind speed

(8x ↔ 16x)

Rewind —

FF[ ] key Fast forward Fast forward Fast forward

Fast forward speed

(8x ↔ 16x)

—

RTZ[ ] key Return to zero and play Return to zero and stop

Return to zero and play

or stop (depending on

Play/Stop status prior to

rewind)

Return to zero and play

or stop (depending on

Play/Stop status prior to

fast forward)

—

REC[●] key

Press simultaneously

with PLAY [ ] key to

begin recording (Punch

In)

Press simultaneously

with PLAY [ ] key to

begin recording

———

The Transport Section Keys

Move To a Speciﬁed Location

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Transport/Locate Operation

● Use the [LOCATE] keys

The locate point can also be numerically entered

directly using the [LOCATE] keys 1–9. Move the cur-

sor to the measure or beat ﬁeld and use the [LOCATE]

1–9 keys to enter the locate point numerically.

The “.” key can be used to quickly move the cursor

between the beat and measure ﬁelds.

When the locate point has been speciﬁed

press the [ENTER] key.

As long as the cursor is not on the CANCEL button

pressing the [ENTER] will execute the move to the

speciﬁed location. If you move the cursor to the CAN-

CEL button and press the [ENTER] key no change in

location will occur and the popup window will close.

“Locate points” can be speciﬁed within a song in order to execute functions such as auto punch-

in/out and A-B repeat. You can use this function to “locate” (move the current location of the

song) to one of these points just by pressing a single key. On the AW2400, you can use the fol-

lowing locate points.

● In/Out points

These locate points are used to specify the region for auto

punch-in/out (→ p. 70). Normally, the beginning and end

of the recording you last performed will be automatically

set as the In point and Out point. However, you may

change these points as desired.

● A/B points

These locate points are used to specify the region for the

A-B Repeat function (→ p. 93). The A point and B point

can be set to any point in a song, either via the panel keys

or on-screen editing.

● Quick Locator points

Locate/Number section [LOCATE] keys 1–9 can be

assigned to speciﬁc locations within a song, and then you

can move directly to the assigned locations simply by

pressing the corresponding [LOCATE] keys.

● Start/end points

These locate points normally correspond to the beginning

and end of the song. When you create a new song, the

Start point will initially be set to absolute time

00:00:00.000. When you record, the end of the song will

automatically be set as the End point. If you record past

the previously-set End point, the End point will automati-

cally be adjusted to the new song end point.

If you select SECOND or TIME CODE as the counter dis-

play format, the Start point will be the origin (“zero

point”) of the time and time code that are displayed. This

means that if you change the Start point, the display will

change accordingly, depending on the counter display for-

mat.

● Relative zero point

This locate point stores the relative zero position. You will

move to this location when you press the RTZ [ ] key

in the transport section. Initially the relative zero point

will be the same as absolute time 00:00:00.000, but you

can change this if desired via the panel controls or on-

screen editing.

If you select RELATIVE as the counter display format,

the current location will be displayed with the Relative

Zero point as 0.

Using the locator

= 00:00:05:00.00

= 00:00:00:00.00

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

00:00:10:00.00

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00

–00:00:05:00.00 00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

23:59:55:00.00 00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00

00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00

TIME CODE

ABS

SECOND

TIME CODE

ABS

SECOND

Counter

display format

Counter

display format

Start point

• When you create an audio CD, the Start and End points can be

used to specify the region of the stereo track that will be written to

the audio CD (

→

p. 214).

• When the AW2400 transmits MTC to an external device, the Start

point will be the origin (“zero point”) of the time code that is gener-

ated. The Start point will also serve as the origin (measure 1 beat

1) for the measures displayed in the counter.

HINT

Move To a Specified Location • Using the locator

Using the locator

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Transport/Locate Operation

The procedure for registering the current location in one

of the locate points, and then moving to that locate point is

as follows.

Move the song to the point that you want to

You can set locate points while the song is playing or

stopped.

Hold down the [SET] key and press the key

for the desired locate point.

The locate points correspond to the following keys.

1 [IN] key ......................... In point

B [OUT] key ..................... Out point

C [A] key .......................... A point

D [B] key .......................... B point

E [LOCATE] key 1–9........ Quick Locator points

F RTZ [ ] key ............... Relative Zero point

To move to a registered locate point, press

the corresponding key while the song is

stopped or playing.

The song will move to that location.

Registered locate points are displayed in the TRACK

screen Track View page as shown below.

The characters/numbers shown on the display corre-

spond to the locate types are as follows:

AEB

• The In point and Out point will be updated automatically when

you perform a record operation.

• If you want to change the Start point or End point, use the

EDIT screen Mark Adj. page. These points cannot be set

directly via the panel controls.

NOTE

Displayed Character/

Number

Locate Type

I In point

O Out point

AA point

BB point

L1–L9 Quick Locator points

S Start point

E End point

R Relative Zero point

Locator icons

• Locate point settings are stored on the hard disk as part of

the song.

• Locate points can be adjusted as desired (

→

p. 91). Locate

points other than the Start point and End point may also be

erased (

→

p. 93).

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Using markers

Transport/Locate Operation

“Markers” are symbols that you assign to desired locations in a song so that those points can be

quickly located later. You can assign up to 99 markers in each song. Use the MARK SEARCH

[ ]/[ ] keys to ﬁnd and move to markers.

Move to the position in the song at which

you want to assign a marker.

You can assign markers while the song is playing or

stopped.

Press the [MARK] key.

The display will brieﬂy indicate “MARK POINT

SET.” This indicates that a marker has been set. A new

marker will be added each time you press the [MARK]

key. Markers are automatically numbered 1–99 start-

ing at the beginning of the song. If you register a new

marker between two existing markers, markers follow-

ing the insert will be automatically renumbered.

Press the [ ] key to locate to the previous

marker, or press the [ ] key to locate to

the next marker.

The song will move to that location.

Assigned markers will appear as numbers 1–99 in the

TRACK screen Track View page.

Using markers

• Marker settings are stored on the hard disk as part of the

song.

• Markers can be deleted (

→

p. 93) or moved (

→

p. 92) as

desired.

• If you press the [MARK] key at a location in which a marker

has already been registered, the display will indicate “CAN-

NOT SET MARK,” and a new marker will not be created.

HINT

Marker icon

• When creating an audio CD, you can use markers to divide

the stereo track into individual tracks that will be written to the

audio CD (

→

p. 214).

HINT

Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Transport/Locate Operation

Here’s how you can adjust the position of a previously-registered locate point or marker. These

operations are performed via the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [EDIT]

key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key after

pressing the [EDIT] key.

1 Locator Position ﬁeld

Shows the various locate points (Quick Locator points not

included).

B Quick Locator/Marker ﬁeld

Shows the Quick Locator or Marker points.

C LOCATOR button

D MARKER button

These buttons determine whether the Quick Locator or

Marker points appear in the Quick Locator/Marker ﬁeld.

E DELETE button (Marker display only)

Deletes the currently selected marker.

Call the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or

by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the

[EDIT] key.

The Locator Position ﬁeld is used to edit

the various locate points (not including the

Quick Locator points).

The positions for each locator are displayed in the

Locator Position ﬁeld.

1 Locate points

Shows the type of locate point and its abbreviation.

B Position

Shows the position of each locate point in time code or

the current counter display format.

C Measure/beat

Shows the position of each locate point as measures/

beats. This value is calculated based on the tempo and

time signature of the tempo map (→ p. 175).

The format in which the position is displayed will

depend on the locate point. The following table shows

the display format for each locate point.

Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker

Locate point Position Measure/Beat

REL.ZERO Time code --

START Time code Measure/beat

END Time code Measure/beat

IN Counter display format Measure/beat

OUT Counter display format Measure/beat

A Counter display format Measure/beat

B Counter display format Measure/beat

Adjusting the position of

a locate point

• If a locate point has not been registered “--” will appear in the

numerical ﬁeld.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker

Transport/Locate Operation

Move the cursor to the locate point value

that you want to adjust, and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to change the

value.

A “Change START Position?” popup window will ask

you for conﬁrmation when you attempt to change the

Start point value. Move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key, and then change the

value.

To adjust the location of a quick locator

point, move the cursor to the LOCATOR

button in the Quick Locator/Marker ﬁled

and press the [ENTER] key.

When the LOCATOR button is on, the Quick Locator/

Marker ﬁeld will list the quick locate points that have

been registered.

1 List

Lists the quick locator points that have been regis-

tered. The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame is

selected for editing.

B Quick locator points

These are the quick locator point numbers 1–9.

C Position

Shows the position of each quick locator point using

the counter display format.

D Measure/beat

Shows the position of each quick locator point in mea-

sure/beat units.

Move the cursor to the quick locator point

numbers, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

[INC]/[DEC] keys to scroll through the list

so that the dotted frame encloses the quick

locator point number that you want to edit.

Move the cursor to the value that you want

to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

[INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value.

Call the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or

by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the

[EDIT] key.

If you want to adjust the position of a

marker, move the cursor to the MARKER

button in the Quick Locator/Marker ﬁeld.

When the MARKER button is on, the Quick Locator/

Marker ﬁeld will list the markers that have been regis-

tered.

1 List

Lists the markers that have been registered. The line

that is enclosed by a dotted frame is selected for edit-

ing.

B Markers

These are the marker numbers 1–99.

C Position

Shows the position of each marker using the counter

display format.

D Measure/beat

Shows the position of each marker in measure/beat

units.

Move the cursor to the marker numbers,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to scroll through the list so that the

dotted frame encloses the marker number

that you want to edit.

Move the cursor to the value that you want

to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

[INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value.

• Changing the Start point will cause locations already

recorded in a track to move relative to the measure lines

deﬁned by the tempo map. Please keep this in mind if you are

using measure display for the metronome.

NOTE

Adjusting the position of a

marker

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Transport/Locate Operation

If necessary, you can erase a registered locate point (except for the Relative Zero, Start, and End

points) or marker.

To erase a locate point, hold down the Locate section

[CANCEL] key and press the corresponding locate key

([IN]/[OUT] key, [A]/[B] key or [LOCATE] key 1–9). The

selected locate point will be erased, and the “LOCATE

POINT ERASED” message will be displayed brieﬂy.

To erase a marker, locate to the marker that you want to

erase, and then press the [MARK] key while holding

down the Locate section [CANCEL] key. The correspond-

ing marker will be erased, and the “MARK POINT

ERASED” message of will be displayed brieﬂy.

Markers can also be erased by using the DELETE button

in the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page.

The AW2400 provides an “A-B Repeat” function that repeatedly plays the region between the A

point and B point. This is useful when you want to repeatedly play back a certain region of the

song while adjusting the mix.

tions at which you want to start and end

repeat playback.

For details on how to set the A point and B point, refer

to “Using the locator” (→ p. 88).

Press the [REPEAT] key while the transport

is stopped.

The [REPEAT] key will light and the A-B Repeat

function will be engaged. The song will automatically

locate to the A point.

Press the PLAY [ ] key to begin repeat

playback.

Playback will begin from the A point. When the B

point is reached playback will automatically begin

again from the A point.

To stop playback, press the STOP [■] key.

Playback will stop, but the A-B Repeat function will

remain active. When the A-B Repeat function is on,

pressing the PLAY [ ] key will immediately resume

repeat playback regardless of the current position.

Press the [REPEAT] key to cancel repeat

playback.

The [REPEAT] key indicator will go out and the A-B

Repeat function will be cancelled. If you cancel the A-

B Repeat function during repeat playback, normal

playback will continue from that point.

Erasing a locate point or marker

•A locate point that has been erased cannot be recovered.

NOTE

■ Erasing a locate point

■ Erasing a marker

Repeat playback of a speciﬁc region (the A-B Repeat function)

• If you set the B point earlier than the A point, the B

→

A region

will play repeatedly.

HINT

• The A and B points must be at least one second apart. If they

are closer than one second a “REPEAT POINTS TOO

CLOSE” message will appear when you press the [REPEAT]

key and repeat playback will not be possible.

NOTE

• Playback will stop automatically when the A/B region has

been repeated 99 times.

• If you press the [REPEAT] key while the song is playing,

repeat playback between the A and B points will begin auto-

matically, regardless of the current position.

HINT

• If you perform a record operation while the A-B Repeat func-

tion is engaged, the A-B Repeat function will be temporarily

disabled.

HINT

Erasing a locate point or marker • Repeat playback of a specific region (the A-B Repeat function)

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Finding a location while monitoring the sound (the Nudge function)

Transport/Locate Operation

“Nudge” is a function that repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location. By

using the Nudge function, you can ﬁnd a precise location while listening to playback. This is use-

ful when you need to specify a location precisely, such as when specifying auto punch-in/out

points, or when editing the contents of a track.

Locate to the vicinity of the point you want

to ﬁnd.

Press the [JOG ON] key while the transport

is stopped.

The [JOG ON] key will light, and the Nudge function

will be engaged. A ﬁxed region (referred to as the

“nudge time”) starting at the current location will play

repeatedly.

To move the current location forward, turn

the [DATA/JOG] dial to the right. To move

the current location backward, turn the

[DATA/JOG] dial to the left.

If time display is selected as the counter display for-

mat, you can move the current location forward or

backward in millisecond units. If time code display is

selected, you can move in sub-frame units.

To turn off the Nudge function, press the

[JOG ON] key or the transport section

STOP [■] key.

The [JOG ON] key indicator will go out, and the

Nudge function will be cancelled.

Finding a location while monitoring the sound (the Nudge function)

Current

location

Nudge time

Song

track

•You can use locate points or markers to change the location,

or register locate points or markers while using the Nudge

function.

• The nudge direction and time can be adjusted as required.

Refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 210 for details.

HINT

Finding a location while viewing the waveform

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Transport/Locate Operation

The AW2400 lets you ﬁnd a location while viewing the waveform of the sound recorded on a

track.

Locate to the vicinity of the point you want

to ﬁnd.

Call the TRACK screen Track View page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

Move the cursor to the TRACK ﬁeld, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys

to select the number of the track corre-

sponding to waveform you want to view.

Move the cursor to the WAVE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear.

This popup window displays the waveform of the

audio data recorded in the track selected in step 3 (1–

24 or ST-L/R).

1 TRACK

Indicates the currently selected track number. You can

also move the cursor to this ﬁeld and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to switch tracks.

B Counter

Displays the location of the vertical line (pointer) indi-

cating the current location in the WAVE DISPLAY

popup window. You can move the cursor to this ﬁeld

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

move the current location forward or backward.

C SCALE

By moving the cursor to this area and using the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys you can

expand or shrink the waveform display along the time

axis. The value of this ﬁeld indicates the length of time

displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window.

If you select 1SEC, the distance from the left to right

edge of the screen will correspond to one second.

Selecting SAMPLE will produce the highest magniﬁ-

cation, and each horizontal pixel will correspond to

one sample.

D AMP

By moving the cursor to this area and using the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys you can

expand or shrink the waveform display along the

amplitude axis. The value of this ﬁeld indicates the

level range of the waveform displayed in the WAVE

DISPLAY popup window. If you select 0 dB, the top

and bottom edges of the screen will correspond to the

maximum level.

E LISTEN button

If you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key the waveform in the display area of the

WAVE DISPLAY popup window will be played once.

During playback the vertical line (pointer) that indi-

cates the current location will move, and the counter

value will change accordingly.

Normal transport operation is disabled while using the

LISTEN button.

F EXIT button

Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]

key to exit the WAVE DISPLAY popup window and

return to the previous Track View page.

Finding a location while viewing the waveform

TRACK ﬁeld

WAVE button

• The WAVE DISPLAY popup window cannot be displayed

while the recorder is running.

•You can use the Mixer section [SEL] or [STEREO SEL] keys

to switch the track being viewed even after displaying the

WAVE DISPLAY popup window.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Finding a location while viewing the waveform

Transport/Locate Operation

Move the cursor to the SCALE/AMP ﬁelds

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to adjust the vertical and horizontal

scale of the waveform display as required.

To specify a location within the popup win-

dow, move the cursor to the counter and

turn the [DATA/JOG] dial.

Turning the dial to the right will move the pointer for-

ward, and turning the dial to the left will move it back-

ward. If necessary, you can use the LISTEN button to

play the waveform region shown in the WAVE DIS-

PLAY popup window, and check the location by lis-

tening.

When you have ﬁnished specifying the

location, move the cursor to the EXIT but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

You will return to the previous Track View page, and

the location that you speciﬁed in the popup window

will remain the current location. Register the location

as a locate point or marker as required.

• The locators and markers within a song can also be used to

position the pointer (

→

p. 88, 90).

• The current counter location can be saved to a locater or

marker (

→

p. 88, 90).

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Meters

Chapter 10

Meters

This section describes how the level meters can be shown on the display

screen, and how they can be used to the check levels of various signals

through the system.

Four display pages accessible via the METER screen are used to access the various level meter

displays. Press the [METER] key to call the METER screen, and then either press the [METER]

key as many times as necessary until the desired page appears, or press the function key ([F1]–

[F4]) corresponding to the desired page.

The contents of the various METER displays are as fol-

lows:

■ METER screen Input/RTN page ([F1] key)

■ METER screen Track page ([F2] key)

● Input/RTN Page

Displays the input and fader levels for input channels 1–

16 as well as effect return channels 1–4.

● Track Page

Displays the input and fader levels for track channels 1–

24.

The following items are displayed:

1 Input channel 1–16 input levels

Effect return channel 1–4 input levels

C Track channel 1–24 input levels

The level meters display the input levels for the corre-

sponding channels, while the numbers below the level

meters show the fader levels in dB.

D PRE EQ button

Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed

when this button is on.

E PRE FADER button

Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed

when this button is on.

F POST FADER button

Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed

when this button is on.

Level Meter Types

EF G

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Level Meter Types

Meters

G PEAK HOLD button

This button switches the level meter peak hold function

on/off. When this button is on, an indicator will show the

signal peaks.

■ METER screen Master page ([F3] key)

Displays the output and fader levels for BUS1 L/R, BUS2

L/R, AUX bus 1–4, effect bus 1–4, and the stereo bus.

The following items are displayed:

1 BUS1 L/R, BUS2 L/R output levels

AUX bus 1–4 output levels

C Effect bus 1–4 output levels

D Stereo bus output level

The level meters display the output levels for the corre-

sponding channels, while the numbers below the level

meters show the fader levels in dB.

E PRE EQ button

Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed

when this button is on.

F PRE FADER button

Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed

when this button is on.

G POST FADER button

Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed

when this button is on.

H PEAK HOLD button

This button switches the level meter peak hold function

on/off.

■ METER screen Output page ([F4] key)

Displays the output and fader levels for a digital I/O card

installed in the card slot, the [OMNI OUT] 1–4 outputs,

and the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] outputs.

The following items are displayed:

1 Output levels for the card installed in the

slot

[OMNI OUT] 1–4 output levels

C [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] output levels

The level meters display the output levels for the corre-

sponding channels, while the numbers below the level

meters show the fader levels in dB.

D PEAK HOLD button

This button switches the level meter peak hold function

on/off.

• The Input/RTN page and Track page PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST

FADER button settings are linked, while the Master page settings

are independent.

• The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages.

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]

key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button.

HINT

FG H

ABC

• These PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER settings are indepen-

dent from those on other pages.

• The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages.

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]

key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button.

HINT

BC D

• The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages.

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]

key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Patching and signal ﬂow

Chapter 11

Patching and signal ﬂow

This chapter explains patching and channel signal ﬂow.

To record a mic or instrument connected to the AW2400, you can use either of two recording

methods; Direct Recording or Mixed Recording. The patching method will depend on the record-

ing method you use.

With this method only one input channel is assigned to

each recorder track. Although direct recording requires the

same number of tracks as the number of input channels

you use, it has the advantage that you will be free to adjust

the volume, pan (stereo position), and EQ of each track

after it has been recorded.

With this method, you can send multiple input channels to

Bus 1 or Bus 2, and assign the mixed signal to one through

four tracks. Mixed recording requires fewer tracks, but

you will need to decide on the ﬁnal volume, pan, and tone

of each instrument at the time of recording (you will not

be able to adjust these parameters independently after

recording.)

This section explains how to patch the signals of input

channels to tracks when you’re using the Direct Recording

method.

Call the RECORD screen Direct page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 Input Select

Here you can select the inputs (input signals) that will

be patched to input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can

choose from the following inputs.

• AD 1–8 ........... Analog input signals from [MIC/LINE

INPUT] jacks 1–8

• SLOT 1–8....... Input signals from inputs 1–8 of an

I/O card installed in the slot

• SLOT 9–16..... Input signals from inputs 9–16 of an

I/O card installed in the slot

• ----................... Not selected

Input signal patching

■ Direct Recording

Input channel 1

Input channel 2

Input channel 3

Input channel 4

Input channel 15

Input channel 16

Audio track 1

Audio track 2

Audio track 3

Audio track 4

Audio track 23

Audio track 24

■ Mixed Recording

Input channel 1

Bus 1

L/R

Bus 2

L/R

Input channel 2

Input channel 3

Input channel 4

Input channel 15

Input channel 16

Audio track 1

Audio track 2

Audio track 3

Audio track 4

Audio track 23

Audio track 24

Patching for Direct Recording

GE F

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Input signal patching

Patching and signal ﬂow

100

B Input channels

This area indicates the connection state of input chan-

nels 1–16. When you move the cursor to the sym-

bol and press the [ENTER] key, the symbol will be

highlighted and the corresponding input channel will

be selected as a recording source.

C Tracks

This area indicates the connection state of tracks 1–24.

When you move the cursor to the symbol and press

the [ENTER] key, the symbol will be highlighted and

the corresponding track will be selected as a recording

destination. You can switch a track’s mute status on/off

by moving the cursor to the number that indicates the

track number and pressing the [ENTER] key.

D REMAIN

This indicates the remaining recordable time. The

remaining time will depend on the number of tracks

that are enabled for recording.

E DIGITAL IN

This assigns the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to

an input channel. Here you can select from the follow-

ing items.

• 1.2–15.16........Assign the signal of the [DIGITAL

STEREO IN] connector to a pair of

adjacent odd-numbered/even-num-

bered input channels (1/2–15/16).

• ---- ...................The [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connec-

tor will not be used.

The DIGITAL IN setting takes priority over other inputs

selected in the Input Select area. When you assign the

DIGITAL IN to an input channel, the corresponding

input number in the Input Select area will change to a

symbol. This indicates that a signal has already been

assigned to the corresponding input channel.

F DIRECT OUT

Here you can select the send position from which the

signal of an input channel or track channel is sent to

direct output.

• PRE FADER................The pre-fader signal

• POST FADER .............The post-fader signal

G MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF button

If this button is on, you can connect a set of eight input

channels and eight tracks in a single operation.

H MUTE CLEAR button

This button clears the mute status of all tracks.

However depending on the bit depth of the song and

on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording,

there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be

unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively

starting with the last-numbered track.

I SAFE button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, all input channel and track channel

assignments will be cancelled. This will also execute

the MUTE CLEAR (

H) operation.

Move the cursor to the Input Select ﬁeld,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/

[DEC] keys to select the input that will be

patched to each input channel.

For example if you want mics/instruments connected

to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 to be patched to

input channels 1–8, you would make settings as shown

below.

Move the cursor to the symbol for the

record-source input channel, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The symbol will be highlighted, and the corresponding

input channel will be selected as a recording source.

The corresponding [INPUT SEL] key (or the [SEL]

key of the corresponding input channel) will light red,

and the remaining [INPUT SEL] keys (or the [SEL]

keys of the remaining input channels) will go dark.

If the selected input channel is not yet assigned to a

track, all [SEL] keys for the track channels will blink

red, indicating that they can be selected as the record-

ing destination.

If the selected input channel has already been assigned

to a track, only the [SEL] key of the corresponding

track channel will blink red.

For example if you selected input channel 1 as the

recording source, the top panel keys will be as follows.

• If you enable cascade connection, the digital audio signal

received from the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector will be

sent directly to the stereo bus. While this state exists, the DIG-

ITAL IN ﬁeld will indicate “ST BUS,” and cannot be changed

until you disable cascade connection.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button.

HINT

Tr ack channels

(Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit)

lit

ﬂash

Input signal patching

101

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Patching and signal ﬂow

The indication in the screen will be as

follows.

Move the cursor to the symbol for the

recording-destination track, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The selected input channel and track will be internally

connected.

At this time, the connected [INPUT SEL] key (or the

input channel’s [SEL] key) and the track channel’s

[SEL] key will change to blinking red.

The blinking track channel [SEL] key indicates that

the corresponding track is in record-ready mode.

For example if input channel 1 and track 1 are con-

nected, the top panel keys will be as follows.

The indication in the screen will be as

follows.

If you want to record multiple instruments

or mics simultaneously, assign other input

channels to other tracks in the same way.

If you want to connect a set of eight input

channels and eight tracks in a single opera-

tion, turn the MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF

button on.

For example if the MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF

button is on, and you select any one of input channels

1–8 as a recording-source and any one of tracks 1–8 as

a recording-destination, the following popup window

will appear.

Move the cursor to the YES button and press the

[ENTER] key to execute the connection; input chan-

nels 1–8 will be connected to tracks 1–8. Move the

cursor to the NO button and press the [ENTER] key to

connect the selected input channel and track.

•You can also select the record-source input

channel by pressing an [INPUT SEL] key

(or the [SEL] key of an input channel).

• The [INPUT SEL] keys always control input

channels 1–8, regardless of the settings of

the Layer section

HINT

Tr ack channels

(Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit)

ﬂash

•You can also select the record-destina-

tion track by pressing a track channel’s

[SEL] key.

• The same internal connection will be

established even if you perform steps 3

and 4 in the reverse order.

• The fader will automatically be set to 0

dB for input channels that are internally

connected to a track.

• If an input channel is selected as a recording-source, its

assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off.

If you want to monitor the signal you’re recording, you’ll need

to raise the fader of the recording-destination track channel.

• EQ and dynamics settings will be set to a ﬂat state for track

channels corresponding to tracks selected as recording-desti-

nations.

HINT

• Input channels and tracks are always connected one-to-one.

• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as

(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.

• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (

→

p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.

NOTE

•To cancel a connection you established, simply repeat the

same operation you did when establishing the connection.

•To change a recording-destination (track) that you’ve already

connected, move the cursor to the recording-source and

press the [ENTER] key; then move the cursor to a different

track and press the [ENTER] key.

•To change a recording-source (input channel) that you’ve

already connected, move the cursor to the recording-destina-

tion and press the [ENTER] key; then move the cursor to a

different input channel and press the [ENTER] key.

•To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

• If a recording-source input channel and the recording-destina-

tion track are both paired, two adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered channels will be assigned to two adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered tracks.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Input signal patching

Patching and signal ﬂow

102

Similarly if you specify input channels 9–16 as the

recording-source, input channels 9–16 will be con-

nected to tracks 1–8. If you specify any one of tracks

9–16 (or 17–24) as the recording destination, the spec-

iﬁed input channels will be connected to tracks 9–16

(or 17–24).

This section explains patching when you’re using the

Mixed Recording method.

Call the RECORD screen Mixed page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

The RECORD screen Mixed page lets you send the

signals of the input channels via two stereo buses (bus

1 and bus 2) to one to four tracks you specify.

This page contains the following items.

1 Input Select

Here you can select the inputs that will be patched to

input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can choose from the

same inputs as in the RECORD screen Direct page.

B Input channels

This area indicates the connection status of input chan-

nels 1–16.

C Tracks

This area indicates the connection status of tracks 1–

24.

You can switch track muting on/off by moving the cur-

sor to the track number and pressing the [ENTER] key.

D REMAIN

This indicates the remaining recordable time.

E DIGITAL IN

Here you can assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] con-

nector to an input channel. The available choices and

operations are the same as in the RECORD screen

Direct page.

F Bus 1, Bus 2

These four lines indicate the bus 1 L/R and bus 2 L/R

signal routes. This shows the recording-source input

channels whose signals are being sent to bus 1/bus 2,

and the recording-destination tracks to which the bus

1/bus 2 signal are being sent.

G MUTE CLEAR button

This button clears the mute status of all tracks.

However depending on the bit depth of the song and

on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording,

there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be

unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively

starting with the last-numbered track.

H SAFE button

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, all input channel and track channel

assignments will be cancelled. This will also execute

the MUTE CLEAR (

G) operation.

Move the cursor to the Input Select area,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/

[DEC] keys to select an input that you want

to patch to an input channel.

Move the cursor to the symbol for the

desired recording-source input channel,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The symbol will be highlighted, and the corresponding

input channel will be connected to bus 1.

Press the [ENTER] key repeatedly at the

same cursor location as in step 3 to select

the send-destination for the signal of that

input channel.

Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the screen will

change as follows.

Patching for Mixed Recording

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button.

HINT

AOff

Bus 2 L/R

BBus 1 L/R

CBus 1 L

FBus 2 L

GBus 2 R

DBus 1 R

Input signal patching

103

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Patching and signal ﬂow

In the same way, select other input chan-

nels as recording-sources.

Move the cursor to the symbol for the

desired recording-destination track, and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm

whether you want to initialize the channel parameters.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

You can select up to four tracks as recording-destina-

tions. Bus 1L/bus 2L can be connected to odd-num-

bered tracks, and bus 1R/bus 2R can be connected to

even-numbered tracks. The [SEL] key of the con-

nected track channels will blink red, indicating that

they are in record-ready mode.

You can select the bus signal to be input by repeatedly

pressing the [ENTER] key in the same way as for the

input channels.

For example if you move the cursor to the symbol

for track 1 and repeatedly press the [ENTER] key, the

screen will change as follows.

Proceed with recording.

For details on recording, refer to “Track recording” (→

p. 47).

•You can also perform steps 3–4 by repeatedly pressing the

[INPUT SEL] key (or the input channel’s [SEL] key).

• The [INPUT SEL] keys always control input channels 1–8,

regardless of the settings of the Layer section.

• If an input channel is selected as a recording-source, its

assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off,

and it will be connected via bus 1 or bus 2 so that it can be

monitored by the track channel.

HINT

C No Connection

B Connected to Bus 2 L

A Connected to Bus 1 L

•You can also perform this operation by repeatedly pressing

the track channel’s [SEL] key.

• EQ and dynamics setting will be set to a ﬂat state for track

channels corresponding to tracks that are selected as a

record destination.

• When a single track is selected as the record destination the

pan of the corresponding track channel will automatically be

set to center. When paired tracks are selected as the record

destination the pan settings of the odd- and even-numbered

tracks will automatically be set to left and right, respectively.

•To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

• The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as

(mute), but you can still record to muted tracks.

• Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (

→

p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Output signal patching

Patching and signal ﬂow

104

The PATCH screen Output page lets you select the signals that are assigned to the AW2400’s

[OMNI OUT] jacks, [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector, and the output channels of an I/O card

installed in the I/O slot.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section

[PATCH] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 OMNI OUT ASSIGN ﬁeld

Move the cursor to ﬁelds 1–4 and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will

be assigned to each [OMNI OUT] jack. Press the

[ENTER] key to ﬁnalize your selection.

You have the following choices.

B OPTION I/O SLOT OUT ASSIGN ﬁeld

Move the cursor to ﬁelds 1–16 and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will

be assigned to each output channel of a digital I/O card

installed in the I/O slot. Press the [ENTER] key to ﬁnalize

your selection.

You have the following choices.

*1. “INS” will appear only if SLOT1–SLOT16 is selected for INSERT

EFF in the CH VIEW screen View page. If you attempt to change

“INS” to a different item in the PATCH screen Output page, a popup

message (“Used As Effect Insert!”) will appear, and you won’t be

able to execute the change. In order to change this, you will ﬁrst

have to defeat the selection for the corresponding output channel in

the CH VIEW screen View page.

C D.ST OUT ASSIGN ﬁeld

Move the cursor to this ﬁeld and use the [DATA/JOG] dial

or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will be

assigned to the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector.

Press the [ENTER] key to ﬁnalize your selection.

You have the following choices.

Output signal patching

Display Type of signal

--- No assignment

ST L/ST R Stereo output channel L/R

AUX 1–4 AUX send master 1–4

EFF 1–4 Effect send master 1–4

TR 1–24 Track channel direct outputs 1–24

Display Type of signal

--- No assignment

ST L/ST R Stereo output channel L/R

AUX 1–4 AUX send master 1–4

EFF 1–4 Effect send master 1–4

TR 1–24 Track channel direct outputs 1–24

INS

Insert send

Display Type of signal

--- No assignment

ST L&R Stereo output channel L&R

AUX 1&2, 3&4 AUX send master 1&2, 3&4

EFF 1&2, 3&4 Effect send master 1&2, 3&4

TR 1&2–23&24 Track channel direct outputs 1&2–23&24

• The signal of the stereo bus is always assigned to the [STEREO

OUT] jacks.

HINT

105

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Channel Operation

Chapter 12

Channel Operation

This chapter describes procedures for displaying and operating the parame-

ters for individual channels as well as for saving and recalling data library

settings for individual settings.

If you access the CH VIEW screen View page, you can not only see the signal ﬂow for the

selected channel, but also adjust the mix parameters within the displayed signal path.

To call this page press the Selected Channel section

[VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1]

key after pressing the [VIEW] key.

Immediately after pressing the [VIEW] key the signal

ﬂow of the currently selected channel will appear on the

display. You can select any other channel to be displayed

by using the Layer section keys to select a mixing layer,

and the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to

select individual channels.

The items included in the individual channel displays are

as follows.

Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels

■ Input channels 1–16

GE H I

■ Track channels 1–24

G H IE

■ Effect return channels 1–4

H I

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels

Channel Operation

106

1 INITIALIZE button

Initializes all parameters for the currently displayed chan-

nel.

B Channel Pair Indicator

Indicates whether the displayed channel is part of a pair or

not. You can also move the cursor to this indicator and

press the [ENTER] key to turn pairing on or off.

C PHASE button, GATE button

• PHASE button..... Switches the phase (polarity) of the

input signal. Move the cursor to this

button and press the [ENTER] key

to switch between normal (N : NOR-

MAL) and reverse (R : REVERSE)

polarity.

•GATE button (input channels only)

................. Move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key to turn the

gate for that channel on or off. Refer

to “Using the Gates” on page 151 for

details.

D ATT button, EQ button

•ATT button........... Move the cursor to this knob and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/

[DEC] keys to adjust the attenuation

as required (range: -96–+12dB).

This capability can be used to atten-

uate the pre-EQ signal level to pre-

vent clipping in the EQ stage.

• EQ button ............ Move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key to turn the

EQ for that channel on or off. Refer

to “4-band EQ” on page 149 for

details.

■ Stereo output channel

G HE

■ Bus master channels 1, 2

■ AUX send master channels 1–4

■ Effect send master channels 1–4

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]

key has the same effect as the INITIALIZE button.

HINT

Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels

107

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Channel Operation

E COMP

Move the cursor to the symbol below COMP and press

the [ENTER] key to turn the compressor for that channel

on or off or select the compressor insert point.

Press the [ENTER] key repeatedly to sequentially select

the following insert points.

Refer to “Using the Compressors” on page 152 for details.

F ON/OFF, LVL knob

• ON/OFF ..........Move the cursor to this position and

press the [ENTER] key to turn the chan-

nel on or off. This function is linked to

the channel [ON] keys.

•LVL knob........Move the cursor to this knob and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys

to adjust the channel level. This function

is linked to the channel faders.

G INSERT EFF

This parameter is used to insert an internal effect to a

speciﬁed point in the channel, or to specify an insert point

for insertion of an external effect.

If you move the cursor to the ﬁeld to the right of INSERT

EFF and press the [ENTER] key, a popup window will

appear allowing selection of an internal effect or I/O chan-

nel on an optional I/O card.

H PAN/BAL knob

Move the cursor to this knob and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to pan the channel signal to the

stereo bus or bus 1 and bus 2 (for stereo input channels

this functions as a balance control). The effect return

channel L and R signals can be adjusted individually.

These knobs are linked to the PAN/EQ screen knobs (→

p. 147).

I BUS1, BUS2, ST

Move the cursor to any of these points and press the

[ENTER] key to turn assignment of the channel signal to

the corresponding bus – bus 1, bus 2, or stereo bus – on or

off.

J REC TR

Displays the input channel to track assignment, as speci-

ﬁed in the RECORD screen Direct page.

K Level meter

The level meters display input channel, track channel and

effect return channel input levels, as well as stereo output

channel, bus master channel, AUX send master channel,

effect send master channel output levels.

L AUX, EFFECT

Move the cursor to the appropriate knob and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust send lev-

els to AUX bus 1–4 or effect bus 1–4 over a range of from

–

∞ to +10dB. You can also move the cursor to one of

these knobs and press the [ENTER] key to turn the corre-

sponding send off. Further, if you move the cursor to the

signal path above the knob and press the [ENTER] key

you can switch between pre-fader (PRE) and post-fader

(POST) send.

These functions are linked to the AUX and EFFECT

screens (→ p. 111, 115).

C After the channel fader

D Compressor off

B Before the channel fader

A Before the channel EQ

To A

•You can move the cursor to the insert point and press the [ENTER]

key to reverse the order of the COMP and an INSERT EFF.

HINT

• Since no EQ is provided on the effect send master channels, the

compressor can be inserted either pre-fader or post-fader.

NOTE

•For details on insert effect operation refer to “Inserting an Effect

Into a Channel” on page 119.

• When SLOT1–16 is selected the speciﬁed channel insert point is

assigned to the corresponding channel on an optional I/O card

installed in the AW2400. This assignment is shown in the PATCH

screen Output page OPTION I/O SLOT OUT ASSIGN ﬁeld.

•You can move the cursor to the insert point and press the [ENTER]

key to reverse the order of the COMP and an INSERT EFF.

HINT

• Signals cannot be sent to the effect buses from an effect return

channel.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Channel Library Operation

Channel Operation

108

The mix parameters for individual channels can be saved to and recalled from dedicated libraries

as required. This is particularly handy when you want to use the settings made for one channel in

one or more other channels as well. Library numbers 0–1 contain read-only data for channel ini-

tialization, while numbers 2–64 can be used save and recall your own data. The following param-

eters can be saved to the channel library.

Channel library save and recall operations are carried out

via the CH VIEW screen Library page.

To call this page press the Selected Channel section

[VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2]

key after pressing the [VIEW] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 Selected channel

Displays the selected channel.

B EQ/COMP

Displays the EQ and compressor settings for the selected

channel.

C Input/Output meter

Displays the input levels for the selected channel and adja-

cent odd-even channel pairs. When the stereo output chan-

nel is selected, however, this meter displays the L/R

output channel levels.

D Buttons

These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL, STORE,

and CLEAR functions.

E List

A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row high-

lighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected

for operation. An icon indicates read-only library set-

tings.

F SOURCE CHANNEL

Displays the source channel for the settings shown in the

library list. “GENERAL” appears for preset data.

Channel Library Operation

• Channel on/off

• Channel attenuator

• EQ on/off

• EQ parameter settings

• Dynamics processor on/off

• Dynamics processor parameter settings

•Fader position

•AUX bus 1–4 pre-fader/post-fader setting

•AUX bus 1–4 send level

• Effect bus 1–4 pre-fader/post-fader setting

• Effect bus 1–4 send level

•Pan, effect parameter, and the INSERT EFF settings displayed in the CH VIEW

screen View page are not saved to the channel library.

NOTE

Calling the Channel Library

screen

• When data cannot be recalled to the selected channel the “Recall

Channel Data Conﬂict!” error message will appear.

NOTE

Channel Library Operation

109

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Channel Operation

Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in

the libraries.

Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by

either pressing the [VIEW] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]

key after pressing the [VIEW] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the library setting to be

edited.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for editing.

Move the cursor to the RENAME button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

Enter a name for the selected library set-

ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for

details on name entry).

This conﬁrms and enters the new name.

The procedure for storing library settings is as follows.

Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by

either pressing the [VIEW] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]

key after pressing the [VIEW] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the library number to which

the settings are to be stored.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for storage.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

As required, enter a name for the selected

library setting, move the cursor to the OK

button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to

page 32 for details on name entry).

The library setting will be stored.

Changing Channel Library Names

• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.

HINT

Storing Channel Library settings

•New settings cannot be stored to read-only library settings (those

marked with an icon).

• If you select and store to a library number that contains previously-

stored data, the previous data will be overwritten.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Channel Library Operation

Channel Operation

110

The procedure for recalling stored library settings is as

follows.

Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by

either pressing the [VIEW] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]

key after pressing the [VIEW] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the library setting to be

recalled.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for recall.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the recall operation will

appear.

To actually recall the selected setting move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

ENTER] key.

The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as

follows.

Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by

either pressing the [VIEW] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]

key after pressing the [VIEW] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the library setting to be

erased.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected to be erased.

Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the clear operation will

appear.

To actually erase the selected setting move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Recalling Channel Library settings

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.

HINT

•Parameters that do not exist in the target channel will be

ignored.

• INSERT EFF settings as shown in the CH VIEW screen View

page are not included in the channel libraries and will not

change.

• When the target channel is a stereo channel or a channel

pair, all parameters except phase and pan will be set to the

same values (phase and pan will not change).

• When data cannot be recalled to the selected channel the

“Recall Channel Data Conﬂict!” error message will appear.

HINT

Erasing Channel Library settings

• Read-only library settings (those marked with an icon) cannot

be erased.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.

HINT

111

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

AUX

Chapter 13

AUX

This chapter describes operation of the AW2400 AUX buses.

The AW2400 has 4 auxiliary buses that can be assigned to the [OMNI OUT] jacks, the [DIGITAL

STEREO OUT] connectors, or the outputs of an optional I/O card installed in the I/O slot. This

can be useful for sending signals to external signal processing gear, or for monitoring speciﬁc

signals within a mix.

Signals from the following channels can be sent to the AUX buses.

• Input channels

•Track channels

• Effect return channels

AUX send levels can be adjusted either by using the graphic knobs in the AUX screen or by using

the Selected Channel section controls.

AUX send levels can be adjusted using the graphic knobs

in the AUX screen.

Press the Selected Channel section [AUX]

key so that its indicator lights.

The AUX screen will appear.

To adjust levels for the AUX1 bus press

Selected Channel knob 1.

The AUX1 screen will appear.

To adjust levels for the AUX2–AUX4 buses press the

corresponding Selected Channel knob (2–4) in the

same way. If the [AUX] key is lit pressing one of the

Selected Channel knobs will take you directly to the

corresponding AUX screen.

Press the Display section [F1] (Input/RTN

page) or [F2] (Track page) key.

The page displays and the items they contain are as

follows.

About the AUX buses

• Refer to “Output signal patching” on page 104 for details on assigning the AUX bus outputs.

•AUX 1/2 and 3/4 can be assigned as pairs (

→

p. 58).

HINT

AUX Send Level Adjustment

■ Adjusting AUX send levels via

the AUX screen

• If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF, press one of the

Selected Channel knobs (1–4) after pressing the [AUX] key

so that its indicator lights. For details about the AUTO DIS-

PLAY function refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 210.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

AUX Send Level Adjustment

AUX

112

● AUX screen Input/RTN page

1 INPUT ﬁeld

Adjusts the AUX send levels for input channels 1–16.

The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be used

to select pre-fader or post-fader send.

B RETURN ﬁeld

Adjusts the AUX send levels for effect return channels

1–4. The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be

used to select pre-fader or post-fader send.

● AUX screen Track page

1 TRACK ﬁeld

Adjusts the AUX send levels for track channels 1–24.

The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be used

to select pre-fader or post-fader send.

Move the cursor to a knob and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to

adjust the send level.

The range is from – ∞ – +10 dB.

To set the point from which the AUX send

signal will be derived in each channel,

move the cursor to the appropriate PRE/

POST button and press the [ENTER] key to

select either PRE (pre-fader: the signal is

sent from a point before the channel fader)

or POST (post-fader: the signal is sent from

a point after the channel fader).

To adjust send levels to a different AUX

bus, press the corresponding Selected

Channel knob to switch to the appropriate

screen, then adjust the send levels as

described in steps 4 and 5, above.

Selected Channel section knobs 1–4 can be used to

directly adjust AUX send levels.

Use the Layer section keys, [INPUT SEL]

keys, and [SEL] keys to select the channel

for which AUX send level is to be adjusted.

Press the Selected Channel section [AUX]

key so that its indicator lights.

The AUX screen will appear.

Rotate Selected Channel

knobs 1–4.

This will adjust the AUX send

level for the channel selected in

step 1.

• While the [AUX] key is lit you can press one of the Selected

Channel knobs repeatedly to switch between the display

pages for the corresponding AUX screen. For example, press-

ing Selected Channel knob 1 repeatedly will switch back and

forth between the AUX1 screen Input/RTN page and the Track

page.

• By pressing the [F1] or [F2] key while holding the Display sec-

tion [SHIFT] key you can simultaneously set all channels in

the display to PRE ([F1]) or POST ([F2]).

HINT

• Knobs can also be selected via the Layer section keys,

[INPUT SEL] keys, and [SEL] keys.

•Move the cursor to a knob and press the [ENTER] key to turn

that AUX send on or off.

HINT

■ Adjusting AUX send levels via

the Selected Channel section

• If AUTO DISPLAY function is disabled the AUX screen will not

appear automatically when step 2, above, is performed, but

the AUX send levels can still be adjusted by rotating the

Selected Channel knobs.

• If AUTO DISPLAY function is disabled a popup window will

appear when a value is adjusted for easy visual conﬁrmation,

regardless of the display that is showing at the time.

HINT

Using external effects with the AUX buses

113

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

AUX

External effect processing gear connected via the [OMNI OUT] jacks can be used in place of the

internal effects. The example given in this section describes the procedure for applying an exter-

nal mono-in/stereo-out reverb processor to a track channel via the AUX1 bus.

Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi-

tion.

Call the PATCH screen Output page by

pressing the Work Navigate section

[PATCH] key.

This page is used to assign the AW2400’s various

internal signals to the output connectors.

Move the cursor to the OMNI OUT ASSIGN 1

ﬁeld and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the

[INC]/[DEC] keys to select “AUX1”.

This assigns the AUX1 bus signal to [OMNI OUT]

jack 1.

Referring to the diagram, connect the exter-

nal signal processor to the AW2400.

Press the Selected Channel section [AUX]

key so that its indicator lights, then press

Selected Channel knob 1.

The AUX1 screen will appear.

Press the Display section [F2] key to dis-

play the Track page.

The send levels from the track channels to the AUX1

bus can be adjusted via this page.

Set the knobs for each channel to an appro-

priate level, and set the PRE/POST buttons

as required.

At this point the track channel signals are being sent to

the [OMNI OUT] jack 1 via the AUX1 bus, and are

being fed to the external effect processor’s input.

Use the Quick Navigate section [RECORD]

key to call the RECORD screen Mixdown

page, and set the parameters as shown in

the illustration.

With these settings track channels 1–24 and the effect

signals returned to input channels 3/4 are mixed and

sent to the stereo bus.

Using external effects with the AUX buses

• The AUX bus signals can also be assigned to an I/O card

installed in the I/O slot, or the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] con-

nector.

HINT

AW2400

Effect Processor

[OMNI OUT] jack 1

[MONITOR

OUT] jacks

[MIC/LINE

INPUT] jacks

3/4

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Using external effects with the AUX buses

AUX

114

● Signal Flow When Using an External Effect Processor

Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/

EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then

press Selected Channel knob 1 as many

times as necessary to display the PAN/EQ

screen Input/RTN page.

Set the input channel 3 and 4 pan controls

fully left and right, respectively.

This ensures full stereo effect from the stereo effect

processor. You could also pair inputs 3 and 4 for easy

stereo control.

Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0-dB level

and, while playing back the song, adjust the

input level of the external effect processor

as well as the input levels of input channels

3 and 4 using the [GAIN] knobs.

If necessary return to step 7 and readjust the send lev-

els from the track channels to the AUX1 bus as

required. You can also adjust the AUX1 bus master

level by selecting the appropriate layer and fader via

the Layer section [MASTER] key and channel [SEL]

key, or by using the CH VIEW screen View page LVL

knob.

Turn the RECORD screen Mixdown page

REC button on and begin the actual mix-

down process.

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

x Number of

play tracks

x Number of

play tracks

Mixer section

Stereo bus

AUX bus 1

[MIC/LINE

INPUT]

jacks 3/4

[OMNI OUT]

jack 1

Effect Processor

Track channels

AUX Bus master channel

Input channels

Stereo output channel

• With this setup be sure to set all AUX send levels for input

channels 3 and 4 to –

∞ to prevent feedback.

NOTE

115

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Effects

Chapter 14

Effects

In this section we’ll cover operation of the AW2400’s internal effects.

The AW2400 has four independent multi-effect processors built in (Effect 1–4). The internal

effects can be used in the following two ways.

This method uses the mixer section’s effect “sends” and

“returns”. To apply an effect to a channel the channel’s

effect send controls are used to send the signal to the input

of Effect 1–4 via the corresponding effect bus. The output

from the effect processor used is returned to the stereo bus

or bus 1/bus 2 via the corresponding effect return channel

(Effect Return 1–4), and is mixed with the direct sound.

The following diagram shows the input and output signal

ﬂow for effects 1–4.

In this case an effect is inserted into a channel’s signal

path in order to apply the effect only to that channel. The

effect sound is mixed with the direct channel signal within

the channel itself and then sent to the stereo bus or a

recorder track. Please note that an effect which has been

inserted into one channel cannot be simultaneously

inserted into another channel or used via the effect sends

and returns.

Effects can be inserted on the following channels.

• Input channels

•Track channels

• Stereo output channel

• Bus master channels

•AUX send master channels

Effects can be inserted at any of the following three points

in a channel (the diagram shows an input channel).

1 Before the EQ stage (pre-EQ).

B Between the EQ stage and fader (post-EQ

pre-fader).

C After the fader (post-fader).

About the Internal Effects

■ Effect Sends and Returns

Effect 1

Effect 2

Effect 3

Effect 4

Effect return channel 1

Mixer section

Effect return channel 2

Input channels 1–16

Track channels 1–24

Effect return channel 3

Effect return channel 4

Effect bus 1

Effect bus 2

Effect bus 3

Effect bus 4

■ Channel Insertion

PHASE GATE EQ

PA NLVLAT T

ABC

• In addition to the effects provided by the four effect processors, the

AW2400 provides a “Pitch Fix” function for correcting the pitch of

vocal tracks. Refer to “Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)” on

page 124 for details.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Recalling Effect Library settings

Effects

116

The ﬁrst step in using an effect is to recall a preset from the effect library that uses the required

effect.

Press the Selected Channel section

[EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights.

The EFFECT screen will appear.

Press Selected Channel knob 1–4, corre-

sponding to the effect processor to which

you want to load the effect.

While the EFFECT screen is showing Selected Chan-

nel knobs correspond to effect processors 1–4. So, for

example, the EFFECT1 screen will be selected if you

press Selected Channel knob 1.

Press the Display section [F4] key to call

the FX Lib. Page.

You can select the effect library preset to be loaded

into the effect processor selected in step 2 via this

page.

Move the cursor to the List, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

select the library setting to be recalled.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for recall.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the recall operation will

appear.

To actually recall the selected setting move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The library setting will be recalled.

Recalling Effect Library settings

• The effect type for a recalled effect library preset cannot be changed. For this reason even

when you want to program an effect from scratch it is necessary to begin by recalling an

effect library preset that includes the effect type you want to use.

HINT

• If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF (

→

p. 211), the

EFFECT screen will not appear automatically when step 1,

above, is performed. In this case press one of the Selected

Channel knobs (1–4) will cause the corresponding EFFECT

screen to appear.

HINT

List RECALL button

• Library numbers 1–43 contain pre-programmed read-only

effect presets.

• Refer to “Effect Library Operations” on page 122 for details on

the effect library RENAME, STORE, and CLEAR functions.

HINT

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.

HINT

Applying Effects via Send and Return

117

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Effects

The procedure for applying effects 1–4 via the effect sends and returns is described below.

Referring to the instructions in “Recalling

Effect Library settings” on page 116, recall

an effect library preset that is based on the

effect you want to use.

Make sure that the Selected Channel sec-

tion [EFFECT] key is engaged and its indi-

cator is lit.

Make sure that the EFFECT screen selected

in step 1 is showing.

Selected Channel knobs 1–4 correspond to EFFECT

screens 1–4. Press the appropriate knob to call the

desired screen.

To adjust the send level to an effect bus

start by pressing the Display section [F1]

key to call the FX Input page, or the [F2] key

to call the FX Track page.

The FX Input page allows adjustment of the input

channel send levels, while the FX Track page allows

adjustment of the track channel send levels. The items

included in the FX Input and FX Track pages are as

follows.

● EFFECT screen FX Input page

1 INPUT ﬁeld

Allows adjustment of the effect send levels for input

channels 1–16. You can also select the point from

which the send signal is derived via the PRE/POST

button below each knob.

● EFFECT screen FX Track page

1 TRACK ﬁeld

Allows adjustment of the effect send levels for track

channels 1–24. You can also select the point from

which the send signal is derived via the PRE/POST

button below each knob.

Move the cursor to an effect send knob and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys

to set the effect send level.

Applying Effects via Send and Return

• An effect that has been inserted into a channel cannot be simultaneously used with the effect

sends and returns.

• All effects can be used via the effect sends and returns in new song with the initial default set-

tings. If an effect has been inserted in a speciﬁc channel it can be removed and freed for use

with the sends and returns as described in “Inserting an Effect Into a Channel” on page 119.

NOTE

• When the [EFFECT] key is lit you can repeatedly press a

Selected Channel knob to sequentially select the related

effect pages.

• By pressing the [F1] or [F2] key while holding the Display sec-

tion [SHIFT] key you can set all channels within the display to

PRE ([F1]) or POST ([F2]) with one operation.

HINT

• By moving the cursor to an effect send knob and pressing the

[ENTER] key the effect send for that channel can be turned

off or on.

• Effect send levels can also be adjusted while the [EFFECT]

key is engaged by pressing the [INPUT SEL] or [SEL] key for

the target channel and using Selected Channel knobs 1–4 to

adjust the send level to the corresponding effect processor.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Applying Effects via Send and Return

Effects

118

Move the cursor to the PRE/POST button

and press the [ENTER] key to switch the

location from which the signal will be sent

from each channel to the Effect buses.

Select PRE for pre-fader or POST for post-fader send.

To adjust the effect mix balance (the bal-

ance between the effect and direct signals),

press the [F3] key.

The EFFECT screen FX Edit page will appear.

Use MIX BALANCE ﬁeld knob to adjust the

balance between the direct and effect sig-

nals.

When applying an effect via the effect sends and

returns the effect mix level is usually set to 100%

(effect sound only).

The effect send master levels can be

adjusted via faders 9–12 after pressing the

Layer section [MASTER] key.

When the MASTER mixing layer is selected faders 9–

12 control the master send levels for effects 1–4,

respectively. You can view and edit the various param-

eters for each master send channel by pressing [SEL]

key 9–12 and then calling the CH VIEW screen View

page.

To adjust the effect return levels press the

Layer section [IN 1-8] or [IN 9-16] key, and

use faders 9–12 to adjust the correspond-

ing return levels.

When mixing layer IN 1-8 or IN 9-16 is selected fad-

ers 9–12 control the return levels for effects 1–4,

respectively. You can view and edit the various param-

eters for each return channel by pressing [SEL] key 9–

12 and then calling the CH VIEW screen View page.

• The effect parameters can be edited as required via the FX

Edit page. Refer to “Editing Effects” on page 121 for details.

HINT

• See “Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels”

on page 105 for details.

HINT

Inserting an Effect Into a Channel

119

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Effects

Effects can be directly inserted into the signal path of speciﬁed channels as follows.

Referring to the instructions in “Recalling

Effect Library settings” on page 116, recall

an effect library preset that is based on the

effect you want to use.

Call the CH VIEW screen View page by

either pressing the Selected Channel sec-

tion [VIEW] key as many times as neces-

sary, or by pressing the [F1] key after

pressing the [VIEW] key.

The signal ﬂow and mix parameters for each channel

are displayed in this page.

Use the Layer section keys, [INPUT SEL]

keys, [SEL] keys, or [STEREO SEL] key to

select the channel into which the effect is to

be inserted.

The signal ﬂow for the selected channel will be dis-

played.

To insert an effect that is to be used on just one instru-

ment connected to the AW2400, for example, insert

the required effect into the appropriate input channel.

The example diagram shows input channel 1 selected

for effect insertion.

Move the cursor to the ﬁeld to the right of

INSERT EFF on the display and press the

[ENTER] key.

A popup window allowing selection of the effect to be

inserted as well as an I/O card channel to and from

which the signal will be sent/received will appear.

The popup window includes the following items.

• NONE.............. No effect inserted.

• EFF1–4............ Effect 1–4 inserted.

• SLOT1–16....... Select one of these options to

insert an external effect unit via an

I/O card. If SLOT1 is selected, for

example, Output channel 1 of the I/

O card is used to send the signal to

the external effect processor, and

input channel 1 of the same card is

used to return the output from the

external effect processor to the

channel.

When an item other than NONE is selected, an abbre-

viation of the insert destination will appear to the right

of the colon (“ : ”).

The meanings of the abbreviations are as follows.

Inserting an Effect Into a Channel

INSERT EFF

• Effects cannot be inserted into the effect send master or

effect return channels.

NOTE

Abbreviations Descriptions

SEND

(EFF1–4 only)

Effect send/return operation (not inserted in

any channel).

IN1–IN16 Inserted in input channel 1–16.

TR1–TR24 Inserted in track channel 1–24.

STEREO Inserted in stereo output channel.

BUS1–2 Inserted in bus master channel 1, 2.

AUX1–4 Inserted in AUX send master channel 1–4.

• The same effect number can not be selected for multiple

channels.

• Inserted internal effects cannot be used with the effect

sends and returns.

NOTE

• When SLOT1–16 is selected for a stereo channel (stereo out-

put or bus master), an odd-even channel pair (“SLOT 1-2” for

example) will be assigned to the stereo channels and

inserted.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Inserting an Effect Into a Channel

Effects

120

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the desired effect and/or I/O

card channel, then press the [ENTER] key.

When EFF1–4 is selected the corresponding effect

will be inserted in the signal path.

The signal ﬂow is as follows.

When SLOT1–16 is selected an external effect processor

can be inserted into the channel via the selected I/O card

channel. In this case the signal ﬂow is as follows.

To select the insert point move the cursor

to the symbol below INSERT EFF on the

display and press the [ENTER] key.

Press [ENTER] repeatedly to sequentially select the

pre-EQ → post-EQ pre-fader → post-fader insert

points.

When an effect and compressor are both inserted at the

same point you can move the cursor directly to the

insert point and press the [ENTER] key to swap the

positions of the effect and compressor.

Call the EFFECT screen FX Edit page or FX

Lib. page to adjust the internal effect mix

balance (the balance between the effect and

direct signals).

Use the MIX BALANCE ﬁeld knob to bal-

ance the effect and direct sound as

required.

A setting of 0% produces only the direct sound while a

setting of 100% produces only the effect sound.

Insert points

PHASE GATE

LVL

● INSERT EFF = EFF 1

AT T

Effect 1

■ External effect inserted pre-EQ

(input channel)

PHASE GATE

LVL

● INSERT EFF = SLOT1

AT T

Output channel = 1 Input channel = 1

I/O card

External effect

processor

■ Internal effect inserted pre-EQ

(input channel)

• Refer to “Editing Effects” on page 121 for details on the

EFFECT screen FX Edit page.

HINT

Editing Effects

121

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Effects

The AW2400 internal effect parameters can be edited to create precisely the effect your music

requires.

Referring to the instructions in “Recalling

Effect Library settings” on page 116, recall

an effect library preset that is based on the

effect type you want to use.

Make sure that the Selected Channel sec-

tion [EFFECT] key is engaged and its indi-

cator is lit.

Make sure that the EFFECT screen selected

in step 1 is showing.

Selected Channel knobs 1–4 correspond to EFFECT

screens 1–4. Press the appropriate knob to call the

desired screen.

Press the Display section [F3] key to

access and edit the effect parameters.

The EFFECT screen FX Edit page will appear.

This page contains the following items.

1 NAME

Indicates the name of the currently selected effect.

B TYPE

Indicates the type of the currently selected effect.

C MIX BALANCE ﬁeld

• BYPASS button............Switches effect bypass on/

off.

• MIX BALANCE knob....Sets the balance between

the effect and direct sig-

nals. 0% produces direct

sound only, while 100%

produces effect sound only.

D USED AS

Indicates how this effect is being used. “EFF1”–

“EFF4” indicate that the effect is internally connected

to the mixer section via send/return. If the effect is

inserted into a speciﬁc channel the name of the chan-

nel into which the effect is inserted will be shown

(e.g., “INPUT 1”).

E Level Meter

Displays the effect input or output level. Select input

(IN) or output (OUT) via the button above the meters.

F Parameter page

In this area you can edit the various effect parameters.

The content and range of the parameters will depend

on the currently selected effect type.

Move the cursor to the effect parameter that

you want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value.

Depending on the effect type, this area may be used to

show multiple parameter pages. In this case repeatedly

press the CURSOR [ ] key to access the parameter

page that contains the parameter you want to edit.

To switch effect BYPASS on/off, move the

cursor to the BYPASS button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Editing Effects

B DCA

•You cannot change the effect type via this page. If you want to

use a different type you will need to recall a library setting that

uses the desired effect type.

NOTE

• Edited effect settings can be stored in the effect library (

→

p. 123).

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Effect Library Operations

Effects

122

The AW2400 provides an effect library for storage and recall of effect settings. Effect library oper-

ation is described in this section.

Effect library save and recall operations are carried out via

the EFFECT screen FX Lib. page.

Press the Selected Channel section

[EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights.

The EFFECT screen will appear.

Press one of the Selected Channel section

knobs 1–4.

The corresponding EFFECT screen will appear.

Press the [F4] key to access the FX Lib.

page.

All effect library operations are carried out via the FX

Lib. page. The items in this page are as follows.

1 Current effect information

This is the same as the EFFECT screen FX Edit page

(→ p. 121).

B RENAME button

Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you

can edit the name of the library selected in the list.

C RECALL button

Recalls the library data that is selected in the list.

Refer to “Recalling Effect Library settings” on

page 116 for details on recalling from the library.

D STORE button

Stores the current effect settings into the location

selected in the list.

E CLEAR button

Deletes the library data that is selected in the list.

F List

This area lists the effect data stored in the library.

Library numbers 001–043 are read-only, and original

settings can be saved to numbers 044–128. The line

enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is

selected for operation. An icon indicates a read-

only library setup.

Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in

the Effect library.

Call the FX Lib. page.

Refer to “Call the Effect Library Screen” on page 122

for details.

Move the cursor to the list, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

select the library setting to be edited.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for editing.

Move the cursor to the RENAME button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

Enter a name for the selected library set-

ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for

details on name entry).

This conﬁrms and enters the new name.

Effect Library Operations

Call the Effect Library Screen

• The Effect Library is common to all four internal effect proces-

sors, so save and recall operations can be carried out from

any EFFECT screen.

HINT

Changing Effect Library Names

• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.

HINT

Effect Library Operations

123

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Effects

Save the current effect setting from any one of the effect

processors (1–4) to the effect library.

Press the Selected Channel section

[EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights.

Press one of the Selected Channel section

knobs 1–4 to access EFFECT screen for the

effect processor that will be the store

source.

Call the FX Lib. page.

Refer to “Call the Effect Library Screen” on page 122

for details.

Move the cursor to the list, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

select the library number to which the set-

tings are to be stored.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for storage.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

If necessary enter a name for the selected

library setting, move the cursor to the OK

button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to

page 32 for details on name entry).

The library setting will be stored.

The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as

follows.

Call the FX Lib. page.

Refer to “Call the Effect Library Screen” on page 122

for details.

Move the cursor to the list, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

select the library setting to be erased.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected to be erased.

Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the clear operation will

appear.

To actually erase the selected setting move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Storing Effect Library settings

•New settings cannot be stored to read-only library numbers (those

marked with an icon).

• If store to a library number that contains previously-stored data,

the previous data will be overwritten.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.

HINT

Erasing Effect Library settings

• Read-only library settings (those marked with an icon) cannot

be erased.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)

Effects

124

The Pitch Fix function can be used to “ﬁx” the pitch of a vocal track, or create chorus parts based

on a main vocal part. An Auto Punch-in/out function is also provided which allows a speciﬁed

segment of a vocal track to be processed and replaced.

Pitch Fix can be useful in the following situations:

• Correct the pitch of slightly ﬂat or sharp vocals.

• Correct the pitch of a speciﬁed segment or phrase of a vocal track using the Auto Punch-in/out function.

• Create a chorus part using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch of the chorus part — a third

above the main vocal, for example.

• Change the key of a vocal track.

When you want to specify a segment of a

vocal track to be processed and recorded to

another track, it is necessary to specify the

In and Out points and press the [AUTO

PUNCH] key for the Auto Punch-in/out func-

tion.

For details on the Auto Punch-in/out function refer to

“Auto punch-in/out” on page 70.

Call the RECORD screen Bounce page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

Move the cursor to the PITCH FIX button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear which allows you to

select the source edit track.

Specify the source edit track in the TRACK

ﬁeld, then move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear which allows you to

select the record destination track and the virtual track.

Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)

• If you will be using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch for vocal pitch correction or

a chorus part, the MIDI OUT connector of an appropriate MIDI keyboard must be connected

to the AW2400 [MIDI IN] connector via a standard MIDI cable. In this case the MIDI screen

Setting 1 page PORT RX (reception) parameter must be set to MIDI. Keyboard connection

can also be made via the USB port.

NOTE

PITCH FIX button

TRACK ﬁeld

V.TR ﬁeldTRACK ﬁeld

• Different tracks must be speciﬁed for the source and destina-

tion.

NOTE

Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)

125

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Effects

Specify the record destination track in the

TRACK ﬁeld and the virtual track in the V.TR

ﬁeld, then move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

This will select the PITCH FIX display.

1 PITCH FIX ﬁeld

• EXIT button................Move the cursor to this but-

ton and press [ENTER] to

exit from the PITCH FIX

mode and return to the

Bounce page.

• BYPASS button .........To monitor the vocal track

prior to pitch correction,

move the cursor to this but-

ton and press [ENTER].

B TRACK ﬁeld

•FROM TR ....................Indicates the track to be

edited (the source track).

This ﬁeld is only for display,

and cannot be edited.

•TO TR/TO V.TR ...........Indicates the track and vir-

tual track to which the pro-

cessed source track will be

recorded (the destination

track). This ﬁeld is only for

display, and cannot be

edited.

C CONTROL ﬁeld

Selects the method of pitch correction/shift from the

three listed below.

• SCALE ................. Specify the scale via received

MIDI notes to adjust the pitch.

For example, if you play a chord

on a connected MIDI keyboard,

the pitch is shifted by the notes

included in the chord.

•NOTE.................... The pitch is changed according

to the received MIDI note.

•PANEL.................. This lets you adjust the pitch by

specifying a scale from the key-

board on the display.

D PARAMETERS ﬁeld

• TYPE.................... Set this to an appropriate value

to maximize the accuracy of the

pitch correction. Generally this

should be set to Normal, but for

low-pitched vocals it might be

preferable to use the Male set-

ting, and for high-pitched vocals

try the Female setting.

• KEEP FORMANT button

................. When this button is engaged the

basic character (timbre) of the

voice will not change when the

pitch is corrected.

• DETECT knob ..... Determines the pitch detection

speed. The shorter the setting,

the more quickly the pitch is

detected allowing faster

response. The longer the set-

ting, the more slowly the pitch is

detected which can result in

abrupt, step-like pitch changes.

•RATE knob .......... This determines the speed of

pitch change. The faster the set-

ting, the more quickly the pitch is

changed so that pitch correction

more accurately tracks the origi-

nal signal. When this is set to

“000,” there is no pitch change.

• PITCH knob......... This determines the octave set-

ting of the pitch-adjusted signal.

The range is from -2 to 2

octaves in semitone steps. The

integer and fraction segments of

the value are set separately.

• FORMANT knob.. This determines the vocal char-

acter (timbre) of the pitch-

adjusted signal. Positive (+) val-

ues result in a higher voice char-

acter and negative (–) values

result in a deeper voice charac-

ter.

B EA

C F

• The following occur when the PITCH FIX mode is engaged:

• No other display can be selected from the panel keys.

• Record track assignments are ignored.

• No internal effects other than Pitch ﬁx can be accessed.

• The Automix function is temporarily disabled.

• MIDI program and control change messages cannot be

received.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)

Effects

126

E FIX NOTE ﬁeld

These parameters are only available when PANEL is

selected in the CONTROL ﬁeld.

• KEY.......................Sets the key of the graphic key-

board on the display.

• SCALE..................Sets the scale of the graphic

keyboard on the display:

CHROMATIC, MAJOR, MINOR,

or CUSTOM. When CUSTOM is

selected the keyboard’s buttons

can be used to directly specify a

scale for pitch correction.

F MASTER TUNING ﬁeld

• IN/OUT knob ........The IN knob sets the reference

pitch before correction, and the

OUT knob sets the reference

pitch after correction. The inte-

ger and fraction segments of the

value are set separately.

Raise the [STEREO] fader and the fader of

the source track channel to about 0dB on

the scale.

Raise the fader of the destination track

channel to about 0dB on the scale.

To set the scale for pitch correction select

PANEL in the CONTROL ﬁeld and specify

the key in the FIX NOTE ﬁeld.

For example, if PANEL is selected in the CONTROL

ﬁeld and CHROMATIC is selected in the FIX NOTE

SCALE ﬁeld, pitch will be corrected to the nearest

note in the chromatic (semitone) scale. You can also

specify the notes to be used for pitch correction by

selecting CUSTOM in the FIX NOTE SCALE ﬁeld

and specifying the notes via the on-screen keyboard.

Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song

to the beginning, then press the PLAY [ ]

key while holding the REC [●] key.

Song playback will begin and the processed data will

be recorded to the destination track.

The corrected signal can be monitored via the record

destination track channel.

Adjust the DETECT, RATE, and PITCH

parameters as required while recording the

song.

If NOTE is selected in the CONTROL ﬁeld, you can

use a MIDI keyboard to specify the pitches for pitch

correction in real time while recording. This capability

can be useful when creating a harmony vocal track

based on the original vocal melody.

When the end of the song is reached,

rewind the song and press the PLAY [ ]

key.

The recorded pitch-corrected track will play back with

the other recorded tracks (the original uncorrected

track will not play back).

If you’re not satisﬁed with what has been recorded,

press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the recording

and go back to step 9.

Move the cursor to the EXIT button and

press [ENTER].

A popup window will appear asking you to conﬁrm

that it’s OK to exit from the PITCH FIX mode.

To return to the Bounce page move the cur-

sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The PITCH FIX mode will be exited and the Bounce

display will appear.

• When the BYPASS button is engaged the signal before pitch

correction is output unaffected, regardless of the IN and OUT

knob settings.

NOTE

• The fader of the destination track — the track to which the

processed vocal track will be recorded — has no effect on the

recorded signal. The source track fader determines the ﬁnal

balance, so set it with care.

NOTE

• The source track (the signal before correction) cannot be

monitored while the PITCH FIX mode screen is showing. Also

note that the record destination (the corrected signal) can

only be monitored when the recorder is set to the record

mode.

• When Auto Punch-in/out is engaged, you can monitor the

destination channel during playback even when not recording.

•To check the signal before pitch correction, engage the

BYPASS button to temporarily disable the Pitch Fix effect.

NOTE

•For optimum effect use the DETECT knob in addition to the

RATE knob in order to set the “depth” of the pitch correction

effect.

•You can create “robot voice” type effects by setting the RATE

and DETECT knobs to high values and using a MIDI key-

board to trigger sudden pitch changes.

HINT

127

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

Chapter 15

Track operations and editing

This chapter explains how to use and edit the tracks of the recorder section.

The AW2400 has the following types of track.

● Audio Tracks

The physical tracks used to record and play back audio

data are called “audio tracks,” or simply “tracks.” The

AW2400 has twenty-four audio tracks.

● Stereo Track

Independently from audio tracks 1–24, the AW2400 has a

“stereo track” that records and plays a stereo audio signal.

The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown

track for recording the ﬁnal mix.

● Virtual Tracks

Each audio track 1–24 and the stereo track consists of

eight tracks. Each of these eight tracks is called a “virtual

track.” For the audio tracks and the stereo track, only one

virtual track can be recorded or played at any time.

The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks.

The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1–24, and the

vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1–8. The

shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently

selected for recording or playback.

● Trigger Tracks

The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys

and faders to be used to start and stop playback of

recorded tracks. When the Trigger Track function is active

pressing a track channel [ON] key begins playback of the

corresponding track from the beginning of the song to the

end of the data recorded on that track.

About the AW2400’s tracks

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

21 22 23 24

Audio tracks

Stereo track

Virtual tracksVirtual tracks

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Audio track operations

Track operations and editing

128

Audio tracks are physical recording areas used to record

and play back audio data.

The AW2400 lets you use 24 audio tracks. In a 16-bit song

you can play back up to 24 tracks simultaneously, and in a

24-bit song you can play back up to 12 tracks simulta-

neously. However, the number of tracks that can actually

be played back simultaneously is limited by the number of

tracks that are currently in record-ready mode. Please note

that putting more tracks in record-ready mode will forc-

ibly mute a corresponding number of playback tracks. The

following table shows the number of tracks that can be

simultaneously recorded/played for a 16-bit or 24-bit

song.

*For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two, and the

number of simultaneous playback tracks is 24 for 16-bit songs, or 12

for 24-bit songs.

For example in a 16-bit song, each track you place in

record-ready mode will decrease the number of simulta-

neously-playable tracks by one. (Muting will begin with

higher-numbered tracks.) If you’ve placed the maximum

of sixteen tracks in record-ready mode, a maximum of

eight tracks can be played back simultaneously. If you

want to return a muted track to playable condition, you

must ﬁrst reduce the number of tracks that are in record-

ready mode, and then defeat muting on the track you want

to play back.

In the TRACK screen View page you can view all tracks

to see whether they contain data, and switch muting on/off

for each track.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or press the

[F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 TRACK

Here you can select the track to be controlled in the

screen. Choose from 1–24 (audio tracks 1–24) or ST (ste-

reo track). The number and name of the virtual track

selected for the current track are shown below this ﬁeld.

B MUTE button

You can move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key to switch muting on/off for the currently

selected track.

C RENAME button

You can move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key to access the NAME EDIT popup window,

where you can edit the name of the currently selected

track.

D WAVE button

If you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the waveform of the currently selected

track will be displayed. For details, refer to “Finding a

location while viewing the waveform” (→ p. 95).

E REMAIN

This indicates the remaining recordable time.

F Metronome button/knob

Here you can switch the metronome on/off and adjust the

volume. The volume can be adjusted in a range of -96 to

+12 dB. For details, refer to “Using the Metronome” (→

p. 62).

G MUTE indicator

If a track is muted, its MUTE indicator changes to “●”.

H Track View

This area shows whether tracks 1–24 contain data, and

indicates the marker locations.

Audio track operations

Song Bit Depth

Max. Simultaneous

Record Tracks

Max. Simultaneous

Play Tracks

16 bits

16 8

123

0* 24*

24 bits

111

0* 12*

About audio tracks

Viewing all audio tracks

Audio track operations

129

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

Call the TRACK screen View page.

Move the cursor to the TRACK ﬁeld, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the number of the track you

want to mute.

Move the cursor to the MUTE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

Muting will be switched on/off.

If a track is muted, the MUTE symbol changes to “●.”

When you press the [ENTER] key once again, muting

will be defeated and the MUTE symbol will change to

“.”

Call the TRACK screen Virtual TR page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 Virtual tracks

Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1–8. The virtual

track that is currently selected for each track is indi-

cated by a “●” symbol. Of the virtual tracks that are

currently not selected, those that have been recorded

are indicated by “ ”, and those that have not yet been

recorded are indicated as “–”.

B Virtual track name

This indicates the name of the virtual track selected by

the cursor. This will indicate “-NO REC-” for tracks

on which nothing has been recorded.

C Tracks

Indicates the track number 1–24.

Use the cursor keys to select the virtual

track number that you want to assign to the

desired track.

Press the [ENTER] key.

The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of

the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will

now be used for recording/playback.

Muting a speciﬁc audio track

• This mute function switches muting on or off for the recorder

track playback. This also affects the number of simultaneous

playback tracks in the recorder section (

→

p. 128). It’s a good

idea to mute all unused tracks.

• Since 24-bit songs allow a maximum of 12 playback tracks,

mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 13-24.

• In some cases, depending on the number of tracks that are in

record-ready mode, you won’t be able to un-mute a track. In

this case, decrease the number of tracks that are in record-

ready mode, and then un-mute the desired track.

HINT

Switching the virtual track of

an audio track

• When the AW2400 is in its default state, virtual track 1 is

selected for every track.

HINT

•To switch the virtual track of the stereo track, use the TRACK

screen Stereo TR page.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

130

Track operations and editing

Here’s how to assign a name to the virtual track that is cur-

rently selected for an audio track.

Call the TRACK screen View page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

Move the cursor to the TRACK ﬁeld, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the number of the track

whose name you want to edit.

You can edit the name of the currently-enabled virtual

track for the track you selected in the TRACK ﬁeld.

Move the cursor to the RENAME button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to assign a name to the virtual track.

Edit the name of the virtual track, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key. (For details on editing a name

→ p. 32)

The edited name will be applied.

Independently from audio tracks 1–24, the AW2400 has a

“stereo track” that records and plays a stereo audio signal.

The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown

track for recording the ﬁnal mix.

The signal of the stereo output channel is always con-

nected to the stereo track; you will always be able to

record the signal of the stereo bus simply by putting the

stereo track in record-ready mode.

You cannot record audio tracks while recording the stereo

track. While the stereo track is playing, audio tracks 1–24

will be forcibly muted.

In the TRACK screen Stereo TR page you can check

whether the stereo track contains data, and switch the vir-

tual track for the stereo track. To call this page press the

Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as

necessary, or press the [F3] key after pressing the

[TRACK] key.

This page contains the following items.

Editing virtual track names for

an audio track

RENAME button

TRACK ﬁeld

Stereo track operations

About the stereo track

G H I

Audio track operations • Stereo track operations

Stereo track operations

131

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

1 ST TR MODE ON/OFF button

This switches playback of the stereo track on/off.

B INPUT CH MIX/MUTE button

This selects whether the signals of the input channels will

be monitored (MIX) or will not be monitored (MUTE)

while the stereo track is playing.

C Track View

This area graphically indicates whether the stereo track

contains data, and indicates the marker locations.

D Virtual tracks

Here you can select the virtual track that is assigned to the

stereo track. The currently selected virtual track is indi-

cated by a “●” symbol. Of the other virtual tracks, those

that have been recorded are indicated by “ ”, and those

that have not been recorded are indicated by “–”.

E Level meter

This indicates the output level of the stereo track. The

fader level is numerically indicated at the left of the meter,

and the hold level is numerically indicated at the right.

F PRE EQ button

Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed

when this button is on.

G PRE FADER button

Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed

when this button is on.

H POST FADER button

Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed

when this button is on.

I PEAK HOLD button

This button switches the level meter peak hold function

on/off.

Here’s how to send the signals from track channels, input

channels, and effect return channels to the stereo bus, and

record the mixed signal onto the stereo track.

Call the RECORD screen Mixdown page by

either pressing the Quick Navigate section

[RECORD] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing

the [RECORD] key.

When you access this page, record-ready status will be

defeated for all audio tracks, and only the stereo track

will be recordable.

Use the Mixdown page to patch the channels that you

want to record on the stereo track to the stereo bus. For

details on patching, refer to page 75.

Move the cursor to the REC button and

press the [ENTER] key to turn the button

on.

The panel [STEREO SEL] key will blink red. This

blinking indicates that the stereo track is in record-

ready mode.

Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song.

Then hold down the REC [●] key and press

the PLAY [ ] key.

The song will begin playing, and the playback will be

recorded on the stereo track.

When you reach the end of the song, press

the STOP [■] key.

To listen to the recorded result, refer to “Playing back

the stereo track” (following section).

Here’s how to play back the stereo track that you’ve

recorded.

Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

To play back the stereo track, switch the ST

TR MODE ON/OFF button to ON.

When this button is on, the output of the stereo track is

sent to a point immediately before the [STEREO]

fader, and can be monitored from the [STEREO OUT]

jacks, [MONITOR OUT] jacks, and [PHONES] jack.

At this time, record-ready status for all tracks will be

defeated.

Recording on the stereo track

REC button

• If desired, you can use the [UNDO/REDO] key to cancel the

recording that was made on the stereo track (

→

p. 64), or

switch virtual tracks and record another take.

HINT

Playing back the stereo track

• If any audio tracks are in record-ready mode, a popup window

will ask you to conﬁrm that record-ready status will be can-

celled.

• If the INPUT CH MIX/MUTE button is set to MIX, you’ll be

able to monitor the signal of the input channels even while the

stereo track is playing.

HINT

• EQ and dynamics processing are not applied to the stereo

track playback.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Stereo track operations

Track operations and editing

132

Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song,

and press the PLAY [ ] key.

The stereo track will play back. Use the [STEREO]

fader to adjust the monitor level.

To return to normal playback of the audio tracks,

switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button back OFF.

Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

Use the CURSOR keys to select the virtual

track number that you want to assign.

The currently selected virtual track is indicated by a

“●” symbol. Of the other virtual tracks, those that

have been recorded are indicated by “ ,” and those

that have not yet been recorded are indicated by “–.”

Press the [ENTER] key.

The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of

the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will

now be used for recording/playback.

Here’s how to edit the name of the virtual track currently

selected for the stereo track.

Call the TRACK screen View page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

Move the cursor to the TRACK ﬁeld, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]

keys to make it read “ST.”

You can edit the name of the virtual track that is cur-

rently enabled for the stereo track.

Move the cursor to the RENAME button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to assign a name to the virtual track.

Edit the name of the virtual track, move the

cursor to the OK button, and press the

[ENTER] key. (For details on entering a

name → p. 32)

The edited name will be ﬁnalized.

• If the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button is ON, pressing the

[RECORD] key while the recorder is stopped will display a

popup window asking you to conﬁrm that you want to defeat

stereo track playback mode. If you want to do so, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

Switching the virtual track of the

stereo track

Editing the name of a virtual track

for the stereo track

TRACK ﬁeld

RENAME button

The Trigger Track Function

133

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

Operation of the Trigger Track function is described in this section.

The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys

and faders to be used to start and stop playback of

recorded tracks. This is ideal for performance situations in

which you want to switch phrases or patterns in real time,

or when you need to start background music on cue, for

example.

When the Trigger Track function is active pressing a track

channel [ON] key begins playback of the corresponding

track from the beginning of the song to the end of the data

recorded on that track (blank sections in the middle of the

track will be played normally.) The track is played once.

If you press the [ON] key once again during playback the

playback will be stopped. Pressing the STOP [■] key will

stop playback of all tracks.

Recorded tracks can be registered in up to four groups (A–

D), and playback of those tracks can then be started and

stopped as a group. In this case pressing the [ON] key for

any track in the group will start playback of the entire

group. Press the [ON] key a second time to stop playback

of the group.

The faders can be used to start playback instead of the

[ON] keys (the Fader Start function). Playback of a track

(or group including the track) will start from the beginning

of the song when a track fader for which the Fader Start

function is turned on is raised above the –

∞ position.

Playback will stop at the end of the recorded data. Play-

back can be stopped by returning the fader to the –

∞ posi-

tion.

The Trigger Track Function

About Trigger Track

Playback start Playback stop

[ON] key lit

[ON] key out

Playback start Playback stop

[ON] key lit

[ON] key out STOP [■] key

Recorded section

Track 1

(Group A)

Track 2

(Group A)

Track 3

(Group A)

Play

Stop

Track 1

(Group A)

Track 2

(Group A)

Track 3

(Group A)

Any [ON] key for tracks 1–3

Play

Stop

Play

Stop

Playback start Playback stop

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

The Trigger Track Function

Track operations and editing

134

The Trigger Track function can be used as described

below.

Call the TRACK screen Trigger page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[TRACK] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing

the [TRACK] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 NORMAL button

For normal audio track operation this button should be

turned on (normal track mode).

B TRIGGER button

Turn this button on to engage the Trigger Track mode

(trigger track mode).

C GROUP

Move the cursor to this ﬁeld and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the trigger track group

for each track. Groups can only be assigned when the

Trigger Track mode is engaged.

D FADER START button

When this button is on playback of the corresponding

track (or group including the track) will start when the

track fader is raised above the -∞ position. Playback

will stop at the end of the recorded data. Playback can

be stopped by returning the fader to the -∞ position.

This button can only be turned on or off when the

Trigger Track mode is engaged.

Move the cursor to the TRIGGER button and

press the [ENTER] key to engage the Trig-

ger Track mode.

A popup window asking you to conﬁrm that you want

to exit from the normal track mode will appear. Move

the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

To set the group to which each track

belongs move the cursor to the GROUP

ﬁeld and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/

[DEC] keys.

The Trigger Track mode allows each track to be

assigned to one of four groups A–D so that playback

of entire groups of tracks can be started and stopped

by simply pressing one [ON] key or operating one

fader.

To engage the Fader Start function for a

track move the cursor to the FADER START

button and press the [ENTER] key.

When the Fader Start function is on, playback of the

corresponding track (or group including the track) will

start when the track fader is raised above the –

∞ posi-

tion. Playback can be stopped by returning the fader to

the –

∞ position.

• When the Trigger Track function is active the Transport,

Locate, and Locate/Navigate section keys (with the exception

of the STOP [

■

] key) will not function, and normal record/play-

back operations are not available.

NOTE

• The Trigger Track settings are saved individually with each

song.

• When a song is saved with the Trigger Track function active,

the Trigger Track function will still be active and a message

indicating that status will appear when that song is later

recalled.

HINT

Using the Trigger Track Function

DC BA

• Since a maximum of 12 tracks can be played back for 24-bit

songs (

→

p. 165), mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 13–

24 and they will remain in the normal track mode.

NOTE

• “_” will be displayed for tracks that are not assigned to a

group, and those tracks will be triggered independently.

• Channel pairs to be used for linked stereo operation should

be assigned as paired channels beforehand (

→

p. 58).

HINT

• The Fader Start function can be turned off for all tracks by

pressing the [F1] key while holding the [SHIFT] key (“–” will be

displayed for all tracks).

• The Trigger Track group A–D settings can be copied to fader

groups (

→

p. 82) by pressing the [F2] key while holding the

[SHIFT] key. This can be useful for linking fader start opera-

tion of multiple trigger tracks.

HINT

135

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

Use the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] and

[TRACK 13-24] keys to select the mixing

layer to be operated.

Start playback of the target track or group

by pressing the appropriate [ON] key or

operating the appropriate fader.

The [ON] keys of triggered tracks will light during

playback. If you press a lit [ON] key playback of that

track or the group that includes that track will stop.

Pressing the STOP [■] key will stop playback of all

tracks.

Move the cursor to the NORMAL button and

press the [ENTER] key to exit from the Trig-

ger Track mode and return to the normal

mode.

A popup window asking you to conﬁrm that you want

to exit from the Trigger Track mode will appear. Move

the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

This section explains how to edit the audio data recorded on an audio track.

The AW2400 provides various editing commands that let you edit the audio tracks that have

been recorded. Using these commands, you can specify the track or region that you want to edit,

and delete or move data. You can use special commands to import audio data or WAV ﬁles from

outside the AW2400, or to export WAV ﬁles to an external device.

The AW2400 provides the following editing commands.

● ERASE

Erases the data of the speciﬁed region.

● DELETE

Deletes the data of the speciﬁed region. Any data that fol-

lows the deleted region will be moved forward by the cor-

responding distance.

● INSERT

Inserts blank space into the speciﬁed region.

● COPY

Copies the data from the speciﬁed region to the desired

location of the desired track.

● MOVE

Moves the data from the speciﬁed region to the desired

location of the desired track. The move-source data will be

erased.

● EXCHANGE

Exchanges data between the speciﬁed tracks.

● TIME COMP (Time Compression/Expansion)

Adjusts the length of the speciﬁed region of an audio track

without affecting its pitch.

● PITCH (Pitch Change)

Adjusts the pitch of the speciﬁed region of an audio track

without affecting its length.

● IMPORT CD AUDIO

Imports audio data (CD-DA) from CD-R/RW media in the

CD-RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400.

● IMPORT CD WAV

Imports a WAV ﬁle from CD-R/RW media in the CD-RW

drive into an audio track of the AW2400.

● IMPORT USB WAV

Imports a WAV ﬁle copied from a computer into the

“Transport” folder into an audio track of the AW2400.

● IMPORT TRACK

Imports audio data recorded in another song into an audio

track of the current song.

● EXPORT

Exports the speciﬁed region of an audio track to a WAV

ﬁle in the “Transport” folder.

• If a channel is turned off by pressing the [ON] key before the

Tr igger Track mode is engaged, operating the appropriate

[ON] key or fader does not play back the channel.

NOTE

• If you attempt to select the RECORD, EDIT, SOUND CLIP,

CD, AUTOMIX, or USB screen while the Trigger Track mode is

engaged a conﬁrmation popup window will appear. To actually

move to the selected screen move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] to switch to the normal track mode.

You cannot select any of the above screens during song play-

back.

NOTE

Editing tracks

The Trigger Track Function • Editing tracks

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

136

Track operations and editing

Here are some ways in which you can use these editing

commands.

1 Erase unwanted regions

You can use the ERASE command to erase just a speciﬁc

region of a speciﬁc track. For example, this provides a

convenient way to erase a few wrong notes from a perfor-

mance, or to eliminate noise that occurred while an instru-

ment was not playing.

B Change the structure of the tracks

You can use the EXCHANGE command to exchange an

entire track with another track. By using this command

you can bring tracks of widely separated track numbers

closer to each other for easier operation during mixdown.

You can use the COPY or MOVE commands to copy/

move the speciﬁed region of a track to a different track.

This is convenient when you have recorded a solo part

among two or more virtual tracks, and want to assemble

the best parts into a single track.

C Change the structure of the song

You can use the DELETE or COPY commands to delete/

copy entire tracks, changing the structure of the song

itself. Even after all parts of the song have been recorded,

you can use this method to adjust the length of the song,

for example by shortening the number of measures or

increasing the number of choruses.

D Create special effects

You can also use editing commands to create special

effects. For example, you can copy a guitar or vocal solo

part to another track and use the PITCH CHANGE com-

mand to slightly detune one of these tracks, creating a

chorus effect without using the internal effect processor.

By applying the PITCH CHANGE command to a drum

track to lower the pitch, you can create a unique lo-ﬁ

effect.

Here is the basic procedure for using a track editing command. The procedure is essentially the

same for all track editing commands.

Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[EDIT] key.

This screen displays the following information.

1 Editing command

Indicates the currently selected editing command.

B Locator/marker

Indicates the approximate location of the currently set

locate points and markers. This also indicates whether

recorded data exists in the current track of each track.

C Parameters

Sets various parameters (track/virtual track number,

editing region, etc.) required in order to execute the

command. The type of parameters and the ranges of

the settings will depend on the command that is

selected.

D EXECUTE button

Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]

key to execute the editing command.

Move the cursor to the edit command ﬁeld,

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select an editing command, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The displayed content of the page will depend on the

edit command you selected.

Basic procedure for track editing

■ Select the editing command

Editing tracks • Basic procedure for track editing

Basic procedure for track editing

137

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

After you choose an editing command, the next step is to

specify the track(s) that will be edited.

To select the track for editing, move the cur-

sor to the TR (Track) ﬁeld in the left of the

screen, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

[INC]/[DEC] keys.

In the TR ﬁeld you can select the following types of

data.

• 1–24.................. An audio track

• 1&2–23&24....... A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered audio tracks

•ST..................... The stereo track

• ALL................... Audio tracks 1–24

• CLIP.................. Sound clip

Select the virtual track that you want to edit.

If you selected an audio track (1–24, 1&2–23&24, ST)

in step 3, the V.TR ﬁeld will appear at the right, allow-

ing you to select the virtual track number. Move the

cursor to this ﬁeld and select a virtual track number 1–

For most commands, you will need to set the Start (the

beginning of the edited region) and End (the end of the

edited region) parameters to specify the region that will be

affected by the command.

To specify the beginning of the region to be

edited, move the cursor to the desired digit

of the Start ﬁeld, and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys.

The Start/End parameters are displayed at the right of

the TR ﬁeld.

You can set the Start/End parameters in terms of the

counter display format (the value at the left) or in units

of measures/beats (the value at the right). Move the cur-

sor to the digit that you want to change, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the value.

To specify the end of the region to be

edited, move the cursor to the desired digit

of the End ﬁeld, and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys.

When you have ﬁnished setting parameters, execute the

command.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the opera-

tion.

Move the cursor to the OK button to exe-

cute the command, or move the cursor to

the CANCEL button to cancel without exe-

cuting. Then press the [ENTER] key.

■ Select the track(s) to edit

TR ﬁeld

V.TR ﬁeld

•For some commands, you will need to specify both source

and destination tracks.

HINT

■ Specify the editing region

Start parameter (beginning of the region to be edited)

End parameter (end of the region to be edited)

• If you selected the sound clip as the object for editing, the

region from the start point of the sound clip to its end point will

always be the object of editing. If necessary, you should spec-

ify the start point and end point of the sound clip beforehand.

NOTE

• If you move the cursor to the Start or End parameter and

press the [ENTER] key, the current counter location will be

input. Alternatively, you can recall a locate point or marker to

move to that location in the song, and then press the [ENTER]

key to input that location as the value of the Start or End

parameter.

HINT

•For some commands, you will also need to specify a location

in the editing-destination track. In the same way as described

above, move the cursor to the counter display format ﬁeld or

the measure/beat ﬁeld, and specify the location.

NOTE

■ Execute the command

•Even after you press the [ENTER] key to execute the com-

mand, you can press the [UNDO/REDO] key to return to the

state prior to executing the command. You can use this func-

tion to compare the original data with the results produced by

executing the command.

HINT

• If as a result of executing a command, a track no longer con-

tains any recorded data, the name of that track will change to

“-NO REC-“.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

List of editing command

Track operations and editing

138

This section lists all the commands that are provided in the EDIT screen, and explains their

parameters.

Erases the data in the speciﬁed region (between Start and

End) of the speciﬁed track(s).

*1. V.TR can be selected only if TR=1–24, 1&2–23&24, or ST.

Deletes the data from the speciﬁed region of the speciﬁed

track(s).

This command is similar to ERASE, but differs in that the

data that follows the speciﬁed region will move forward to

ﬁll the gap.

The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command.

Inserts blank space into the speciﬁed region. Data follow-

ing the location of the Start parameter will be moved

backward to make room.

The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command.

However instead of

D End, use D Size to specify the

region that will be inserted.

List of editing command

Parameter Range Explanation

A TR

1–24 A single audio track

1&2–23&24

A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered audio tracks

ST The stereo track

ALL Tracks 1–24

B V.TR

1–8 Virtual track number

C Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region

D End Specify a point End of the edited region

ERASE

AB DC

ERASE

Start End

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

■ Parameter list

DELETE

AB DC

DELETE

Start End

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 7 8

■ Parameter list

INSERT

AB D

INSERT

Start

Size

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 4 5

■ Parameter list

List of editing command

139

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

Copies the speciﬁed region of data to the speciﬁed loca-

tion of the speciﬁed track.

*1. V.TR can be selected only if From TR=1–24, 1&2–23&24, or ST.

*2. Measure lock function

(E Start Measure Lock, F End Measure Lock)

Measure Lock allows a measure/

beat to be speciﬁed within a

region to be copied so that it

aligns with the speciﬁed mea-

sure/beat in the copy destination.

For example, in a situation in

which you have an abstract or

rubato segment before the in-

tempo performance begins, you

can “Measure Lock” the beginning of the in-tempo segment so that it

is copied to the appropriate location in the destination.

To use the measure lock function, move the cursor to the measure

display ﬁeld of From Start or From End, specify the measure/beat

location that will be the reference point for the matching, and press

the [ENTER] key. A “lock” icon will appear beside the value that you

speciﬁed, and the measure lock function will be turned on for From

Start or From End. (This can be turned on for either Start or End, not

both.)

While the measure lock function is on, the value of that measure dis-

play format setting will be ﬁxed, and cannot be modiﬁed. In this state

if you use the counter display format ﬁeld to specify the From Start

and From End locations, and execute the copy, the location you

speciﬁed in the measure display format ﬁeld will be aligned with the

copy-destination To Start setting.

COPY

G H I J K

D E FA B

COPY

Start

To Start

From

Track

From

Track

End

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A B C D E F G H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A B 4 5 6 F G H

• If you set From TR to ALL (INS), the copy-destination track will be

moved backward by the size of the copied region. Note that this

may cause the bar lines speciﬁed by the tempo map to change

their location relative to the audio data.

• If you set From TR to other than ALL (INS), the copy-destination

track will be overwritten, and the data that follows the copied

region will not be moved backward.

NOTE

•Audio data recorded in the sound clip (

→

p. 43) can be copied to

an audio track by using the COPY command.

• The metronome of the sound clip is independent of the song

tempo. If you record into the sound clip with the intention of copy-

ing it to an audio track, you should match the tempo ahead of time.

HINT

Parameter Range Explanation

A From TR

1–24 A single audio track

1&2–23&24

A pair of adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered audio

tracks

ST The stereo track

ALL (OVER)

Tracks 1–24 (overwrite onto

the copy-destination)

ALL (INS)

Tracks 1–24 (insert into the

copy-destination)

CLIP

Sound clip contents (the

range is speciﬁed by CLIP)

B From V.TR

1–8

Copy-source virtual track

number

C From Start Specify a point Copy-source starting location

D From End Specify a point Copy-source ending location

E Start Measure

Lock

F End Measure

Lock

On/off

(indicated by

“lock” icon)

Switch the measure lock func-

tion for From Start/From End

G To TR

1–24 A single audio track

1&2–23&24

A pair of adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered audio

tracks

ST The stereo track

H To V.TR

1–8 Copy-destination virtual track

I To Start Specify a point

Copy-destination starting

location

J COPY TIMES 1–99 Number of copies

K GRID

ON/OFF

(indicated by

highlighted GRID

text when on)

Switch the grid function

■ Parameter list

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

List of editing command

Track operations and editing

140

● When measure lock = on

*3. The possible choices for G To TR (copy-destination track) will

depend on your selection for

A From TR (copy-source track).

A From TR is a single audio track 1–24, you will be able to select

only a single audio track 1–24.

A From TR is CLIP, ST, 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio

tracks), you will be able to select only ST or 1&2–23&24 (a pair of

adjacent audio tracks).

A From TR is ALL OVER or ALL INS, you cannot select TO TR.

*4. Grid function (

K GRID)

When this function is on, the To Start location cannot be speciﬁed in

counter-display format; it can be speciﬁed only in measure/beat

units.

By using the Grid function in conjunction with the Measure Lock

function, you can easily copy measure/beat-length segments of data

whose divisions do not fall precisely on the measure or beat.

Moves the speciﬁed region of data to the speciﬁed loca-

tion of the speciﬁed track. This is similar to COPY, but

differs in that the move-source data will be deleted.

The parameters are the same as for the COPY command.

However, you cannot select CLIP for

A From TR. Also,

there is no

J COPY TIMES setting.

A 4 5 6 E F G H

COPY

Start

To Start

From

Track

From

Track

End

Measure Lock

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A B C D E F G H

To Start

MOVE

G H I K

D E FA B

MOVE

Start

To Start

From

Track

From

Track

End

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A B C D E F G H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A B 4 5 6 F G H

■ Parameter list

List of editing command

141

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

Exchanges data between the speciﬁed tracks.

*1. The items that you can select in D To TR (copy-destination track)

will depend on the

A From TR (copy-source track) setting.

A From TR is a single audio track 1–24, you can select only a sin-

gle audio track 1–24.

A From TR is ST or 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks),

you can select only 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks).

Adjusts the length of the speciﬁed region of an audio

track, without changing the pitch.

● If you set Ratio = 50%

● If you set Ratio = 200%

Parameter Range Explanation

A From TR

1–24 A single audio track

1&2–23&24

A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered audio tracks

ST The stereo track

B From V.TR 1–8

Exchange-source virtual track

number

C Name

Up to eight

alphanumeric

characters

Exchange-source virtual track

name (display only)

D To TR

1–24 A single audio track

1&2–23&24

A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered audio tracks

E To V.TR 1–8

Exchange-destination virtual track

number

F Name

Up to eight

alphanumeric

characters

Exchange-destination virtual track

name (display only)

EXCHANGE

From

Track

From

Track

1 2 3 4 5 6

A B C D E F

1 2 3 4 5 6

A B C D E F

■ Parameter list

• The track names will not be exchanged.

NOTE

Parameter Range Explanation

A From TR

1–24 A single audio track

1&2–23&24

A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered audio tracks

ST The stereo track

B From V.TR 1–8 Virtual track number

C From Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region

D From End Specify a point End of the edited region

E TO END Specify a point

Specify the length to which the

selected region will be com-

pressed or expanded

F To Ratio 50–200%

Specify the percentage by which

the selected region will be com-

pressed or expanded

TIME COMP

(Time Compression/Expansion)

C D

TIME

COMP/EXP

From End

1 2 3 4 A B C D

12 3 4

A B C D

From Start

To END

TIME

COMP/EXP

From End

1 2 3 4 A B C D

C D

From Start

To END

2 3 4

■ Parameter list

•TO END and To Ratio are linked, so that editing one ﬁeld will

cause the other ﬁeld to change.

•You cannot set TO END or To Ratio to a value that would cause

the ratio to exceed 50–200 percent.

•From Start value and From End value must be at least 45 msec

apart. These cannot be set to a shorter interval.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

List of editing command

Track operations and editing

142

Adjusts the pitch of the speciﬁed region of an audio track,

without changing the length.

Imports audio data (CD-DA) from CD-R/RW media in the

CD-RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400.

For details on the parameters and operation of the

IMPORT CD AUDIO command, refer to “Importing from

the CD-RW drive” (→ p. 143).

Imports a WAV ﬁle from CD-R/RW media in the CD-RW

drive into an audio track of the AW2400.

For details on the parameters and operation of the

IMPORT CD WAV command, refer to “Importing from

the CD-RW drive” (→ p. 143)

Imports a WAV ﬁle copied from a computer into the

“Transport” folder into an audio track of the AW2400.

For details on the parameters and operation of the

IMPORT USB WAV command, refer to “Importing Cop-

ied WAV Files From the Computer” (→ p. 234).

Imports audio data recorded in another song into an audio

track of the current song.

For details on the parameters and operation of the

IMPORT TRACK command, refer to “Importing audio

data from another song” (→ p. 145).

Exports the speciﬁed region of an audio track to a WAV

ﬁle in the “Transport” folder.

For details on the parameters and operation of the

EXPORT command, refer to“Copying Exported WAV

Files To the Computer” (→ p. 233).

Audio playback performance can be improved by using

this command to merge a number of separate regions (sec-

tions of audio data created in separate recording passes) in

a speciﬁed track into one continuous region.

The merge command creates a continuous region from the

beginning of the track to the end of the last region on the

track, and sections of the track that contained no regions

are replaced with audio silence.

Parameter Range Explanation

A From TR

1–24 A single audio track

1&2–23&24

A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered audio tracks

ST The stereo track

B From V.TR 1–8 Virtual track number

C From Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region

D From End Specify a point End of the edited region

E NOTE

-12 to +12

semitones

Specify the amount of pitch

change in semitone units

F CENT

-50 to +50

cents

Specify the amount of pitch

change in one-cent units (1/100th

of a semitone)

PITCH (Pitch Change)

From Start From End

PITCH

CHANGE

From Start From End

PITCH

CHANGE

■ Parameter list

IMPORT CD AUDIO

IMPORT CD WAV

Parameter Range Explanation

A From TR

1–24 A single audio track

1&2–23&24

A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered audio tracks

B From V.TR 1–8 Virtual track number

IMPORT USB WAV

IMPORT TRACK

EXPORT

MERGE

■ Parameter list

Importing audio data/WAV files

143

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

This section explains how to load (import) audio data or WAV ﬁles from the CD-RW drive or from

the desired track of a different song.

CD audio data (CD-DA) or a WAV ﬁle from a CD-ROM

or CD-R can be imported (loaded) into an AW2400 audio

track. After being imported, this data can be handled in the

same way as any recorded audio track.

Call the UTILITY screen Preference page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[UTILITY] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing

the [UTILITY] key.

Immediately after the AW2400 is powered-on, it will

be set to prohibit digital recording from an external

source or importing from a CD. Before you can

import, you will need to disable this prohibition in the

UTILITY screen Preference page.

Move the cursor to the CD/DAT DIGITAL

REC button, and press the [ENTER] key.

A message will ask you to conﬁrm that you will

observe the applicable copyright laws.

Carefully read “Copyright Notice” (→ p. 7),

and if you accept these terms, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The button display will change from DISABLE to

ENABLE, and digital recording and importing from a

CD will be enabled.

Insert a CD into the CD-RW drive.

You can import data from the following types of

media.

● Audio data (CD-DA)

•Audio CD

• CD-Extra (only the ﬁrst session of CD-DA)

• Mixed Mode CD (only CD-DA data of the second

and later tracks)

● WAV ﬁles

• ISO9660 Level 1 format CD-ROM, CD-R,

CD-RW*

• Mixed Mode CD

* The directory name and ﬁle name cannot use charac-

ters other than uppercase alphanumeric characters

and the “_” (underscore) character.

Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[EDIT] key.

Move the cursor to the editing command

ﬁeld, use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/

[DEC] keys to select the desired editing

command.

Select “IMPORT CD AUDIO” if the import-source is

an audio CD or CD-Extra, or select “IMPORT CD

WAV” if the import-source is a WAV ﬁle.

Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the edit

command.

The READ CD INFO button will appear in the center

of the display.

The following illustration shows the screen when

you’ve selected IMPORT CD AUDIO as the edit com-

mand.

Move the cursor to the READ CD INFO but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

The display will indicate “Read CD Info...”, and infor-

mation will be read from the CD inserted in the CD-

RW drive.

Depending on the import-source data, the screen will

change as follows.

Importing audio data/WAV ﬁles

Importing from the CD-RW drive

• The CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button will return to the DISABLE

setting each time you turn on the power.

NOTE

• If you choose a song whose sample rate is 48 kHz in the

IMPORT CD AUDIO command, a message of “Current Song

is 48kHz Fs Type.” appears, and you won’t be able to load the

audio data.

NOTE

• If the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button is set to “DISABLE” in the

UTILITY screen Preference page, the display will indicate “CD

Import Prohibited!”, and you won’t be able to import from the

CD. If this occurs, refer to steps 1–3 and check your settings

once again.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Importing audio data/WAV files

Track operations and editing

144

● When using IMPORT CD AUDIO

1 Track list

This shows each track of the audio CD inserted in the

CD-RW drive, in units of minutes/seconds/frames (1/

75 second). Move the cursor to the list, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to specify

the number of the audio track you want to import.

Operations in the track list are linked with the From

CD TRACK ﬁeld.

B From CD TRACK

Speciﬁes the audio track number (01–99) of the

import-source CD.

C From Start

Speciﬁes the beginning of the data that will be

imported, in minutes/seconds/frames (1/75 second).

D From End

Speciﬁes the end of the data that will be imported, in

minutes/seconds/frames (1/75 second).

E LISTEN button

You can move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key to repeatedly hear the currently selected

region of the CD-DA.

F To TR

Selects the track number into which the data will be

imported. If the import-source is an audio CD or a ste-

reo WAV ﬁle, you will only be able to select a pair of

tracks 1&2–23&24.

G To V.TR

Selects the virtual track number (1–8) into which the

data will be imported.

H To Start

Speciﬁes the starting location (in counter-display for-

mat) of the import-destination to which the data will

be imported.

I EXECUTE button

Executes the import operation.

● When using IMPORT CD WAV

1 File list

This shows the WAV ﬁles and folders (directories)

stored on the CD. Move the cursor to the list, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to

specify the WAV ﬁle that you want to import.

B FILE

This indicates the name of the WAV ﬁle or directory.

The displayed icons have the following meaning.

• .........Indicates a WAV ﬁle.

• .........Indicates a folder in the same level. You

can select this icon and press the

[ENTER] key to move down one level.

• ...........You can select this icon and press the

[ENTER] key to move up one level.

C TOTAL

Indicates the playback length (in units of hours/min-

utes/seconds/milliseconds) of the WAV ﬁle. This ﬁeld

is for display only, and cannot be changed.

D TYPE

Indicates whether the WAV ﬁle is monaural ( ) or

stereo ( ). The numerical value at the right indicates

the bit depth of the WAV ﬁle. This ﬁeld is for display

only, and cannot be changed.

E LISTEN/ENTER/UP button

If a WAV ﬁle is selected, the LISTEN button will be

displayed, allowing you to hear the WAV ﬁle repeat-

edly. If a folder is selected, the ENTER button will be

displayed, allowing you to move into that folder. If the

button is selected, the UP button will be displayed,

allowing you to move to the next higher folder.

F To TR

Selects the track number into which the data will be

imported. If the import-source is a stereo WAV ﬁle,

you will only be able to select a pair of tracks 1&2–

23&24.

G To V.TR

H To Start

I EXECUTE button

These are the same as for IMPORT CD AUDIO.

B ECD

• The “frames” referred to here are the minimum time-axis units

used in CD-DA. Do not confuse them with the frames used in

MTC or SMPTE.

HINT

B C

G H I

D E

•You cannot audition WAV ﬁles whose bit depth or sample rate

differs from the current song.

NOTE

Importing audio data/WAV files

145

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Track operations and editing

Move the cursor to the track list (ﬁle list),

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/

[DEC] keys to select the track or WAV ﬁle

that you want to import.

If you’re using IMPORT CD WAV, and the is

located at the line enclosed by the dotted line, you can

press the [ENTER] key to move to the next lower

level.

To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to

the and press the [ENTER] key.

If you’re using IMPORT CD AUDIO, use

From Start/From End to specify the region

that will be imported.

Use the To TR, To V.TR, and To Start ﬁelds to

specify the track number, virtual track num-

ber, and starting location into which the

data will be imported.

When you have ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the EXECUTE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the opera-

tion.

To execute the import operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Importing will begin. If you move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, import-

ing will be cancelled.

Here’s how you can import audio data from another song

saved on the AW2400’s hard disk.

Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[EDIT] key.

Move the cursor to the edit command ﬁeld,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/

[DEC] keys to select IMPORT TRACK.

Press the [ENTER] key to conform your

choice of edit command.

The screen will change as follows.

1 Song List

This area lists the songs that are saved on the

AW2400’s internal hard disk. In this list, select the

song that contains the track you want to import.

B Song name

C Song size

D Song Bit Depth/Sampling Frequency

E Song Protect Status

F SORT

Move the cursor to this box, and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to choose the order in

which you want the songs in the list to appear.

• NAME...........Song names in alphabetical order.

• SIZE .............Song size, from largest to smallest.

• OLD..............The order in which the songs were

saved, from newest to oldest.

G From TR/From V.TR

Here you can select the desired track number (1–24,

ST) and virtual track number (1–8) of the import-

source song.

• In the case of a Mixed Mode CD, the edit command you use

will depend on the data you’re importing. Use IMPORT CD

AUDIO to import audio data (CD-DA), or use IMPORT CD

WAV to import a WAV ﬁle.

•You cannot import a WAV ﬁle whose bit depth or sample rate

differs from the current song.

• When the import source is an audio CD or CD Extra disc and

the song is 24-bit, the audio data will be automatically con-

verted to 24-bit format during the import operation.

• When you move the cursor to the LISTEN button and press

the [ENTER] key, there will be a slight time lag while the data

is read from the CD before you hear it.

NOTE

• If the import-destination contains data, it will be overwritten.

Be careful not to overwrite important data by accident.

NOTE

Importing audio data from

another song

H I

B C D E F

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Importing audio data/WAV files

Track operations and editing

146

H To TR/To V.TR

Here you can select the track number (1–24, ST) and

virtual track number (1–8) of the import-destination

song (the current song).

If From TR is 1–24, you cannot select ST in the To TR

ﬁeld. If From TR is ST, only ST can be selected.

I EXECUTE button

Executes the import operation.

Move the cursor to the song list, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys

to select the song that includes the track

you want to import.

Move the cursor to From TR/From V.TR, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the track number and virtual

track number that you want to import.

The track number and virtual track number of the song

you selected in step 4 will be assigned as the import-

source.

Move the cursor to To TR/To V.TR, and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys

to select the track number and virtual track

number of the desired import-destination.

When you’ve ﬁnished making settings,

move the cursor to the EXECUTE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the opera-

tion.

To execute the Import operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Importing will begin. If you decide to cancel the

Import operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL

button and press the [ENTER] key.

•You cannot import from a song whose bit depth or sample

rate differs from the current song.

NOTE

• If the import-destination contains data, it will be overwritten.

Be careful that you don’t accidentally overwrite important

data.

NOTE

147

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

Chapter 16

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

In this section we’ll cover operation of the channel pan (or balance), equal-

izer, and dynamics processing controls.

These controls adjust the “pan” position (or balance on stereo channels) of the input, effect

return, track, and stereo output channels. Pan can be adjusted either by using the knobs in the

PAN/EQ screen, or by using the physical pan control in the Selected Channel section.

Pan operation via the dedicated display screen.

Press the Seleceted Channel section [PAN/

EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then

press Selected Channel knob 1 to call the

PAN/EQ screen.

Press the Display section [F1] (Input/RTN

page) or [F2] (Track page) key.

The pan operations available via each page are as fol-

lows:

● PAN/EQ Screen Input/RTN Page

1 INPUT ﬁeld

Pan controls for input channels 1–16.

B EFFECT RETURN ﬁeld

Pan controls for effect return channels 1–4.

● PAN/EQ Screen Track Page

1 TRACK ﬁeld

Pan controls for track channels 1–24.

B STEREO BAL. ﬁeld

Balance control for the stereo output channel.

Move the cursor to a knob and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to

set the pan as required.

The pan value range is from L63 (full left)–C (center)–

R63 (full right).

Pan Control

■ Pan Control via the PAN/EQ Screen

•You can switch back and forth between the Input and Track

pages while the PAN/EQ screen is showing by pressing the

[PAN/EQ] key.

HINT

• Knobs can also be selected via the Layer section keys,

[INPUT SEL] keys, [SEL] keys, and [STEREO SEL] key.

•You can alternately select the left and right effect return chan-

nels by repeatedly pressing the effect return channel [SEL]

key.

• The pan “C” (center) setting can be instantly recalled by

pressing the [ENTER] key after moving the cursor to a pan

knob.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Pan Control

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

148

The panning for paired channels can be

adjusted in three different ways: hold the

Display section [SHIFT] key while pressing

the [F1], [F2], or [F3] key.

• [F1] key — INDIVIDUAL

The pan positions of the paired

channels can be adjusted individ-

ually.

• [F2] key — GANG

The pan positions of the paired

channels are adjusted simulta-

neously in the same direction,

maintaining the relative posi-

tions of each channel.

• [F3] key — INV.GANG

The pan positions of the paired

channels are adjusted simulta-

neously in opposite directions.

Adjusting pan via Selected Channel section knob 1.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],

and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-

nel for which pan is to be controlled.

Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/

EQ] key so that its indicator lights.

With the default settings the PAN/EQ screen will

appear automatically. The display will not change if

the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS-

PLAY button is set to OFF.

Rotate Selected Channel knob 1 to adjust

the pan of the channel selected in step 1.

If the UTILITY screen Preference

page AUTO DISPLAY button is set

to OFF, a popup window showing

the current pan setting will appear

while knob 1 is being operated.

• This operation can be accessed via both the Input/RTN and

Track pages, and affects both pages.

HINT

■ Pan Control via

the Selected Channel section

4-band EQ

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

149

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

The AW2400 provides 4-band parametric equalization (LOW, LO-MID, HI-MID, HIGH) on the

channels listed below.

The LO-MID and HI-MID bands provide peaking EQ control, while the LOW and HIGH bands can

be used in shelving, peaking or high-pass ﬁlter (LOW)/low-pass ﬁlter (HIGH) mode. EQ can be

adjusted either by calling the PAN/EQ screen and using the graphic knobs, or by using the phys-

ical controllers in the Selected Channel section.

Adjusting equalization via the PAN/EQ screen.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],

and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-

nel for which EQ is to be controlled.

Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/

EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Press

Selected Channel knob 2, 3, or 4 and the

PAN/EQ screen will appear.

Press the Display section [F3] key, or press

the [PAN/EQ] key as many times as neces-

sary until the EQ/Att. page appears.

The EQ/Att. page includes the following items.

1 EQ ON/OFF button

Switches the EQ on/off.

B ATT. (Attenuation) knob

Attenuates the signal immediately before the EQ stage

over a range of -96 to 12.0 dB. This is used mainly to

prevent the signal from clipping when you use the EQ

to boost a speciﬁc frequency region.

C TYPE ﬁeld

Selects the EQ algorithm type. When the TYPE I but-

ton is on the same EQ algorithm that was used in the

02R is selected. The TYPE II button selects the latest

EQ algorithm which provides minimum inter-band

interference. TYPE II can only be selected for the

track channels, stereo output channels, and bus master

channels.

D Response curve

Graphically indicates the approximate response of the

EQ.

E Output meter

Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed

through the EQ.

F Q knobs

Specify the Q (steepness) at which each band (HIGH,

HI-MID, LO-MID, LOW) will be boosted or cut. The

range is 10–0.10, and higher settings will produce a

steeper curve.

G F (Frequency) knobs

Specify the center frequency of the boost/cut, over a

range of 21.2 Hz–20.0 kHz.

H G (Gain) knobs

Specify the amount of boost/cut, over a range of -18.0

dB to +18.0 dB.

To switch the EQ on, move the cursor to the

EQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER]

key.

When working on a track channel, stereo

output channel, or bus master channel, the

EQ type can be selected via the TYPE ﬁeld.

4-band EQ

• Input

• Effect Return

•Track

• Stereo Output

• Bus Master

•AUX Send Master

■ EQ Control via the PAN/EQ Screen

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

4-band EQ

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

150

Move the cursor to the parameter that you

want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

the [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the value.

To switch the LOW band type, move the cur-

sor to the LOW band Q knob and continue

turning the [DATA/JOG] dial toward the left

or right.

If you continue turning the Q knob toward the right,

the Q knob value will indicate “L.SHELF,” and will

switch to the shelving type.

If you turn the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob

value ﬁeld will change to a numerical value, and will

switch to the same boost/cut type as the HI-MID and

LO-MID bands.

If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left, the

Q knob value ﬁeld will indicate “HPF,” and the LOW

band will function as a high-pass ﬁlter. If “HPF” is

selected, you can use the LOW band G knob to switch

the high-pass ﬁlter on/off.

To switch the HIGH band type, move the

cursor to the HIGH band Q knob and con-

tinue turning the [DATA/JOG] dial toward

the left or right.

If you continue turning the Q knob toward the right,

the Q knob value will indicate “H.SHELF,” and will

switch to the shelving type.

If you turn the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob

value ﬁeld will change to a numerical value, and will

switch to the same boost/cut type as the HI-MID and

LO-MID bands.

If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left, the

Q knob value ﬁeld will indicate “LPF,” and the HIGH

band will function as a low-pass ﬁlter. If “LPF” is

selected, you can use the HIGH band G knob to switch

the low-pass ﬁlter on/off.

Using Selected Channel section knobs 2–4 to adjust EQ.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],

and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-

nel for which EQ is to be controlled.

Press the Selected Channel section [LOW],

[LO-MID], [HI-MID], or [HIGH] key, according

to the band you want to control.

The selected key’s indicator will light, as will the

[PAN/EQ] key.

With the default settings the PAN/EQ screen will

appear automatically. The display will not change if

the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS-

PLAY button is set to OFF.

Rotate Selected Channel knobs 2–4.

The parameters for the channels selected in step 1 and

the band selected in step 2 will change accordingly.

The knobs control the following parameters.

If the UTILITY screen Preference

page AUTO DISPLAY button is set

to OFF, a popup window showing

the current EQ settings will appear

while Selected Channel knobs 2–4

are being operated.

• If you press the [F1] (FLAT) key while holding the [SHIFT] key

from the PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page, all G knobs for the

currently selected channel will be set to 0.0dB (or OFF).

HINT

• EQ settings can also be recalled from the EQ library, or your

own settings can be saved for later recall. See “EQ/Dynamics

Processor Library Operation” on page 154 for details.

• If boost in a particular band results clipping on the meters,

use the ATT. knob to reduce the signal level.

• Selected Channel knobs 2, 3, and 4 also function while the

PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page is showing.

HINT

Selected Channel

knobs 2–4

2 3 4

Parameters Q

Frequency

(center

frequency)

Gain

■ EQ Control via the Selected

Channel section

Dynamics Processing

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

151

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

The AW2400 provides gate and compressor facilities for dynamics processing. In this section

operation of the gate and compressor will be explained individually.

The gate attenuates signals below a speciﬁed threshold

level, and can be used to eliminate noise in silent sections

of a track. Gates are only provided on input channels.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL] and

[SEL] keys to select the channel to which

the gate is to be applied.

Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]

key so that its indicator lights, then press

Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4.

The DYNAMICS screen will appear.

Press the Display section [F1] key, or press

the [DYN] key as many times as necessary

until the Gate Edit page appears.

The Gate Edit Page includes the following items.

1 GATE ON/OFF button

Switches the gate on/off.

B STEREO LINK button

Turning this button on links gate operation for paired

channels.

C KEYIN SOURCE ﬁeld

Selects one of the following trigger sources for the

gate.

• SELF button ... Selects the signal from the cur-

rently selected channel.

• CHANNEL button

............ Selects the signal from the channel

speciﬁed in the box below the but-

ton (CH1–CH16). After selecting a

channel in the channel box, press

the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the

selection.

•AUX button..... Selects the signal from the AUX

send speciﬁed in the box below the

button (AUX1–AUX4). After select-

ing an AUX send in the box, press

the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the

selection.

D Response curve

This graph indicates the approximate response of the

gate settings. The horizontal axis of the graph is the

input level, and the vertical axis is the output level.

E TYPE

Indicates the currently selected gate type. The dis-

played indication has the following meaning.

•GATE............... Gate

• DUCKING........ Ducking

F GR (Gain Reduction)

Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by

the gate processor over a range of -18 dB to 0 dB.

G Output meter

Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed

through the gate processor.

H PARAMETER

Here you can edit the parameters of the gate processor.

The type of parameters and their ranges will differ

depending on the gate type. For details on the types of

parameter and their function, refer to the appendix.

Dynamics Processing

Using the Gates

D ECA

• Gate operation can only be linked for adjacent odd and even

numbered channels that can be paired.

NOTE

•You cannot change the gate type via this page. If you want to

use a different gate type, you must recall a library setting that

uses the desired type. For details on recalling library gate set-

tings, refer to “EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation” on

page 154.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Dynamics Processing

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

152

Move the cursor to the GATE ON/OFF but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key to turn the

gate on.

Use the STEREO LINK button to turn gate

linking for paired channels on or off, and

the KEYIN SOURCE ﬁeld to select a trigger

source as required.

Move the cursor to the parameter you want

to edit and use either the [DATA/JOG] dial

or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the parameter as

required.

Compression can be used to prevent signals from exceed-

ing a preset level in order to avoid distortion, and to

smooth out the levels of certain instruments or tracks. The

AW2400 provides compression on the following tracks.

• Input

•Track

• Stereo Output

• Bus Master

•AUX Send Master

• Effect Send Master

Compression can be controlled either via the knobs in the

DYNAMICS screen or the physical controllers in the

Selected Channel section.

Applying and controlling compression via the dedicated

dynamics screen.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],

and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-

nel to which compression is to be applied.

Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]

key so that its indicator lights, then press

Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4.

The DYNAMICS screen will appear.

Press the Display section [F3] key, or press

the [DYN] key as many times as necessary

until the Comp Edit page appears.

The Comp Edit page includes the following items.

1 COMPT ON/OFF button

Switches the compressor on/off.

B STEREO LINK button

Turning this button on links compressor operation for

paired channels.

C POSITION ﬁeld

Speciﬁes the position in the signal chain at which the

compressor will be inserted.

• PRE EQ................ Before the channel’s EQ stage

(except for the effect send mas-

ter)

• PRE FADER......... Immediately before the channel

fader

• POST FADER....... Immediately after the channel

fader

D Response curve

This graph indicates the approximate response of the

compressor settings. The horizontal axis of the graph

is the input level, and the vertical axis is the output

level.

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the GATE ON/OFF but-

ton.

HINT

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STEREO LINK button.

HINT

•You can save your current gate settings in the library as

described in “EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation” on

page 154.

HINT

Using the Compressors

■ Compressor Control via

the DYNAMICS screen

D ECA

• This item will not appear for the stereo output channel and

bus master channels.

NOTE

Dynamics Processing

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

153

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

E TYPE

Indicates the currently selected compressor type. The

displayed indication has the following meaning.

• COMP ...................Compressor

• EXPAND ...............Expander

• COMP.(H)..............Compander (hard)

• COMP.(S)..............Compander (soft)

F GR (Gain Reduction)

Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by

the compressor, in a range of -18 dB to 0 dB.

G Output meter

Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed

through the compressor.

H PARAMETER

Here you can edit the parameters of the compressor.

The type of parameters and their ranges will differ

depending on the compressor type. For details on the

types of parameter and their function, refer to the

appendix.

Move the cursor to the COMP ON/OFF but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key to turn the

compressor on.

Use the STEREO LINK button to turn com-

pressor linking for paired channels on or

off, and the POSITION ﬁeld to select the

compressor insert point as required.

Move the cursor to the parameter you want

to edit and use either the [DATA/JOG] dial

or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the parameter as

required.

Applying and controlling compression by using knobs 1–

4 in the Selected Channel section.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],

and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the chan-

nel to which compression is to be applied.

Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]

key so that it’s indicator lights.

With the default settings the DYNAMICS screen will

appear automatically. The display will not change if

the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DIS-

PLAY button is set to OFF.

Rotate Selected Channel knobs 1–4.

The parameters for the channels selected in step 1 will

change accordingly.

The knobs control the following parameters.

* TOTAL: Multiple parameters are changed simultaneously to vary

the compression effect.

If the UTILITY screen Preference

page AUTO DISPLAY button is set

to OFF, a popup window showing

the current compression settings

will appear while Selected Channel

knobs 1–4 are being operated.

•You cannot change the compressor type via this page. If you

want to use a different type, you must recall a library setting

that uses the desired type. For details on recalling library

compression settings, refer to “EQ/Dynamics Processor

Library Operation” on page 154.

HINT

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ON/OFF button.

HINT

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STEREO LINK button.

HINT

•You can save your current compressor settings in the library

as described in “EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation”

on page 154.

HINT

Selected Channel

knobs 1–4

1 2 3 4

Parameters TOTAL* Threshold Ratio Gain

■ Compressor Control via

the Selected Channel section

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

154

The AW2400 includes “setup libraries” that contain preset EQ, gate, and compressor settings

that can be recalled and used in a variety of situations. The libraries can also be used to store

your own settings for easy recall as needed.

This section describes the procedure for accessing the EQ/

Dynamics Library screens and recalling library presets.

From this library you can recall EQ settings to the cur-

rently selected channel. Of library numbers 001–128,

numbers 001–040 are read-only, and 041–128 can be used

to store your own settings.

EQ library operations are performed via the PAN/EQ

screen EQ Lib. page.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],

and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the target

channel.

Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/

EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then

press Selected Channel knob 2, 3, or 4.

The PAN/EQ screen will appear.

Press the Display section [F2] key, or press

the [PAN/EQ] key as many times as neces-

sary until the EQ Lib. page appears.

The EQ Lib. page includes the following items.

1 Current Response Curve

A graphic representation of the current EQ curve for

the currently selected channel.

B Output Meter

Displays the signal level after the EQ stage.

C EQ Curve

A graphic representation of the EQ curve of the cur-

rently selected EQ setting in the library list.

D List

A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row

highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently

selected for operation. An icon indicates read-only

library settings.

E Buttons

These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL,

STORE, and CLEAR functions. Detailed description

of their operation begins on page 156.

From this library you can recall gate settings to the cur-

rently selected input channel. Of library numbers 001–

128, numbers 001–004 are read-only, and 005–128 can be

used to store your own settings.

Gate library operations are performed via the DYNAM-

ICS screen Gate Lib. page.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL] and

[SEL] keys to select the target channel.

Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]

key so that its indicator lights, then press

Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4.

The DYNAMICS screen will appear.

EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation

• If necessary library recall can be automated using the AW2400’s Automix record/playback

capabilities (

→

p. 181).

HINT

Accessing the EQ/Dynamics

Library screens

■ Recalling EQ Library settings

• When a TYPE II EQ library preset is recalled to a channel

that only allows TYPE

I EQ (the input channels, effect return

channels, and AUX channels), the EQ preset will be recalled

as TYPE

I EQ.

NOTE

■ Recalling Gate Library settings

EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

155

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Press the Display section [F2] key, or press

the [DYN] key as many times as necessary

until the Gate Lib. page appears.

The Gate Lib. page includes the following items.

1 Current Type

The currently selected gate type for the currently

selected channel.

B Current Gate Response

A graphic representation of the current gate response

for the currently selected channel. The horizontal axis

represents input level, and the vertical axis represents

output level.

C Meter

Displays the signal level after the gate, and the amount

of gain reduction.

D Gate Curve

A graphic representation of the gate curve of the cur-

rently selected gate setting in the library list.

E List

A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row

highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently

selected for operation. An icon indicates read-only

library settings.

F Buttons

These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL,

STORE, and CLEAR functions. Detailed description

of their operation begins on page 156.

From this library you can recall compressor settings to the

currently selected channel. Of library numbers 001–128,

numbers 001–036 are read-only, and 037–128 can be used

to store your own settings.

Compressor library operations are performed via the

DYNAMICS screen Comp Lib. page.

Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL],

and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the target

channel.

Press the Selected Channel section [DYN]

key so that its indicator lights, then press

Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4.

The DYNAMICS screen will appear.

Press the Display section [F4] key, or press

the [DYN] key as many times as necessary

until the Comp Lib. page appears.

The Comp Lib. page includes the following items.

1 Current Type

The currently selected compressor type for the cur-

rently selected channel.

B Current Compression Response

A graphic representation of the current compression

response for the currently selected channel. The hori-

zontal axis represents input level, and the vertical axis

represents output level.

C Meter

Displays the signal level after the compressor, and the

amount of gain reduction.

D Compression Curve

A graphic representation of the compression curve of

the currently selected compressor setting in the library

list.

E List

A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row

highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently

selected for operation. An icon indicates read-only

library settings.

■ Recalling Compressor Library Settings

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

156

F Buttons

These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL,

STORE, and CLEAR functions. For details on their

operation refer to the following explanations.

Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in

the libraries.

Access the page containing the library to

be edited.

For details on accessing the various library pages refer

to “Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens” on

page 154.

Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library setting to be edited.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for editing.

Move the cursor to the RENAME button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

Enter a name for the selected library set-

ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for

details on name entry).

This conﬁrms and enters the new name.

The procedure for recalling stored library settings is as

follows.

Access the page containing the library set-

tings to be recalled.

For details on accessing the various library pages refer

to “Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens” on

page 154.

Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library setting to be recalled.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for recall.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the recall operation will

appear.

The following illustration is an example of when the

RECALL button is pressed in the PAN/EQ screen EQ

Lib. page.

To actually recall the selected setting move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Changing EQ/Dynamics Library

Names

• The names of read-only library settings (those marked with an

icon) cannot be changed.

NOTE

• The [INC]/[DEC] keys can also be used to select library set-

tings.

HINT

• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.

HINT

Recalling EQ/Dynamics Library

settings

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.

HINT

• The recall conﬁrmation popup window can be disabled if

desired. Refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 211 for

details.

HINT

EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

157

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

The procedure for storing library settings is as follows.

Access the page containing the library to

which the settings are to be stored.

For details on accessing the various library pages refer

to “Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens” on

page 154.

Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library number to which the settings are to

be stored.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for storage.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

As required, enter a name for the selected

library setting, move the cursor to the OK

button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to

page 32 for details on name entry).

The library setting will be stored.

The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as

follows.

Access the page containing the library set-

tings to be erased.

For details on accessing the various library pages refer

to “Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens” on

page 154.

Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

library setting to be erased.

The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected to be erased.

Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the clear operation will

appear.

The following illustration is an example of when the

CLEAR button is pressed in the PAN/EQ screen EQ

Lib. page.

To actually erase the selected setting move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Storing EQ/Dynamics Library

settings

•New settings cannot be stored to read-only library settings (those

marked with an icon).

• If you select and store to a library number that contains previously-

stored data, the previous data will be overwritten.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.

HINT

• The store NAME EDIT popup window can be disabled if

desired. Refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 211 for

details.

HINT

Erasing EQ/Dynamics Library

settings

• Read-only library settings (those marked with an icon) cannot

be erased.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.

HINT

158

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing

159

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Scene Memory

Chapter 17

Scene Memory

In this section we’ll cover the functions and operation of the AW2400’s scene

memory.

The AW2400 allows the mix, effect, and other parameters for all channels to be stored in internal

“scene” memory. Up to 99 scenes can be stored for each song. Stored scenes can be recalled at

any time via the AW2400 panel controls or via MIDI program change commands. Scene recall

operations can also be recorded and played back as Automix data.

The main parameters stored with each scene are as follows:

Scene store and recall operations are carried out from the SCENE screen Library page.

To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB sec-

tion [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or press the

[F1] key after pressing the [SCENE] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 List

This area lists the data stored in the scene memory. The

line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is

selected for operation. Read-only data is indicated by a

“lock” icon.

B RENAME button

Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can

edit the name of the scene selected in the list.

C RECALL button

Recalls the scene that is selected in the list.

D STORE button

Stores the current settings into the location selected in the

list.

E CLEAR button

Deletes the scene that is selected in the list.

F PROTECT button

Applies protection to the scene that is selected in the list.

About Scene Memory

•Fader positions for all channels and buses

• [ON] key settings

•Pan settings

• EQ settings

• Dynamics settings

• Attenuation settings

• Phase settings

• Routing settings

•Pair/group settings

•AUX send settings

• Effect parameter settings

Scene Memory Operation

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Scene Memory Operation

Scene Memory

160

Entering a new name for a scene.

Call the SCENE screen Library page by

either pressing the [SCENE] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [SCENE] key.

Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

scene to be renamed.

The dotted frame indicates the currently selected

scene. You can use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll

through the list regardless of the position of the cursor.

Move the cursor to the RENAME button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

Enter the new name. Then move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key. (For details on entering a name

→ p. 32)

The new name will be applied.

Here’s how to recall (load) settings from a scene.

Call the SCENE screen Library page by

either pressing the [SCENE] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [SCENE] key.

Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list so

that the scene you want to recall is

enclosed in the dotted frame.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the Recall

operation.

To execute the recall operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The scene will be recalled.

Renaming a scene

• In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can

be used to make selections.

HINT

• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.

HINT

Recalling scene data

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.

HINT

• The conﬁrmation popup window can be disabled so that it

does not appear when you perform a Recall operation. For

details, refer to “AW2400 Preferences” (

→

p. 211).

HINT

Scene Memory Operation

Scene Memory

161

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to store the current settings in a scene mem-

ory.

Call the SCENE screen Library page by

either pressing the [SCENE] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [SCENE] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through

the list to select the store destination (the

store destination should be enclosed in the

dotted frame).

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to assign a name to the data.

Enter the name as required, then move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key. (For details on entering a

name → p. 32)

The scene will be stored.

Here’s how you can delete unwanted scene data.

Call the SCENE screen Library page by

either pressing the [SCENE] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [SCENE] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through

the list to select the scene to be deleted

(the selected scene should be enclosed in

the dotted frame).

Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear, asking you to conﬁrm

the Delete operation.

To execute the Delete operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The scene will be deleted.

Applying protection to a scene so that it can’t be edited or

erased.

Call the SCENE screen Library page by

either pressing the [SCENE] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [SCENE] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through

the list to select the scene to be protected

(the selected scene should be enclosed in

the dotted frame).

Move the cursor to the PROTECT button

and press the [ENTER] key.

When protection is turned on the PROTECT button

will appear inverted and a lock icon will appear to the

right of the scene name.

Storing scene data

• Scene 0 is a recall-only scene to which new data cannot be

stored.

• If you select and store to a scene that already contains data, the

previous scene data will be overwritten and lost. Be careful not to

overwrite scene data you want to keep.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.

HINT

Deleting scene data

• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.

HINT

Protecting a scene

“lock” icon

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Using the Recall Safe function

Scene Memory

162

You can specify that speciﬁc faders or speciﬁc channels will be excluded from Recall operations

when the scene is changed either manually or from an external MIDI device. This function is

called “Recall Safe.”

This is convenient, for example, if you are performing a mixdown while switching scenes, but

want to control speciﬁc channels manually.

Call the RCL Safe page by either pressing

the [SCENE] key as many times as neces-

sary, or by pressing the [F2] key after

pressing the [SCENE] key.

The SCENE screen RCL Safe page will appear.

1 RCL.SAFE button

This button switches Recall Safe between ENABLE

and DISABLE. Move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key to switch to either ENABLE or

DISABLE.

B MODE ﬁeld

The recall safe parameters can be selected from the

following:

• ALL button...........This prevents all parameters in

the scene from being recalled.

The entire scene is “recall safe”

and no change will occur if it is

inadvertently recalled.

•FADER button......Only the fader settings will not

be recalled.

• ON button.............Only the [ON] key settings will

not be recalled.

C EFFECT button

Turn this button on to prevent recall (recall safe) of the

effect settings. The button will appear inverted when

on.

D CHANNEL ﬁeld

Selects the recall safe channels. The mix parameters of

selected channels will not be recalled.

The CHANNEL ﬁeld buttons correspond to the fol-

lowing channels.

• INPUT......................... Input channels 1–16

• EFFECT RETURN ..... Effect Return channels 1–4

• TRACK....................... Track channels 1–24

•BUS............................ Bus master 1, 2

•AUX............................ AUX send master 1–4

• EFFECT SEND .......... Effect send master 1–4

• STEREO..................... Stereo output channel

Select the parameter(s) or channel(s) that

you want to set to Recall Safe, and activate

the corresponding button(s).

Move the cursor to the RCL.SAFE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

Recall Safe has now been enabled. The selected

parameter(s) and/or channel(s) will not be affected by

scene recall operations until you change this setting.

Using the Recall Safe function

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RCL.SAFE button.

HINT

• Both the FADER and ON buttons can be on at the same time.

• When the ALL button is turned on the FADER and ON buttons

are automatically turned off.

HINT

• Effect return settings are not affected by Recall Safe.

NOTE

• All CHANNEL ﬁeld buttons can be cleared (de-selected) by

pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key.

HINT

• The RCL Safe page settings are shared by all songs.

HINT

Moving scenes

Scene Memory

163

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Scene data stored in any scene number from 1 through 99 can be moved to any other scene

number.

Call the Sort page by either pressing the

[SCENE] key as many times as necessary,

or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing

the [SCENE] key.

The SCENE screen Sort page will appear.

1 SOURCE list

Displays the scenes in their current order. The scene to

be moved is selected from this list.

B DESTINATION list

The move destination for the source scene selected

from the SOURCE list is selected here.

C EXECUTE button

Executes the scene move operation.

Move the cursor to the SOURCE list and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene

to be moved.

Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the

destination.

The destination will be indicated by the “INSERT

POINT” indication in this list.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

The selected scene will be moved and the SOURCE

and DESTINATION lists will be updated to reﬂect the

results of the operation.

Moving scenes

• In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can

be used to make selections.

HINT

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the EXECUTE button.

HINT

164

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Scene Memory

165

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Song management

Chapter 18

Song management

This chapter explains how to perform song management operations such as

copying, deleting, backing up, and restoring songs.

On the AW2400, your recorded compositions are man-

aged in units called “songs.” When you save a song on the

hard disk, the audio data, scene memories, and the data for

each library are all stored together. By loading a saved

song, you can return it to the original condition at any

time.

You can store as many songs on the internal hard disk as

its capacity allows. Songs stored on hard disk are divided

into a song ﬁle containing all the basic setup information

for the song, and WAV ﬁles containing the audio data.

The AW2400 allows the bit depth of individual songs to

be set to either 16 or 24 bits. 24-bit songs are capable of

providing higher audio quality than 16-bit songs, but the

following limitations on the number of simultaneous

record/playback tracks apply.

*For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two, and the

number of simultaneous playback tracks is 24 for 16-bit songs, or 12

for 24-bit songs.

Only 24-bit audio data can be used in 24-bit songs. 16-bit

WAV ﬁles cannot be imported from a computer or CD-

RW drive. Audio data imported from audio CDs, however,

will be automatically converted to 24-bit format. In the

same way, only 16-bit audio data can be used in 16-bit

songs.

About songs

■ Song Organization

Song Bit Depth

Max. Simultaneous

Record Tracks

Max. Simultaneous

Play Tracks

16 bits

16 8

123

0* 24*

24 bits

111

0* 12*

■ Song Bit Depth

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

About songs

Song management

166

Song and related data stored on hard disk can be accessed from a computer

connected via USB in the same way as the hierarchical ﬁles and folders on the

computer’s hard disk. The folders are organized as follows:

■ Song Folder Organization

004 Song Name.AWS

Song2

002 Song Name.AWS

Song1

001 Song Name.AWS

003 Song Name.AWS

Audio

0.WAV

Render

005 Song Name.AWS

001 Song Name.AWS

AW2400_SYS.BIN

1.WAV

2.WAV

3.WAV

“AW2400-1” Drive “AW2400-2” Drive

File Name1.WAV

File Name2.WAV

Transport

0.WAV

1.WAV

2.WAV

3.WAV

Render

Audio

■ “Song1” Folder

Songs are stored in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder.

■ Individual Song Folders

Each song is stored in a folder bearing the song’s name

(extension .AWS).

● Song Files

The following song settings are stored in a ﬁle bearing

the name of the song (extension .AWS):

• Recorder section settings (SONG screen, TRACK screen).

• Mixer section settings (channels, effects).

• Library settings.

• REMOTE screen settings.

■ “Audio” Folder

The following song audio data is saved in WAV ﬁle for-

mat. File names are automatically created in the order of

recording, as in: “0.WAV”, “1.WAV”, “2.WAV”, etc. 24-bit

song data is saved as 32-bit WAV ﬁles.

• 24 + 2 (stereo track) audio x 8 virtual tracks.

• Sound clip audio data.

•Audio data for undo and redo operations.

● System File (AW2400_SYS.BIN)

Stores UTILITY screen settings and information for data man-

agement.

■ “Song2” Folder

Songs are stored in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder.

■ “Transport” Folder

This folder is used to store WAV ﬁles for import and export.

Data is stored as 16-bit or 24-bit WAV ﬁles.

167

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Song management

The following operations are possible by directly access-

ing the data on the internal hard disk from a computer. For

detailed operating procedures refer to “WAV File Transfer

(USB Storage Mode)” on page 230.

• Speciﬁed audio data on the internal hard disk can be

directly edited from a computer using an appropriate

waveform editor application. The song will become

unplayable if you change the sampling frequency or

quantization of the audio data, but you can change the

length of the waveforms without problems.

•WAV ﬁles transferred from a computer to the “Transport”

folder can be imported to the AW2400 audio tracks as

required, and speciﬁed regions of audio data can be

exported to the computer as WAV ﬁles which can then

be imported into computer-based DAW applications.

• The entire contents of the internal hard disk or individual

songs can be backed up to the computer.

Song management operations are accessed via the SONG screen Song List page. This page

also includes the shutdown functions.

To call this page press the [SONG] key in the Work Navi-

gate section a number of times, or press the [F1] key after

pressing the [SONG] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 Song List

The songs stored on the internal AW2400 hard disk are

displayed here.

B LOAD button

Loads a speciﬁed song.

C SAVE button

Saves a song.

D NEW button

Creates a new song.

E COPY button

Copies a song.

F OPTIMIZE button

Optimizes a song.

G MIXER IMP button

Imports data from another song.

H DELETE button

Deletes a song.

I SHUTDOWN button

This function is used when turning the AW2400 power

off. Refer to page 38 for detailed shutdown instructions.

•For 24-bit songs, the audio data contained in the “Audio” folders is

stored in 32-bit WAV format. If your waveform editor application

cannot handle 32-bit data, ﬁrst export the WAV ﬁle(s) to the “Trans-

port” folder. WAV ﬁles imported or exported via the “Transport”

folder are automatically converted to 24-bit format that can be

edited using most waveform editor software.

• Song data is created in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder. You

may have to check both of these folders to locate a speciﬁc song.

• If you initialize the AW2400 hard disk from your computer it will

become unreadable by the AW2400. Always use the SONG

screen Song List page to initialize the AW2400 hard disk.

• The song folders also contain audio data for undo and redo opera-

tions that is not normally used. The undo/redo data can be deleted

by performing an Optimize operation (

→

p. 172).

NOTE

Managing Your Songs

About songs • Managing Your Songs

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Managing Your Songs

Song management

168

J Song Name

K Song Size

L Song Bit Depth/Sampling Frequency

M Song Protect Status

N SORT box

Changes the order of songs displayed in the Song List.

O The currently-selected song

In order to begin recording on the AW2400, you must ﬁrst

create a new song.

Call the Song List page by either pressing

the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as

many times as necessary, or by pressing

the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The

currently selected song in the Song List will be high-

lighted (inverted).

Move the cursor to the NEW button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you whether you want to

save the current song.

Move the cursor to YES (to save the current

song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the

current song) and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window containing the various settings for

the new song will appear.

The following settings can be made via this popup

window.

•Fs............................... The sample rate of the new

song can be set to either

44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

• Recbit ........................ The bit depth of the new

song can be set to either 16

or 24 bits.

• Sound Clip Time ....... The record time of the

Sound Clip.

When each parameter has been set as

required, move the cursor to the OK button

and press the [ENTER] key.

Next, a popup window will appear allowing you to

specify settings that will be carried over from the cur-

rent song.

You may choose one or more of the following items.

• SCENE Button .......... Scene memories

• TEMPO button........... Tempo map

• LIBRARY button ....... EQ, dynamics, effects, and

channel libraries

For example, if you have saved effect settings in a

library for the current song and would like to use these

settings for the new song as well, you would turn on

the LIBRARY button.

■ Creating a new song

• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the NEW button.

HINT

• If you set the sample rate to 48 kHz, the song data will not be

able to be written as an audio CD.

NOTE

Managing Your Songs

Song management

169

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Select the buttons of the items you want to

carry over from the current song, move the

cursor to the OK button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to enter a name for the song.

Assign a name to the song (for details on

assigning a name → p. 32).

To create the new song, move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

A new song will be created, and you will return to the

SONG screen Song List page.

Here’s how to edit the song name that is assigned when

you create a new song.

Call the Setting page by either pressing the

Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]

key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Setting page will appear.

To edit the song name, move the cursor to

the RENAME button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allow-

ing you to edit the song name.

Enter the new name. Then move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

The new name will be applied, and the popup window

will close. (For details on inputting a name → p. 32)

•A new song cannot be given the same name as an existing

song.

NOTE

• If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button (instead of the

OK button) and press the [ENTER] key, you will return to the

SONG screen Song List page without creating a new song.

•You may also edit the song name later.

HINT

■ Editing the song name

• This setting applies only to the current song. Before you perform

this procedure, load the song for which the name is to be edited.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Managing Your Songs

Song management

170

Here’s how to load an existing song from the hard disk.

Call the Song List page by either pressing

the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as

many times as necessary, or by pressing

the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The

currently selected song in the Song List will be high-

lighted (inverted).

To change the order of the songs move the

cursor to the SORT box, use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to select the desired sort crite-

rion, and then press the [ENTER] key.

Using the SORT box songs can be sorted according to

the following criteria:

• NAME ........Song names in alphabetical order.

• OLD ...........The order in which the songs were

saved, from newest to oldest.

• SIZE...........Song size, from largest to smallest.

To load a song move the cursor to a loca-

tion outside the SORT box, and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to select the song to be

loaded.

The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the

selected song.

Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the

screen, and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you whether you want to

save the current song.

Move the cursor to either YES (if you want

to save the current song) or NO (if you do

not want to save the current song), and

press the [ENTER] key.

If you select “YES”, the song will be loaded after the

current song has been saved. If you select “NO”, the

song will be loaded and any changes to the current

song will be discarded.

The load operation can be aborted by moving the cur-

sor to the CANCEL button and pressing the [ENTER]

key.

Here’s how to save the current song to the hard disk.

Call the Song List page by either pressing

the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as

many times as necessary, or by pressing

the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear.

Move the cursor to the SAVE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm that you

want to save the current song.

To save the song, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

The song will be saved and the display will revert to

the Song List (step 1). If you move the cursor to the

CANCEL button (instead of the OK button) and press

the [ENTER] key, the Save operation will be can-

celled.

■ Loading and Sorting Songs

SORT Box

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the LOAD button.

HINT

• If you select NO, all changes you made after last saving the

current song will be lost.

NOTE

■ Saving the current song

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAVE button.

HINT

• The song save operation always saves the current song,

regardless of the song that is selected in the list.

•You cannot save a song that is protected. If for example you

have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song, you

must disable the protect setting and then save the song.

NOTE

• If necessary, you can change the name of the song before

you save it (

→

p. 169).

• In the following situations, a popup window will ask whether

you want to save the current song; when you load an existing

song from the hard disk, when you create a new song, or

when you shut-down the AW2400.

•We recommend that you frequently save the song you are

working on or enable the Auto Save function (

→

p. 211) as a

safeguard against data loss due to accidents such as the

AW2400’s power cable being inadvertently disconnected.

HINT

Managing Your Songs

Song management

171

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how to delete a song from the hard disk.

Call the Song List page by either pressing

the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as

many times as necessary, or by pressing

the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The

currently selected song in the Song List will be high-

lighted (inverted).

Move the cursor to a location outside the

SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the song to be deleted.

The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicateds the

selected song to be deleted.

Move the cursor to the DELETE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the delete

operation.

To delete the song, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

The song you selected in step 2 will be deleted, and

you will return to step 1. If you move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the

delete operation will be cancelled.

Here’s how to copy a song in the hard disk.

Call the Song List page by either pressing

the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as

many times as necessary, or by pressing

the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The

currently selected song in the Song List will be high-

lighted (inverted).

Move the cursor to a location outside the

SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the song to be copied.

The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the

selected song to be copied.

Move the cursor to the COPY button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will prompt you to enter new song

name.

Enter a new song title. (For details on input-

ting a name → p. 32)

When the song name has been entered,

move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the copy

operation.

To execute the copy, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

The song you selected in step 2 will be copied, and

you will return to step 1. If you move the cursor to the

CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the copy

operation will be cancelled.

■ Deleting a song

•A deleted song will be lost forever. Use great caution when delet-

ing a song.

•You cannot delete a song for which protect is on, or delete the cur-

rent song (the highlighted song). In order to delete a protected

song or the current song, you must ﬁrst turn off the protect setting

or switch to a different song.

NOTE

■ Copying a song

• If you have selected the current song as the song to be cop-

ied, a popup window will ask you whether you want to save

the current song. Move the cursor to either the YES button (if

you want to save) or the NO button (if you don’t want to save),

and then press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Managing Your Songs

Song management

172

Songs can be “protected” to prevent unwanted changes to

the data. When a song is protected it can’t be recorded to,

edited, or deleted.

Call the Setting page by either pressing the

Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]

key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Setting page will appear.

Move the cursor to a location outside the

SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the song to be protected.

The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the

selected song to be protected.

Move the cursor to the PROTECT button

and press the [ENTER] key.

When protection is turned on the PROTECT button

will be highlighted and a “lock” icon will appear to the

right of the song name.

“Optimize” is an operation that deletes the undo/redo

audio data maintained within the song. When you have

ﬁnished recording and editing a song you can Optimize it

to increase the amount of free space on the hard disk.

Call the Song List page by either pressing

the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as

many times as necessary, or by pressing

the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The

currently selected song in the Song List will be high-

lighted (inverted).

Move the cursor to a location outside the

SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the song to be optimized.

The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the

selected song to be optimized.

Move the cursor to the OPTIMIZE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the optimize

operation.

To execute the optimize operation, move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The undo/redo audio data of the song you selected in

step 2 will be deleted, and you will return to step 1. If

you decide not to execute the optimize operation,

move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the

[ENTER] key.

■ Song Protection

Lock icon

•We recommend that you turn protect on for important songs.

•Even if protect is on, you can still copy the song (

→

p. 171)

and adjust the mixer settings.

HINT

■ Optimizing a song

• The deleted undo/redo audio data will be lost forever. Use this

operation with caution.

NOTE

•You may select the current song to be optimized. In this case,

a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the

current song. Move the cursor to the OK button (if you want to

save) or the CANCEL button (if you don’t want to save), and

press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

Managing Your Songs

Song management

173

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how selected types of data such as scenes or librar-

ies can be imported into the current song from a song

saved on the hard disk.

Call the Song List page by either pressing

the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as

many times as necessary, or by pressing

the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The

currently selected song in the Song List will be high-

lighted (inverted).

Move the cursor to a location outside the

SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the song to be imported.

The line enclosed by the dotted frame is the song you

have selected as the import-source.

Move the cursor to the MIXER IMP button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will appear which allows you to

select the data to be imported.

You can choose one or more of the following items.

• SCENE button .............. Scene memories

• TEMPO button .............. Tempo map

• LIBRARY button ........... EQ, dynamics, effects,

and channel libraries

Select the button(s) corresponding to the

items you want to import to the current

song, then move the cursor to the OK but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

Importing will begin. When the data has been

imported, you will return to the screen of step 1.

■ Importing data from an existing song

• When you execute this import operation, the previous data for that

item in the current song will be lost. Use this procedure with cau-

tion.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Editing various settings for the song

Song management

174

Here’s how to edit various settings for a song, such as selecting the counter display format and

time code format.

Call the Setting page by either pressing the

Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]

key after pressing the [SONG] key.

The SONG screen Setting page will appear.

To change the counter display format move

the cursor to the ABS, RELATIVE, SECOND,

or TIME CODE button and press the

[ENTER] key.

In the Setting page, use the following buttons to select

the display format for the counter that is shown in the

center of the top line in the display.

• ABS (absolute time)

................ Displays the current location in

hours/minutes/seconds/millisec-

onds, with the absolute time zero

location as 0.

• RELATIVE (relative time)

................ Displays the current location in

hours/minutes/seconds/millisec-

onds, with the relative time zero

location as 0.

• SECOND........... Displays the current location in

hours/minutes/seconds/millisec-

onds, with the Start point as 0.

• TIME CODE...... Displays the current location in

time code (hours/minutes/sec-

onds/frames), with the Start point

as 0.

To change the time code frame rate move

the cursor to the 24, 25, 30, or 30D button

and press the [ENTER] key.

You can choose one of the following frame rates to

specify the minimum unit of time code.

•24..........24 frames/second

•25..........25 frames/second

•30..........30 frames/second (30 non-drop frame)

• 30D........29.97 frames/second (30 drop-frame)

Editing various settings for the song

• These settings apply only to the current song. Before you perform this procedure, load the song to be

edited.

• The counter display setting will be saved with the song data when the song is saved.

NOTE

• The counter in the upper right of the display always shows the

current location in measure/beat units, relative to the Start

point.

• The measure/beat display will depend on the settings in the

Tempo page of the EDIT screen. For details, refer to “Creating

a tempo map” (

→

p. 175).

NOTE

• This setting affects both the counter time code display and the

MTC that the AW2400 transmits and receives. If the AW2400

is sending or receiving MTC to or from an external device, you

must set both devices to the same frame rate.

HINT

• The frame rate cannot be changed while the AW2400 is run-

ning.

NOTE

Creating a tempo map

Song management

175

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

The “tempo map” contains data that changes the tempo or time signature at the beginning of the

song or at any measure or beat within the song. The measure/beat display counter, the internal

metronome, and the MIDI clock data generated within the AW2400 are all based on this tempo

map.

When you create a new song, the following tempo map

event will be input at the beginning of the tempo map (the

ﬁrst beat of the ﬁrst measure).

• Time signature: 4/4

•Tempo: 120.0

Here’s how to edit the values of this tempo map event.

Call the EDIT screen Tempo Map page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or

by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the

[EDIT] key.

In this page you can input or edit tempo map events

for the current song.

This page contains the following items.

1 List

This area lists the tempo map events that have been

entered for the current song. The line enclosed by a

dotted frame is the currently selected tempo map

event.

B LOCATE button

By moving the cursor to this button and pressing the

[ENTER] key, you can move the song to the location

of the tempo map event currently selected in the list.

C NEW button

To create an event at the beginning of the measure fol-

lowing the last step, move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key.

D INSERT button

To insert a blank event at the step preceding the tempo

map event currently selected in the list, move the cur-

sor to this button and press the [ENTER] key.

E DELETE button

To delete the tempo map event currently selected in

the list, move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key.

F STEP

Indicates the step number of the tempo map event.

G MEASURE

Indicates the location (measure/beat) of the tempo

map event.

H METER

I TEMPO

These ﬁelds show the time signature and tempo of

each tempo map event.

Creating a tempo map

• The Start point of the song corresponds to the starting location of the tempo map.

• The data (“tempo map events”) recorded in the tempo map will continue to apply until the

next event of the same type is encountered.

HINT

• If you modify the tempo map after recording on an audio track, the measure/beat counter

display values will be affected. For this reason if you want to use MIDI clock to synchro-

nize with an external MIDI device, or if you want to control the song in measure units, you

should create the tempo map before you record. If you modify the tempo map after a

track has already been recorded, a popup window will ask you for conﬁrmation.

NOTE

■ Editing a tempo map event

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Creating a tempo map

Song management

176

Move the cursor to the item that you want to

edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the

value.

If the METER or TEMPO is “–”, move the cursor to

the item and press the [ENTER] key before you edit

the value.

Access the Tempo Map page, move the cur-

sor to the NEW button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

A blank tempo map event will be created after the last

step that is currently input.

Make sure that the cursor is outside the list,

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a

tempo map event that you created.

When the cursor is located outside the list, you can use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the contents of the list.

Move the cursor to the MEASURE ﬁeld of

the event that is selected in the list, and

turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the

location of the event.

You can adjust the location of a tempo map event in

units of measures or beats. However, you cannot move

an event past the preceding or following event.

Move the cursor to the item that you want to

edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust

the value.

If necessary, you can play back the song to check that

the tempo map event works as you expect.

In the same way, use the NEW or INSERT

button to add new events, and set their

parameters.

Here’s how to delete an unwanted event from the tempo

map. (However, you cannot delete the event that is located

at the beginning of the song.)

Access the Tempo Map page, and scroll the

list to select the tempo map event that you

want to delete.

Move the cursor to the DELETE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The selected event will be deleted.

Event Range Content

METER 1/4 to 8/4, –

Speciﬁes the time signature of the

song.

TEMPO 30.0 to 250.0, –

Speciﬁes the tempo of the song.

You can set the tempo in units of

0.1 over a range of 30.0–250.0

BPM.

• The METER and TEMPO at the beginning of the song cannot

be set to “–”.

•You cannot change the METER value to other than “–” for a

step that is not located at beat 1.

NOTE

•You cannot delete the tempo map event located at the begin-

ning of the song, or change its location. If you want to change

the tempo or time signature during the song, you can insert a

new event.

HINT

■ Adding a tempo map event

• If you use the INSERT button instead of the NEW button, a

blank tempo map event will be inserted before the currently

selected step. However, you cannot insert an event before the

tempo map event at the beginning of the song (i.e., the tempo

map event that is input when you create the song).

HINT

■ Deleting a tempo map event

Backing up songs

Song management

177

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Here’s how you can back up songs from the internal hard disk to CD-R/RW media.

Insert CD-R/RW media into the CD-RW

drive.

Call the SONG screen Backup page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or

by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the

[SONG] key.

In this page you can back up songs from the internal

hard disk to CD-R/RW media.

This page contains the following items.

1 List

This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard

disk. The symbols at the right of the list indicate

whether the song has been selected (●) or disabled

() for backup.

B SORT box

Changes the order of the songs displayed in the song

list. Operation is the same as for the Song List page (→

p. 170).

C ALL SET button

Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]

key to select all songs in the list for backup. Pressing

the [F1] key whiled holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL SET but-

ton.

D ALL CLEAR Button

Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]

key to deselect all songs so that they won’t be backed

up. Pressing the [F2] key whiled holding the Display

section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL

CLEAR button.

E AW2400 button / AW2816 button

Selects the backup format. If the songs are to be

restored on a Yamaha AW-series workstation other

than the AW2400 (AW4416, AW2816, AW1600,

AW16G), select the AW2816 button. This mode only

supports 44.1kHz/16-bit songs, and only one song can

be backed up at a time.

F BACKUP button

Executes backup of the selected song(s). Pressing the

[F4] key whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT]

key has the same affect as the BACKUP button.

Make sure that the cursor is in the list area,

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song

you want to back up, and then press the

[ENTER] key.

The symbol for the selected song will change to the

(●) symbol, indicating that this song has been selected

for backup. You can repeat this step to select multiple

songs for backup.

If you turn on the ALL SET button, you can select all

data in the list in one step.

Backing up songs

•To backup AW2400 data to a computer, connect the AW2400 to the computer via a USB cable and copy the

song folders directly from the internal AW2400 hard disk to the computer. For detailed operation refer to

“WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)” on page 230.

NOTE

178

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Song management

To execute the backup, move the cursor to

the BACKUP button and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the opera-

tion.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

Writing to the CD-R/RW media will begin. If you

decide to cancel the backup operation, move the cursor

to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

While the backup operation is being executed, a popup

window will indicate the progress of the operation.

When the backup has been completed, you will return

to step 2.

If the backup data does not ﬁt on a single volume of

media, a message of “Number Ejected Media, Insert

Blank Media.” will appear, and the media will be

ejected. Insert a new media volume. Then move the

cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

Here’s how song data that you backed up to CD-R/RW media can be restored to the hard disk of

the AW2400.

Insert the CD-R/RW media containing the

backup data into the CD-RW drive.

If the backup data occupies more than one volume of

media, insert the ﬁrst volume.

Call the SONG screen Restore page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or

by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the

[SONG] key.

In this page, song data that you backed up to CD-R/

RW media can be restored to the internal hard disk.

Make sure that the cursor is located at the

READ CD INFO button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Information will be read from the inserted CD-R/RW

media. When the information has been read, a display

like the following will appear.

• If previously-recorded CD-RW media is inserted in the CD-

RW drive, a popup window will ask you if it is OK to erase the

media ﬁrst. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key, and the media will be erased.

• If a CD-ROM or previously-recorded CD-R media is inserted

in the CD-RW drive, a popup window with a message of

“Change Media, Please” will appear, and the media will be

ejected. Remove the media, and replace it with writable

media.

NOTE

•You cannot execute the backup operation without selecting

data.

• If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2400 but-

ton turned on, system data (the settings you make in the

UTILITY screen or the MIDI screen) will be backed up on the

media together with the selected data.

• If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2816 but-

ton turned on, data other than audio tracks will not be backed

up. All virtual tracks for tracks 1–16 are backup up. Tracks 17–

24 are not backed up. Only the current track data for stereo

track is backed up. Only 44.1kHz/16-bit songs are supported.

• When you restore data that was backed up to more than one

media volume, you must insert the media in the order in which

it was backed up. Be sure to make a note of the backup

sequence on the label surface of each CD-R/RW disc.

NOTE

Restoring songs

Backing up songs • Restoring songs

Restoring songs

Song management

179

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

This page contains the following items.

1 List

This area lists the data that has been backed up on the

CD-R/RW media. The symbols at the right of the list

indicate whether an item of data has been selected (●)

or disabled ( ) for restore.

B SORT box

Changes the order of the songs displayed in the song

list. Operation is the same as for the Song List page (→

p. 170).

C ALL SET button

Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]

key to select all songs in the list to be restored. Press-

ing the [F1] key whiled holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL SET but-

ton.

D ALL CLEAR button

Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]

key to deselect all songs so that they won’t be restored.

Pressing the [F2] key whiled holding the Display sec-

tion [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL

CLEAR button.

E SYSTEM button

Selects the system data (AW2400 settings you make in

the UTILITY screen) for restoring.

F RESTORE button

Restores of the selected song(s). Pressing the [F4] key

whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has

the same affect as the RESTORE button.

Make sure the cursor is in the list area, use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song you

want to restore, then press the [ENTER]

key.

The symbol at the right will change to the (●) symbol,

indicating that this song data has been selected for

restoring.

If you turn on the ALL SET button, all data shown in

the list will be selected in one step.

If you want to restore the system data,

move the cursor to the SYSTEM button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The button will be turned on, and the system data will

be selected for restoring.

To execute the restore operation, move the

cursor to the RESTORE button and press

the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the opera-

tion.

Move the cursor to the OK button if you

want to execute the restore operation (or to

the CANCEL button if you decide not to

restore), and press the [ENTER] key.

The current song will be saved automatically, and the

restore operation will begin.

A popup window will indicate the progress of the

restore operation. When the operation is ﬁnished, you

will return to step 3.

If the backup occupied more than one CD-R/RW disc,

a message of “Exchange Next Media #XXX” (where

XXX is a number) will be displayed during the restore

process. Exchange the CD-R/RW media for the media

of the corresponding number. Then move the cursor to

the OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

• The maximum number of songs that can be displayed is 100.

NOTE

• When a song with the same name already exists, the name of

the restored song will automatically be changed. For exam-

ple, if “001_Song” already exists, the song name will be

altered as in: “001_Song0”, “001_Song1” ... etc.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations

Song management

180

You can back up an AW2400 song in a format that is compatible with the other AW-series

(AW4416/AW2816/AW1600/AW16G). Conversely, a song that was backed up by the other AW-

series can be restored into the AW2400.

If you turn on the AW2816 button in the Backup page of

the SONG screen, the data will be saved in the AW2816

backup ﬁle format.

An AW2816 backup ﬁle can be restored into the other

AW-series (version 2.0 or later for AW4416). For the pro-

cedure, refer to “Backing up songs,” earlier in this manual.

Insert the CD-R/RW media containing

songs from other AW-series workstations

to be restored into the AW2400.

Call the SONG screen Restore page by

either pressing the Work Navigate section

[SONG] key as many times as necessary, or

by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the

[SONG] key.

Make sure that the cursor is located at the

READ CD INFO button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Information will be read from the inserted CD-R/RW

media.

Make sure the cursor is in the list area, use

the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song you

want to restore, then press the [ENTER]

key.

A “●” mark will appear for songs selected to be

restored.

Repeat step 4 to select all of the other AW-

series songs that you want to restore.

Move the cursor to the RESTORE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the opera-

tion.

Move the cursor to the OK button if you

want to execute the restore operation, and

press the [ENTER] key.

The restore operation will begin. While the song data

is being loaded, a popup window will indicate the

progress.

Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations

• Only the audio data recorded in a song can be exchanged with the other AW-series workstations.

Mix parameters, libraries, and system data cannot be backed-up/restored in this way.

NOTE

■ Backing up an AW2400 song in a format

compatible with the other AW-series

• Backup in the AW2816 backup ﬁle format is limited to one song at

a time.

• When you perform a backup in the AW2816 backup ﬁle format,

data other than the audio tracks will not be backed up. All virtual

tracks for tracks 1–16 are backup up. Tracks 17–24 are not backed

up. Only the current track data for stereo track is backed up. Only

44.1kHz/16-bit songs are supported.

• Depending on the data size, some songs can’t be saved as

AW2816 backup ﬁles. If this problem occurs use the Optimize

function to reduce the data size.

NOTE

■ Restoring songs from other

AW-series workstations

• The list will show all the songs that were backed up to CD-R/

RW media, but you can execute the restore operation only for

44.1 kHz/16-bit songs.

NOTE

181

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix

Chapter 19

Automix

Operation of the AW2400 Automix features is described below.

Automix allows operations such as fader moves and [ON] switch state changes to be recorded

and played back in real time. For example, you can record complex mixdown/bounce operations

using Automix so that they can be precisely reproduced as many times as necessary.

The parameters that can be recorded by Automix are as follows.

When recording to Automix you can break complex oper-

ations down and record them channel by channel or

parameter by parameter in several takes, and even “punch

in/out” so you can record just a speciﬁed region of a song.

Furthermore, the recorded Automix data can be displayed

in a list and edited for precise control.

Up to 16 Automix sequences can be recorded in a dedi-

cated library and recalled whenever needed. The current

Automix data as well as the Library contents are saved

independently with each AW2400 song.

Automix operation is carried out from the AUTOMIX screen Automix page.

To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB sec-

tion [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or

press the [F1] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 MODE ﬁeld

Turns Automix on or off, as well as switching between the

record and playback modes.

• ENABLE/DISABLE button

................... Enables or disables Automix.

•STOP button....... Stops Automix recording or playback

(does not affect recorder operation).

Appears inverted when Automix is

stopped.

• PLAY button ....... While the recorder section is running

and Automix recording/playback is

stopped, pressing this button after

pressing the REC button engages

the Automix record standby mode.

Appears inverted during Automix

recording and playback.

About Automix

•Fader operation for each channel

• [ON] key operation for each channel

•Pan operation for each channel

• EQ operation for each channel

•AUX and effect send operation for each channel

• Scene and library recall operations

Automix Operation

A B C

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix Operation

Automix

182

• REC button ..........Turning this button on while the

recorder section is stopped engages

the Automix record standby mode.

When the recorder section is run-

ning it is necessary to press the

PLAY button after the REC button to

engage the Automix record standby

mode.

This button is automatically disen-

gaged when recording is completed.

•AUTOREC button

.....................Engages the Automix record

standby mode. Unlike the REC but-

ton, this button remains engaged

after recording is completed and the

record standby mode will remain

engaged until it is manually turned

off.

B COMMAND ﬁeld

Allows creation of a new Automix recording, and provides

an undo function.

• NEW button..........Clears the current Automix data to

make way for a new Automix record-

ing.

• UNDO button .......Clears the last recorded Automix

data, returning to the state immedi-

ately before the last Automix record-

ing pass.

C OVERWRITE ﬁeld

Selects the parameters to be recorded (or overwritten) by

Automix recording.

The buttons correspond to the parameters as follows.

• CH ON button ......[ON] key operation for each channel

•FADER button......Fader operation for each channel

•AUX/EFFECT SEND ON button

.....................AUX and effect send operation for

each channel (mute on/off)

•AUX/EFFECT SEND button

.....................AUX and effect send level operation

for each channel

• EQ button.............EQ operation for each channel

•PAN button...........Pan operation for each channel

D FREE

Displays the amount of free Automix memory available in

kilobytes (KB) and as a percentage.

A new Automix recording must be created before actual

Automix recording can occur.

Use the channel faders, pan controls, EQ,

etc., to set up the mix at the beginning of

the current song, and save the mix as a

scene.

The saved “initial” scene will serve as the starting

point for the Automix recording. To use a different

scene as the starting point for the Automix recording,

recall the desired scene. Refer to “Scene Memory

Operation” on page 159 for details.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Move the cursor to the NEW button in the

COMMAND ﬁeld and press the [ENTER]

key.

A conﬁrmation popup window for the new Automix

recording will appear.

Move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

The current Automix data will be erased and a new

Automix recording will be created.

Creation of a new Automix recording can be aborted

by moving the cursor to the CANCEL button and

pressing the [ENTER] key.

• Pressing the [F1]–[F4] keys while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ENABLE/DISABLE ([F1]

key), STOP ([F2] key), PLAY ([F3] key), and REC ([F4] key) but-

tons, respectively.

HINT

• Using the RETURN TIME ﬁeld to the right of the FADER button

you can specify how long it will take the faders to return to their

original positions when Automix recording is stopped or punched

out (

→

p. 185).

• Scene and library recall operations are always recorded, regard-

less of the OVERWRITE ﬁeld settings.

HINT

Creating a New Automix

Recording

• The contents of the current Automix recording will be erased when

a new Automix recording is created. To save the current Automix

data refer to “Automix Library Operation” on page 190.

NOTE

• When a new Automix recording is created, a “recall event” for

the last saved or recalled scene is recorded at the very begin-

ning of the Automix recording. This initial scene can be

changed later, as described on page 188.

HINT

Automix Operation

183

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix

Here’s how to record mix operation data to the newly cre-

ated Automix recording.

Move the song location to just before the

point at which you want to begin recording

the Automix data.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Move the cursor to the

ENABLE/DISABLE button in

the MODE ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

The button will switch to

“ENABLE”, and Automix operation

will be enabled.

Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE ﬁeld

and engage the buttons corresponding to

the parameters you want to record.

Use the OVERWRITE ﬁeld buttons to select the types

of data you want to record: CH ON. FADER, AUX/

EFFECT SEND ON, AUX EFFECT SEND, EQ, PAN.

Parameters corresponding to buttons that are not

engaged will not be recorded even if they are operated

during Automix recording.

Move the cursor to the MODE ﬁeld and

press the REC button.

The REC button will ﬂash. The Automix record

standby mode is now engaged, and the [AUTOMIX]

key will ﬂash red.

Use the Layer section keys to select the

mixing layer that includes the channels you

want to operate.

For example, to record operations on the track channel

faders engage either the Layer section [TRACK 1-12]

or [TRACK 13-24] key.

Press the top-panel PLAY [ ] key to start

song playback.

The [AUTOMIX] key will light red and Automix

recording will begin. But at this point no channel has

been selected so no data recording will actually take

place.

Use the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO

SEL] keys to select the channel for which

Automix data is to be recorded.

The selected key will ﬂash orange and the correspond-

ing channel’s parameters can be recorded to Automix.

Recording the Automix Data

• Scene and library recall operations will be recorded regard-

less of the OVERWRITE ﬁeld button selections.

HINT

•You can also begin recording after engaging the AUTOREC

button rather than the REC button. The REC button is auto-

matically turned off when you stop recording and the record

standby mode is disengaged, but the AUTOREC button

remains on and the record standby mode remains engaged

until it is manually turned off.

HINT

•You can switch mixing layers even after Automix recording

has been started.

• If you plan to record operations performed in the Selected

Channel section it is a good idea to select the appropriate

parameters before starting recording. For example, if you plan

to record pan changes, engage the Selected Channel section

[PAN/EQ] key before beginning.

HINT

• Multiple channels can be selected for Automix recording.

• If you press a key that is ﬂashing orange during Automix

recording, the key will light continuously and Automix record-

ing for the corresponding channel will be disengaged

(punched out). Refer to “Punch In and Out of Automix” on

page 185 for details.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix Operation

Automix

184

Perform the required mix operations.

The speciﬁed mix parameters will be recorded for the

speciﬁed channel(s).

The parameters speciﬁed for recording in step 4 are

actually recorded as follows.

● CH ON/FADER

Operate the channel [ON] key or fader.

● AUX/EFFECT SEND ON

Call the AUX or EFFECT screen, move the cursor to

the channel for which AUX or effect send is to be

turned on or off, and press the [ENTER] key.

● AUX/EFFECT SEND

Call the AUX or EFFECT screen and rotate the appro-

priate Selected Channel knob, 1–4. Alternatively you

can move the cursor to the appropriate on-screen knob

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

adjust the send level.

● EQ

Recall the PAN/EQ screen and use the [LOW], [LO-

MID], [HI-MID], or [HIGH] key to band to be

adjusted, then use Selected Channel knobs 2–4 to

adjust the selected band as required. Alternatively you

can move the cursor to the appropriate knobs in the

PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the EQ. EQ

ON/OFF switching is also recorded.

● PAN

Recall the PAN/EQ screen and rotate Selected Chan-

nel knob 1. Alternatively you can move the cursor to

the on-screen knobs and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

[INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the PAN.

● Scene/Library

Scene, channel, EQ, gate, compressor, and effect set-

ups are recalled via the corresponding library pages.

When all required mix operations have

been recorded, press the top-panel STOP

[■] key to stop the song.

The [AUTOMIX] key will go out, the MODE ﬁeld

REC button will be turned off, and the Automix record

standby mode will be disengaged. At the same time a

popup window asking you to conﬁrm whether you

want to update the recorded Automix data will appear.

To conﬁrm and update the recorded data

move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

The recorded Automix data will be updated. You can

abort this operation and revert to the previously

recorded Automix data by moving the cursor to the

CANCEL button rather than the OK button and press-

ing the [ENTER] key.

• Effect parameter operations can not be recorded to Automix.

NOTE

•ATT. knob operation and EQ type selections are not recorded

to Automix.

NOTE

• When making an Automix recording for multiple channels,

only the last channel selected can be operated via the

Selected Channel controls.

• During Automix recording the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STE-

REO SEL] keys are used to punch the corresponding chan-

nels in or out. The safest way to switch the selected channel

during Automix recording is to move the cursor to the appro-

priate location in the PAN/EQ, EFFECT, or AUX screen.

NOTE

•Automix recording can be stopped without stopping song

playback by moving the cursor to the STOP button in the

AUTOMIX screen Automix page and pressing the [ENTER]

key (or by pressing the [F2] key while holding the [SHIFT]

key).

• If you turn on the AUTOREC button rather than the REC but-

ton in step 5, the Automix record standby mode will remain

engaged even when song playback is stopped. This method

is best when you want to make repeated passes at an Auto-

mix recording.

HINT

• After conﬁrming and updating the recorded Automix data you

can still undo the operation and revert to the previously

recorded Automix data by moving the cursor to the UNDO

button in the COMMAND ﬁeld and pressing the [ENTER] key.

Please note that the top-panel [UNDO] key cannot be used to

undo Automix recordings.

• The current Automix data can be stored to the Automix library

or a preciously stored Automix recording can be recalled from

the library. Refer to “Automix Library Operation” on page 190

for details.

HINT

Automix Operation

185

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix

Playing back an Automix recording.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Make sure that the ENABLE/DISABLE but-

ton is set to “ENABLE”.

If it is set to “DISABLE” move the cursor to the but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key. The [AUTOMIX] key

will light green.

Press the top-panel PLAY [ ] key to start

song playback.

Automix playback will begin along with song play-

back. During this time the MODE ﬁeld PLAY button

will appear inverted.

To stop Automix playback press the top-

panel STOP [■] key.

Both song playback and Automix playback will stop.

Automix playback will stop automatically if song

playback is continued past the point at which Automix

recording was stopped (song playback will continue).

Punch-In/Out recording is handy if you want to re-record

just a portion of an Automix recording. The procedure will

be described in this section, using re-recording of a track

channel fader move as an example.

Locate the song to a point just before you

want to begin re-recording the Automix

data.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Make sure that the MODE ﬁeld ENABLE/

DISABLE button is set to “ENABLE”.

Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE ﬁeld

and engage the buttons corresponding to

the parameters you want to record.

Set the return time as required by moving

the cursor to the RETURN TIME ﬁeld and

using the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC].

Return time determines the length of time it will take

for the faders to return to the previously-recorded lev-

els after Automix recording has been punched out. The

RETURN TIME range is OFF, 0.0–30.0 seconds.

● Return Time Operation

Automix Playback

• If playback of a recorded Automix track is started from a point

other than the beginning of the track, the mix at that point will

be recalled (the parameters immediately prior to the point at

which playback was begun will be recalled). This means that

you will hear the correct mix no matter where you start play-

back.

HINT

Punch In and Out of Automix

• If you re-record a previously-recorded parameter to the same

channel, the previously recorded data for that parameter will

be overwritten. If the parameter to be recorded has not

already been recorded in the target track, no data will be over-

written.

NOTE

Return Time

No return time

(“0” setting).

Original data Original data

Return time

Punch in Punch out Punch in Punch out

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

186

Automix

Move the cursor to the MODE ﬁeld and turn

the REC button on.

The REC button will ﬂash. This engages the Automix

record standby mode, and the [AUTOMIX] key will

ﬂash red.

Use the Layer section keys to select the

mixing layer that includes the channels you

want to operate.

Press the top-panel PLAY [ ] key to start

song playback.

The [AUTOMIX] key will light red and Automix

recording will begin. But at this point no channel has

been selected so no data recording will actually take

place.

When the punch-in point is reached use the

[INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO SEL] keys

to select the channel for which Automix

data is to be recorded.

The selected key will ﬂash orange and the correspond-

ing channel’s parameters can be recorded to Automix.

Operate the fader as required.

When the required operations have been

performed press the same key that you

pressed in step 9.

The key will go out and Automix recording will stop

(punch out). The Automix record mode will remain

active, but since no channel is selected no data can

actually be recorded (you can press the key again to

punch in again and continue recording if desired).

When all required mix operations have

been recorded, press the top-panel STOP

[■] key to stop the song.

A popup window asking you to conﬁrm whether you

want to update the recorded Automix data will appear.

To conﬁrm and update the recorded data

move the cursor to the OK button and press

the [ENTER] key.

The recorded Automix data will be updated.

This section describes how you can edit speciﬁed Automix data within a speciﬁed region using

commands.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Edit page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

This page contains the following items.

• The AUTOREC button can be turned on rather than the REC

button to engage the Automix record standby mode.

HINT

• If no operations are performed between the punch-in and

punch-out points all data corresponding to the selected

parameter data in the selected channel will be erased. This is

a handy way to erase all occurrences of speciﬁed data in a

speciﬁed punch-in/out region.

HINT

• After punching the fader move in and out, the fader will return

to the previously-recorded level at a rate determined by the

speciﬁed return time.

HINT

Command Editing Automix data In a Speciﬁed Region

Automix Operation • Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region

Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region

187

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix

1 PARAMETERS ﬁeld

The following parameters can be selected for editing.

•FADER, CH ON, PAN, EQ buttons

...........Faders, Channel [ON] keys, pan, and

EQ operations.

• LIBRARY (CH, GATE, COMP, EQ) buttons

...........Channel library (CH), gate library

(GATE), compressor library (COMP),

and EQ library (EQ) recall.

• SCENE button .................Scene recall.

• EFF LIB 1–4 buttons .......Effect 1–4 library recall.

•AUX/ON 1–4 buttons .......AUX 1–4 send level and

on/off switching.

• EFF/ON 1–4 buttons........Effect 1–4 send level

and on/off switching.

B COMMAND

Displays the currently selected edit command.

C Channel/Region

The channel and region to which the edit command

will apply are speciﬁed here. The display will change

according to the command selected in

D EXECUTE button

The selected edit command is executed when the cur-

sor is moved to this button and the [ENTER] key is

pressed.

Move the cursor to the button in the

PARAMETERS ﬁeld corresponding to the

parameter to be edited, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Multiple parameters can be selected.

Move the cursor to the COMMAND ﬁeld and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select a command, then press the

[ENTER] key.

The following commands can be selected.

• ERASE........ Erase all occurrences of the speciﬁed

parameter(s) in the speciﬁed region.

• COPY.......... Copy all occurrences of the speciﬁed

parameter(s) in the speciﬁed region to

the speciﬁed position in the speciﬁed

destination channel.

•MOVE.......... Move all occurrences of the speciﬁed

parameter(s) in the speciﬁed region to

the speciﬁed position in the speciﬁed

destination channel. The original

parameters will be erased.

The display will change according to the selected edit

command as follows.

● When the ERASE command is selected:

1 The target channel can be selected from

the following.

• IN 1–16 ....... Input channels 1–16

• TR 1–24 ...... Track channels 1–24

•RTN 1–4...... Effect return channels 1–4

•BUS 1, 2 ..... Bus master channels 1, 2

•AUX 1–4...... AUX send master channels 1–4

• EFF 1–4 ...... Effect send master channels 1–4

•ST............... Stereo output channel

• ALL............. All channels

B The start point of the region to be edited is

speciﬁed in counter format.

C The end point of the region to be edited is

speciﬁed in counter format.

● When the COPY or MOVE command is

selected:

1 Speciﬁes the source channel for the copy

or move operation.

The channels that can be selected are the same as

for ERASE, above.

B The start point of the source region for the

copy or move operation speciﬁed in

counter format.

C The end point of the source region for the

copy or move operation is speciﬁed in

counter format.

D Speciﬁes the destination channel for the

copy or move operation.

Depending on the source channel for copy or

move operation, the channels that can be selected

vary.

E The start point of the destination region

for the copy or move operation speciﬁed

in counter format.

• The channel selection will be ignored when editing library,

scene or effect settings.

HINT

D E

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

188

Automix

Move the cursor to the appropriate ﬁelds

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to selected the channel and/or region.

Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the opera-

tion.

Move the cursor to the OK button to exe-

cute the command, or move the cursor to

the CANCEL button to cancel without exe-

cuting. Then press the [ENTER] key.

Individual Automix events can be moved, erased, or value-edited via an Automix event list.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Event List page

by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as

many times as necessary, or by pressing

the [F3] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX]

key.

This page contains the following items.

1 SELECTED CH ONLY button

When this button is engaged only events in the cur-

rently selected channel are shown in the list.

B PARAM

Selects the type of parameters to be shown in the event

list.

C Event list

Individual events of the parameter type selected in the

PARAM ﬁeld are shown in the event list. The event

enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for

editing.

Move the cursor to the icon to the left of the list

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

scroll through the event list.

D DUPLICATE button

Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]

key to create a duplicate of the selected event at the

same location.

E DELETE button

Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER]

key to delete the selected event.

Editing Individual Automix Events

A B

Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region • Editing Individual Automix Events

Editing Individual Automix Events

189

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix

To display only events in a speciﬁc channel,

move the cursor to the SELECTED CH

ONLY button and press the [ENTER] key,

then select the desired channel.

Move the cursor to the PARAM ﬁeld and

press the [ENTER] key to select the type of

parameter to be displayed in the event list.

The available parameter types are as follows.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the type of parameter to be

displayed in the list, then press the

[ENTER] key.

The speciﬁed events will appear in the event list.

Move the cursor to the icon to the left of

the list and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

[INC]/[DEC] keys to scroll through the event

list and select the event to be edited.

The event enclosed by a dotted frame is currently

selected for editing.

Items that can be edited in the event list are as follows.

1 TIME

Speciﬁes the position of the event.

B CH

Speciﬁes the channel to which the event will apply.

C Value

Edits the value of the event type speciﬁed in the

PARAM ﬁeld.

Move the cursor to the appropriate item in

the even list. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

[INC]/[DEC] keys to set the value as

required, then press the [ENTER] key.

The edited data will change immediately.

When you want to add a new event, ﬁrst

move the cursor to the DUPLICATE button

and press the [ENTER] key.

A copy of the currently selected event will be created

at the same location. You can then edit the time, chan-

nel, or value as required.

To delete an unneeded event move the cur-

sor to the DELETE button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The currently selected event will be deleted.

Display Parameter

SCENE/LIB Scene/library recall

FADER Fader operation

ON [ON] key operation

PANPan operation

AUX/EFF AUX/effect send operation

AUX/EFF ON AUX/effect on/off

EQ (ON) EQ on/off

EQ (FREQ) EQ center frequency

EQ (Q) EQ bandwidth

EQ (GAIN) EQ gain

• The cursor can be quickly moved to the icon by pressing

the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key.

• When the cursor is inside the event list the cursor keys can

also be used to scroll up and down the event list.

HINT

A B C

Parameter

Value

(Display)

Description

SCENE SCENE/LIB

Scene/library type and scene/

library number

FADER dB, SEC Fader level, return time

ON ON/OFF Channel on/off status

PAN L-C-R

L63 (full left)–C (center)–

R63 (full right)

AUX/EFF AUX/EFF, dB AUX/effect type and send level

AUX/EFF ON

AUX/EFF,

ON/OFF

AUX/effect type and on/off

status

EQ (ON) ON/OFF EQ on/off status

EQ (FREQ) Hz EQ center frequency

EQ (Q) Q EQ bandwidth

EQ (GAIN) dB Level of the operated band

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the DUPLICATE button.

HINT

• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the DELETE button.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix Library Operation

Automix

190

Automix data can be stored to a specialized Automix library and recalled whenever needed. Up

to 16 Automix recordings can be saved for each song, so you can easily create and compare

multiple mixes for the same song.

Automix data can be saved to and recalled from the Auto-

mix library via the AUTOMIX screen Library page.

To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB sec-

tion [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or

press the [F4] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 List

A list of all the Automix data stored in the library. The

Automix data enclosed in a dotted frame is the one cur-

rently selected for operation. A “lock” icon indicates pro-

tected Automix data.

B RENAME button

Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can

edit the name of the Automix selected in the list.

C RECALL button

Recalls the Automix data that is selected in the list.

D STORE button

Stores the current Automix settings into the location

selected in the list.

E CLEAR button

Deletes the Automix data that is selected in the list.

F PROTECT

Applies protection to the Automix data that is selected in

the list.

G FREE

Displays the amount of free Automix memory available in

kilobytes (KB), as a percentage, and as a graph.

Here’s how you can change the names of the data in the

Automix library.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the Automix data to be

edited.

The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for editing.

Move the cursor to the RENAME button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

Enter a name for the selected Automix data,

move the cursor to the OK button, and

press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for

details on name entry).

This conﬁrms and enters the new name.

Automix Library Operation

About the Automix Library Page

Changing Automix Names

• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button.

HINT

Automix Library Operation

191

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix

Storing the current Automix data to the Automix library.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the library number to which

the data is to be stored.

The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for storage.

Move the cursor to the STORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

As required, enter a name for the selected

Automix data, move the cursor to the OK

button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to

page 32 for details on name entry).

The automix setting will be stored.

Recalling stored Automix data from the library.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the library data to be

recalled.

The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for recall.

Move the cursor to the RECALL button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the recall operation will

appear.

To actually recall the selected data move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The library data will be recalled.

Erasing unneeded Automix data from the library.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the Automix data to be

erased.

The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected to be erased.

Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window conﬁrming the clear operation will

appear.

To actually erase the selected data move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Storing Automix settings

• If you select and store to a library number that contains previously-

stored data, the previous data will be overwritten.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button.

HINT

Recalling Automix settings

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button.

HINT

Erasing Automix settings

•Erased Automix data cannot be recovered. Use this function with

caution.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Automix Library Operation

Automix

192

Applying protection to Automix data to prevent accidental

erasure.

Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by

either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4]

key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key.

Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select the Automix data to be pro-

tected.

The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently

selected for operation.

Move the cursor to the PROTECT button

and press the [ENTER] key.

When protection is turned on the PROTECT button

will appear inverted and a lock icon will appear to the

right of the Automix name.

Protecting Automix Data

193

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

MIDI

Chapter 20

MIDI

This section will describe the basic MIDI settings as well as the various MIDI

features and capabilities provided.

On the AW2400, you can use MIDI to do the following things.

● Synchronize operation with an external

device

You can synchronize an AW2400 song with playback of

an external device (such as a MIDI sequencer) by

exchanging synchronization messages such as MTC

(MIDI Time Code) or MIDI Clock with the external

device.

● Remote control of AW2400 transport func-

tions

You can transmit MMC (MIDI Machine Control) mes-

sages from a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI

device to the AW2400 to remotely control the AW2400’s

transport functions. Conversely, you can also transmit

MMC from the AW2400 to an external device for remote

transport control.

• Example: using MTC/MMC to synchronize the oper-

ation of the AW2400 and a MIDI sequencer (com-

puter).

● Automate scene changes and mix parame-

ters

When you recall a scene on the AW2400 or operate its

mix parameters, the corresponding messages (program

change or control change) can be transmitted to an exter-

nal device.

If you record these messages on a MIDI sequencer that is

synchronized to the AW2400, the scene recall operations

or mix parameter operations can be precisely reproduced

at any time.

• Example: recording/playing scene selections and

mix parameter operations on a MIDI sequencer

(computer)

● MIDI Remote

“MIDI Remote” is a function that lets you use the

AW2400 as a physical controller for an external device.

You can assign the desired MIDI messages to the top-

panel faders and [ON] keys, and use them to remotely

control a MIDI device or computer program.

• Example: using the AW2400 as a physical control-

ler for a MIDI sound module

What you can do using MIDI

AW2400

MY16-mLAN

MTC

MMC

MIDI OUT/

THRU connector

MIDI IN

connector

MIDI OUT

MTC/MMC

USB cable

External MIDI

device

(e.g., computer)

MTC/MMC

IEEE1394 cable

AW2400

MY16-mLAN

Control changes

Program changes

MIDI OUT/

THRU connector MIDI IN

MIDI IN

connector

MIDI OUT

USB cable

Control changes

Program changes

External MIDI

device

(e.g., computer)

IEEE1394 cable

AW2400

MY16-mLAN

Control changes

System exclusive messages, etc.

MIDI OUT/THRU

connector

MIDI IN

USB cable

External MIDI

device

(e.g., computer)

IEEE1394 cable

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Basic MIDI Settings

MIDI

194

The MIDI screen Setting 1 page lets you specify the connector/port to be used for MIDI message

transmission and reception to and from external MIDI devices.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [MIDI]

key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after

pressing the [MIDI] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 PORT ﬁeld

Selects the connector(s)/port(s) to be used for MIDI mes-

sage transmission and reception. Press the [ENTER] key

to conﬁrm your selection.

The connectors/ports that can be selected for MIDI trans-

mission (TX) and reception (RX) are as follows:

B CHANNEL ﬁeld

Selects the MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and

receive MIDI messages such as program changes and con-

trol changes. This area contains the following two items.

•TX.......... Selects the transmit MIDI channel, in a range

of 1–16.

•RX.......... Selects the receive MIDI channel, in a range

of 1–16.

C PROGRAM CHANGE ﬁeld

Turns program change transmission and reception on or

off. When program change reception is on, the corre-

sponding scene will be recalled when a program change

message is received via the AW2400 MIDI IN connector

(or USB connector or digital I/O card input port). When

program change transmission is on, when a scene is

recalled on the AW2400 the corresponding program

change message is transmitted via the MIDI OUT/THRU

connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output

port).

The following items are available:

• ON/OFF button (TX)...... Turns program change trans-

mission on or off.

• ECHO button (TX).........Received program change

messages are re-transmitted

(“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/

THRU connector (or USB con-

nector or digital I/O card out-

put port).

• ON/OFF button (RX) .....Turns program change recep-

tion on or off.

• OMNI button (RX)..........Program change messages

can be received on all MIDI

channels, regardless of the

MIDI receive channel setting.

D CONTROL CHANGE ﬁeld

Speciﬁes how MIDI control change messages will be

transmitted and received. If control change transmission

and reception are enabled, the corresponding control

change message will be transmitted when you operate any

of the AW2400’s channel mix parameters (fader, pan,

effect send, etc.). When a control change message is

received, the corresponding AW2400 mix parameter will

change.

The following items are available:

• ON/OFF button (TX)...... Turns control change trans-

mission on or off.

• ECHO button (TX).........Received control change

messages are re-transmitted

(“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/

THRU connector (or USB con-

nector or digital I/O card out-

put port).

• ON/OFF button (RX) .....Turns control change recep-

tion on or off.

• OMNI button (RX)..........Control change messages

can be received on all MIDI

channels, regardless of the

MIDI receive channel setting.

Basic MIDI Settings

Items TX (Transmission) RX (Reception)

MIDI [MIDI OUT/THRU] connector [MIDI IN] connector

USB 1 USB connector output port 1 USB connector input port 1

USB 2 USB connector output port 2 USB connector input port 2

USB 3 USB connector output port 3 USB connector input port 3

SLOT Digital I/O card output port Digital I/O card output port

• It may be necessary to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver in

order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication on com-

puters (

→

p. 266).

•To connect to a computer using the MY16-mLAN digital I/O card,

install the MY16-mLAN card in the digital I/O slot and select

“SLOT”. The appropriate mLAN driver must be installed on the

computer.

NOTE

• In the SCENE screen PGM Assign page you can specify the

scene number that will correspond to each program change num-

ber (

→

p. 201).

HINT

Basic MIDI Settings

MIDI

195

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

E CONTROL CHANGE MODE box

Selects the channels via which MIDI control change mes-

sages will be transmitted and received. The following

choices are available:

•1...........Control change messages will be transmitted

and received on MIDI channels 1–16. (MIDI

channels 1–16 will correspond to AW2400

track channels 1–16.)

•2...........Control change messages will be transmitted

and received only on the MIDI channel that is

selected in the CHANNEL ﬁeld.

•3...........This is the same as 2 in that control change

messages are only received and transmitted

via one MIDI channel, but the parameter map-

ping differs from 2.

● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 1

•For details on the mix parameters that correspond to each control

change message, refer to the tables that follow.

HINT

MIDI CH CC# PARAMETER

TRACK CHANNEL 1

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 2

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 3

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 4

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 5

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 6

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 7

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 8

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 9

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 10

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 11

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 12

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 13

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 14

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 15

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

TRACK CHANNEL 16

FADER

10 PAN

91 EFF1 SEND

93 EFF2 SEND

MIDI CH CC# PARAMETER

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Basic MIDI Settings

MIDI

196

● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 2

CC# PARAMETER

0 NO ASSIGN

1FADER CHANNEL INPUT 1

2FADER CHANNEL INPUT 2

3FADER CHANNEL INPUT 3

4FADER CHANNEL INPUT 4

5FADER CHANNEL INPUT 5

6FADER CHANNEL INPUT 6

7FADER CHANNEL INPUT 7

8FADER CHANNEL INPUT 8

9FADER CHANNEL INPUT 9

10 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 10

11 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 11

12 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 12

13 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 13

14 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 14

15 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 15

16 FADER CHANNEL INPUT 16

17 NO ASSIGN

18 NO ASSIGN

19 NO ASSIGN

20 NO ASSIGN

21 FADER CHANNEL RETURN 1

22 FADER CHANNEL RETURN 2

23 FADER MASTER STEREO OUT

24 FADER MASTER AUX 1

25 FADER MASTER AUX 2

26 FADER MASTER AUX 3

27 FADER MASTER AUX 4

28 FADER MASTER EFF 1

29 FADER MASTER EFF 2

30 FADER MASTER EFF 3

31 FADER MASTER EFF 4

32 NO ASSIGN

33 FADER MASTER BUS 1

34 FADER MASTER BUS 2

35 NO ASSIGN

36 NO ASSIGN

37 NO ASSIGN

38 NO ASSIGN

39 NO ASSIGN

40 NO ASSIGN

41 ON CHANNEL INPUT 1

42 ON CHANNEL INPUT 2

43 ON CHANNEL INPUT 3

44 ON CHANNEL INPUT 4

45 ON CHANNEL INPUT 5

46 ON CHANNEL INPUT 6

47 ON CHANNEL INPUT 7

48 ON CHANNEL INPUT 8

49 ON CHANNEL INPUT 9

50 ON CHANNEL INPUT 10

51 ON CHANNEL INPUT 11

52 ON CHANNEL INPUT 12

53 ON CHANNEL INPUT 13

54 ON CHANNEL INPUT 14

55 ON CHANNEL INPUT 15

56 ON CHANNEL INPUT 16

57 NO ASSIGN

58 NO ASSIGN

59 NO ASSIGN

60 NO ASSIGN

61 ON CHANNEL RETURN 1

62 ON CHANNEL RETURN 2

63 ON MASTER STEREO OUT

64 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 1

65 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 2

66 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 3

67 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 4

68 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 5

69 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 6

70 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 7

71 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 8

72 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 9

73 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 10

74 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 11

75 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 12

76 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 13

77 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 14

78 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 15

79 PAN CHANNEL INPUT 16

80 NO ASSIGN

81 NO ASSIGN

82 NO ASSIGN

83 NO ASSIGN

84 NO ASSIGN

85 NO ASSIGN

86 NO ASSIGN

87 NO ASSIGN

88 PAN CHANNEL RETURN 1L

89 PAN CHANNEL RETURN 1R

90 PAN CHANNEL RETURN 2L

91 PAN CHANNEL RETURN 2R

92 PAN BALANCE STEREO OUT

93 NO ASSIGN

94 NO ASSIGN

95 NO ASSIGN

96 NO ASSIGN

97 NO ASSIGN

98 NO ASSIGN

99 NO ASSIGN

100 NO ASSIGN

101 NO ASSIGN

102 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 1

103 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 2

104 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 3

105 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 4

106 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 5

107 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 6

108 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 7

109 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 8

110 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 9

111 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 10

112 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 11

113 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 12

114 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 13

115 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 14

116 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 15

117 FADER EFF1 SEND INPUT 16

118 NO ASSIGN

119 NO ASSIGN

120 NO ASSIGN

121 NO ASSIGN

122 NO ASSIGN

123 NO ASSIGN

124 NO ASSIGN

125 NO ASSIGN

126 NO ASSIGN

127 NO ASSIGN

CC# PARAMETER

Basic MIDI Settings

MIDI

197

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 3

CC# PARAMETER

0 NO ASSIGN

1FADER CHANNEL TRACK 1

2FADER CHANNEL TRACK 2

3FADER CHANNEL TRACK 3

4FADER CHANNEL TRACK 4

5FADER CHANNEL TRACK 5

6FADER CHANNEL TRACK 6

7FADER CHANNEL TRACK 7

8FADER CHANNEL TRACK 8

9FADER CHANNEL TRACK 9

10 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 10

11 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 11

12 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 12

13 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 13

14 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 14

15 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 15

16 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 16

17 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 17

18 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 18

19 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 19

20 FADER CHANNEL TRACK 20

21 FADER CHANNEL RETURN 1

22 FADER CHANNEL RETURN 2

23 FADER MASTER STEREO OUT

24 FADER MASTER AUX 1

25 FADER MASTER AUX 2

26 FADER MASTER AUX 3

27 FADER MASTER AUX 4

28 FADER MASTER EFF 1

29 FADER MASTER EFF 2

30 FADER MASTER EFF 3

31 FADER MASTER EFF 4

32 NO ASSIGN

33 FADER MASTER BUS 1

34 FADER MASTER BUS 2

35 NO ASSIGN

36 NO ASSIGN

37 NO ASSIGN

38 NO ASSIGN

39 NO ASSIGN

40 NO ASSIGN

41 ON CHANNEL TRACK 1

42 ON CHANNEL TRACK 2

43 ON CHANNEL TRACK 3

44 ON CHANNEL TRACK 4

45 ON CHANNEL TRACK 5

46 ON CHANNEL TRACK 6

47 ON CHANNEL TRACK 7

48 ON CHANNEL TRACK 8

49 ON CHANNEL TRACK 9

50 ON CHANNEL TRACK 10

51 ON CHANNEL TRACK 11

52 ON CHANNEL TRACK 12

53 ON CHANNEL TRACK 13

54 ON CHANNEL TRACK 14

55 ON CHANNEL TRACK 15

56 ON CHANNEL TRACK 16

57 ON CHANNEL TRACK 17

58 ON CHANNEL TRACK 18

59 ON CHANNEL TRACK 19

60 ON CHANNEL TRACK 20

61 ON CHANNEL RETURN 1

62 ON CHANNEL RETURN 2

63 ON MASTER STEREO OUT

64 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 1

65 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 2

66 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 3

67 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 4

68 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 5

69 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 6

70 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 7

71 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 8

72 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 9

73 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 10

74 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 11

75 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 12

76 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 13

77 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 14

78 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 15

79 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 16

80 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 17

81 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 18

82 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 19

83 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 20

84 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 21

85 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 22

86 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 23

87 PAN CHANNEL TRACK 24

88 PAN CHANNEL RETURN 1L

89 PAN CHANNEL RETURN 1R

90 PAN CHANNEL RETURN 2L

91 PAN CHANNEL RETURN 2R

92 PAN BALANCE STEREO OUT

93 NO ASSIGN

94 NO ASSIGN

95 NO ASSIGN

96 NO ASSIGN

97 NO ASSIGN

98 NO ASSIGN

99 NO ASSIGN

100 NO ASSIGN

101 NO ASSIGN

102 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 1

103 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 2

104 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 3

105 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 4

106 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 5

107 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 6

108 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 7

109 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 8

110 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 9

111 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 10

112 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 11

113 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 12

114 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 13

115 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 14

116 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 15

117 FADER EFF1 SEND TRACK 16

118 NO ASSIGN

119 NO ASSIGN

120 NO ASSIGN

121 NO ASSIGN

122 NO ASSIGN

123 NO ASSIGN

124 NO ASSIGN

125 NO ASSIGN

126 NO ASSIGN

127 NO ASSIGN

CC# PARAMETER

198

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

MIDI

F OTHER ﬁeld

MIDI messages other than program change and control

change messages are set up here.

• ECHO button (TX)........ Received MIDI messages

other than program and control

change are re-transmitted

(“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/

THRU connector (or USB con-

nector or digital I/O card output

port).

G REMOTE OUT box

Selects the connector/port via which MIDI messages will

be transmitted when the MIDI Remote function is active

(when the REMOTE screen is showing). Refer to

page 204 for details on the MIDI Remote function.

H THRU box

Speciﬁes the connector/port for “THRU” output of MIDI

messages received via the MIDI IN connector (or USB

connector or digital I/O card input port). If “MIDI” and

“USB 1” are selected for the two THRU boxes, THRU

output will be as follows:

• Messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be

THRU output via the USB output port 1.

• Messages received at the USB input port 1 will be

THRU output via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector.

MIDI messages generated by the AW2400 itself are not

transmitted via connectors/ports selected for THRU out-

put.

The MIDI screen Setting 2 page allows selection of MIDI messages used for synchronization

with external equipment (MTC and MIDI clock) as well as messages used for remote control.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [MIDI]

key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after

pressing the [MIDI] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 MMC ﬁeld

Speciﬁes how MMC will be transmitted/received.

B MMC OFF button

Engage this button (it will appear inverted) to disable

MMC transmission and reception.

C MMC MASTER button

When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as

MMC master, and the appropriate MMC commands will

be output via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector (or USB

connector or digital I/O card output port) when the trans-

port is operated. Turn this button on when you want to

remotely control external equipment from the AW2400.

D MMC SLAVE button

When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as

MMC slave, and will respond to appropriate MMC com-

mands received via the MIDI IN connector (or USB con-

nector or digital I/O card input port). Turn this button on

when you want to remotely control the AW2400 from

external equipment.

• The same connector/port as selected in the PORT ﬁeld or THRU

box cannot be selected here.

NOTE

• The same connector/port cannot be speciﬁed for both boxes.

• The same connector/port as selected in the PORT ﬁeld or

REMOTE OUT box cannot be selected here.

NOTE

MIDI Synchronization Message Setup

FABC HGJI

KED

Basic MIDI Settings • MIDI Synchronization Message Setup

MIDI Synchronization Message Setup

MIDI

199

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

E DEVICE NO. box

Speciﬁes the MMC device number (1–127) that the

AW2400 will receive.

F MTC ﬁeld

Speciﬁes how the AW2400 operates when synchronized

with an external MIDI device using MTC (MIDI Time

Code).

G MTC MASTER button

When this button is on the AW2400 functions as MTC

master. Turn this button on when you want external equip-

ment to synchronize to the AW2400.

H MTC SLAVE button

When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as

MTC slave, and will follow MTC received via the MIDI

IN connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card input

port). Turn this button on when you want to synchronize

two AW2400 units, or synchronize the AW2400 to an

external device that can only function in MTC master

mode.

I SYNC AVERAGE box

Select one of the following to specify how closely the

AW2400 will follow the incoming MTC data when func-

tioning as an MTC slave.

•0............. The AW2400 will synchronize to the incoming

MTC data with the highest precision. If the

incoming MTC has signiﬁcant instability, syn-

chronization may be interrupted or become

unreliable with this setting.

•1............. This setting provides more tolerance to MTC

instability than the OFF setting.

•2............. This setting allows the maximum tolerance.

Use this setting if the MTC master is an exter-

nal MIDI device that has signiﬁcant instability.

J OFFSET

When using the AW2400 as an MTC slave, this parameter

shifts the absolute time of the AW2400 forward or back-

ward relative to the incoming MTC. The range is

-24:00:00:00.00 to +24:00:00:00.00.

K SYNC OUT ﬁeld

Selects the type of MIDI message to be used for synchro-

nization.

• OFF button ........Engage this button (it will appear

inverted) to disable transmission of

MIDI synchronization messages.

• MTC button .......When this button is ON MTC will be

transmitted while the recorder is run-

ning.

• MIDI CLOCK Button

...............When this button is ON the MIDI clock

will be transmitted while the recorder

is running. Also, appropriate START,

STOP, CONTINUE and SONG POSI-

TION messages will be transmitted

when the transport is operated.

• The MMC device number is an identifying number used to distin-

guish devices that transmit and receive MMC commands. When

using MMC, the AW2400 and the external MIDI device must be set

to the same MMC device number.

• When transmitting MMC data from the AW2400, the MMC device

number is always set to “128” (allowing control of all MMC-com-

patible devices).

NOTE

• If the accuracy of the incoming MTC becomes unstable when the

AW2400 is functioning as an MTC slave and is synchronized to an

external MIDI device, the AW2400 will make slight adjustments in

playback pitch in an attempt to maintain synchronization. The

SYNC AVERAGE parameter speciﬁes the range of MTC variance

that will be tolerated.

HINT

00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00

00:00:20:00.00

OFFSET = 00:00:00:00.00

00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00

00:00:15:00.00 00:00:20:00.00

00:00:20:00.00

00:00:25:00.00

OFFSET = +00:00:05:00.00

00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00

00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00

00:00:20:00.00

00:00:15:00.00

OFFSET = –00:00:05:00.00

Incoming time

code

Time code

display (ABS)

Song

Incoming time

code

Time code

display (ABS)

Song

Incoming time

code

Time code

display (ABS)

Song

• The OFFSET setting has no effect on MTC output via the MIDI

OUT/THRU connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output

port).

HINT

• MIDI clock operation is based on the tempo speciﬁed in the Tempo

Map (refer to page 175 for Tempo Map setup details).

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to External Equipment

MIDI

200

This section will provide some examples of how the AW2400 can be connected to and used with

external MIDI devices.

Using MTC AW2400 song playback and recording can be

synchronized to external MIDI devices such as a com-

puter-based sequencer application or a workstation type

synthesizer with a built-in sequencer. Furthermore, MMC

can be used to allow remote control of the AW2400 trans-

port functions from the external MIDI device.

Refer to the following diagram, and connect

the AW2400 to your workstation synthe-

sizer or computer.

Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to

access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page.

Select the connector(s)/port(s) to be used

for MIDI message transmission and recep-

tion in the PORT ﬁeld.

Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to

access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page. Turn

on the MASTER button in the MTC ﬁeld, and

turn on the MTC button in the SYNC OUT

ﬁeld.

This sets the AW2400 to function as MTC master.

Turn on the SLAVE button in the MMC ﬁeld.

This sets the AW2400 to function as MMC slave.

● Example settings for synchronization using

MTC and MMC

Move the cursor to the DEVICE No. ﬁeld,

and set the value to match the device num-

ber of the external MIDI device.

When using MMC, you must set the AW2400 and the

external MIDI device to the same MMC device num-

ber. For details on the device numbers that your MIDI

device can use, refer to its owner’s manual.

Use the Work Navigate section [SONG] key

to access the SONG screen Setting page.

Select a frame rate.

Set the external MIDI device to function as

MMC master and MTC slave, and set its

MMC device number and MTC frame rate to

the same settings as the AW2400.

For details on how to make these settings, refer to the

owner’s manual provided with the device.

Connecting to External Equipment

Synchronizing the AW2400 With

External MIDI Devices

MIDI OUT/

THRU

MIDI

OUT

AW2400

MY16-mLAN

MTC

MMC

USB cable

Computer-based

sequencer application

IEEE1394 cable

Workstation synthesizer

with a built-in sequencer

MTC/MMC

Frame rate

• When using MTC with an external device be sure to set both

the AW2400 and the external device to the same frame rate.

• The frame rate you specify here will affect not only synchroni-

zation with the external device, but also the time code that is

displayed in the counter, etc.

HINT

Connecting to External Equipment

MIDI

201

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Play back the external MIDI device.

When you play back the external MIDI device, the

corresponding MMC commands will be sent to the

AW2400, and the AW2400 will begin running.

At the same time, the AW2400 will transmit MTC to

the external MIDI device, and the external MIDI

device will run in synchronization with it.

Here’s how you can transmit program changes from an

external MIDI device to switch scenes on the AW2400.

In the Scene/Automix/USB section, use the

[SCENE] key to access the SONG screen

PGM Assign page.

This page lets you assign a scene number to each pro-

gram change number.

1 List

This lists the scenes of the current song. The line

enclosed by a dotted frame is the scene currently

selected for operation.

B Program change number

This indicates the program change number (001–128).

Move the cursor to this number and use the [DATA/

JOG] dial to scroll the list upward or downward.

C Scene

Move the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/JOG]

dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the

corresponding program number.

D INITIALIZE button

Returns the program change assignments to their ini-

tial state.

Move the cursor to the program change

number, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to

select the program change number for

which you want to change the assignment.

Move the cursor to the scene in the list, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene

that you want to assign to the correspond-

ing program change number.

Repeat steps 2–3 to assign the desired

scenes to other program change numbers.

•You can synchronize using MIDI Clock and Start/Stop/Con-

tinue messages instead of using MTC and MMC. For details

on the settings used in this case, refer to “Recording/playing

AW2400 mix operations on an external sequencer” (

→

p. 202).

HINT

Switching AW2400 scenes from

an external MIDI device

■ Assign scenes to program changes

B DC

• In the initial state Program change numbers 1–99 correspond

to scenes 1–99, program change number 100 = Initial Data

(all scene parameters in their initial state), and program

change numbers 101–128 are “NO ASSIGN” (unassigned).

HINT

• The [INC]/[DEC] keys can also be used to select program

change numbers.

HINT

• The PGM Assign page settings apply to all songs.

• If you want to reset the scene assignments to the initial set-

ting, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press the

[ENTER] key.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to External Equipment

MIDI

202

Connect the AW2400 and your sequencer

as shown in the diagram below.

Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to

access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page.

Set the connector/port and channel to be

used for program change message recep-

tion in the RX PORT and CHANNEL ﬁelds.

Turn the PROGRAM CHANGE (RX) ﬁeld ON/

OFF button on.

If you want to receive program change messages on all

channels regardless of the MIDI receive channel set-

ting, also turn the OMNI (RX) button on.

This sets up the AW2400 to receive MIDI program

change messages.

Transmit a program change message from

your sequencer to the AW2400 on the MIDI

channel that you selected.

The scene assigned to that program change number

will be recalled.

Here’s how you can synchronize the AW2400 and your

external sequencer, and use the sequencer to record/play

the fader and pan operations you perform on the AW2400.

Since operating the AW2400’s mix parameters will cause

a large number of control change messages to be transmit-

ted, we will use MIDI Clock (which uses less data) as the

synchronization signal rather than MTC.

Connect the AW2400 and your sequencer

as shown in the following diagram.

Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to

access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page. Turn

on the MASTER button in the MTC ﬁeld, and

turn on the MIDI CLOCK button in the SYNC

OUT ﬁeld.

● Example settings for synchronization

using MIDI Clock and Start/Stop/Con-

tinue

■ Transmit program

changes to switch scenes

MIDI

OUT

AW2400

MY16-mLAN

Program

changes

USB cable

Computer-based

sequencer application

IEEE1394 cable

Workstation synthesizer

with a built-in sequencer

• If you insert program changes into the appropriate locations

of your sequencer track, scenes will be recalled automatically

as the AW2400 and your sequencer run in synchronization.

HINT

Recording/playing AW2400 mix oper-

ations on an external sequencer

AW2400

MIDI OUT/

THRU

MIDI

OUT

MY16-mLAN

Control

changes

USB cable

Computer-based

sequencer application

IEEE1394 cable

Workstation synthesizer

with a built-in sequencer

MIDI Clock

Control

changes

Connecting to External Equipment

MIDI

203

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to

access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page.

Select the connector(s)/port(s) to be used

for MIDI message transmission and recep-

tion.

Turn the CONTROL CHANGE ﬁeld ON/OFF

buttons (TX and RX) on.

This sets the AW2400 to transmit and receive control

change messages.

Select a CONTROL CHANGE MODE (1–3).

The CONTROL CHANGE MODE lets you choose

one of three combinations (1–3) that specify how con-

trol changes will correspond to the mix parameters of

the AW2400. (For details on the contents of each

choice, refer to page 195.)

If you want to transmit and receive messages via sepa-

rate MIDI channels for each of the AW2400’s track

channels, choose 1. If you want all track channels to

be controlled via a single MIDI channel, choose 2 or 3.

If you chose 2 or 3, you will also need to set the

CHANNEL ﬁeld to specify the MIDI channel that will

be used to transmit and receive the control changes.

Make the appropriate settings on your

sequencer so that it will follow external

MIDI Clock messages. Also set the

sequencer to record-ready mode.

For details on how to make these settings, refer to the

manual for your sequencer.

Store the initial fader, pan, and mix parame-

ters as a scene at the beginning of the

song.

When the following operations are performed this

scene will always be recalled at the beginning. Also, if

you record a program change number corresponding

to this scene at the beginning of a sequencer track the

scene will automatically be recalled each time the

sequence is played back. (refer to “Switching AW2400

scenes from an external MIDI device” on page 201 for

details).

Play back the AW2400 song from the begin-

ning.

When the AW2400 begins playback, it will transmit a

Start message and MIDI Clock messages to the

sequencer, and the sequencer will begin running in

synchronization with the AW2400.

Operate the AW2400’s mix parameters

(fader, pan, etc.) as required.

The control changes assigned to each parameter will

be recorded on the sequencer.

The type of mix parameters that can be recorded will

depend on the setting of the CONTROL CHANGE

MODE ﬁeld (→ p. 195).

When you are ﬁnished recording, stop play-

back of the AW2400 song.

Set the sequencer to the playback standby

mode, recall the previously stored scene,

and start AW2400 playback from the begin-

ning of the song.

The recorded control changes will be transmitted to

the AW2400, and the corresponding mix parameters

will change accordingly. If necessary, you can use the

editing functionality of your sequencer to edit the val-

ues and timing of the control changes that were

recorded.

• If your sequencer has a function by which MIDI messages

received at its MIDI IN connector are retransmitted from its

MIDI OUT connector (a function called “MIDI Echo” or “MIDI

Thru”), be sure to turn it off. If this function is turned on while

you are recording, the control change messages transmitted

when you operate the AW2400 will be immediately returned

to the AW2400, causing improper operation.

NOTE

• If you set CONTROL CHANGE MODE to 1, operating track

channels 1–16 will transmit control changes via the corre-

sponding MIDI channel (1–16). For this reason, you should

normally record operations only for a single channel at a time,

unless your sequencer is able to record multiple MIDI chan-

nels simultaneously.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Using the MIDI Remote function

MIDI

204

The AW2400 provides a MIDI Remote function that lets

you use the top-panel controls to transmit the desired

MIDI messages.

By using the MIDI Remote function, you can use the

AW2400 as a physical controller for a computer program

or MIDI tone generator.

MIDI messages can be assigned to the following controls.

● Mixer section

• Faders 1–12, 13–16

• [ON] keys 1–12, 13–16

● Transport section

• RTZ [ ] key • REW [ ] key

• FF [ ] key • STOP [ ■ ] key

• PLAY [ ] key • REC [ ● ] key

Of these, MIDI messages assigned to the faders and [ON]

keys can be freely reassigned. You can assign the follow-

ing types of message.

A MIDI message whose value

changes over a range of 0–127 can

be assigned to each fader. For

example if you assign control

change #7 (volume) to a fader, you

can use the fader to control the vol-

ume of a MIDI tone generator.

A MIDI message whose value changes between the two

states, 0 and 127, can be assigned to each [ON] key. For

example if you assign control change #64 (hold) to an

[ON] key and specify that the control change value alter-

nates between 0 and 127, pressing the [ON] key to turn it

on (indicator lit) will transmit control change #64 with a

value of 127 (Hold on), and turning it off (indicator out)

will transmit control change #64 with a value of 0 (Hold

off).

Alternatively, you can specify that a MIDI message with a

ﬁxed value is transmitted only when you press the [ON]

key to turn it on (indicator lit). For example if you assign

program change #1, that program change number will be

transmitted each time you turn on the [ON] key.

The REMOTE screen 1–12 page and 13–16 page provide

14 different MIDI Remote presets (ten factory presets and

four user presets). These presets have been created with

speciﬁc devices and computer sequencer programs in

mind, and assign the necessary messages to the AW2400’s

faders and [ON] keys. You can use the MIDI Remote func-

tion immediately, just by selecting a preset in this page

and connecting the appropriate external MIDI device.

Sequencer programs that are supported

*1 Use the setting ﬁle from the included CD-ROM to map the

AW2400’s faders/[ON] keys/transport keys to the Logic key com-

mands. Track assignments must be made within Logic as appro-

priate for your system.

*2 Select the CS-10 settings as the MIDI controller type. For details

on the CS-10 settings, ask Digidesign.

Using the MIDI Remote function

About the MIDI Remote function

■ Messages that can

be assigned to faders

Control change

number 7

Value = 127

Value =0

transmit

■ Messages that can be

assigned to the [ON] keys

transmit transmit

Control change

number 64 (value= 127)

Control change

number 64 (value= 0)

Program change

number 1

Program change

number 1

transmit transmit

Using the MIDI Remote function

presets

● Windows

• Cubase SX 3.0.1

• Logic Platinum 5.5.1

(*1)

• Nuendo 3.0.1

• Sonar 4.0.1 Producer

Edition

● Macintosh

• Cubase SX 3.0.1

• Logic Pro 7.0.1

(*1)

• Nuendo 3.0.1

• Protools TDM 6.7

(*2)

Using the MIDI Remote function

MIDI

205

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

The MIDI channels corresponding to the faders and [ON]

keys appears as follows when the REMOTE screen 1–12

and 13–16 pages are selected.

■ When the 1–12 page is showing.

■ When the 13–16 page is showing.

To call the REMOTE screen 1–12 page press the Layer

section [REMOTE] key as many times as necessary, or

press the [F1] key after pressing the [REMOTE] key.

To call the REMOTE screen 13–16 page press the Layer

section [REMOTE] key as many times as necessary, or

press the [F2] key after pressing the [REMOTE] key

(Operation of the 13–16 page is the same as the 1–12

page).

This page contains the following items.

1 MODE box

Selects one of the ten presets. Move the cursor to a box

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

select the corresponding preset for instantaneous MIDI

message assignment.

The AW2400 provides the following presets.

● Cubase

● Logic

● Sonar

● Protools

These presets let you use the AW2400 as a physical con-

troller for various software sequencers.

• [ON] key operations will control mute on/off opera-

tions on the sequencer software.

•Fader operations will control the volume of the

sequencer software tracks.

You will need to install the appropriate setting ﬁle into

your sequencer software, and make the necessary settings.

For details, refer to the “About the CD-ROM included

with the AW2400” (→ p. 266).

● Volume/Rec TR

Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone

generator or the record tracks of an external recorder.

• [ON] key operations will transmit MMC commands to

select recording tracks.

•Fader operations will transmit Volume control changes

(CC#=07).

● Volume

Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone

generator.

• When you turn an [ON] key off (indicator out), volume

= 0 will be transmitted.

• When you turn an [ON] key on (lit green), the volume

value corresponding to the fader position will be trans-

mitted.

• When an [ON] key is on, operating the fader will trans-

mit Volume control change messages (CC#=07).

Fader/[ON] Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

MIDI Channel 123456789101112

Fader/[ON] Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

MIDI Channel 13 14 15 16 N/A

• The MIDI Remote function will automatically be on while the

REMOTE screen is displayed. The channel faders and [ON] keys

will not perform their usual functions, but will work as speciﬁed by

the preset you have selected in the REMOTE screen.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Using the MIDI Remote function

MIDI

206

● XG 1–16

● XG 17–32

● XG 33–48

● XG 49–64

These presets let you use the AW2400 as a volume con-

troller for an XG tone generator. Each preset will control

the XG-compatible tone generator’s parts 1–16, 17–32,

33–48, and 49–64 respectively.

• [ON] key operations will switch the part on/off.

•Fader operations will control the volume of the part.

● USER1

● USER2

● USER3

● USER4

These 4 presets can be set up by the user. Refer to “Using

User-deﬁned Remote function”.

B TRANSPORT ﬁeld

Select one of the following to specify how the transport

section keys will function while using the MIDI Remote

function.

• NORMAL button ...... The transport keys will perform

their normal functions: play, stop,

or locate etc. for the current

song. MTC/MMC/MIDI Clock

messages will be transmitted and

received as speciﬁed in the MIDI

screen Setting 2 page.

• LOCAL button.......... The transport keys will play, stop,

or locate the current song. How-

ever, MTC/MMC/MIDI Clock

messages will not be transmitted

or received.

• REMOTE button....... The transport keys will not oper-

ate the recorder, but will only

transmit the MIDI messages that

have been preset for each key.

C ON ﬁeld

D FADER ﬁeld

This ﬁeld is used when setting up a user-deﬁned preset.

The REMOTE screen 1–12 page and 13–16 page let you

assign your own MIDI messages to each fader and [ON]

key.

To call the REMOTE screen 1–12 page (or 13–16 page)

press the Layer section [REMOTE] key as many times as

necessary, or press the [F1] key (or [F2] key) after press-

ing the [REMOTE] key.

1 Fader/[ON] key function name

Displays the name that is assigned to the currently dis-

played fader or [ON] key.

B RENAME button

Edits the name that is assigned to the fader/[ON] key.

Move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key,

and the NAME EDIT popup window will appear.

C LATCH/UNLATCH button

Selects one of the following types of operation for the

[ON] keys.

•LATCH............. The setting will alternate on/off each

time you press the [ON] key.

• These settings will also apply if you use a foot switch to operate

the song transport.

HINT

Using User-deﬁned Remote

function

• USER1–USER4 must be selected in the MODE box in order to set

up user-deﬁned assignments.

NOTE

CBDE

MIDI data transmitted

(SW=7F)

MIDI data

transmitted (SW=00)

off

Using the MIDI Remote function

MIDI

207

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

• UNLATCH........The [ON] key will be engaged only

while held, and will turn off when

released.

D LEARN button

When this button is on, the MIDI message received from

an external device will be assigned to the currently

selected fader or [ON] key. This is a convenient way to

assign MIDI messages quickly.

E MIDI message

This area displays the MIDI message that is assigned to

the currently selected fader or [ON] key in hexadecimal

form.

You can move the cursor to each number box and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value of each byte (two-digi-

tal hexadecimal number). You can select the following val-

ues.

• 00–FF (hexadecimal)

............ Corresponds to the actual value of the MIDI

message that is transmitted.

• END ....... Indicates the end of the MIDI message. When

you operate a fader or [ON] key, the MIDI

message starting with the ﬁrst byte and end-

ing with the byte that precedes END will be

transmitted.

• SW ([ON] key only)

............ Indicates the on/off status of the [ON] key.

The byte you specify as SW will be transmit-

ted as 7F (hexadecimal) when the key is

turned on, or 00 (hexadecimal) when the key

is turned off.

•FAD........ Indicates the current position of the fader. If

the message is assigned to a fader, the byte

you specify as FAD will be transmitted as a

value of 00–7F (hexadecimal) corresponding

to the fader position when you operate the

fader. If the message is assigned to an [ON]

key, this byte will be transmitted as a value

corresponding to the current position of the

fader when the [ON] key is turned on, and will

be transmitted as a value of 00 (hexadecimal)

when the [ON] key is turned off.

Here’s how you can use the AW2400’s MIDI Remote

function to remotely control a tone generator module.

Connect the AW2400 to your tone generator

module as shown in the following diagram.

Use the Layer section [REMOTE] key to call

the REMOTE screen 1–12 page or 13–16

page.

This enables the Remote function.

MIDI data

transmitted (SW=7F)

MIDI data

transmitted (SW=00)

off

• If two or more MIDI messages are received while the LEARN but-

ton is on, the last-received MIDI message will be entered in the

MIDI message ﬁeld.

• If a system exclusive message longer than sixteen bytes is

received, the ﬁrst sixteen bytes will be displayed.

HINT

• The [ON] key and fader LEARN buttons cannot be engaged simul-

taneously.

NOTE

• The MIDI message assigned to a single fader or key cannot be

longer than sixteen bytes.

• If a SW byte is not assigned to an [ON] key, the MIDI message you

enter will be transmitted only when you turn the key on. (In this

case you will normally use the UNLATCH setting.)

• When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change mes-

sage to a fader, the END byte will automatically be entered at the

end of the MIDI message.

• When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change mes-

sage to a fader, the FAD byte will be automatically entered as the

variable value.

HINT

• If you assign a MIDI message manually, be sure to enter END at

the end of the message.

• When you assign a MIDI message to a fader, FAD must be

entered for one of the bytes. If FAD is not entered the fader will not

function.

• If you enter the values manually, it is possible that an invalid MIDI

message will be entered. For this reason, you should use the

LEARN button to assign MIDI messages whenever possible.

NOTE

Remotely controlling

a tone generator module

MIDI OUT/

THRU

MIDI

AW2400

Tone generator

module

MIDI messages

• While the REMOTE screen is displayed, the functions of the faders

and [ON] keys will be disabled; the faders and keys will function as

controllers that transmit MIDI messages.

• When the MIDI Remote function is enabled, the MIDI messages

are transmitted via the connector/port selected in the MIDI screen

Setting 1 page REMOTE OUT box.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Using the MIDI Remote function

MIDI

208

Select the preset you want to use in the

MODE box and press the [ENTER] key.

For example if you select preset “XG 1-16”, the

AW2400’s faders will control the volume of parts 1–

16 of your XG tone generator, and [ON] keys 1–16

will control the on/off status of parts 1–16.

If necessary, select the REMOTE screen 1–

12 or 13–16 pages and set the MIDI channel

assignments to the faders and [ON] keys as

required.

The MIDI channel assignments on each page are

described in “Using the MIDI Remote function pre-

sets” on page 204.

Operate the AW2400 faders and [ON] keys.

The messages assigned to the faders and [ON] keys

will be transmitted via the MIDI OUT/THRU connec-

tor, and the parameters of your tone generator module

will change accordingly.

209

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Utility functions

Chapter 21

Utility functions

This chapter explains the AW2400’s various utility functions.

The Oscillator page of the UTILITY screen lets you send the signal of the AW2400’s built-in test

oscillator to the desired bus.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTIL-

ITY] as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key

after pressing the [UTILITY] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 OSC ON button

When you turn this button on, the oscillator output will

immediately be sent to the speciﬁed bus. Use the D–G

buttons to specify the bus to which the signal will be sent.

B LEVEL knob

Adjusts the output level of the oscillator.

C WAVEFORM

Selects one of the following oscillator signals.

• 100Hz button................... 100 Hz sine wave

• 1kHz button..................... 1 kHz sine wave

• 10kHz button................... 10 kHz sine wave

• PINK NOISE button ........ Pink noise

•BURST NOISE button..... Burst noise (20-millisecond

pink-noise bursts as 4-sec-

ond intervals)

D BUS1 L/R, BUS2 L/R buttons

Sends the oscillator output to the Bus 1 L/R or Bus 2 L/R.

E AUX1–4 buttons

Send the oscillator output to AUX buses 1–4.

F EFFECT1–4 buttons

Send the oscillator output to effect buses 1–4.

G STEREO L/R buttons

Sends the oscillator output to the stereo bus.

H Level Meter

Displays the BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4, and EFFECT BUS 1–4

output levels.

Using the test tone oscillator

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT]

key has the same affect as the OSC ON button.

HINT

• Be sure to lower the setting of the LEVEL knob before turning on

the oscillator to prevent sudden high-volume output.

NOTE

• Sine waves and white noise have a higher actual sound pressure

level than perceived by the ear, and may damage your speakers if

played at a high volume. Please use caution.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

AW2400 Preferences

Utility functions

210

The UTILITY screen Preference page provides a number of basic “preference” parameters for the

AW2400 operating environment, including digital input/output setup, copy protection, and others.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTIL-

ITY] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key

after pressing the [UTILITY] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT button

Speciﬁes whether SCMS (Serial Copy Management Sys-

tem) copy protect ﬂags will be written into the digital sig-

nal that is output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack.

Protect is enabled if the button is set to ENABLE, and dis-

abled if the button is set to DISABLE.

If copy protect is enabled, you will be able to copy the sig-

nal from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack to an MD or

DAT recorder, but it will not be possible to make a second-

generation digital copy from that data.

● When copy protect is enabled

B CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button

Enables or disables digital recording from the DIGITAL

STEREO IN jack, and importing of digital audio data

from an audio CD or WAV ﬁle inserted in the CD-RW

drive.

When this parameter is ON, the following message will be

displayed.

If you agree to the conditions stipulated in the “Copyright

Notice” (→ p. 7), select [OK]. Recording and importing of

digital audio data will be enabled when you select [OK].

C NUDGE PLAY MODE

Selects the playback method that will be used by the

Nudge function (a function that lets you use the [JOG ON]

key and [DATA/JOG] dial to search for a location). Press

the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm your selection.

• AFTER .......... Play repeatedly for the duration speciﬁed

by the NUDGE TIME, starting at the cur-

rent location.

• BEFORE ....... Play repeatedly for the duration speciﬁed

by the NUDGE TIME, ending at the cur-

rent location.

D NUDGE TIME

Speciﬁes the duration (Nudge Time) of each repeat played

by the Nudge function. The nudge time can be set from 25

to 800 ms in 1 ms (millisecond) steps.

E PREROLL TIME

Speciﬁes the duration of the preroll (the amount of play-

back time before the punch-in point) when you use Auto

Punch-in from 0 to 20 seconds.

AW2400 Preferences

DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT= ENABLE

AW2400

DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack

DAT or MD, etc.

Digital recording

possible

Digital recording

not possible

• The CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button will always be set to the default

DISABLE setting when you turn on the power.

HINT

MODE: BEFORE MODE: AFTER

Current location Current location

AW2400 Preferences

Utility functions

211

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

F POSTROLL TIME

Speciﬁes the duration of postroll (the amount of playback

time after the punch-out point) when you use Auto Punch-

out from 0 to 20 seconds.

G DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION

Selects the point in the input channel or track channel

from which the signal will be taken when using DIRECT

OUT. Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm your selection.

• PRE FADER..........the signal prior to the channel fader

• POST FADER .......the signal after the channel fader

H STORE CONFIRMATION button

Speciﬁes whether the NAME EDIT popup window

(allowing you to assign a name) will appear when you

store a scene/library.

I RECALL CONFIRMATION button

Speciﬁes whether a popup window will ask you for conﬁr-

mation when recalling a scene or library.

J SYNC CAUTION DIGITAL ST IN button

Determines whether an error message will be displayed

when a signal that is not synchronized with the word clock

source appears at the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector.

K SYNC CAUTION SLOT IN button

Determines whether an error message will be displayed

when a signal that is not synchronized with the word clock

source appears at a digital input on an I/O card installed in

the I/O slot.

L AUTO SAVE button

Enables or disables the Auto Save function. When the

Auto Save function is enabled the current song state will

be backed up to temporary memory when one of the fol-

lowing occurs. If the power is accidentally turned off

before the unit is properly shut down, the song will be

restored from the backup data in temporary memory the

next time the power is turned on.

• Recording is stopped.

•Track editing is ended.

• Import from the CD-RW drive is completed.

• Import of a WAV ﬁle is completed.

M AUTO DISPLAY button

Determines whether the display screen related to a key or

knob operated in the Selected Channel section will appear

automatically (ON), or whether the display will remain as

it is and a popup window for the corresponding parameter

will appear (OFF).

N CD/ST TR PLAY MODE MUTE/MIX button

Determines whether the input channels will be output

together with CD or stereo playback (MIX), or whether

only the CD or stereo track signal will be output (MUTE).

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Initializing the internal hard disk

Utility functions

212

The UTILITY screen Format page lets you initialize the internal hard disk. Prior to exporting and

importing WAV ﬁles to or from a Macintosh computer (Mac OS X 10.3) it may be necessary to ini-

tialize the hard disk in order to change the hard disk cluster size.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTIL-

ITY] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key

after pressing the [UTILITY] key.

1 CLUSTER ﬁeld

Set the disk cluster size to either 32K or 64K.

If you will be using Mac OS X 10.3 for WAV ﬁle transfer

operations, set the cluster size to 32K. Select the 64K

cluster size for maximum speed if you will be using Win-

dows, or Mac OS X 10.4 or higher. When the AW2400 is

shipped from the factory, the cluster size is set to 64K.

B EXECUTE button

Execute the disk initialization. A popup window will show

the progress of the initialization operation.

The popup window will close when initialization has been

completed.

Initializing the internal hard disk

•Executing the Format operation will erase all data from the internal hard disk, and the data cannot be recov-

ered. We recommend that you backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before executing the

Format operation.

•You cannot abort the Format operation once it has been started.

•Never turn off or disconnect the power during formatting, since this may damage the hard disk and cause

malfunctions.

NOTE

213

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Creating an audio CD

Chapter 22

Creating an audio CD

This chapter explains how you can use the CD-RW drive to create an audio

CD, and how to play back an audio CD.

You can select one or more songs on the AW2400 hard disk, and write the audio data from the

stereo track of each song to a CD-R/RW disc in CD-DA format. The CD-R/RW media to which

you write this data can be played by a CD-RW drive or a conventional CD player in the same way

as a standard audio CD.

In order to create a CD, you must ﬁrst register one or more

songs in a “track list,” and then write the virtual track cur-

rently selected for the stereo track of each song (the “cur-

rent track”) to the CD in the order speciﬁed by the track

list.

A maximum of 99 tracks (areas on CD media to which

audio data can be written individually) can be written to

one CD-R/RW disc, and each track must be at least four

seconds long. The maximum length of audio that can be

written to a single disc is approximately 74 minutes for

650 MB discs, or approximately 80 minutes for 700 MB

discs.

The AW2400 CD-RW drive can use two types of media: “CD-R” which lets you record and

append data, and “CD-RW” which can be erased and rewritten as required. These types of

media have the following characteristics.

● CD-R

You can write data to a new CD-R disc, and append addi-

tional data later on. You cannot erase data that has already

been written and rewrite the disc. Once you perform a pro-

cess known as “ﬁnalizing the disc,” the audio data written

to the CD-R can be played by a CD-RW drive or by most

CD players.

● CD-RW

In addition to writing and appending data, this type of

media lets you erase all recorded data and write new data

to the disc. Audio data written to a CD-RW can be played

back by a CD-RW drive or by CD players that support

CD-RW media.

Creating an audio CD

• Some CD players do not support CD-R/RW media, and may not be able to play back CDs created by the

AW2400.

NOTE

• The total size of audio data that can be written to a single disc is

746 MB (approximately 74 minutes) for 650 MB discs, or 807 MB

(approximately 80 minutes) for 700 MB discs.

HINT

Types of media that you can use with the CD-RW drive

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Writing an audio CD

Creating an audio CD

214

There are two ways in which you can write audio data to CD-R/RW media.

● Track At Once

This method writes the data one CD track at a time. The

advantage of this method is that you can add new data to a

disc that already contains data.

With the Track At Once method, the data from the begin-

ning to the end of a song’s stereo track is written to the CD

as one track. (Even if there is a portion during the song

that contains no data, it will be written as silent audio.)

Since each track is written individually, an interval of

approximately two seconds will be created between each

track.

In order for a disc written using Track At Once to be play-

able by the AW2400 CD-RW drive or a CD player, you

must perform a process known as “ﬁnalizing” to write

track information to the disc. Once you have ﬁnalized a

disc, no more data can be written to it.

● Disc At Once

This method writes all tracks at once. As when using the

Track At Once method, the data from the beginning to the

end of the stereo track of each song is written to the CD as

one track.

However since writing does not stop until all data has been

written, there does not necessarily have to be gaps

between the tracks.

When using Disc At Once to write a CD, you can use the

start point, end point and markers that were assigned

within the AW2400 song to divide a single continuous

song into multiple tracks.

This is convenient, for example, when you have recorded

a live performance as a single song and want to assign

track numbers while leaving playback in continuous form.

Media written using Disc At Once will be ﬁnalized auto-

matically, and can be played back by a CD-RW drive or

CD player that supports that type of media. However, no

further data can be written to a disc that was written using

Disc At Once.

Writing an audio CD

Track 1

Start

Track 2

End

Start End

Song A

interval (2 seconds)

Song B

Audio CD

Track 1

Start

Track 2

End

Start End

Song A

Marker = off

no gap

Audio CD

Song B

Marker = off

Track 1

Start

Track 4

End

Track 2

Track 3

Start End1 2

Song A

Marker = on

Audio CD

Song B

Marker = off

•Tracks shorter than four seconds cannot be written to an audio

CD. If you use start point/end point/markers to divide a song into

multiple tracks, make sure that each track is at least four seconds

long.

• If the length of the stereo track exceeds the writable length of the

media, you can create an audio CD by adjusting the start point/

end point so that the region is within the allowable length. (

→

p. 88)

NOTE

Basic settings for the CD-RW drive

215

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Creating an audio CD

Before you actually write data to a CD, you will need to make basic settings for the CD-RW drive.

Call the Setting page by either pressing the

Work Navigate section [CD] key as many

times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3]

key after pressing the [CD] key.

The CD screen Setting page will appear.

1 AUDIO WRITE SPEED

Selects the speed at which audio data will be written to

CD-R/RW media.

B AUDIO WRITE TYPE

Selects the write method to be used when writing

audio data to CD-R/RW media.

C UNDERRUN PROTECT button

Enables/disables the function that prevents buffer

underrun (an error that can occur when data transfer

cannot keep up with write speed).

D DATA WRITE SPEED

This indicates the speed at which data other than CD

audio (e.g., backup data or WAV ﬁles) is written to

CD-R/RW media. Normally this will indicate x8, but

may be x4 if the media supports a maximum write

speed of x4. This ﬁeld is for display only, and cannot

be edited.

E DATA WRITE TYPE

Selects the write method to be used when writing

backup data to CD-R/RW media.

If the COMPARE button is on, the original data will

be compared with the backed-up data or the exported

WAV ﬁle after a backup or export operation, to check

whether any errors occurred while writing the data.

Refer to “Backing up songs” on page 177 for informa-

tion on backup procedures.

F CD-RW MEDIA ERASE

Erases the data that was written to CD-RW media. For

details, refer to “Erasing CD-RW media” (→ p. 221).

Move the cursor to the AUDIO WRITE

SPEED ﬁeld, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial

to select the write speed.

You can select either x8 (eight times audio playback

speed) or x4 (four times audio playback speed). Nor-

mally you should use x8, and reduce the speed to x4

only if errors occur during writing.

Use the TEST and WRITE buttons of the

AUDIO WRITE TYPE ﬁeld to select the write

operation(s).

The combination of buttons will determine the opera-

tion(s) that will occur, as follows.

• Only the TEST button On

...........Only a write test will be performed.

• Only the WRITE button On

...........Writing will occur immediately.

• Both the WRITE and TEST buttons On

...........First a write test will be performed, and

then the actual writing will be performed.

Depending on the media and the state of the hard disk,

it is possible that an error may occur while the data is

being written. (If you are using a CD-R, this will make

the media unusable.) You can turn on the TEST button

to check whether an error will occur before you actu-

ally write the disc. If an error occurs during the test,

halt the procedure, and either reduce the write speed or

set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ENABLE.

If desired, set the UNDERRUN PROTECT

button to ENABLE.

The AW2400 CD-RW drive has a function to prevent

“buffer underrun” errors that can occur if data transfer

cannot keep up with the write speed.

Switch the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to the

“ENABLE” setting to prevent buffer underruns.

Basic settings for the CD-RW drive

• In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can

be used to make selections.

HINT

• The CD-RW drive factory settings can be restored from the

CD screen CD Setting page by pressing the [F3] key

(DEFAULT) while holding the [SHIFT] key.

HINT

• If the UNDERRUN PROTECT button is set to ENABLE, the

TEST button will automatically be turned off. Also, if the TEST

button is turned on, the UNDERRUN PROTECT button will

automatically be set to DISABLE.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Writing audio data

Creating an audio CD

216

Here’s how to write the audio data from the stereo track of each song to a CD-R/RW disc in CD-

DA format.

Audio data write operations are accessed via the CD

screen Write page.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [CD]

key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after

pressing the [CD] key.

This page contains the following items.

1 Track list

This is a list of the songs containing stereo tracks that will

be written to the CD-R/RW media. The line enclosed by a

dotted frame is currently selected for operations. If no

songs have been registered, this will indicate “-NO

TRACK-”.

If audio data has already been written to the inserted CD-

R/RW media but the media has not yet been ﬁnalized,

“--EXIST--” will be displayed for the already-written data.

B TRACK AT ONCE button

Turn this button on to create an audio CD using the Track

At Once method.

C DISC AT ONCE button

Turn this button on to create an audio CD using the Disc

At Once method.

D ADD button

Adds a song at the end of the track list.

E INSERT button

Inserts a new song in front of the song currently selected

in the list.

F DELETE button

Deletes the selected song from the list.

G WRITE button

Executes the actual CD write operation.

H FINALIZE button

(only displayed for TRACK AT ONCE)

Finalizes the disc so that it can be played on a CD-RW

drive or standard audio CD player.

I MARKER button

(only displayed for DISC AT ONCE)

For each stereo track, this enables or disables the markers

that have been set within that song.

When you move the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key, the start point, end point and markers

within the currently selected stereo track will be enabled.

(A “ﬂag” icon will appear at the right of the list.) If mark-

ers are enabled for a stereo track, a track number will be

written to the CD at the location of each marker. Regard-

less of any areas of silence, the entire region from the Start

point to the End point will be written.

Writing audio data

■ If you turn on

the TRACK AT ONCE button

B C

■ If you turn on the DISC AT ONCE button

Writing audio data

217

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Creating an audio CD

Here’s how to use the Track At Once method to write ste-

reo tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD-R/RW

media. Use this method if you expect to be adding tracks

to the disc later, or if you want an automatic two-second

gap between tracks.

Make sure that the appropriate virtual track

is selected for the stereo track of the

song(s) you want to write.

Only the virtual track that can be played by the stereo

track (i.e., the “current track”) will be written to disc.

If the correct virtual track is not selected, load the

desired song, use the TRACK screen Stereo TR page

to switch to the correct virtual track, and then save the

song.

Call the CD screen Write page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[CD] key.

Insert a CD-R/RW disc in the drive, move

the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

The inserted CD-RW will be automatically checked.

Move the cursor to the ADD button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The track list will show information (track number/

song name/size of the stereo track) for the song that

will be written to track 1 of the CD.

Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the

track list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the song that

will be written to track 1.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select the songs

that will be written to track 2 and following.

Writing Track At Once

• If data has already been written on the inserted CD-RW disc,

a popup window will appear immediately after step 3 asking

whether you want to erase the data. If you want to erase the

entire disc move the cursor to the OK button. If you want to

cancel the audio CD write operation, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button. Then press the [ENTER] key.

HINT

• When you move the cursor to the ADD button and press the

[ENTER] key, a new song will be added following the existing

songs.

• By using the INSERT button instead of the ADD button, you

can insert a new song immediately before the song that is

selected in the list.

•You can use the DELETE button to delete the currently

selected song from the track list.

HINT

• Songs in which data has not been recorded on the virtual

tracks selected for the stereo track will not be displayed. A

current song that was not saved after the stereo track was

recorded will also not be displayed.

• Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not

be displayed.

• Songs with the sampling frequency of 48 kHz will not be dis-

played.

HINT

• Pressing the [F1]–[F3] keys while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ADD ([F1] key),

INSERT ([F2] key), and DELETE ([F3] key) buttons, respec-

tively.

HINT

• When you add a song to the track list, the added song will

always be initially selected. Change this as required.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Writing audio data

Creating an audio CD

218

Move the cursor to the WRITE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm.

To begin writing the disc, move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will indicate “CD Writing...” while

data is being written to the disc. When writing is com-

pleted, a popup window will ask you whether you

want to ﬁnalize.

To ﬁnalize the disc, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

If you do not want to ﬁnalize the disc, move the cursor

to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

This completes the writing process.

Here’s how to use the Disc At Once method to write stereo

tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD-R/RW

media. Use this method if you do not want to create

silence between each track of the CD, or if you want to

write a single song divided into multiple tracks on the CD.

Make sure that the appropriate virtual track

is selected for the stereo track of the

song(s) you want to write.

If you want to divide the song into CD

tracks at the marker locations speciﬁed

within the song, check that markers have

been set at the appropriate locations.

Call the CD screen Write page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[CD] key.

Move the cursor to DISC AT ONCE and

press the [ENTER] key.

The CD-RW disc inserted in the drive will automati-

cally be checked.

Move the cursor to the ADD button and

press the [ENTER] key.

The track list will show information (track number/

song name/size of the stereo track) for the song that

will be written to track 1 of the CD.

• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the WRITE button.

HINT

•A “BUFFER UNDERRUN!” error message will appear if a

buffer underrun occurs while writing. In this case, either

decrease the writing speed to 4x or set the UNDERRUN

PROTECT button to ENABLE (

→

p. 215).

• If you enabled the write test in “Basic settings for the CD-RW

drive” (

→

p. 215), a write test will be performed before the

data is actually written. An error message will appear if a

problem occurs during the write test.

• Copy-prohibit data will automatically be written into the CD

that is created.

NOTE

Writing Disc At Once

• If data has already been written on the CD-RW disc that you

insert, a popup window will appear immediately after step 4

asking whether you want to erase the data. Move the cursor

to the OK button if you want to erase the entire disc, or to the

CANCEL button if you want to cancel execution. Then press

the [ENTER] key.

HINT

• When you move the cursor to the ADD button and press the

[ENTER] key, a new song will be added following the existing

songs.

• By using the INSERT button instead of the ADD button, you

can insert a new song immediately before the song that is

selected in the list.

•You can use the DELETE button to delete the currently

selected song from the track list.

HINT

Writing audio data

219

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Creating an audio CD

Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the

track list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or

the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the song that

will be written to track 1.

If you want the stereo track of the selected

song to be divided into CD tracks at the

location of each marker, move the cursor to

the MARKER button and press the [ENTER]

key.

Markers will be enabled for that song, and a “ﬂag”

icon will appear at the right of the list.

Repeat steps 5–7 to select the songs that

will be written to track 2 and following.

Move the cursor to the WRITE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm.

To begin writing the disc, move the cursor

to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will indicate “CD Writing...” while

data is being written to the media. When writing is

completed, the CD-R/RW media will be ejected, and

the following popup window will appear.

If you want to create another CD with identi-

cal contents, insert a new disc, and move

the cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

Writing will begin again. Alternatively, you can move

the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the

[ENTER] key to exit the write operation.

• Songs in which data has not been recorded on the virtual

tracks selected for the stereo track will not be displayed. A

current song that was not saved after the stereo track was

recorded will also not be displayed.

• Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not

be displayed.

• Songs with the sampling frequency of 48 kHz will not be dis-

played.

HINT

• Markers can be enabled/disabled independently for each

song.

• When you use markers to divide a stereo track, the location of

the divisions will be speciﬁed in units of 1/75 second.

HINT

• Note that if markers are enabled, the track numbers shown in

the list will not match the number of tracks written to the CD.

•A maximum of 99 tracks can be written to an audio CD. If, for

example, markers are enabled for the song you write to CD

track 1, and this song contains 98 markers, it will not be possi-

ble to write any more songs to that CD-R/RW disc.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F1]–[F3] keys while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ADD ([F1] key),

INSERT ([F2] key), and DELETE ([F3] key) buttons, respec-

tively.

HINT

• When you add a song to the track list, the added song will

always be initially selected. Change this as required.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the WRITE button.

HINT

• If you enabled the write test in “Basic settings for the CD-RW

drive” (

→

p. 215), a write test will be performed before the

data is actually written. An error message will appear if a

problem occurs during the write test.

• Copy-prohibit data will automatically be written to the CD.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Finalizing CD-R/RW media

Creating an audio CD

220

Here’s how to ﬁnalize CD-R/RW media created using Track At Once so that the disc can be

played by a CD-RW drive or a CD player.

Insert the CD-R/RW disc that you want to

ﬁnalize into the CD-RW drive.

Call the CD screen Write page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[CD] key.

Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE

button, and press the [ENTER] key.

The track list will show the tracks that have been writ-

ten to that CDR/RW disc. Already-recorded tracks will

be displayed as “--EXIST--”.

Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the ﬁnalize

operation.

To ﬁnalize the disc, move the cursor to the

OK button and press the [ENTER] key.

If you decide not to ﬁnalize the disc, move the cursor

to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key.

Finalizing CD-R/RW media

• CD-R/RW media written by the AW2400 using Track At Once (and not yet ﬁnalized) can-

not be played by another CD-RW drive or a CD player, but it can be played by the

AW2400’s CD Play function. (

→

p. 222)

HINT

• The ﬁnalize operation cannot be halted once it has been

started. Perform this operation with care.

NOTE

Erasing CD-RW media

221

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Creating an audio CD

Here’s how to erase all data that has been written to CD-RW media so that the CD-RW disc can

be used to record new data. You will need to perform this operation on a disc that has been used

to store data from a computer or other equipment if you want to use that disc with the AW2400.

Call the CD screen Setting page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F3] key after pressing the

[CD] key.

Move the cursor to the CD-RW MEDIA

ERASE ﬁeld, and press the [ENTER] key to

select the desired erasure method.

The buttons select the following erasure methods.

• SIMPLY button...........Only the TOC (Table Of Con-

tents) data written to the CD-

RW disc will be erased. This

is the quickest way to erase

a CD-RW disc.

• PERFECTLY button...All data written to the CD-

RW disc will be erased com-

pletely. This method erases

all data from the media and

thus will take longer than the

SIMPLY option.

Move the cursor to the appropriate button and press

the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to

conﬁrm the erasure.

● If you turn on the SIMPLY button

● If you turn on the PERFECTLY button

To execute the erasure move the cursor to

the OK button. If you decide not to erase

the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL

button. Then press the [ENTER] key.

Erasure will begin if you selected the OK button. (This

operation cannot be halted.)

Erasing CD-RW media

• Since data is erased as necessary when you back up AW2400 data to CD-RW media or

when you write audio data to CD-RW media, you do not need to perform the following

procedure each time you re-use the disc.

HINT

• The erased data cannot be recovered. Perform this operation with care.

NOTE

• Pressing the [F1]–[F2] keys while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SIMPLY ([F1] key) and

PERFECTLY ([F2] key) buttons, respectively.

HINT

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Playing an audio CD

Creating an audio CD

222

The AW2400 CD Play function lets you play back a conventional audio CD or CD-R/RW media to

which audio data has been written via the CD-RW drive.

Call the CD screen Play page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [CD]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F2] key after pressing the

[CD] key.

In this page you can play back an audio CD inserted in

the CD-RW drive.

1 CD PLAY MODE button

Switches the CD Play function on/off.

B INPUT CH MUTE/MIX button

Use this button to specify whether the signals from

input channels 1–16 will be output together with CD

playback (MIX button), or whether only the CD signal

will be output (MUTE button).

C List

Displays the tracks on the audio CD that is inserted in

the CD-RW drive.

Insert the audio CD that you want to play

into the CD-RW drive.

Move the cursor to the CD PLAY MODE but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

The CD Play function will be activated, and the CD

track data will be read.

To play the CD tracks, press the PLAY [ ]

key. To stop, press the STOP [■] key.

During playback the audio output of the CD-RW drive

will be sent directly to the stereo output channel. Use

the STEREO fader to adjust the volume.

When the CD Play function is on, the transport section

keys have the following functions.

To exit the CD Play function, move the cur-

sor to the CD PLAY MODE button and press

the [ENTER] key.

Playing an audio CD

• The CD Play function can also be used to play mixed-mode CDs (tracks 2 and above)

and CD Extra CDs (1st session only).

• CD-R/RW discs can also be played prior to ﬁnalization.

HINT

Key Operation

PLAY [ ] key Play

STOP [■] key Stop

REW [ ] key/FF [ ] key Rewind/Fast-forward

[DATA/JOG] dial

Select tracks

(Press the [ENTER] key

to conﬁrm the selection)

[] key/[ ] key Select tracks

• Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section

[SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CD PLAY MODE but-

ton.

HINT

• The CD PLAY MODE button can be switched on/off only while

CD playback is stopped.

• While the CD PLAY MODE button is on, the CD-RW drive will

be locked and it will not be possible to eject the disc.

NOTE

223

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings

Chapter 23

Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings

This section covers settings that apply to digital I/O and optional I/O cards.

Wordclock source selection and settings for Vari-pitch and cascade connection are made via the

DIO screen Setting page.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO]

key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after

pressing the [DIO] key.

This page includes the following items.

1 WORDCLOCK SOURCE ﬁeld

Selects the wordclock source to which the AW2400 will

synchronize. The condition of the received wordclock and

synchronization status are also displayed here.

B VARI ﬁeld

Provides ﬁne adjustment of the internal clock in order to

control the Vari-pitch function.

C STEREO BUS CASCADE ﬁeld

Provides settings that allow an external device connected

to the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to cascade-con-

nected to the AW2400 stereo bus.

“Wordclock” refers to the clock signal that provides the

basic timing for all digital audio signals. When transfer-

ring digital audio signals between the AW2400 and an

external device such as a computer-based DAW (Digital

Audio Workstation) or HDR (Hard-Disk Recorder) it is

necessary to ensure that both devices are synchronized to

the same wordclock signal. If the wordclock used by the

two devices is not perfectly synchronized the digital audio

cannot be accurately transferred and severe noise will

often be the result.

The normal procedure is to designate one device that will

be the source of the wordclock signal for the entire system

as the “wordclock master,” or simply “clock master”, and

all devices that receive and synchronize to the wordclock

master as “wordclock slaves”. The AW2400 can be set to

function either as the wordclock master or slave.

Call the DIO screen Setting page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[DIO] key.

Wordclock settings are made in the WORDCLOCK

SOURCE ﬁeld.

Wordclock and Cascade Settings

Select the Wordclock Source

DEF

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Wordclock and Cascade Settings

224

Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings

1 INT button

When this button is on the AW2400’s internal clock is

selected as the wordclock source. Use this setting

when using the AW2400 on it’s own, or when using

the AW2400 as the wordclock master for other

devices.

B D.ST IN button

When this button is turned on the clock signal

included in the digital audio signal received at the

[DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector is used as the

wordclock source.

Use this setting when you want the AW2400 to func-

tion as a wordclock slave that synchronizes to the sig-

nal received via the [DIGITAL STEREO IN]

connector. Choose this setting when, for example, you

will be cascade-connecting the digital audio from an

external device to the AW2400 stereo bus, or when

receiving digital audio from a DAT recorder or similar

digital audio source.

C 1/2–15/16 buttons

When one of these buttons is turned on the clock sig-

nal included in the corresponding digital audio signal

received via the rear-panel slot is used as the word-

clock source (i.e. the clock signal included in one ste-

reo pair: 1/2, 3/4–15/16).

Use one of these settings when using an external HDR

or other digital audio source as the wordclock master

to which the AW2400 will be synchronized as the

wordclock slave.

The CLOCK and SYNC rows show the condition of

the received wordclock signal and the synchronization

status, respectively.

• CLOCK ... A “●” symbol will appear when an appro-

priate wordclock signal is detected.

• SYNC...... A “●” symbol will appear when the

AW2400 is properly synchronized to the

incoming wordclock signal. A “ ” symbol

will appear when an appropriate word-

clock signal is not detected.

D SLOT

When an I/O card is installed in the rear-panel slot a

graphic symbol that indicates the type of card will

appear here. “NO CARD” will appear when no card is

installed.

E IN, OUT

Indicates the number of input channels (IN) and output

channels (OUT) available on an I/O card installed in

the rear-panel slot.

F Fs

Indicates the sampling frequency of the wordclock

signal currently selected as the wordclock source.

• When the internal clock is selected the sampling frequency of

the current song becomes the sampling frequency for the

entire system.

HINT

• Buttons that appear gray indicate that an appropriate digital

signal is not available at the corresponding connector or slot,

and cannot be used.

NOTE

• When using the AW2400 as wordclock slave, check that the

sampling frequency of the current song matches the sampling

frequency shown in the Fs ﬁled. For example, a song that was

recorded with a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz will play back

with the wrong pitch and tempo if slaved to a 48 kHz word-

clock signal.

• “Unlock” in the Fs ﬁeld indicates that proper synchronization

with the wordclock source has not been achieved. In such

cases check that an appropriate wordclock signal has been

selected as the source.

NOTE

Wordclock and Cascade Settings

225

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings

Select a wordclock source via the WORDCLOCK SOURCE ﬁeld.

The wordclock source setting will depend on how the AW2400 is being used. Here are a few

examples.

● AW2400 As Wordclock Master

When the AW2400 is used on its own, or when it is used as the wordclock master for an external

HDR, DAW, or similar digital audio device, turn the INT button on. The external device(s) must

be set to synchronize to the master wordclock from the AW2400.

● Using an HDR or DAW As Wordclock Master

Set the HDR or DAW to use it’s internal clock in order to function as wordclock master so that

the AW2400 can synchronize to the digital signal received at a digital input on an I/O card. Select

the 1/2–15/16 button corresponding to the digital input at which the master signal is being

received.

● Using an MD or DAT Recorder as Wordclock Master

Connect the digital audio output of the MD or DAT recorder to the AW2400 [DIGITAL STEREO

IN] connector, and turn the D.ST IN button on so that the AW2400 can synchronize to the

received digital signal.

Move the cursor to the appropriate button and press the [ENTER] key.

The AW2400 clock source will change accordingly, and the sampling frequency of the selected

clock source will appear in the Fs ﬁeld.

AW2400

(Wordclock master)

WORDCLOCK SOURCE=INT

[DIGITAL STEREO OUT]

connector

Wordclock

I/O slot

Digital I/O card

HDR

(Wordclock slave)

[DIGITAL STEREO IN]

connector

Wordclock

AW2400

(Wordclock slave)

WORDCLOCK SOURCE=1/2–15/16

I/O slot

Digital I/O card

HDR

(Wordclock master)

Wordclock

AW2400

(Wordclock slave)

WORDCLOCK SOURCE=D.ST IN

[DIGITAL STEREO OUT]

connector

Wordclock

DAT recorder, etc.

(Wordclock master)

[DIGITAL STEREO IN]

connector

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Wordclock and Cascade Settings

226

Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings

When the AW2400 is set to use it’s own internal clock as

the wordclock source it is possible to adjust the sampling

frequency over a small range to adjust the pitch and tempo

of song playback (Vari-pitch). This function can be useful

to match the playback pitch of an AW2400 song to an

acoustic instrument, or to adjust the length of a song.

Call the DIO screen Setting page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[DIO] key.

Move the cursor to the WORDCLOCK

SOURCE ﬁeld INT button and press the

[ENTER] key.

This selects the AW2400 internal clock as the word-

clock source.

Move the cursor to the VARI ﬁeld.

Vari-pitch settings are made via the VARI ﬁeld.

1 FIX button

When this button is turned on the sampling frequency

is ﬁxed at the sampling frequency shown to the right of

the button (default).

B VARI button

The Vari-pitch function is active when this button is

turned on.

C VARI knob

Adjusts the sampling frequency of the current song in

a range of -5.97 to +6.00%.

Move the cursor to the VARI button and

press the [ENTER] key.

This activates the Vari-pitch function.

Move the cursor to the VARI knob and use

the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

set the sampling frequency as required.

To disable the Vari-pitch function move the

cursor to the FIX button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The Vari-pitch function will be turned off and the sam-

pling frequency will be ﬁxed at the value shown to the

right of the FIX button.

Digital audio signals received at the AW2400 [DIGITAL

STEREO IN] connector can be mixed directly into the

AW2400’s stereo bus (cascade connection). The output

from a digital mixer could be cascade-connected in this

way to allow the mixer’s inputs to be mixed to stereo

along with the AW2400’s own inputs.

● AW2400 Cascade Connection

Connect the digital output from the device

to be cascade connected to the AW2400

[DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector.

Call the DIO screen Setting page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[DIO] key.

Move the cursor to the D.ST IN button in the

WORDCLOCK SOURCE ﬁeld and press the

[ENTER] key.

This selects the signal received at the [DIGITAL STE-

REO IN] connector as the wordclock source.

Fine Adjustment Of Overall Song

Pitch (Vari-pitch)

• When the Vari-pitch function is enabled and sampling fre-

quency is adjusted, any external devices slaved to the

AW2400 wordclock signal will be affected. Some slave

devices may not be able to synchronize properly to the

AW2400 wordclock signal when it is adjusted using the Vari-

pitch function.

NOTE

Cascade-connecting External

Devices

Input channels

Track channels

Effect return channels

Stereo bus

Stereo track

[STEREO OUT] jack, etc.

Digital audio

output

[DIGITAL STEREO IN]

connector

AW2400

(Wordclock slave)

Stereo output channel

External device

(Wordclock master)

227

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings

Move the cursor to the STEREO BUS CAS-

CADE ﬁeld.

Cascade connection settings are made in the STEREO

BUS CASCADE ﬁeld.

1 STEREO BUS CASCADE button

Enables or disables the cascade connection.

B ATT knob

Adjusts the level of the signal received at the [DIGI-

TAL STEREO IN] connector.

Move the cursor to the STEREO BUS CAS-

CADE button and press the [ENTER] key.

This connects the digital audio signal received from

the external device directly to the AW2400 stereo bus.

Use the ATT knob to adjust the level of the

received digital signal as required.

You can now mix and record the signals from the

AW2400’s own inputs along with the digital audio

received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to

the AW2400 stereo track.

You can visually check the status of the signals received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector

as well as signals received via an I/O card installed in the rear-panel slot in the DIO screen Sta-

tus page.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO]

key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after

pressing the [DIO] key. This is a display-only page that

does not include any editable settings.

This page contains the following items.

1 Status

Indicates the status of received digital signals. The mean-

ings of the displays are as follows:

• Fs (Sampling Frequency)

Indicates the sampling frequency of the received digital

signal.

• EMPHASIS

Indicates whether emphasis is on or off for the received

digital signal.

• In order to record the signal received at the [DIGITAL STE-

REO IN] connector the UTILITY screen Preference page CD/

DAT DIGITAL REC button must be set to ENABLE.

NOTE

Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal

Parameter values Description

44.1k Sampling frequency = 44.1kHz

48k Sampling frequency = 48kHz

None Unknown sampling frequency

UNLOCK

No input signal, or inappropriate input

signal.

Parameter values Description

On Emphasis ON

Off Emphasis OFF

??? Unknown

• The following status displays will appear as “----” when a MY8-AT,

MY8-TD, MY16-AT, or MY16-TD I/O card is installed.

NOTE

Wordclock and Cascade Settings • Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

228

Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings

•CATEGORY

Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in

the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format. This

parameter can display the following values:

• COPY

Indicates the status of copy protection information

included in the IEC958 Part2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) for-

mat signals.

B [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector status

Indicates the status of the digital audio signal received at

the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector.

C SLOT

When an I/O card is installed in the rear-panel slot a

graphic symbol that indicates the type of card appears

here. “NO CARD” will appear when no card is installed.

D Digital I/O card status

Displays the status of the digital audio signal received via

a digital I/O card.

Settings for plug-in DSP cards installed in the rear-panel slot are made via the DIO screen Plug-

in page.

To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO]

key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key after

pressing the [DIO] key.

The content of the display will depend on the plug-in card

installed. Refer to the plug-in card owner’s manual for

details.

As of July 2005 the available plug-in card is:

•Waves .................. Y96K

Check the following Yamaha website for the latest infor-

mation on plug-in cards.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Parameter values Description

General Temporarily used.

Laser Optical Laser optical device

D/D Conv

Digital - Digital converter and signal pro-

cessing device

Magnetic

Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk

device

D.Broadcast Digital broadcast reception

Instrument

Musical instrument, microphone, and

sources that generate string signals

AD Conv

A/D converter

(without copyright information)

AD Conv with (c)

A/D converter

(with copyright information)

Solid Memory Solid memory device

Experiment Experimental device

Unknown Unknown device

• “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are moni-

toring IEC958 Part 3 (AES/EBU-Professional) format signals

(that do not include Category Code Bit).

NOTE

Parameter values Description

OK Copy allowed

Prohibit Copy prohibited

• The status of digital signals received via a digital I/O card is dis-

played in odd/even channel pairs.

HINT

Plug-in Card Settings

Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal • Plug-in Card Settings

229

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

USB

Chapter 24

USB

This chapter explains operation and use of the AW2400 USB interface.

The AW2400 USB interface can be connected to a personal computer to allow data transfer

between the AW2400 and the computer. The following types of operation are possible.

● MIDI Message Transfer (Normal Mode)

In this type of operation the USB connector performs the

functions of the three MIDI connectors usually used for

MIDI data transfer, allowing efﬁcient MIDI communica-

tion with the computer. The USB port is normally in this

mode immediately after the AW2400 power is turned on.

● WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)

Audio data recorded on the AW2400 can be transferred to

the computer in the form of WAV ﬁles for storage or fur-

ther manipulation. Conversely, WAV ﬁles can be trans-

ferred to the AW2400 from the computer.

For example, you might transfer a recording made on the

AW2400 to the computer and use a computer-based wave-

form editing program to edit the waveform. Once edited

the WAV ﬁle can be transferred back to the AW2400

where it can be processed and mixed with other audio

data. It is also possible to directly access data on the inter-

nal AW2400 hard disk from the computer and directly edit

the data “in place”.

What You Can Do With USB

• In order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication the

MIDI port settings must be correct. Refer to “Basic MIDI Settings”

on page 194 for details on the MIDI port settings.

• Before connecting the AW2400 USB connector to the computer

the appropriate USB-MIDI driver must be properly installed on the

computer (

→

p. 266).

NOTE

• Either the Windows XP SP1 or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher operating

system is required for computer WAV ﬁle management with the

AW2400.

NOTE

● USB Storage mode

WAV ﬁles

(Direct audio data

editing is also possible.)

Computer

AW2400

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)

230

USB

In this mode you can directly access the AW2400 hard disk from the computer to manipulate and

manage the audio data (WAV ﬁles). The following two methods can be used.

This method uses the “Transport” folder on the AW2400

as the transit point for transferring ﬁles to and from the

computer.

WAV ﬁles are ﬁrst exported to the “Transport” folder on

the AW2400 hard disk from the audio tracks. The

AW2400 is then connected to the computer via a USB

cable, the “Transport” folder is accessed and opened from

the computer, and the WAV ﬁles are copied to the com-

puter hard disk. Files to be moved from the computer to

the AW2400 are ﬁrst copied from the computer to the

AW2400 “Transport” folder, and then imported into the

audio tracks from there.

In this case the AW2400 and computer are connected via a

USB cable, and the target WAV ﬁles in speciﬁc folders on

the AW2400 hard disk are directly accessed from the com-

puter. Waveform editing software running on the computer

can be used to directly edit WAV ﬁles residing on the

AW2400 hard disk, and complete songs can be backed up

(copied to) the computer hard disk. Refer to “Song Folder

Organization” on page 166 for details on how the folders

are organized.

To directly access ﬁles on the AW2400 internal hard disk,

ﬁrst follow the procedure outlined below to switch to the

USB Storage Mode.

Make sure that your computer meets the

following requirements.

•OS...........................Windows XP Professional/

Home Edition SP1 or higher, or

Mac OSX 10.3 or higher.

• USB Interface.........USB 2.0

Make sure the POWER switch on the

AW2400 is set to OFF, then connect the

AW2400 to the computer via a USB cable.

WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)

■ Using the Transport Folder

AW2400

WAV ﬁle transfer (USB)

● Transfer to Computer via the “Transport” Folder

Computer

“Transport” folder

Export

Audio tracks/

stereo track

• Files in the “Transport” folder can also be directly accessed and

manipulated from applications running on the computer.

HINT

AW2400

WAV ﬁle transfer (USB)

● Transfer to AW2400 via the “Transport” Folder

Computer

“Transport” folder

Import

Audio tracks/

stereo track

■ Directly Accessing AW2400 Audio Data

AW2400

Backup of Song Data etc.

(USB)

● Directly Accessing Audio Data

Computer

Direct Editing of

Audio Data (USB)

“Transport” folder

Audio tracks/

stereo track

Switching to the USB Storage

Mode

•A USB 1.1 interface can also be used, but in that case ﬁle

transfer will occur at USB 1.1 speed.

•To use Mac OS X 10.3 you will need to re-initialize the

AW2400 hard disk and set the hard disk cluster size to 32K

(

→

p. 212).

NOTE

WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)

231

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

USB

Turn on the AW2400.

No driver installation is necessary for WAV ﬁle trans-

fer. If it is the ﬁrst time you have connected a USB

cable on a Windows machine, however, you may see a

message prompting you to install a USB MIDI driver.

Even if you will not send and receive MIDI messages

via the USB cable, install the USB MIDI driver as

described on page 266.

Call the USB screen USB page by pressing

the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB section [USB]

key.

Move the cursor to the CONNECT button,

and press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you whether you want to

save the current song.

Move the cursor to YES (to save the current

song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the

current song) and press the [ENTER] key.

The AW2400 USB Storage Mode will be engaged, and

the button will change to “CANCEL”. Most of the

AW2400 functions are temporarily disabled while this

mode is engaged.

Display the AW2400 internal hard disk on

the computer screen.

● In the case of Windows XP:

The two windows will appear.

● In the case of Mac OS X:

The “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” drive icons will

appear on the desktop.

CONNECT button

• Before turning the USB Storage Mode on, make sure that no

MIDI data is being transferred via the USB connection with

your computer.

NOTE

• If the windows shown above do not appear, choose to display

the “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” drives from the Windows

Start

→

My Computer menu.

NOTE

• If the icons are not displayed properly, use the Disk Utility to

temporarily un-mount the appropriate volume, and then

mount it again.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)

232

USB

Open the appropriate drive/folder and copy

the required WAV ﬁles or directly edit the

WAV ﬁles using a waveform editor applica-

tion.

To access the Transport folder open the “AW2400-2”

drive.

To directly access WAV ﬁles on the AW2400 open the

“Song1” folder on the “AW2400-1” drive and the

“Song2” folder on the “AW2400-2” drive. These fold-

ers contain folders bearing the names of the recorded

songs (extension .AWS), and those folders further con-

tain folders labeled “Audio” that contain the actual

audio data.

To backup a complete song to the computer simply

copy the folder bearing the name of the song you want

to backup to the computer.

Refer to “Song Folder Organization” on page 166 for

information on how the folders are organized.

Be sure to carry out the steps outlined in “Exiting the

USB Storage Mode” when disconnecting the AW2400

from the computer.

Use the following procedure to exit from the USB Storage

Mode.

Be sure the “unmount” the AW2400 hard

disk from your computer after closing all

AW2400 windows.

● In the case of Windows XP:

Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the task-

bar and remove the corresponding two “USB mass

storage devices”.

● In the case of Mac OSX:

Drag the “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” icons from

the desktop to the trash.

In the AW2400 screen, move the cursor to

the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window conﬁrming whether the AW2400 has

been safely removed from the computer will appear.

To return to the normal mode move the cur-

sor to the OK button and press the [ENTER]

key.

•Veriﬁcation and repair of the internal hard disk can be carried

out from the computer. From a Windows computer enter the

“chkdsk” command at the command prompt, or from a Macin-

tosh computer running OS X use the Disk Utility First Aid

function.

HINT

•For 24-bit songs, the audio data contained in the “Audio” fold-

ers is stored in 32-bit WAV format. If your waveform editor

application cannot handle 32-bit data, ﬁrst export the WAV

ﬁle(s) to the “Transport” folder. WAV ﬁles imported or exported

via the “Transport” folder are automatically converted to 24-bit

format that can be edited using most waveform editor soft-

ware.

• Do not change the names of any folders/ﬁles other than those

in the Transport folder. Any folder/ﬁle names that have been

added or changed outside the Transport folder from the com-

puter will be automatically deleted. Be especially careful not

to change a song folder or song ﬁle name.

• Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied.

NOTE

Exiting the USB Storage Mode

• If an error message appears, execute “Safely Remove Hard-

ware” one or two more times. You should then be able to

remove the device without seeing an error message.

NOTE

WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)

233

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

USB

The WAV ﬁles corresponding to the audio tracks you want

to transfer to a computer must ﬁrst be exported to the

“Transport” folder on the internal hard disk drive. Once

these ﬁles have been exported they can be edited using

appropriate waveform editing software, or imported into a

DAW application for further processing or integration

with other projects.

Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[EDIT] key.

Move the cursor to the edit command ﬁeld

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select EXPORT.

Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the

selected edit command.

The display will appear as follows.

1 From TR

Selects the source track for the export operation (1–24,

1&2–23&24, ST, ALL).

B From V.TR

Selects the source virtual track for the export operation

(1–8).

C From Start

Speciﬁes the start point of the data to be exported in

counter format.

D From End

Speciﬁes the end point of the data to be exported in

counter format.

E File Name

Displays the name of the WAV ﬁle to be exported. The

default name is the name of the virtual track (the odd-

numbered virtual track in track pairs) to be exported.

F EXECUTE button

Executes the export operation.

Move the cursor to the From TR ﬁeld, and

select the audio track that you want to

export.

If you select “ALL,” the current tracks 1–24 will be

exported as separate monaural WAV ﬁles.

If you select “1”–“24,” the single speciﬁed track will

be exported as a monaural WAV ﬁle.

If you select “1&2”–“23&24” or ST, the speciﬁed pair

of tracks (or the Stereo track) will be exported as a ste-

reo WAV ﬁle.

Move the cursor to the From V.TR, From

Start, and From End ﬁelds, and specify the

virtual track number and region to be

exported.

Copying Exported WAV Files To

the Computer

Edit commands

DEF

• If you selected “ALL” as the export source, all the recorded

tracks will be exported automatically. It is not possible to spec-

ify the virtual track number for each.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)

234

USB

When you have ﬁnished setting the param-

eters, move the cursor to the EXECUTE but-

ton and press the [ENTER] key.

If a source other than “ALL” is selected the NAME

EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to

enter a ﬁle name.

If you select “ALL” as the source the NAME EDIT

popup window will appear, allowing you to enter a

folder name. The WAV ﬁles (“TRACK_01.WAV”–

“TRACK_24.WAV”) will be stored in the new folder,

which will be created inside the “Transport” folder.

Enter an appropriate ﬁle or folder name via

the NAME EDIT popup window, as required.

For details on how to enter a name, refer to page 32.

To execute the export operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The export operation will begin. If you move the cur-

sor to the CANCEL button (instead of the OK button)

and press the [ENTER] key, the export operation will

be cancelled. (However, it is not possible to abort the

export process once it has been started.)

Switch to the USB Storage Mode (→ p. 230)

and display the AW2400 internal hard disk

on the computer screen.

Open the “AW2400-2” drive to access the

“Transport” folder.

Copy the WAV ﬁles exported to the “Trans-

port” folder to the computer.

WAV ﬁles in the “Transport” folder can also be

directly accessed from computer applications.

When the ﬁles have been copied, discon-

nect the AW2400 from the computer and

exit the USB Storage Mode (→ p. 232).

This procedure allows you to import WAV ﬁles transferred

from a computer to the “Transport” folder to be imported

into speciﬁed audio tracks.

Switch to the USB Storage Mode (→ p. 230)

and display the AW2400 internal hard disk

on the computer screen.

Copy the WAV ﬁles from the computer to

the AW2400 “Transport” folder.

The “Transport” folder is located in the “AW2400-2”

drive.

When the ﬁles have been copied, discon-

nect the AW2400 from the computer and

exit the USB Storage Mode (→ p. 232).

Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT]

key as many times as necessary, or by

pressing the [F1] key after pressing the

[EDIT] key.

Move the cursor to the edit command ﬁeld

and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]

keys to select IMPORT USB WAV.

Press the [ENTER] key to conﬁrm the

selected edit command.

The display will appear as follows.

• Since the AW2400 does not keep track of the date and time,

dummy values will be written as the ﬁle creation date and time

of the WAV ﬁles.

•Tracks that do not contain data in the speciﬁed region will not

be exported.

NOTE

Importing Copied WAV Files

From the Computer

HGFI

DEC

WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)

235

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

USB

1 File list

This shows the WAV ﬁles and folders (directories) in

the “Transport” folder. Move the cursor to the list, and

use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to

specify the WAV ﬁle that you want to import.

B FILE

This indicates the name of the WAV ﬁle or folder. The

icons shown here have the following meaning.

• .............Indicates a WAV ﬁle.

• .............Indicates a folder in the same level. You

can select this icon and press the

[ENTER] key to move down one level.

• ..............You can select this icon and press the

[ENTER] key to move up one level.

C TOTAL

Indicates the playback length (in units of hours/min-

utes/seconds/milliseconds) of the WAV ﬁle selected

for importing. This ﬁeld is for display only, and cannot

be changed.

D TYPE

Indicates whether the WAV ﬁle selected for importing

is monaural ( ) or stereo ( ). The numerical value

at the right indicates the bit depth of the WAV ﬁle.

This ﬁeld is for display only, and cannot be changed.

E LISTEN/ENTER/UP button

This display will change according to the selected ﬁle

or folder in the ﬁle list.

• LISTEN ......If a WAV ﬁle is selected, you can move

the cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key to repeatedly hear the

currently selected WAV ﬁle.

• ENTER.......If a folder is selected, you can move the

cursor to this button and press the

[ENTER] key to move into that folder.

•UP..............If the icon is selected, you can

move the cursor to this button and

press the [ENTER] key to move up one

folder.

F To TR

Selects the track number into which the WAV ﬁle will

be imported. If the import source is a stereo WAV ﬁle,

only tracks 1&2–23&24 can be selected.

G To V.TR

Selects the virtual track number (1–8) into which the

WAV ﬁle will be imported.

H To Start

Speciﬁes the start location (in counter-display and

measure/beat format) to which the WAV ﬁle will be

imported.

I EXECUTE button

Executes the import operation.

Move the cursor to the ﬁle list and use the

[DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to

select the WAV ﬁle that you want to import.

When a is included in the ﬁeld enclosed by the

dotted frame you can press the [ENTER] key to move

down one level. To move up one level display the

icon and press the [ENTER] key.

Use the To TR, To V.TR, and To Start ﬁelds to

specify the track number, virtual track num-

ber, and starting location into which the

WAV ﬁle will be imported.

When you have ﬁnished making the

required settings, move the cursor to the

EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER]

key.

A popup window will ask you to conﬁrm the opera-

tion.

To execute the import operation, move the

cursor to the OK button and press the

[ENTER] key.

The import operation will begin. If you move the cur-

sor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER]

key, the import operation will be cancelled.

• Only 16-bit or 24-bit, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, mono or stereo

WAV ﬁles can be imported. Also, WAV ﬁles having a different

bit depth or sample rate from the song cannot be imported.

NOTE

•Any existing data at the import destination will be overwritten.

Be careful not to accidentally overwrite important data.

NOTE

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

236

USB

237

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Mastering library list

No. Name Description

00 Initial Data Initialize to a state in which EQ and DYN are not applied.

01 VITAL MIX

Standard mastering effect that enhances the overall loudness, creating a mix with extended low and high ranges.

Use on the two-track mix for any type of song.

02 SOFT COMP

Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness without greatly changing the original nuances (dynamics).

Ideal for songs in which the mid and low ranges are important.

03 HARD ATTACKY

Limiter that emphasizes the attacks and produces an overall “ﬂattened” feel. Ideal for songs that emphasize the

rhythm.

04 SOFT ATTACKY

Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness and emphasizes the attacks without greatly changing the origi-

nal nuances (dynamics). Ideal for songs in which the low and mid ranges are important, and that emphasize the

rhythm.

05 LO-FI Limiter that produces a “lo-ﬁ” character.

06 DARK/SOFT

Soft limiter that produces the slightly ﬂattened feel characteristic of the 60’s and 70’s.

(Ideal for Beatles-type rock of the 60’s and 70’s, or more recently for a Vincent Gallo feel.)

07 DARK/HARD

Hard limiter that produces a strongly ﬂattened feel characteristic of the 60’s and 70’s.

(Ideal when you want to make the song sound like 60’s or 70’s rock such as the Beatles.)

08 BRIGHT Compressor that produces a boosted high range.

09 LO BOOST Compressor that produces a boosted low range.

10 HARD LIMIT Limiter that produces an extremely ﬂattened feel. Ideal for hard-edged songs.

11 LIMITER Limiter without EQ. Ideal when you need only limiting.

12 NARROW Limiter that produces a sound like that of a small AM radio.

13 DIST Limiter that distorts the sound within the effect.

EQ Parameter list

238

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

EQ Parameter list

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

01 Bass Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB -3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 1.2 10 0.9 —

02 Bass Drum 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF

G +8.0 dB -7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON

F 80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 —

03 Snare Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB

F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz

Q 1.2 4.5 0.11 —

04 Snare Drum 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +1.5 dB -8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q— 10 0.7 0.1

05 Tom-tom 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +2.0 dB -7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB

F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz

Q 1.4 10 1.2 0.28

06 Cymbal

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz

Q— 8 0.9 —

07 High Hat

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -4.0 dB -2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB

F 95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz

Q— 0.5 1 —

08 Percussion

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz

Q— 4.5 0.56 —

09 E. Bass 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q— 5 4.5 —

10 E. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB

F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q 0.1 5 6.3 —

11 Syn. Bass 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 85 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 0.1 8 4.5 —

12 Syn. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 1.6 8 2.2 —

13 Piano 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz

Q— 8 0.9 —

14 Piano 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB -8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 5.6 10 0.7 —

15 E. G. Clean

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.0 dB -5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 0.18 10 6.3 —

16 E. G. Crunch 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz

Q8 4.5 0.63 9

17 E. G. Crunch 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz

Q8 0.4 0.16 —

18 E. G. Dist. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q— 9 10 —

19 E. G. Dist. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +6.0 dB -8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q— 10 4 —

20 A. G. Stroke 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 0.9 4.5 3.5 —

21 A. G. Stroke 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -3.5 dB -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz

Q— 9 4.5 —

22 A. G. Arpeg. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q— 4.5 4.5 0.12

23 A. G. Arpeg. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G 0.0 dB -5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz

Q— 7 4.5 —

24 Brass Sec.

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 2.8 2 0.7 7

25 Male Vocal 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB

F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11

26 Male Vocal 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.0 dB -5.0 dB -2.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q 0.11 10 5.6 —

27 Female Vo. 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G -1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB

F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz

Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14

28 Female Vo. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q— 0.16 0.2 —

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

EQ Parameter list

239

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Chorus &

Harmo

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 2.8 2 0.7 7

30 Total EQ 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB

F 95 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz

Q7 2.2 5.6 —

31 Total EQ 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB

F 95 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz

Q7 2.8 5.6 —

32 Total EQ 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz

Q— 0.28 0.7 —

33 Bass Drum 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +3.5 dB -10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz

Q2 10 0.4 0.4

34 Snare Drum 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q— 4.5 2.8 0.1

35 Tom-tom 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz

Q— 4.5 1.2 —

36 Piano 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +4.5 dB -13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz

Q8 10 9 —

37 Piano Low

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q10 6.3 2.2 —

38 Piano High

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz

Q10 6.3 2.2 0.1

39 Fine-EQ Cass

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q— 4.5 1.8 —

40 Narrator

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G -4.0 dB -1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz

Q4 7 0.63 —

# Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

Dynamics Parameters

240

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels. However, you can

also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound. The AW2400 features com-

prehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels, tape returns, and the bus and stereo

outputs. These processors allow you to compress, expand, compress-expand (compand), gate,

or duck the signals passing through the mixer, giving you unparalleled sonic quality and ﬂexibil-

ity.

A compressor provides a form of automatic level control.

By attenuating high levels, thus effectively reducing the

dynamic range, the compressor makes it much easier to

control signals and set appropriate fader levels. Reducing

the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be

set higher, therefore improving the signal-to-noise perfor-

mance.

Compressor (CMP) parameters:

• Threshold — determines the level of input signal

required to trigger the compressor. Signals at a level below

the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and

above the threshold level are compressed by the amount

speciﬁed using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is

determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.

• Ratio — controls the amount of compression-the change

in output signal level relative to change in input signal

level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB change in

input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change

in output level. For a 5:1 ratio, a 10 dB change in input

level (above the threshold) results in a 2 dB change in out-

put level.

• Attack — controls how soon the signal is compressed

once the compressor has been triggered. With a fast attack

time, the signal is compressed almost immediately. With a

slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes

through unaffected.

• Out Gain — sets the compressor’s output signal level.

Compression tends to reduce the average signal level. Out

Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an

appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path.

• Knee — sets the transition of the signal at the threshold.

With a hard knee, the transition between uncompressed

and compressed signal is immediate. With the softest

knee, knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches

the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold.

• Release — determines how soon the compressor returns

to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below

the threshold. If the release time is too short, the gain will

recover too quickly causing level pumping-noticeable gain

ﬂuctuations. If it is set too long, the compressor may not

have time to recover before the next high level signal

appears, and it will be compressed incorrectly.

Dynamics Parameters

Parameter Value

Threshold (dB) -54 to 0 (541 points)

Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,

6.0, 8.0, 10, 20,

∞ (16 points)

Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points)

Outgain (dB) 0 to +18 (181 points)

Knee hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points)

Release (ms) 6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)

■ Compressor

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Threshold = –20dB

Output Level

Input Level

Compression ratio = 2:1

Knee = hard

Dynamics Parameters

241

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

An expander is another form of automatic level control.

By attenuating the signal below the threshold, the

expander reduces low-level noise and effectively increases

the dynamic range of the recorded material.

Expander (EXP) parameters:

• Threshold — determines the level of input signal

required to trigger the expander. Signals above the thresh-

old pass through unaffected. Signals at and below the

threshold level are attenuated by the amount speciﬁed

using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is deter-

mined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.

• Ratio — controls the amount of expansion-the change in

output signal level relative to change in input signal level.

With a 1:2 ratio, for example, a 5 dB change in input level

(below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output

level. For a 1:5 ratio, a 2 dB change in input level (below

the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level.

• Attack — controls how soon the signal is expanded once

the expander has been triggered. With a fast attack time,

the signal is expanded almost immediately. With a slow

attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through

unaffected.

• Out Gain — sets the expander’s output signal level.

• Knee — sets the transition of the signal at the threshold.

With a hard knee, the transition between unexpanded and

expanded signal is immediate. With the softest knee,

knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches the

threshold and gradually ends above the threshold.

• Release — determines how soon the expander returns to

its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below

the threshold.

A compander is a compressor-expander-a combination of

signal compression and expansion. The compander attenu-

ates the input signal above the threshold as well as the

level below the width. For very dynamic material, this

program allows you to retain the dynamic range without

having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels

and clipping.

CompanderH (CPH) and

CompanderS (CPS) parameters:

• Threshold — determines the level of input signal

required to trigger the compander. Signals above the

threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and below

the threshold level are attenuated by the amount speciﬁed

using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is deter-

mined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter.

• Ratio — controls the amount of companding-the change

in output signal level relative to change in input signal

level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB change in

input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change

in output level. The hard compander (CPH) has a ﬁxed

ratio of 5:1 for expansion and the soft compander (CPS)

has a ﬁxed ratio of 1.5:1 for expansion.

• Attack — controls how soon the signal is companded

once the compander has been triggered. With a fast attack

time, the signal is companded almost immediately. With a

slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes

through unaffected.

• Out Gain — sets the compander’s output signal level.

• Width — is used to determine the distance, in decibels,

between the expander and the compressor. With a width of

90 dB, the expander is effectively switched off and the

compander is simply a compressor-limiter. With a smaller

width (30 dB) and a high threshold (0 dB), the compander

is an expander-compressor-limiter.

• Release — determines how soon the compander returns

to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below

the threshold.

Parameter Value

Threshold (dB) -54 to 0 (541 points)

Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,

6.0, 8.0, 10, 20,

∞ (16 points)

Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points)

Outgain (dB) 0 to +18 (181 points)

Knee hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points)

Release (ms) 6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)

■ Expander

Threshold = –10dB

Knee = knee5

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Output Level

Input Level

Expansion ratio = 2:1

Parameter Value

Threshold (dB) -54 to 0 (541 points)

Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0,

6.0, 8.0, 10, 20 (15 points)

Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points)

Outgain (dB) -18 to 0 (181 points)

Width (dB) 1 to 90 (90 points)

Release (ms) 6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)

■ Compander

Threshold

Width

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Output Level

Input Level

Dynamics Parameters

242

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

A gate, or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute sig-

nals below a set threshold level. It can be used to suppress

background noise and hiss from valve (tube) amps, effects

pedals, and microphones.

Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one

signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a speci-

ﬁed threshold. It is used for voice-over applications

where, for example, level of background music is auto-

matically reduced, allowing an announcer to be heard

clearly.

Gate (GAT) and Ducking (DUK) parameters:

• Threshold — sets the level at which the gate closes, cut-

ting off the signal. Signals above the threshold level pass

through unaffected. Signals at or below the threshold

cause the gate to close.

For ducking, trigger signal levels at and above the thresh-

old level activate ducking, and the signal level is reduced

to a level set by the Range parameter.

The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN

SOURCE parameter.

• Range — controls the level to which the gate closes. It

can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it

completely. At a setting of -70 dB, the gate closes com-

pletely when the input signal falls below the threshold. At

a setting of -30 dB, the gate only closes so far allowing an

attenuated signal through. At a setting of 0 dB, the gate

has no effect. When signals are gated abruptly, the sudden

cutoff can sound odd.

For ducking, a setting of -70 dB causes the signal to be

virtually cutoff. At a setting of -30 dB the signal is ducked

by 30 dB. At a setting of 0 dB, the duck has no effect.

• Attack — determines how fast the gate opens when the

signal exceeds the threshold level. Slow attack times can

be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive

sounds. Too slow an attack time makes some signals

sound backwards.

For ducking, this controls how soon the signal is ducked

once the duck has been triggered. With a fast attack time,

the signal is ducked almost immediately. With a slow

attack time, ducking fades the signal. Too fast an attack

time may sound abrupt.

• Hold — sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking

remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the

threshold level.

• Decay — controls how fast the gate closes once the hold

time has expired. A longer decay time produces a more

natural gating effect, allowing the natural decay of an

instrument to pass through.

For ducking, this determines how soon the ducker returns

to its normal gain after the hold time has expired.

Parameter Value

Threshold (dB) -54 to 0 (541 points)

Range (dB) -70 to 0 (701 points)

Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points)

Hold (ms) 0.02 ms to 2.14 sec (216 points)

Decay (ms) 6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points)

■ Gate and Ducking

Threshold = –10dB

Range = –30dB

Range = –70dB

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Range = –30dB

Threshold = –20dB

–70

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

+10

+20

–70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

Input Level

243

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

(fs = 44.1 kHz)

Gate Parameter list

# Title Type Parameter Value

1 Gate GATE

Threshold (dB) -26

Range (dB) -56

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 2.56

Decay (ms) 331

2 Ducking DUCKING

Threshold (dB) -19

Range (dB) -22

Attack (ms) 93

Hold (ms) 1.20 S

Decay (ms) 6.32 S

3A. Dr. BD GATE

Threshold (dB) -11

Range (dB) -53

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 1.93

Decay (ms) 400

4A. Dr. SN GATE

Threshold (dB) -8

Range (dB) -23

Attack (ms) 1

Hold (ms) 0.63

Decay (ms) 238

# Title Type Parameter Value

Gate Parameter list • Compressor Parameter list

(fs = 44.1 kHz)

Compressor Parameter list

# Title Type Parameter Value

1 Comp COMP

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 60

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 250

2 Expand EXPAND

Threshold (dB) -23

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 70

Compander

(H)

COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) -10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 6

Release (ms) 250

4 Compander (S) COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 25

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 24

Release (ms) 180

5A. Dr. BD COMP

Threshold (dB) -24

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 5.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 58

6A. Dr. BD COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) -11

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) -1.5

Width (dB) 7

Release (ms) 192

7A. Dr. SN COMP

Threshold (dB) -17

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 12

8A. Dr. SN EXPAND

Threshold (dB) -23

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 151

9A. Dr. SN COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 10

Release (ms) 128

10 A. Dr. Tom EXPAND

Threshold (dB) -20

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 5.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

11 A. Dr. OverTop COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) -24

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 38

Out gain (dB) -3.5

Width (dB) 54

Release (ms) 842

12 E. B. Finger COMP

Threshold (dB) -12

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 4.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 470

13 E. B. Slap COMP

Threshold (dB) -12

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 6

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 133

14 Syn. Bass COMP

Threshold (dB) -10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 3.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 250

# Title Type Parameter Value

Compressor Parameter list

244

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

15 Piano1 COMP

Threshold (dB) -9

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 17

Out gain (dB) 1.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 238

16 Piano2 COMP

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 174

17 E. Guitar COMP

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 261

18 A. Guitar COMP

Threshold (dB) -10

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 5

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 238

19 Strings1 COMP

Threshold (dB) -11

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 33

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

20 Strings2 COMP

Threshold (dB) -12

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 93

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 1.35 S

21 Strings3 COMP

Threshold (dB) -17

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 76

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 186

22 BrassSection COMP

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 18

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 226

23 Syn. Pad COMP

Threshold (dB) -13

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 58

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 238

24 SamplingPerc COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) -2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 238

25 Sampling BD COMP

Threshold (dB) -14

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 35

# Title Type Parameter Value

26 Sampling SN COMP

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 8.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 354

27 Hip Comp COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) -23

Ratio ( :1) 20

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 15

Release (ms) 163

28 Solo Vocal1 COMP

Threshold (dB) -20

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 31

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 342

29 Solo Vocal2 COMP

Threshold (dB) -8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 26

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 3

Release (ms) 331

30 Chorus COMP

Threshold (dB) -9

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 39

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 226

31 Click Erase EXPAND

Threshold (dB) -33

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 284

32 Announcer COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) -14

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) -2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 180

33 Limiter1 COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) -9

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 20

Out gain (dB) -3.0

Width (dB) 90

Release (ms) 3.90 s

34 Limiter2 COMP

Threshold (dB) 0

Ratio ( :1) ∞

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 319

35 Total Comp1 COMP

Threshold (dB) -18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 94

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee hard

Release (ms) 447

36 Total Comp2 COMP

Threshold (dB) -16

Ratio ( :1) 6

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 180

# Title Type Parameter Value

Effects Parameters

245

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE

One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.

■ EARLY REF.

One input, two output early reﬂections.

■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE

One input, two output early reﬂections with gate, and early reﬂections with reverse gate.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reﬂections and reverb

E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reﬂections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reﬂections)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

GATE LVL OFF, -60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed

HOLD

*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz)

Gate open time

DECAY

*2. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Gate closing speed

Parameter Range Description

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Reﬂection diffusion (left–right reﬂection spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reﬂection density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Reﬂection diffusion (left–right reﬂection spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reﬂection density

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Effects Parameters

246

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ MONO DELAY

One input, two output basic repeat delay.

■ STEREO DELAY

Two input, two output basic stereo delay.

■ MOD. DELAY

One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.

■ DELAY LCR

One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. G L -99 to +99%

Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

FB. G R -99 to +99%

Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time

LEVEL L -100 to +100% Left channel delay level

LEVEL C -100 to +100% Center channel delay level

LEVEL R -100 to +100% Right channel delay level

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Effects Parameters

247

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ ECHO

Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.

■ CHORUS

Two input, two output chorus effect.

■ FLANGE

Two input, two output ﬂange effect.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time

FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time

FB. G L -99 to +99%

Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

FB. G R -99 to +99%

Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

L->R FBG -99 to +99%

Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

R->L FBG -99 to +99%

Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effects Parameters

248

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ SYMPHONIC

Two input, two output symphonic effect.

■ PHASER

Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.

■ AUTO PAN

Two input, two output autopanner.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance

STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effects Parameters

249

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ TREMOLO

Two input, two output tremolo effect.

■ HQ. PITCH

One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter (Available for internal effects 1 and 2.).

■ DUAL PITCH

Two input, two output pitch shifter.

■ ROTARY

One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

PITCH -12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift

FINE -50 to +50 cents Pitch shift ﬁne

DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

Parameter Range Description

PITCH 1 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift

FINE 1 -50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 1 -100 to +100% Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)

PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan

DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time

FB. G 1 -99 to +99%

Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

PITCH 2 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift

FINE 2 -50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 2 -100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase)

PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan

DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time

FB. G 2 -99 to +99%

Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

Parameter Range Description

ROTATESTOP, START Rotation stop, start

SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)

SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed

FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed

DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level

ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes

LOW 0–100 Low-frequency ﬁlter

HIGH 0–100 High-frequency ﬁlter

Effects Parameters

250

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ RING MOD.

Two input, two output ring modulator.

■ MOD. FILTER

Two input, two output modulation ﬁlter.

■ DISTORTION

One input, two output distortion effect.

■ AMP SIMULATE

One input, two output guitar amp simulator.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal

OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency

FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed

FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0–100 Output level

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE -10 to +10 Tone

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

Parameter Range Description

AMP TYPE

*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

BASS 0–100 Bass tone control

MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control

TREBLE 0–100 High tone control

CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth

EQ F 100–8.00 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Parametric equalizer gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

Effects Parameters

251

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ DYNA. FILTER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled ﬁlter.

■ DYNA. FLANGE

Two input, two output dynamically controlled ﬂanger.

■ DYNA. PHASER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Filter frequency change decay speed

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0–100 Output Level

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset

FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

*1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Effects Parameters

252

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ REV+CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.

■ REV->CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.

■ REV+FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and ﬂanger effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and ﬂange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all ﬂange)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Effects Parameters

253

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ REV->FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and ﬂanger effects in series.

■ REV+SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.

■ REV->SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and ﬂanged reverb balance (0% = all ﬂanged reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/SYM 0–100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

Effects Parameters

254

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ REV->PAN

One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel.

■ DELAY+ER.

One input, two output delay and early reﬂections effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY/ER 0–100% Delay and early reﬂections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reﬂections)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

Effects Parameters

255

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ DELAY->ER.

One input, two output delay and early reﬂections effects in series.

■ DELAY+REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.

■ DELAY->REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and early reﬂected delay balance (0% = all early reﬂected delay, 100% = all delay)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay)

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

Effects Parameters

256

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ DIST->DELAY

One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.

■ MULTI FILTER

Two input, two output 3-band multi-ﬁlter (24 dB/octave).

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2,

CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE -10 to +10 Tone control

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DLY.BAL 0–100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion)

Parameter Range Description

TYPE 1 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency

FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency

FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency

LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level

LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level

LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level

RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance

RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance

RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance

Effects Parameters

257

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ GATE

This is a 2-in/2-out gate that attenuates signals below the speciﬁed threshold level.

■ M.BAND DYNA.

Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.

Parameter Range Description

GATE ON ON, OFF Turns the gate function on or off.

THRESH -54 to 0 dB Sets the threshold level at which the gate begins to affect the input signal.

RANGE -70 to 0 dB Sets the level when the gate is closed.

ATTACK 0–120 ms Sets the time it take for the gate to actually open after the threshold level is exceeded.

DECAY

*1. 6–46.0 s (fs=44.1kHz), 5–42.3 s (fs=48kHz)

Sets the time it takes for the gate to close completely after it begins closing.

HOLD

*2. 0.02–2.13 s (fs=44.1kHz), 0.02–1.96 s (fs=48kHz)

Sets the time it takes for the gate to begin closing after the signal drops below the threshold level.

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN -96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN -96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN -96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE -10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is

increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected

the same.

CMP. THRE 24.0 to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

CMP. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack

CMP. REL

Compressor release time

CMP. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee

LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

CMP. BYP OFF, ON Compressor bypass

L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE -6 to -12 dB Filter slope

CEILING -6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF Speciﬁes the maximum output level

EXP. THRE -54.0 to -24.0 dB Expander threshold

EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio

EXP. REL

*1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz)

Expander release time

EXP. BYP OFF, ON Expander bypass

LIM. THRE -12.0 to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold

LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack

LIM. REL

Limiter release time

LIM. BYP OFF, ON Limiter bypass

LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee

SOLO LOW OFF, ON If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output.

SOLO MID OFF, ON If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output.

SOLO HIGH OFF, ON If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output.

Troubleshooting

258

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ Power does not turn on

• Is the power cord connected to an AC outlet of the correct

voltage?

• Is the POWER switch turned ON?

• If the power still does not turn on, please contact your

Yamaha dealer.

■ LCD display is dim or dark

• Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of the

screen to adjust the contrast.

■ Can’t use the [DATA/JOG] dial to control on-

screen parameters

• The [JOG ON] key may be on.

• Some parameters cannot be operated in certain states,

such as while the recorder is running.

■ No sound, or sound is too faint

• Are speakers or headphones connected correctly?

• Is your amp and other external devices turned on?

• Are you using connection cables with built-in resistors?

• Does the stereo output channel meter move?

• Is the stereo output channel fader raised? Is it turned on?

• The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value.

• The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme thresh-

old or ratio.

• Is an electric guitar connected to a MIC/LINE INPUT jack

directly?

• Is the attenuator of the EQ screen or CH VIEW screen

raised?

→ Check the level (meter movement) in the METER screen.

→ If you move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press

the [ENTER] key in the CH VIEW screen View page, that

channel will be initialized to default values that allow sound

to be output.

→ If DIGITAL IN is enabled in the TRACK screen, and no signal

is being input to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack, a message

of “WRONG WORD CLOCK” will appear, and sound will not

be output.

■ Input sound is not output

• Is the signal from the external device being input?

• The connection cable from the external device may be

broken.

• Are cables connected to both the MIC/LINE INPUT XLR

connector and the TRS phone connector?

• Is the [GAIN] knob set to an appropriate level?

• Is the input channel fader raised? Is it turned on?

• The input channel may have been set to DIGITAL IN.

• When recording, is the recording-destination track fader

(which adjusts the monitor level) raised?

→ If you are recording, the sound of that input channel will not

be heard during playback.

■ Recorded sound is not output

• Has audio data been recorded on the recorder?

• Is the virtual track set to the track that was recorded?

•A recorded region shorter than 10 msec will not be played

back.

•Tracks 1–24 will not play back if the AW2400 is in Stereo

Track, Sound Clip, or Audio CD playback mode.

■ Can’t play back the STEREO track

• Is the ST TR MODE turned on in the TRACK screen Ste-

reo TR page?

■ Metronome cannot be heard

• The metronome sound is normally sent only to the MONI-

TOR OUT and headphones.

• The metronome will not sound while the recorder is

stopped.

• In Sound Clip mode, the metronome will sound only dur-

ing recording.

■ Can’t record

• Is there sufﬁcient free space on the internal hard disk?

→ You can check the remaining recordable time in the TRACK

screen View page.

• The song may be protected.

• The stereo track may be in playback mode.

• Is the input signal routed appropriately to the recorder?

• Check the recording-source and recording-destination in

the RECORD screen.

• Is CD/DAT DIGITAL REC set to ENABLE in the UTIL-

ITY screen Preference page?

• Please read and understand the copyright warning (→ p. 7)

before using digital input signals.

■ Can’t record on the STEREO track

• It is not possible to record on the STEREO track while

recording on other tracks.

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on, operation not

possible

No sound

Can’t record, something is wrong with

the recorded sound

Troubleshooting

259

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ Noise is present in the recorded signal

• The oscillator may be functioning.

• Does the word clock setting match for the AW2400 and

the external device(s)?

• Go to the RECORD screen and check the recording-

source and recording-destination.

■ Can’t select a record track

• The number of 24-bit song tracks that can be recorded or

played simultaneously is limited.

■ Sound is distorted

• Is the [GAIN] knob set correctly?

• The connection cable from the external device may be

broken.

• The fader of the input channel or monitor channel may be

raised excessively.

• The stereo output channel fader may be raised excessively.

• The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised exces-

sively.

• The EQ or dynamics processor may have been set to pro-

duce an extreme gain boost.

• Did you record at an appropriate level?

→ Go to the METER screen and check the level (meter move-

ment).

• Is the word clock setting correct for both the AW2400 and

the external device(s)?

• An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in

use.

■ The volume of a particular channel

increases or decreases

• Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate?

• Is the Automix function engaged?

■ Can’t store a scene

• The store-destination scene or song may be protected.

•A scene cannot be stored in scene number 00.

■ Can’t reproduce a scene

• One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe.

■ Can’t save to a library

• It is not possible to save to the factory-preset libraries.

• Is the song you are trying to save protected?

■ Meters move even though the faders are

lowered

• The meter display may be set to PRE FADER or PRE EQ.

■ Moving a fader does not change the level

•Have you selected the correct mixing layer via the Layer

section keys?

• The fader may be set to PRE FADE or PRE EQ.

■ Pairing was speciﬁed, but the signal is mon-

aural

• Is the odd-numbered channel panned far left and the even-

numbered channel panned far right?

■ Pairing was speciﬁed, but the signal phase

does not match

•Even when channels are paired, the phase setting is not

linked.

■ Signal is delayed

• An effect such as delay may be inserted.

■ Can’t use the internal effects

•Effect BYPASS may be turned ON.

• The effect may have been inserted into a different channel.

• Are the level of effect return channel faders raised?

• HQ. Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 1 or 2.

• These do not affect the stereo track, sound clip, or audio

CD playback.

■ Playback pitch is wrong

•VARI PITCH may be adjusted.

• Is the synchronized external device operating on the same

sampling frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz)?

• Is the master device operating in a stable way?

•You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH com-

mand.

• Is an effect such as HQ.Pitch or Dual Pitch selected for a

monitor channel?

■ A small amount of noise is produced when a

song is played back on a different AW2400

unit

•A small amount of noise may be heard at the beginnings

and ends of audio regions when a song created on an

AW2400 unit with Version 1.1 ﬁrmware is played back on

an AW2400 with Version 1.0 ﬁrmware. Please update all

AW2400 units you are using to the latest ﬁrmware ver-

sion. Information on the latest ﬁrmware version as well as

update procedure can be found at the internet address

below.

http://www.yamahasynth.com/

■ The sound and displays of some effects are

different when a song is played back on a

different AW2400 unit

• When songs that include scenes or effect library using a

Gate effect are loaded into an AW2400 with Version 1.0

ﬁrmware, Gate effects may be replaced by a Reverb Hall

effect and some displays may not appear as expected.

Please update all AW2400 units you are using to the latest

ﬁrmware version. Information on the latest ﬁrmware ver-

sion as well as update procedure can be found at the inter-

net address below.

http://www.yamahasynth.com/

Something wrong with the sound

Troubleshooting

260

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ When you press the [PLAY] key it blinks,

and playback does not occur

• Is the AW2400 set to MTC SLAVE?

→ Access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, and check the set-

ting.

■ Can’t edit a recorded track

• The song may be protected.

•Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded?

■ Editing results are not heard in the sound

•Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded?

• Are you using the appropriate editing command?

■ Counter display is not 0 when you return to

the beginning of the song

• If the display mode is set to RELATIVE (relative time),

the start point may be speciﬁed.

→ Go to the SONG screen Setting page and TRACK screen

View page and check the settings.

■ Display indicates DISK FULL or REGION

FULL, and you cannot record or edit

• There is insufﬁcient free space, or too many recording

regions. Erase unneeded tracks and then perform the Opti-

mize operation to obtain more free space.

• If the “DISK FULL” message appears, erase unneeded

songs or WAV ﬁles located under the “Transport” folder.

The WAV ﬁles under the “Transport” folder can be erased

from your computer when the USB Storage mode is

engaged.

■ The display indicates DISK BUSY during

playback

• The recorded data might be so fragmented that the read

speed is signiﬁcantly reduced. It might be necessary to

backup all hard disk data to your computer and then re-ini-

tialize the hard disk.

• If you’re using the AW2400 with a Windows (or Mac OS

X 10.4 or higher) computer, access performance can be

improved by setting the cluster size to 64K when initializ-

ing the AW2400 internal hard disk. This reduces the

occurrence of DISK BUSY.

■ Can’t exchange MIDI data

• Are the MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly?

•A MIDI cable or USB cable may be broken.

• Is the power turned on for the transmitting and receiving

devices?

• Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and

receiving devices?

•Have the appropriate settings been made in the MIDI

screen Setting 1/2 pages?

→ Select the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,

USB connector port 1-3, or slot) in the Setting 1 page.

• Is a scene assigned to the program change number being

transmitted?

• If a USB connection is being used, is the required USB-

MIDI driver properly installed on your computer?

■ MTC messages are not transmitted

• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, has the MTC button

been turned on?

• Is MTC MASTER turned on?

■ The AW2400 does not synchronize to

incoming MTC messages

• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector?

• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MTC SLAVE turned

on?

• Is the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,

USB connector port 1-3, or slot) selected in the MIDI

screen Setting 1 page?

■ MTC synchronization drifts

• Is a large amount of MIDI data (notes etc.) being received

together with the MTC messages?

• Does the frame rate match between the AW2400 and the

external device?

• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, OFFSET may have

been set.

• If jumps occur in the synchronized time, change the

SYNC AVERAGE setting in the MIDI screen Setting 2

page, and try again.

■ MMC messages is not transmitted

• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT connector?

• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MMC MASTER

turned on? Does the DEVICE NO. match?

■ Can’t receive MMC messages

• Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector?

• In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MMC SLAVE

turned on? Does the DEVICE NO. match?

■ Can’t use the preset remote settings

• Depending on the sequencer that you want to control, you

may need to make settings on the sequencer. For details,

refer to page 266.

• Select the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector,

USB connector port 1-3, or slot) in the MIDI screen Set-

ting 1 page.

Recorder operations MIDI operations

Troubleshooting

261

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ Can’t save a ﬁle

• Is there sufﬁcient space on the internal hard disk to create

a new song?

• Did you perform the correct shut-down procedure when

you last turned off the power?

→ Disconnecting the power without performing the shutdown

operation will shorten the lifespan of the hard disk and CD-

RW drive, may damage the hard disk and CD-RW drive and

disc, and may result in loss of data.

• Is the internal hard disk be subjected to strong physical

shock?

■ AW2816 backup ﬁles cannot be saved

• Songs with a large data size cannot be saved. Try execut-

ing the Optimize function from the SONG screen Song

List page.

■ Song ﬁle size is unnaturally large

•Even after you use recorder editing operations to erase a

track or other data, that sound ﬁle will remain on the disk.

Execute the Optimize command in the SONG screen LIST

page.

■ Can’t create an audio CD

• Is CD-R/RW media inserted?

• The inserted CD-R may have already been ﬁnalized.

• Is a signal recorded on the stereo track?

• The stereo track must be at least four seconds long.

•Have you saved a song after the stereo track has been

recorded?

• Audio CDs cannot be created using data recorded at the

48kHz sampling rate.

■ An audio CD you created does not play back

on a conventional player

• An audio CD you created you not play back on a conven-

tional player unless the disc has been ﬁnalized.

■ Audio recorded on CD-RW media does not

play back on some players

• In order for audio data recorded on CD-RW media to be

played back, the player must support CD-RW. Contact the

manufacturer of the player regarding CD-RW support.

■ The sound skips while playing an audio CD

that you created

• Depending on the CD-R media you use, there may be dif-

ferences in the quality of the completed CD.

■ The computer doesn’t recognize the

AW2400 hard disk

• Is the USB cable properly connected?

• Is your computer running the appropriate operating sys-

tem?

→ Windows XP Professional/Home Edition SP1 or higher, or

Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Operation is not guaranteed with

other operating systems.

•To use a Macintosh computer (running Mac OS X 10.3) it

is necessary to ﬁrst initialize the AW2400 hard disk with

the cluster set to 32K.

• Is the USB storage mode turned ON?

■ Can’t ﬁnd WAV ﬁles copied from the com-

puter to the Transport folder

•Have you copied WAV ﬁles with a different bit depth from

the song? Have you copied WAV ﬁles with a different

sampling frequency from the song?

■ Can’t ﬁnd WAV ﬁles copied from the com-

puter to the Audio folder

• Did you change the bit depth of the WAV ﬁle when editing

it with waveform editing software?

→ For 24-bit songs audio data is saved in the Audio folder in

32-bit WAV ﬁle format.

•Have you changed the ﬁle name?

• Did you copy the ﬁle(s) to a different folder?

■ Can’t copy ﬁles from the computer

• Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied.

• When connecting to a USB 2.0 connector of your com-

puter, use a cable speciﬁed for USB 2.0.

■ An error message appears when discon-

necting the AW2400 from a Windows com-

puter

• Before turning the USB storage mode OFF, remove the

device via the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the

taskbar.

• Close all AW2400 windows before removing the device

via the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon.

• If an error message still appears, execute “Safely Remove

Hardware” one or two more times. You should then be

able to remove the device without seeing an error mes-

sage.

Song operations

CD operations

WAV File Transfer To and From a

Computer

Troubleshooting

262

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ Can’t hear any pitch change?

• Make sure that RATE is NOT set to 0.

• Make sure that BYPASS is off.

■ The voice is not recognized

• When the voice is high, set TYPE to FEMALE; when it is

low, set TYPE to MALE.

■ Pitch correction doesn’t sound right

• In some cases, pitch correction may sound unnatural —

especially for parts sung with vibrato. To make the pitch-

corrected vocal sound more natural and subtle, set

DETECT to a relatively short value and set RATE to a rel-

atively slow value.

■ Can’t record Automix operations

• Is ENABLE selected in the AUTOMIX page?

• Is the REC or AUTO REC button on?

• Is the type of data to be recorded (fader, EQ, etc.) selected

in the OVERWRITE ﬁeld?

• Is the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO SEL] key of the

target channel ﬂashing?

■ Playback sound is interrupted at the bound-

aries of the recorded data

• Use the EXPORT command to export the required section

of audio data as a WAV ﬁle, then use the IMPORT USB

WAV command to re-import the WAV ﬁle to the track.

■ Operating the [ON] key or fader doesn’t start

playback

• The channel may be turned off before the Trigger Track

mode is engaged.

→ Call the CH VIEW screen and turn on the channel.

Pitch Fix operations

Automix operations

Trigger Track operations

Display message list

263

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ Messages

A/B POINTS NOT FOUND Repeat Playback cannot be performed because A/B points are not speciﬁed.

AUTOMIX ABORTED! Automix recording has been aborted.

AUTOMIX DISABLED! Automix is currently disabled. Please set to ENABLE.

AUTOMIX MEMORY FULL! Not enough memory available for automix.

AUTOMIX RUNNING! That operation cannot be performed while automix is running.

CANNOT DEFEAT MUTE

Mute cannot be disengaged because the simultaneous playback limit will be

exceedced.

CANNOT REDO Redo (re-execution of an operation) is not possible.

CANNOT SET MARK It is not possible to specify a marker at an already-speciﬁed position.

CANNOT UNDO Undo (cancellation of an operation) is not possible.

CD PLAY MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in CD Play mode, this operation cannot be executed.

CH. PARAMETER INITIALIZED The mixer parameters of the channel have been initialized.

DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE MTC of a different frame type than the internal setting is being received.

DIGITAL-ST-IN REC PROHIBIT. Recording of digital input signals is prohibited.

DISK BUSY!!

The reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough, or the reading

speed has slowed down because the recorded data has become fragmented.

DISK FULL!! There is insufﬁcient space on the internal hard disk.

IN/OUT POINTS NOT FOUND

Auto-punch recording cannot be performed because in/out points are not speci-

ﬁed.

IN/OUT POINTS REVERSE ORDER In/out points are set in wrong order.

IN/OUT POINTS TOO CLOSE

The auto punch-in/out interval is too short. It cannot be set less than approxi-

mately 100 msec.

LOCATE POINT ERASED The locate point has been erased.

LOCATE POINT SET The locate point has been set.

MARK POINT ERASED The marker has been erased.

MARK POINT SET The marker has been set.

MIDI IN: DATA FRAMING ERROR! Invalid MIDI data may have been received.

MIDI IN: DATA OVERRUN! Invalid MIDI data may have been received.

MIDI: RX BUFFER FULL! Receiving more MIDI data than it can handle.

MIDI: TX BUFFER FULL! Attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle.

MTC SLAVE MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in MTC Slave mode, this operation cannot be executed.

NO DATA TO COPY! There is no data to be copied.

NO MARK LEFT The allowable number of marks has been exceeded.

NOTHING TO UNDO! Not data available for undo.

RECORD TRACK NOT SELECTED Recording cannot be performed because you have not selected a record track.

RECORDER BUSY! The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operating.

RECORDER RUNNING NOW Since the recorder is recording or playing, this operation cannot be executed.

REDO COMPLETED Redo (re-execution of the previous operation) has been completed.

REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE The repeat interval is too short. It cannot be set to less than one second.

SELECTED CH IS NONE. The selected channel is not available.

SET OVERWRITE!

Please specify the automix parameters to be overwritten in the OVERWRITE

ﬁeld.

SOUND CLIP MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in Sound Clip mode, this operation cannot be executed.

STEREO TRACK PLAYBACK MODE

Since the AW2400 is in Stereo Track Playback mode, this operation cannot be

executed.

Display message list

264

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

* A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track.

■ Popup messages

THIS SONG IS PROTECTED. This song is protected, and cannot be edited or recorded.

TOO MANY REGIONS!! The maximum allowable number of regions* has been exceeded.

TRIGGER TRACK MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in Trigger Track mode, this operation cannot be executed.

UNDO COMPLETED Undo (cancellation of the previous operation) has been executed.

USB STORAGE MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in USB Storage mode, this operation cannot be executed.

WRONG WORD CLOCK

An inappropriate word clock is being received from the connected device to

which you are synchronizing.

Y96K COULDN’T RECALL

Scene memory numbers 97 or higher cannot be recalled when using a Y96K

card.

Y96K COULDN’T STORE

Scene memory numbers 97 or higher cannot be stored when using a Y96K

card.

Buffer Underrun! A buffer underrun error was encountered while writing to the CD.

Can’t Select

Current Song!

The current song cannot be selected for this operation.

CD Import Prohibited!

Enable DIGITAL REC.

Can’t import from a CD because DIGITAL REC is prohibited.

CD or HD Access Error!

An error was encountered while accessing the internal hard disk or CD-RW

drive.

CD-RW Drive Not Found! A problem occurred with the CD-RW drive.

Change Media, Not 1st Media. Wrong media order. Please insert media number 1.

Change Media,

Different Archive ID!

The medium contains the wrong backup ﬁle. Insert the correct medium.

Change Media,

Wrong Media Order!

Please exchange the media. The order of media volumes is incorrect.

Compare Error! The data was not written correctly.

Corrupt File! The ﬁle is corrupt.

Data Mismatch Found! A data mismatch has been found in the song.

End of Archive File Not Found! The end of the backup ﬁle cannot be located.

End Range Over!

The operation could not be executed, since the end of the song would be later

than 24 hours.

File in Use! Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the ﬁle is in use.

File List Full! The ﬁle list is full and cannot be appended.

File Name Already Exists! The speciﬁed ﬁle name already exists. Use a different ﬁle name.

File Number Full!

No more songs can be created or restored, since this would exceed the maxi-

mum number of ﬁles.

File Size Exceeds Limit! The ﬁle is too large to be saved.

For Effect 1 or 2 Only! The selected effect type is for use with Effect 1 or Effect 2 only.

HD Full! The internal hard disk is full and can accept no more data.

HD Status is Out of Range!

The hard disk reliability status (the number of past errors) has exceeded the

threshold. Back up your data and have the hard disk replaced as soon as possi-

ble.

HDD Error! A problem occurred with the internal hard disk.

Illegal/Unsupported Media! An unrecognized or unsupported medium has been inserted.

Invalid Parameter! The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range.

Invalid Region! An invalid region has been speciﬁed.

Display message list

265

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

* A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track.

Marker Interval Under 4 sec!

Since the song length divided by the markers would be less than four seconds,

you cannot divide it with a marker.

Media Too Small. Cannot Save! The medium does not have enough space available to save the data.

No Data to Backup! No data is selected for backup.

No Data to Restore! No data is selected for restore.

No Data! No data exists, or there is no data (region*) in the selected area.

No File! Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because no ﬁle is found.

No Media! Media has not been inserted.

No Region! No region* is found.

No Song to Write! No songs to write to the CD have been selected.

No Stereo Track! There is no song that includes a master track longer than four seconds.

Not 44.1kHz/16Bit Song! The song cannot be restored since it is not a 44.1 kHz/16-bit song.

Number Ejected Media,

Insert Blank Media.

Make a note of the number of the medium which has been writen to, then insert

a blank medium.

Number of Media Exceeds Limit!

The maximum numberof media that can be handled at the same time has been

exceeded.

Protected! Can’t edit the ﬁle because it is protected.

Read Only File! Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the ﬁle is read-only.

Read Only! Read-only library! This library cannot be saved, erased, or title-edited.

Recall Channel Data Conﬂict! The selected library data cannot be poperly loaded into the speciﬁed channel.

Recognized AW2816-

Formatted Media!

The media is written in AW2816 format.

Recognized AW4416-

Formatted Media!

The media is written in AW4416 format.

Region Full! The maximum allowable number of regions* has been exceeded.

Selected Channel has no Comp! There is no compressor on the selected channel.

Selected Channel has no EQ! There is no EQ on the selected channel.

Selected Channel has no Gate! There is no gate on the selected channel.

Song Too Large to Export! The song ﬁle is too large to be exported.

System Error! An internal system error has occurred.

This Song is Protected! Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the song is protected.

Too Long Data!

No more data can be written because the capacity of the CD has been

exceeded.

Too Many CD Tracks!

No new tracks can be added because the maximum number of allowable tracks

has been exceeded.

Track Not Recorded! The track you selected does not contain any recorded data.

Used As Effect Insert! This port is already in use as an effect insert.

Wave File Link Error! A WAV ﬁle link error has been found.

Wrong Bit Depth! The bit depth of the selected ﬁle is incorrect.

Wrong File Format! The selected ﬁle is not PCM format.

Wrong HD Format!

The internal hard disk is incorrectly formatted. The disk cannot be formatted

from a computer.

Wrong Number of Channels! The number of channels in the selected ﬁle is incorrect.

Wrong Sampling Frequency! The sampling rate of the selected ﬁle is incorrect.

Wrong Wav Chunk Data! The WAV ﬁle’s chunk data is incorrect.

Wrong Wav File! The WAV ﬁle cannot be used.

About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400

266

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

• The software and this owner’s manual are the exclusive

copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the

license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to

upon breaking the seal of the software packaging.

(Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agree-

ment at the end of this manual before installing the

application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual

in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden

without the written consent of the manufacturer.

•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with

regard to the use of the software and documentation and

cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of

this manual and the software.

• This disk is a CD-ROM. Do not attempt to play the disk

on an audio CD player. Doing so may result in irrepara-

ble damage to your audio CD player.

• Future upgrades of application and system software and

any changes in speciﬁcations and functions will be

announced separately.

The included CD-ROM contains a backup ﬁle that you

can use to restore the AW2400 to its factory-set condition,

setting ﬁles that let you use the AW2400’s MIDI Remote

function with various DAW software, and a USB MIDI

driver that is necessary to allow MIDI message transmis-

sion and reception via the USB connector.

If you are connecting the AW2400 to your computer via a

USB cable for MIDI message transmission and reception,

you need to install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver.

OS: Windows XP Professional/Home Edition SP1 or

higher, or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher

Start your computer to launch Windows, then

Click the [Start] button, and then click [Con-

trol Panel].

If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click

“Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the win-

dow. All control panels and icons will be displayed.

Go to [System Hardware] ➝ [Driver signa-

tures] ➝ [Driver signature options], select

“Ignore — Install software without asking for

conﬁrmation,” and then click [OK].

Click [OK] to close the “System Properties”

window, and then click the Close button to

close the “Control Panel” window.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM

drive.

First, make sure the POWER switch on the

AW2400 is set to STANDBY, then use a USB

cable to connect the USB connector of the

computer to the USB connector of the

AW2400. When the AW2400 is turned on, the

computer automatically displays the “Found

New Hardware Wizard.”

If the “Can Windows connect to Windows

Update to search for software?” is displayed,

select “No, not this time”, and then click

[Next].

Select “Install software automatically (recom-

mended) (I),” and then click [Next].

The system starts the installation.

About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400

Folder/

ﬁle name

Software name Contents

AW24_000.TAR

Demo song

Backup ﬁle for restoring the

internal hard disk to its fac-

tory-set condition.

Remote

Cubase/Nuendo

remote setup ﬁle

Setting ﬁle for remotely con-

trolling the Cubase/Nuendo

software from the AW2400.

Logic preference ﬁle

Setting ﬁle for remotely con-

trolling the Logic software

from the AW2400.

SONAR template ﬁle

(Windows only)

Setting ﬁle for remotely

controlling the SONAR soft-

ware from the AW2400.

USBdrv_

Yamaha USB MIDI

Driver

Driver ﬁle for exchanging

MIDI messages between

the AW2400 and a com-

puter via a USB cable.

Special Notices

Contents of the CD-ROM

Installing USB MIDI driver

■ System Requirements

■ Installing on Windows XP

• Some computers may take a few minutes to show this screen.

NOTE

About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400

267

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

When the installation is complete, the system

displays “Completing the Found New Hard-

ware Wizard.” Click [Finish].

Restart the computer.

The driver has been installed.

Start your computer, then log in as Adminis-

trator.

To conﬁrm that the Administrator account is available,

select [System Preferences], then [Users (Account)].

Double-click the “USBdrv_” folder on the

included CD-ROM.

Double-click “YAMAHA USB-MIDI Driver

v1.*****.mpkg” (***** represents the version

number).

An “Authenticate” window opens, prompting the pass-

word.

If the window does not prompt you to enter the pass-

word, click the lock icon.

Enter the password for the Administrator’s

account. If you have not set the password,

click [OK].

The “Welcome to the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver

Installer” window is displayed.

Click [Continue].

The “Select a Destination” is displayed.

Select a destination for the driver installation,

then click [Continue].

The message “Installing this software requires 100MB

of disk space” may appear. However, the actual

required free disk space is 2MB.

A window opens, displaying the message

“Click install to perform a basic installation of

this software.” Click [Install].

If the driver has already been installed, the [Upgrade]

button is displayed instead of the [Install] button.

The driver is installed, and message “The software

was successfully installed” is displayed.

Click the [Close] button.

The driver installation is complete.

You can check the following locations to conﬁrm that

the driver has been installed:

• Library ➝ Audio ➝ MIDI Drivers ➝

YAMAHAUSBMIDIDriver.plugin

• Library ➝ PreferencePanes ➝

YAMAHAUSBMIDIPatch.prefPane

• Some computers may take about a few minutes to show this

screen after the installation is complete.

NOTE

■ Installing on Macintosh computer

About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400

268

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

In order to restore the internal hard disk to the factory-set

condition, you will need to perform the following two pro-

cedures.

A Initialize the internal hard disk

B Load the demo song

Initialize the internal hard disk. (→ p. 212)

When you initialize the internal hard disk, the system set-

tings will return to their factory-set state.

You can load the demo song from the included CD-ROM

to restore the AW2400 to its factory-set condition.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-RW

drive of the AW2400.

Call the SONG screen Restore page by either

pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG]

key as many times as necessary.

Make sure that the cursor is located at the

READ CD INFO button, and press the

[ENTER] key.

Loading from the CD-ROM will begin. When loading

is ﬁnished, the contents of the display will change as

follows.

Move the cursor to the list and press the

[ENTER] key.

The symbol at the left of the list will change to “●”.

Move the cursor to the RESTORE button and

press the [ENTER] key.

A popup window will ask you for conﬁrma-

tion, so move the cursor to the OK button or

CANCEL button, and press the [ENTER] key.

While the Restore operation is being executed, the

state of progress will be shown in a popup window.

When this popup window closes, the operation has

been completed.

• Windows

• Logic Platinum 5.5.1

(*1)

• Cubase SX 3.0.1

• Nuendo 3.0.1

• Sonar 4.0.1 Producer Edition

• Macintosh

• Logic Pro 7.0.1

(*1)

• Cubase SX 3.0.1

• Nuendo 3.0.1

• Protools TDM 6.7

(*2)

*1 Use the setting ﬁle from the included CD-ROM to map the

AW2400’s faders/[ON] keys/transport keys to the Logic key

commands. Track assignments must be made within Logic

as appropriate for your system.

*2 Select the CS-10 settings as the MIDI controller type. For

details on the CS-10 settings, ask Digidesign.

Restoring the internal hard disk to the

factory-set condition

■ Initializing the internal hard disk

•Executing this operation will erase all data from the internal hard

disk, and the data cannot be recovered. We recommend you to

backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before exe-

cuting this operation.

NOTE

■ Loading the demo song

Installing a remote ﬁle

■ Supported DAW software

About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400

269

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

● Installing the Cubase/Nuendo remote

setup ﬁle

Start up Cubase/Nuendo.

In the menu bar, select [Devices] menu ➝

[Device Setup...].

The Device Setup window will appear. Select

[Add Device] ➝ [Generic Remote].

The Generic Remote setting display will

appear. Set the “MIDI Input” and “MIDI Out-

put” ﬁled.

Click the [Import] button.

A dialog box like the following will appear.

Select the Cubase/Nuendo remote setup ﬁle

(Yamaha AW2400 Remote.xml) from the

included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] but-

ton.

Close the Device Setup window.

Fader and [ON] key operations can be used to control

Cubase/Nuendo audio tracks. Create new projects with

more than 16 audio tracks.

● Installing the Logic preference ﬁle

Start up Logic.

In the menu bar, select [Options] menu ➝

[Preferences] ➝ [Key Commands...].

The Key Commands window will open. In the

menu bar, select [Options] ➝ [Import Key

Commands...].

A dialog box will appear. Select the Logic

preference ﬁle (Logic32.prf) from the included

CD-ROM, and click the [Open] button.

When you import the ﬁle, the following settings will

be made.

* Please note that all the previously-speciﬁed key com-

mands will be initialized. If you do not want to change

your existing user key command settings, you can manu-

ally make the MIDI channel and CC# settings shown

above.

■ Windows users

• In order to use a remote ﬁle, the corresponding software must be

installed.

• Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in

the explanation below may differ depending on the software you

are using.

NOTE

MIDI Output : your MIDI output device

MIDI Input : your MIDI input device

• The content that is shown for “MIDI Input” and “MIDI Output”

will depend on the MIDI device(s) you are using. For details,

refer to the owner’s manual for the MIDI device(s) you are

using.

NOTE

About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400

270

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

● Installing the SONAR template ﬁle

Copy the SONAR template ﬁle from the

included CD-ROM to the folder in which

SONAR is installed.

Start up SONAR.

In the menu bar, select [File] menu ➝ [Open].

The “Open ﬁle” dialog box will appear.

Choose Cakewalk template ﬁles as the type of

ﬁle to be loaded. From the list in the dialog

box, choose “Yamaha AW2400 Remote” and

click the [OK] button.

In the menu bar, select [Option] ➝

[MIDI Devices].

The MIDI Ports window will open. In the Input

Ports ﬁeld, assign the MIDI device that you

are using.

● Installing the Cubase/Nuendo remote

setup ﬁle

For Cubase/Nuendo, the procedure is the same as for

the Windows version. (→ p. 269).

● Installing the Logic Pro preference ﬁle

Start up Logic Pro.

In the menu bar, select [Logic Pro] menu ➝

[Preferences] ➝ [Key Commands...].

The Key Commands window will open. In the

menu bar, select [Options] ➝ [Import Key

Commands].

A dialog box will appear. Select the Logic

preference ﬁle (Logic Preferences) from the

included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] but-

ton.

When you import the ﬁle, the following settings will

be made.

* Please note that all the previously-speciﬁed key com-

mands will be initialized. If you do not want to change

your existing user key command settings, you can manu-

ally make the MIDI channel and CC# settings shown

above.

If you changed the track structure from the

default settings of the template ...

With the Yamaha AW2400 Remote template started,

click the [CONFIG] button in the StudioWare panel

window. A cluster will open at the right.

Drag the [SET MIDI First Track] knob to the ﬁrst

track number of the MIDI tracks.

* If you use this template, you will not be able to control

the tracks correctly from the AW2400 unless the MIDI

tracks are continuous from 1–16.

* If you set the value to an invalid track (an unused track),

the panel knobs, buttons, or sliders may be shaded. If

this occurs, set the value back to the correct track.

■ Macintosh users

• In order to use a remote ﬁle, the corresponding software must be

installed.

• Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in

the explanation below may differ depending on the software you

are using.

NOTE

About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400

271

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

● Setting Pro Tools remote control

You can remotely control the Pro Tools software from the

AW2400. No special setting ﬁle is required. Use the fol-

lowing procedure to make settings.

In the menu bar, select [Setup] ➝

[Peripherals...].

The Peripherals window will open. Click the

[MIDI Controllers] button.

In the MIDI Controllers window, make the following

settings. In the Receive From ﬁeld and the Send To

ﬁeld, specify the MIDI device you are using.

This completes preparations for using the AW2400’s

MIDI Remote function to control the Pro Tools software.

Type Receive From Send To #ch’s

#1 CS-10

Your MIDI input

device

Your MIDI output

device

MIDI data format

272

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

1. Functions

1.1. Scene Change

The settings of the [MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] specify

the scene that is recalled when a Program Change message is

received.

The settings of the [MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] specify

the program number that is transmitted when a scene is recalled. If

more than one program number has been assigned to that scene

memory number, the lowest-numbered program number will be

transmitted.

1.2. MMC Control

These messages allow basic recorder operations such as STOP/

PLAY/REC/LOCATE.

If you select the MIDI SETUP menu item MMC MASTER, MMC

commands will be transmitted according to the operation of the

transport. If you select MMC SLAVE, the internal recorder will oper-

ate according to the received MMC commands.

1.3. Effect Control

Depending on the type of effect, note-on/off messages can be used

for control.

These settings are made for the parameters of each effect.

1.4. Pitch Fix Control

When the Pitch Fix mode is engaged, note-on/off messages can be

used to control pitches.

1.5. MIDI Clock transmission

If you set MIDI OUT to MIDI CLOCK, MIDI clock messages can be

transmitted during playback or recording.

In MIDI Clock transmission mode, Song Position Pointer and Start/

Stop/Continue commands will also be issued, and during playback or

recording, MIDI Clock will be transmitted according to the MIDI

Tempo Map.

1.6. MTC transmission (MTC Master)

If you set MIDI OUT to MTC, MTC can be transmitted during play-

back or recording.

1.7. MTC reception (MTC Slave)

If you set MTC MODE to SLAVE, the internal recorder will operate

in synchronization with MTC messages received from the MIDI IN

connector.

1.8. Realtime control of parameters

Control changes can be used to send/receive internal parameters in

realtime.

1.9. MIDI Remote

The faders, ON keys, and RTZ / FF / REW / STOP / PLAY / REC

keys can be used to control an external MIDI device.

In PRESET mode, operating the above controllers will transmit

MIDI data according to the preset settings of the AW2400.

In USER mode, operating the above controllers will transmit the

MIDI data that you specify.

2. MIDI data ﬂow diagram

3. AW2400 settings and operation

3.1. MIDI Setup

Set basic MIDI operation.

3.1.1. Tx PORT

Specify the output port for MIDI communication.

3.1.2. Rx PORT

Specify the input port for MIDI communication.

3.1.3. MIDI Tx Ch

This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for transmission.

3.1.4. MIDI Rx Ch

This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for reception.

3.1.5. PROGRAM CHANGE MODE

Enable/disable reception and transmission. If MIDI Rx Ch is set to

OMNI, these messages will be received regardless of their MIDI

channel. If MIDI Tx Ch is set to ECHO, the received messages will

be echoed at the transmission port.

3.1.6. CONTROL CHANGE MODE

Enable/disable reception and transmission. If this is enabled, you can

specify the correspondence between control numbers and operations

of the mixer section. Three modes are available for correspondence

with control numbers. For mode 1, transmission and reception will

occur without regard to the MIDI Tx Ch and MIDI Rx Ch settings.

For modes 2 and 3, reception will occur without regard to MIDI

channel if you set MIDI Rx Ch to OMNI.

If MIDI Tx Ch is set to ECHO, the received messages will be echoed

at the transmission port.

MIDI data format

MTC (MTC Slave)

PROGRAM CHANGE (

Scene Recall

)

ECHO OUT

MMC (Transport Control)

Channel Message/Exclusive Message

(MIDI REMOTE Learn)

MTC SLAVE

PGM CHG

ECHO

MMC SLAVE

LEARN

PROGRAM CHANGE

CONTROL CHANGE

MMC

MTC

MIDI CLOCK

PGM CHG

CTRL CHG

MMC MASTER

MIDI SYNC (MTC)

MIDI SYNC (CLK)

REMOTE Transport

REMOTE Fader/Sel

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW1 : REMOTE OFF

SW2 : REMOTE ON (Remote)

SW3 : REMOTE ON

SW4 : REMOTE OFF or REMOTE ON (Normal)

NOTE ON/OFF (Effect Control)

EFF MIDI

USB-1 IN

USB-2 IN

USB-3 IN

USB-1 OUT

USB-2 OUT

MIDI IN

USB-3 OUT

MIDI OUT

CONTROL CHANGE (

Parameter Edit

)

CTRL CHG

ECHO OUT

ECHO ON

THRU

SLOT IN

SLOT OUT

MIDI data format

273

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

3.1.7. OTHER

If this is set to ECHO, the received MIDI data will be echoed at the

transmission port. However, Program Change and Control Change

will follow their own settings.

3.1.8. REMOTE PORT

Specify the output port when the MIDI remote function is engaged.

3.1.9. THRU

Set the MIDI through function.

3.1.10. MMC MODE

Select whether the AW2400 will be the MMC MASTER or SLAVE.

3.1.11. MMC Dev.

Specify the ID number that will be used when transmitting or receiv-

ing MMC commands.

3.1.12. MTC SYNC MODE

Select whether the AW2400 will be the MTC MASTER or SLAVE.

3.1.13. MTC SYNC AVERAGE

When the AW2400 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE, this setting

speciﬁes how it will follow the MTC data. Set this to 0 if the incom-

ing MTC data has a highly accurate timing; set this to 1 or 2 if the

timing of the incoming MTC data is not as accurate (such as when

receiving MTC from a software sequencer).

3.1.14. MTC SYNC OFFSET

When the AW2400 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE, this setting

adds an offset to the received MTC data. The received time code

value shifted by this amount will correspond to the location indicated

by the internal time code of the AW2400.

3.1.15. SYNC OUT

Turn on/off the output of MTC/MIDI CLOCK.

4. MIDI format list

4.1. CHANNEL MESSAGE

4.2. SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE

4.3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

4.4. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

4.4.1. REALTIME SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

4.4.1.1. MMC

5. MIDI format details

5.1. NOTE OFF (8n)

< Reception >

Received when [Rx CH] matches.

Used to control Effects/Pitch Fix. Refer NOTE ON for details.

5.2. NOTE ON (9n)

< Reception >

Received when [Rx CH] matches.

Used to control Effects/Pitch Fix. Refer below for details.

Velocity of 0x00 is equivalent to Note-Off.

* Effect control by Note

1: Dynamic Flange/Dynamic Phase/Dynamic Filter

When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI, the note velocity (both

note-on and note-off) is used to control the Modulation frequency

width.

5.3. CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)

< Reception >

If [Control Change Rx] is On, control change messages will be

recevied when [MIDI Rx Ch] matches. However, if [MIDI Rx Ch] is

OMNI or [Control Change Mode] is 1, reception will occur regard-

less of MIDI channel.

< Transmission >

If [Control Change Tx] is On, control change messages will be trans-

mitted on the [MIDI Tx Ch] channel when you operate a parameter.

The control value is converted into a parameter value according to

the following equation.

S= total number of steps in the parameter’s variable range

128 / S = X remainder Y

INT((Y+1)/2) = Z

If (MIDI DATA - Z) < 0, then Value = 0

If ((MIDI DATA - Z)/X) > MAX, then Value = MAX

Otherwise, Value = INT ((MIDI DATA -Z)/X)

Command Rx/Tx function

8n NOTE OFF Rx Control the internal effect

9n NOTE ON Rx Control the internal effect

Bn CONTROL CHANGE Rx/Tx Edit parameters

Cn PROGRAM CHANGE Rx/Tx Switch scene memories

Command Rx/Tx function

F1 MIDI TIME CODE Rx/Tx MTC transmission

F2 SONG POSITION POINTER Tx Song position transmission

Command Rx/Tx function

F8 TIMING CLOCK Tx MIDI Clock transmission

FA START Tx Start command transmission

FB CONTINUE Tx Continue command transmission

FC STOP Tx Stop command transmit

FE ACTIVE SENSING Rx Check MIDI cable connections

FF RESET Rx Clear running status

Command Rx/Tx function

01 STOP Rx/Tx Transport stop

02 PLAY Rx Transport play

03 DEFERRED PLAY Rx/Tx Transport play

04 FAST FORWARD Rx/TX Transport fast-forward

05 REWIND Rx/Tx Transport rewind

06 RECORD STROBE Rx Transport punch-in record

07 RECORD EXIT Rx Transport punch-out

0F RESET Rx/Tx MMC reset

44 LOCATE Rx/Tx Transport locate

STATUS 1000nnnn 8n

Note Off Message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note No.

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity (ignored)

STATUS 1001nnnn 9n

Note On Message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note No.

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity (1-127:On, 0:Off)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control Change

DATA 0ccccccc cc

Control No. (0-95, 102-119)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

MIDI data format

274

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

5.4. PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

< Reception >

If [Program Change Rx] is On, program change messages will be

received when [MIDI Rx Ch] matches. However, if [MIDI Rx Ch] is

OMNI, this message is received regardless of the channel.

A scene memory will be recalled according to the [PROGRAM

CHANGE TABLE] settings.

< Transmission >

If [Program Change Tx] is On, a program change will be transmitted

on the [MIDI Tx Ch] according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE

TABLE] settings when you recall a memory. If the recalled memory

number has been assigned to more than one program number, the

lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted.

5.5.

MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME (F1)

< Transmission >

If [SYNC OUT] is set to MTC, Quarter Frame messages will be

transmitted according to the time code movements of the recorder

when the recorder is playing or recording.

< Reception >

This message is received if [MTC SYNC MODE] is set to SLAVE.

Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are internally assem-

bled into time code that controls the recorder.

5.6. SONG POSITION POINTER (F2)

< Transmission >

If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, a song position message will be

transmitted when STOP or LOCATE is performed on the recorder, to

indicate the song position from which the song should start at the

next START or CONTINUE message.

5.7. TIMING CLOCK (F8)

< Transmission >

If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted

according to the MIDI Tempo Map from when the recorder begins

playing or recording, until it stops.

5.8. START (FA)

< Transmission >

If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when

the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the

ﬁrst measure.

5.9. CONTINUE (FB)

< Transmission >

If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when

the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the

ﬁrst measure.

5.10. STOP (FC)

< Transmission >

If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when

the recorder stops.

5.11. ACTIVE SENSING (FE)

< Reception >

Once this message is received, subsequent failure to receive any mes-

sage for a period of 300 ms will cause Running Status to be cleared,

and MIDI communications to be initialized.

5.12. RESET (FF)

< Reception >

When a Reset message is received, MIDI communications will be

initialized by clearing Running Status etc.

5.13. EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0-F7)

5.13.1. MMC

5.13.1.1. MMC STOP

< Transmission >

When the STOP key is pressed, this message is transmitted with a

device number of 7F.

< Reception >

If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will stop

when this message is received with a matching device number or a

device number of 7F.

5.13.1.2. MMC PLAY

< Reception >

If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will

begin playback when this message is received with a matching

device number or a device number of 7F.

5.13.1.3. MMC DEFERRED PLAY

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the

PLAY key is pressed.

< Reception >

If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will

begin playback when this message is received with a matching

device number or a device number of 7F.

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn

Program Change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Program No. ( 0-127)

STATUS 11110001 F1

Quarter Frame Message

DATA 0nnndddd dd

nnn = message type (0-7) dddd = data

STATUS 11110010 F2

Song Position Pointer

DATA 0ddddddd dd0

data ( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits data

0ddddddd dd1

data ( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits data

STATUS 11111000 F8

Timing Clock

STATUS 11111010 FA

Start

STATUS 11111011 FB

Continue

STATUS 11111100 FC

Stop

STATUS 11111110 FE

Active Sensing

STATUS 11111111 FF

Reset

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

00000001 01

Stop (MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

00000010 02

Play (MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

00000011 03

Deferred play (MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

MIDI data format

275

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

5.13.1.4. MMC FAST FORWARD

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the FF

key is pressed and the Cue mode is engaged.

< Reception >

If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will

begin fast-forward when this message is received with a matching

device number or a device number of 7F.

5.13.1.5. MMC REWIND

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the

REWIND key is pressed and the Review mode is engaged.

< Reception >

If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will

begin rewind when this message is received with a matching device

number or a device number of 7F.

5.13.1.6. MMC RECORD STROBE

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC

Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. If the transport is

stopped, then recording will begin. If the transport is playing, then

punch-in will occur.

5.13.1.7. MMC RECORD EXIT

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC

Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. If the transport is

recording, then punch-out will occur.

5.13.1.8. MMC RESET

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when song

loading is ﬁnished.

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC

Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. MMC-related internal

settings will be reset to the power-on state.

5.13.1.9. MMC LOCATE (TARGET)

< Transmission >

This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when a

locate-related key such as MARK SEARCH/IN/OUT is pressed, a

FF/REW operation is performed, when the transport returns to the

auto-punch pre-roll point, or when repeating.

< Reception >

This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC

Slave and the device number matches. The transport will locate to the

time code position speciﬁed within the command data.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

00000110 04

Fast Forward (MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

00000101 05

Rewind (MCS)

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

00000110 06

Record strobe

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

00000111 07

Record Exit

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

00001101 0D

Reset

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System Exclusive Message

ID No. 01111111 7F

Real Time System Exclusive

Device ID 0ddddddd dd

Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call)

Command 00000110 06

Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id

01000100 44

Locate

00000110 06

byte count

00000001 01

“target” sub command

0hhhhhhh hh

hour (Standard Time Code)

0mmmmmmm mm

minute

0sssssss ss

second

0fffffff ff

frame

0sssssss ss

sub-frame

EOX 11110111 F7

End Of Exclusive

MIDI Implementation Chart

276

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [ Professional Audio Workstation ] Date :21-JUL-2004

Model AW2400 MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16 Memorized

Channel Changed 1 - 16 1 - 16

Default x 1, 3 Memorized

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note x 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** x

Velocity Note ON x x

Note OFF x x

After Key's x x

Touch Ch's x x

Pitch Bend x x

1-16 o o Assignable Cntrl

21-27 o o Assignable Cntrl

33-34 o o Assignable Cntrl

41-56 o o Assignable Cntrl

Control 63-79 o o Assignable Cntrl

91-93 o o Assignable Cntrl

Change 102-117 o o Assignable Cntrl

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127 Assignable

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o *1

: Song Pos. o x *2

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o x *2

Real Time: Commands o x *2

:All Sound Off x x

Aux :Reset All Cntrls x x

:Local ON/OFF x x

Mes- :All Notes OFF x x

sages:Active Sense x o

:Reset x o

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

Notes: MTC quarter frame message is transmitted.

MTC quarter frame message is recognized.(When MTC Slave mode)

*1 :MMC

*2 :When BCLK Sync mode

For MIDI remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.

Specifications

277

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ General Speciﬁcations

Frequency Response

0 +1/-3 dB @20 Hz–20 kHz

(MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT, GAIN: max.)

Total Harmonic Distortion

(measured with 20 kHz LPF)

Less than 0.05 % @20 Hz to 20 kHz/+4 dBu

(MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT, GAIN: min.)

Dynamic Range (measured with IHF-A)

115 dB typ. : DA Converter (STEREO OUT)

109 dB min. : DA Converter (STEREO OUT,

INPUT CH SEL: all off)

110 dB typ. : AD+DA (MIC/LINE INPUT to

STEREO OUT)

104 dB min. : AD+DA (MIC/LINE INPUT to

STEREO OUT, GAIN: min.)

AD Converter

24-bit Linear, 128-times Oversampling

DA Converter

24-bit Linear, 128-times Oversampling

Internal Processing

32-bit

Sampling Frequency

Internal : 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (-6%–+6%)

External : 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (-10%–+6%)

Audio Input Section

MIC/LINE INPUT : 8 CH (XLR & phone)

DIGITAL STEREO IN : 2 CH (coaxial stereo x 1)

Mini-YGDAI SLOT : 16 CH

Audio Output Section

MONITOR OUT : 2 CH (stereo x 1)

PHONES : 2 CH (stereo x 1)

STEREO OUT : 2 CH (stereo x 1)

OMNI OUT : 4 CH

DIGITAL STEREO OUT : 2 CH (coaxial stereo x 1)

Mini-YGDAI SLOT : 16 CH

Audio Insert I/O Section

INSERT I/O : 2 CH

Mixer Input Section (Total 48 CH)

MIC/LINE INPUT : 16 CH

Internal Effect Return : 8 CH (stereo x 4)

Tra ck : 24 CH

Internal Effect Section

4 Built-in Multi-Effect Processors

Master Section (Total 16 Bus)

BUS:4 CH (stereo x 2)

AUX : 4 CH

STEREO : 2 CH (stereo x 1)

SOLO : 2 CH (stereo x 1)

EFFECT : 4 CH

Built-in Hard Disk Drive

40 GB, 3.5" IDE

Maximum Number of Songs

100 Songs

Recording Resolution

16-bit/24-bit

Maximum Number of Simultaneous Recording/

Playback Tracks

16 Recording Tracks/24 Playback Tracks (16-bit)

8 Recording Tracks/12 Playback Tracks (24-bit)

Number of Tracks

208 Tracks

(24 Tracks + Stereo Tracks) x 8 Virtual

Faders

100 mm x 13 (motorized)

Display

320 x 240 dot LCD (with contrast control)

MIDI

MTC (Master/Slave), MIDI Clock (Master),

MMC (Master/Slave), Program Change,

Control Change

Memory

Scene Memory, EQ Library, Compressor Library,

Gate Library, Effect Library, Channel Library

Power Consumption

85 W

Dimensions (W x H x D)

533 x 153 x 503 mm

Net Weight

11.5 kg

Operating Temperature

5–35 °C

Optional Accessories

Foot switch Yamaha FC5

Speciﬁcations

Specifications

278

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

■ Mixer Section

● Input/Output

MIC/LINE INPUT 1–8 (balanced XLR & phone)

Phantom Power Supply : +48 ± 3 V

Input Impedance : 3 kΩ

Nominal Input Level : -46 dBu to + 4 dBu

Minimum Input Level : -56 dBu

Maximum Input Level : +24 dBu

INSERT I/O 1, 2 (unbalanced phone)

Input Impedance : 10 kΩ

Nominal Input Level : 0 dBu

Maximum Input Level : +20 dBu

Output Impedance : 600 Ω

Nominal Output Level : 0 dBu

Maximum Output Level : +20 dBu

STEREO OUT L, R (balanced phone)

Output Impedance : 75 Ω

Nominal Load Impedance : 600 Ω

Nominal Output Level : +4 dBu

Maximum Output Level : +24 dBu

MONITOR OUT L, R (balanced phone)

Output Impedance : 75 Ω

Nominal Load Impedance : 600 Ω

Nominal Output Level : +4 dBu

Maximum Output Level : +24 dBu

OMNI OUT 1–4 (unbalanced phone)

Output Impedance : 150 Ω

Nominal Load Impedance : 10 kΩ

Nominal Output Level : +0 dBu

Maximum Output Level : +20 dBu

PHONES (unbalanced TRS phone)

Load Impedance : 8–40 Ω

Maximum Output Level : 25 mW (8 Ω load)

75 mW (40 Ω load)

DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT (coaxial)

Mini-YGDAI Cards

MY8-AT, MY8-TD, MY8-AE, MY4-AD, MY8-AD,

MY4-DA, MY16-AT, MY16-TD, MY16-AE, MY8-AE96,

MY8-AE96S, MY8-AD24, MY8-AD96, MY8-DA96,

MY16-mLAN, Y96K

* 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms

● Digital Mixing Functions

Input Channels (INPUT 1–16)

Phase (Normal/Reverse), Gate, Compressor,

Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Pan,

Bus Assign (STEREO, SOLO, BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4,

EFF 1–4)

Track Channels (TRACK 1–24)

Attenuation, Phase (Normal/Reverse),

Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Compressor, Pan,

Bus Assign (STEREO, BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4, EFF 1–4)

Internal Effect Return Channels

(EFFECT RETURN 1-4 (stereo))

Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Pan,

Bus Assign (STEREO, AUX 1–4)

Master Channels

STEREO L, R : Attenuation,

Equalizer (4-Band PEQ),

Compressor, Balance

BUS 1 L/R, 2 L/R : Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band

PEQ), Compressor, Balance

AUX 1–4 : Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band

PEQ), Compressor, Balance

EFF 1–4 : Compressor

■ Recorder Section

Overview

Recording Resolution : 16-bit/24-bit

Sampling Frequency : 44.1 kHz/48 kHz

Edit Functions

Song Edit : OPTIMIZE, DELETE, COPY, IMPORT

Track Edit : ERASE, DELETE, INSERT,

COPY, MOVE, EXCHANGE,

TIME COMP/EXPAND,

PITCH CHANGE, IMPORT CD AUDIO,

IMPORT CD WAV, IMPORT USB WAV,

IMPORT TRACK, EXPORT

Other Functions

Locate point/Marker

Locate : RTZ, A/B, LAST REC IN/OUT,

Quick Locate 1–9

MARK : 1–99

Punch-In/Out : Manual, Auto

Pitch Fix

CD-RW Drive

Data Backup, Audio CD Burning and Playback,

Audio CD Import, WAV File Import

■ External Control

MIDI IN : 5-pin DIN

MIDI OUT/THRU : 5-pin DIN

FOOT SW : phone

USB : USB 2.0

Dimensions

279

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.

Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time

without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not be the same in every

locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

For European models

Purchaser/User Information speciﬁed in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.

Inrush Current: 35A

Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4

Dimensions

533

497

503

153

145

Unit: mm

Index

280

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

A/B keys ................................ 27, 89

A/B points .................................... 88

A-B repeat ................................... 93

ABS ........................................... 174

AC IN connector .......................... 28

Accessing a screen/page ............ 31

Additional Function buttons ......... 31

Adjusting the input level .............. 39

AMP............................................. 95

Assigning input signals to tracks

Direct recording.................. 51, 99

Mixed recording ............... 54, 102

Audio CD ................................... 213

Basic settings......................... 215

Creating ................................. 213

Disc At Once .................. 214, 218

Erasing................................... 221

Finalizing................................ 220

Playing ................................... 222

Track At Once ................ 214, 217

Writing methods ..................... 214

Audio tracks............................... 128

AUTO DISPLAY button ............. 211

AUTO PUNCH key ................ 27, 70

Auto punch-in/out ........................ 70

AUTO SAVE button................... 211

Automix ..................................... 181

AUTOMIX key ............................. 24

Automix Library.......................... 190

AUTOMIX screen

Automix page ......................... 181

Edit page................................ 186

Event List page ...................... 188

Library page ........................... 190

AUTOREC button...................... 182

AUX ........................................... 111

AUX key ...................................... 24

AUX screen

Input/RTN page...................... 112

Track page ............................. 112

AUX send level.......................... 112

AW2816..................................... 177

Backing up ................................. 177

Bit depth..................................... 165

Block diagram ............................ 284

Bounce................................... 74, 79

BURST NOISE button ...............209

BYPASS ....................................121

CANCEL key................................ 27

Card ............................. 13, 104, 223

Cascade connection ..................226

CD key ......................................... 21

CD Play function ........................ 222

CD screen

Play page ...............................222

Setting page ...........................215

Write page .............................. 217

CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button... 210

CD/ST TR PLAY MODE

MUTE/MIX button ......................211

CD-RW drive.......................... 12, 29

Access indicator .......................29

Basic settings .........................215

Eject hole.................................. 29

Eject switch ..............................29

Handling ...................................12

Handling CD-R/RW media .........6

Removing in an emergency...... 12

Writing methods .....................214

CH VIEW screen

Library page ...........................108

View page............................... 105

Channel Library .........................108

Cluster size ................................ 212

COMP (Compressor) ......... 153, 240

Compander ........................ 153, 241

COMPARE button...................... 215

Compressor .........................61, 152

Compressor Parameter list ........ 243

Connection................................... 37

Control change ..........................194

CONTROL CHANGE MODE ..... 195

DATA/JOG dial.............................25

Demo song...................................41

DETECT.....................................125

Digital input signal ......................227

Digital input/output .....................223

DIGITAL OUT

DIGITAL STEREO

IN/OUT connectors ..............29, 104

Dimensions ................................279

DIO key ........................................21

DIO screen

Plug-in page............................228

Setting page............................223

Status page.............................227

DIRECT OUT .............................100

DIRECT OUT

EXTRACT POSITION ................211

Direct recording......................49, 99

Disc At Once ......................214, 218

Display message list ..................263

DITHER........................................75

DUCKING...........................151, 242

DYN key .......................................24

Dynamics ...................................151

Dynamics Parameters................240

DYNAMICS screen

Comp Edit page ......................152

Comp Lib. page ......................155

Gate Edit page........................151

Gate Lib. page ........................155

EDIT key ......................................21

EDIT screen

Edit page.................................136

Mark Adj. page..........................91

Tempo Map page....................175

Editing a value in the display........31

Editing command .......................138

COPY......................................139

DELETE..................................138

ERASE....................................138

EXCHANGE............................141

EXPORT .................................233

Index

281

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

IMPORT CD AUDIO............... 143

IMPORT CD WAV.................. 143

IMPORT TRACK.................... 145

IMPORT USB WAV ............... 234

INSERT.................................. 138

MOVE .................................... 140

PITCH .................................... 142

TIME COMP........................... 141

EFFECT key................................ 24

Effect Library ..................... 116, 122

EFFECT screen

FX Edit page .......................... 121

FX Input page ........................ 117

FX Lib. page........................... 122

FX Track page ....................... 117

Effects ....................................... 115

BYPASS................................. 121

Insert .............................. 115, 119

INSERT EFF .................. 107, 119

MIX BALANCE....................... 121

Send and Return............ 115, 117

USED AS ............................... 121

Effects Parameters.................... 245

EMPHASIS................................ 227

ENTER key.................................. 25

Entering text ................................ 32

EQ ....................................... 60, 149

EQ Library ................................. 154

EQ Parameter list ...................... 238

EXPAND (Expander)......... 153, 241

External effects.................. 113, 120

External MIDI devices ............... 200

F1-F4 keys ............................ 22, 31

Fader Group ................................ 82

Fader Start ................................ 134

Faders ......................................... 23

Features ...................................... 15

FF key ......................................... 27

FINALIZE button........................ 220

Finalizing ................................... 220

FOOT SW jack ............................ 29

FORMANT................................. 125

Front panel .................................. 29

GAIN knobs .................................21

GATE ................................. 151, 242

Gate Library ............................... 154

Gate Parameter list.................... 243

Ground screw ..............................28

GROUP...................................... 134

Hard disk.................................... 212

IN 1-8 key ....................................26

IN 9-16 key ..................................26

IN/OUT keys ....................27, 70, 89

In/Out points ................................88

Included CD-ROM .....................266

INITIALIZE button ...................... 106

Initializing ................................... 212

INPUT CH MUTE/MIX button ....222

INPUT SEL keys.......................... 21

INSERT EFF...................... 107, 119

INSERT I/O jacks......................... 28

Inserting effect ...................115, 119

Internal Effects........................... 115

Internal hard disk .......................212

JOG ON key ..........................25, 94

KEYIN SOURCE........................ 151

LAST SOLO................................. 84

LATCH button ............................ 206

Layer section .........................26, 33

LEARN button............................ 207

Level meters ................................97

Library

Automix Library ......................190

Channel Library ...................... 108

Effect Library ..................116, 122

EQ Library ..............................154

Gate Library ............................154

Mastering Library ......................75

LOCATE keys ............25, 32, 88, 89

Locate points/Markers..................88

A/B points .................................88

Adjusting the position..........91, 92

Erasing......................................93

In/Out points .............................88

Locate points ............................88

LOCATOR button .....................91

MARKER button .......................91

Markers.....................................90

Quick Locator points .................88

Relative zero point ....................88

Start/End points ........................88

Locate section ..............................27

Manual punch-in/out.....................69

MARK key ..............................27, 90

MARK SEARCH keys ............27, 90

Markers ........................................90

MASTER key................................26

MASTER TUNING .....................126

Mastering library...........................75

Mastering library list ...................237

MASTERING LIBRARY

popup window ..............................76

METER key ..................................22

METER screen.............................97

Input/RTN page ........................97

Master page..............................98

Output page ..............................98

Track page................................97

Meters ..........................................97

Metronome .............................44, 62

MIC/LINE INPUT jacks.................28

MIDI............................................193

Basic settings..........................194

CHANNEL...............................194

CONTROL CHANGE MODE ..195

DEVICE NO. ...........................199

MMC ...............................198, 200

MTC ................................199, 200

OFFSET..................................199

PORT......................................194

SYNC AVERAGE ...................199

SYNC OUT .............................199

THRU......................................198

MIDI Clock..................................202

Index

282

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Data Format...................... 272

MIDI Implementation Chart........ 276

MIDI IN connector ....................... 29

MIDI key ...................................... 21

MIDI OUT/THRU connector......... 29

MIDI remote............................... 204

MIDI screen

Setting 1 page........................ 194

Setting 2 page........................ 198

MIX BALANCE .......................... 121

Mix parameters.......................... 105

MIX SOLO ................................... 84

Mixdown ................................ 73, 75

MIXDOWN SOLO........................ 84

Mixed recording................... 50, 102

Mixing layers................................ 33

MMC.................................. 198, 200

MONITOR key............................. 21

MONITOR knob........................... 24

MONITOR OUT jacks.................. 28

MONITOR screen

Fader Grp. page....................... 82

Mute Grp. page ........................ 83

Pair page.................................. 58

Solo page................................. 84

MTC................................... 199, 200

MULTI CONNECTION............... 100

MUTE CLEAR ................... 100, 102

Mute Group ................................. 83

Nudge function ............................ 94

NUDGE PLAY MODE................ 210

NUDGE TIME............................ 210

NUM.LOCK key........................... 87

OFFSET .................................... 199

OMNI OUT jacks ................. 28, 104

ON keys....................................... 23

Optimizing ................................. 172

Optional card ............... 13, 104, 223

Output signal patching............... 104

Overdubbing................................ 65

OVERWRITE............................. 182

Pairing.......................................... 58

Pan ............................................147

PAN/EQ key................................. 24

PAN/EQ screen

EQ Lib. page ..........................154

EQ/Att. page........................... 149

Input/RTN page ...................... 147

Track page .............................147

PATCH key .................................. 21

PATCH screen........................... 104

Patching....................................... 99

PEAK HOLD button .....................98

PEAK indicators........................... 21

PHANTOM +48V switches........... 29

PHONES jack ..............................28

PHONES knob............................. 24

Ping-pong recording ..............74, 79

PINK NOISE button ...................209

Pitch Fix ..................................... 124

PLAY key ..................................... 27

Plug-in card................................ 228

Postroll time ......................... 70, 211

POWER switch ......................28, 38

Preroll time........................... 70, 210

Program change ................194, 201

Punch-in/out................................. 69

Quick Locator points .................... 88

RATE .........................................125

Rear panel ...................................28

REC key....................................... 27

RECALL CONFIRMATION

button......................................... 211

Recall Safe ................................162

RECORD key............................... 21

RECORD screen

Bounce page ............................79

Direct page ......................... 51, 99

Mixdown page ..........................75

Mixed page....................... 54, 102

PITCH FIX .............................. 124

RECORDING SOLO.................... 84

RELATIVE..................................174

Relative zero point .......................88

Remote file .................................268

REMOTE key ...............................26

REMOTE screen ........................205

REPEAT key ..........................27, 93

Restoring....................................178

Return time.................................185

REW key ......................................27

RTZ key..................................27, 89

SCALE .................................95, 125

SCENE key ..................................24

Scene Memory ...........................159

SCENE screen

Library page............................159

PGM Assign page...................201

RCL Safe page .......................162

Sort page ................................163

SEL keys ......................................23

Selected Channel knobs ..............24

Selected Channel section ......24, 33

Send and Return ................115, 117

Sequencer..................................202

SET key..................................27, 89

SHIFT key ..............................22, 31

Shut down ....................................38

SHUTDOWN button .....................38

Slot ...............................................29

Solo ..............................................84

SOLO key.....................................23

SONG key ....................................21

SONG screen

Backup page...........................177

Restore page ..........................178

Setting page............................174

Song List page........................167

Songs .........................................165

AW2816 ..................................177

Backing up ..............................177

Bit depth..................................165

Copying...................................171

Deleting...................................171

Editing settings .......................174

Editing the song name ............169

Folder Organization ................166

Importing data.........................173

Index

283

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Loading .................................. 170

New song ......................... 47, 168

Optimizing .............................. 172

Protection............................... 172

Restoring................................ 178

Saving .............................. 57, 170

Tempo map............................ 175

Sound Clip................................... 43

SOUND CLIP key........................ 27

SOUND CLIP screen................... 44

SOUND CLIP TIME..................... 47

Specifications ............................ 277

Start/End points........................... 88

STEREO fader ............................ 23

STEREO ON key......................... 23

STEREO OUT jacks.................... 28

STEREO SEL key ....................... 23

Stereo track ............................... 130

STOP key .................................... 27

STORE CONFIRMATION

button ........................................ 211

Switching a button on/off ............. 31

SYNC AVERAGE ...................... 199

SYNC CAUTION

DIGITAL ST IN button ............... 211

SYNC CAUTION

SLOT IN button ......................... 211

SYNC OUT................................ 199

Synchronizing............................ 200

Tempo Map ............................... 175

Test tone oscillator .................... 209

THRU ........................................ 198

Tone generator module ............. 207

Top panel .................................... 20

TRACK 1-12 key ......................... 26

TRACK 13-24 key ....................... 26

Track At Once ................... 214, 217

Track editing.............................. 135

Basic procedure ..................... 136

Editing command ................... 138

TRACK key.................................. 21

Track recording ........................... 47

Direct recording............ 49, 51, 99

Metronome............................... 62

Mixed recording ......... 50, 54, 102

TRACK screen

Stereo TR page ...................... 131

Trigger page ........................... 134

View page............................... 128

Virtual TR page ................63, 129

Transport section ................... 27, 87

Trigger track............................... 133

Troubleshooting ......................... 258

Turning the power on/off.............. 38

UNDERRUN PROTECT button . 215

UNDO LIST popup window.......... 64

UNDO/REDO key ..................25, 64

UNLATCH button....................... 206

USB connector..................... 29, 229

USB key....................................... 24

USB MIDI driver......................... 266

USB screen................................ 231

USB Storage mode............ 229, 230

USED AS ................................... 121

User-defined ..............................206

Utility functions........................... 209

UTILITY key................................. 21

UTILITY screen

Format page ........................... 212

Oscillator page .......................209

Preference page..................... 210

VARI ..........................................226

Vari-pitch.................................... 226

VIEW key ..................................... 24

Viewing the display ...................... 30

Virtual tracks ................................ 63

WAV files ...........................233, 234

WAVE DISPLAY popup window .. 95

Waveform ....................................95

Wordclock .................................. 223

WORDCLOCK SOURCE........... 223

Block diagram

284

Appendix

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

Block diagram

METER

SELECT

EFFECT1(...4)

to INSERT

RETURN

Connection Type

Select

INSERT SEND

METER METER

ATT

4BAND

+48V

(1-4ch/5-8ch)

OFF

PEAK

[MIC/LINE INPUT]

(1-8)

[INSERT I/O]

(1-2 ONLY)

[SLOT]

[DIGITAL STEREO IN]

GAIN

DIGITAL

STEREO L/R

SLOT 1-16

AD 1-8

DIGITAL STEREO IN

(BUS CASCADE)

SLOT

INPUT PATCH

EFECT RETURN 1(...4)

Stereo Configuration

INPUT CH

DIRECT OUT 1(...16)

Keyin

INPUT (1...16)

AUX 1(...4)

EFFECT 1(...4)

INPUT 1(...16)

(Out Meter)

(Gain Reduction)

METER

GATE

INSERT

4BAND

ATT

Keyin

Self or Stereo Link

METER METER

(Gain

Reduction)

(Out Meter)

COMP

INSERT

LEVEL

METER

METER METER

INSERT INSERT

INSERT

METER

DITHER

METER

SELECT

SOLO

PRE FADER/

AFTER PAN

PRE FADER/

AFTER PAN

PAN

PRE/

POST

AUX/EFFECT

BUS1 L

BUS1 R

BUS2 L

BUS2 R

STEREO L

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

AUX 1-4

EFFECT 1-4

PRE/

POST

AUX/EFFECT

LEVEL

ON LEVEL

INSERT

INPUT CH DIRECT

OUT 1(...16)

INSERT

ON LEVEL

BAL

(Gain Reduction)

(Out Meter)

METER

(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)

METER

Same as STEREO L

Same as BUS1 L

Same as BUS1 L except PAIRING

BUS1 L(...2)

BUS1 R(...2)

AUX1(...4)

EFFECT 1(...4)

RECORDER

INPUT 1(...24)

METER

(Gain Reduction)

(Out Meter)

ATT

INSERT

ATT

4BAND

COMP

MONITOR OUT

LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

SOLO TRIM

STEREO L

STEREO R

STEREO L

STEREO

OUTPUT PATCH

AUX1(...4)

TRACK CH

DIRECT OUT 1(...24)

STEREO

METRONOME

SOLO LOGIC

AUX1(...4)

TRACK CH

DIRECT OUT 1(...24)

INSERT SEND

STEREO R

SOLO L

SOLO R

DIGITAL STEREO IN

(BUS CASCADE)

ENABLE

ATT

[MONITOR OUT]

[PHONES]

[OMNI OUT]

[DIGITAL

STEREO OUT]

[STEREO OUT]

SLOT

CD-RW DRIVE

CD Playback

RECORDER

StereoTrack out

Sound Clip out

EFFECT

1(...4)

ATT

STEREO L

RECORDER

STEREO TRACK In R

Sound Clip In R

RECORDER

STEREO TRACK In L

Sound Clip In L

DITHER

STEREO R

METER

INSERTINSERT

ATT

4BAND

Keyin

Self or Stereo Link

METER

(Gain

Reduction)

(Out Meter)

COMP

TRACK 1(...24)

INPUT

MONITOR

RECORDER

REPRO 1(...24)

RECORDER

INPUT 1(...24)

CD-RW

DRIVE

RECORDER

CD-RW DRIVE

CD Playback

RECORDER

Stereo Track Out

Sound Clip Out

RECORDER

Stereo Track In

Sound Clip In

LEVEL

INSERT

METER

SOLO

PAN

PRE/

POST

AUX/EFFECT

TRACK CH

DIRECT OUT 1(...24)

LEVEL

OSCILLATOR

BUS1,2(L,R)

285

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

ATTENTION

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

(“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFT-

WARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE

PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS

AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN

INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORA-

TION (“YAMAHA”).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREE-

ING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU

DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY,

OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT

Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software pro-

gram(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The

term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying

software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or

Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all

applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership

of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will

continue to be protected under relevant copyrights.

• You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.

• You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable

form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media

where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you

must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other propri-

etary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE.

• You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the

SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the

recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS

• You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompi-

lation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE

by any method whatsoever.

• You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute

the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of

the SOFTWARE.

• You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one

computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with

other computers.

• You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data

that violates public policy.

• You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE

without permission by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs,

obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following

restrictions which you must observe.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for

any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright

owner.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated,

transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners

in public without permission of the copyright owner.

• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may

not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modiﬁed with-

out permission of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION

This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the

SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright

law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall ter-

minate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha.

Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed

SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies

thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA

As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the

tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from

defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of

fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of

the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be

replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an

authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the

receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by acci-

dent, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMIT-

TED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE

You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at

your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are pro-

vided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTAND-

ING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA

EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFT-

WARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIM-

ITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGE-

MENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITH-

OUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT

WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR

REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE

WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT

DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO

PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF.

IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY

OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CON-

SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST

DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MIS-

USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall

Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of

action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid

for the SOFTWARE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be

attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic

data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identiﬁes any software and

data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that

you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related

to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not

responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use

thereof.

•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY

SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-

CLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT

NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-

POSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to

the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages,

including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or con-

sequential damages, expenses, lost proﬁts, lost data or other dam-

ages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japa-

nese law without reference to principles of conﬂict of laws. Any dispute

or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If

for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction ﬁnds any portion of this

Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall

continue in full force and effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties

with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written

materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings

or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this

Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be bind-

ing unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of

Yamaha.

286

AW2400 Owner’s Manual

MEMO

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à

Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la

liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführ-

ten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den

jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más

cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park,

Calif. 90620, U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim

Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización

Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria, CEE Department

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa,

Poland

Tel: 022-868-07-57

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen,

The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF

CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China)

Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road

(West), Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend.

Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 080-004-0022

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2441

PA18

This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.

Yamaha Web Site (English only)

http://www.yamahasynth.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WE25170 710POCPx.x-02B0

Printed in Japan

Documenttranscriptie

Owner’s Manual EN FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Address : Telephone : Type of Equipment : Model Name : Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 714-522-9011 Professional Audio Workstation AW2400 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. 2 AW2400 Owner’s Manual (3 wires) Explanation of Graphical Symbols C AUTI O N RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The above warning is located on the rear of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (98-6500) This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (mercury) AW2400 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the device. • Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Use only the included power cord. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock. Do not open • Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Power supply/Power cord Location • Before moving the device, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (5)-4 AW2400 Owner’s Manual • Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the top/front/ rear to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In particular, do not place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate ventilation can result in overheating, possibly causing damage to the device(s), or even fire. • Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Doing so may result in noise, both in the device itself and in the TV or radio next to it. • Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum. Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers. 4 • The plastic side panels do not provide a secure grip, and should not be used as handles when moving or transporting the unit. Carrying the unit by the plastic side panels can result in the unit being dropped, which could damage the unit and/or cause personal injury. 1/2 Connections Handling caution • Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to minimum. • When turning on the AC power in your audio system, always turn on the power amplifier LAST, to avoid speaker damage. When turning the power off, the power amplifier should be turned off FIRST for the same reason. • Be sure to connect to a properly grounded power source. A ground screw is provided on the rear panel of this device for maximum safety and shock prevention. If the mains outlet is not grounded, be sure to connect the ground screw to a confirmed ground point before plugging the device into the mains. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock. • Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device (vents, disc slots, etc.). • Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, disc slots, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not use headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-). Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows: sleeve: ground, tip: send, and ring: return. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the device is not in use. The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualifi ed Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components. (5)-4 2/2 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 5 Caution for Laser This product utilizes a laser. Use of control, adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not open covers and do not repair yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personnel. Laser properties of the Drive Laser Class : Class 1 (HHS and IEC 825-1) Wavelength : for CD 784 nm for DVD 662 nm The label shown below is located on the rear of this product. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT The label shown below is located on the top of the internal CD-RW drive. CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. ATTENTION CLASSE 3B RAYONNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D’OUVERTURE. EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU. VORSICHT KLASSE 3B SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDS/ETTELSE FOR STRÅLING. ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES. UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN. VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. VARO! KURSSI 3B NÄKYVÄ JA NÄKYMÄTÖN AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERSÄTEILYLLE, ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEN. CAUTION: CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. Handling the CD-R/RW media Please observe the following points when handling the disc. Failure to do so may cause problems such as the recorded data being lost, the drive to malfunction, or the printed label to become blurred. • Do not place the disc in locations of direct sunlight, high temperature, or high humidity. • Do not touch the recording surface of the disc. Hold the disc at the edges. • Gently wipe dust or dirt off of the recording surface of the disc. Use an air duster or cleaner to remove dust. Vigorously rubbing the surface of the disc with a dry cloth may scratch the disc. • If the disc surface needs cleaning, wipe gently from the center to the outside of the disc with a soft damp cloth, then gently wipe off remaining moisture in the same way with a clean dry cloth. • Do not write on the disc or affix labels to it. • Do not wipe the disc with chemicals or detergents. • Do not bend or drop the disc. 6 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Internal Hard Disk Precautions • During some hard disk operations a small amount of vibration might be felt at the control panel and you might hear some mechanical noises. This is normal. • Do not subject the unit to strong physical shock. Excessive physical shock can damage the internal hard disk. • Always turn the power off when moving the unit from one location to another. Data on the internal hard disk can be lost or corrupted if the unit is moved while the power is on. Copyright Notice Copyright and other intellectual property laws in various countries permit reproduction of copyrighted materials under certain requirements. The observance of applicable laws for use of this product, however, is your responsibility. Yamaha disclaims any liability for violation of such laws in association with the use of this product. Although this product is designed for original music production, it can be utilized to make reproduction of copyrighted music and other sound products. While certain reproduction and use of reproduced materials are permitted under applicable laws, such reproduction and use without license may constitute copyright infringement and other violation of laws. Since violation of such laws can have serious consequences, you may wish to consult a legal expert about your planned use of this product. This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 7 Contents 1. Before you start 11 Introduction................................................................. 11 Remember to back up your data ................................ 11 About the built-in CD-RW drive .................................. 12 Using the CD-RW drive .............................................. 12 Installing an optional card........................................... 13 Recording on a track...................................................56 Saving the current song ..............................................57 Pairing channels .........................................................58 Applying EQ To an Input Signal..................................60 Applying Compression to an Input Signal ...................61 Handy Recording Functions .......................................62 Using the Metronome .............................................62 2. Introducing the AW2400 15 Switching virtual tracks...........................................63 Using the Undo List ................................................64 Features of the AW2400 ............................................ 15 AW2400 terminology .................................................. 17 Recorder section.................................................... 17 Mixer section.......................................................... 18 Overall.................................................................... 19 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do ...................... 20 Top panel ............................................................... 20 Rear panel ............................................................. 28 Front panel............................................................. 29 Basic operation of the AW2400 .................................. 30 Viewing the display ................................................ 30 Accessing a screen/page....................................... 31 7. Overdubbing 65 About overdubbing......................................................65 Assigning the input signal to a track ...........................66 Setting the mix balance and pan ................................67 Overdubbing ...............................................................68 Punch-in/out................................................................69 Manual punch-in/out...............................................69 Auto punch-in/out ...................................................70 8. Mixdown and bounce operations 73 Switching a button on/off........................................ 31 About mixdown and bouncing.....................................73 Editing a value in the display ................................. 31 Mixdown procedure ....................................................75 Using Additional Function Buttons ......................... 31 Playing back the stereo track......................................78 Entering text........................................................... 32 Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure ...................79 Switching Mixing Layers ........................................ 33 Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce .................82 Using the Selected Channel section ...................... 33 Fader Group assignments......................................82 Mute Group assignments .......................................83 3. Connection and Setup 37 Connection ................................................................. 37 Turning the power on/off ............................................ 38 Adjusting the input level ............................................. 39 Using the Solo function ..........................................84 9. Transport/Locate Operation 87 The Transport Section Keys .......................................87 Move To a Specified Location ....................................87 4. Listening to the demo song 41 Loading the demo song .............................................. 41 Playing the demo song ............................................... 42 Using the locator .........................................................88 Using markers.............................................................90 Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker .......91 Adjusting the position of a locate point...................91 5. Recording to a sound clip 43 Erasing a locate point or marker .................................93 Recording a sound clip ............................................... 43 Playing a sound clip ................................................... 45 Repeat playback of a specific region (the A-B Repeat function) ...........................................93 47 Finding a location while monitoring the sound (the Nudge function) ...................................................94 Creating a new song .................................................. 47 Finding a location while viewing the waveform ...........95 6. Track recording Direct recording and Mixed recording......................... 49 Assigning input signals to tracks (Direct recording)............................................... 51 Assigning input signals to tracks (Mixed recording) .............................................. 54 8 Adjusting the position of a marker ..........................92 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 10. Meters 97 Level Meter Types ......................................................97 Contents 11. Patching and signal flow 99 Input signal patching .................................................. 99 Patching for Direct Recording ................................ 99 Patching for Mixed Recording.............................. 102 Output signal patching.............................................. 104 The Trigger Track Function ......................................133 About Trigger Track..............................................133 Using the Trigger Track Function .........................134 Editing tracks ............................................................135 Basic procedure for track editing ..............................136 List of editing command ............................................138 12. Channel Operation 105 ERASE .................................................................138 DELETE ...............................................................138 Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels .............................................. 105 Channel Library Operation ....................................... 108 Calling the Channel Library screen...................... 108 Changing Channel Library Names....................... 109 Storing Channel Library settings.......................... 109 Recalling Channel Library settings ...................... 110 Erasing Channel Library settings ......................... 110 INSERT ................................................................138 COPY ...................................................................139 MOVE...................................................................140 EXCHANGE .........................................................141 TIME COMP (Time Compression/Expansion)......141 PITCH (Pitch Change)..........................................142 IMPORT CD AUDIO.............................................142 IMPORT CD WAV ................................................142 13. AUX 111 About the AUX buses ............................................... 111 AUX Send Level Adjustment .................................... 111 Using external effects with the AUX buses .............. 113 14. Effects 115 IMPORT USB WAV..............................................142 IMPORT TRACK ..................................................142 EXPORT...............................................................142 MERGE ................................................................142 Importing audio data/WAV files ................................143 Importing from the CD-RW drive ..........................143 Importing audio data from another song ..............145 About the Internal Effects ......................................... 115 Recalling Effect Library settings ............................... 116 Applying Effects via Send and Return ...................... 117 Inserting an Effect Into a Channel ............................ 119 Editing Effects .......................................................... 121 Effect Library Operations.......................................... 122 Call the Effect Library Screen .............................. 122 Changing Effect Library Names ........................... 122 Storing Effect Library settings .............................. 123 Erasing Effect Library settings ............................. 123 Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)......................... 124 15. Track operations and editing 127 16. Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing 147 Pan Control ...............................................................147 4-band EQ ................................................................149 Dynamics Processing ...............................................151 Using the Gates....................................................151 Using the Compressors........................................152 EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation ..............154 Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens ......154 Changing EQ/Dynamics Library Names...............156 Recalling EQ/Dynamics Library settings ..............156 Storing EQ/Dynamics Library settings..................157 Erasing EQ/Dynamics Library settings.................157 About the AW2400’s tracks ...................................... 127 Audio track operations.............................................. 128 About audio tracks ............................................... 128 Viewing all audio tracks ....................................... 128 Muting a specific audio track................................ 129 Switching the virtual track of an audio track......... 129 Editing virtual track names for an audio track ...... 130 Stereo track operations ............................................ 130 About the stereo track.......................................... 130 Recording on the stereo track.............................. 131 Playing back the stereo track............................... 131 17. Scene Memory 159 About Scene Memory ...............................................159 Scene Memory Operation .........................................159 Renaming a scene ...............................................160 Recalling scene data ............................................160 Storing scene data ...............................................161 Deleting scene data..............................................161 Protecting a scene................................................161 Using the Recall Safe function..................................162 Moving scenes ..........................................................163 Switching the virtual track of the stereo track ...... 132 Editing the name of a virtual track for the stereo track .......................................... 132 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 9 Contents 18. Song management 165 22. Creating an audio CD 213 About songs ............................................................. 165 Creating an audio CD ...............................................213 Managing Your Songs .............................................. 167 Editing various settings for the song ........................ 174 Types of media that you can use with the CD-RW drive ...............................................213 Creating a tempo map .............................................. 175 Writing an audio CD..................................................214 Backing up songs ..................................................... 177 Basic settings for the CD-RW drive ..........................215 Restoring songs ....................................................... 178 Writing audio data .....................................................216 Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations............... 180 Writing Track At Once ..........................................217 Writing Disc At Once ............................................218 Finalizing CD-R/RW media .......................................220 19. Automix 181 Erasing CD-RW media .............................................221 About Automix .......................................................... 181 Playing an audio CD .................................................222 Automix Operation.................................................... 181 Creating a New Automix Recording..................... 182 Recording the Automix Data ................................ 183 23. Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings 223 Automix Playback ................................................ 185 Wordclock and Cascade Settings .............................223 Punch In and Out of Automix ............................... 185 Select the Wordclock Source ...............................223 Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region ............................................... 186 Fine Adjustment Of Overall Song Pitch (Vari-pitch).....................................226 Editing Individual Automix Events ............................ 188 Cascade-connecting External Devices.................226 Automix Library Operation........................................ 190 Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal.............227 About the Automix Library Page .......................... 190 Plug-in Card Settings ................................................228 Changing Automix Names ................................... 190 Storing Automix settings ...................................... 191 24. USB Recalling Automix settings................................... 191 What You Can Do With USB ....................................229 Erasing Automix settings ..................................... 191 WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) ..................230 Protecting Automix Data ...................................... 192 Switching to the USB Storage Mode ....................230 20. MIDI Exiting the USB Storage Mode.............................232 193 What you can do using MIDI .................................... 193 Basic MIDI Settings .................................................. 194 MIDI Synchronization Message Setup ..................... 198 Connecting to External Equipment ........................... 200 Synchronizing the AW2400 With External MIDI Devices............................. 200 Copying Exported WAV Files To the Computer..............................................233 Importing Copied WAV Files From the Computer..........................................234 Appendix 237 Mastering library list ..................................................237 Switching AW2400 scenes from an external MIDI device .......................... 201 EQ Parameter list .....................................................238 Recording/playing AW2400 mix operations on an external sequencer ....... 202 Gate Parameter list ...................................................243 Using the MIDI Remote function .............................. 204 About the MIDI Remote function.......................... 204 Using the MIDI Remote function presets ............. 204 Using User-defined Remote function ................... 206 Remotely controlling a tone generator module .... 207 21. Utility functions 10 229 209 Dynamics Parameters ..............................................240 Compressor Parameter list .......................................243 Effects Parameters ...................................................245 Troubleshooting ........................................................258 Display message list .................................................263 About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 ........266 MIDI data format .......................................................272 MIDI Implementation Chart .......................................276 Specifications............................................................277 Using the test tone oscillator .................................... 209 Dimensions ...............................................................279 AW2400 Preferences ............................................... 210 Index .........................................................................280 Initializing the internal hard disk ............................... 212 Block diagram ...........................................................284 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 1 Before you start This chapter explains what you should know before you begin using the AW2400. Before you start 1 Introduction ■ Check the included items The AW2400 package contains the following items. If any are missing, please contact your dealer. • • • • The AW2400 Power cord Owner’s manual (this book) CD-ROM ■ Copyright Copying of commercially available music sequence data and/or digital audio files for any purpose other than your own personal use is strictly prohibited. ■ Trademarks • Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. USA in the United States and other countries. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation USA in the United States and other countries. • Cubase SX and Nuendo are trademarks of Steinberg Media Technologies AG. • Logic is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. USA in the United States and other countries. • SONAR is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone Systems, Inc. • ProTools is a trademark or registered trademark of Avid Technology, Inc. and affiliated companies. • Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. ■ Yamaha Website (English only) http://www.yamahasynth.com/ ■ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Remember to back up your data ■ Storing produced data ■ Responsibility for loss of data, etc. Produced data can be lost due to breakdown or mistaken operation. We recommend that you store all important data on your computer, CD-R/CD-RW discs, or other external storage medium. Yamaha will accept no responsibility for any damages (including consequential or incidental) incurred by the customer or any third party as a result of loss or impairment of the data stored on the hard disk or CD-R media, regardless of whether such loss could have been or actually was foreseen by Yamaha. Nor does Yamaha guarantee the media against any defect that may render it unusable. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 11 About the built-in CD-RW drive • Using the CD-RW drive 1 About the built-in CD-RW drive Before you start A built-in CD-RW drive is a device that lets you create or play audio CDs, backup and restore data from the internal hard disk, and read data from a CD-ROM. ■ Handling 1 Never touch the objective lens. B Be careful that the objective lens does not become IMPORTANT • Even if a CD-RW drive is operating normally, it may fail a read or write operation approximately once in five hundred times. • Yamaha will take no responsibility for any damages, direct or consequential, that may result from the use of the above CDRW drive. dusty or dirty. C If the objective lens becomes dusty, use a commercially available blower etc. to blow the dust off with clean air. D Since the inside of the drive contains powerful magnetic circuitry, do not allow any magnetic material to come near the drive. (In particular, any metallic fragments, screws, or pins that enter the drive mechanism will cause operation to fail.) Using the CD-RW drive To insert a disc into the CD-RW drive, press the eject switch. The disc tray will open. Place the disc on the tray, and gently push the disc tray in. NOTE • The disc tray is ejected electrically. If the disc tray is not ejected when you press the eject switch, turn on the power of the AW2400 and press the eject switch once again. ■ Removing a CD in an emergency If you are unable to remove the disc by pressing the eject switch, insert a wire of less than 2 mm diameter (such as a straightened paper clip) into the eject hole, and push gently. However, pressing the eject switch will not eject the disc when the AW2400 is in the following states, so do not use this method in such cases. • When the AW2400’s power is “OFF” • When the disc is being accessed (data is being read, written, or erased) • While in CD PLAY mode CAUTION Eject hole 12 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Eject switch • This removal method is for use in emergencies such as when you cannot remove the disc due to a malfunction of the disc tray or a power failure. Do not use this method unnecessarily, since doing so will damage the CD-RW drive. Installing an optional card ■ Available optional cards By installing a separately sold mini-YGDAI card in a rearpanel slot, you can add analog input/output jacks to the AW2400 or allow connection of external digital devices. The following types of cards can be used. Card type Model MY4-AD Number of channels 4 MY8-AD AD card MY8-AD24 Digital format 8 MY4-DA 4 MY8-DA96 8 1 Make sure that the power is turned off. 2 Loosen the screws that hold the slot cover in place, and remove the slot cover. 1 Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place. 24 bit — 20 bit 24 bit MY8-AD96 DA card Bit depth To install an optional mini-YGDAI card, proceed as follows. Before you start Installing an optional card — 20 bit 24 bit MY8-AE MY8-AE96 8 MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card MY16-AE 16 MY8-AT 8 MY16-AT 16 AES/EBU 24 bit ADAT MY8-TD 8 MY16-TD 16 Waves Plug-in DSP card Y96K 8 ADAT 24bit mLAN card MY16-mLAN 16 IEEE1394 24bit TASCAM Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the most recent information on I/O cards. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com 3 Align the edges of the card with the guard rails inside the slot, and insert the card into the slot. Push the card all the way into the slot so that the connector at the end of the card is correctly mated with the connector inside the slot. ■ Installing an optional card Before installing a card, you must check the Yamaha website to make sure that this device is compatible. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com 4 Use the screws included with the card to fasten the card in place. Malfunctions or incorrect operation may occur if the card is not fastened. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 13 1 Before you start 14 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 2 Introducing the AW2400 Features of the AW2400 The AW2400 is an audio workstation that combines a digital mixer, multi-effect processor, hard disk recorder, and CD-RW drive. The following diagram shows the signal flow within the AW2400. ×2 Mixer ×8 [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 I/O slot ×16 I/O card [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector ×2 2 Introducing the AW2400 This chapter describes the features of the AW2400, the name of each part and its function, and introduces terminology you need to know when using the AW2400. Sound clip Input channels 1–16 Track channels 1–24 Effect return channels 1–4 Bus1 L/R, Bus2 L/R AUX buses 1–4 Effect buses 1–4 Stereo buses L/R ×2 ×4 ×16 ×2 ×2 ×2 [OMNI OUT] jacks 1-4 I/O card [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector [STEREO OUT] jacks [MONITOR OUT] jacks ×2 [PHONES] jack Effect 1 ×2 Metronome ×2 Effect 2 Stereo output channel ×2 ×2 ×2 ×2 Effect 3 Effect 4 ×2 ×2 Internal Effects Recorder input patching ×2 ×24 CD Play ×24 CD Write Data Backup/Restore WAV File Import Recorder CD-R/RW drive Now let’s take a more detailed look at each section of the AW2400. ■ Mixer section ● Plenty of input channels with professional features The AW2400 digital mixer features 24-bit AD/DA conversion with 32-bit internal processing for uncompromised sound quality. 16 input channels, 24 track channels, and 4 stereo effect return channels provide plenty of input capacity for most mixing situations. The 8 AD input ([MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8), channels 1–16 on an optional I/O card installed in I/O slot, or the stereo [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector can be selected for input. The track channel 1–24 inputs are permanently assigned to tracks 1–24, and the effect return channel 1–4 inputs are permanently assigned to the outputs of internal effect processors 1–4. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 15 Features of the AW2400 2 Introducing the AW2400 ● Totally redesigned operation ● Trigger track function The AW2400 is designed to be operated directly by the musician (guitarist, vocalist, drummer etc.). Input signal track assignment, mixdown and bounce recording settings, tracking with effects/EQ/dynamics, compressor settings, and much more can be easily handled with simple, straightforward operation. The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys and faders to be used to start and stop playback of recorded tracks. This is ideal for performance situations in which you want to switch phrases or patterns in real time, or when you need to start background music on cue, for example. ● Four-band EQ and dynamics processors on each channel ● Versatile editing functionality Four-band full-parametric EQ and dynamics processing is provided on virtually every channel. You can recall the desired preset from the library, and use the panel knobs and keys to quickly adjust the settings. ● Four high-quality multi-effect units built-in The four built-in effect units deliver a wide variety of effects including ambience effects such as reverb and delay, modulation type effects such as chorus and flanger, and guitar-type effects such as distortion and amp simulation. These effects can be used either via send/return, or inserted into a desired channel. ● Automix capability Full automix production power is provided with 13 motor faders for comprehensive fader control, pan control, scene recall and library recall capability. ● I/O slot for expansion with optional I/O cards Expanded inputs and outputs can be provided in ADAT, TASCAM, AES/EBU, and other formats. Optional DSP cards can also be used to provide extra signal processing capability via the I/O slot. ■ Recorder section ● 16-track Simultaneous Recording & 24-track Simultaneous Playback (16-bit songs) You can record multiple instrument tracks one by one, or set up multiple mics to record a drum set or a live performance by an entire band. A stereo track for direct mixdown of all 24 tracks is also provided, letting you manage the multi-track audio and the two-track mix as a single data package. 8 virtual tracks are available for the recorder tracks as well as the stereo track. When recording parts or when doing a mix, you can switch virtual tracks to record multiple takes and select the best take later. The “bit depth” (number of quantization bits) of the audio data recorded on each track can individually be set to 16 or 24 bits for each song. 16-bit songs allow simultaneous recording of up to 16 tracks, and simultaneous playback of up to 24 tracks. 24-bit songs allow simultaneous recording up to 8 tracks, and simultaneous playback of up to 12 tracks (→ p. 165). The recording sampling frequency can also be set to either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz (the selected sampling has no effect on the number of simultaneous record or playback tracks). 16 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Audio data recorded on a track can be copied, moved, or edited using a variety of commands. You can make detailed edits, or even make radical changes to the structure of the song by using the same riff repeatedly or increasing the number of choruses. “Time Compression” lets you compress or expand the time axis of the audio data over a range of 50%–200%. “Pitch Change” lets you modify the pitch over a range of up or down one octave. You can use the Undo function to undo the results of as many as the last fifteen editing operations. ● A variety of Locate methods, and auto punch-in/out Eight locate points (start/end, relative zero, A/B, in/out, quick locator) and 99 markers can be assigned at any desired point in the song for quick access via Locate operations. Auto punch-in/out and A-B repeat playback functions are also provided. The AW2400 also has a metronome that follows the tempo map. ● Sound Clip function The Sound Clip function lets you record and play back an input signal without using the recorder tracks. You can use this function to make quick sketches of song or arrangement ideas. You can transfer recorded sound clip data to the recorder as required. ● Vocal Editing with Pitch Fix A Pitch Fix function is provided to allow precise adjustment of the pitch of a vocal track as well as the generation of chorus parts from a main vocal line. This feature can also be used to change the character of a vocal sound. Features of the AW2400 • AW2400 terminology ■ Connecting to a Computer A dedicated CD-RW drive is installed in the AW2400. You can produce an audio CD containing the stereo mixes of songs recorded on the hard disk. Markers assigned within a song can also be used as the CD track numbers. You can even use advanced techniques such as assigning more than one track number within a single song. The CD-RW drive can also be used to backup/restore songs, to play back audio CDs, and to load WAV data from a CD-ROM. The AW2400 can be directly connected to a computer via the built-in USB interface, which enables transferring audio files as well as MIDI messages. This allows WAVformat audio files to be copied between the AW2400 and computer for convenient management and processing in computer-based applications, and “backup” song files can be stored on the computer’s memory media. 2 Introducing the AW2400 ■ CD-RW drive AW2400 terminology Here’s a quick overview of terminology used with the AW2400. Recorder section ■ Tracks A location where data is recorded is called a “track.” The AW2400’s recorder section uses the following types of track. ● Audio tracks The physical tracks used to record and play back audio data are called “audio tracks,” or simply “tracks.” The AW2400 has 24 audio tracks. You can record 16 tracks simultaneously, and play back 24 tracks simultaneously (16-bit songs). ● Virtual tracks Each of the 24 audio tracks and the stereo track consists of eight “virtual” tracks. For the audio tracks and the stereo track, only one virtual track can be recorded or played at any time. However, you can switch virtual tracks to continue recording other takes while preserving the previously-recorded content. The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks. The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1–24, and the vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1–8. The shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently selected for recording or playback. Audio tracks ● Stereo track Virtual tracks 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Stereo track Virtual tracks The AW2400 has a “stereo track” that is independent from audio tracks 1–24, and which records and plays a stereo audio signal. The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown track for recording the final mix. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ● Trigger tracks The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys and faders to be used to start and stop playback of recorded tracks. When the Trigger Track function is engaged and you press a track channel [ON] key, the corresponding track will playback one time from the beginning of the song to the end of the recorded data. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 17 AW2400 terminology ■ Locate points/markers 2 Introducing the AW2400 Locations within a song that you specified in order to execute a function such as auto punch-in/out or A-B repeat playback are called “locate points.” Locate points include in/out points and the A/B points. You can use the Locate section keys to move instantly to these points. You can assign “markers” at desired locations within a song independently of the locate points so that you can find these locations quickly. The AW2400 lets you set up to ninety-nine markers (1–99). By using the keys Locate section you can move instantly to the previous or next marker. ● AUX send master channels 1–4 Provide final level adjustment for the AUX buses, as well as EQ and dynamics processing. ● Effect send master channels 1–4 Provide final level adjustment for the effect buses, as well as dynamics processing. ■ Mixing Layers In order to efficiently handle numerous input channels the AW2400 mixer section channels are organized in “mixing layers”. The diagram shows an overview of the AW2400’s 6 mixing layers. Mixer section ■ Channels A signal path that processes a single signal within the mixer and sends it to various sections is called a “channel.” The mixer section of the AW2400 provides the following channels. ● Input channels 1–16 Input channels provide level control, EQ, and dynamics processing for signals that are input via the [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8, the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector, and/or an I/O card installed in the rear-panel slot, and send them to the recorder tracks or to the [STEREO OUT] jacks. ● Track channels 1–24 These channels provide level adjustment, EQ, and dynamics processing for the audio playback signals from audio tracks 1–24 of the recorder, and send the signals to the stereo track and the [STEREO OUT] jacks. You can also perform “bounce recording” by sending these channels to different tracks. ● Effect return channels 1–4 These channels send the signals returned from the internal effects to the stereo track and the [STEREO OUT] jacks. ● Stereo output channel This channel provides level adjustment, EQ, and dynamics processing for the stereo bus signal (which carries the mix of the other channels), and sends it to the stereo track or to the [STEREO OUT] jacks. The same signal is also output from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and from the [PHONES] jack. ● Bus master channels 1/2 Provide level adjustment, EQ, and dynamics processing for the signals from bus 1 and bus 2, and sends the signals to the audio tracks. 18 AW2400 Owner’s Manual A B C D E F The channels available in each of the mixing layers are as follows. 1 Mixing Layer IN 1-8 Input channels 1–8 and effect return channels 1–4. B Mixing Layer IN 9-16 Input channels 9–16 and effect return channels 1–4. C Mixing Layer MASTER Bus master channels 1/2, AUX send master channels 1–4, and effect send master channels 1–4. D Mixing Layer TRACK 1-12 Track channels 1–12. E Mixing Layer TRACK 13-24 Track channels 13–24. F REMOTE Layer A special layer for remote control of external MIDI devices. AW2400 terminology Channel pan, EQ, dynamics processor and other settings are known as “mix parameters”. All mix parameters can be saved together as “scenes” that can be recalled whenever necessary. Furthermore, specialized libraries are provided for various parameter groups – EQ, effects, etc. – that can be saved and recalled individually for each channel. ■ Paired channels For effect return channels 1–4, stereo output channel, and bus master channel 1–2, the parameters (except for pan) are always linked for adjacent pairs of channels. These are called “paired channels.” For input channels 1–16, track channels 1–24, and AUX send master channels 1–4, you can also assign adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels to function as paired channels. The parameters (except for pan and phase) of paired channels will be linked, so that adjusting one parameter will cause the same parameter of the other channel to be adjusted accordingly. ■ Buses A signal route that mixes the signals from multiple channels and sends them to an output jack or recorder track input is called a “bus.” Unlike channels, which handle only a single signal, a bus can combine multiple signals into one or two (stereo) outputs and send them to a destination. The AW2400’s mixer section provides the following buses. ● Stereo bus This bus mixes the input signals to stereo, and sends them via the stereo output channel to the stereo track of the recorder or to the [STEREO OUT] jacks. Normally the same signal output via the [STEREO OUT] jacks is also output via the [MONITOR OUT] and [PHONES] jacks. ● AUX buses 1–4 These buses mix the signals from the track, input, and effect return channels and send them to the specified output connector. Use these when you will use an external effect processor, or to create a mix differing from the stereo channel for musicians to monitor. Overall ■ Songs The smallest unit by which the AW2400 manages a composition is called a “song.” When you save a song on the hard disk, all data necessary for reproducing that song will be saved; i.e., not just the audio data, but also the mixer settings and the automix settings. You can return to the original state at any time by loading the saved song. ■ Scenes and scene memories A “scene” is a stored set of settings for the mixer section and effects. The area of memory that holds the scenes is called “scene memory,” and 99 scenes can be stored for each song. Scene memories are saved on the hard disk as part of the song. 2 Introducing the AW2400 ■ Mix Parameters ■ Libraries A “library” is an area of memory that stores individual settings such as for EQ or dynamics. The AW2400 has separate libraries for EQ, dynamics, effect, channel, and mastering settings. Recalling a scene affects all mixer section settings, while the libraries allow only specified settings to be recalled as required. You can also save the settings from one channel and copy them to other channels, for example. Each library is saved on the hard disk as part of the song. ■ Tempo map The “tempo map” records changes in tempo and time signature that occur during the course of a song. The tempo map is saved on the hard disk as part of the song. ■ System data Various global settings that apply to all songs are collectively referred to as “system data.” System data is stored on the hard disk independently of the individual songs. ● Effect buses 1–4 These buses combine the signals from the track and input channels, and input them to built-in effects 1–4. ● Bus 1, Bus 2 These buses mix track, input, and effect return channels and send them to the inputs of free tracks. Bus 1 and bus 2 are used for bounce (ping-pong) recording. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 19 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do Parts of the AW2400 and what they do 2 This section explains the names and functions of the various items on the AW2400’s top panel, rear panel, and front panel. Introducing the AW2400 Top panel Scene/Automix/USB section (P. 24) Work Navigate section (P. 21) Quick Navigate section (P. 21) Analog Input section (P. 21) Mixer section (P. 23) Display section (P. 22) 20 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Selected Channel section (P. 24) Layer section (P. 26) Locate/Number section (P. 25) Data entry/control section (P. 25) Monitor section (P. 24) Transport section (P. 27) Locate section (P. 27) Parts of the AW2400 and what they do ■ Analog Input section 2 C 1 [GAIN] knobs 1–8 These adjust the sensitivity of the rear panel MIC/LINE INPUT jacks 1–8 to input signals. C [INPUT SEL] keys 1–8 These keys select the mixer input channel that you will operate. Introducing the AW2400 2 1 B [PEAK] Indicators These indicators will light red if the peak signal level after the [GAIN] knob reaches or exceeds 3-dB below clipping. To set the optimum record level, set the [GAIN] knob so that the indicator flashes only briefly on the highest peaks that will be encountered during the recording. ■ Work Navigate section 1 2 3 4 5 6 G H 1 [SONG] key This key accesses the SONG screen, where you can save or load songs, and perform the shut-down procedure. B [CD] key This key accesses the CD screen, where you can write or play an audio CD, and backup or restore data. C [TRACK] key This key accesses the TRACK screen, where you can check whether each track contains data, and switch the virtual tracks that will be used for recording and playback. D [EDIT] key This key accesses the EDIT screen, where you can copy or erase tracks. E [MIDI] key Accesses the MIDI screen where you can set up MIDI synchronization, scene change, and other settings. F [UTILITY] key Press this key to access the UTILITY screen with settings for the unit’s test tone oscillator, digital inputs and outputs, and other utility parameters. G [PATCH] key Accesses the PATCH screen where you can patch output signals as required. H [DIO] key The [DIO] key accesses the DIO screen which includes the clock source and I/O card settings. ■ Quick Navigate section 1 [RECORD] key 1 2 This key accesses the RECORD screen, where you can quickly assign the signal to be recorded to the input of each track, and make settings for recording. B [MONITOR] key The MONITOR screen, accessed by this key, includes settings for fader grouping, the solo function, and more. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 21 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do ■ Display section 2 Introducing the AW2400 2 1 C E 4 6 G 1 Display The backlit display screen provides easy visual access to all functions and parameters. B Stereo Meters These 12-segment levels meters show the final output signals levels on the stereo bus. C [METER] key Calls the METER screen which includes the channel, bus, and other level meters. D Contrast Adjusts the brightness of the display. E Access indicator This indicator indicates the access status of the internal hard disk. When the hard disk is being read or written, this indicator will light. CAUTION • Never turn off the power of the AW2400 when the access indicator is lit. Doing so will not only damage the data on the internal hard disk, but may also damage the hard disk itself. When you want to turn off the power of the AW2400, you must perform the shutdown procedure (→ p. 38). 22 AW2400 Owner’s Manual F [F1]–[F4] keys These keys operate the “tabs” shown at the bottom of the display screen. They can access other pages in a group of functions, or in some cases execute specific functions. G [SHIFT] key “Shifts” the function of the tabs at the bottom of the display to show additional functions, when applicable. “Shift functions” can be executed by pressing the appropriate functions key – [F1] to [F4] – while holding the [SHIFT] key. Parts of the AW2400 and what they do ■ Mixer section C 1 BD G Introducing the AW2400 2 E 1 [SEL] keys 1–12 B [STEREO SEL] key Selects the channel to be operated. The [SEL] key of the currently selected channel will light. C [ON] keys 1–12 D [STEREO ON] key Turns the corresponding channel ON or OFF. The [ON] key will be lit when the corresponding channel is ON, and out when the channel is OFF. The [ON] keys are also used to specify solo channels when the solo function is on. HINT • When Trigger Track mode is engaged, the [ON] key can be used to start/stop playback of the corresponding track. 6 E Faders 1–12 The faders adjust recorder track playback levels, input channel input levels, and effect return channel input levels according to the mixing layer currently selected via the LAYER section. F [STEREO] fader Adjusts the output level of the stereo bus. NOTE • The [STEREO SEL] keys, [STEREO ON] keys, and [STEREO] faders always operate stereo channels. These keys and faders are not affected by the LAYER section settings. G [SOLO] key Turns the solo function ON or OFF. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 23 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do ■ Selected Channel section 2 Introducing the AW2400 C [AUX] key Calls the AUX screen for the currently selected channel. You can then press any of the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corresponding AUX parameters. 1 B D [EFFECT] key Calls the EFFECT screen for the currently selected channel. You can then press any of the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corresponding EFFECT parameters. C D E F G 1 [VIEW] key This key accesses the CH VIEW screen, where you can check the level of each channel, or perform on-screen adjustments to the faders and other mix parameters of each channel. B [DYN] key Calls the DYNAMICS screen for the currently selected channel. You can then press any of the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs — 1 through 4 — to access the corresponding dynamics parameters. E [PAN/EQ] key Calls the PAN/EQ screen for the currently selected channel. After pressing the [PAN/EQ] key, you can press any of the Selected Channel knobs 1 through 4 to switch the PAN/EQ screen pages. F SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1–4 These knobs are used to adjust the various parameters for the selected channel. Press any of these knobs after pressing the [DYN], [AUX], [EFFECT] or [PAN/EQ] key to call the corresponding parameter screen. G [LOW], [LO-MID], [HI-MID], and [HIGH] keys These keys specify the EQ band to be adjusted by the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs when the EQ screen EQ page is showing. ■ Monitor section 1 [MONITOR] knob 1 2 This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks. B [PHONES] knob This knob adjusts the level of the signal that is output from the [PHONES] jack. ■ Scene/Automix/USB section 1 [SCENE] key This key accesses the SCENE screen, where you can save or recall scene memories. B [AUTOMIX] key This key accesses the AUTOMIX screen which allows control and editing of automix operations. 1 24 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 2 3 C [USB] key The [USB] keys calls up the USB screen with parameters related to USB operation. Parts of the AW2400 and what they do ■ Data entry/control section 1 [INC] key Increments (increases) the selected value by 1. A B [DEC] key Decrements (decreases) the selected value by 1. C [Cursor] keys ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] keys) These keys move the cursor (the blinking frame) around the screen to select a specific item. D [JOG ON] key This key is an on/off switch for the Nudge function which uses the [DATA/JOG] dial. When this function is on, the key will light. C E [UNDO/REDO] key This key cancels the results of a recording or track editing operation (Undo), or re-executes a cancelled operation (Redo). D E G 2 Introducing the AW2400 B HINT • This key will light if Undo is possible. F • If you press and hold this key, the UNDO LIST screen will appear. Here you can turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to revert to as many as the last fifteen operations (→ p. 64). F [ENTER] key Use this key to operate an on-screen button, or to execute a specific function. G [DATA/JOG] dial Use this dial to change the value of a parameter. If the [JOG ON] key is on, this dial operates the Nudge function. ■ Locate/Number section 1 [LOCATE] keys These keys allow you to move directly to preset “locate” points. These keys are also used for character and number entry. B [NUM.LOCK] key This key allows you to specify a destination locate point in measures/beats. 1 B AW2400 Owner’s Manual 25 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do ■ Layer section A B C 2 ● [MASTER] key Bus Master 1–2 Introducing the AW2400 D 1 B C D E 5 AUX Send Master 1–4 F [IN 1-8] key [IN 9-16] key [MASTER] key [TRACK 1-12] key [TRACK 13-24] key Select the mixing layer to be operated by the [SEL] 1–12 keys, the [ON] 1–12 keys, and faders 1–12. The mixing layers that can be controlled when each of these keys are engaged are as follows: No Control Effect Send Master 1–4 ● [TRACK 1-12] key Track channels 1–12 ● [IN 1-8] key Input channels 1–8 Effect Return channels 1–4 ● [TRACK 13-24] key Track channels 13–24 ● [IN 9-16] key Input channels 9–16 Effect Return channels 1–4 F [REMOTE] key This key accesses the REMOTE screen, where you can use the front panel faders and [ON] keys to control an external MIDI device or sequencer software on your computer. 26 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Parts of the AW2400 and what they do ■ Locate section C B E D F 7 I E [IN]/[OUT] keys These keys specify the points at which auto punch-in/out recording will begin (the In point) and end (the Out point). These keys can also be used as locate keys to move directly to the In point or Out point. F [SET] key Sets the in/out or A/B points in conjunction with the [IN]/ [OUT], [A]/[B], and [LOCATE] keys. Also sets the relative zero time point when pressed simultaneously with the RTZ [ ] key. G [REPEAT] key This key switches the A-B repeat function on/off, letting you repeatedly play a specified region. H 1 [SOUND CLIP] key This key accesses the SOUND CLIP screen, where you can record or play sound clips. B MARK SEARCH [ ]/[ ] keys These keys search for markers placed within the song. C [MARK] key This key places a marker at the current location of the song. 2 Introducing the AW2400 1 H [A]/[B] keys These keys specify the points at which the Repeat function will begin (point A) and end (point B). These keys can also be used as locate keys to move directly to point A or point B. I [CANCEL] key Use this key in conjunction with the [IN]/[OUT] keys, the [A]/[B] keys or the [LOCATE] key to cancel a locater that you registered. D [AUTO PUNCH] key This key switches the audio punch-in/out function on/off, letting you automate recording. ■ Transport section 1 B C FF [ ] key This key fast-forwards the song location. Press the key repeatedly to alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed. Press the STOP[■] key or PLAY[ ] key to stop fast-forward. C D STOP [■] key This key stops playback, recording, fast-forward, or rewind. Trigger track playback will also stop. 4 1 RTZ [ E F ] key This key moves directly to the absolute zero time location or the relative zero time location. Used in conjunction with the [SET] key, this registers the current location as the relative zero time. B REW [ ] key This key rewinds the song location. Press the key repeatedly to alternate between 8x speed and 16x speed. Press the STOP[■] key or PLAY[ ] key to stop rewind. E PLAY [ ] key If you press this key while the recorder is stopped, playback will begin. If you press this key while holding down the REC [●] key, recording will begin. If you press this key during fast-forward or rewind, normal-speed playback will begin. If you press this key during recording, recording will stop and playback will resume (“punch-out”). F REC [●] key If you hold down this key and press the PLAY [ ] key while the recorder is stopped, recording will begin. If you hold down this key and press the PLAY [ ] key during playback, you will switch from playback to recording (“punch-in”). AW2400 Owner’s Manual 27 Parts of the AW2400 and what they do Rear panel G F 4 1 B E C 2 Introducing the AW2400 Q H I J K L M N 1 [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (XLR) These are XLR-3-31 type balanced input jacks. Nominal input level is from -46 dBu to +4 dBu. Connector wiring is as shown below. O P Male XLR connector 1 (ground) 3 (cold) 2 (hot) B [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (TRS phone) These are TRS phone type balanced input jacks. Nominal input level is from -46 dBu to +4 dBu. Connector wiring is as shown below. 1/4" TRS phone plug C [INSERT I/O] jacks 1–2 These TRS phone jacks allow external signal processing gear to be inserted into the signal received at the [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–2. Nominal input level is 0 dBu, and the pin assignments are as follows: Sleeve (ground) OUT IN 1/4" TRS phone plug Tip (hot) Sleeve (ground) Tip (OUT) To the input jack of the external processor 1/4" TRS phone plug To the INSERT I/O jack of the AW2400 Ring (cold) Sleeve (ground) 1/4" TRS phone plug Tip (IN) To the output jack of the external processor Sleeve (ground) D [STEREO OUT] jacks These are TRS phone type balanced output jacks that output the signals of the stereo bus. Nominal output level is +4 dBu. E [MONITOR OUT] jacks These are TRS phone type balanced output jacks that output the monitor signals of the stereo bus or the solo bus. Nominal output level is +4 dBu. F [OMNI OUT] jacks 1–4 The unbalanced phone jacks output the signals specified in the PATCH screen Output page. Nominal output level is 0 dBu. G [PHONES] jack This is a 1/4" TRS phone output jack for connecting your headphones for monitoring. This jack always outputs the same signal as the [MONITOR OUT] jacks. 28 AW2400 Owner’s Manual H [POWER] switch Switches the power ON and OFF. NOTE • When switching the power of the AW2400 ON or OFF, always follow the “Turning the power on/off” procedures described on page 38. I [AC IN] connector Connect the supplied power cord to this connector. CAUTION • Use only the supplied power cord for this unit. The use of an inappropriate replacement may be a fire and electrical shock hazard. J Ground Screw For maximum safety the ground screw should be properly connected to a confirmed ground point. Proper grounding will also ensure minimum hum, noise, and interference. Parts of the AW2400 and what they do is selected WAV files and song files can be transferred between the AW2400 and the computer. In the “normal” mode the USB connection can be used for MIDI control. The USB interface does not directly handle audio signals. NOTE • The USB interface cannot be directly connected to external hard disks or CD-R/RW drives. CAUTION • Be sure to turn the phantom power switches off when phantom power is not required. • Make sure that no equipment other than phantom-powered microphones is connected to the XLR inputs of the input group for which phantom power is turned on. Applying phantom power to devices that are not phantom-powered can cause damage. Balanced dynamic microphones, however, can usually be connected without adverse effect. • To prevent speakers damage turn power amplifiers (or powered speakers) off when switching phantom power on or off. It’s also a good idea to turn all master faders and output volume controls down to minimum. The noise generated when phantom power is switched on or off can damage system components and may even cause hearing damage if amplified to sufficiently high levels. L [MIDI IN] connector M [MIDI OUT/THRU] connector These connectors allow MIDI messages to be exchanged with external devices. MIDI IN receives MIDI messages. MIDI OUT/THRU can be internally switched to function either as a MIDI OUT (which transmits MIDI messages generated within the AW2400) or MIDI THRU (which retransmits messages that are received at the MIDI IN connector). N FOOT SW jack An optional foot switch (Yamaha FC5) can be connected here to control transport operations such as start/stop, or to perform punch-in/out operations. NOTE • The appropriate operation may not occur if you use a foot switch other than the Yamaha FC5 (or equivalent). O [DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT] connectors This RCA pin jack allows digital-audio connection to external equipment via coaxial cable. The connector supports IEC-60958 consumer-format digital audio. P USB connector This connector allows the unit to be directly connected to a USB-equipped computer via a standard USB cable (compatible with USB 2.0). When the USB Storage mode • The AW2400 can be connected to either a USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 interface, but data transfer will be slower if a USB 1.1 interface is used. • When connecting via USB 2.0 be sure to use a cable specified for USB 2.0 use. • The USB MIDI driver provided on the supplied CD-ROM must be properly installed to allow MIDI message transmission and reception. 2 Introducing the AW2400 K PHANTOM +48V [CH1-4] and [CH5-8] switches Independent phantom power switches are provided for the XLR-type [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack groups 1 through 4 (CH1-4) and 5 through 8 (CH5-8). Turn phantom power to the appropriate jacks ON when using one or more phantom-powered condenser microphones. Caution when using the USB connector You must observe the following points when connecting the AW2400 to your computer via the USB connector. If you fail to observe these points, your computer or the AW2400 may stop operating (“hang up”), causing data to be corrupted or lost. If the computer or the AW2400 stops working, turn the power off and then on again, and restart the computer. • Before connecting the computer via the USB connector, disable the power management mode (suspend/sleep/standby/hibernate) on your computer. • Connect the USB connector to the computer before you power-on the AW2400. • Execute the following before turning the power to the AW2400 on/off, connecting/disconnecting the USB cable, or turning the USB Storage mode on/off. • Close all application programs. • If the USB Storage mode is off, make sure that data is not being transmitted from and to the AW2400. • If the USB Storage mode is engaged, make sure that no read or write operations are in progress. • If the USB Storage mode is engaged, safely remove the AW2400 from the Windows taskbar or drag the AW2400 icons from the Macintosh desktop to the trash after closing all AW2400 windows. • Leave an interval of at least six seconds between powering the AW2400 on and off, or between disconnecting and connecting the USB cable. Q SLOT An optional card can be installed here. Front panel ■ CD-RW drive 1 Eject switch This switch ejects the disc tray. B Eject hole This hole allows you to open the disc tray manually. 321 C Access indicator This indicator will light while the CD inserted in the drive is being accessed. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 29 Basic operation of the AW2400 Basic operation of the AW2400 This section explains basic operation of the AW2400. 2 ● Cursor Introducing the AW2400 Viewing the display The display of the AW2400 shows the following information. B A C D E F G The blinking frame within the display is called the “cursor.” When an object in the screen is enclosed by the cursor, that object is selected for operation. ● Buttons Buttons in the display are used to switch a parameter on/off, to select one of multiple choices, or to execute a specific function. A button that is currently on will be displayed in “inverse” form (black background with white text). A button that is currently off will be displayed in normal form (black text against a white background). H Off On ● Knob/parameter display area I The knob/parameter display area within the display is used to edit the value of the corresponding parameter. Knob parameter display area 1 Screen name This is the name of the currently selected screen. B Selected channel This indicates the mixer channel that is selected for operation. I Tabs When a screen includes a number of pages, corresponding tabs will appear along the bottom of the display. The tabs are used to switch between the various pages related to the current screen. C Song name The name of the currently selected song. D Counter (left side) This indicates the current location within the song. The current-time display format can be selected via the SONG screen Setting page. The choices are standard time (hours : minutes : seconds . milliseconds) or timecode (hours : minutes : seconds : frames . sub-frames) E Counter (right side) This indicates the current location within the song in measures/beats. The measures/beats are calculated according to the tempo and time signature specified in the tempo map for the song. The current tempo and time signature are displayed above this value. F Scene information The number and name (first eight characters) of the currently selected scene. G Sampling Rate/Quantization Bits The sampling rate and quantization bits (bit depth) of the currently selected song. H Main screen The information displayed in this area will depend on the key/knob that was last pressed. The following types of object are displayed in the main screen. 30 AW2400 Owner’s Manual In some cases the tabs also become “additional function buttons” when the [SHIFT] key is pressed. When additional functions are available an mark will appear in the lower left corner of the display. Basic operation of the AW2400 Switching a button on/off When you want to edit an internal setting of the AW2400, or to edit a parameter that cannot be operated by a fader or knob on the top panel, you will need to access the desired screen and page. 1 Press the key or knob for the desired screen. The keys and knobs of various sections listed below have their own screens, and the corresponding screen will be displayed when you press a key or knob. • • • • • • • • All keys in the Work Navigate section All keys in the Quick Navigate section The [METER] key in the Display section The [VIEW]/[DYN]/[AUX]/[EFFET]/[PAN/EQ] keys of the Selected Channel section All knobs of the Selected Channel section All keys of the Scene/Automix/USB section The [REMOTE] key of the Layer section The [SOUND CLIP] key of the Locate section HINT • Press a SELECTED CHANNEL knob after pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL [DYN], [AUX], [EFFECT, or [PAN/EQ] key to access the related display screen. • When you switch screens, the page that was last used in that screen will be displayed. 2 Use the [F1]–[F4] keys to select different Here’s how to switch a button in the screen on/off. 1 Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the cursor to the desired button in the screen. 2 Press the [ENTER] key. The button will be switched on/off. If you move the cursor to a button that executes a specific function and then press the [ENTER] key, that function will be executed. 2 Introducing the AW2400 Accessing a screen/page Editing a value in the display Here’s how to edit the value of a knob or parameter shown in the display. 1 Use the [CURSOR] keys to move the cursor to the desired knob or parameter value. 2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial or press the [INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value. pages within a screen. The [F1]–[F4] keys correspond to the tabs as follows. [F1] key [F2] key [F3] key [F4] key HINT • You can access the pages in sequence by repeatedly pressing the key referred to in step 1, above. Using Additional Function Buttons When an mark appears in the lower left corner of the display the tabs shown along the bottom of the display can be switched to provide additional functions. 1 Press the [SHIFT] key when any screen with an mark in the lower left corner is showing. The additional function buttons will appear in place of the tabs along the bottom of the display while the [SHIFT] key is held. Additional Function Buttons 2 While holding the [SHIFT] key press the [F1]–[F4] button to execute the corresponding function. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 31 Basic operation of the AW2400 Entering text 2 When you create a new song or save a scene memory or library setting, a popup window will appear allowing you to assign a name for the song or setting. Introducing the AW2400 C B H Text palette This displays the characters, numbers, and symbols that can be input in the text input box. To enter a new character at the inverted edit position, move the cursor to the desired character in the text palette and press the [ENTER] key. The available characters and symbols are as follows: A E D F H G I This popup window contains the following items and functions. 1 Text input box This box lets you input characters, numbers, and symbols. The character currently selected for editing is shown inverted (white on black). When you save the data for the first time, the box will contain a default name. The inverted highlight can be moved as required by using the [DATA/JOG] dial. B CANCEL button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, you will return to the previous screen without changing the name. C OK button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the scene/library will be saved or the new song will be created. A–Z a–z SPC(space) , . ! " # & / * + - < > : ; I Number Palette Selects the number to be entered in the text entry box. To enter a number at the inverted edit position, move the cursor to the desired number in the palette and press the [ENTER] key. By repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] key you can sequentially select and enter the characters displayed for each number button. For example, if you move the cursor to “1” in the number palette and then repeatedly press the [ENTER] key you will sequentially select the following number/characters for entry: 1 → P → Q → R → S → p → q → r → s → 1, and then the cycle repeats. ■ Using the [LOCATE] Keys To Enter Characters & Numbers The [LOCATE] keys in the LOCATE/NUMBER section can be used to enter characters and numbers in the same way as the number palette. Repeatedly press the appropriate [LOCATE] key (0–9) to select the required number or character. The numbers and characters selected by each key are as follows: [LOCATE] Key Number Selected Number/Character (Arrows indicate selection sequence) D SHIFT LOCK button Switches between upper or lower case characters, or the type of symbol to be entered at the current edit position in the text entry box. 0 0 1 1→P→Q→R→S→p→q→r→s 2 2→T→U→V→t→u→v 3 3 →W → X →Y → Z → w → x → y → z E 4 4→G→H→I→g→h→i 5 5→J→K→L→j→k→l 6 6→M→N→O→m→n→o 7 7 8 8→A→B→C→a→b→c 9 9→D→E→F→d→e→f / buttons Move the inverted edit position left or right. HINT • The inverted edit position can also be moved left or right by using the [DATA/JOG] dial. F INS button Inserts an under-bar space (“_”) at the inverted edit position. All characters following the insert are moved to the right. Pressing the [INC] key has the same effect as the INS button. NOTE • To add characters to a name that has less than the maximum number of characters, move the cursor to the INS button and press the [ENTER] key to insert “_”, then change the name as required. 32 G DEL button Deletes the character at the inverted edit position. All characters following the delete are moved to the left. Pressing the [DEC] key has the same effect as the DEL button. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Basic operation of the AW2400 Switching Mixing Layers Switching mixing layers affects the functions of [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL] keys 1–12, and faders 1–12, allowing efficient control in a variety of signalrouting configurations. Remote control of external equipment is also possible. Different mixing layers are selected via the keys in the LAYER section. The key corresponding to the currently selected mixing layer will be lit. The mixer section controls correspond to the various mixing layers as follows: LAYER Section Key Fader Section 1 2 [IN 1-8] [IN 9-16] [MASTER] Layer Section Bus Masters 1–2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Input Channels 1–8 Effect Return Channels 1–4 Input Channels 9–16 Effect Return Channels 1–4 No Control AUX Send Masters 1–4 [TRACK 1-12] Track Channels 1–12 [TRACK 13-24] Track Channels 13–24 [REMOTE] Effect Send Masters 1–4 STEREO Introducing the AW2400 2 Stereo Output Channel Control * * Operation depends on settings. Refer to page 204 for details. For example, if the LAYER section [IN 1-8] key is engaged and the [SEL] 1 key is pressed, input channel 1 will be selected. If the LAYER section [TRACK 1-12] is then engaged and the same [SEL] 1 key is pressed, track channel 1 will be selected. HINT • The [STEREO SEL] key, [STEREO ON] key, and [STEREO] fader always control the stereo output channel. These controls are not affected by layer switching. Using the Selected Channel section You can use the knobs and keys of the Selected Channel section to directly operate the mix parameters (EQ, dynamics, pan, etc.) of the currently selected channel. 1 Use the [SEL] keys or [STEREO SEL] key to select the channel that you want to operate. The currently selected channel is indicated in the upper left of the screen. The channels correspond to each key as follows. • [SEL] keys 1–12............ Input channels 1–16, Track channels 1–24, Effect Return channels 1–4 Currently selected channel. • [STEREO SEL] key....... Stereo output channel HINT • The channels to be selected by [SEL] keys 1–12 are switched via the LAYER section. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 33 Basic operation of the AW2400 2 Press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [DYN], [AUX], [EFFECT], or [PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator light, according to the parameters you want to control. 2 With the default settings the screen corresponding to the pressed key will appear automatically. The display will not change if the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF (→ p. 211). Introducing the AW2400 The parameters that can be controlled by the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs are as follows: Selected Key (Lit) Knob 3 Knob 4 [DYN] Multiple compressor parameters, or the last parameter Compressor threshold. operated, depending on the control status. Knob 1 Knob 2 Compressor ratio. Compressor gain. [AUX] Send level from channel to AUX 1. Send level from channel to AUX 2. Send level from channel to AUX 3. Send level from channel to AUX 4. [EFFECT] Send level from channel to EFFECT 1. Send level from channel to EFFECT 2. Send level from channel to EFFECT 3. Send level from channel to EFFECT 4. [PAN/EQ] Pan Equalizer Q. Equalizer frequency. Equalizer gain. HINT • After selecting a channel, press the SELECTED CHANNEL [VIEW] key to call the CH VIEW screen where you can edit the channel signal routing and all of the channel parameters. Refer to page 105 for details on the CH VIEW screen. NOTE • The parameter controlled by SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 when the [DYN] key is engaged depends on the current operating status (→ p. 153). • If you operate SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 immediately after recalling a setup from the compressor preset library, multiple compressor parameters will be adjusted simultaneously, changing the overall effect of the compressor (the type of change depends on the recalled preset library setup). • When individual compressor parameters for a channel have been adjusted via the DYNAMICS screen, the last parameter adjusted is assigned to SELECTED CHANNEL knob 1 (the last-adjusted parameter is individually retained for each channel). 3 Rotate SELECTED CHANNEL knobs 1–4 to adjust the corresponding parameters as required. If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF, a popup window showing the corresponding parameter name and the value will appear while the knob is being operated. 34 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Basic operation of the AW2400 4 If you want more precise editing control over the parameter selected in step 2, above, press the corresponding SELECTED CHANNEL knob (1–4) to call up the screen containing the related parameters. Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4 DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen DYNAMICS Screen [AUX] AUX1 Screen AUX2 Screen AUX3 Screen AUX4 Screen [EFFECT] EFFECT1 Screen EFFECT2 Screen EFFECT3 Screen EFFECT4 Screen [PAN/EQ] PAN/EQ Screen PAN/EQ Screen PAN/EQ Screen PAN/EQ Screen NOTE • The display will not change if the SELECTED CHANNEL knob is simply rotated. To switch screens the knobs must be pressed. • Other gate functions can be accessed via the DYNAMICS screen, but only pages and parameters related to compressor operation can be accessed via the SELECTED CHANNEL knobs. 2 Introducing the AW2400 Selected Key (Lit) [DYN] 5 Move the cursor in the screen to the desired parameter, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [ENTER] key to operate the parameter. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 35 2 Introducing the AW2400 36 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 3 Connection and Setup Connection The following connection diagram shows a typical AW2400 setup. Connect your microphones, instruments, and other external gear as shown in the diagram. DAW system 3 Connection and Setup This chapter will describe the AW2400 setup process from connection to instruments and other external equipment up to getting sound from a monitor system. Monitor system Audio interface [DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT] connectors [MONITOR OUT] jacks [USB] connector HDR [PHONES] jack Headphones [OMNI OUT] jacks I/O card I/O SLOT Effect processor [INSERT I/O] jacks [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks Effect processor Rhythm machine MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Microphones Synthesizer AW2400 Owner’s Manual 37 Turning the power on/off Turning the power on/off Follow the procedure outlined below when turning the AW2400 power ON and OFF. Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the internal hard disk or your external monitor system. 3 ■ Turning the power on Connection and Setup In a system that includes the AW2400, turn the power to each device on in the following order. 1 Call the SONG screen Song List page by pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key located in the upper left of the top panel as many times as necessary. 1 External devices such as audio sources and effect processors connected to the input/output jacks of the AW2400 B The AW2400 itself C The monitor system connected to the AW2400’s output jacks CAUTION • Before you turn on the power, make sure that the power cord is securely connected to the AW2400 and to the AC outlet. If the power is disconnected while the AW2400 is in use, the AW2400 or it’s internal hard disk may be damaged. When you turn on the AW2400 power a startup screen will appear briefly, and then the following screen will appear. SHUTDOWN button 2 Using the CURSOR keys located in the upper right of the top panel, move the cursor (the blinking area in the screen) to the SHUTDOWN button. 3 Press the [ENTER] key located in the middle right of the top panel. A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song. ■ Turning the power off (shut down) In a system that includes the AW2400, turn the power to each device off in the following order. 1 The monitor system connected to the AW2400’s output jacks B The AW2400 itself C External devices such as audio sources and effect processors connected to the input/output jacks of the AW2400 When turning the AW2400 power off, be sure to perform the following “shut-down” procedure. 4 Move the cursor to the YES button if you want to save the current song, or to the NO button if you do not want to save it. Then press the [ENTER] key. 5 When the “Now safe to turn off...” message appears, turn off the [POWER] switch located on the rear panel. IMPORTANT • If you turn off the AW2400 power without performing the above shutdown procedure, not only will any unsaved changes be lost, but you also risk damaging the data on the hard disk, and damaging or drastically shortening the lifespan of the hard disk itself as well as the internal CDRW drive. Please use caution. 38 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Adjusting the input level Adjusting the input level Here’s the basic procedure for setting up an input channel to which a microphone or instrument is connected via [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack 1–8, and adjusting the input level while monitoring the signal via the stereo bus. LINE INPUT] jack to which your instrument/ mic is connected. Also lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position. 2 Connect a microphone or instrument to the These connectors will also accept unbalanced output from instruments such as synthesizers or rhythm machines via standard mono 1/4" phone ↔ 1/4" phone jack cables. 1/4" phone ↔ phone cable Synthesizer/ rhythm machine appropriate [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack. [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 can be used with the following sources. 3 Connection and Setup 1 Turn down the [GAIN] knob for the [MIC/ ● [MIC/LINE INPUT (XLR)] jacks 1–8 These are XLR-type balanced input jacks. Use a male XLR ↔ female XLR cable to connect your microphone, direct box, or a guitar/bass preamp that has a balanced output jack. Balanced cable (male XLR ↔ female XLR) [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (TRS phone) NOTE Mic Preamp or effect processor with balanced output Direct box [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (XLR) Electric guitar/bass HINT • When using condenser microphones or direct boxes that require phantom power, turn on the rear-panel [CH1-4] switch which supplies phantom power to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1– 4, and/or the [CH5-8] switch which supplies phantom power to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 5–8 as required. ● [MIC/LINE INPUT (TRS phone)] jacks 1–8 • The XLR and TRS phone jacks for the same channel cannot be used simultaneously. Connecting sources to both inputs on the same channel at the same time can result in interference and a severely degraded input signal. 3 While playing the connected instrument or supplying appropriate sound to the connected microphone, rotate the corresponding [GAIN] knob clockwise to adjust the input sensitivity so that the [PEAK] indicator lights only occasionally. HINT • The [GAIN] knobs adjust the gain (sensitivity) of the analog input stage. In order to make recordings with the greatest dynamic range and minimum noise, set the [GAIN] knob as high as possible without causing clipping. These are TRS-type balanced input jacks. Use a 1/4" TRS phone ↔ female XLR cable to connect your microphone, direct box, or a guitar/bass preamp that has a balanced output jack. 1/4" TRS phone ↔ female XLR cable Mic Preamp or effect processor with balanced output Direct box [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 (TRS phone) Electric guitar/bass AW2400 Owner’s Manual 39 Adjusting the input level 4 Call the METER screen Input/RTN page by either pressing the Display section [METER] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [METER] key. 3 The input channel input levels are displayed at the top of this screen. Input channel input level display Connection and Setup 5 Move the cursor to the POST FADER button in the lower area of the screen and press the [ENTER] key. When the POST FADER button is turned on the signal levels immediately following the fader are displayed on the meters. 6 Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] so that it’s indicator lights to switch to the IN 1-8 mixing layer. You can now use [ON] keys 1–8, [SEL] keys 1–8, and faders 1–8 to operate input channels 1–8. HINT • With the initial default settings the signals from [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 are assigned to the corresponding input channels 1–8. You can change these settings as required. Refer to “Direct recording and Mixed recording” on page 49 for details. 7 Make sure that the [ON] key for the channel receiving the microphone or instrument signal is engaged and its indicator is lit, then raise the channel fader to the 0dB position. If you play the instrument or play into the microphone you should see the level meter on the display respond accordingly, but you won’t hear any output from your monitor system yet because the [STEREO] fader is still all the way down. 40 AW2400 Owner’s Manual HINT • If the level meter goes into the “OVER” region, check that the corresponding input fader is set to 0dB and reduce the level of the [GAIN] knob. 8 While playing the connected instrument, raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB position. With the initial default settings the input channels are patched to the AW2400’s stereo bus. Signals sent to the stereo bus are output via the [STEREO OUT], [MONITOR OUT], and [OMNI OUT] jacks after being adjusted by the [STEREO] fader. When the [STEREO] fader is raised the level of the stereo bus signal will be displayed on the Display section stereo meter. You can now rotate the [MONITOR] or [PHONES] knob clockwise to hear sound from your monitor system or headphones. NOTE • If the stereo meter does not respond even though the input channel level meter is showing the presence of a signal when the [STEREO] fader is raised, check that the input channel is patched to the stereo bus (→ p. 105). That completes the initial setup and level adjustment procedure required to begin recording on the AW2400. Levels will have to be readjusted whenever you change the microphone or instrument input connections or change the output level of an instrument (level changes will often occur when you change synth patches). By using the [GAIN] knob to raise the level as far as possible without allowing distortion to occur, you can ensure that the input signal is converted into digital form with the highest possible quality before it is input to the mixer section. Chapter 4 Listening to the demo song When the AW2400 is shipped from the factory, its hard disk contains a demo song. This chapter explains how to load and play back the demo song. Here’s how to load the demo song from the hard disk. 1 Press the Work Navigate section [SONG] key. The SONG screen will appear, where you can save or load songs. 3 Move the cursor to the song list, and then use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the song “The_Only_One.” 2 Call the Song List page by either pressing the [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. Listening to the demo song 4 Loading the demo song In this page, you can select a song on the hard disk, and load or delete it. B 4 Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window like the following will appear. This window asks you whether you want to save the current song. A 1 Song list This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard disk. The line enclosed by the dotted frame in the center of the list indicates the song that is selected for operations. The highlighted line indicates the song that is currently loaded into the AW2400. (This is called the “current song.”) NOTE • Each row of the list will display the song name, data size, bit depth (16/24 bit), and sampling rate (44.1/48 kHz). B LOAD button 5 Move the cursor to either YES (save the current song) or NO (don’t save the current song), and press the [ENTER] key. The song data will be loaded, and “The_Only_One” will become the current song. NOTE • If you select NO, any changes that you made to the current song since you last saved it will be lost. Loads the selected song. “You’re the Only One” © Timothy Akers AW2400 Owner’s Manual 41 Playing the demo song Playing the demo song Here’s how to play back the demo song you loaded, and adjust the monitor level. 1 Make sure that the AW2400’s [MONITOR] knob, [PHONES] knob, and the volume of your monitor system are turned down. Press the PLAY [ 4 2 ] key. Listening to the demo song The demo song will begin playing. 3 To adjust the monitor level appropriately, use the AW2400’s [MONITOR] knob, [PHONES] knob and the volume control of your monitor system. HINT • The demo song uses the Scene function to switch the settings of the mixer. This means that playback will occur using the pre-specified balance — you do not need to operate the faders. 4 To stop the song, press the STOP [■] key. 42 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 5 Recording to a sound clip Recording a sound clip The post-fader signal of the stereo output channel can be recorded directly to a sound clip. For playback, the signal will be sent to the stereo output channel immediately before the stereo fader (EQ and dynamics cannot be applied to sound clip playback). 5 Recording to a sound clip The AW2400 has a Sound Clip function that lets you record and play back independently of the recorder section. You can use a sound clip to quickly record and play back your performances on an audio source connected to the AW2400. This is an ideal way to capture ideas for a song or arrangement, or to record a simple accompaniment for practicing a part. This chapter explains how sound clips can be recorded using an instrument or microphone connected to an input jack. ● Signal flow when using a sound clip Metronome [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks Sound clip Stereo output channel Input channels Stereo bus Mixer section AW2400 Owner’s Manual 43 Recording a sound clip 1 Connect the required instrument and/or microphone input sources and set up the levels as described in “Connection and Setup” on page 37. 2 Press the Locate section [SOUND CLIP] key. The SOUND CLIP screen will appear, where you can record and play sound clips. AB F E G 5 3 To use the metronome, move the cursor to the metronome button and press the [ENTER] key. 4 To change the tempo of the metronome, move the cursor to the tempo value and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial. NOTE • The time signature of the metronome is determined by the tempo map setting that was active prior to accessing the SOUND CLIP screen. Please be aware that the setting cannot be edited from this screen. (For details on tempo map settings → p. 62) Recording to a sound clip 5 Hold down the Transport section REC [●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key. C The metronome will start and the counter display will advance. The SOUND CLIP screen counter always starts from 0 and indicates the current time in minutes/ seconds/milliseconds. This counter is separate from the normal song counter. D 6 Play the part to be recorded in time with the metronome. HINT 1 Tempo Sets the tempo of the metronome used when recording sound clips. B Time signature Shows the time signature of the metronome. C Metronome button Switches the metronome on/off. D Metronome knob Adjusts the volume of the metronome. The value above the knob shows the current setting in dB. • The metronome sound will not be recorded. If necessary, you can move the cursor to the metronome knob and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the volume of the metronome sound. • The knobs/keys of the selected channel are active even while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing. If necessary, you can apply EQ and dynamics processing to the signal being recorded. 7 Press the STOP [■] key to stop recording. and symbols on the display indicate the start and end point. E START button Specifies the current location as the start point of the sound clip (the location at which playback will begin). The current location is shown in minutes/seconds/milliseconds to the left. F END button Specifies the current location as the end point of the sound clip (the location at which playback will end). The current location is shown in minutes/seconds/milliseconds to the left. • With the default AW2400 settings a maximum of 30 seconds can be recorded to a sound clip. If you continue recording for longer than 30 seconds, the last 30 seconds recorded will be retained (the counter display during recording will continue to advance). G CLIP button • You can specify up to 180 seconds as the maximum length that can be recorded in a sound clip. You are free to make this setting before creating a new song, but this cannot be changed once the song has been created. (→ p. 47) Turn this button on to enable the START button (E) and END button (F) settings. NOTE • The Recorder section cannot be used for recording and playback while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing. 44 HINT AW2400 Owner’s Manual Playing a sound clip Playing a sound clip ] key to hear the recorded sound clip. The sound clip will play repeatedly from the start point to the end point. To stop playback press the STOP [■] key. If you record again, the previous data will be overwritten. The Transport section keys will have the following functions while the SOUND CLIP screen is showing. Key RTZ [ REW [ ] key ] key Function Returns to the location at which you began recording. If the CLIP button is on, this returns to the Start point. Rewinds the current location toward the beginning. You will stop when you reach the location at which you began recording or the Start point. ] key Fast-forwards the current location. You will stop when you reach the location at which you stopped recording or the End point. STOP [■] key Stops playback, recording, rewind, or fastforward. PLAY [ Starts playback. Pressing this key during playback does nothing. FF [ ] key REC [●] key If you hold down this key while stopped and press the PLAY [ ] key, recording will begin. Pressing this key during playback does nothing. HINT • You will not hear the metronome while a sound clip is playing, but you can still monitor the signals of input channels 1–16. 2 The playback region of a sound clip can be changed by specifying new Start and End points as described below. ● Specifying the Start point Stop at the location that you want to specify as the Start point, move the cursor to the START button, and press the [ENTER] key. The START button will be engaged and the current location will be registered as the Start point. 3 Stop playback, move the cursor to the CLIP button, and press the [ENTER] key. The CLIP button will be engaged, and the specified Start point and End point will be enabled. NOTE • The START button, END button, and CLIP button are disabled while the sound clip is playing. 5 HINT • The data region between the specified Start and End points can be copied to an audio track of the Recorder section by using the EDIT screen COPY command (→ p. 139). 4 To exit the SOUND CLIP screen, press the Work Navigate section (except for [PATCH] key) or Quick Navigate section keys, [AUTOMIX] key, [USB] key, [REMOTE] key, or [SOUND CLIP] key. A popup window will ask you for confirmation. Move the cursor to the OK button to exit the SOUND CLIP screen, or to the CANCEL button to cancel, then press the [ENTER] key. You can return to the SOUND CLIP screen by pressing the [SOUND CLIP] key even after having exited the screen, then play back the previously recorded content or record a new performance. Recording to a sound clip 1 Press the PLAY [ NOTE • When you record a new sound clip, the previous recorded sound clip will be erased. Please be aware that the Undo function cannot be used to recover a deleted sound clip. Even if you save the song immediately prior to recording a new sound clip, the previous sound clip will not be restored if you recall the song data. HINT • The recorded contents of the sound clip are stored individually for each song. ● Specifying the End point Stop at the location that you want to specify as the End point, move the cursor to the END button, and press the [ENTER] key. The END button will be engaged and the current location will be registered as the End point. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 45 5 Recording to a sound clip AW2400 Owner’s Manual 46 Chapter 6 Track recording This chapter explains how to record the audio signal from an instrument or microphone connected to the AW2400 to the tracks of a song. Creating a new song HINT • When you start up the AW2400 for the first time, an empty song will be loaded automatically. If you use this automatically-loaded song, the procedure described here is not necessary. 1 Call the SONG screen Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. 3 Move the cursor to YES (to save the current song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the current song) and press the [ENTER] key. 6 Track recording Before you can begin recording on the AW2400 you need to create a new song. A popup window containing the various settings for the new song will appear. The currently selected song in the Song List will be highlighted (inverted). NEW button The following settings can be made via this popup window. • Fs ............................... The sample rate of the new song can be set to either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. • Recbit ........................ The bit depth of the new song can be set to either 16 or 24 bits. 2 Move the cursor to the NEW button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song. • Sound Clip Time ....... The sound clip record time can be set to between 30– 180 seconds. NOTE • Songs recorded with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz cannot be written to an audio CD. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 47 Creating a new song 4 When each parameter has been set as required, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Next, a popup window will appear allowing you to specify settings that will be carried over from the current song. 6 Enter a name for the song (for details on name entry refer to page 32). NOTE • A new song cannot be given the same name as an existing song. • The song name can also be edited later (→ p. 169). 7 To create the new song, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. 6 The following items are available: Track recording • SCENE button............Scene memories • TEMPO button ...........Tempo map • LIBRARY button ........EQ, dynamics, effects, and channel libraries For example, if you have saved effect settings in a library for the current song and would like to use these settings for the new song as well, you would turn on the LIBRARY button. 5 Select the buttons of the items you want to carry over from the current song, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to enter a name for the song. 48 AW2400 Owner’s Manual A new song will be created, and you will return to the SONG screen Song List page. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button (instead of the OK button) and press the [ENTER] key, you will return to the SONG screen Song List page without creating a new song. Direct recording and Mixed recording Direct recording and Mixed recording Instruments and/or microphones connected to the AW2400 can be recorded to tracks in one of the following two ways. ■ Direct recording With this method only one input channel is assigned to each recorder track. Although direct recording requires the same number of tracks as the number of input channels you use, it has the advantage that you will be free to adjust the volume, pan (stereo position), and EQ of each individual instrument after it has been recorded. Track recording 6 [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks Input channels Stereo output channel Mixer section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Recorder section AW2400 Owner’s Manual 49 Direct recording and Mixed recording ■ Mixed recording With this method, you can send multiple input channels to Bus 1 or Bus 2, and assign the mixed signal to one through four tracks. Mixed recording requires fewer tracks, but you will need to decide on the final volume, pan, and tone of each instrument at the time of recording (you will not be able to adjust these parameters independently after recording.) 6 Track recording [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks Stereo output channel Input channels Track 1 Track 2 Bus 1 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Bus 2 Recorder section NOTE • The way in which you assign the input signals to tracks will depend on the method you choose. 50 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Mixer section Direct recording and Mixed recording Assigning input signals to tracks (Direct recording) This section describes the patching procedure to assign instruments and/or microphones connected to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 to independent tracks for direct recording. 4 Check that “AD1–8” appears in the input select field on the left side of the page. Input channels 1–8 or 9–16 can be selected as the input source via the input select field. When “AD1–8” is showing the AW2400’s AD inputs ([MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8) are selected as the input source. If a different input source is selected move the cursor to the input select field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select “AD1–8”. HINT 1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position. 2 Referring to “Connection and Setup” on page 37, connect your instruments and/or microphones and set up the input levels. 5 Press the [INPUT SEL] key for the input channel to which your instrument/microphone is connected. The corresponding [INPUT SEL] key will light red, and the remaining [INPUT SEL] keys will go dark. If, for example, you have selected input channel 1 as your record source the top panel keys will appear as follows. 3 Call the RECORD screen Direct page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. Input channel signals can be directly patched to the recorder’s tracks via the RECORD screen Direct page. When this page is called the [INPUT SEL] keys in the upper area of the top panel will flash red. Input channels Input select 6 Track recording • See page 99 for more details on patching for direct recording. lit The display will appear as shown here. HINT • You can also select an input channel by moving the cursor to the symbol of the desired input channel and pressing the [ENTER] key. NOTE • To select the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector as the record source you will need to assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to an adjacent pair of odd- and even-numbered tracks via the DIGITAL IN field (1.2–15.16). See page 100 for details. 6 Press the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key so that its indicator lights. Tracks This selects the TRACK 1-12 mixing layer so you can use [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL] keys 1–12, and faders 1– 12 to operate track channels 1–12. At this point faders 1–12 will move to the current level settings for track channels 1–12. 7 Press the [SEL] key of the track channel on which you want to record. The selected input channel and track will be connected internally. At this time, only the selected [INPUT SEL] key and [SEL] key will be flashing red. The flashing [SEL] key indicates that the corresponding track is in record-ready mode. If, for example, you have patched input channel 1 to track 1 the top panel keys will appear as follows. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 51 Direct recording and Mixed recording 10 Check that the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key is lit, then raise the fader of the track selected as the record destination to an appropriate monitor level. flash Track channels (Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit) 6 The display will appear as shown here. Track recording HINT • Input channels that are patched to tracks will be automatically disconnected from the stereo bus and their signal will not be output via the [STEREO OUT] or [MONITOR OUT] jacks (the signals being recorded can be monitored via the track channel being recorded). • When an input is disconnected from a track, that input is automatically re-patched to the stereo bus. • You can also select a track by moving the cursor to the symbol of the desired track and pressing the [ENTER] key. NOTE • The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as (mute), but you can still record to muted tracks. • Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (→ p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back. Normally when recording you don’t monitor the input channel signal before it is recorded, but rather via the track channel after it has passed through the recorder. This lets you monitor the signal that is actually being recorded as well as adjust the volume and tone of the monitor signal without affecting the signal that is being recorded. ● To Adjust Volume/Balance Set the fader of the corresponding track channel as required. ● To Adjust Pan After pressing the [SEL] key of the corresponding channel press the Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Selected Channel knob 1 can now be used to adjust panning for the channel currently selected via the [SEL] keys. For more details refer to “Pan Control” on page 147. NOTE • In the direct-record mode adjusting the pan of the record source input channel has no effect. 11 To check the level of a signal being applied to a record-ready track press the [METER] key and then the [F2] key. This calls the METER screen Track page. In this page you can monitor the levels of the signals at the inputs of track channels 1–24, sent from the input channels to the recorder tracks. 8 If you want to record more than one instrument or microphone simultaneously, assign other input channels to tracks in the same way. HINT • To cancel a patched connection press the [INPUT SEL] key so that it lights red, then press the [SEL] key of the track that is selected as the record destination. To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the [ENTER] key. 9 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB position. At this point the track channel faders are set to – ∞, so no sound will be heard from the monitor system. 52 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 12 Move the cursor to the PRE EQ button and press the [ENTER] key. The input levels of the track channels corresponding to the record-ready tracks will be displayed. If any of the signals reach the “OVER” level the input level setting will need to be reduced. Refer to “Connection and Setup” on page 37 and readjust the input levels. Direct recording and Mixed recording ● Monitor signal flow during recording Recorder section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 from the input channels Track 4 Track 5 Stereo output channel Track channels Track recording 6 Stereo bus Mixer section This completes the patch setup for direct recording. NOTE • If you switch the RECORD display page after doing the patch setup all your patch settings will be undone and lost (a confirmation popup window will appear). Remember to stay on the same RECORD page until recording is finished. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 53 Direct recording and Mixed recording Assigning input signals to tracks (Mixed recording) Use the following procedure to set up the patching so you can mix and record the signals from multiple instruments/ mics connected to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 to one or more tracks. HINT • Refer to page 102 for more details on patching for mixed recording. 6 1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position. Track recording 2 Referring to “Connection and Setup” on page 37, connect your instruments and/or microphones and set up the input levels. 3 Call the RECORD screen Mixed page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. Via the RECORD screen Mixed page you can patch multiple input channels to either of the AW2400’s stereo buses (Bus1 and Bus2), allowing mixed signals to be assigned to up to four tracks. Input channels 5 Press the [INPUT SEL] key for the input channel to which your instrument/microphone is connected. The currently selected [INPUT SEL] key will light orange, and that input channel will be selected for operation. The symbol for the corresponding input channel will be highlighted in the screen, and a line will appear indicating that this channel is connected to the bus. 6 Repeatedly press the same [INPUT SEL] key to select the bus to which you want to send the signal from that input channel. Each time you press the [INPUT SEL] key the screen will change as follows. E Bus 2 L/R A Off On B Bus 1 L/R On F Bus 2 L On C Bus 1 L On G Bus 2 R On Input select D Bus 1 R To A On HINT • Input channels that are patched to Bus1 or Bus2 will be automatically disconnected from the stereo bus and their signal will not be output via the [STEREO OUT] or [MONITOR OUT] jacks (the signals being recorded can be monitored via the track channel being recorded). Tracks 4 Check that “AD1–8” appears in the input select field on the left side of the page. If a different input source is selected move the cursor to the input select field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select “AD1–8”. • When an input is disconnected from Bus1 or Bus2, that input is automatically re-patched to the stereo bus. • You can also switch to Bus1/Bus2 by moving the cursor to the symbol of the desired input channel and pressing the [ENTER] key. 7 Use the same procedure to specify other input channels as recording sources as required. NOTE • To select the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector as the record source you will need to assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to an adjacent pair of odd- and even-numbered tracks via the DIGITAL IN field (1.2–15.16). See page 102 for details. 54 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Direct recording and Mixed recording so that its indicator lights. This selects the TRACK 1-12 mixing layer so you can use [ON] keys 1–12, [SEL] keys 1–12, and faders 1– 12 to operate track channels 1–12. At this point check that all faders are set to their minimum – ∞ positions. NOTE • The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as (mute), but you can still record to muted tracks. • Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (→ p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back. 9 Press the [SEL] key(s) for the record-desti- 10 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB posi- You can select up to four tracks for recording. Bus1 L and Bus2 L can be assigned to odd-numbered tracks, while Bus1 R and Bus2 R can be assigned to evennumbered tracks. The [SEL] keys of track channels to which buses have been assigned will flash red and the record-ready mode will be engaged. For example, the display will change as shown when the track channel 1 [SEL] key is pressed repeatedly. 11 Check that the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] nation track(s). tion. key is lit, then raise the fader of the track selected as the record destination to an appropriate monitor level. The signal sent to the track via Bus1/Bus2 will be output via the [STEREO OUT] and [MONITOR OUT] jacks. 12 To set the level and pan for input channels A Connected to Bus1 L 1–8 press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so that its indicator lights. If multiple input channels are patched to the same bus the individual level and pan settings for each input cannot be changed after recording. For this reason it is necessary to set up the individual channel levels and pan applied to Bus1/Bus2 as required before recording. B Connected to Bus2 L 6 Track recording 8 Press the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key ● To Adjust Volume/Balance Set the input channel 1–8 faders as required. ● To Adjust Pan After pressing the [SEL] key of the corresponding input channel press the Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Selected Channel knob 1 can now be used to adjust panning for the channel currently selected via the [SEL] keys. For more details refer to “Pan Control” on page 147. C No Connection NOTE • When the outputs from multiple channels are mixed and recorded it may be necessary to adjust the input channel faders to prevent the combined signal level from getting too high. To A HINT • This operation can also be carried out by moving the cursor to the mark of the record track and repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] key. • We recommend that you not use the [GAIN] knob to adjust the volume balance of the input channels. This will degrade the S/N ratio, and may cause the sound to distort. • To hear the input channel pan settings via the monitor system the track channels corresponding to the two record-destination tracks should be assigned as a pair. • When paired tracks (→ p. 58) are selected as the record destination the pan settings of the odd- and even-numbered tracks will automatically be set to left and right, respectively, allowing the pair to be used as a stereo track. • When a single track is selected as the record destination the pan of the corresponding track channel will automatically be set to center. • To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the [ENTER] key. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 55 Direct recording and Mixed recording • Recording on a track 13 To monitor the signal levels sent from Bus1/Bus2 to the record-ready tracks press the [METER] key and then the [F3] key. This calls the METER screen Master page, allowing visual monitoring of the output levels from Bus1 and Bus2. Bus1 and Bus2 output level. 14 Move the cursor to the POST FADER button and press the [ENTER] key. The post-fader signal levels will be displayed. If the signal levels reach “OVER” on the meters press the Layer section [MASTER] key so that it lights to select the MASTER mixing layer, and use fader 1 (Bus1) and fader 2 (Bus2) to adjust the master levels for Bus1 and Bus2 as required. NOTE • If you switch the RECORD display page after doing the patch setup all your patch settings will be undone and lost (a confirmation popup window will appear). Remember to stay on the same RECORD page until recording is finished. 6 Track recording Recording on a track Now that the necessary preparations have been completed, let’s record on a track. 1 Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. This page can be used to confirm which tracks do and do not contain recorded data. You can also make any required metronome settings via this page (refer to page 62 for metronome instructions). 2 Press the Transport section RTZ [ ] key to return to the beginning of the song. 3 Hold down the Transport section REC [●] key and press the PLAY [ recording. ] key to start Recording will begin on the track set up as the record destination. In the track view within the screen, the vertical line that indicates the current location will advance towards the right. Track view NOTE • Recording will not begin if no track is in the record-ready mode. 4 To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key. The recorded audio data will appear in bar-graph form in the track view. The data entry/control section [UNDO/REDO] key will light. This indicates that you can press the [UNDO/REDO] key to execute the Undo function. 5 To hear the recording from the beginning, press the RTZ [ ] key to return the counter display to zero and press the PLAY [ ] key. 56 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Recording on a track • Saving the current song 6 If you want to redo the recording, press the [UNDO/REDO] key. The [UNDO/REDO] key will go out, and you will return to the state prior to recording. Repeat steps 2–5. 7 If you are satisfied with the recorded con- tent, save the song. (For details on saving, refer to “Saving the current song”.) Please be aware that the recorded content will be lost if you turn off the AW2400 power before saving the song. 8 When you finish recording, press the Quick Navigate Section [RECORD] key once again, move the cursor to the SAFE button, and press the [ENTER] key. When the confirmation popup window appears so move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The input-to-track assignments will be cancelled. The REC [●] key will be disabled to prevent accidental recording. Saving the current song This section explains how to save the current song to the hard disk. If you accidentally turn off the AW2400 power without saving the song, all recordings or operations that you performed since last saving the song will be lost. You should make a habit of saving the song at appropriate breaks in your work. 1 Call the SONG screen Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. SAVE button Track recording 6 3 To save the song, move the cursor to the YES button and press the [ENTER] key. If you move the cursor to the NO button (instead of the YES button) and press the [ENTER] key, the Save operation will be cancelled. NOTE • The song save operation always saves the current song, regardless of the song that is selected in the list. • You cannot save a song that is protected. If, for example, you have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song, you must disable the protect setting and then save the song. (For details on song protection, refer to page 172) HINT • A number of other operations are available in the SONG screen List page. Refer to “Managing Your Songs” on page 167 for details. • In the following situations a popup window will ask whether you want to save the current song: when you load an existing song from the hard disk, when you create a new song, or when you shut-down the AW2400. 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to save the current song. • We recommend that you frequently save the song you are working on or enable the Auto Save function (→ p. 211) as a safeguard against accidents such as the AW2400’s power cable being accidentally disconnected. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 57 Pairing channels Pairing channels Adjacent odd- and even-numbered input channels (1/2–15/16), track channels (1/2–23/24), and AUX send master channels (1/2 and 3/4) can be set as pairs. When channels are paired most of their parameters are linked for optimum efficiency and easy when handling stereo signals. Channels can be set as pairs either via the MONITOR screen or by using the panel [INPUT SEL] or [SEL] keys. NOTE • When channels are paired always operate only the fader of one channel. Attempting to operate both faders at once can result in damage to the faders’ motor drive system. 6 2 Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button of a Track recording ■ Pairing Channels via the MONITOR Screen channel you want to assign as a stereo pair and press the [ENTER] key. 1 Call the MONITOR screen Pair page by A pairing confirmation popup window will appear. either pressing the Quick Navigate section [MONITOR] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [MONITOR] key. This page contains the following items. D E A B C The popup window contains the following items. • INPUT (TRACK, AUX OUT) x → y (x= odd number, y= even number) .................. Copy the settings of channel x to y, and pair them. • INPUT (TRACK, AUX OUT) y →x (x= odd number, y= even number) .................. Copy the settings of channel y to x, and pair them. • RESET BOTH ....... Initialize both channels, and pair them. • CANCEL ............... Cancel pairing. 1 INPUT field Pairs or disengages pairing for input channels 1–16. B TRACK field Pairs or disengages pairing for track channels 1–24. C AUX OUT field Pairs or disengages pairing for AUX send channels 1– 4. D MONOx2 buttons 3 Move the cursor to the appropriate button in the popup window and press the [ENTER] key. The MONOx2 button will change to a STEREO button. The following parameters are linked for paired channels. ● Input Channels Indicate that the adjacent channels are functioning as independent mono channels. All mix parameters other than the [GAIN] knob and phase/pan settings. E STEREO buttons Indicate that the two channels are functioning as a stereo pair. ● Track Channels All mix parameters other than the phase/pan settings. ● AUX Send Master Channels All mix parameters. 58 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Pairing channels 4 To disengage a pair, move the cursor to the corresponding STEREO button and press the [ENTER] key. ■ Channel Pairing Using the Panel Keys A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to disengage the pair. 1 Use the Layer section keys to select the mix layer containing the channels you want to pair. 2 While holding the [SEL] key of one channel that you want to pair, press the [SEL] key of the adjacent channel. 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to confirm and disengage the pair. The STEREO button will change to a MONOx2 button. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button rather than the OK button and press the [ENTER] key the disengage-pair operation will be aborted and the channels will remain paired. A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the pairing. The popup window contains the same items as the MONITOR screen used for channel pairing. Track recording 6 HINT • The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to pair input channels 1–8. HINT • All channel pairs can be disengaged at once by pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key. • For paired channels set the pan control to either full left or right to achieve nominal level (i.e. the same level before and after the pan control). For channels that are not paired nominal level is achieved with the pan control set to center. 3 Move the cursor to the appropriate button in the popup window and press the [ENTER] key. The channels specified via the [SEL] keys will be paired. 4 To disengage pairing, press the [SEL] key of one of the paired channels while holding the [SEL] key of the other channel. A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to disengage the pair. 5 To disengage the pair, press the OK button. If you decide not to disengage the pair, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 59 Applying EQ To an Input Signal Applying EQ To an Input Signal The AW2400 provides versatile 4-band equalizers on every channel that can be directly operated via the Selected Channel section keys and knobs. This section describes the procedure for applying EQ to input channels 1–8. 1 Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so that its indicator lights, the press the [SEL] key for the channel to which EQ is to be applied. HINT 6 • The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to select an input channel for equalization. Track recording 2 Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/ EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Press Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4 and the PAN/EQ screen will appear. 3 Press the Display section [F3] key to call the EQ/Att. page. The EQ settings are available via this page. 4 To turn the EQ on, move the cursor to the EQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER] key. 5 Press the Selected Channel section [LOW], [LO-MID], [HI-MID] or [HIGH] key to select the EQ band to be adjusted. 6 Use Selected Channel section knobs 2–4 to adjust the EQ as required. When the [PAN/EQ] key is lit, Selected Channel knobs 2–4 perform the following functions: knob 2 adjusts the Q, knob 3 adjusts the center frequency, and knob 4 adjusts the gain of the selected band. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to set all bands as required. HINT EQ ON/OFF button • In addition to the ability for fine EQ control as described above, the supplied EQ library contains preset EQ setups for a variety of instruments that can be recalled and used or edited as required. Refer to “Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing” on page 147 for details. HINT • Pages can also be selected by repeatedly pressing Selected Channel section knobs 1–4. 60 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Applying Compression to an Input Signal Applying Compression to an Input Signal The AW2400 provides dynamics processing capability on all input and track channels: compression on the track channels, and both compression and gating on the input channels. The dynamics processor parameters are adjusted manually via the Selected Channel section in the same way as the EQ parameters. A range of dynamics presets for a variety of instruments is also provided in the dynamics library. In this section we’ll see how to recall dynamics processor preset from the library and apply compression to the channel 1–8 signals. its indicator lights, the press the [SEL] key for the channel to which compression is to be applied. HINT • The [INPUT SEL] 1–8 keys can also be used to select an input channel for compression. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [DYN] key so that its indicator lights. The DYNAMICS screen will appear. NOTE • If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF, the DYNAMICS screen will not appear automatically when the [DYN] key is pressed. In this case press one of the Selected Channel knobs (1–4) after pressing the [DYN] key so that its indicator lights. For details about the AUTO DISPLAY function refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 210. 4 Move the cursor to the COMP ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER] key to turn the compressor on. This activates the compressor for the corresponding input channel. HINT • If necessary the individual compressor parameters can be adjusted via this page. Refer to “Using the Compressors” on page 152 for details. 6 Track recording 1 Press the Layer section [IN 1-8] key so that 5 Press the Display section [F4] key. The DYNAMICS screen Comp Lib. page will appear. Compressor library presets can be recalled via this page. The currently selected compressor type and its graphic response curve are shown at the top of the display. List RECALL button 3 Press the Display section [F3] key, or press the [DYN] key as many times as necessary until the Comp Edit page appears. The compressor settings are available via this page. COMP ON/OFF button 6 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library setting to be recalled. HINT • Pages can also be switched by repeatedly pressing a Selected Channel knob. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall. Each setting has a name that indicates the instrument or application it is intended to be used for. The compressor types and response curves are displayed to the left of the list. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 61 Applying Compression to an Input Signal • Handy Recording Functions 7 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and 9 Use Selected Channel knob 1 to change the A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear. When the knob is operated the DYNAMICS screen Comp Edit page will appear. If Selected Channel knob 1 is operated while the [DYN] key is engaged, multiple compressor parameters are adjusted simultaneously to change the overall effect of the compressor (the actual change will depend on the preset selected from the library). press the [ENTER] key. 8 To actually recall the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The selected setting will be recalled and the compressor type and parameters will change accordingly. Repeat steps 6–8 as necessary to select various presets until you find one that best suits your application. 6 overall effect of the compressor. NOTE • If a Selected Channel knob is operated while the AUTO DISPLAY function is OFF, rather than the display switching to the Comp Edit page a popup window containing the relevant parameters will appear. For details about the AUTO DISPLAY function refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 210. Track recording Handy Recording Functions This section describes a number of functions that are handy for recording. Using the Metronome Activating the metronome and setting the tempo and volume. 1 Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. 2 Move the cursor to the metronome button and press the [ENTER] key. The metronome will be turned on. In this state the metronome will sound during recording and playback. 3 The metronome will begin sounding when the PLAY [ back. ] key is pressed to begin play- Move the cursor to the metronome knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the metronome level as required. 4 To change the tempo or time signature, first press the STOP [■] key to stop the recorder. Call the EDIT screen Tempo Map page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. A B 1 Metronome button Switches the metronome on/off. B Metronome knob Adjusts the metronome volume level. The current value is shown above the knob in dB units. 62 AW2400 Owner’s Manual The Tempo Map page lets you create a tempo map that specifies the tempo and time signature of the song. The tempo and time signature that you specify here will be the basis for the measure/beat display counter, the internal metronome, and the MTC (MIDI Time Code) transmitted and received by the AW2400. Handy Recording Functions A Switching virtual tracks Each audio track contains eight virtual tracks. After overdubbing a solo part, you can switch the virtual track for that track, and record a different take while preserving the previously-recorded content. 1 Call the TRACK screen Virtual TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. 6 Track recording A 1 Tempo map events These are the events recorded in the tempo map. When you create a new song, a tempo map event of time signature = 4/4 and tempo = 120 will be created at the beginning of the song (measure 1, beat 1). 5 Move the cursor to the TEMPO field of the event, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/ [DEC] keys to set the tempo value. The tempo can be set from 30 to 250 (BPM). 6 If necessary, move the cursor to the METER B field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/ [DEC] keys to change the time signature. The time signature can be set from 1/4 to 8/4. HINT • It is also possible to change the tempo or time signature during a song. For details, refer to “Creating a tempo map” (→ p. 175). 1 Virtual tracks Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1–8. The virtual track that is currently selected for each track is indicated by a “●” symbol. Of the virtual tracks that are currently not selected, those that have been recorded are indicated by “ ”, and those that have not yet been recorded are indicated as “–”. B Tracks 2 Use the cursor keys to select the virtual track number that you want to assign to the desired track. 3 Press the [ENTER] key. The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will now be used for recording/playback. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 63 Handy Recording Functions Using the Undo List By using the AW2400’s Undo list, you can not only cancel the most recent recording or editing operation, but even backtrack through your work for as many as fifteen operations. This is convenient when, for example, after performing several overdubs you decide that you would rather go back to the state immediately after you had recorded the third solo. 1 6 Press and hold the [UNDO/REDO] key. The UNDO LIST popup window will appear. Track recording A 1 Undo list This is a list of the previous recording and editing operations. From the left, the list shows a step number that indicates the order in which the operations were performed, the content of the operation, and the track/ virtual track that was affected by the recording or editing operation. The current song is now in the state of the step that is highlighted. The step enclosed by a dotted frame indicates the step to which the song will be returned by the Undo function. NOTE • If you have already cancelled recent operations using the Undo function before displaying the Undo list, previous steps may not remain at all. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select a step number. 3 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The current song will revert to the state of the step you selected. 64 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 4 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER] key. The popup window will close, and you will return to the previous screen. HINT • Please note that if you record or edit after “undoing” back to a certain step, the undo/redo data subsequent to that step will be erased. For example if you “undo” the previous three steps, and then perform a recording or editing operation, the undo/redo data for the previous steps 1 and 2 will be erased. • If you press the [UNDO/REDO] key while it is lit the previous operation will be undone without opening the Undo List (the key indicator will go out when the UNDO operation is performed). Press the [UNDO/REDO] key a second time to “redo” the undone operation. Chapter 7 Overdubbing This chapter explains how you can record additional performances on other tracks while you listen to the previously-recorded tracks. About overdubbing ● Signal flow when overdubbing 7 Overdubbing “Overdubbing” is the process of recording additional performances on other tracks while you monitor the playback of previously-recorded tracks. The diagram below shows the signal flow when you play back tracks 1–4 and overdub track 5. In this example, the signal that is input from [MIC/LINE INPUT] jack 1 is routed through recorder track 5 and sent to track channel 5. This signal is then sent to the stereo bus, mixed with the playback sound of track channels 1–4, and output from the [STEREO OUT] jacks and the [MONITOR OUT] jacks / [PHONES] jack. Recorder section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks Input channels Stereo output channel Track channels Stereo bus Mixer section AW2400 Owner’s Manual 65 Assigning the input signal to a track Assigning the input signal to a track In order to overdub, you must first assign the mic or instrument to a new track. The basic procedure is the same as when recording the first track. 1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position. 2 Connect your instrument or mic to a [MIC/ LINE INPUT] jack. 3 Call the RECORD screen Direct page by 7 either pressing the Work Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. 4 Assign the input channel to which your instrument/mic is connected to a new track, and adjust the level. For details on this step, refer to “Assigning input signals to tracks (Direct recording)” (→ p. 51). The diagram below shows an example of when input channel 1 is assigned to track 5. Overdubbing HINT • In this example we will use “direct recording,” in which one input channel is assigned to one track. However, you may also use “mixed recording,” in which multiple input channels are sent to the Bus 1/2 and recorded on one through four tracks. 66 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Setting the mix balance and pan Setting the mix balance and pan Here’s how to set the volume balance and pan for the previously-recorded tracks and the tracks that you now will be overdubbing. track channel faders for the previouslyrecorded tracks to an appropriate monitoring level. HINT • For example if you’ve already recorded tracks 1–4, press the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key to make it light, and use the top panel faders 1–4 to control track channels 1–4. 2 Press the [SEL] key for a previously- recorded track, and press the Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator lights. 3 Rotate the Selected Channel knob 1 to adjust the pan. Adjust the pan in the same way for the other track channels. 5 Press the [SEL] key for the recording-destination track channel, and press the Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ] key so that its indicator lights. 6 Rotate the Selected Channel knob 1 to adjust the pan. In the same way as for the input channel signal, you can also use EQ and dynamics (compressor) to process the track channel. By operating the track channel you’ve selected as the recording-destination, you can adjust the panning or tone of the monitor signal without affecting the signal that is actually recorded. HINT • For details on how to adjust the pan, EQ, and dynamics processing, refer to “Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing” (→ p. 147). 7 Overdubbing 1 While you play back the song, raise the 4 Stop the recorder, and while producing sound on your instrument, adjust the fader of the recording-destination track channel so that the monitoring level is appropriate. The track channel for the recording-destination track will send the input signal to the stereo bus while recording or stopped, and will send the track playback signal to the stereo bus during playback. This means that in order to monitor the input signal, you must stop the recorder. HINT • The position of the track channel faders will not affect the recording level. However if you set the faders to 0 dB, the playback volume will be the same as when you recorded the tracks. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 67 Overdubbing Overdubbing Now you can overdub onto the track that you selected as the recording-destination. 1 Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. This page displays all tracks side by side, making it easy to see the relationship between tracks and the current location within the song. 3 While monitoring the previously-recorded tracks, play the instrument that you want to overdub. 4 To stop recording, press the STOP [■] key. The [UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control section will light. 5 To listen to the recorded performance from the beginning, press the RTZ [ ] key to return the counter display to zero, and press the PLAY [ ] key. 7 HINT Overdubbing • If you recorded from the middle of the song, you can press the [IN] key to move to the location at which you began recording. 6 If you are satisfied with the recorded performance, save the song. (For details on saving → p. 57) 2 In the transport section, hold down the REC [●] key and press the PLAY [ Recording will begin. 68 AW2400 Owner’s Manual ] key. If you decide to re-do the recording, press the [UNDO/ REDO] key to cancel the recording, and repeat steps 2–6. Punch-in/out Punch-in/out If you make a mistake while overdubbing, you can re-record just the region in which you made the mistake. This process is called “punch-in/out.” Punch-in/out can be performed either as “manual punch-in/out” in which you switch between recording and playback manually, or as “auto punch-in/out” in which recording and playback will switch automatically when you reach the locations you specify beforehand. 7 To stop playback, press the STOP [■] key Manual punch-in/out (or press the foot switch). The [UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control section will light. Here’s how to perform punch-in/out using the keys of the transport section or a foot switch. 1 If you want to perform punch-in/out using a 2 Call the RECORD screen Direct page, and make sure that your instrument/mic is assigned to the track on which you want to punch-in. 3 • If no track has been enabled for recording, the foot switch will alternate between Play and Stop operations. 8 To listen to the newly-recorded content, locate to a point just before the punch-in point, and press the PLAY [ ] key. 9 If you are satisfied with the newly-recorded content, save the song. (For details on saving → p. 57) Locate to a point earlier than where you want to punch-in. For details on Locate operation, refer to “Move To a Specified Location” on page 87. You may find it convenient to register a marker at a location one or two measures earlier than the point at which you want to punch-in, so you can quickly return to that point. (For details on registering a marker → p. 90) 4 Press the Transport section PLAY [ ] key. (Alternatively, press the foot switch.) The song will begin playing. At this time, the track playback sound of the recording-destination track channel will be sent to the stereo bus, so you will not be able to monitor the input signal. 7 Overdubbing foot switch, connect a separately sold foot switch (Yamaha FC5 or equivalent) to the rear panel FOOT SW jack. HINT If you decide to re-do the recording, press the [UNDO/ REDO] key to cancel the recording, and repeat steps 3–7. The following diagram shows the manual punch-in/out procedure. 1 2 3 4 5 24 play record play 5 At the point where you want to begin recording, hold down the PLAY [ ] key and press the REC [●] key (or press the foot switch once again), and begin playing your instrument. punch-in punch-out The recording-destination track will switch from playback to recording (“punch-in”). 6 At the point where you want to stop recording, press the PLAY [ foot switch). ] key (or press the The recording-destination track will switch from recording back to playback (“punch-out”). AW2400 Owner’s Manual 69 Punch-in/out Auto punch-in/out the PLAY [ ] key. Auto punch-in/out is a function that performs the punch-in and punch-out operations automatically. In order to use this function, you must first specify the punch-in location (the In point) and the punch-out location (the Out point). When you press the PLAY [ ] key while the [AUTO PUNCH] key is lit, the following will occur. 1 Call the RECORD screen Direct page, and B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the REC make sure that your instrument/mic is assigned to the track on which you want to punch-in. 2 Locate to the point at which you want to punch-in. 7 7 To rehearse the auto punch-in/out, press 3 Hold down the Locate section [SET] key and press the [IN] key. The current location will be registered as the In point. Overdubbing 4 Locate to the point at which you want to punch-out. 5 Hold down the Locate section [SET] key and press the [OUT] key. The current location will be registered as the Out point. HINT • If you want to set the In and Out points more precisely, you can use the Nudge function (→ p. 94) which repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location, or use the WAVE DISPLAY popup window (→ p. 69) which lets you view the contents of the track as a waveform. • The In point and Out point will be updated each time you record. The location at which you last started recording will be registered as the In point, and the location at which you last stopped recording will be registered as the Out point. 6 Press the Locate section [AUTO PUNCH] key. The [AUTO PUNCH] key will light, and the Auto Punch-in/out function will be enabled. You will automatically locate to a point a specific distance (the “preroll time”) ahead of the In point. This point is called the “pre-roll point.” NOTE • If the auto punch-in/out region is too short or too long (less than approximately 100 msec or greater than one hour), an error message will appear, and you won’t be able to specify the Out point. • You can’t change the In/Out points if the [AUTO PUNCH] key is lit. If you need to change the In/Out points, you must first defeat the Auto Punch-in/out function. 1 The PLAY [ ] key will light, and playback will begin from the pre-roll point. [●] key will begin blinking, and the signal that you are monitoring from the recording-destination track channel will switch from the track playback to the input signal (recording-source). (However, recording will not actually occur.) C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the REC [●] key will go dark, and the signal that you are monitoring from the recording-destination track channel will return to the track playback. D When you reach a point that is a specific distance (the “post-roll time”) after the Out point (this point is called the “post-roll point”), you will return to the pre-roll point and stop. HINT • If you turn the Locate section [REPEAT] key on before step 7, operations 1–4 of step 7 will be repeated up to fifteen times. (The A-B Repeat function is disabled during this time.) If you want to stop repeating the rehearsal, press the [REPEAT] key once again or press the STOP [■] key. • With the initial settings of the AW2400, the pre-roll and postroll times are each set to four seconds. You can adjust these values in a range of 0–20 seconds (→ p. 210, 211). 8 To perform the actual auto punch-in/out, stop the recorder, then hold down the REC [●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key. When you press the REC [●] key + PLAY [ ] key while the [AUTO PUNCH] key is lit, the following will occur. 1 Only the PLAY [ ] key will light, and playback will begin from the pre-roll point. B When you reach the auto punch-in point, the REC [●] key will light, and recording will begin (“punch-in”). C When you reach the auto punch-out point, the REC [●] key will go dark, recording will stop, and you will return to playback mode (“punch-out”). D When you reach the post-roll point, you will return to the pre-roll point and stop. At this time, the [UNDO/REDO] key in the data entry / control section will light. 9 To check the newly-recorded content, press the [AUTO PUNCH] key to make it go dark, and then press the PLAY [ ] key. 70 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Punch-in/out 10 If you are satisfied with the newly-recorded content, save the song. (For the Save procedure → p. 57) If you decide to re-do the recording, you can go back to the best take using the Undo list after performing several overdubs by repeating steps 6–9 (→ p. 64). The following diagram shows the auto punch-in/out procedure. Pre-roll point Auto punch-in point Auto punch-out point Post-roll point 1 2 3 4 5 24 play rehearsal play 7 Overdubbing locate rehearsal punch-in punch-out actual recording AW2400 Owner’s Manual 71 7 Overdubbing 72 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 8 Mixdown and bounce operations This chapter explains mixdown operations, in which you mix previouslyrecorded tracks and record the result on the stereo track. This chapter also explains how bouncing (ping-pong recording), in which you combine multiple tracks into one to four tracks. About mixdown and bouncing “Mixdown” is the process by which the signals recorded on the recorder tracks are mixed to stereo, and recorded on the internal stereo track to complete the song. The contents of the stereo track can be used without further processing as material to create an audio CD. 8 Mixdown and bounce operations The diagram below shows the signal flow during mixdown. The playback of each track is sent to the stereo bus, passes through the stereo output channel, and is recorded on the stereo track. At this time you can also add the signals from input channels. ● Signal flow during mixdown Recorder section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Effect send Track 5 Internal Effects Effect return channels Stereo output channel Stereo track Track channels Input channels [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks Effect return Stereo bus Mixer section AW2400 Owner’s Manual 73 About mixdown and bouncing “Bouncing” is the action of mixing the signals recorded on multiple tracks, and recording the mixed result into one to four vacant tracks. (This action is also called “pingpong recording.”) For example if you’ve recorded individual instruments of a drum set on multiple tracks, you can bounce these tracks down to two tracks, and then switch the bounce-source tracks to different virtual tracks so that they will be free to record new instruments. Bouncing differs from mixdown in the following ways. The diagram below shows the signal flow during bouncing. This diagram shows an example in which the track 1– 8 signals are bounced to tracks 9–12. After bouncing, you can switch the virtual tracks for tracks 1–8, and use these tracks to record other instrumental performances. • The destination of the track channels is Bus 1/Bus 2 rather than the stereo bus. • The recording-destination will be a vacant audio track (or tracks). • You can’t add the signals of input channels. 8 ● Signal flow during bouncing Mixdown and bounce operations Effect send Recorder section Track 1 Track 9 Track 2 Track 10 Track 3 Track 11 Track 4 Track 12 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Stereo output channel Track channels Effect return channels Internal Effects Bus 1 Effect return Bus 2 Mixer section 74 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Mixdown procedure Mixdown procedure In this procedure you will select the channels that you want to mix down (track channels, input channels, and effect return channels), and record them to the stereo track. tion. 2 Call the RECORD screen Mixdown page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. The Mixdown page is where you can perform mixdown operations. In this page you can select the channels that will be recorded via the stereo bus onto the stereo track. B Input Select Here you can select the input sources that will be patched to input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can select the following input sources. • AD1–8 ................. The input signals from the AD inputs ([MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8) • SLOT1–8 ............. The input signals from inputs 1–8 of the digital I/O card • SLOT9–16 ........... The input signals from inputs 9–16 of the digital I/O card • ----........................ Not selected C Stereo bus Indicates the on/off status of the channels being sent to the stereo bus. The numbers within the screen correspond to the following channels. A B • INPUT 1–16......... Input channels 1–16 • RETURN 1–4 ...... Effect Return channels 1–4 • TRACK 1–24 ....... Track channels 1–24 D Tracks This is the track channel number. Move the cursor to the number and press the [ENTER] key to switch track muting on/off. C D E LIBRARY button Accesses the mastering library, where you can recall EQ and dynamics settings specifically for the stereo output channel. E F G H I 1 DIGITAL IN This lets you assign an input channel to the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector. Here you can choose from the following items. • 1.2–15.16 ...... The signal from the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector will be assigned to adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered input channels 1/2–15/16. • ---- ................. The [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector will not be used. 8 Mixdown and bounce operations 1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ posi- F DITHER ON/OFF button This is an on/off switch for “dithering,” which is a process that reduces the perceived quantization noise when you convert a digital audio signal to a lower bit depth. G REC button Puts the stereo track in record-ready mode. H SAFE button Defeats the record-ready state of the stereo track. This will also execute MUTE CLEAR (I). HINT HINT • In order for the digital audio signal sent from an external device to the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to be assigned to an input channel, the clock of the external device and the AW2400 must be synchronized (→ p. 223). • The DIGITAL IN setting takes priority over the setting of the Input Select field. If you assign DIGITAL IN to an input channel, a symbol will be displayed for the two corresponding input numbers in the Input Select field. This symbol indicates that DIGITAL IN is assigned. • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button. I MUTE CLEAR button This clears the Mute status of all tracks. However depending on the bit depth of the song, there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively starting with the last-numbered track. • If the STEREO BUS CASCADE button in the DIO screen Setting page is set to ENABLE, “ST BUS” will appear as the DIGITAL IN assignment, and the assignment can’t be changed. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 75 Mixdown procedure 3 Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the channels that you want to send to the stereo bus. For example, repeatedly pressing [INPUT SEL] key 1 (or the [SEL] key of input channel 1) will make the screen change as follows. 7 If you want to use the mastering library, move the cursor to the LIBRARY button and press the [ENTER] key. The MASTERING LIBRARY popup window will appear. You can use the mastering library to quickly recall dedicated settings for the stereo output channel. These settings include EQ and dynamics processor settings that are appropriate for application to the final mix. Library numbers 0–13 are read-only, and library number 0 is data to initialize the stereo output channel. NOTE 8 • The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as (mute). Mixdown and bounce operations • Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (→ p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back. • You can switch track muting on/off by moving the cursor to the track channel number and pressing the [ENTER] key. • If you’re using effects via an effect bus, the mixdown will not include the effect sound unless you add the corresponding effect return channel to the stereo bus. For details on using effects, refer to “Applying Effects via Send and Return” (→ p. 117). HINT • All channels will be turned on by default. However in order to obtain the best S/N ratio, you should turn off any channels that you are not using. 4 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0 dB position. 5 While you play back the song, raise the track channel faders to an appropriate level. 6 Adjust the mix parameters of each channel, such as EQ, dynamics, and pan. HINT • You can use the CH VIEW screen View page to view a list of the mix parameters (EQ, pan, effect send etc.) of a desired channel (→ p. 105). 76 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 8 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the desired library data, then move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. The mastering library settings will be recalled. Play back your song while you try various settings to find the best one. To exit the MASTERING LIBRARY popup window, move the cursor to the EXIT button and press the [ENTER] key. 9 If necessary, you can press the [STEREO SEL] key to select the stereo output channel, and use the Selected Channel section to make fine adjustments to the EQ and dynamics processor settings. Operations are the same as for an input channel, except for the fact that the EQ and dynamics processor of the stereo output channel always operate in stereo, and that the dynamics processor has no gate. Mixdown procedure 10 To check the level of the signal that is being output to the stereo track, press the [METER] key, then press the [F3] key. The METER screen Master page will appear. Indicates the output level of the stereo output channel 13 Move the cursor to the REC button, and press the [ENTER] key to turn the button on. The top panel [STEREO SEL] key will blink red. This blinking indicates that the stereo track is in recordready mode. 14 Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song. Then hold down the REC [●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key. The song will begin playing, and the playback will be recorded on the stereo track. 15 When you reach the end of the song, move the cursor to the SAFE button in the screen and press the [ENTER] key. HINT 11 Move the cursor to the POST FADER button and press the [ENTER] key. The post-fader signal level will be displayed. If the level meter reaches the “OVER” position, lower the [STEREO] fader. 12 Press the [RECORD] key to return to the RECORD screen Mixdown page. • Instead of using the AW2400’s internal stereo track, you can also mixdown to an external recorder connected to the [STEREO OUT] jacks or [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector. In this case, start playback on the AW2400 after you’ve put your external recorder in record mode. 16 Save the song. If the song is not saved after it has been recorded as a stereo track, it cannot be selected for burning to a CD. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 8 Mixdown and bounce operations A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel record-ready mode. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. 77 Playing back the stereo track Playing back the stereo track When you’ve finished the mixdown, you can play back the stereo track as follows. 1 Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. ST TR MODE ON/OFF button 8 Mixdown and bounce operations 2 Switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button ON. When this button is on, the stereo track output will be sent to a point directly before the [STEREO] fader, and can be monitored from the [STEREO OUT] jack, the [MONITOR OUT] jack, or the [PHONE] jack. At this time, the record-ready status of all tracks will be cancelled. HINT • If any audio tracks are in record-ready mode, a popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to defeat the recordready status. If you want to play back the stereo track, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • The EQ and dynamics processor of the stereo output channel are disabled while the stereo track is playing back. 78 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 3 Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song, and press the PLAY [ ] key. The stereo track will be played back. Use the [STEREO] fader to adjust the monitor level. 4 When you are ready to return to normal recording/playback of the audio tracks, switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button off. Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure Here’s how to bounce (ping-pong) multiple tracks down to one to four tracks. 1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position. 2 Call the RECORD screen Bounce page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. In the Bounce page you can select the bounce-source tracks, and then record them via bus 1 or bus 2 onto one to four tracks. G SAFE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, all bounce-source and bounce-destination assignments will be cancelled. This will also execute the MUTE CLEAR (F) operation. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button. 3 In the PLAY TRACK area, select a bouncesource track, move the cursor to the symbol for that track, and press the [ENTER] key. B E Bus2 L/R A Off C On D B Bus1 L/R On E F F Bus2 L On G 1 PLAY TRACK Selects the bounce-source tracks. B Bus 1, Bus 2 The four horizontal lines indicate the Bus1 L/R and Bus2 L/R signal route. This lets you see the on/off status of the signals that are sent from the bounce-source tracks, and see the selected bounce-destination track(s). C Bus1 L On 8 Mixdown and bounce operations Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the screen will change as follows. A G Bus2 R On To A D Bus1 R On C RETURN Selects the bounce-source effect return channels. D RECORD TRACK HINT Here you can select the bounce-destination track(s). • If a track channel is selected as a bounce-source, its assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off. E PITCH FIX button Position the cursor at this button and press [ENTER] to engage the PITCH FIX mode. Use PITCH FIX to correct the pitch and other properties of a vocal track (→ p. 124). • The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as (mute), but you can still record to muted tracks. • Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (→ p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back. • To switch track muting on/off, move the cursor to a track channel number and press the [ENTER] key. F MUTE CLEAR button This button clears the mute status of all tracks. However depending on the bit depth of the song and on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording, there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively starting with the last-numbered track. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 79 Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure 4 If you want to add an effect return channel as a bounce-source, press the [SEL] key of that effect return channel. In the same way as for PLAY TRACK in step 3, you can repeatedly press the [SEL] key to select the bus to which the signal is sent. HINT • You can also select a track by repeatedly pressing the [SEL] key of a track channel. • If you move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the [ENTER] key, all connections will be cancelled. • The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as (mute), but you can still record to muted tracks. NOTE • If you are using an effect via an effect bus, the bounce operation will not include the effect sound unless you add the signal of the corresponding effect return channel to the bounce-destination bus. For details, refer to “Applying Effects via Send and Return” (→ p. 117). 6 Raise the [STEREO] fader and the faders of HINT • To control the effect return channels, make the Layer section [IN 1-8] key (or [IN 9-16] key) light. 8 5 • If an unpaired track is selected as a recording-destination, the pan of the corresponding track channels will be set to the center. If two paired tracks are selected, the pan of the corresponding odd-numbered/even-numbered track channels will be spread to left and right respectively. Mixdown and bounce operations In the RECORD TRACK area, select a bounce-destination track, move the cursor to the symbol for that track, and press the [ENTER] key. You can select up to four bounce-destination tracks. The odd-numbered tracks can be connected to Bus1 L or Bus2 L, and the even-numbered tracks can be connected to Bus1 R or Bus2 R. The [SEL] key will blink red, indicates that the corresponding track is selected as the bounce-destination. In the same way as for the PLAY TRACK, you can repeatedly press the [ENTER] key to select the signal of the desired input bus. For example if you move the cursor to the symbol for RECORD TRACK 1 and repeatedly press the [ENTER] key, the screen will change as follows. A Connected to BUS1 L the track channel(s) you selected as the bounce-destination to the 0 dB position. 7 Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song. Then hold down the REC [●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key. The song will begin playing back, and will be recorded on the bounce-destination track(s). 8 While you record the song, raise the faders of the bounce-source track channels and effect return channels to an appropriate level. Adjust the pan, EQ, and dynamics of each channel as necessary. NOTE • The bounce-destination faders and pans will not affect the content that is recorded. • When Auto Punch-in/out is engaged, you can monitor the bounce source track channels during playback even when not recording. 9 To check the level that is being output from Bus 1/Bus 2 to the bounce-destination tracks, press the [METER] key and then the [F3] key. The METER screen Master page will appear. Here you can check the output levels for Bus 1 and Bus 2. B Connected to BUS2 L Bus 1 and Bus 2 output levels C No connection To A 80 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Bounce (ping-pong) recording procedure 10 Move the cursor to the POST FADER button, and press the [ENTER] key. The post-fader signal levels will be displayed. If the level meter reaches the “OVER” position, press the Layer section [MASTER] key to make it light (the MASTER mixing layer is selected), and lower fader 1 (Bus 1) and fader 2 (Bus 2). NOTE • All of the current patch settings will be erased if you switch the RECORD screen page after making signal assignments. (A popup window will ask you whether you really want to erase the assignments.) Be careful not to switch the RECORD screen page until you’ve finished recording. 11 To stop bounce-recording, press the STOP [■] key. 12 To hear the bounce-recorded results from 8 Mixdown and bounce operations the beginning, press the RTZ [ ] key to return the counter display to zero, and then press the PLAY [ ] key. When playing back the bounce-destination tracks, be careful not to switch the RECORD screen to a page other than the Bounce page or to defeat the bounce settings. If you do so, the connection from the bounce-source track channels to the stereo bus will automatically be restored. This will cause the bounce-source and bounce-destination signals to be duplicated. HINT • If desired, you can use the [UNDO/REDO] key to cancel the bounce-recording operation (→ p. 64), or switch the virtual track of the bounce-destination and record another take (→ p. 63). 13 When you’ve finished the bounce opera- tion, press the Quick Navigation section [RECORD] key once again, move the cursor to the SAFE button in the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. A popup message will ask you for confirmation. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key to defeat all bounce settings. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 81 Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce Here we will explain some functions that you will find convenient when performing mixdown or bounce operations. 3 Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT Fader Group assignments Fader Grouping is a function that links the fader operations of multiple channels. For example if you’ve recorded multiple track channels of drums or chorus, you can assign these drum channels or chorus channels to the same fader group so that moving any one of the faders in the group will adjust all of the levels together. 1 Call the MONITOR screen Fader Grp. page 8 by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [MONITOR] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [MONITOR] key. SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the channels that you want to assign to this fader group. The assignment to the fader group will alternately be switched on or off each time you press the [INPUT SEL] key or [SEL] key. HINT • If you want to defeat all assignments for the fader group you’re currently operating, hold down the Display section [SHIFT] key and press the [F1] key. • If you want to defeat all assignments in the Fader Grp. page, hold down the [Display section [SHIFT] key and press the [F2] key. Mixdown and bounce operations This page contains the following items. A B C 4 Repeat steps 2–3 to make assignments for other fader groups. NOTE • You can’t assign a single channel to more than one fader group. 5 To enable a fader group, move the cursor to the A–D buttons and press the [ENTER] key. Buttons A–D can be turned on/off independently. 6 Operate a channel that is assigned to a fader group. The faders of all channels assigned to that fader group will move in tandem. 1 ENABLE field Use these buttons to switch fader groups A–D on/off. The A–D buttons will be highlighted to indicate fader groups that are turned on. You will also use this field to select the fader group that you want to operate. B INPUT field C TRACK field These areas indicate the fader group to which each input channel 1–16 and track channel 1–24 is assigned. The “●” symbol indicates channels that are assigned, and the “...” symbol indicates channels that are not assigned. 2 In the ENABLE field, move the cursor to the button A–D of the fader group that you want to operate. 82 AW2400 Owner’s Manual NOTE • When operating channels that are assigned to a fader group, you must use only one fader. If you attempt to move two or more faders simultaneously, the motor faders will be stressed, and possibly damaged. HINT • If you want to adjust the fader value for only a specific channel that is assigned to a fader group, operate its fader while holding down the [SEL] key or [INPUT SEL] key for that channel. • The fader group assignments are available even when Trigger Track mode is engaged. • The fader group assignments in the Fader Grp. page can be copied to the Mute Grp. page by holding down the Display section [SHIFT] key and pressing the [F4] key. Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce 3 Use the Layer section keys, the [INPUT Mute Group assignments Mute Grouping is a function that links the [ON] key operations of multiple channels. This lets you mute multiple instruments by pressing a single [ON] key, or press a single key to alternate the on/off status of multiple track channels. 1 Call the MONITOR screen Mute Grp. page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [MONITOR] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [MONITOR] key. This page contains the following items. A B C SEL] keys, and the [SEL] keys to select the channels that you want to assign to this mute group. The assignment to the mute group will alternately be switched on or off each time you press the [INPUT SEL] key or [SEL] key. HINT • If you want to defeat all assignments for the mute group you’re currently operating, hold down the Display section [SHIFT] key and press the [F1] key. • If you want to defeat all assignments in the Mute Grp. page, hold down the [Display section [SHIFT] key and press the [F2] key. 4 Repeat steps 2–3 to make assignments for other mute groups. • You can’t assign a single channel to more than one mute group. 5 To enable a mute group, move the cursor to the E–H buttons and press the [ENTER] key. Buttons E–H can be turned on/off independently. 6 Operate a channel that is assigned to a mute group. The [ON] keys of all channels assigned to that mute group will operate simultaneously. 1 ENABLE field Use these buttons to switch mute groups E–H on/off, or to select the mute group that you want to operate. The E–H buttons will be highlighted to indicate mute groups that are turned on. B INPUT field C TRACK field HINT 8 Mixdown and bounce operations NOTE • If you make mute group assignments while the [ON] keys of the assigned channels are in a mixed state (some on, some off), the on/off setting of each channel will alternate. • The mute group assignments in the Mute Grp. page can be copied to the Fader Grp. page by holding down the Display section [SHIFT] key and pressing the [F4] key. These areas indicate the mute group to which each input channel 1–16 and track channel 1–24 is assigned. The “●” symbol indicates channels that are assigned, and the “...” symbol indicates channels that are not assigned. 2 In the ENABLE field, move the cursor to the button E–H of the mute group that you want to operate. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 83 Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce 3 Use the SOLO MODE field to choose the Using the Solo function operating mode for the Solo function. Solo is a function that lets you monitor only a specific channel. The AW2400 provides a versatile Solo function that lets you make Solo settings that are best for your situation. 1 Call the MONITOR screen Solo page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [MONITOR] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [MONITOR] key. This page contains the following items. A B C • RECORDING SOLO button If this button is on, the soloed signal(s) will be sent via the dedicated Solo bus and output from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and [PHONES] jack. This will not affect the signals that are being output from the stereo bus or Bus 1/Bus 2. With this setting, even channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus or Bus B/bus 2, or channels whose [ON] key is off, can be monitored from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks or [PHONES] jack. This setting is convenient when you want to monitor only specific channels without affecting the recorded content while recording tracks or during mixdown. • MIXDOWN SOLO button If this button is on, only the soloed signal(s) will be sent via the stereo bus and output from the [STEREO OUT] jacks, [MONITOR OUT] jacks, and [PHONES] jack; other channels will be muted. With this setting, you won’t be able to monitor channels that are not assigned to the stereo bus, or channels whose [ON] key is turned off. 8 Mixdown and bounce operations This setting is convenient when you want everything except for the specified channel(s) to be muted. 4 If you selected RECORDING SOLO mode in 1 SEL MODE field This selects how you will select the signal(s) to be monitored when the Solo function is on. B SOLO MODE field This selects the mode in which the Solo function will operate. C SOLO SAFE CHANNEL field Here you can select channels that will be excluded from the Solo function if MIXDOWN SOLO mode is selected in the SOLO MODE field. 2 In the SEL MODE field, choose the way in which the signal(s) to be monitored will be selected when the Solo function is on. You can turn on one or the other of the following buttons. • LAST SOLO button If this button is on, you will be monitoring only the single channel whose [ON] key was last pressed. • MIX SOLO button If this button is on, you will be monitoring all channels whose [ON] key was pressed after enabling the Solo function. 84 You can turn on one or the other of the following buttons. AW2400 Owner’s Manual step 3, use the SOLO MODE field to select the point from which the soloed signal will be sent. Use the following two buttons of the SOLO MODE field to select the send point. • PRE FADER button If this button is on, the pre-fader signal will be sent to the Solo bus. In this case, the fader and pan settings of each channel will be ignored, and the signal that is output from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and the [PHONES] jack will be monaural. • AFTER PAN button If this button is on, the post-fader post-pan signal will be sent to the Solo bus. In this case, the fader and pan setting of each channel will affect the signal that is sent from the [MONITOR OUT] jacks and the [PHONES] jack. HINT • If RECORDING SOLO mode is selected, you can turn the SOLO MODE field’s TRIM knob to adjust the signal level sent to the Solo bus. Convenient functions for mixdown/bounce 5 If you selected MIXDOWN SOLO mode in step 3, you can (if desired) select channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. Use the buttons in the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL field to specify the channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. Move the cursor to a desired button and press the [ENTER] key (you may select more than one). These buttons correspond to the following channels. • INPUT .........................Input channels 1–16 • EFFECT RETURN ......Effect return channels 1–4 • TRACK........................Track channels 1–24 The channels you select here will not be muted even if you turn on the Solo function. If you select effect return channels 1–4 here, you’ll be able to monitor with effects even when the Solo function is on. 6 To activate the Solo function, press the 8 Mixer section [SOLO] key. Mixdown and bounce operations The [SOLO] key and the [ON] key of the selectable channels will blink. 7 Use the Layer section keys and [ON] keys to select the channels that you want to solo. The operations that are valid while Solo is activated will depend on the settings in the MONITOR screen Solo page. 8 To defeat the Solo function, press the [SOLO] key once again. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 85 8 Mixdown and bounce operations AW2400 Owner’s Manual 86 Chapter 9 Transport/Locate Operation This chapter covers transport key operation, use of the locate/marker functions, and a range of other playback features. The Transport Section Keys The functions of the Transport section keys change according to the current state of the recorder (playback, stopped, etc.), as listed in the chart below. Recorder Status PLAY[ Playing ] key STOP[■] key REW[ ] key Stopped Rewinding Fast Forwarding Recording Play Play Stop record and play (Punch Out) — Play Stop — Stop Stop Stop Rewind Rewind Rewind speed (8x ↔ 16x) Rewind — FF[ ] key Fast forward Fast forward Fast forward Fast forward speed (8x ↔ 16x) — RTZ[ ] key Return to zero and play Return to zero and stop Return to zero and play or stop (depending on Play/Stop status prior to rewind) Return to zero and play or stop (depending on Play/Stop status prior to fast forward) — Press simultaneously with PLAY [ ] key to begin recording (Punch In) Press simultaneously with PLAY [ ] key to begin recording — — — REC[●] key The REC [●] key has no effect if no tracks are set to the record standby mode. 9 Transport/Locate Operation Key Move To a Specified Location The AW2400 allows you to move directly to any location in a song by numerically specifying the desired locate point. 1 With the recorder stopped, press the Locate/Number section [NUM.LOCK] key so that its indicator lights. A popup window will appear into which you can enter the destination locate point. 2 Enter the locate point in measures/beats. You can use either of the following two methods to enter the locate point. ● Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys Move the cursor to the measure or beat field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set as required. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 87 Move To a Specified Location • Using the locator ● Use the [LOCATE] keys The locate point can also be numerically entered directly using the [LOCATE] keys 1–9. Move the cursor to the measure or beat field and use the [LOCATE] 1–9 keys to enter the locate point numerically. The “.” key can be used to quickly move the cursor between the beat and measure fields. 3 When the locate point has been specified press the [ENTER] key. As long as the cursor is not on the CANCEL button pressing the [ENTER] will execute the move to the specified location. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key no change in location will occur and the popup window will close. Using the locator “Locate points” can be specified within a song in order to execute functions such as auto punchin/out and A-B repeat. You can use this function to “locate” (move the current location of the song) to one of these points just by pressing a single key. On the AW2400, you can use the following locate points. 9 ● In/Out points Transport/Locate Operation These locate points are used to specify the region for auto punch-in/out (→ p. 70). Normally, the beginning and end of the recording you last performed will be automatically set as the In point and Out point. However, you may change these points as desired. Start point = 00:00:00:00.00 Counter display format ABS 00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00 SECOND 00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00 TIME CODE 00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00 ● A/B points These locate points are used to specify the region for the A-B Repeat function (→ p. 93). The A point and B point can be set to any point in a song, either via the panel keys or on-screen editing. S Start point = 00:00:05:00.00 Counter display format ABS 00:00:00:00.00 ● Quick Locator points Locate/Number section [LOCATE] keys 1–9 can be assigned to specific locations within a song, and then you can move directly to the assigned locations simply by pressing the corresponding [LOCATE] keys. ● Start/end points These locate points normally correspond to the beginning and end of the song. When you create a new song, the Start point will initially be set to absolute time 00:00:00.000. When you record, the end of the song will automatically be set as the End point. If you record past the previously-set End point, the End point will automatically be adjusted to the new song end point. If you select SECOND or TIME CODE as the counter display format, the Start point will be the origin (“zero point”) of the time and time code that are displayed. This means that if you change the Start point, the display will change accordingly, depending on the counter display format. 88 AW2400 Owner’s Manual SECOND –00:00:05:00.00 TIME CODE 23:59:55:00.00 00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00 00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00 00:00:00:00.00 00:00:05:00.00 S HINT • When you create an audio CD, the Start and End points can be used to specify the region of the stereo track that will be written to the audio CD (→ p. 214). • When the AW2400 transmits MTC to an external device, the Start point will be the origin (“zero point”) of the time code that is generated. The Start point will also serve as the origin (measure 1 beat 1) for the measures displayed in the counter. ● Relative zero point This locate point stores the relative zero position. You will move to this location when you press the RTZ [ ] key in the transport section. Initially the relative zero point will be the same as absolute time 00:00:00.000, but you can change this if desired via the panel controls or onscreen editing. If you select RELATIVE as the counter display format, the current location will be displayed with the Relative Zero point as 0. Using the locator The procedure for registering the current location in one of the locate points, and then moving to that locate point is as follows. 3 To move to a registered locate point, press 1 Move the song to the point that you want to The song will move to that location. Registered locate points are displayed in the TRACK screen Track View page as shown below. register as a locate point. You can set locate points while the song is playing or stopped. the corresponding key while the song is stopped or playing. 2 Hold down the [SET] key and press the key for the desired locate point. Locator icons The characters/numbers shown on the display correspond to the locate types are as follows: Displayed Character/ Number The locate points correspond to the following keys. E A B In point O Out point A A point B B point L1–L9 Quick Locator points S Start point E End point R Relative Zero point HINT • Locate point settings are stored on the hard disk as part of the song. 9 Transport/Locate Operation I Locate Type • Locate points can be adjusted as desired (→ p. 91). Locate points other than the Start point and End point may also be erased (→ p. 93). C D F 1 B C D E F [IN] key ......................... In point [OUT] key ..................... Out point [A] key .......................... A point [B] key .......................... B point [LOCATE] key 1–9........ Quick Locator points RTZ [ ] key ............... Relative Zero point NOTE • The In point and Out point will be updated automatically when you perform a record operation. • If you want to change the Start point or End point, use the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page. These points cannot be set directly via the panel controls. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 89 Using markers Using markers “Markers” are symbols that you assign to desired locations in a song so that those points can be quickly located later. You can assign up to 99 markers in each song. Use the MARK SEARCH [ ]/[ ] keys to find and move to markers. 1 Move to the position in the song at which you want to assign a marker. You can assign markers while the song is playing or stopped. 2 Press the [MARK] key. 3 Press the [ ] key to locate to the previous marker, or press the [ ] key to locate to the next marker. The song will move to that location. Assigned markers will appear as numbers 1–99 in the TRACK screen Track View page. 9 Marker icon Transport/Locate Operation HINT The display will briefly indicate “MARK POINT SET.” This indicates that a marker has been set. A new marker will be added each time you press the [MARK] key. Markers are automatically numbered 1–99 starting at the beginning of the song. If you register a new marker between two existing markers, markers following the insert will be automatically renumbered. Register a new marker HINT • Marker settings are stored on the hard disk as part of the song. • Markers can be deleted (→ p. 93) or moved (→ p. 92) as desired. • If you press the [MARK] key at a location in which a marker has already been registered, the display will indicate “CANNOT SET MARK,” and a new marker will not be created. 90 AW2400 Owner’s Manual • When creating an audio CD, you can use markers to divide the stereo track into individual tracks that will be written to the audio CD (→ p. 214). Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker Here’s how you can adjust the position of a previously-registered locate point or marker. These operations are performed via the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. Adjusting the position of a locate point 1 Call the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page by B E C D 2 The Locator Position field is used to edit the various locate points (not including the Quick Locator points). The positions for each locator are displayed in the Locator Position field. 1 Locator Position field Shows the various locate points (Quick Locator points not included). B Quick Locator/Marker field Shows the Quick Locator or Marker points. A C LOCATOR button D MARKER button B 9 Transport/Locate Operation A either pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. C These buttons determine whether the Quick Locator or Marker points appear in the Quick Locator/Marker field. 1 Locate points E DELETE button (Marker display only) Deletes the currently selected marker. B Position Shows the position of each locate point in time code or the current counter display format. Shows the type of locate point and its abbreviation. C Measure/beat Shows the position of each locate point as measures/ beats. This value is calculated based on the tempo and time signature of the tempo map (→ p. 175). The format in which the position is displayed will depend on the locate point. The following table shows the display format for each locate point. Locate point Position REL.ZERO Time code Measure/Beat -- START Time code Measure/beat END Time code Measure/beat IN Counter display format Measure/beat OUT Counter display format Measure/beat A Counter display format Measure/beat B Counter display format Measure/beat HINT • If a locate point has not been registered “--” will appear in the numerical field. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 91 Adjusting the position of a locate point or marker 3 Move the cursor to the locate point value that you want to adjust, and use the [DATA/ JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to change the value. A “Change START Position?” popup window will ask you for confirmation when you attempt to change the Start point value. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key, and then change the value. NOTE • Changing the Start point will cause locations already recorded in a track to move relative to the measure lines defined by the tempo map. Please keep this in mind if you are using measure display for the metronome. 4 To adjust the location of a quick locator point, move the cursor to the LOCATOR button in the Quick Locator/Marker filed and press the [ENTER] key. 9 1 Call the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. 2 If you want to adjust the position of a marker, move the cursor to the MARKER button in the Quick Locator/Marker field. When the MARKER button is on, the Quick Locator/ Marker field will list the markers that have been registered. A When the LOCATOR button is on, the Quick Locator/ Marker field will list the quick locate points that have been registered. Transport/Locate Operation B A C D 1 List Lists the markers that have been registered. The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame is selected for editing. B C D 1 List Lists the quick locator points that have been registered. The line that is enclosed by a dotted frame is selected for editing. B Quick locator points These are the quick locator point numbers 1–9. C Position Shows the position of each quick locator point using the counter display format. D Measure/beat Shows the position of each quick locator point in measure/beat units. 5 Move the cursor to the quick locator point numbers, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to scroll through the list so that the dotted frame encloses the quick locator point number that you want to edit. 6 Move the cursor to the value that you want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value. 92 Adjusting the position of a marker AW2400 Owner’s Manual B Markers These are the marker numbers 1–99. C Position Shows the position of each marker using the counter display format. D Measure/beat Shows the position of each marker in measure/beat units. 3 Move the cursor to the marker numbers, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to scroll through the list so that the dotted frame encloses the marker number that you want to edit. 4 Move the cursor to the value that you want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value. Erasing a locate point or marker • Repeat playback of a specific region (the A-B Repeat function) Erasing a locate point or marker If necessary, you can erase a registered locate point (except for the Relative Zero, Start, and End points) or marker. NOTE • A locate point that has been erased cannot be recovered. ■ Erasing a locate point ■ Erasing a marker To erase a locate point, hold down the Locate section [CANCEL] key and press the corresponding locate key ([IN]/[OUT] key, [A]/[B] key or [LOCATE] key 1–9). The selected locate point will be erased, and the “LOCATE POINT ERASED” message will be displayed briefly. To erase a marker, locate to the marker that you want to erase, and then press the [MARK] key while holding down the Locate section [CANCEL] key. The corresponding marker will be erased, and the “MARK POINT ERASED” message of will be displayed briefly. Markers can also be erased by using the DELETE button in the EDIT screen Mark Adj. page. Repeat playback of a specific region (the A-B Repeat function) The AW2400 provides an “A-B Repeat” function that repeatedly plays the region between the A point and B point. This is useful when you want to repeatedly play back a certain region of the song while adjusting the mix. 1 Register the A point and B point at the locations at which you want to start and end repeat playback. For details on how to set the A point and B point, refer to “Using the locator” (→ p. 88). HINT • Playback will stop automatically when the A/B region has been repeated 99 times. Transport/Locate Operation 9 • If you press the [REPEAT] key while the song is playing, repeat playback between the A and B points will begin automatically, regardless of the current position. HINT • If you set the B point earlier than the A point, the B → A region will play repeatedly. 2 Press the [REPEAT] key while the transport is stopped. The [REPEAT] key will light and the A-B Repeat function will be engaged. The song will automatically locate to the A point. NOTE • The A and B points must be at least one second apart. If they are closer than one second a “REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE” message will appear when you press the [REPEAT] key and repeat playback will not be possible. 4 To stop playback, press the STOP [■] key. Playback will stop, but the A-B Repeat function will remain active. When the A-B Repeat function is on, pressing the PLAY [ ] key will immediately resume repeat playback regardless of the current position. 5 Press the [REPEAT] key to cancel repeat playback. The [REPEAT] key indicator will go out and the A-B Repeat function will be cancelled. If you cancel the AB Repeat function during repeat playback, normal playback will continue from that point. HINT 3 Press the PLAY [ ] key to begin repeat playback. • If you perform a record operation while the A-B Repeat function is engaged, the A-B Repeat function will be temporarily disabled. Playback will begin from the A point. When the B point is reached playback will automatically begin again from the A point. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 93 Finding a location while monitoring the sound (the Nudge function) Finding a location while monitoring the sound (the Nudge function) “Nudge” is a function that repeatedly plays a short region before or after the current location. By using the Nudge function, you can find a precise location while listening to playback. This is useful when you need to specify a location precisely, such as when specifying auto punch-in/out points, or when editing the contents of a track. 1 Locate to the vicinity of the point you want to find. 2 Press the [JOG ON] key while the transport is stopped. The [JOG ON] key will light, and the Nudge function will be engaged. A fixed region (referred to as the “nudge time”) starting at the current location will play repeatedly. 3 To move the current location forward, turn 9 the [DATA/JOG] dial to the right. To move the current location backward, turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to the left. Transport/Locate Operation If time display is selected as the counter display format, you can move the current location forward or backward in millisecond units. If time code display is selected, you can move in sub-frame units. Current location Song track Nudge time HINT • You can use locate points or markers to change the location, or register locate points or markers while using the Nudge function. • The nudge direction and time can be adjusted as required. Refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 210 for details. 94 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 4 To turn off the Nudge function, press the [JOG ON] key or the transport section STOP [■] key. The [JOG ON] key indicator will go out, and the Nudge function will be cancelled. Finding a location while viewing the waveform Finding a location while viewing the waveform The AW2400 lets you find a location while viewing the waveform of the sound recorded on a track. to find. 2 Call the TRACK screen Track View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. TRACK field WAVE button use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the number of the track corresponding to waveform you want to view. 4 Move the cursor to the WAVE button and press the [ENTER] key. The WAVE DISPLAY popup window will appear. This popup window displays the waveform of the audio data recorded in the track selected in step 3 (1– 24 or ST-L/R). B Indicates the currently selected track number. You can also move the cursor to this field and use the [DATA/ JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to switch tracks. B Counter Displays the location of the vertical line (pointer) indicating the current location in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window. You can move the cursor to this field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to move the current location forward or backward. C SCALE By moving the cursor to this area and using the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys you can expand or shrink the waveform display along the time axis. The value of this field indicates the length of time displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window. If you select 1SEC, the distance from the left to right edge of the screen will correspond to one second. Selecting SAMPLE will produce the highest magnification, and each horizontal pixel will correspond to one sample. 3 Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and A 1 TRACK C D E F D AMP By moving the cursor to this area and using the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys you can expand or shrink the waveform display along the amplitude axis. The value of this field indicates the level range of the waveform displayed in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window. If you select 0 dB, the top and bottom edges of the screen will correspond to the maximum level. 9 Transport/Locate Operation 1 Locate to the vicinity of the point you want E LISTEN button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key the waveform in the display area of the WAVE DISPLAY popup window will be played once. During playback the vertical line (pointer) that indicates the current location will move, and the counter value will change accordingly. Normal transport operation is disabled while using the LISTEN button. F EXIT button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to exit the WAVE DISPLAY popup window and return to the previous Track View page. HINT • The WAVE DISPLAY popup window cannot be displayed while the recorder is running. • You can use the Mixer section [SEL] or [STEREO SEL] keys to switch the track being viewed even after displaying the WAVE DISPLAY popup window. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 95 Finding a location while viewing the waveform 5 Move the cursor to the SCALE/AMP fields and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the vertical and horizontal scale of the waveform display as required. 6 To specify a location within the popup window, move the cursor to the counter and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial. Turning the dial to the right will move the pointer forward, and turning the dial to the left will move it backward. If necessary, you can use the LISTEN button to play the waveform region shown in the WAVE DISPLAY popup window, and check the location by listening. HINT • The locators and markers within a song can also be used to position the pointer (→ p. 88, 90). • The current counter location can be saved to a locater or marker (→ p. 88, 90). you have finished specifying the 9 7 When location, move the cursor to the EXIT butTransport/Locate Operation 96 ton and press the [ENTER] key. You will return to the previous Track View page, and the location that you specified in the popup window will remain the current location. Register the location as a locate point or marker as required. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 10 Meters This section describes how the level meters can be shown on the display screen, and how they can be used to the check levels of various signals through the system. Level Meter Types Four display pages accessible via the METER screen are used to access the various level meter displays. Press the [METER] key to call the METER screen, and then either press the [METER] key as many times as necessary until the desired page appears, or press the function key ([F1]– [F4]) corresponding to the desired page. ■ METER screen Input/RTN page ([F1] key) ■ METER screen Track page ([F2] key) ● Track Page Displays the input and fader levels for track channels 1– 24. ● Input/RTN Page Displays the input and fader levels for input channels 1– 16 as well as effect return channels 1–4. 10 Meters The contents of the various METER displays are as follows: C A D B E F G The following items are displayed: 1 Input channel 1–16 input levels B Effect return channel 1–4 input levels C Track channel 1–24 input levels D E F G The level meters display the input levels for the corresponding channels, while the numbers below the level meters show the fader levels in dB. D PRE EQ button Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed when this button is on. E PRE FADER button Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed when this button is on. F POST FADER button Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed when this button is on. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 97 Level Meter Types G PEAK HOLD button This button switches the level meter peak hold function on/off. When this button is on, an indicator will show the signal peaks. HINT • These PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER settings are independent from those on other pages. • The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages. HINT • The Input/RTN page and Track page PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER button settings are linked, while the Master page settings are independent. • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button. • The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages. • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button. ■ METER screen Output page ([F4] key) Displays the output and fader levels for a digital I/O card installed in the card slot, the [OMNI OUT] 1–4 outputs, and the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] outputs. ■ METER screen Master page ([F3] key) A Displays the output and fader levels for BUS1 L/R, BUS2 L/R, AUX bus 1–4, effect bus 1–4, and the stereo bus. A B C 10 Meters D B E F G H The following items are displayed: 1 B C D BUS1 L/R, BUS2 L/R output levels AUX bus 1–4 output levels Effect bus 1–4 output levels Stereo bus output level The level meters display the output levels for the corresponding channels, while the numbers below the level meters show the fader levels in dB. E PRE EQ button Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed when this button is on. F PRE FADER button Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed when this button is on. G POST FADER button Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed when this button is on. H PEAK HOLD button This button switches the level meter peak hold function on/off. 98 AW2400 Owner’s Manual C D The following items are displayed: 1 Output levels for the card installed in the slot B [OMNI OUT] 1–4 output levels C [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] output levels The level meters display the output levels for the corresponding channels, while the numbers below the level meters show the fader levels in dB. D PEAK HOLD button This button switches the level meter peak hold function on/off. HINT • The PEAK HOLD button setting affects all METER pages. • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the PEAK HOLD button. Chapter 11 Patching and signal flow This chapter explains patching and channel signal flow. Input signal patching To record a mic or instrument connected to the AW2400, you can use either of two recording methods; Direct Recording or Mixed Recording. The patching method will depend on the recording method you use. ■ Direct Recording Patching for Direct Recording This section explains how to patch the signals of input channels to tracks when you’re using the Direct Recording method. 1 Call the RECORD screen Direct page by Input channel 1 Audio track 1 Input channel 2 Audio track 2 either pressing the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. Input channel 3 Audio track 3 This page contains the following items. Input channel 4 Audio track 4 E F G Input channel 15 Input channel 16 Audio track 23 Audio track 24 A B 11 Patching and signal flow With this method only one input channel is assigned to each recorder track. Although direct recording requires the same number of tracks as the number of input channels you use, it has the advantage that you will be free to adjust the volume, pan (stereo position), and EQ of each track after it has been recorded. ■ Mixed Recording With this method, you can send multiple input channels to Bus 1 or Bus 2, and assign the mixed signal to one through four tracks. Mixed recording requires fewer tracks, but you will need to decide on the final volume, pan, and tone of each instrument at the time of recording (you will not be able to adjust these parameters independently after recording.) Input channel 1 Audio track 1 Input channel 2 Audio track 2 Input channel 3 Audio track 3 Input channel 4 Input channel 15 Bus 1 L/R Audio track 4 C D H I 1 Input Select Here you can select the inputs (input signals) that will be patched to input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can choose from the following inputs. • AD 1–8 ........... Analog input signals from [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 • SLOT 1–8 ....... Input signals from inputs 1–8 of an I/O card installed in the slot • SLOT 9–16 ..... Input signals from inputs 9–16 of an I/O card installed in the slot Bus 2 L/R • ----................... Not selected Input channel 16 Audio track 23 Audio track 24 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 99 Input signal patching B Input channels This area indicates the connection state of input channels 1–16. When you move the cursor to the symbol and press the [ENTER] key, the symbol will be highlighted and the corresponding input channel will be selected as a recording source. I SAFE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, all input channel and track channel assignments will be cancelled. This will also execute the MUTE CLEAR (H) operation. HINT C Tracks This area indicates the connection state of tracks 1–24. When you move the cursor to the symbol and press the [ENTER] key, the symbol will be highlighted and the corresponding track will be selected as a recording destination. You can switch a track’s mute status on/off by moving the cursor to the number that indicates the track number and pressing the [ENTER] key. D REMAIN This indicates the remaining recordable time. The remaining time will depend on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording. • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button. 2 Move the cursor to the Input Select field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/ [DEC] keys to select the input that will be patched to each input channel. For example if you want mics/instruments connected to [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 1–8 to be patched to input channels 1–8, you would make settings as shown below. E DIGITAL IN This assigns the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to an input channel. Here you can select from the following items. 11 • 1.2–15.16 ........Assign the signal of the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to a pair of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input channels (1/2–15/16). Patching and signal flow • ---- ...................The [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector will not be used. The DIGITAL IN setting takes priority over other inputs selected in the Input Select area. When you assign the DIGITAL IN to an input channel, the corresponding input number in the Input Select area will change to a symbol. This indicates that a signal has already been assigned to the corresponding input channel. NOTE • If you enable cascade connection, the digital audio signal received from the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector will be sent directly to the stereo bus. While this state exists, the DIGITAL IN field will indicate “ST BUS,” and cannot be changed until you disable cascade connection. F DIRECT OUT Here you can select the send position from which the signal of an input channel or track channel is sent to direct output. 3 Move the cursor to the symbol for the record-source input channel, and press the [ENTER] key. The symbol will be highlighted, and the corresponding input channel will be selected as a recording source. The corresponding [INPUT SEL] key (or the [SEL] key of the corresponding input channel) will light red, and the remaining [INPUT SEL] keys (or the [SEL] keys of the remaining input channels) will go dark. If the selected input channel is not yet assigned to a track, all [SEL] keys for the track channels will blink red, indicating that they can be selected as the recording destination. If the selected input channel has already been assigned to a track, only the [SEL] key of the corresponding track channel will blink red. For example if you selected input channel 1 as the recording source, the top panel keys will be as follows. • PRE FADER................The pre-fader signal • POST FADER .............The post-fader signal G MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF button If this button is on, you can connect a set of eight input channels and eight tracks in a single operation. H MUTE CLEAR button This button clears the mute status of all tracks. However depending on the bit depth of the song and on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording, there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively starting with the last-numbered track. 100 AW2400 Owner’s Manual lit flash Tr ack channels (Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit) Input signal patching The indication in the screen will be as follows. NOTE • Input channels and tracks are always connected one-to-one. • You can also select the record-source input channel by pressing an [INPUT SEL] key (or the [SEL] key of an input channel). • The [INPUT SEL] keys always control input channels 1–8, regardless of the settings of the Layer section 4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the recording-destination track, and press the [ENTER] key. The selected input channel and track will be internally connected. At this time, the connected [INPUT SEL] key (or the input channel’s [SEL] key) and the track channel’s [SEL] key will change to blinking red. The blinking track channel [SEL] key indicates that the corresponding track is in record-ready mode. For example if input channel 1 and track 1 are connected, the top panel keys will be as follows. • The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as (mute), but you can still record to muted tracks. • Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (→ p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back. 5 If you want to record multiple instruments or mics simultaneously, assign other input channels to other tracks in the same way. HINT • To cancel a connection you established, simply repeat the same operation you did when establishing the connection. • To change a recording-destination (track) that you’ve already connected, move the cursor to the recording-source and press the [ENTER] key; then move the cursor to a different track and press the [ENTER] key. • To change a recording-source (input channel) that you’ve already connected, move the cursor to the recording-destination and press the [ENTER] key; then move the cursor to a different input channel and press the [ENTER] key. • To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the [ENTER] key. • If a recording-source input channel and the recording-destination track are both paired, two adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered channels will be assigned to two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered tracks. 6 If you want to connect a set of eight input flash channels and eight tracks in a single operation, turn the MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF button on. Tr ack channels (Layer section [TRACK 1-12] key lit) For example if the MULTI CONNECTION ON/OFF button is on, and you select any one of input channels 1–8 as a recording-source and any one of tracks 1–8 as a recording-destination, the following popup window will appear. 11 Patching and signal flow HINT The indication in the screen will be as follows. HINT • You can also select the record-destination track by pressing a track channel’s [SEL] key. • The same internal connection will be established even if you perform steps 3 and 4 in the reverse order. • The fader will automatically be set to 0 dB for input channels that are internally connected to a track. Move the cursor to the YES button and press the [ENTER] key to execute the connection; input channels 1–8 will be connected to tracks 1–8. Move the cursor to the NO button and press the [ENTER] key to connect the selected input channel and track. • If an input channel is selected as a recording-source, its assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off. If you want to monitor the signal you’re recording, you’ll need to raise the fader of the recording-destination track channel. • EQ and dynamics settings will be set to a flat state for track channels corresponding to tracks selected as recording-destinations. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 101 Input signal patching Similarly if you specify input channels 9–16 as the recording-source, input channels 9–16 will be connected to tracks 1–8. If you specify any one of tracks 9–16 (or 17–24) as the recording destination, the specified input channels will be connected to tracks 9–16 (or 17–24). G MUTE CLEAR button This button clears the mute status of all tracks. However depending on the bit depth of the song and on the number of tracks that are enabled for recording, there may be cases in which some tracks cannot be unmuted. If so, tracks will be muted consecutively starting with the last-numbered track. Patching for Mixed Recording This section explains patching when you’re using the Mixed Recording method. 1 Call the RECORD screen Mixed page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. The RECORD screen Mixed page lets you send the signals of the input channels via two stereo buses (bus 1 and bus 2) to one to four tracks you specify. This page contains the following items. E F Bus 1, Bus 2 These four lines indicate the bus 1 L/R and bus 2 L/R signal routes. This shows the recording-source input channels whose signals are being sent to bus 1/bus 2, and the recording-destination tracks to which the bus 1/bus 2 signal are being sent. F H SAFE button When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, all input channel and track channel assignments will be cancelled. This will also execute the MUTE CLEAR (G) operation. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAFE button. 2 Move the cursor to the Input Select area, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/ [DEC] keys to select an input that you want to patch to an input channel. 11 Patching and signal flow 3 Move the cursor to the symbol for the desired recording-source input channel, and press the [ENTER] key. A B The symbol will be highlighted, and the corresponding input channel will be connected to bus 1. 4 Press the [ENTER] key repeatedly at the C same cursor location as in step 3 to select the send-destination for the signal of that input channel. D G H 1 Input Select Here you can select the inputs that will be patched to input channels 1–8 or 9–16. You can choose from the same inputs as in the RECORD screen Direct page. B Input channels This area indicates the connection status of input channels 1–16. C Tracks This area indicates the connection status of tracks 1– 24. You can switch track muting on/off by moving the cursor to the track number and pressing the [ENTER] key. Each time you press the [ENTER] key, the screen will change as follows. A Off E Bus 2 L/R On B Bus 1 L/R On C Bus 1 L On F Bus 2 L On G Bus 2 R On D REMAIN This indicates the remaining recordable time. E DIGITAL IN Here you can assign the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to an input channel. The available choices and operations are the same as in the RECORD screen Direct page. 102 AW2400 Owner’s Manual D Bus 1 R On To A Input signal patching HINT A Connected to Bus 1 L • You can also perform steps 3–4 by repeatedly pressing the [INPUT SEL] key (or the input channel’s [SEL] key). • The [INPUT SEL] keys always control input channels 1–8, regardless of the settings of the Layer section. • If an input channel is selected as a recording-source, its assignment to the stereo bus will automatically be turned off, and it will be connected via bus 1 or bus 2 so that it can be monitored by the track channel. B Connected to Bus 2 L 5 In the same way, select other input channels as recording-sources. 6 Move the cursor to the symbol for the desired recording-destination track, and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm whether you want to initialize the channel parameters. C No Connection To A You can select up to four tracks as recording-destinations. Bus 1L/bus 2L can be connected to odd-numbered tracks, and bus 1R/bus 2R can be connected to even-numbered tracks. The [SEL] key of the connected track channels will blink red, indicating that they are in record-ready mode. You can select the bus signal to be input by repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] key in the same way as for the input channels. For example if you move the cursor to the symbol for track 1 and repeatedly press the [ENTER] key, the screen will change as follows. 11 HINT • You can also perform this operation by repeatedly pressing the track channel’s [SEL] key. • EQ and dynamics setting will be set to a flat state for track channels corresponding to tracks that are selected as a record destination. • When a single track is selected as the record destination the pan of the corresponding track channel will automatically be set to center. When paired tracks are selected as the record destination the pan settings of the odd- and even-numbered tracks will automatically be set to left and right, respectively. Patching and signal flow 7 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. • To cancel all connections, move the cursor to the SAFE button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • The track numbers of muted tracks will be displayed as (mute), but you can still record to muted tracks. • Since 24-bit songs can have a maximum of 12 play tracks (→ p. 165), tracks 13–24 are muted and will not play back. 8 Proceed with recording. For details on recording, refer to “Track recording” (→ p. 47). AW2400 Owner’s Manual 103 Output signal patching Output signal patching The PATCH screen Output page lets you select the signals that are assigned to the AW2400’s [OMNI OUT] jacks, [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector, and the output channels of an I/O card installed in the I/O slot. C D.ST OUT ASSIGN field To call this page press the Work Navigate section [PATCH] key. This page contains the following items. C Move the cursor to this field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will be assigned to the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector. Press the [ENTER] key to finalize your selection. You have the following choices. Display --ST L&R A B Type of signal No assignment Stereo output channel L&R AUX 1&2, 3&4 AUX send master 1&2, 3&4 EFF 1&2, 3&4 Effect send master 1&2, 3&4 TR 1&2–23&24 Track channel direct outputs 1&2–23&24 HINT • The signal of the stereo bus is always assigned to the [STEREO OUT] jacks. 11 1 OMNI OUT ASSIGN field Patching and signal flow Move the cursor to fields 1–4 and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will be assigned to each [OMNI OUT] jack. Press the [ENTER] key to finalize your selection. You have the following choices. Display --ST L/ST R Type of signal No assignment Stereo output channel L/R AUX 1–4 AUX send master 1–4 EFF 1–4 Effect send master 1–4 TR 1–24 Track channel direct outputs 1–24 B OPTION I/O SLOT OUT ASSIGN field Move the cursor to fields 1–16 and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the signal that will be assigned to each output channel of a digital I/O card installed in the I/O slot. Press the [ENTER] key to finalize your selection. You have the following choices. Display --ST L/ST R Type of signal No assignment Stereo output channel L/R AUX 1–4 AUX send master 1–4 EFF 1–4 Effect send master 1–4 TR 1–24 INS*1 Track channel direct outputs 1–24 Insert send *1. “INS” will appear only if SLOT1–SLOT16 is selected for INSERT EFF in the CH VIEW screen View page. If you attempt to change “INS” to a different item in the PATCH screen Output page, a popup message (“Used As Effect Insert!”) will appear, and you won’t be able to execute the change. In order to change this, you will first have to defeat the selection for the corresponding output channel in the CH VIEW screen View page. 104 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 12 Channel Operation This chapter describes procedures for displaying and operating the parameters for individual channels as well as for saving and recalling data library settings for individual settings. Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels If you access the CH VIEW screen View page, you can not only see the signal flow for the selected channel, but also adjust the mix parameters within the displayed signal path. Immediately after pressing the [VIEW] key the signal flow of the currently selected channel will appear on the display. You can select any other channel to be displayed by using the Layer section keys to select a mixing layer, and the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to select individual channels. The items included in the individual channel displays are as follows. ■ Track channels 1–24 E G H I A B F C 12 D ■ Input channels 1–16 E G H I J L A B F C K Channel Operation To call this page press the Selected Channel section [VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [VIEW] key. ■ Effect return channels 1–4 D H I A L K F C D L K AW2400 Owner’s Manual 105 Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels ■ Stereo output channel E ■ Effect send master channels 1–4 G H A E A F D F K 1 INITIALIZE button ■ Bus master channels 1, 2 E K Initializes all parameters for the currently displayed channel. G HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the INITIALIZE button. A B Channel Pair Indicator Indicates whether the displayed channel is part of a pair or not. You can also move the cursor to this indicator and press the [ENTER] key to turn pairing on or off. 12 Channel Operation D F C PHASE button, GATE button • PHASE button ..... Switches the phase (polarity) of the input signal. Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to switch between normal (N : NORMAL) and reverse (R : REVERSE) polarity. K ■ AUX send master channels 1–4 E • GATE button (input channels only) ................. Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to turn the gate for that channel on or off. Refer to “Using the Gates” on page 151 for details. G D ATT button, EQ button • ATT button........... Move the cursor to this knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/ [DEC] keys to adjust the attenuation as required (range: -96–+12dB). This capability can be used to attenuate the pre-EQ signal level to prevent clipping in the EQ stage. A B D F • EQ button ............ Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to turn the EQ for that channel on or off. Refer to “4-band EQ” on page 149 for details. K 106 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels E COMP Move the cursor to the symbol below COMP and press the [ENTER] key to turn the compressor for that channel on or off or select the compressor insert point. Press the [ENTER] key repeatedly to sequentially select the following insert points. A Before the channel EQ G INSERT EFF This parameter is used to insert an internal effect to a specified point in the channel, or to specify an insert point for insertion of an external effect. If you move the cursor to the field to the right of INSERT EFF and press the [ENTER] key, a popup window will appear allowing selection of an internal effect or I/O channel on an optional I/O card. HINT • For details on insert effect operation refer to “Inserting an Effect Into a Channel” on page 119. • When SLOT1–16 is selected the specified channel insert point is assigned to the corresponding channel on an optional I/O card installed in the AW2400. This assignment is shown in the PATCH screen Output page OPTION I/O SLOT OUT ASSIGN field. B Before the channel fader • You can move the cursor to the insert point and press the [ENTER] key to reverse the order of the COMP and an INSERT EFF. H PAN/BAL knob Move the cursor to this knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to pan the channel signal to the stereo bus or bus 1 and bus 2 (for stereo input channels this functions as a balance control). The effect return channel L and R signals can be adjusted individually. These knobs are linked to the PAN/EQ screen knobs (→ p. 147). C After the channel fader D Compressor off I BUS1, BUS2, ST To A Refer to “Using the Compressors” on page 152 for details. HINT • You can move the cursor to the insert point and press the [ENTER] key to reverse the order of the COMP and an INSERT EFF. NOTE • Since no EQ is provided on the effect send master channels, the compressor can be inserted either pre-fader or post-fader. F ON/OFF, LVL knob • ON/OFF ..........Move the cursor to this position and press the [ENTER] key to turn the channel on or off. This function is linked to the channel [ON] keys. • LVL knob ........Move the cursor to this knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the channel level. This function is linked to the channel faders. J REC TR Displays the input channel to track assignment, as specified in the RECORD screen Direct page. K Level meter The level meters display input channel, track channel and effect return channel input levels, as well as stereo output channel, bus master channel, AUX send master channel, effect send master channel output levels. 12 Channel Operation Move the cursor to any of these points and press the [ENTER] key to turn assignment of the channel signal to the corresponding bus – bus 1, bus 2, or stereo bus – on or off. L AUX, EFFECT Move the cursor to the appropriate knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust send levels to AUX bus 1–4 or effect bus 1–4 over a range of from – ∞ to +10dB. You can also move the cursor to one of these knobs and press the [ENTER] key to turn the corresponding send off. Further, if you move the cursor to the signal path above the knob and press the [ENTER] key you can switch between pre-fader (PRE) and post-fader (POST) send. These functions are linked to the AUX and EFFECT screens (→ p. 111, 115). NOTE • Signals cannot be sent to the effect buses from an effect return channel. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 107 Channel Library Operation Channel Library Operation The mix parameters for individual channels can be saved to and recalled from dedicated libraries as required. This is particularly handy when you want to use the settings made for one channel in one or more other channels as well. Library numbers 0–1 contain read-only data for channel initialization, while numbers 2–64 can be used save and recall your own data. The following parameters can be saved to the channel library. • • • • • • Channel on/off Channel attenuator EQ on/off EQ parameter settings Dynamics processor on/off Dynamics processor parameter settings • • • • • Fader position AUX bus 1–4 pre-fader/post-fader setting AUX bus 1–4 send level Effect bus 1–4 pre-fader/post-fader setting Effect bus 1–4 send level NOTE • Pan, effect parameter, and the INSERT EFF settings displayed in the CH VIEW screen View page are not saved to the channel library. 1 Selected channel Calling the Channel Library screen 12 Displays the selected channel. Channel Operation Channel library save and recall operations are carried out via the CH VIEW screen Library page. To call this page press the Selected Channel section [VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after pressing the [VIEW] key. This page contains the following items. C B EQ/COMP Displays the EQ and compressor settings for the selected channel. C Input/Output meter Displays the input levels for the selected channel and adjacent odd-even channel pairs. When the stereo output channel is selected, however, this meter displays the L/R output channel levels. D Buttons These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL, STORE, and CLEAR functions. E List A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected for operation. An icon indicates read-only library settings. A B F SOURCE CHANNEL Displays the source channel for the settings shown in the library list. “GENERAL” appears for preset data. NOTE • When data cannot be recalled to the selected channel the “Recall Channel Data Conflict!” error message will appear. F 108 AW2400 Owner’s Manual E D Channel Library Operation Changing Channel Library Names Storing Channel Library settings Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in the libraries. The procedure for storing library settings is as follows. 1 Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by either pressing the [VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [VIEW] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library setting to be edited. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing. 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. NOTE • New settings cannot be stored to read-only library settings (those marked with an icon). • If you select and store to a library number that contains previouslystored data, the previous data will be overwritten. 1 Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by either pressing the [VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [VIEW] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library number to which the settings are to be stored. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for storage. 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. Channel Operation 12 HINT • Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button. 4 Enter a name for the selected library set- ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for details on name entry). This confirms and enters the new name. HINT • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button. 4 As required, enter a name for the selected library setting, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for details on name entry). The library setting will be stored. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 109 Channel Library Operation Recalling Channel Library settings The procedure for recalling stored library settings is as follows. 1 Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by either pressing the [VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [VIEW] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library setting to be recalled. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall. 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear. Erasing Channel Library settings The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as follows. NOTE • Read-only library settings (those marked with an be erased. icon) cannot 1 Call the CH VIEW screen Library page by either pressing the [VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [VIEW] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library setting to be erased. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected to be erased. 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming the clear operation will appear. 12 HINT Channel Operation • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button. 4 To actually recall the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the ENTER] key. HINT • Parameters that do not exist in the target channel will be ignored. • INSERT EFF settings as shown in the CH VIEW screen View page are not included in the channel libraries and will not change. • When the target channel is a stereo channel or a channel pair, all parameters except phase and pan will be set to the same values (phase and pan will not change). • When data cannot be recalled to the selected channel the “Recall Channel Data Conflict!” error message will appear. 110 AW2400 Owner’s Manual HINT • Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button. 4 To actually erase the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Chapter 13 AUX This chapter describes operation of the AW2400 AUX buses. About the AUX buses The AW2400 has 4 auxiliary buses that can be assigned to the [OMNI OUT] jacks, the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connectors, or the outputs of an optional I/O card installed in the I/O slot. This can be useful for sending signals to external signal processing gear, or for monitoring specific signals within a mix. Signals from the following channels can be sent to the AUX buses. • Input channels • Track channels • Effect return channels HINT • Refer to “Output signal patching” on page 104 for details on assigning the AUX bus outputs. • AUX 1/2 and 3/4 can be assigned as pairs (→ p. 58). AUX send levels can be adjusted either by using the graphic knobs in the AUX screen or by using the Selected Channel section controls. ■ Adjusting AUX send levels via the AUX screen AUX send levels can be adjusted using the graphic knobs in the AUX screen. 1 Press the Selected Channel section [AUX] key so that its indicator lights. The AUX screen will appear. NOTE • If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF, press one of the Selected Channel knobs (1–4) after pressing the [AUX] key so that its indicator lights. For details about the AUTO DISPLAY function refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 210. AUX 13 AUX Send Level Adjustment 2 To adjust levels for the AUX1 bus press Selected Channel knob 1. The AUX1 screen will appear. To adjust levels for the AUX2–AUX4 buses press the corresponding Selected Channel knob (2–4) in the same way. If the [AUX] key is lit pressing one of the Selected Channel knobs will take you directly to the corresponding AUX screen. 3 Press the Display section [F1] (Input/RTN page) or [F2] (Track page) key. The page displays and the items they contain are as follows. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 111 AUX Send Level Adjustment ● AUX screen Input/RTN page 4 Move the cursor to a knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the send level. The range is from – ∞ – +10 dB. HINT A • Knobs can also be selected via the Layer section keys, [INPUT SEL] keys, and [SEL] keys. • Move the cursor to a knob and press the [ENTER] key to turn that AUX send on or off. 5 To set the point from which the AUX send B 1 INPUT field Adjusts the AUX send levels for input channels 1–16. The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be used to select pre-fader or post-fader send. B RETURN field Adjusts the AUX send levels for effect return channels 1–4. The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be used to select pre-fader or post-fader send. signal will be derived in each channel, move the cursor to the appropriate PRE/ POST button and press the [ENTER] key to select either PRE (pre-fader: the signal is sent from a point before the channel fader) or POST (post-fader: the signal is sent from a point after the channel fader). 6 To adjust send levels to a different AUX bus, press the corresponding Selected Channel knob to switch to the appropriate screen, then adjust the send levels as described in steps 4 and 5, above. ● AUX screen Track page ■ Adjusting AUX send levels via the Selected Channel section 13 Selected Channel section knobs 1–4 can be used to directly adjust AUX send levels. AUX A 1 Use the Layer section keys, [INPUT SEL] keys, and [SEL] keys to select the channel for which AUX send level is to be adjusted. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [AUX] key so that its indicator lights. The AUX screen will appear. 1 TRACK field Adjusts the AUX send levels for track channels 1–24. The PRE/POST buttons below each knob can be used to select pre-fader or post-fader send. 3 Rotate Selected Channel knobs 1–4. This will adjust the AUX send level for the channel selected in step 1. HINT • While the [AUX] key is lit you can press one of the Selected Channel knobs repeatedly to switch between the display pages for the corresponding AUX screen. For example, pressing Selected Channel knob 1 repeatedly will switch back and forth between the AUX1 screen Input/RTN page and the Track page. • By pressing the [F1] or [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key you can simultaneously set all channels in the display to PRE ([F1]) or POST ([F2]). 112 AW2400 Owner’s Manual HINT • If AUTO DISPLAY function is disabled the AUX screen will not appear automatically when step 2, above, is performed, but the AUX send levels can still be adjusted by rotating the Selected Channel knobs. • If AUTO DISPLAY function is disabled a popup window will appear when a value is adjusted for easy visual confirmation, regardless of the display that is showing at the time. Using external effects with the AUX buses Using external effects with the AUX buses External effect processing gear connected via the [OMNI OUT] jacks can be used in place of the internal effects. The example given in this section describes the procedure for applying an external mono-in/stereo-out reverb processor to a track channel via the AUX1 bus. 1 Lower the [STEREO] fader to the – ∞ position. 2 Call the PATCH screen Output page by pressing the Work Navigate section [PATCH] key. This page is used to assign the AW2400’s various internal signals to the output connectors. 3 Move the cursor to the OMNI OUT ASSIGN 1 field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select “AUX1”. This assigns the AUX1 bus signal to [OMNI OUT] jack 1. 5 Press the Selected Channel section [AUX] key so that its indicator lights, then press Selected Channel knob 1. The AUX1 screen will appear. 6 Press the Display section [F2] key to display the Track page. The send levels from the track channels to the AUX1 bus can be adjusted via this page. 7 Set the knobs for each channel to an appropriate level, and set the PRE/POST buttons as required. At this point the track channel signals are being sent to the [OMNI OUT] jack 1 via the AUX1 bus, and are being fed to the external effect processor’s input. 8 Use the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key to call the RECORD screen Mixdown page, and set the parameters as shown in the illustration. HINT • The AUX bus signals can also be assigned to an I/O card installed in the I/O slot, or the [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector. 13 AUX 4 Referring to the diagram, connect the external signal processor to the AW2400. Effect Processor [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 3/4 [OMNI OUT] jack 1 [MONITOR OUT] jacks With these settings track channels 1–24 and the effect signals returned to input channels 3/4 are mixed and sent to the stereo bus. AW2400 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 113 Using external effects with the AUX buses ● Signal Flow When Using an External Effect Processor Effect Processor Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 x Number of play tracks x Number of play tracks [MIC/LINE INPUT] jacks 3/4 AUX bus 1 Stereo bus 13 Mixer section AUX 9 Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/ EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then press Selected Channel knob 1 as many times as necessary to display the PAN/EQ screen Input/RTN page. 10 Set the input channel 3 and 4 pan controls fully left and right, respectively. This ensures full stereo effect from the stereo effect processor. You could also pair inputs 3 and 4 for easy stereo control. NOTE • With this setup be sure to set all AUX send levels for input channels 3 and 4 to – ∞ to prevent feedback. 114 Input channels Track channels AUX Bus master channel [OMNI OUT] jack 1 Stereo output channel Track 5 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 11 Raise the [STEREO] fader to the 0-dB level and, while playing back the song, adjust the input level of the external effect processor as well as the input levels of input channels 3 and 4 using the [GAIN] knobs. If necessary return to step 7 and readjust the send levels from the track channels to the AUX1 bus as required. You can also adjust the AUX1 bus master level by selecting the appropriate layer and fader via the Layer section [MASTER] key and channel [SEL] key, or by using the CH VIEW screen View page LVL knob. 12 Turn the RECORD screen Mixdown page REC button on and begin the actual mixdown process. Chapter 14 Effects In this section we’ll cover operation of the AW2400’s internal effects. About the Internal Effects The AW2400 has four independent multi-effect processors built in (Effect 1–4). The internal effects can be used in the following two ways. ■ Channel Insertion This method uses the mixer section’s effect “sends” and “returns”. To apply an effect to a channel the channel’s effect send controls are used to send the signal to the input of Effect 1–4 via the corresponding effect bus. The output from the effect processor used is returned to the stereo bus or bus 1/bus 2 via the corresponding effect return channel (Effect Return 1–4), and is mixed with the direct sound. In this case an effect is inserted into a channel’s signal path in order to apply the effect only to that channel. The effect sound is mixed with the direct channel signal within the channel itself and then sent to the stereo bus or a recorder track. Please note that an effect which has been inserted into one channel cannot be simultaneously inserted into another channel or used via the effect sends and returns. Effects can be inserted on the following channels. The following diagram shows the input and output signal flow for effects 1–4. Mixer section Effect 1 Effect return channel 1 Effect 2 Effect return channel 2 Effect 3 Effect return channel 3 Effect 4 Effect return channel 4 Effect bus 3 Input channels Track channels Stereo output channel Bus master channels AUX send master channels Effects can be inserted at any of the following three points in a channel (the diagram shows an input channel). 1 Before the EQ stage (pre-EQ). B Between the EQ stage and fader (post-EQ 14 pre-fader). Effect bus 1 Effect bus 2 • • • • • Effects ■ Effect Sends and Returns Input channels 1–16 C After the fader (post-fader). A B C Track channels 1–24 Effect bus 4 PHASE GATE EQ ATT ON LVL PAN HINT • In addition to the effects provided by the four effect processors, the AW2400 provides a “Pitch Fix” function for correcting the pitch of vocal tracks. Refer to “Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix)” on page 124 for details. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 115 Recalling Effect Library settings Recalling Effect Library settings The first step in using an effect is to recall a preset from the effect library that uses the required effect. HINT • The effect type for a recalled effect library preset cannot be changed. For this reason even when you want to program an effect from scratch it is necessary to begin by recalling an effect library preset that includes the effect type you want to use. 1 Press the Selected Channel section [EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights. The EFFECT screen will appear. 2 Press Selected Channel knob 1–4, corre- sponding to the effect processor to which you want to load the effect. While the EFFECT screen is showing Selected Channel knobs correspond to effect processors 1–4. So, for example, the EFFECT1 screen will be selected if you press Selected Channel knob 1. 4 Move the cursor to the List, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library setting to be recalled. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall. 5 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear. HINT • If the AUTO DISPLAY function is set to OFF (→ p. 211), the EFFECT screen will not appear automatically when step 1, above, is performed. In this case press one of the Selected Channel knobs (1–4) will cause the corresponding EFFECT screen to appear. 3 Press the Display section [F4] key to call the FX Lib. Page. 14 You can select the effect library preset to be loaded into the effect processor selected in step 2 via this page. Effects List RECALL button • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button. 6 To actually recall the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The library setting will be recalled. HINT • Library numbers 1–43 contain pre-programmed read-only effect presets. • Refer to “Effect Library Operations” on page 122 for details on the effect library RENAME, STORE, and CLEAR functions. 116 HINT AW2400 Owner’s Manual Applying Effects via Send and Return Applying Effects via Send and Return The procedure for applying effects 1–4 via the effect sends and returns is described below. NOTE • An effect that has been inserted into a channel cannot be simultaneously used with the effect sends and returns. • All effects can be used via the effect sends and returns in new song with the initial default settings. If an effect has been inserted in a specific channel it can be removed and freed for use with the sends and returns as described in “Inserting an Effect Into a Channel” on page 119. 1 Referring to the instructions in “Recalling ● EFFECT screen FX Track page Effect Library settings” on page 116, recall an effect library preset that is based on the effect you want to use. A 2 Make sure that the Selected Channel sec- tion [EFFECT] key is engaged and its indicator is lit. 3 Make sure that the EFFECT screen selected in step 1 is showing. Selected Channel knobs 1–4 correspond to EFFECT screens 1–4. Press the appropriate knob to call the desired screen. 4 To adjust the send level to an effect bus The FX Input page allows adjustment of the input channel send levels, while the FX Track page allows adjustment of the track channel send levels. The items included in the FX Input and FX Track pages are as follows. 1 TRACK field Allows adjustment of the effect send levels for track channels 1–24. You can also select the point from which the send signal is derived via the PRE/POST button below each knob. HINT ● EFFECT screen FX Input page A 14 Effects start by pressing the Display section [F1] key to call the FX Input page, or the [F2] key to call the FX Track page. • When the [EFFECT] key is lit you can repeatedly press a Selected Channel knob to sequentially select the related effect pages. • By pressing the [F1] or [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key you can set all channels within the display to PRE ([F1]) or POST ([F2]) with one operation. 5 Move the cursor to an effect send knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the effect send level. HINT • By moving the cursor to an effect send knob and pressing the [ENTER] key the effect send for that channel can be turned off or on. • Effect send levels can also be adjusted while the [EFFECT] key is engaged by pressing the [INPUT SEL] or [SEL] key for the target channel and using Selected Channel knobs 1–4 to adjust the send level to the corresponding effect processor. 1 INPUT field Allows adjustment of the effect send levels for input channels 1–16. You can also select the point from which the send signal is derived via the PRE/POST button below each knob. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 117 Applying Effects via Send and Return 6 Move the cursor to the PRE/POST button and press the [ENTER] key to switch the location from which the signal will be sent from each channel to the Effect buses. Select PRE for pre-fader or POST for post-fader send. 7 To adjust the effect mix balance (the bal- ance between the effect and direct signals), press the [F3] key. The EFFECT screen FX Edit page will appear. 8 Use MIX BALANCE field knob to adjust the balance between the direct and effect signals. When applying an effect via the effect sends and returns the effect mix level is usually set to 100% (effect sound only). HINT • The effect parameters can be edited as required via the FX Edit page. Refer to “Editing Effects” on page 121 for details. 9 The effect send master levels can be adjusted via faders 9–12 after pressing the Layer section [MASTER] key. When the MASTER mixing layer is selected faders 9– 12 control the master send levels for effects 1–4, respectively. You can view and edit the various parameters for each master send channel by pressing [SEL] key 9–12 and then calling the CH VIEW screen View page. 14 Effects 118 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 10 To adjust the effect return levels press the Layer section [IN 1-8] or [IN 9-16] key, and use faders 9–12 to adjust the corresponding return levels. When mixing layer IN 1-8 or IN 9-16 is selected faders 9–12 control the return levels for effects 1–4, respectively. You can view and edit the various parameters for each return channel by pressing [SEL] key 9– 12 and then calling the CH VIEW screen View page. HINT • See “Displaying the mix parameters for individual channels” on page 105 for details. Inserting an Effect Into a Channel Inserting an Effect Into a Channel Effects can be directly inserted into the signal path of specified channels as follows. 1 Referring to the instructions in “Recalling Effect Library settings” on page 116, recall an effect library preset that is based on the effect you want to use. 2 Call the CH VIEW screen View page by 4 Move the cursor to the field to the right of INSERT EFF on the display and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window allowing selection of the effect to be inserted as well as an I/O card channel to and from which the signal will be sent/received will appear. either pressing the Selected Channel section [VIEW] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [VIEW] key. The signal flow and mix parameters for each channel are displayed in this page. 3 Use the Layer section keys, [INPUT SEL] The signal flow for the selected channel will be displayed. To insert an effect that is to be used on just one instrument connected to the AW2400, for example, insert the required effect into the appropriate input channel. The example diagram shows input channel 1 selected for effect insertion. INSERT EFF The popup window includes the following items. • NONE .............. No effect inserted. • EFF1–4............ Effect 1–4 inserted. NOTE • The same effect number can not be selected for multiple channels. • Inserted internal effects cannot be used with the effect sends and returns. • SLOT1–16 ....... Select one of these options to insert an external effect unit via an I/O card. If SLOT1 is selected, for example, Output channel 1 of the I/ O card is used to send the signal to the external effect processor, and input channel 1 of the same card is used to return the output from the external effect processor to the channel. 14 Effects keys, [SEL] keys, or [STEREO SEL] key to select the channel into which the effect is to be inserted. HINT • When SLOT1–16 is selected for a stereo channel (stereo output or bus master), an odd-even channel pair (“SLOT 1-2” for example) will be assigned to the stereo channels and inserted. NOTE • Effects cannot be inserted into the effect send master or effect return channels. When an item other than NONE is selected, an abbreviation of the insert destination will appear to the right of the colon (“ : ”). The meanings of the abbreviations are as follows. Abbreviations SEND (EFF1–4 only) IN1–IN16 TR1–TR24 Descriptions Effect send/return operation (not inserted in any channel). Inserted in input channel 1–16. Inserted in track channel 1–24. STEREO Inserted in stereo output channel. BUS1–2 Inserted in bus master channel 1, 2. AUX1–4 Inserted in AUX send master channel 1–4. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 119 Inserting an Effect Into a Channel 5 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the desired effect and/or I/O card channel, then press the [ENTER] key. ■ Internal effect inserted pre-EQ (input channel) When EFF1–4 is selected the corresponding effect will be inserted in the signal path. 6 To select the insert point move the cursor to the symbol below INSERT EFF on the display and press the [ENTER] key. Press [ENTER] repeatedly to sequentially select the pre-EQ → post-EQ pre-fader → post-fader insert points. When an effect and compressor are both inserted at the same point you can move the cursor directly to the insert point and press the [ENTER] key to swap the positions of the effect and compressor. Insert points The signal flow is as follows. ● INSERT EFF = EFF 1 Effect 1 7 Call the EFFECT screen FX Edit page or FX PHASE GATE EQ ATT ON LVL Lib. page to adjust the internal effect mix balance (the balance between the effect and direct signals). 8 Use the MIX BALANCE field knob to balance the effect and direct sound as required. ■ External effect inserted pre-EQ (input channel) 14 When SLOT1–16 is selected an external effect processor can be inserted into the channel via the selected I/O card channel. In this case the signal flow is as follows. Effects ● INSERT EFF = SLOT1 External effect processor Output channel = 1 Input channel = 1 I/O card PHASE GATE EQ ATT 120 AW2400 Owner’s Manual ON LVL A setting of 0% produces only the direct sound while a setting of 100% produces only the effect sound. HINT • Refer to “Editing Effects” on page 121 for details on the EFFECT screen FX Edit page. Editing Effects Editing Effects The AW2400 internal effect parameters can be edited to create precisely the effect your music requires. 1 Referring to the instructions in “Recalling Effect Library settings” on page 116, recall an effect library preset that is based on the effect type you want to use. 2 Make sure that the Selected Channel sec- tion [EFFECT] key is engaged and its indicator is lit. 3 Make sure that the EFFECT screen selected in step 1 is showing. Selected Channel knobs 1–4 correspond to EFFECT screens 1–4. Press the appropriate knob to call the desired screen. 4 Press the Display section [F3] key to The EFFECT screen FX Edit page will appear. This page contains the following items. B C • BYPASS button............Switches effect bypass on/ off. • MIX BALANCE knob ....Sets the balance between the effect and direct signals. 0% produces direct sound only, while 100% produces effect sound only. D USED AS Indicates how this effect is being used. “EFF1”– “EFF4” indicate that the effect is internally connected to the mixer section via send/return. If the effect is inserted into a specific channel the name of the channel into which the effect is inserted will be shown (e.g., “INPUT 1”). E Level Meter Displays the effect input or output level. Select input (IN) or output (OUT) via the button above the meters. access and edit the effect parameters. A C MIX BALANCE field F Parameter page In this area you can edit the various effect parameters. The content and range of the parameters will depend on the currently selected effect type. D 5 Move the cursor to the effect parameter that you want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to edit the value. Depending on the effect type, this area may be used to show multiple parameter pages. In this case repeatedly press the CURSOR [ ] key to access the parameter page that contains the parameter you want to edit. F 14 Effects E 6 To switch effect BYPASS on/off, move the cursor to the BYPASS button and press the [ENTER] key. HINT 1 NAME Indicates the name of the currently selected effect. • Edited effect settings can be stored in the effect library (→ p. 123). B TYPE Indicates the type of the currently selected effect. NOTE • You cannot change the effect type via this page. If you want to use a different type you will need to recall a library setting that uses the desired effect type. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 121 Effect Library Operations Effect Library Operations The AW2400 provides an effect library for storage and recall of effect settings. Effect library operation is described in this section. Call the Effect Library Screen Effect library save and recall operations are carried out via the EFFECT screen FX Lib. page. 1 C RECALL button Recalls the library data that is selected in the list. Refer to “Recalling Effect Library settings” on page 116 for details on recalling from the library. D STORE button Stores the current effect settings into the location selected in the list. Press the Selected Channel section [EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights. The EFFECT screen will appear. 2 Press one of the Selected Channel section knobs 1–4. The corresponding EFFECT screen will appear. HINT • The Effect Library is common to all four internal effect processors, so save and recall operations can be carried out from any EFFECT screen. E CLEAR button Deletes the library data that is selected in the list. F List This area lists the effect data stored in the library. Library numbers 001–043 are read-only, and original settings can be saved to numbers 044–128. The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is selected for operation. An icon indicates a readonly library setup. 3 Press the [F4] key to access the FX Lib. page. All effect library operations are carried out via the FX Lib. page. The items in this page are as follows. A Changing Effect Library Names Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in the Effect library. 1 Call the FX Lib. page. Refer to “Call the Effect Library Screen” on page 122 for details. 14 Effects 2 Move the cursor to the list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library setting to be edited. B C D E The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing. 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. F 1 Current effect information This is the same as the EFFECT screen FX Edit page (→ p. 121). B RENAME button Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can edit the name of the library selected in the list. HINT • Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button. 4 Enter a name for the selected library set- ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for details on name entry). This confirms and enters the new name. 122 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Effect Library Operations Storing Effect Library settings Save the current effect setting from any one of the effect processors (1–4) to the effect library. NOTE Erasing Effect Library settings The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as follows. NOTE • New settings cannot be stored to read-only library numbers (those marked with an icon). • If store to a library number that contains previously-stored data, the previous data will be overwritten. 1 Press the Selected Channel section [EFFECT] key so that its indicator lights. 2 Press one of the Selected Channel section knobs 1–4 to access EFFECT screen for the effect processor that will be the store source. 3 Call the FX Lib. page. Refer to “Call the Effect Library Screen” on page 122 for details. 4 Move the cursor to the list, and use the • Read-only library settings (those marked with an be erased. icon) cannot 1 Call the FX Lib. page. Refer to “Call the Effect Library Screen” on page 122 for details. 2 Move the cursor to the list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library setting to be erased. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected to be erased. 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming the clear operation will appear. [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library number to which the settings are to be stored. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for storage. 5 Move the cursor to the STORE button and The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. HINT • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button. 6 If necessary enter a name for the selected HINT • Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button. 4 To actually erase the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. 14 Effects press the [ENTER] key. library setting, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for details on name entry). The library setting will be stored. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 123 Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix) Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix) The Pitch Fix function can be used to “fix” the pitch of a vocal track, or create chorus parts based on a main vocal part. An Auto Punch-in/out function is also provided which allows a specified segment of a vocal track to be processed and replaced. Pitch Fix can be useful in the following situations: • Correct the pitch of slightly flat or sharp vocals. • Correct the pitch of a specified segment or phrase of a vocal track using the Auto Punch-in/out function. • Create a chorus part using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch of the chorus part — a third above the main vocal, for example. • Change the key of a vocal track. NOTE • If you will be using an external MIDI keyboard to specify the pitch for vocal pitch correction or a chorus part, the MIDI OUT connector of an appropriate MIDI keyboard must be connected to the AW2400 [MIDI IN] connector via a standard MIDI cable. In this case the MIDI screen Setting 1 page PORT RX (reception) parameter must be set to MIDI. Keyboard connection can also be made via the USB port. 1 When you want to specify a segment of a vocal track to be processed and recorded to another track, it is necessary to specify the In and Out points and press the [AUTO PUNCH] key for the Auto Punch-in/out function. 3 Move the cursor to the PITCH FIX button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will appear which allows you to select the source edit track. TRACK field For details on the Auto Punch-in/out function refer to “Auto punch-in/out” on page 70. 2 Call the RECORD screen Bounce page by 14 either pressing the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. Effects 4 Specify the source edit track in the TRACK field, then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will appear which allows you to select the record destination track and the virtual track. TRACK field V.TR field PITCH FIX button NOTE • Different tracks must be specified for the source and destination. 124 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix) 5 Specify the record destination track in the TRACK field and the virtual track in the V.TR field, then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. This will select the PITCH FIX display. B A D E C CONTROL field Selects the method of pitch correction/shift from the three listed below. • SCALE ................. Specify the scale via received MIDI notes to adjust the pitch. For example, if you play a chord on a connected MIDI keyboard, the pitch is shifted by the notes included in the chord. • NOTE.................... The pitch is changed according to the received MIDI note. • PANEL.................. This lets you adjust the pitch by specifying a scale from the keyboard on the display. D PARAMETERS field F NOTE • The following occur when the PITCH FIX mode is engaged: • No other display can be selected from the panel keys. • Record track assignments are ignored. • No internal effects other than Pitch fix can be accessed. • The Automix function is temporarily disabled. • MIDI program and control change messages cannot be received. 1 PITCH FIX field • EXIT button ................Move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER] to exit from the PITCH FIX mode and return to the Bounce page. • BYPASS button .........To monitor the vocal track prior to pitch correction, move the cursor to this button and press [ENTER]. B TRACK field • FROM TR ....................Indicates the track to be edited (the source track). This field is only for display, and cannot be edited. • TO TR/TO V.TR ...........Indicates the track and virtual track to which the processed source track will be recorded (the destination track). This field is only for display, and cannot be edited. • KEEP FORMANT button ................. When this button is engaged the basic character (timbre) of the voice will not change when the pitch is corrected. • DETECT knob ..... Determines the pitch detection speed. The shorter the setting, the more quickly the pitch is detected allowing faster response. The longer the setting, the more slowly the pitch is detected which can result in abrupt, step-like pitch changes. • RATE knob .......... This determines the speed of pitch change. The faster the setting, the more quickly the pitch is changed so that pitch correction more accurately tracks the original signal. When this is set to “000,” there is no pitch change. 14 Effects C • TYPE .................... Set this to an appropriate value to maximize the accuracy of the pitch correction. Generally this should be set to Normal, but for low-pitched vocals it might be preferable to use the Male setting, and for high-pitched vocals try the Female setting. • PITCH knob ......... This determines the octave setting of the pitch-adjusted signal. The range is from -2 to 2 octaves in semitone steps. The integer and fraction segments of the value are set separately. • FORMANT knob.. This determines the vocal character (timbre) of the pitchadjusted signal. Positive (+) values result in a higher voice character and negative (–) values result in a deeper voice character. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 125 Correcting a Vocal Track (Pitch Fix) E FIX NOTE field These parameters are only available when PANEL is selected in the CONTROL field. • KEY.......................Sets the key of the graphic keyboard on the display. • SCALE..................Sets the scale of the graphic keyboard on the display: CHROMATIC, MAJOR, MINOR, or CUSTOM. When CUSTOM is selected the keyboard’s buttons can be used to directly specify a scale for pitch correction. F MASTER TUNING field • IN/OUT knob ........The IN knob sets the reference pitch before correction, and the OUT knob sets the reference pitch after correction. The integer and fraction segments of the value are set separately. NOTE • The source track (the signal before correction) cannot be monitored while the PITCH FIX mode screen is showing. Also note that the record destination (the corrected signal) can only be monitored when the recorder is set to the record mode. • When Auto Punch-in/out is engaged, you can monitor the destination channel during playback even when not recording. • To check the signal before pitch correction, engage the BYPASS button to temporarily disable the Pitch Fix effect. 10 Adjust the DETECT, RATE, and PITCH parameters as required while recording the song. If NOTE is selected in the CONTROL field, you can use a MIDI keyboard to specify the pitches for pitch correction in real time while recording. This capability can be useful when creating a harmony vocal track based on the original vocal melody. NOTE HINT • When the BYPASS button is engaged the signal before pitch correction is output unaffected, regardless of the IN and OUT knob settings. 6 Raise the [STEREO] fader and the fader of the source track channel to about 0dB on the scale. 7 Raise the fader of the destination track channel to about 0dB on the scale. NOTE 14 • The fader of the destination track — the track to which the processed vocal track will be recorded — has no effect on the recorded signal. The source track fader determines the final balance, so set it with care. Effects 8 To set the scale for pitch correction select PANEL in the CONTROL field and specify the key in the FIX NOTE field. For example, if PANEL is selected in the CONTROL field and CHROMATIC is selected in the FIX NOTE SCALE field, pitch will be corrected to the nearest note in the chromatic (semitone) scale. You can also specify the notes to be used for pitch correction by selecting CUSTOM in the FIX NOTE SCALE field and specifying the notes via the on-screen keyboard. • For optimum effect use the DETECT knob in addition to the RATE knob in order to set the “depth” of the pitch correction effect. • You can create “robot voice” type effects by setting the RATE and DETECT knobs to high values and using a MIDI keyboard to trigger sudden pitch changes. 11 When the end of the song is reached, rewind the song and press the PLAY [ key. ] The recorded pitch-corrected track will play back with the other recorded tracks (the original uncorrected track will not play back). If you’re not satisfied with what has been recorded, press the [UNDO/REDO] key to undo the recording and go back to step 9. 12 Move the cursor to the EXIT button and press [ENTER]. A popup window will appear asking you to confirm that it’s OK to exit from the PITCH FIX mode. 9 Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song to the beginning, then press the PLAY [ ] key while holding the REC [●] key. Song playback will begin and the processed data will be recorded to the destination track. The corrected signal can be monitored via the record destination track channel. 126 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 13 To return to the Bounce page move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The PITCH FIX mode will be exited and the Bounce display will appear. Chapter 15 Track operations and editing This chapter explains how to use and edit the tracks of the recorder section. About the AW2400’s tracks The AW2400 has the following types of track. ● Audio Tracks ● Trigger Tracks The physical tracks used to record and play back audio data are called “audio tracks,” or simply “tracks.” The AW2400 has twenty-four audio tracks. The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys and faders to be used to start and stop playback of recorded tracks. When the Trigger Track function is active pressing a track channel [ON] key begins playback of the corresponding track from the beginning of the song to the end of the data recorded on that track. ● Stereo Track Independently from audio tracks 1–24, the AW2400 has a “stereo track” that records and plays a stereo audio signal. The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown track for recording the final mix. ● Virtual Tracks Each audio track 1–24 and the stereo track consists of eight tracks. Each of these eight tracks is called a “virtual track.” For the audio tracks and the stereo track, only one virtual track can be recorded or played at any time. The diagram below shows the concept of virtual tracks. The horizontal rows indicate audio tracks 1–24, and the vertical columns correspond to virtual tracks 1–8. The shaded areas indicate the virtual track that is currently selected for recording or playback. 15 Audio tracks 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 Track operations and editing Virtual tracks 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Virtual tracks Stereo track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 127 Audio track operations Audio track operations This page contains the following items. About audio tracks Audio tracks are physical recording areas used to record and play back audio data. The AW2400 lets you use 24 audio tracks. In a 16-bit song you can play back up to 24 tracks simultaneously, and in a 24-bit song you can play back up to 12 tracks simultaneously. However, the number of tracks that can actually be played back simultaneously is limited by the number of tracks that are currently in record-ready mode. Please note that putting more tracks in record-ready mode will forcibly mute a corresponding number of playback tracks. The following table shows the number of tracks that can be simultaneously recorded/played for a 16-bit or 24-bit song. Song Bit Depth 16 bits 24 bits Max. Simultaneous Record Tracks Max. Simultaneous Play Tracks 16 8 : : 1 23 0* 24* 8 4 : : 1 11 0* 12* * For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two, and the number of simultaneous playback tracks is 24 for 16-bit songs, or 12 for 24-bit songs. 15 Track operations and editing 128 For example in a 16-bit song, each track you place in record-ready mode will decrease the number of simultaneously-playable tracks by one. (Muting will begin with higher-numbered tracks.) If you’ve placed the maximum of sixteen tracks in record-ready mode, a maximum of eight tracks can be played back simultaneously. If you want to return a muted track to playable condition, you must first reduce the number of tracks that are in recordready mode, and then defeat muting on the track you want to play back. Viewing all audio tracks In the TRACK screen View page you can view all tracks to see whether they contain data, and switch muting on/off for each track. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. AW2400 Owner’s Manual A G H B C D E F 1 TRACK Here you can select the track to be controlled in the screen. Choose from 1–24 (audio tracks 1–24) or ST (stereo track). The number and name of the virtual track selected for the current track are shown below this field. B MUTE button You can move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to switch muting on/off for the currently selected track. C RENAME button You can move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to access the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can edit the name of the currently selected track. D WAVE button If you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the waveform of the currently selected track will be displayed. For details, refer to “Finding a location while viewing the waveform” (→ p. 95). E REMAIN This indicates the remaining recordable time. F Metronome button/knob Here you can switch the metronome on/off and adjust the volume. The volume can be adjusted in a range of -96 to +12 dB. For details, refer to “Using the Metronome” (→ p. 62). G MUTE indicator If a track is muted, its MUTE indicator changes to “●”. H Track View This area shows whether tracks 1–24 contain data, and indicates the marker locations. Audio track operations Muting a specific audio track 1 Call the TRACK screen View page. 2 Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the number of the track you want to mute. 3 Move the cursor to the MUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. Muting will be switched on/off. If a track is muted, the MUTE symbol changes to “●.” When you press the [ENTER] key once again, muting will be defeated and the MUTE symbol will change to “ .” Switching the virtual track of an audio track 1 Call the TRACK screen Virtual TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. This page contains the following items. A HINT • This mute function switches muting on or off for the recorder track playback. This also affects the number of simultaneous playback tracks in the recorder section (→ p. 128). It’s a good idea to mute all unused tracks. B • In some cases, depending on the number of tracks that are in record-ready mode, you won’t be able to un-mute a track. In this case, decrease the number of tracks that are in recordready mode, and then un-mute the desired track. C 1 Virtual tracks Indicates the status of virtual tracks 1–8. The virtual track that is currently selected for each track is indicated by a “●” symbol. Of the virtual tracks that are currently not selected, those that have been recorded are indicated by “ ”, and those that have not yet been recorded are indicated as “–”. HINT • When the AW2400 is in its default state, virtual track 1 is selected for every track. B Virtual track name This indicates the name of the virtual track selected by the cursor. This will indicate “-NO REC-” for tracks on which nothing has been recorded. C Tracks Indicates the track number 1–24. 2 Use the cursor keys to select the virtual 15 Track operations and editing • Since 24-bit songs allow a maximum of 12 playback tracks, mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 13-24. track number that you want to assign to the desired track. 3 Press the [ENTER] key. The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will now be used for recording/playback. HINT • To switch the virtual track of the stereo track, use the TRACK screen Stereo TR page. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 129 Audio track operations • Stereo track operations Editing virtual track names for an audio track Here’s how to assign a name to the virtual track that is currently selected for an audio track. 1 Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. 2 Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the number of the track whose name you want to edit. You can edit the name of the currently-enabled virtual track for the track you selected in the TRACK field. 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the virtual track. 4 Edit the name of the virtual track, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. (For details on editing a name → p. 32) TRACK field The edited name will be applied. RENAME button Stereo track operations 15 Track operations and editing 130 About the stereo track Independently from audio tracks 1–24, the AW2400 has a “stereo track” that records and plays a stereo audio signal. The stereo track is used mainly as a dedicated mixdown track for recording the final mix. The signal of the stereo output channel is always connected to the stereo track; you will always be able to record the signal of the stereo bus simply by putting the stereo track in record-ready mode. You cannot record audio tracks while recording the stereo track. While the stereo track is playing, audio tracks 1–24 will be forcibly muted. In the TRACK screen Stereo TR page you can check whether the stereo track contains data, and switch the virtual track for the stereo track. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. AW2400 Owner’s Manual This page contains the following items. B A F E C G H D I Stereo track operations This switches playback of the stereo track on/off. B INPUT CH MIX/MUTE button This selects whether the signals of the input channels will be monitored (MIX) or will not be monitored (MUTE) while the stereo track is playing. C Track View This area graphically indicates whether the stereo track contains data, and indicates the marker locations. D Virtual tracks Here you can select the virtual track that is assigned to the stereo track. The currently selected virtual track is indicated by a “●” symbol. Of the other virtual tracks, those that have been recorded are indicated by “ ”, and those that have not been recorded are indicated by “–”. E Level meter This indicates the output level of the stereo track. The fader level is numerically indicated at the left of the meter, and the hold level is numerically indicated at the right. F PRE EQ button Pre-EQ levels (levels prior to the EQ stage) are displayed when this button is on. G PRE FADER button Pre-fader levels (levels prior to the faders) are displayed when this button is on. H POST FADER button Post-fader levels (levels after the faders) are displayed when this button is on. I PEAK HOLD button This button switches the level meter peak hold function on/off. Recording on the stereo track Here’s how to send the signals from track channels, input channels, and effect return channels to the stereo bus, and record the mixed signal onto the stereo track. 1 Call the RECORD screen Mixdown page by either pressing the Quick Navigate section [RECORD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [RECORD] key. When you access this page, record-ready status will be defeated for all audio tracks, and only the stereo track will be recordable. Use the Mixdown page to patch the channels that you want to record on the stereo track to the stereo bus. For details on patching, refer to page 75. 2 Move the cursor to the REC button and press the [ENTER] key to turn the button on. The panel [STEREO SEL] key will blink red. This blinking indicates that the stereo track is in recordready mode. 3 Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song. Then hold down the REC [●] key and press the PLAY [ ] key. The song will begin playing, and the playback will be recorded on the stereo track. 4 When you reach the end of the song, press the STOP [■] key. To listen to the recorded result, refer to “Playing back the stereo track” (following section). HINT • If desired, you can use the [UNDO/REDO] key to cancel the recording that was made on the stereo track (→ p. 64), or switch virtual tracks and record another take. Playing back the stereo track Here’s how to play back the stereo track that you’ve recorded. 1 Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. 2 To play back the stereo track, switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button to ON. When this button is on, the output of the stereo track is sent to a point immediately before the [STEREO] fader, and can be monitored from the [STEREO OUT] jacks, [MONITOR OUT] jacks, and [PHONES] jack. At this time, record-ready status for all tracks will be defeated. HINT • If any audio tracks are in record-ready mode, a popup window will ask you to confirm that record-ready status will be cancelled. 15 Track operations and editing 1 ST TR MODE ON/OFF button • If the INPUT CH MIX/MUTE button is set to MIX, you’ll be able to monitor the signal of the input channels even while the stereo track is playing. NOTE • EQ and dynamics processing are not applied to the stereo track playback. REC button AW2400 Owner’s Manual 131 Stereo track operations 3 Press the RTZ [ ] key to rewind the song, and press the PLAY [ ] key. The stereo track will play back. Use the [STEREO] fader to adjust the monitor level. To return to normal playback of the audio tracks, switch the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button back OFF. HINT • If the ST TR MODE ON/OFF button is ON, pressing the [RECORD] key while the recorder is stopped will display a popup window asking you to confirm that you want to defeat stereo track playback mode. If you want to do so, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Editing the name of a virtual track for the stereo track Here’s how to edit the name of the virtual track currently selected for the stereo track. 1 Call the TRACK screen View page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. TRACK field Switching the virtual track of the stereo track RENAME button 1 Call the TRACK screen Stereo TR page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. 2 Use the CURSOR keys to select the virtual track number that you want to assign. The currently selected virtual track is indicated by a “●” symbol. Of the other virtual tracks, those that have been recorded are indicated by “ ,” and those that have not yet been recorded are indicated by “–.” 3 Press the [ENTER] key. 15 The “●” symbol will be displayed at the position of the newly-selected virtual track. This virtual track will now be used for recording/playback. use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to make it read “ST.” You can edit the name of the virtual track that is currently enabled for the stereo track. 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the virtual track. 4 Edit the name of the virtual track, move the Track operations and editing 132 2 Move the cursor to the TRACK field, and cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. (For details on entering a name → p. 32) The edited name will be finalized. AW2400 Owner’s Manual The Trigger Track Function The Trigger Track Function Operation of the Trigger Track function is described in this section. About Trigger Track The “Trigger Track” function allows the track [ON] keys and faders to be used to start and stop playback of recorded tracks. This is ideal for performance situations in which you want to switch phrases or patterns in real time, or when you need to start background music on cue, for example. When the Trigger Track function is active pressing a track channel [ON] key begins playback of the corresponding track from the beginning of the song to the end of the data recorded on that track (blank sections in the middle of the track will be played normally.) The track is played once. Recorded tracks can be registered in up to four groups (A– D), and playback of those tracks can then be started and stopped as a group. In this case pressing the [ON] key for any track in the group will start playback of the entire group. Press the [ON] key a second time to stop playback of the group. Recorded section Track 1 (Group A) Track 2 (Group A) Track 3 (Group A) Playback start Playback stop Track 1 (Group A) Stop Play [ON] key out Track 2 (Group A) Stop Play [ON] key lit Track 3 (Group A) If you press the [ON] key once again during playback the playback will be stopped. Pressing the STOP [■] key will stop playback of all tracks. Stop Any [ON] key for tracks 1–3 Playback stop The faders can be used to start playback instead of the [ON] keys (the Fader Start function). Playback of a track (or group including the track) will start from the beginning of the song when a track fader for which the Fader Start function is turned on is raised above the – ∞ position. Playback will stop at the end of the recorded data. Playback can be stopped by returning the fader to the – ∞ position. or [ON] key lit [ON] key out STOP [■] key Playback start Playback stop AW2400 Owner’s Manual 15 Track operations and editing Playback start Play 133 The Trigger Track Function NOTE • When the Trigger Track function is active the Transport, Locate, and Locate/Navigate section keys (with the exception of the STOP [■] key) will not function, and normal record/playback operations are not available. HINT • The Trigger Track settings are saved individually with each song. • When a song is saved with the Trigger Track function active, the Trigger Track function will still be active and a message indicating that status will appear when that song is later recalled. Using the Trigger Track Function either pressing the Work Navigate section [TRACK] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [TRACK] key. This page contains the following items. B press the [ENTER] key to engage the Trigger Track mode. A popup window asking you to confirm that you want to exit from the normal track mode will appear. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. • Since a maximum of 12 tracks can be played back for 24-bit songs (→ p. 165), mute cannot be disengaged for tracks 13– 24 and they will remain in the normal track mode. 1 Call the TRACK screen Trigger page by A 2 Move the cursor to the TRIGGER button and NOTE The Trigger Track function can be used as described below. C D FADER START button When this button is on playback of the corresponding track (or group including the track) will start when the track fader is raised above the -∞ position. Playback will stop at the end of the recorded data. Playback can be stopped by returning the fader to the -∞ position. This button can only be turned on or off when the Trigger Track mode is engaged. D 3 To set the group to which each track belongs move the cursor to the GROUP field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/ [DEC] keys. The Trigger Track mode allows each track to be assigned to one of four groups A–D so that playback of entire groups of tracks can be started and stopped by simply pressing one [ON] key or operating one fader. HINT • “_” will be displayed for tracks that are not assigned to a group, and those tracks will be triggered independently. • Channel pairs to be used for linked stereo operation should be assigned as paired channels beforehand (→ p. 58). 15 Track operations and editing 4 To engage the Fader Start function for a track move the cursor to the FADER START button and press the [ENTER] key. 1 NORMAL button For normal audio track operation this button should be turned on (normal track mode). B TRIGGER button Turn this button on to engage the Trigger Track mode (trigger track mode). C GROUP Move the cursor to this field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the trigger track group for each track. Groups can only be assigned when the Trigger Track mode is engaged. 134 AW2400 Owner’s Manual When the Fader Start function is on, playback of the corresponding track (or group including the track) will start when the track fader is raised above the – ∞ position. Playback can be stopped by returning the fader to the – ∞ position. HINT • The Fader Start function can be turned off for all tracks by pressing the [F1] key while holding the [SHIFT] key (“–” will be displayed for all tracks). • The Trigger Track group A–D settings can be copied to fader groups (→ p. 82) by pressing the [F2] key while holding the [SHIFT] key. This can be useful for linking fader start operation of multiple trigger tracks. The Trigger Track Function • Editing tracks 5 Use the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] and [TRACK 13-24] keys to select the mixing layer to be operated. 6 Start playback of the target track or group by pressing the appropriate [ON] key or operating the appropriate fader. The [ON] keys of triggered tracks will light during playback. If you press a lit [ON] key playback of that track or the group that includes that track will stop. Pressing the STOP [■] key will stop playback of all tracks. NOTE • If a channel is turned off by pressing the [ON] key before the Trigger Track mode is engaged, operating the appropriate [ON] key or fader does not play back the channel. 7 Move the cursor to the NORMAL button and press the [ENTER] key to exit from the Trigger Track mode and return to the normal mode. A popup window asking you to confirm that you want to exit from the Trigger Track mode will appear. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • If you attempt to select the RECORD, EDIT, SOUND CLIP, CD, AUTOMIX, or USB screen while the Trigger Track mode is engaged a confirmation popup window will appear. To actually move to the selected screen move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] to switch to the normal track mode. You cannot select any of the above screens during song playback. Editing tracks This section explains how to edit the audio data recorded on an audio track. The AW2400 provides various editing commands that let you edit the audio tracks that have been recorded. Using these commands, you can specify the track or region that you want to edit, and delete or move data. You can use special commands to import audio data or WAV files from outside the AW2400, or to export WAV files to an external device. ● PITCH (Pitch Change) ● ERASE Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track without affecting its length. Erases the data of the specified region. ● DELETE Deletes the data of the specified region. Any data that follows the deleted region will be moved forward by the corresponding distance. ● INSERT Inserts blank space into the specified region. ● COPY Copies the data from the specified region to the desired location of the desired track. ● MOVE Moves the data from the specified region to the desired location of the desired track. The move-source data will be erased. ● EXCHANGE Exchanges data between the specified tracks. ● IMPORT CD AUDIO Imports audio data (CD-DA) from CD-R/RW media in the CD-RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400. ● IMPORT CD WAV Imports a WAV file from CD-R/RW media in the CD-RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400. ● IMPORT USB WAV Imports a WAV file copied from a computer into the “Transport” folder into an audio track of the AW2400. ● IMPORT TRACK 15 Track operations and editing The AW2400 provides the following editing commands. Imports audio data recorded in another song into an audio track of the current song. ● EXPORT Exports the specified region of an audio track to a WAV file in the “Transport” folder. ● TIME COMP (Time Compression/Expansion) Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio track without affecting its pitch. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 135 Editing tracks • Basic procedure for track editing Here are some ways in which you can use these editing commands. 1 Erase unwanted regions You can use the ERASE command to erase just a specific region of a specific track. For example, this provides a convenient way to erase a few wrong notes from a performance, or to eliminate noise that occurred while an instrument was not playing. B Change the structure of the tracks You can use the EXCHANGE command to exchange an entire track with another track. By using this command you can bring tracks of widely separated track numbers closer to each other for easier operation during mixdown. You can use the COPY or MOVE commands to copy/ move the specified region of a track to a different track. This is convenient when you have recorded a solo part among two or more virtual tracks, and want to assemble the best parts into a single track. C Change the structure of the song You can use the DELETE or COPY commands to delete/ copy entire tracks, changing the structure of the song itself. Even after all parts of the song have been recorded, you can use this method to adjust the length of the song, for example by shortening the number of measures or increasing the number of choruses. D Create special effects You can also use editing commands to create special effects. For example, you can copy a guitar or vocal solo part to another track and use the PITCH CHANGE command to slightly detune one of these tracks, creating a chorus effect without using the internal effect processor. By applying the PITCH CHANGE command to a drum track to lower the pitch, you can create a unique lo-fi effect. Basic procedure for track editing Here is the basic procedure for using a track editing command. The procedure is essentially the same for all track editing commands. 15 ■ Select the editing command 1 Editing command 1 Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either B Locator/marker Indicates the approximate location of the currently set locate points and markers. This also indicates whether recorded data exists in the current track of each track. Indicates the currently selected editing command. pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. Track operations and editing This screen displays the following information. A B C Parameters Sets various parameters (track/virtual track number, editing region, etc.) required in order to execute the command. The type of parameters and the ranges of the settings will depend on the command that is selected. D EXECUTE button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to execute the editing command. 2 Move the cursor to the edit command field, use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select an editing command, and press the [ENTER] key. The displayed content of the page will depend on the edit command you selected. C 136 AW2400 Owner’s Manual D Basic procedure for track editing ■ Select the track(s) to edit After you choose an editing command, the next step is to specify the track(s) that will be edited. 3 To select the track for editing, move the cursor to the TR (Track) field in the left of the screen, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys. You can set the Start/End parameters in terms of the counter display format (the value at the left) or in units of measures/beats (the value at the right). Move the cursor to the digit that you want to change, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the value. NOTE • If you selected the sound clip as the object for editing, the region from the start point of the sound clip to its end point will always be the object of editing. If necessary, you should specify the start point and end point of the sound clip beforehand. 6 To specify the end of the region to be TR field In the TR field you can select the following types of data. • 1–24 .................. An audio track • 1&2–23&24....... A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered audio tracks • ST ..................... The stereo track • ALL ................... Audio tracks 1–24 edited, move the cursor to the desired digit of the End field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys. HINT • If you move the cursor to the Start or End parameter and press the [ENTER] key, the current counter location will be input. Alternatively, you can recall a locate point or marker to move to that location in the song, and then press the [ENTER] key to input that location as the value of the Start or End parameter. • CLIP.................. Sound clip NOTE 4 Select the virtual track that you want to edit. If you selected an audio track (1–24, 1&2–23&24, ST) in step 3, the V.TR field will appear at the right, allowing you to select the virtual track number. Move the cursor to this field and select a virtual track number 1– 8. • For some commands, you will also need to specify a location in the editing-destination track. In the same way as described above, move the cursor to the counter display format field or the measure/beat field, and specify the location. ■ Execute the command When you have finished setting parameters, execute the command. and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation. HINT • For some commands, you will need to specify both source and destination tracks. ■ Specify the editing region For most commands, you will need to set the Start (the beginning of the edited region) and End (the end of the edited region) parameters to specify the region that will be affected by the command. 5 To specify the beginning of the region to be edited, move the cursor to the desired digit of the Start field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys. The Start/End parameters are displayed at the right of the TR field. Start parameter (beginning of the region to be edited) 8 Move the cursor to the OK button to exe- 15 Track operations and editing 7 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, V.TR field cute the command, or move the cursor to the CANCEL button to cancel without executing. Then press the [ENTER] key. HINT • Even after you press the [ENTER] key to execute the command, you can press the [UNDO/REDO] key to return to the state prior to executing the command. You can use this function to compare the original data with the results produced by executing the command. NOTE End parameter (end of the region to be edited) • If as a result of executing a command, a track no longer contains any recorded data, the name of that track will change to “-NO REC-“. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 137 List of editing command List of editing command This section lists all the commands that are provided in the EDIT screen, and explains their parameters. ERASE DELETE Erases the data in the specified region (between Start and End) of the specified track(s). A B C D Start 1 2 3 Deletes the data from the specified region of the specified track(s). This command is similar to ERASE, but differs in that the data that follows the specified region will move forward to fill the gap. 4 End 5 6 A 7 B C Start ERASE 1 2 D 8 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 2 3 End 4 5 7 8 6 7 8 DELETE ■ Parameter list Parameter A TR 15 Range 1 Explanation 1–24 A single audio track 1&2–23&24 A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track ALL Tracks 1–24 B V.TR *1 1–8 Virtual track number C Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region D End Specify a point End of the edited region Track operations and editing *1. V.TR can be selected only if TR=1–24, 1&2–23&24, or ST. 2 3 ■ Parameter list The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command. INSERT Inserts blank space into the specified region. Data following the location of the Start parameter will be moved backward to make room. C A B D Start 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 INSERT 1 2 3 6 4 5 Size ■ Parameter list The parameters are the same as for the ERASE command. However instead of D End, use D Size to specify the region that will be inserted. 138 AW2400 Owner’s Manual List of editing command ■ Parameter list Copies the specified region of data to the specified location of the specified track. A B C D Parameter EF H I J Start K End 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E To Start From Track 1 2 3 F G ALL (OVER) ALL (INS) Tracks 1–24 (insert into the copy-destination) CLIP Sound clip contents (the range is specified by CLIP) B From V.TR *1 1–8 Copy-source virtual track number C From Start Specify a point Copy-source starting location D From End Specify a point Copy-source ending location On/off (indicated by “lock” icon) Switch the measure lock function for From Start/From End Lock *2 F End Measure 4 5 6 *2 H G To TR *3 COPY 7 8 H To V.TR *1 To Track A B 4 5 6 F G H NOTE • If you set From TR to ALL (INS), the copy-destination track will be moved backward by the size of the copied region. Note that this may cause the bar lines specified by the tempo map to change their location relative to the audio data. • If you set From TR to other than ALL (INS), the copy-destination track will be overwritten, and the data that follows the copied region will not be moved backward. HINT • Audio data recorded in the sound clip (→ p. 43) can be copied to an audio track by using the COPY command. • The metronome of the sound clip is independent of the song tempo. If you record into the sound clip with the intention of copying it to an audio track, you should match the tempo ahead of time. A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered audio tracks The stereo track Lock To Track 1&2–23&24 Tracks 1–24 (overwrite onto the copy-destination) E Start Measure From Track Explanation A single audio track ST A From TR G Range 1–24 1–24 A single audio track 1&2–23&24 A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track 1–8 Copy-destination virtual track Specify a point Copy-destination starting location J COPY TIMES 1–99 Number of copies K GRID *4 ON/OFF (indicated by highlighted GRID text when on) Switch the grid function I To Start *1. V.TR can be selected only if From TR=1–24, 1&2–23&24, or ST. *2. Measure lock function (E Start Measure Lock, F End Measure Lock) Measure Lock allows a measure/ beat to be specified within a region to be copied so that it aligns with the specified measure/beat in the copy destination. For example, in a situation in which you have an abstract or rubato segment before the intempo performance begins, you can “Measure Lock” the beginning of the in-tempo segment so that it is copied to the appropriate location in the destination. To use the measure lock function, move the cursor to the measure display field of From Start or From End, specify the measure/beat location that will be the reference point for the matching, and press the [ENTER] key. A “lock” icon will appear beside the value that you specified, and the measure lock function will be turned on for From Start or From End. (This can be turned on for either Start or End, not both.) While the measure lock function is on, the value of that measure display format setting will be fixed, and cannot be modified. In this state if you use the counter display format field to specify the From Start and From End locations, and execute the copy, the location you specified in the measure display format field will be aligned with the copy-destination To Start setting. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 15 Track operations and editing COPY 139 List of editing command ● When measure lock = on MOVE Measure Lock Start End From Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To Track A B C D E F G H To Start Moves the specified region of data to the specified location of the specified track. This is similar to COPY, but differs in that the move-source data will be deleted. A B C D EF COPY From Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To Track A 4 5 6 E F G H To Start *3. The possible choices for G To TR (copy-destination track) will depend on your selection for A From TR (copy-source track). If A From TR is a single audio track 1–24, you will be able to select only a single audio track 1–24. If A From TR is CLIP, ST, 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks), you will be able to select only ST or 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks). If A From TR is ALL OVER or ALL INS, you cannot select TO TR. *4. Grid function (K GRID) When this function is on, the To Start location cannot be specified in counter-display format; it can be specified only in measure/beat units. By using the Grid function in conjunction with the Measure Lock function, you can easily copy measure/beat-length segments of data whose divisions do not fall precisely on the measure or beat. G H I K End Start From Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To Track A B C D E F G H To Start MOVE From Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To Track A B 4 5 6 F G H ■ Parameter list The parameters are the same as for the COPY command. However, you cannot select CLIP for A From TR. Also, there is no J COPY TIMES setting. 15 Track operations and editing 140 AW2400 Owner’s Manual List of editing command EXCHANGE TIME COMP (Time Compression/Expansion) Exchanges data between the specified tracks. A B C Adjusts the length of the specified region of an audio track, without changing the pitch. B A D E C F E From Track To Track 1 A B C 2 D 3 E 4 5 6 A B C To Track D 1 E 2 F ● If you set Ratio = 50% F From Start EXCHANGE From Track D 1 2 From End 3 4 A F 3 B C D TIME COMP/EXP 4 5 6 1 A 2 3 4 B C D B C D C D To END ■ Parameter list A From TR ● If you set Ratio = 200% Range Explanation 1–24 A single audio track 1&2–23&24 A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track B From V.TR 1–8 Exchange-source virtual track number C Name Up to eight alphanumeric characters Exchange-source virtual track name (display only) 1–24 A single audio track 1&2–23&24 A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered audio tracks E To V.TR 1–8 Exchange-destination virtual track number F Name Up to eight alphanumeric characters Exchange-destination virtual track name (display only) D To TR *1 *1. The items that you can select in D To TR (copy-destination track) will depend on the A From TR (copy-source track) setting. If A From TR is a single audio track 1–24, you can select only a single audio track 1–24. If A From TR is ST or 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks), you can select only 1&2–23&24 (a pair of adjacent audio tracks). From Start 1 2 From End 3 A TIME COMP/EXP 1 2 3 4 To END ■ Parameter list Parameter A From TR Range Explanation 1–24 A single audio track 1&2–23&24 A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered audio tracks ST The stereo track B From V.TR 1–8 Virtual track number C From Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region D From End Specify a point End of the edited region E TO END Specify a point Specify the length to which the selected region will be compressed or expanded F To Ratio 50–200% Specify the percentage by which the selected region will be compressed or expanded NOTE • The track names will not be exchanged. 4 15 Track operations and editing Parameter NOTE • TO END and To Ratio are linked, so that editing one field will cause the other field to change. • You cannot set TO END or To Ratio to a value that would cause the ratio to exceed 50–200 percent. • From Start value and From End value must be at least 45 msec apart. These cannot be set to a shorter interval. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 141 List of editing command PITCH (Pitch Change) IMPORT USB WAV Adjusts the pitch of the specified region of an audio track, without changing the length. B A C D Imports a WAV file copied from a computer into the “Transport” folder into an audio track of the AW2400. For details on the parameters and operation of the IMPORT USB WAV command, refer to “Importing Copied WAV Files From the Computer” (→ p. 234). IMPORT TRACK E From Start F From End EXPORT PITCH CHANGE From Start Imports audio data recorded in another song into an audio track of the current song. For details on the parameters and operation of the IMPORT TRACK command, refer to “Importing audio data from another song” (→ p. 145). From End Exports the specified region of an audio track to a WAV file in the “Transport” folder. For details on the parameters and operation of the EXPORT command, refer to“Copying Exported WAV Files To the Computer” (→ p. 233). PITCH CHANGE MERGE ■ Parameter list Parameter A From TR 15 Range Explanation 1–24 A single audio track 1&2–23&24 A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered audio tracks Track operations and editing ST The stereo track B From V.TR 1–8 Virtual track number C From Start Specify a point Beginning of the edited region D From End Specify a point End of the edited region E NOTE -12 to +12 semitones Specify the amount of pitch change in semitone units F CENT -50 to +50 cents Specify the amount of pitch change in one-cent units (1/100th of a semitone) Audio playback performance can be improved by using this command to merge a number of separate regions (sections of audio data created in separate recording passes) in a specified track into one continuous region. The merge command creates a continuous region from the beginning of the track to the end of the last region on the track, and sections of the track that contained no regions are replaced with audio silence. A IMPORT CD AUDIO Imports audio data (CD-DA) from CD-R/RW media in the CD-RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400. For details on the parameters and operation of the IMPORT CD AUDIO command, refer to “Importing from the CD-RW drive” (→ p. 143). MERGE ■ Parameter list Parameter IMPORT CD WAV Imports a WAV file from CD-R/RW media in the CD-RW drive into an audio track of the AW2400. For details on the parameters and operation of the IMPORT CD WAV command, refer to “Importing from the CD-RW drive” (→ p. 143) 142 AW2400 Owner’s Manual B A From TR B From V.TR Range Explanation 1–24 A single audio track 1&2–23&24 A pair of adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered audio tracks 1–8 Virtual track number Importing audio data/WAV files Importing audio data/WAV files This section explains how to load (import) audio data or WAV files from the CD-RW drive or from the desired track of a different song. Importing from the CD-RW drive CD audio data (CD-DA) or a WAV file from a CD-ROM or CD-R can be imported (loaded) into an AW2400 audio track. After being imported, this data can be handled in the same way as any recorded audio track. 1 Call the UTILITY screen Preference page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [UTILITY] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [UTILITY] key. Immediately after the AW2400 is powered-on, it will be set to prohibit digital recording from an external source or importing from a CD. Before you can import, you will need to disable this prohibition in the UTILITY screen Preference page. 2 Move the cursor to the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button, and press the [ENTER] key. A message will ask you to confirm that you will observe the applicable copyright laws. ● WAV files • ISO9660 Level 1 format CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW* • Mixed Mode CD * The directory name and file name cannot use characters other than uppercase alphanumeric characters and the “_” (underscore) character. 5 Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. 6 Move the cursor to the editing command field, use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/ [DEC] keys to select the desired editing command. Select “IMPORT CD AUDIO” if the import-source is an audio CD or CD-Extra, or select “IMPORT CD WAV” if the import-source is a WAV file. 7 Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the edit command. The READ CD INFO button will appear in the center of the display. The following illustration shows the screen when you’ve selected IMPORT CD AUDIO as the edit command. and if you accept these terms, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The button display will change from DISABLE to ENABLE, and digital recording and importing from a CD will be enabled. NOTE • The CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button will return to the DISABLE setting each time you turn on the power. 4 Insert a CD into the CD-RW drive. You can import data from the following types of media. ● Audio data (CD-DA) • Audio CD • CD-Extra (only the first session of CD-DA) • Mixed Mode CD (only CD-DA data of the second and later tracks) NOTE • If you choose a song whose sample rate is 48 kHz in the IMPORT CD AUDIO command, a message of “Current Song is 48kHz Fs Type.” appears, and you won’t be able to load the audio data. 8 Move the cursor to the READ CD INFO but- Track operations and editing 15 3 Carefully read “Copyright Notice” (→ p. 7), ton and press the [ENTER] key. The display will indicate “Read CD Info...”, and information will be read from the CD inserted in the CDRW drive. Depending on the import-source data, the screen will change as follows. NOTE • If the CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button is set to “DISABLE” in the UTILITY screen Preference page, the display will indicate “CD Import Prohibited!”, and you won’t be able to import from the CD. If this occurs, refer to steps 1–3 and check your settings once again. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 143 Importing audio data/WAV files ● When using IMPORT CD AUDIO A B C ● When using IMPORT CD WAV B A D E C D E G F H F I G H I 1 Track list 1 File list This shows each track of the audio CD inserted in the CD-RW drive, in units of minutes/seconds/frames (1/ 75 second). Move the cursor to the list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to specify the number of the audio track you want to import. Operations in the track list are linked with the From CD TRACK field. This shows the WAV files and folders (directories) stored on the CD. Move the cursor to the list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to specify the WAV file that you want to import. B From CD TRACK Specifies the audio track number (01–99) of the import-source CD. C From Start Specifies the beginning of the data that will be imported, in minutes/seconds/frames (1/75 second). D From End Specifies the end of the data that will be imported, in minutes/seconds/frames (1/75 second). B FILE This indicates the name of the WAV file or directory. The displayed icons have the following meaning. • .........Indicates a WAV file. • .........Indicates a folder in the same level. You can select this icon and press the [ENTER] key to move down one level. • ...........You can select this icon and press the [ENTER] key to move up one level. C TOTAL Indicates the playback length (in units of hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds) of the WAV file. This field is for display only, and cannot be changed. HINT 15 • The “frames” referred to here are the minimum time-axis units used in CD-DA. Do not confuse them with the frames used in MTC or SMPTE. Track operations and editing E LISTEN button You can move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to repeatedly hear the currently selected region of the CD-DA. F To TR Selects the track number into which the data will be imported. If the import-source is an audio CD or a stereo WAV file, you will only be able to select a pair of tracks 1&2–23&24. D TYPE Indicates whether the WAV file is monaural ( ) or stereo ( ). The numerical value at the right indicates the bit depth of the WAV file. This field is for display only, and cannot be changed. E LISTEN/ENTER/UP button If a WAV file is selected, the LISTEN button will be displayed, allowing you to hear the WAV file repeatedly. If a folder is selected, the ENTER button will be displayed, allowing you to move into that folder. If the button is selected, the UP button will be displayed, allowing you to move to the next higher folder. NOTE G To V.TR Selects the virtual track number (1–8) into which the data will be imported. H To Start Specifies the starting location (in counter-display format) of the import-destination to which the data will be imported. I EXECUTE button Executes the import operation. • You cannot audition WAV files whose bit depth or sample rate differs from the current song. F To TR Selects the track number into which the data will be imported. If the import-source is a stereo WAV file, you will only be able to select a pair of tracks 1&2– 23&24. G To V.TR H To Start I EXECUTE button These are the same as for IMPORT CD AUDIO. 144 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Importing audio data/WAV files NOTE • In the case of a Mixed Mode CD, the edit command you use will depend on the data you’re importing. Use IMPORT CD AUDIO to import audio data (CD-DA), or use IMPORT CD WAV to import a WAV file. • You cannot import a WAV file whose bit depth or sample rate differs from the current song. • When the import source is an audio CD or CD Extra disc and the song is 24-bit, the audio data will be automatically converted to 24-bit format during the import operation. • When you move the cursor to the LISTEN button and press the [ENTER] key, there will be a slight time lag while the data is read from the CD before you hear it. 9 Move the cursor to the track list (file list), and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/ [DEC] keys to select the track or WAV file that you want to import. If you’re using IMPORT CD WAV, and the is located at the line enclosed by the dotted line, you can press the [ENTER] key to move to the next lower level. To move to the next higher level, move the cursor to the and press the [ENTER] key. Importing audio data from another song Here’s how you can import audio data from another song saved on the AW2400’s hard disk. 1 Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. 2 Move the cursor to the edit command field, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/ [DEC] keys to select IMPORT TRACK. 3 Press the [ENTER] key to conform your choice of edit command. The screen will change as follows. A B C D E F 10 If you’re using IMPORT CD AUDIO, use From Start/From End to specify the region that will be imported. 11 Use the To TR, To V.TR, and To Start fields to NOTE • If the import-destination contains data, it will be overwritten. Be careful not to overwrite important data by accident. G H I 1 Song List This area lists the songs that are saved on the AW2400’s internal hard disk. In this list, select the song that contains the track you want to import. B Song name 12 When you have finished making settings, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation. C Song size D Song Bit Depth/Sampling Frequency E Song Protect Status F SORT Move the cursor to this box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to choose the order in which you want the songs in the list to appear. • NAME...........Song names in alphabetical order. 15 Track operations and editing specify the track number, virtual track number, and starting location into which the data will be imported. • SIZE .............Song size, from largest to smallest. • OLD..............The order in which the songs were saved, from newest to oldest. 13 To execute the import operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Importing will begin. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, importing will be cancelled. G From TR/From V.TR Here you can select the desired track number (1–24, ST) and virtual track number (1–8) of the importsource song. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 145 Importing audio data/WAV files H To TR/To V.TR Here you can select the track number (1–24, ST) and virtual track number (1–8) of the import-destination song (the current song). If From TR is 1–24, you cannot select ST in the To TR field. If From TR is ST, only ST can be selected. I EXECUTE button Executes the import operation. 4 Move the cursor to the song list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the song that includes the track you want to import. NOTE • You cannot import from a song whose bit depth or sample rate differs from the current song. 5 Move the cursor to From TR/From V.TR, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the track number and virtual track number that you want to import. The track number and virtual track number of the song you selected in step 4 will be assigned as the importsource. 6 Move the cursor to To TR/To V.TR, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the track number and virtual track number of the desired import-destination. NOTE • If the import-destination contains data, it will be overwritten. Be careful that you don’t accidentally overwrite important data. Track operations and editing 15 7 When you’ve finished making settings, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation. 8 To execute the Import operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Importing will begin. If you decide to cancel the Import operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key. 146 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing In this section we’ll cover operation of the channel pan (or balance), equalizer, and dynamics processing controls. Pan Control These controls adjust the “pan” position (or balance on stereo channels) of the input, effect return, track, and stereo output channels. Pan can be adjusted either by using the knobs in the PAN/EQ screen, or by using the physical pan control in the Selected Channel section. ● PAN/EQ Screen Track Page ■ Pan Control via the PAN/EQ Screen Pan operation via the dedicated display screen. 1 Press the Seleceted Channel section [PAN/ EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then press Selected Channel knob 1 to call the PAN/EQ screen. A 2 Press the Display section [F1] (Input/RTN page) or [F2] (Track page) key. The pan operations available via each page are as follows: B ● PAN/EQ Screen Input/RTN Page 1 TRACK field Pan controls for track channels 1–24. B STEREO BAL. field Balance control for the stereo output channel. • You can switch back and forth between the Input and Track pages while the PAN/EQ screen is showing by pressing the [PAN/EQ] key. B 3 Move the cursor to a knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the pan as required. 1 INPUT field Pan controls for input channels 1–16. B EFFECT RETURN field Pan controls for effect return channels 1–4. The pan value range is from L63 (full left)–C (center)– R63 (full right). HINT • Knobs can also be selected via the Layer section keys, [INPUT SEL] keys, [SEL] keys, and [STEREO SEL] key. • You can alternately select the left and right effect return channels by repeatedly pressing the effect return channel [SEL] key. 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing HINT A • The pan “C” (center) setting can be instantly recalled by pressing the [ENTER] key after moving the cursor to a pan knob. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 147 Pan Control 4 The panning for paired channels can be adjusted in three different ways: hold the Display section [SHIFT] key while pressing the [F1], [F2], or [F3] key. • [F1] key — INDIVIDUAL The pan positions of the paired channels can be adjusted individually. • [F2] key — GANG The pan positions of the paired channels are adjusted simultaneously in the same direction, maintaining the relative positions of each channel. • [F3] key — INV.GANG The pan positions of the paired channels are adjusted simultaneously in opposite directions. HINT • This operation can be accessed via both the Input/RTN and Track pages, and affects both pages. ■ Pan Control via the Selected Channel section Adjusting pan via Selected Channel section knob 1. 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the channel for which pan is to be controlled. Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/ 16 2 EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing 148 With the default settings the PAN/EQ screen will appear automatically. The display will not change if the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF. 3 Rotate Selected Channel knob 1 to adjust the pan of the channel selected in step 1. If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF, a popup window showing the current pan setting will appear while knob 1 is being operated. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 4-band EQ 4-band EQ The AW2400 provides 4-band parametric equalization (LOW, LO-MID, HI-MID, HIGH) on the channels listed below. • Input • Effect Return • Track • Stereo Output • Bus Master • AUX Send Master The LO-MID and HI-MID bands provide peaking EQ control, while the LOW and HIGH bands can be used in shelving, peaking or high-pass filter (LOW)/low-pass filter (HIGH) mode. EQ can be adjusted either by calling the PAN/EQ screen and using the graphic knobs, or by using the physical controllers in the Selected Channel section. The EQ/Att. page includes the following items. ■ EQ Control via the PAN/EQ Screen 1 EQ ON/OFF button Adjusting equalization via the PAN/EQ screen. Switches the EQ on/off. 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the channel for which EQ is to be controlled. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/ EQ] key so that its indicator lights. Press Selected Channel knob 2, 3, or 4 and the PAN/EQ screen will appear. 3 Press the Display section [F3] key, or press the [PAN/EQ] key as many times as necessary until the EQ/Att. page appears. A C D E C TYPE field Selects the EQ algorithm type. When the TYPE I button is on the same EQ algorithm that was used in the 02R is selected. The TYPE II button selects the latest EQ algorithm which provides minimum inter-band interference. TYPE II can only be selected for the track channels, stereo output channels, and bus master channels. D Response curve Graphically indicates the approximate response of the EQ. E Output meter Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed through the EQ. F Q knobs F G H Specify the Q (steepness) at which each band (HIGH, HI-MID, LO-MID, LOW) will be boosted or cut. The range is 10–0.10, and higher settings will produce a steeper curve. G F (Frequency) knobs Specify the center frequency of the boost/cut, over a range of 21.2 Hz–20.0 kHz. H G (Gain) knobs Specify the amount of boost/cut, over a range of -18.0 dB to +18.0 dB. 4 To switch the EQ on, move the cursor to the 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing B B ATT. (Attenuation) knob Attenuates the signal immediately before the EQ stage over a range of -96 to 12.0 dB. This is used mainly to prevent the signal from clipping when you use the EQ to boost a specific frequency region. EQ ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER] key. 5 When working on a track channel, stereo output channel, or bus master channel, the EQ type can be selected via the TYPE field. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 149 4-band EQ 6 Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the value. HINT • If you press the [F1] (FLAT) key while holding the [SHIFT] key from the PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page, all G knobs for the currently selected channel will be set to 0.0dB (or OFF). 7 To switch the LOW band type, move the cursor to the LOW band Q knob and continue turning the [DATA/JOG] dial toward the left or right. If you continue turning the Q knob toward the right, the Q knob value will indicate “L.SHELF,” and will switch to the shelving type. If you turn the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob value field will change to a numerical value, and will switch to the same boost/cut type as the HI-MID and LO-MID bands. If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob value field will indicate “HPF,” and the LOW band will function as a high-pass filter. If “HPF” is selected, you can use the LOW band G knob to switch the high-pass filter on/off. 8 To switch the HIGH band type, move the cursor to the HIGH band Q knob and continue turning the [DATA/JOG] dial toward the left or right. 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing 150 If you continue turning the Q knob toward the right, the Q knob value will indicate “H.SHELF,” and will switch to the shelving type. If you turn the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob value field will change to a numerical value, and will switch to the same boost/cut type as the HI-MID and LO-MID bands. If you continue turning the Q knob toward the left, the Q knob value field will indicate “LPF,” and the HIGH band will function as a low-pass filter. If “LPF” is selected, you can use the HIGH band G knob to switch the low-pass filter on/off. HINT • EQ settings can also be recalled from the EQ library, or your own settings can be saved for later recall. See “EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation” on page 154 for details. • If boost in a particular band results clipping on the meters, use the ATT. knob to reduce the signal level. • Selected Channel knobs 2, 3, and 4 also function while the PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page is showing. AW2400 Owner’s Manual ■ EQ Control via the Selected Channel section Using Selected Channel section knobs 2–4 to adjust EQ. 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the channel for which EQ is to be controlled. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [LOW], [LO-MID], [HI-MID], or [HIGH] key, according to the band you want to control. The selected key’s indicator will light, as will the [PAN/EQ] key. With the default settings the PAN/EQ screen will appear automatically. The display will not change if the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF. 3 Rotate Selected Channel knobs 2–4. The parameters for the channels selected in step 1 and the band selected in step 2 will change accordingly. The knobs control the following parameters. Selected Channel knobs 2–4 2 3 4 Parameters Q Frequency (center frequency) Gain If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF, a popup window showing the current EQ settings will appear while Selected Channel knobs 2–4 are being operated. Dynamics Processing Dynamics Processing The AW2400 provides gate and compressor facilities for dynamics processing. In this section operation of the gate and compressor will be explained individually. Using the Gates The gate attenuates signals below a specified threshold level, and can be used to eliminate noise in silent sections of a track. Gates are only provided on input channels. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [DYN] key so that its indicator lights, then press Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4. The DYNAMICS screen will appear. 3 Press the Display section [F1] key, or press the [DYN] key as many times as necessary until the Gate Edit page appears. A C D E F • SELF button ... Selects the signal from the currently selected channel. • CHANNEL button ............ Selects the signal from the channel specified in the box below the button (CH1–CH16). After selecting a channel in the channel box, press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selection. • AUX button..... Selects the signal from the AUX send specified in the box below the button (AUX1–AUX4). After selecting an AUX send in the box, press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selection. D Response curve This graph indicates the approximate response of the gate settings. The horizontal axis of the graph is the input level, and the vertical axis is the output level. E TYPE Indicates the currently selected gate type. The displayed indication has the following meaning. • GATE............... Gate • DUCKING........ Ducking G H B The Gate Edit Page includes the following items. 1 GATE ON/OFF button Switches the gate on/off. B STEREO LINK button Turning this button on links gate operation for paired channels. NOTE • Gate operation can only be linked for adjacent odd and even numbered channels that can be paired. HINT • You cannot change the gate type via this page. If you want to use a different gate type, you must recall a library setting that uses the desired type. For details on recalling library gate settings, refer to “EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation” on page 154. F GR (Gain Reduction) Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the gate processor over a range of -18 dB to 0 dB. G Output meter Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed through the gate processor. H PARAMETER Here you can edit the parameters of the gate processor. The type of parameters and their ranges will differ depending on the gate type. For details on the types of parameter and their function, refer to the appendix. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL] and [SEL] keys to select the channel to which the gate is to be applied. C KEYIN SOURCE field Selects one of the following trigger sources for the gate. 151 Dynamics Processing 4 Move the cursor to the GATE ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER] key to turn the gate on. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the GATE ON/OFF button. 5 Use the STEREO LINK button to turn gate linking for paired channels on or off, and the KEYIN SOURCE field to select a trigger source as required. ■ Compressor Control via the DYNAMICS screen Applying and controlling compression via the dedicated dynamics screen. 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the channel to which compression is to be applied. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [DYN] key so that its indicator lights, then press Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4. The DYNAMICS screen will appear. HINT • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STEREO LINK button. 6 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to edit and use either the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the parameter as required. 3 Press the Display section [F3] key, or press the [DYN] key as many times as necessary until the Comp Edit page appears. A C D E HINT • You can save your current gate settings in the library as described in “EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation” on page 154. F G Using the Compressors Compression can be used to prevent signals from exceeding a preset level in order to avoid distortion, and to smooth out the levels of certain instruments or tracks. The AW2400 provides compression on the following tracks. 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing • • • • • • Input Track Stereo Output Bus Master AUX Send Master Effect Send Master Compression can be controlled either via the knobs in the DYNAMICS screen or the physical controllers in the Selected Channel section. H B The Comp Edit page includes the following items. 1 COMPT ON/OFF button Switches the compressor on/off. B STEREO LINK button Turning this button on links compressor operation for paired channels. NOTE • This item will not appear for the stereo output channel and bus master channels. C POSITION field Specifies the position in the signal chain at which the compressor will be inserted. • PRE EQ................ Before the channel’s EQ stage (except for the effect send master) • PRE FADER ......... Immediately before the channel fader • POST FADER....... Immediately after the channel fader D Response curve This graph indicates the approximate response of the compressor settings. The horizontal axis of the graph is the input level, and the vertical axis is the output level. 152 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Dynamics Processing E TYPE Indicates the currently selected compressor type. The displayed indication has the following meaning. • COMP ...................Compressor • EXPAND ...............Expander • COMP.(H)..............Compander (hard) • COMP.(S)..............Compander (soft) HINT • You cannot change the compressor type via this page. If you want to use a different type, you must recall a library setting that uses the desired type. For details on recalling library compression settings, refer to “EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation” on page 154. F GR (Gain Reduction) Indicates the amount of gain reduction produced by the compressor, in a range of -18 dB to 0 dB. G Output meter Indicates the level of the signal after it has passed through the compressor. H PARAMETER Here you can edit the parameters of the compressor. The type of parameters and their ranges will differ depending on the compressor type. For details on the types of parameter and their function, refer to the appendix. 4 Move the cursor to the COMP ON/OFF button and press the [ENTER] key to turn the compressor on. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ON/OFF button. ■ Compressor Control via the Selected Channel section Applying and controlling compression by using knobs 1– 4 in the Selected Channel section. 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the channel to which compression is to be applied. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [DYN] key so that it’s indicator lights. With the default settings the DYNAMICS screen will appear automatically. The display will not change if the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF. 3 Rotate Selected Channel knobs 1–4. The parameters for the channels selected in step 1 will change accordingly. The knobs control the following parameters. Selected Channel knobs 1–4 1 2 3 4 Parameters TOTAL* Threshold Ratio Gain * TOTAL: Multiple parameters are changed simultaneously to vary the compression effect. If the UTILITY screen Preference page AUTO DISPLAY button is set to OFF, a popup window showing the current compression settings will appear while Selected Channel knobs 1–4 are being operated. 5 Use the STEREO LINK button to turn compressor linking for paired channels on or off, and the POSITION field to select the compressor insert point as required. Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing 16 HINT • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STEREO LINK button. 6 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to edit and use either the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the parameter as required. HINT • You can save your current compressor settings in the library as described in “EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation” on page 154. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 153 EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation The AW2400 includes “setup libraries” that contain preset EQ, gate, and compressor settings that can be recalled and used in a variety of situations. The libraries can also be used to store your own settings for easy recall as needed. HINT • If necessary library recall can be automated using the AW2400’s Automix record/playback capabilities (→ p. 181). The EQ Lib. page includes the following items. Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens 1 Current Response Curve A graphic representation of the current EQ curve for the currently selected channel. This section describes the procedure for accessing the EQ/ Dynamics Library screens and recalling library presets. ■ Recalling EQ Library settings From this library you can recall EQ settings to the currently selected channel. Of library numbers 001–128, numbers 001–040 are read-only, and 041–128 can be used to store your own settings. EQ library operations are performed via the PAN/EQ screen EQ Lib. page. 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the target channel. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [PAN/ EQ] key so that its indicator lights, then press Selected Channel knob 2, 3, or 4. The PAN/EQ screen will appear. 3 Press the Display section [F2] key, or press 16 B Output Meter Displays the signal level after the EQ stage. C EQ Curve A graphic representation of the EQ curve of the currently selected EQ setting in the library list. D List A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected for operation. An icon indicates read-only library settings. NOTE • When a TYPE II EQ library preset is recalled to a channel that only allows TYPE I EQ (the input channels, effect return channels, and AUX channels), the EQ preset will be recalled as TYPE I EQ. E Buttons These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL, STORE, and CLEAR functions. Detailed description of their operation begins on page 156. the [PAN/EQ] key as many times as necessary until the EQ Lib. page appears. Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing C D A B E ■ Recalling Gate Library settings From this library you can recall gate settings to the currently selected input channel. Of library numbers 001– 128, numbers 001–004 are read-only, and 005–128 can be used to store your own settings. Gate library operations are performed via the DYNAMICS screen Gate Lib. page. 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL] and [SEL] keys to select the target channel. 2 Press the Selected Channel section [DYN] key so that its indicator lights, then press Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4. The DYNAMICS screen will appear. 154 AW2400 Owner’s Manual EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation 3 Press the Display section [F2] key, or press the [DYN] key as many times as necessary until the Gate Lib. page appears. B C F ■ Recalling Compressor Library Settings From this library you can recall compressor settings to the currently selected channel. Of library numbers 001–128, numbers 001–036 are read-only, and 037–128 can be used to store your own settings. Compressor library operations are performed via the DYNAMICS screen Comp Lib. page. 1 Use the Layer section, [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys to select the target channel. A 2 Press the Selected Channel section [DYN] D key so that its indicator lights, then press Selected Channel knob 1, 2, 3, or 4. E The DYNAMICS screen will appear. 3 Press the Display section [F4] key, or press the [DYN] key as many times as necessary until the Comp Lib. page appears. The Gate Lib. page includes the following items. 1 Current Type B The currently selected gate type for the currently selected channel. C Meter Displays the signal level after the gate, and the amount of gain reduction. D Gate Curve A graphic representation of the gate curve of the currently selected gate setting in the library list. E List A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected for operation. An icon indicates read-only library settings. F Buttons These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL, STORE, and CLEAR functions. Detailed description of their operation begins on page 156. F A D E The Comp Lib. page includes the following items. 1 Current Type The currently selected compressor type for the currently selected channel. B Current Compression Response A graphic representation of the current compression response for the currently selected channel. The horizontal axis represents input level, and the vertical axis represents output level. C Meter Displays the signal level after the compressor, and the amount of gain reduction. D Compression Curve A graphic representation of the compression curve of the currently selected compressor setting in the library list. 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing B Current Gate Response A graphic representation of the current gate response for the currently selected channel. The horizontal axis represents input level, and the vertical axis represents output level. C E List A list of all the settings stored in the library. The row highlighted by a dotted frame is the setting currently selected for operation. An icon indicates read-only library settings. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 155 EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation F Buttons These buttons execute the RENAME, RECALL, STORE, and CLEAR functions. For details on their operation refer to the following explanations. Recalling EQ/Dynamics Library settings The procedure for recalling stored library settings is as follows. Changing EQ/Dynamics Library Names Here’s how you can change the names of the settings in the libraries. 1 Access the page containing the library settings to be recalled. For details on accessing the various library pages refer to “Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens” on page 154. 2 Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the NOTE • The names of read-only library settings (those marked with an icon) cannot be changed. 1 Access the page containing the library to be edited. For details on accessing the various library pages refer to “Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens” on page 154. 2 Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library setting to be edited. library setting to be recalled. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall. 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear. The following illustration is an example of when the RECALL button is pressed in the PAN/EQ screen EQ Lib. page. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing. HINT • The [INC]/[DEC] keys can also be used to select library settings. 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button. 4 To actually recall the selected setting move 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. HINT • The recall confirmation popup window can be disabled if desired. Refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 211 for details. HINT • Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button. 4 Enter a name for the selected library set- ting, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for details on name entry). This confirms and enters the new name. 156 HINT AW2400 Owner’s Manual EQ/Dynamics Processor Library Operation The procedure for storing library settings is as follows. NOTE • New settings cannot be stored to read-only library settings (those marked with an icon). • If you select and store to a library number that contains previouslystored data, the previous data will be overwritten. 1 Access the page containing the library to which the settings are to be stored. For details on accessing the various library pages refer to “Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens” on page 154. 2 Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library number to which the settings are to be stored. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for storage. 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. Erasing EQ/Dynamics Library settings The procedure for erasing unwanted library settings is as follows. NOTE • Read-only library settings (those marked with an be erased. icon) cannot 1 Access the page containing the library settings to be erased. For details on accessing the various library pages refer to “Accessing the EQ/Dynamics Library screens” on page 154. 2 Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the library setting to be erased. The setting highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected to be erased. 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming the clear operation will appear. The following illustration is an example of when the CLEAR button is pressed in the PAN/EQ screen EQ Lib. page. 16 HINT HINT • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button. 4 As required, enter a name for the selected library setting, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for details on name entry). • Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button. 4 To actually erase the selected setting move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The library setting will be stored. HINT • The store NAME EDIT popup window can be disabled if desired. Refer to “AW2400 Preferences” on page 211 for details. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing Storing EQ/Dynamics Library settings 157 16 Pan, EQ, and Dynamics Processing AW2400 Owner’s Manual 158 Chapter 17 Scene Memory In this section we’ll cover the functions and operation of the AW2400’s scene memory. About Scene Memory The AW2400 allows the mix, effect, and other parameters for all channels to be stored in internal “scene” memory. Up to 99 scenes can be stored for each song. Stored scenes can be recalled at any time via the AW2400 panel controls or via MIDI program change commands. Scene recall operations can also be recorded and played back as Automix data. The main parameters stored with each scene are as follows: • • • • • • • • • • • Fader positions for all channels and buses [ON] key settings Pan settings EQ settings Dynamics settings Attenuation settings Phase settings Routing settings Pair/group settings AUX send settings Effect parameter settings Scene Memory Operation Scene store and recall operations are carried out from the SCENE screen Library page. This page contains the following items. A 1 List This area lists the data stored in the scene memory. The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the data that is selected for operation. Read-only data is indicated by a “lock” icon. B RENAME button Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can edit the name of the scene selected in the list. C RECALL button Recalls the scene that is selected in the list. B C D E F D STORE button Stores the current settings into the location selected in the list. 17 Scene Memory To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB section [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [SCENE] key. E CLEAR button Deletes the scene that is selected in the list. F PROTECT button Applies protection to the scene that is selected in the list. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 159 Scene Memory Operation Renaming a scene Recalling scene data Entering a new name for a scene. Here’s how to recall (load) settings from a scene. 1 Call the SCENE screen Library page by 1 Call the SCENE screen Library page by 2 Rotate the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the 2 Turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the list so either pressing the [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SCENE] key. scene to be renamed. The dotted frame indicates the currently selected scene. You can use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through the list regardless of the position of the cursor. either pressing the [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SCENE] key. that the scene you want to recall is enclosed in the dotted frame. 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. HINT • In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can be used to make selections. A popup window will ask you to confirm the Recall operation. 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button. 4 To execute the recall operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The scene will be recalled. HINT • Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button. 4 Enter the new name. Then move the cursor 17 Scene Memory 160 to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. (For details on entering a name → p. 32) The new name will be applied. AW2400 Owner’s Manual HINT • The confirmation popup window can be disabled so that it does not appear when you perform a Recall operation. For details, refer to “AW2400 Preferences” (→ p. 211). Scene Memory Operation Storing scene data Here’s how to store the current settings in a scene memory. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through the list to select the scene to be deleted (the selected scene should be enclosed in the dotted frame). 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and NOTE • Scene 0 is a recall-only scene to which new data cannot be stored. • If you select and store to a scene that already contains data, the previous scene data will be overwritten and lost. Be careful not to overwrite scene data you want to keep. press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will appear, asking you to confirm the Delete operation. 1 Call the SCENE screen Library page by either pressing the [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SCENE] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through the list to select the store destination (the store destination should be enclosed in the dotted frame). 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the data. HINT • Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button. 4 To execute the Delete operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The scene will be deleted. Protecting a scene Applying protection to a scene so that it can’t be edited or erased. 1 Call the SCENE screen Library page by either pressing the [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SCENE] key. • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button. 4 Enter the name as required, then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. (For details on entering a name → p. 32) The scene will be stored. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll through the list to select the scene to be protected (the selected scene should be enclosed in the dotted frame). 3 Move the cursor to the PROTECT button and press the [ENTER] key. When protection is turned on the PROTECT button will appear inverted and a lock icon will appear to the right of the scene name. 17 Scene Memory HINT Deleting scene data Here’s how you can delete unwanted scene data. 1 Call the SCENE screen Library page by “lock” icon either pressing the [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SCENE] key. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 161 Using the Recall Safe function Using the Recall Safe function You can specify that specific faders or specific channels will be excluded from Recall operations when the scene is changed either manually or from an external MIDI device. This function is called “Recall Safe.” This is convenient, for example, if you are performing a mixdown while switching scenes, but want to control specific channels manually. 1 Call the RCL Safe page by either pressing C EFFECT button Turn this button on to prevent recall (recall safe) of the effect settings. The button will appear inverted when on. The SCENE screen RCL Safe page will appear. D CHANNEL field Selects the recall safe channels. The mix parameters of selected channels will not be recalled. The CHANNEL field buttons correspond to the following channels. the [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [SCENE] key. D • INPUT......................... Input channels 1–16 • EFFECT RETURN ..... Effect Return channels 1–4 A • TRACK ....................... Track channels 1–24 • BUS............................ Bus master 1, 2 B • AUX ............................ AUX send master 1–4 • EFFECT SEND .......... Effect send master 1–4 • STEREO..................... Stereo output channel C HINT • All CHANNEL field buttons can be cleared (de-selected) by pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key. 1 RCL.SAFE button This button switches Recall Safe between ENABLE and DISABLE. Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to switch to either ENABLE or DISABLE. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RCL.SAFE button. 17 Scene Memory B MODE field The recall safe parameters can be selected from the following: • ALL button ...........This prevents all parameters in the scene from being recalled. The entire scene is “recall safe” and no change will occur if it is inadvertently recalled. • FADER button......Only the fader settings will not be recalled. • ON button.............Only the [ON] key settings will not be recalled. HINT • Both the FADER and ON buttons can be on at the same time. • When the ALL button is turned on the FADER and ON buttons are automatically turned off. NOTE • Effect return settings are not affected by Recall Safe. 162 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 2 Select the parameter(s) or channel(s) that you want to set to Recall Safe, and activate the corresponding button(s). 3 Move the cursor to the RCL.SAFE button and press the [ENTER] key. Recall Safe has now been enabled. The selected parameter(s) and/or channel(s) will not be affected by scene recall operations until you change this setting. HINT • The RCL Safe page settings are shared by all songs. Moving scenes Moving scenes Scene data stored in any scene number from 1 through 99 can be moved to any other scene number. 1 Call the Sort page by either pressing the [SCENE] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [SCENE] key. The SCENE screen Sort page will appear. 3 Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the destination. The destination will be indicated by the “INSERT POINT” indication in this list. 4 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button A and press the [ENTER] key. B The selected scene will be moved and the SOURCE and DESTINATION lists will be updated to reflect the results of the operation. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the EXECUTE button. C 1 SOURCE list Displays the scenes in their current order. The scene to be moved is selected from this list. B DESTINATION list The move destination for the source scene selected from the SOURCE list is selected here. C EXECUTE button Executes the scene move operation. 2 Move the cursor to the SOURCE list and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene to be moved. 17 Scene Memory HINT • In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can be used to make selections. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 163 17 Scene Memory 164 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 18 Song management This chapter explains how to perform song management operations such as copying, deleting, backing up, and restoring songs. About songs ■ Song Organization ■ Song Bit Depth On the AW2400, your recorded compositions are managed in units called “songs.” When you save a song on the hard disk, the audio data, scene memories, and the data for each library are all stored together. By loading a saved song, you can return it to the original condition at any time. You can store as many songs on the internal hard disk as its capacity allows. Songs stored on hard disk are divided into a song file containing all the basic setup information for the song, and WAV files containing the audio data. The AW2400 allows the bit depth of individual songs to be set to either 16 or 24 bits. 24-bit songs are capable of providing higher audio quality than 16-bit songs, but the following limitations on the number of simultaneous record/playback tracks apply. Song Bit Depth 16 bits 24 bits Max. Simultaneous Record Tracks Max. Simultaneous Play Tracks 16 8 : : 1 23 0* 24* 8 4 : : 1 11 0* 12* * For mixdown the number of simultaneous record tracks is two, and the number of simultaneous playback tracks is 24 for 16-bit songs, or 12 for 24-bit songs. Only 24-bit audio data can be used in 24-bit songs. 16-bit WAV files cannot be imported from a computer or CDRW drive. Audio data imported from audio CDs, however, will be automatically converted to 24-bit format. In the same way, only 16-bit audio data can be used in 16-bit songs. Song management 18 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 165 About songs ■ Song Folder Organization Song and related data stored on hard disk can be accessed from a computer connected via USB in the same way as the hierarchical files and folders on the computer’s hard disk. The folders are organized as follows: “AW2400-1” Drive Song1 “AW2400-2” Drive 001 Song Name.AWS Song2 001 Song Name.AWS 002 Song Name.AWS 002 Song Name.AWS 0.WAV 0.WAV Audio Audio 1.WAV 1.WAV 2.WAV 2.WAV 3.WAV 3.WAV Render Render 003 Song Name.AWS 004 Song Name.AWS 005 Song Name.AWS Transport File Name1.WAV AW2400_SYS.BIN File Name2.WAV ■ “Song1” Folder Songs are stored in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder. ■ Individual Song Folders Each song is stored in a folder bearing the song’s name (extension .AWS). ● Song Files The following song settings are stored in a file bearing the name of the song (extension .AWS): 18 Song management • • • • Recorder section settings (SONG screen, TRACK screen). Mixer section settings (channels, effects). Library settings. REMOTE screen settings. ■ “Audio” Folder The following song audio data is saved in WAV file format. File names are automatically created in the order of recording, as in: “0.WAV”, “1.WAV”, “2.WAV”, etc. 24-bit song data is saved as 32-bit WAV files. • 24 + 2 (stereo track) audio x 8 virtual tracks. • Sound clip audio data. • Audio data for undo and redo operations. ● System File (AW2400_SYS.BIN) Stores UTILITY screen settings and information for data management. 166 AW2400 Owner’s Manual ■ “Song2” Folder Songs are stored in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder. ■ “Transport” Folder This folder is used to store WAV files for import and export. Data is stored as 16-bit or 24-bit WAV files. About songs • Managing Your Songs The following operations are possible by directly accessing the data on the internal hard disk from a computer. For detailed operating procedures refer to “WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)” on page 230. • Specified audio data on the internal hard disk can be directly edited from a computer using an appropriate waveform editor application. The song will become unplayable if you change the sampling frequency or quantization of the audio data, but you can change the length of the waveforms without problems. • WAV files transferred from a computer to the “Transport” folder can be imported to the AW2400 audio tracks as required, and specified regions of audio data can be exported to the computer as WAV files which can then be imported into computer-based DAW applications. • The entire contents of the internal hard disk or individual songs can be backed up to the computer. NOTE • For 24-bit songs, the audio data contained in the “Audio” folders is stored in 32-bit WAV format. If your waveform editor application cannot handle 32-bit data, first export the WAV file(s) to the “Transport” folder. WAV files imported or exported via the “Transport” folder are automatically converted to 24-bit format that can be edited using most waveform editor software. • Song data is created in either the “Song1” or “Song2” folder. You may have to check both of these folders to locate a specific song. • If you initialize the AW2400 hard disk from your computer it will become unreadable by the AW2400. Always use the SONG screen Song List page to initialize the AW2400 hard disk. • The song folders also contain audio data for undo and redo operations that is not normally used. The undo/redo data can be deleted by performing an Optimize operation (→ p. 172). Managing Your Songs Song management operations are accessed via the SONG screen Song List page. This page also includes the shutdown functions. To call this page press the [SONG] key in the Work Navigate section a number of times, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. 1 Song List This page contains the following items. B LOAD button Loads a specified song. A The songs stored on the internal AW2400 hard disk are displayed here. C SAVE button Saves a song. I E COPY button Copies a song. 18 F OPTIMIZE button Optimizes a song. G MIXER IMP button Imports data from another song. H DELETE button Deletes a song. I SHUTDOWN button This function is used when turning the AW2400 power off. Refer to page 38 for detailed shutdown instructions. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Song management B C D E F G H D NEW button Creates a new song. 167 Managing Your Songs J K LM 3 Move the cursor to YES (to save the current song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the current song) and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window containing the various settings for the new song will appear. O N J K L M Song Name Song Size Song Bit Depth/Sampling Frequency Song Protect Status N SORT box Changes the order of songs displayed in the Song List. O The currently-selected song The following settings can be made via this popup window. • Fs ............................... The sample rate of the new song can be set to either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. • Recbit ........................ The bit depth of the new song can be set to either 16 or 24 bits. • Sound Clip Time ....... The record time of the Sound Clip. ■ Creating a new song In order to begin recording on the AW2400, you must first create a new song. 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The currently selected song in the Song List will be highlighted (inverted). NOTE • If you set the sample rate to 48 kHz, the song data will not be able to be written as an audio CD. 4 When each parameter has been set as required, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Next, a popup window will appear allowing you to specify settings that will be carried over from the current song. 2 Move the cursor to the NEW button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song. 18 Song management 168 You may choose one or more of the following items. • SCENE Button .......... Scene memories • TEMPO button........... Tempo map HINT • Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the NEW button. AW2400 Owner’s Manual • LIBRARY button ....... EQ, dynamics, effects, and channel libraries For example, if you have saved effect settings in a library for the current song and would like to use these settings for the new song as well, you would turn on the LIBRARY button. Managing Your Songs 5 Select the buttons of the items you want to carry over from the current song, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to enter a name for the song. ■ Editing the song name Here’s how to edit the song name that is assigned when you create a new song. NOTE • This setting applies only to the current song. Before you perform this procedure, load the song for which the name is to be edited. 1 Call the Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Setting page will appear. 2 To edit the song name, move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the [ENTER] key. 6 Assign a name to the song (for details on The NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to edit the song name. assigning a name → p. 32). NOTE • A new song cannot be given the same name as an existing song. 7 To create the new song, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. A new song will be created, and you will return to the SONG screen Song List page. HINT • You may also edit the song name later. 3 Enter the new name. Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The new name will be applied, and the popup window will close. (For details on inputting a name → p. 32) 18 Song management • If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button (instead of the OK button) and press the [ENTER] key, you will return to the SONG screen Song List page without creating a new song. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 169 Managing Your Songs ■ Loading and Sorting Songs Here’s how to load an existing song from the hard disk. 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The currently selected song in the Song List will be highlighted (inverted). 2 To change the order of the songs move the cursor to the SORT box, use the [DATA/ JOG] dial to select the desired sort criterion, and then press the [ENTER] key. The load operation can be aborted by moving the cursor to the CANCEL button and pressing the [ENTER] key. NOTE • If you select NO, all changes you made after last saving the current song will be lost. ■ Saving the current song Here’s how to save the current song to the hard disk. 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Song List page will appear. SORT Box 2 Move the cursor to the SAVE button and press the [ENTER] key. Using the SORT box songs can be sorted according to the following criteria: A popup window will ask you to confirm that you want to save the current song. • NAME ........Song names in alphabetical order. • OLD ...........The order in which the songs were saved, from newest to oldest. • SIZE ...........Song size, from largest to smallest. 3 To load a song move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song to be loaded. The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song. 4 Move the cursor to the LOAD button in the • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SAVE button. 3 To save the song, move the cursor to the screen, and press the [ENTER] key. OK button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song. The song will be saved and the display will revert to the Song List (step 1). If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button (instead of the OK button) and press the [ENTER] key, the Save operation will be cancelled. 18 NOTE Song management • The song save operation always saves the current song, regardless of the song that is selected in the list. HINT • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the LOAD button. 5 Move the cursor to either YES (if you want to save the current song) or NO (if you do not want to save the current song), and press the [ENTER] key. If you select “YES”, the song will be loaded after the current song has been saved. If you select “NO”, the song will be loaded and any changes to the current song will be discarded. 170 HINT AW2400 Owner’s Manual • You cannot save a song that is protected. If for example you have edited the mixer settings and need to save the song, you must disable the protect setting and then save the song. HINT • If necessary, you can change the name of the song before you save it (→ p. 169). • In the following situations, a popup window will ask whether you want to save the current song; when you load an existing song from the hard disk, when you create a new song, or when you shut-down the AW2400. • We recommend that you frequently save the song you are working on or enable the Auto Save function (→ p. 211) as a safeguard against data loss due to accidents such as the AW2400’s power cable being inadvertently disconnected. Managing Your Songs ■ Deleting a song ■ Copying a song Here’s how to delete a song from the hard disk. Here’s how to copy a song in the hard disk. NOTE • A deleted song will be lost forever. Use great caution when deleting a song. • You cannot delete a song for which protect is on, or delete the current song (the highlighted song). In order to delete a protected song or the current song, you must first turn off the protect setting or switch to a different song. 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The currently selected song in the Song List will be highlighted (inverted). 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song to be deleted. The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicateds the selected song to be deleted. 3 Move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the delete operation. 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The currently selected song in the Song List will be highlighted (inverted). 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song to be copied. The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song to be copied. 3 Move the cursor to the COPY button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will prompt you to enter new song name. HINT • If you have selected the current song as the song to be copied, a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song. Move the cursor to either the YES button (if you want to save) or the NO button (if you don’t want to save), and then press the [ENTER] key. 4 Enter a new song title. (For details on inputting a name → p. 32) 5 When the song name has been entered, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the copy operation. 4 To delete the song, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The song you selected in step 2 will be deleted, and you will return to step 1. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the delete operation will be cancelled. 6 To execute the copy, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The song you selected in step 2 will be copied, and you will return to step 1. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the copy operation will be cancelled. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Song management 18 171 Managing Your Songs ■ Song Protection ■ Optimizing a song Songs can be “protected” to prevent unwanted changes to the data. When a song is protected it can’t be recorded to, edited, or deleted. “Optimize” is an operation that deletes the undo/redo audio data maintained within the song. When you have finished recording and editing a song you can Optimize it to increase the amount of free space on the hard disk. 1 Call the Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Setting page will appear. 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song to be protected. The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song to be protected. 3 Move the cursor to the PROTECT button and press the [ENTER] key. When protection is turned on the PROTECT button will be highlighted and a “lock” icon will appear to the right of the song name. Lock icon NOTE • The deleted undo/redo audio data will be lost forever. Use this operation with caution. 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The currently selected song in the Song List will be highlighted (inverted). 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song to be optimized. The line enclosed by the dotted frame indicates the selected song to be optimized. 3 Move the cursor to the OPTIMIZE button, and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the optimize operation. HINT • We recommend that you turn protect on for important songs. • Even if protect is on, you can still copy the song (→ p. 171) and adjust the mixer settings. HINT • You may select the current song to be optimized. In this case, a popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song. Move the cursor to the OK button (if you want to save) or the CANCEL button (if you don’t want to save), and press the [ENTER] key. 18 Song management 4 To execute the optimize operation, move 172 the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The undo/redo audio data of the song you selected in step 2 will be deleted, and you will return to step 1. If you decide not to execute the optimize operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Managing Your Songs ■ Importing data from an existing song Here’s how selected types of data such as scenes or libraries can be imported into the current song from a song saved on the hard disk. NOTE • When you execute this import operation, the previous data for that item in the current song will be lost. Use this procedure with caution. 1 Call the Song List page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Song List page will appear. The currently selected song in the Song List will be highlighted (inverted). 2 Move the cursor to a location outside the SORT box, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song to be imported. The line enclosed by the dotted frame is the song you have selected as the import-source. 3 Move the cursor to the MIXER IMP button, and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will appear which allows you to select the data to be imported. You can choose one or more of the following items. • SCENE button .............. Scene memories • TEMPO button .............. Tempo map • LIBRARY button ........... EQ, dynamics, effects, and channel libraries 18 Song management 4 Select the button(s) corresponding to the items you want to import to the current song, then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Importing will begin. When the data has been imported, you will return to the screen of step 1. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 173 Editing various settings for the song Editing various settings for the song Here’s how to edit various settings for a song, such as selecting the counter display format and time code format. NOTE • These settings apply only to the current song. Before you perform this procedure, load the song to be edited. • The counter display setting will be saved with the song data when the song is saved. 1 Call the Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [SONG] key. The SONG screen Setting page will appear. NOTE • The counter in the upper right of the display always shows the current location in measure/beat units, relative to the Start point. • The measure/beat display will depend on the settings in the Tempo page of the EDIT screen. For details, refer to “Creating a tempo map” (→ p. 175). 3 To change the time code frame rate move the cursor to the 24, 25, 30, or 30D button and press the [ENTER] key. You can choose one of the following frame rates to specify the minimum unit of time code. • 24 ..........24 frames/second • 25 ..........25 frames/second • 30 ..........30 frames/second (30 non-drop frame) • 30D........29.97 frames/second (30 drop-frame) HINT 2 To change the counter display format move the cursor to the ABS, RELATIVE, SECOND, or TIME CODE button and press the [ENTER] key. In the Setting page, use the following buttons to select the display format for the counter that is shown in the center of the top line in the display. 18 Song management 174 • ABS (absolute time) ................ Displays the current location in hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds, with the absolute time zero location as 0. • RELATIVE (relative time) ................ Displays the current location in hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds, with the relative time zero location as 0. • SECOND........... Displays the current location in hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds, with the Start point as 0. • TIME CODE ...... Displays the current location in time code (hours/minutes/seconds/frames), with the Start point as 0. AW2400 Owner’s Manual • This setting affects both the counter time code display and the MTC that the AW2400 transmits and receives. If the AW2400 is sending or receiving MTC to or from an external device, you must set both devices to the same frame rate. NOTE • The frame rate cannot be changed while the AW2400 is running. Creating a tempo map Creating a tempo map The “tempo map” contains data that changes the tempo or time signature at the beginning of the song or at any measure or beat within the song. The measure/beat display counter, the internal metronome, and the MIDI clock data generated within the AW2400 are all based on this tempo map. HINT • The Start point of the song corresponds to the starting location of the tempo map. • The data (“tempo map events”) recorded in the tempo map will continue to apply until the next event of the same type is encountered. NOTE • If you modify the tempo map after recording on an audio track, the measure/beat counter display values will be affected. For this reason if you want to use MIDI clock to synchronize with an external MIDI device, or if you want to control the song in measure units, you should create the tempo map before you record. If you modify the tempo map after a track has already been recorded, a popup window will ask you for confirmation. This page contains the following items. When you create a new song, the following tempo map event will be input at the beginning of the tempo map (the first beat of the first measure). • Time signature: 4/4 • Tempo: 120.0 Here’s how to edit the values of this tempo map event. 1 Call the EDIT screen Tempo Map page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. In this page you can input or edit tempo map events for the current song. F G H I 1 List This area lists the tempo map events that have been entered for the current song. The line enclosed by a dotted frame is the currently selected tempo map event. B LOCATE button By moving the cursor to this button and pressing the [ENTER] key, you can move the song to the location of the tempo map event currently selected in the list. C NEW button To create an event at the beginning of the measure following the last step, move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. D INSERT button To insert a blank event at the step preceding the tempo map event currently selected in the list, move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. E DELETE button To delete the tempo map event currently selected in the list, move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key. A B F STEP Indicates the step number of the tempo map event. C D E G MEASURE Indicates the location (measure/beat) of the tempo map event. H METER I TEMPO 18 Song management ■ Editing a tempo map event These fields show the time signature and tempo of each tempo map event. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 175 Creating a tempo map 2 Move the cursor to the item that you want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value. If the METER or TEMPO is “–”, move the cursor to the item and press the [ENTER] key before you edit the value. NOTE • The METER and TEMPO at the beginning of the song cannot be set to “–”. • You cannot change the METER value to other than “–” for a step that is not located at beat 1. Event Range Content Specifies the time signature of the song. METER 1/4 to 8/4, – TEMPO Specifies the tempo of the song. You can set the tempo in units of 30.0 to 250.0, – 0.1 over a range of 30.0–250.0 BPM. HINT • You cannot delete the tempo map event located at the beginning of the song, or change its location. If you want to change the tempo or time signature during the song, you can insert a new event. ■ Adding a tempo map event 1 Access the Tempo Map page, move the cursor to the NEW button, and press the [ENTER] key. A blank tempo map event will be created after the last step that is currently input. HINT • If you use the INSERT button instead of the NEW button, a blank tempo map event will be inserted before the currently selected step. However, you cannot insert an event before the tempo map event at the beginning of the song (i.e., the tempo map event that is input when you create the song). 2 Make sure that the cursor is outside the list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select a tempo map event that you created. When the cursor is located outside the list, you can use the [DATA/JOG] dial to scroll the contents of the list. 3 Move the cursor to the MEASURE field of the event that is selected in the list, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to specify the location of the event. You can adjust the location of a tempo map event in units of measures or beats. However, you cannot move an event past the preceding or following event. 4 Move the cursor to the item that you want to edit, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to adjust the value. If necessary, you can play back the song to check that the tempo map event works as you expect. 5 In the same way, use the NEW or INSERT button to add new events, and set their parameters. ■ Deleting a tempo map event 18 Song management Here’s how to delete an unwanted event from the tempo map. (However, you cannot delete the event that is located at the beginning of the song.) 1 Access the Tempo Map page, and scroll the list to select the tempo map event that you want to delete. 2 Move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the [ENTER] key. The selected event will be deleted. 176 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Backing up songs Backing up songs Here’s how you can back up songs from the internal hard disk to CD-R/RW media. NOTE • To backup AW2400 data to a computer, connect the AW2400 to the computer via a USB cable and copy the song folders directly from the internal AW2400 hard disk to the computer. For detailed operation refer to “WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode)” on page 230. 1 Insert CD-R/RW media into the CD-RW drive. 2 Call the SONG screen Backup page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [SONG] key. In this page you can back up songs from the internal hard disk to CD-R/RW media. A D ALL CLEAR Button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to deselect all songs so that they won’t be backed up. Pressing the [F2] key whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL CLEAR button. E AW2400 button / AW2816 button C D E F Selects the backup format. If the songs are to be restored on a Yamaha AW-series workstation other than the AW2400 (AW4416, AW2816, AW1600, AW16G), select the AW2816 button. This mode only supports 44.1kHz/16-bit songs, and only one song can be backed up at a time. F BACKUP button Executes backup of the selected song(s). Pressing the [F4] key whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the BACKUP button. 3 Make sure that the cursor is in the list area, This page contains the following items. 1 List This area lists the songs that are saved on the hard disk. The symbols at the right of the list indicate whether the song has been selected (●) or disabled ( ) for backup. B SORT box use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song you want to back up, and then press the [ENTER] key. The symbol for the selected song will change to the (●) symbol, indicating that this song has been selected for backup. You can repeat this step to select multiple songs for backup. If you turn on the ALL SET button, you can select all data in the list in one step. Changes the order of the songs displayed in the song list. Operation is the same as for the Song List page (→ p. 170). 18 Song management B C ALL SET button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to select all songs in the list for backup. Pressing the [F1] key whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL SET button. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 177 Backing up songs • Restoring songs 4 To execute the backup, move the cursor to the BACKUP button and press the [ENTER] key. 5 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Writing to the CD-R/RW media will begin. If you decide to cancel the backup operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key. While the backup operation is being executed, a popup window will indicate the progress of the operation. When the backup has been completed, you will return to step 2. If the backup data does not fit on a single volume of media, a message of “Number Ejected Media, Insert Blank Media.” will appear, and the media will be ejected. Insert a new media volume. Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation. NOTE • If previously-recorded CD-RW media is inserted in the CDRW drive, a popup window will ask you if it is OK to erase the media first. Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key, and the media will be erased. NOTE • You cannot execute the backup operation without selecting data. • If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2400 button turned on, system data (the settings you make in the UTILITY screen or the MIDI screen) will be backed up on the media together with the selected data. • If a CD-ROM or previously-recorded CD-R media is inserted in the CD-RW drive, a popup window with a message of “Change Media, Please” will appear, and the media will be ejected. Remove the media, and replace it with writable media. • If you execute the backup operation with the AS AW2816 button turned on, data other than audio tracks will not be backed up. All virtual tracks for tracks 1–16 are backup up. Tracks 17– 24 are not backed up. Only the current track data for stereo track is backed up. Only 44.1kHz/16-bit songs are supported. • When you restore data that was backed up to more than one media volume, you must insert the media in the order in which it was backed up. Be sure to make a note of the backup sequence on the label surface of each CD-R/RW disc. Restoring songs Here’s how song data that you backed up to CD-R/RW media can be restored to the hard disk of the AW2400. 1 Insert the CD-R/RW media containing the Information will be read from the inserted CD-R/RW media. When the information has been read, a display like the following will appear. backup data into the CD-RW drive. 18 If the backup data occupies more than one volume of media, insert the first volume. Song management B A 2 Call the SONG screen Restore page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [SONG] key. In this page, song data that you backed up to CD-R/ RW media can be restored to the internal hard disk. C D E 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button, and press the [ENTER] key. F 178 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Restoring songs This page contains the following items. 1 List This area lists the data that has been backed up on the CD-R/RW media. The symbols at the right of the list indicate whether an item of data has been selected (●) or disabled ( ) for restore. 6 To execute the restore operation, move the cursor to the RESTORE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation. NOTE • The maximum number of songs that can be displayed is 100. B SORT box Changes the order of the songs displayed in the song list. Operation is the same as for the Song List page (→ p. 170). C ALL SET button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to select all songs in the list to be restored. Pressing the [F1] key whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL SET button. D ALL CLEAR button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to deselect all songs so that they won’t be restored. Pressing the [F2] key whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the ALL CLEAR button. E SYSTEM button Selects the system data (AW2400 settings you make in the UTILITY screen) for restoring. F RESTORE button Restores of the selected song(s). Pressing the [F4] key whiled holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the RESTORE button. 7 Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to execute the restore operation (or to the CANCEL button if you decide not to restore), and press the [ENTER] key. The current song will be saved automatically, and the restore operation will begin. A popup window will indicate the progress of the restore operation. When the operation is finished, you will return to step 3. If the backup occupied more than one CD-R/RW disc, a message of “Exchange Next Media #XXX” (where XXX is a number) will be displayed during the restore process. Exchange the CD-R/RW media for the media of the corresponding number. Then move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • When a song with the same name already exists, the name of the restored song will automatically be changed. For example, if “001_Song” already exists, the song name will be altered as in: “001_Song0”, “001_Song1” ... etc. 4 Make sure the cursor is in the list area, use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song you want to restore, then press the [ENTER] key. The symbol at the right will change to the (●) symbol, indicating that this song data has been selected for restoring. If you turn on the ALL SET button, all data shown in the list will be selected in one step. Song management 18 5 If you want to restore the system data, move the cursor to the SYSTEM button and press the [ENTER] key. The button will be turned on, and the system data will be selected for restoring. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 179 Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations Exchanging Song Data With Other AW-series Audio Workstations You can back up an AW2400 song in a format that is compatible with the other AW-series (AW4416/AW2816/AW1600/AW16G). Conversely, a song that was backed up by the other AWseries can be restored into the AW2400. NOTE • Only the audio data recorded in a song can be exchanged with the other AW-series workstations. Mix parameters, libraries, and system data cannot be backed-up/restored in this way. ■ Backing up an AW2400 song in a format compatible with the other AW-series ■ Restoring songs from other AW-series workstations If you turn on the AW2816 button in the Backup page of the SONG screen, the data will be saved in the AW2816 backup file format. An AW2816 backup file can be restored into the other AW-series (version 2.0 or later for AW4416). For the procedure, refer to “Backing up songs,” earlier in this manual. 1 Insert the CD-R/RW media containing NOTE • Backup in the AW2816 backup file format is limited to one song at a time. • When you perform a backup in the AW2816 backup file format, data other than the audio tracks will not be backed up. All virtual tracks for tracks 1–16 are backup up. Tracks 17–24 are not backed up. Only the current track data for stereo track is backed up. Only 44.1kHz/16-bit songs are supported. • Depending on the data size, some songs can’t be saved as AW2816 backup files. If this problem occurs use the Optimize function to reduce the data size. songs from other AW-series workstations to be restored into the AW2400. 2 Call the SONG screen Restore page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [SONG] key. 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button, and press the [ENTER] key. Information will be read from the inserted CD-R/RW media. 4 Make sure the cursor is in the list area, use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the song you want to restore, then press the [ENTER] key. A “●” mark will appear for songs selected to be restored. NOTE • The list will show all the songs that were backed up to CD-R/ RW media, but you can execute the restore operation only for 44.1 kHz/16-bit songs. 18 5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the other AWseries songs that you want to restore. Song management 6 Move the cursor to the RESTORE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation. 7 Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to execute the restore operation, and press the [ENTER] key. The restore operation will begin. While the song data is being loaded, a popup window will indicate the progress. 180 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 19 Automix Operation of the AW2400 Automix features is described below. About Automix Automix allows operations such as fader moves and [ON] switch state changes to be recorded and played back in real time. For example, you can record complex mixdown/bounce operations using Automix so that they can be precisely reproduced as many times as necessary. The parameters that can be recorded by Automix are as follows. • Fader operation for each channel • [ON] key operation for each channel • Pan operation for each channel • EQ operation for each channel • AUX and effect send operation for each channel • Scene and library recall operations When recording to Automix you can break complex operations down and record them channel by channel or parameter by parameter in several takes, and even “punch in/out” so you can record just a specified region of a song. Furthermore, the recorded Automix data can be displayed in a list and edited for precise control. Up to 16 Automix sequences can be recorded in a dedicated library and recalled whenever needed. The current Automix data as well as the Library contents are saved independently with each AW2400 song. Automix Operation Automix operation is carried out from the AUTOMIX screen Automix page. A B C 1 MODE field Turns Automix on or off, as well as switching between the record and playback modes. • ENABLE/DISABLE button ................... Enables or disables Automix. • STOP button....... Stops Automix recording or playback (does not affect recorder operation). Appears inverted when Automix is stopped. • PLAY button ....... While the recorder section is running and Automix recording/playback is stopped, pressing this button after pressing the REC button engages the Automix record standby mode. Appears inverted during Automix recording and playback. 19 Automix To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB section [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. This page contains the following items. D AW2400 Owner’s Manual 181 Automix Operation • REC button ..........Turning this button on while the recorder section is stopped engages the Automix record standby mode. When the recorder section is running it is necessary to press the PLAY button after the REC button to engage the Automix record standby mode. This button is automatically disengaged when recording is completed. • AUTOREC button .....................Engages the Automix record standby mode. Unlike the REC button, this button remains engaged after recording is completed and the record standby mode will remain engaged until it is manually turned off. HINT • Pressing the [F1]–[F4] keys while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ENABLE/DISABLE ([F1] key), STOP ([F2] key), PLAY ([F3] key), and REC ([F4] key) buttons, respectively. Creating a New Automix Recording A new Automix recording must be created before actual Automix recording can occur. NOTE • The contents of the current Automix recording will be erased when a new Automix recording is created. To save the current Automix data refer to “Automix Library Operation” on page 190. 1 Use the channel faders, pan controls, EQ, etc., to set up the mix at the beginning of the current song, and save the mix as a scene. The saved “initial” scene will serve as the starting point for the Automix recording. To use a different scene as the starting point for the Automix recording, recall the desired scene. Refer to “Scene Memory Operation” on page 159 for details. HINT B COMMAND field Allows creation of a new Automix recording, and provides an undo function. • NEW button..........Clears the current Automix data to make way for a new Automix recording. • UNDO button .......Clears the last recorded Automix data, returning to the state immediately before the last Automix recording pass. C OVERWRITE field Selects the parameters to be recorded (or overwritten) by Automix recording. The buttons correspond to the parameters as follows. • CH ON button ......[ON] key operation for each channel • When a new Automix recording is created, a “recall event” for the last saved or recalled scene is recorded at the very beginning of the Automix recording. This initial scene can be changed later, as described on page 188. 2 Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 3 Move the cursor to the NEW button in the COMMAND field and press the [ENTER] key. A confirmation popup window for the new Automix recording will appear. • FADER button......Fader operation for each channel • AUX/EFFECT SEND ON button .....................AUX and effect send operation for each channel (mute on/off) • AUX/EFFECT SEND button .....................AUX and effect send level operation for each channel 19 • EQ button.............EQ operation for each channel • PAN button...........Pan operation for each channel Automix HINT • Using the RETURN TIME field to the right of the FADER button you can specify how long it will take the faders to return to their original positions when Automix recording is stopped or punched out (→ p. 185). • Scene and library recall operations are always recorded, regardless of the OVERWRITE field settings. D FREE Displays the amount of free Automix memory available in kilobytes (KB) and as a percentage. 182 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 4 Move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The current Automix data will be erased and a new Automix recording will be created. Creation of a new Automix recording can be aborted by moving the cursor to the CANCEL button and pressing the [ENTER] key. Automix Operation Recording the Automix Data Here’s how to record mix operation data to the newly created Automix recording. 5 Move the cursor to the MODE field and press the REC button. The REC button will flash. The Automix record standby mode is now engaged, and the [AUTOMIX] key will flash red. 1 Move the song location to just before the point at which you want to begin recording the Automix data. 2 Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 3 Move the cursor to the ENABLE/DISABLE button in the MODE field and press the [ENTER] key. The button will switch to “ENABLE”, and Automix operation will be enabled. 4 Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field and engage the buttons corresponding to the parameters you want to record. Use the OVERWRITE field buttons to select the types of data you want to record: CH ON. FADER, AUX/ EFFECT SEND ON, AUX EFFECT SEND, EQ, PAN. Parameters corresponding to buttons that are not engaged will not be recorded even if they are operated during Automix recording. HINT • You can also begin recording after engaging the AUTOREC button rather than the REC button. The REC button is automatically turned off when you stop recording and the record standby mode is disengaged, but the AUTOREC button remains on and the record standby mode remains engaged until it is manually turned off. 6 Use the Layer section keys to select the mixing layer that includes the channels you want to operate. For example, to record operations on the track channel faders engage either the Layer section [TRACK 1-12] or [TRACK 13-24] key. HINT • You can switch mixing layers even after Automix recording has been started. • If you plan to record operations performed in the Selected Channel section it is a good idea to select the appropriate parameters before starting recording. For example, if you plan to record pan changes, engage the Selected Channel section [PAN/EQ] key before beginning. 7 Press the top-panel PLAY [ ] key to start song playback. The [AUTOMIX] key will light red and Automix recording will begin. But at this point no channel has been selected so no data recording will actually take place. • Scene and library recall operations will be recorded regardless of the OVERWRITE field button selections. 8 Use the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO SEL] keys to select the channel for which Automix data is to be recorded. The selected key will flash orange and the corresponding channel’s parameters can be recorded to Automix. 19 Automix HINT HINT • Multiple channels can be selected for Automix recording. • If you press a key that is flashing orange during Automix recording, the key will light continuously and Automix recording for the corresponding channel will be disengaged (punched out). Refer to “Punch In and Out of Automix” on page 185 for details. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 183 Automix Operation 9 Perform the required mix operations. The specified mix parameters will be recorded for the specified channel(s). The parameters specified for recording in step 4 are actually recorded as follows. ● CH ON/FADER Operate the channel [ON] key or fader. 10 When all required mix operations have been recorded, press the top-panel STOP [■] key to stop the song. The [AUTOMIX] key will go out, the MODE field REC button will be turned off, and the Automix record standby mode will be disengaged. At the same time a popup window asking you to confirm whether you want to update the recorded Automix data will appear. ● AUX/EFFECT SEND ON Call the AUX or EFFECT screen, move the cursor to the channel for which AUX or effect send is to be turned on or off, and press the [ENTER] key. ● AUX/EFFECT SEND Call the AUX or EFFECT screen and rotate the appropriate Selected Channel knob, 1–4. Alternatively you can move the cursor to the appropriate on-screen knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the send level. NOTE • Effect parameter operations can not be recorded to Automix. ● EQ Recall the PAN/EQ screen and use the [LOW], [LOMID], [HI-MID], or [HIGH] key to band to be adjusted, then use Selected Channel knobs 2–4 to adjust the selected band as required. Alternatively you can move the cursor to the appropriate knobs in the PAN/EQ screen EQ/Att. page and use the [DATA/ JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the EQ. EQ ON/OFF switching is also recorded. NOTE • ATT. knob operation and EQ type selections are not recorded to Automix. HINT • Automix recording can be stopped without stopping song playback by moving the cursor to the STOP button in the AUTOMIX screen Automix page and pressing the [ENTER] key (or by pressing the [F2] key while holding the [SHIFT] key). • If you turn on the AUTOREC button rather than the REC button in step 5, the Automix record standby mode will remain engaged even when song playback is stopped. This method is best when you want to make repeated passes at an Automix recording. 11 To confirm and update the recorded data move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The recorded Automix data will be updated. You can abort this operation and revert to the previously recorded Automix data by moving the cursor to the CANCEL button rather than the OK button and pressing the [ENTER] key. HINT ● PAN Recall the PAN/EQ screen and rotate Selected Channel knob 1. Alternatively you can move the cursor to the on-screen knobs and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to adjust the PAN. NOTE 19 • When making an Automix recording for multiple channels, only the last channel selected can be operated via the Selected Channel controls. Automix • During Automix recording the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], and [STEREO SEL] keys are used to punch the corresponding channels in or out. The safest way to switch the selected channel during Automix recording is to move the cursor to the appropriate location in the PAN/EQ, EFFECT, or AUX screen. ● Scene/Library Scene, channel, EQ, gate, compressor, and effect setups are recalled via the corresponding library pages. 184 AW2400 Owner’s Manual • After confirming and updating the recorded Automix data you can still undo the operation and revert to the previously recorded Automix data by moving the cursor to the UNDO button in the COMMAND field and pressing the [ENTER] key. Please note that the top-panel [UNDO] key cannot be used to undo Automix recordings. • The current Automix data can be stored to the Automix library or a preciously stored Automix recording can be recalled from the library. Refer to “Automix Library Operation” on page 190 for details. Automix Operation Punch In and Out of Automix Playing back an Automix recording. 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 2 Make sure that the ENABLE/DISABLE button is set to “ENABLE”. If it is set to “DISABLE” move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key. The [AUTOMIX] key will light green. 3 Press the top-panel PLAY [ ] key to start song playback. Automix playback will begin along with song playback. During this time the MODE field PLAY button will appear inverted. HINT • If playback of a recorded Automix track is started from a point other than the beginning of the track, the mix at that point will be recalled (the parameters immediately prior to the point at which playback was begun will be recalled). This means that you will hear the correct mix no matter where you start playback. 4 To stop Automix playback press the toppanel STOP [■] key. Both song playback and Automix playback will stop. Automix playback will stop automatically if song playback is continued past the point at which Automix recording was stopped (song playback will continue). Punch-In/Out recording is handy if you want to re-record just a portion of an Automix recording. The procedure will be described in this section, using re-recording of a track channel fader move as an example. 1 Locate the song to a point just before you want to begin re-recording the Automix data. 2 Call the AUTOMIX screen Automix page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 3 Make sure that the MODE field ENABLE/ DISABLE button is set to “ENABLE”. 4 Move the cursor to the OVERWRITE field and engage the buttons corresponding to the parameters you want to record. NOTE • If you re-record a previously-recorded parameter to the same channel, the previously recorded data for that parameter will be overwritten. If the parameter to be recorded has not already been recorded in the target track, no data will be overwritten. 5 Set the return time as required by moving the cursor to the RETURN TIME field and using the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC]. Return time determines the length of time it will take for the faders to return to the previously-recorded levels after Automix recording has been punched out. The RETURN TIME range is OFF, 0.0–30.0 seconds. Return Time 19 ● Return Time Operation No return time (“0” setting). Original data Punch in Punch out Return time Automix Automix Playback Original data Punch in Punch out AW2400 Owner’s Manual 185 Automix Operation • Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region 6 Move the cursor to the MODE field and turn the REC button on. 10 Operate the fader as required. HINT The REC button will flash. This engages the Automix record standby mode, and the [AUTOMIX] key will flash red. • If no operations are performed between the punch-in and punch-out points all data corresponding to the selected parameter data in the selected channel will be erased. This is a handy way to erase all occurrences of specified data in a specified punch-in/out region. HINT • The AUTOREC button can be turned on rather than the REC button to engage the Automix record standby mode. 11 When the required operations have been performed press the same key that you pressed in step 9. 7 Use the Layer section keys to select the mixing layer that includes the channels you want to operate. 8 Press the top-panel PLAY [ The key will go out and Automix recording will stop (punch out). The Automix record mode will remain active, but since no channel is selected no data can actually be recorded (you can press the key again to punch in again and continue recording if desired). ] key to start song playback. The [AUTOMIX] key will light red and Automix recording will begin. But at this point no channel has been selected so no data recording will actually take place. 9 When the punch-in point is reached use the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO SEL] keys to select the channel for which Automix data is to be recorded. HINT • After punching the fader move in and out, the fader will return to the previously-recorded level at a rate determined by the specified return time. 12 When all required mix operations have been recorded, press the top-panel STOP [■] key to stop the song. The selected key will flash orange and the corresponding channel’s parameters can be recorded to Automix. A popup window asking you to confirm whether you want to update the recorded Automix data will appear. 13 To confirm and update the recorded data move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The recorded Automix data will be updated. Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region This section describes how you can edit specified Automix data within a specified region using commands. 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Edit page by 19 This page contains the following items. either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. Automix A B C D 186 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region 1 PARAMETERS field The display will change according to the selected edit command as follows. The following parameters can be selected for editing. • FADER, CH ON, PAN, EQ buttons ...........Faders, Channel [ON] keys, pan, and EQ operations. ● When the ERASE command is selected: B • LIBRARY (CH, GATE, COMP, EQ) buttons ...........Channel library (CH), gate library (GATE), compressor library (COMP), and EQ library (EQ) recall. C • SCENE button .................Scene recall. • EFF LIB 1–4 buttons .......Effect 1–4 library recall. A • AUX/ON 1–4 buttons .......AUX 1–4 send level and on/off switching. 1 The target channel can be selected from • EFF/ON 1–4 buttons........Effect 1–4 send level and on/off switching. the following. • IN 1–16 ....... Input channels 1–16 B COMMAND • TR 1–24 ...... Track channels 1–24 Displays the currently selected edit command. • RTN 1–4...... Effect return channels 1–4 C Channel/Region • BUS 1, 2 ..... Bus master channels 1, 2 The channel and region to which the edit command will apply are specified here. The display will change according to the command selected in B. • AUX 1–4...... AUX send master channels 1–4 • EFF 1–4 ...... Effect send master channels 1–4 • ST ............... Stereo output channel HINT • ALL ............. All channels • The channel selection will be ignored when editing library, scene or effect settings. B The start point of the region to be edited is specified in counter format. C The end point of the region to be edited is D EXECUTE button The selected edit command is executed when the cursor is moved to this button and the [ENTER] key is pressed. 2 Move the cursor to the button in the PARAMETERS field corresponding to the parameter to be edited, and press the [ENTER] key. specified in counter format. ● When the COPY or MOVE command is selected: B A C Multiple parameters can be selected. 3 Move the cursor to the COMMAND field and The following commands can be selected. • ERASE........ Erase all occurrences of the specified parameter(s) in the specified region. D E 1 Specifies the source channel for the copy or move operation. The channels that can be selected are the same as for ERASE, above. • COPY.......... Copy all occurrences of the specified parameter(s) in the specified region to the specified position in the specified destination channel. B The start point of the source region for the • MOVE.......... Move all occurrences of the specified parameter(s) in the specified region to the specified position in the specified destination channel. The original parameters will be erased. C The end point of the source region for the copy or move operation specified in counter format. copy or move operation is specified in counter format. 19 Automix use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select a command, then press the [ENTER] key. D Specifies the destination channel for the copy or move operation. Depending on the source channel for copy or move operation, the channels that can be selected vary. E The start point of the destination region for the copy or move operation specified in counter format. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 187 Command Editing Automix data In a Specified Region • Editing Individual Automix Events 4 Move the cursor to the appropriate fields and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to selected the channel and/or region. 5 Move the cursor to the EXECUTE button, 6 Move the cursor to the OK button to exe- cute the command, or move the cursor to the CANCEL button to cancel without executing. Then press the [ENTER] key. and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation. Editing Individual Automix Events Individual Automix events can be moved, erased, or value-edited via an Automix event list. 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Event List page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. This page contains the following items. A B C When this button is engaged only events in the currently selected channel are shown in the list. B PARAM Selects the type of parameters to be shown in the event list. C Event list Individual events of the parameter type selected in the PARAM field are shown in the event list. The event enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing. Move the cursor to the icon to the left of the list and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to scroll through the event list. D DUPLICATE button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to create a duplicate of the selected event at the same location. 19 Automix E DELETE button Move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to delete the selected event. D 188 1 SELECTED CH ONLY button AW2400 Owner’s Manual E Editing Individual Automix Events move the cursor to the SELECTED CH ONLY button and press the [ENTER] key, then select the desired channel. 3 Move the cursor to the PARAM field and press the [ENTER] key to select the type of parameter to be displayed in the event list. The available parameter types are as follows. Display SCENE/LIB FADER Scene/library recall Fader operation [ON] key operation PAN Pan operation AUX/EFF ON EQ (ON) EQ (FREQ) EQ (Q) EQ (GAIN) B CH Specifies the channel to which the event will apply. C Value Edits the value of the event type specified in the PARAM field. Parameter Value (Display) SCENE SCENE/LIB FADER dB, SEC Fader level, return time ON ON/OFF Channel on/off status PAN L-C-R AUX/EFF AUX/EFF, dB AUX/EFF ON AUX/EFF, ON/OFF EQ (ON) ON/OFF EQ (FREQ) Hz EQ center frequency EQ (Q) Q EQ bandwidth EQ (GAIN) dB Level of the operated band AUX/effect send operation AUX/effect on/off EQ on/off EQ center frequency EQ bandwidth EQ gain 4 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the type of parameter to be displayed in the list, then press the [ENTER] key. The specified events will appear in the event list. 5 Move the cursor to the icon to the left of the list and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to scroll through the event list and select the event to be edited. The event enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing. HINT • The cursor can be quickly moved to the icon by pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key. • When the cursor is inside the event list the cursor keys can also be used to scroll up and down the event list. Items that can be edited in the event list are as follows. A Specifies the position of the event. Parameter ON AUX/EFF 1 TIME B C Description Scene/library type and scene/ library number L63 (full left)–C (center)– R63 (full right) AUX/effect type and send level AUX/effect type and on/off status EQ on/off status 6 Move the cursor to the appropriate item in the even list. Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the value as required, then press the [ENTER] key. The edited data will change immediately. 7 When you want to add a new event, first move the cursor to the DUPLICATE button and press the [ENTER] key. A copy of the currently selected event will be created at the same location. You can then edit the time, channel, or value as required. HINT • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the DUPLICATE button. 8 To delete an unneeded event move the cursor to the DELETE button and press the [ENTER] key. The currently selected event will be deleted. 19 HINT • Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the DELETE button. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Automix 2 To display only events in a specific channel, 189 Automix Library Operation Automix Library Operation Automix data can be stored to a specialized Automix library and recalled whenever needed. Up to 16 Automix recordings can be saved for each song, so you can easily create and compare multiple mixes for the same song. About the Automix Library Page Changing Automix Names Automix data can be saved to and recalled from the Automix library via the AUTOMIX screen Library page. To call this page press the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB section [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F4] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. This page contains the following items. A Here’s how you can change the names of the data in the Automix library. 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the Automix data to be edited. B C D E F The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for editing. 3 Move the cursor to the RENAME button and press the [ENTER] key. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. HINT • Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RENAME button. G 1 List A list of all the Automix data stored in the library. The Automix data enclosed in a dotted frame is the one currently selected for operation. A “lock” icon indicates protected Automix data. B RENAME button Accesses the NAME EDIT popup window, where you can edit the name of the Automix selected in the list. C RECALL button Recalls the Automix data that is selected in the list. 19 D STORE button Stores the current Automix settings into the location selected in the list. Automix E CLEAR button Deletes the Automix data that is selected in the list. F PROTECT Applies protection to the Automix data that is selected in the list. G FREE Displays the amount of free Automix memory available in kilobytes (KB), as a percentage, and as a graph. 190 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 4 Enter a name for the selected Automix data, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for details on name entry). This confirms and enters the new name. Automix Library Operation Storing Automix settings Storing the current Automix data to the Automix library. NOTE • If you select and store to a library number that contains previouslystored data, the previous data will be overwritten. 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library number to which the data is to be stored. The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for storage. 3 Move the cursor to the STORE button and Recalling Automix settings Recalling stored Automix data from the library. 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the library data to be recalled. The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for recall. 3 Move the cursor to the RECALL button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming the recall operation will appear. HINT press the [ENTER] key. • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the RECALL button. The NAME EDIT popup window will appear. HINT 4 As required, enter a name for the selected Automix data, move the cursor to the OK button, and press the [ENTER] key (refer to page 32 for details on name entry). The automix setting will be stored. 4 To actually recall the selected data move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The library data will be recalled. Erasing Automix settings Erasing unneeded Automix data from the library. NOTE • Erased Automix data cannot be recovered. Use this function with caution. 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the Automix data to be erased. The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected to be erased. 3 Move the cursor to the CLEAR button and 19 Automix • Pressing the [F2] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the STORE button. press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming the clear operation will appear. HINT • Pressing the [F3] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CLEAR button. 4 To actually erase the selected data move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 191 Automix Library Operation Protecting Automix Data Applying protection to Automix data to prevent accidental erasure. 1 Call the AUTOMIX screen Library page by either pressing the [AUTOMIX] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F4] key after pressing the [AUTOMIX] key. 2 Use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the Automix data to be protected. The data highlighted by a dotted frame is currently selected for operation. 3 Move the cursor to the PROTECT button and press the [ENTER] key. When protection is turned on the PROTECT button will appear inverted and a lock icon will appear to the right of the Automix name. 19 Automix 192 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 20 MIDI This section will describe the basic MIDI settings as well as the various MIDI features and capabilities provided. What you can do using MIDI On the AW2400, you can use MIDI to do the following things. ● Synchronize operation with an external device You can synchronize an AW2400 song with playback of an external device (such as a MIDI sequencer) by exchanging synchronization messages such as MTC (MIDI Time Code) or MIDI Clock with the external device. • Example: recording/playing scene selections and mix parameter operations on a MIDI sequencer (computer) MIDI OUT/ THRU connector AW2400 or MY16-mLAN MTC MIDI IN connector MMC or “MIDI Remote” is a function that lets you use the AW2400 as a physical controller for an external device. You can assign the desired MIDI messages to the toppanel faders and [ON] keys, and use them to remotely control a MIDI device or computer program. MIDI OUT or USB cable IEEE1394 cable ● MIDI Remote MIDI IN MTC/MMC MY16-mLAN External MIDI device (e.g., computer) USB cable External MIDI device (e.g., computer) • Example: using the AW2400 as a physical controller for a MIDI sound module or MTC/MMC AW2400 IEEE1394 cable Control changes System exclusive messages, etc. MIDI OUT/THRU connector or ● Automate scene changes and mix parameters When you recall a scene on the AW2400 or operate its mix parameters, the corresponding messages (program change or control change) can be transmitted to an external device. If you record these messages on a MIDI sequencer that is synchronized to the AW2400, the scene recall operations or mix parameter operations can be precisely reproduced at any time. 20 MIDI IN MY16-mLAN USB cable MIDI MIDI OUT/ THRU connector MIDI OUT Control changes Program changes • Example: using MTC/MMC to synchronize the operation of the AW2400 and a MIDI sequencer (computer). AW2400 MIDI IN MIDI IN connector ● Remote control of AW2400 transport functions You can transmit MMC (MIDI Machine Control) messages from a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI device to the AW2400 to remotely control the AW2400’s transport functions. Conversely, you can also transmit MMC from the AW2400 to an external device for remote transport control. Control changes Program changes External MIDI device (e.g., computer) or IEEE1394 cable AW2400 Owner’s Manual 193 Basic MIDI Settings Basic MIDI Settings The MIDI screen Setting 1 page lets you specify the connector/port to be used for MIDI message transmission and reception to and from external MIDI devices. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [MIDI] key. G H A B C D E F • ON/OFF button (TX)......Turns program change transmission on or off. • ECHO button (TX) .........Received program change messages are re-transmitted (“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/ THRU connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output port). This page contains the following items. • ON/OFF button (RX) .....Turns program change reception on or off. 1 PORT field Selects the connector(s)/port(s) to be used for MIDI message transmission and reception. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection. The connectors/ports that can be selected for MIDI transmission (TX) and reception (RX) are as follows: Items TX (Transmission) MIDI [MIDI OUT/THRU] connector [MIDI IN] connector RX (Reception) USB 1 USB connector output port 1 USB connector input port 1 USB 2 USB connector output port 2 USB connector input port 2 USB 3 USB connector output port 3 USB connector input port 3 SLOT Digital I/O card output port Digital I/O card output port NOTE • It may be necessary to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver in order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication on computers (→ p. 266). 20 • To connect to a computer using the MY16-mLAN digital I/O card, install the MY16-mLAN card in the digital I/O slot and select “SLOT”. The appropriate mLAN driver must be installed on the computer. MIDI B CHANNEL field Selects the MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive MIDI messages such as program changes and control changes. This area contains the following two items. • TX .......... Selects the transmit MIDI channel, in a range of 1–16. • RX .......... Selects the receive MIDI channel, in a range of 1–16. 194 C PROGRAM CHANGE field Turns program change transmission and reception on or off. When program change reception is on, the corresponding scene will be recalled when a program change message is received via the AW2400 MIDI IN connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card input port). When program change transmission is on, when a scene is recalled on the AW2400 the corresponding program change message is transmitted via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output port). The following items are available: AW2400 Owner’s Manual • OMNI button (RX)..........Program change messages can be received on all MIDI channels, regardless of the MIDI receive channel setting. HINT • In the SCENE screen PGM Assign page you can specify the scene number that will correspond to each program change number (→ p. 201). D CONTROL CHANGE field Specifies how MIDI control change messages will be transmitted and received. If control change transmission and reception are enabled, the corresponding control change message will be transmitted when you operate any of the AW2400’s channel mix parameters (fader, pan, effect send, etc.). When a control change message is received, the corresponding AW2400 mix parameter will change. The following items are available: • ON/OFF button (TX)......Turns control change transmission on or off. • ECHO button (TX) .........Received control change messages are re-transmitted (“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/ THRU connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output port). • ON/OFF button (RX) .....Turns control change reception on or off. • OMNI button (RX)..........Control change messages can be received on all MIDI channels, regardless of the MIDI receive channel setting. Basic MIDI Settings E CONTROL CHANGE MODE box Selects the channels via which MIDI control change messages will be transmitted and received. The following choices are available: • 1 ...........Control change messages will be transmitted and received on MIDI channels 1–16. (MIDI channels 1–16 will correspond to AW2400 track channels 1–16.) • 2 ...........Control change messages will be transmitted and received only on the MIDI channel that is selected in the CHANNEL field. • 3 ...........This is the same as 2 in that control change messages are only received and transmitted via one MIDI channel, but the parameter mapping differs from 2. HINT • For details on the mix parameters that correspond to each control change message, refer to the tables that follow. ● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CC# 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 PARAMETER TRACK CHANNEL 1 TRACK CHANNEL 2 TRACK CHANNEL 3 TRACK CHANNEL 4 TRACK CHANNEL 5 TRACK CHANNEL 6 TRACK CHANNEL 7 TRACK CHANNEL 8 FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND MIDI CH 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CC# 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 7 10 91 93 PARAMETER TRACK CHANNEL 9 TRACK CHANNEL 10 TRACK CHANNEL 11 TRACK CHANNEL 12 TRACK CHANNEL 13 TRACK CHANNEL 14 TRACK CHANNEL 15 TRACK CHANNEL 16 FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND FADER PAN EFF1 SEND EFF2 SEND AW2400 Owner’s Manual 20 MIDI MIDI CH 195 Basic MIDI Settings ● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 2 20 MIDI 196 CC# 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON PARAMETER NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER NO ASSIGN MASTER MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL MASTER AW2400 Owner’s Manual INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 RETURN 1 RETURN 2 STEREO OUT AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 EFF 1 EFF 2 EFF 3 EFF 4 BUS 1 BUS 2 INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 RETURN 1 RETURN 2 STEREO OUT CC# 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER PARAMETER CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL BALANCE NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 RETURN 1L RETURN 1R RETURN 2L RETURN 2R STEREO OUT INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 Basic MIDI Settings ● When CONTROL CHANGE MODE = 3 FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON PARAMETER NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER NO ASSIGN MASTER MASTER NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL MASTER TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5 TRACK 6 TRACK 7 TRACK 8 TRACK 9 TRACK 10 TRACK 11 TRACK 12 TRACK 13 TRACK 14 TRACK 15 TRACK 16 TRACK 17 TRACK 18 TRACK 19 TRACK 20 RETURN 1 RETURN 2 STEREO OUT AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 EFF 1 EFF 2 EFF 3 EFF 4 BUS 1 BUS 2 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5 TRACK 6 TRACK 7 TRACK 8 TRACK 9 TRACK 10 TRACK 11 TRACK 12 TRACK 13 TRACK 14 TRACK 15 TRACK 16 TRACK 17 TRACK 18 TRACK 19 TRACK 20 RETURN 1 RETURN 2 STEREO OUT CC# 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER FADER PARAMETER CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL BALANCE NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND EFF1 SEND NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5 TRACK 6 TRACK 7 TRACK 8 TRACK 9 TRACK 10 TRACK 11 TRACK 12 TRACK 13 TRACK 14 TRACK 15 TRACK 16 TRACK 17 TRACK 18 TRACK 19 TRACK 20 TRACK 21 TRACK 22 TRACK 23 TRACK 24 RETURN 1L RETURN 1R RETURN 2L RETURN 2R STEREO OUT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5 TRACK 6 TRACK 7 TRACK 8 TRACK 9 TRACK 10 TRACK 11 TRACK 12 TRACK 13 TRACK 14 TRACK 15 TRACK 16 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 20 MIDI CC# 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 197 Basic MIDI Settings • MIDI Synchronization Message Setup F OTHER field MIDI messages other than program change and control change messages are set up here. • ECHO button (TX)........ Received MIDI messages other than program and control change are re-transmitted (“echoed”) via the MIDI OUT/ THRU connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output port). G REMOTE OUT box Selects the connector/port via which MIDI messages will be transmitted when the MIDI Remote function is active (when the REMOTE screen is showing). Refer to page 204 for details on the MIDI Remote function. NOTE H THRU box Specifies the connector/port for “THRU” output of MIDI messages received via the MIDI IN connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card input port). If “MIDI” and “USB 1” are selected for the two THRU boxes, THRU output will be as follows: • Messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be THRU output via the USB output port 1. • Messages received at the USB input port 1 will be THRU output via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. MIDI messages generated by the AW2400 itself are not transmitted via connectors/ports selected for THRU output. NOTE • The same connector/port cannot be specified for both boxes. • The same connector/port as selected in the PORT field or THRU box cannot be selected here. • The same connector/port as selected in the PORT field or REMOTE OUT box cannot be selected here. MIDI Synchronization Message Setup The MIDI screen Setting 2 page allows selection of MIDI messages used for synchronization with external equipment (MTC and MIDI clock) as well as messages used for remote control. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after pressing the [MIDI] key. C B A F GH I J This page contains the following items. 1 MMC field Specifies how MMC will be transmitted/received. B MMC OFF button Engage this button (it will appear inverted) to disable MMC transmission and reception. C MMC MASTER button When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as MMC master, and the appropriate MMC commands will be output via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output port) when the transport is operated. Turn this button on when you want to remotely control external equipment from the AW2400. 20 MIDI 198 D E AW2400 Owner’s Manual K D MMC SLAVE button When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as MMC slave, and will respond to appropriate MMC commands received via the MIDI IN connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card input port). Turn this button on when you want to remotely control the AW2400 from external equipment. MIDI Synchronization Message Setup E DEVICE NO. box Specifies the MMC device number (1–127) that the AW2400 will receive. NOTE • The MMC device number is an identifying number used to distinguish devices that transmit and receive MMC commands. When using MMC, the AW2400 and the external MIDI device must be set to the same MMC device number. • When transmitting MMC data from the AW2400, the MMC device number is always set to “128” (allowing control of all MMC-compatible devices). J OFFSET When using the AW2400 as an MTC slave, this parameter shifts the absolute time of the AW2400 forward or backward relative to the incoming MTC. The range is -24:00:00:00.00 to +24:00:00:00.00. OFFSET = 00:00:00:00.00 Incoming time code 00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00 00:00:20:00.00 Time code display (ABS) 00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00 00:00:20:00.00 Song F MTC field G MTC MASTER button When this button is on the AW2400 functions as MTC master. Turn this button on when you want external equipment to synchronize to the AW2400. H MTC SLAVE button When this button is turned on the AW2400 functions as MTC slave, and will follow MTC received via the MIDI IN connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card input port). Turn this button on when you want to synchronize two AW2400 units, or synchronize the AW2400 to an external device that can only function in MTC master mode. I SYNC AVERAGE box Select one of the following to specify how closely the AW2400 will follow the incoming MTC data when functioning as an MTC slave. • 0 ............. The AW2400 will synchronize to the incoming MTC data with the highest precision. If the incoming MTC has significant instability, synchronization may be interrupted or become unreliable with this setting. • 1 ............. This setting provides more tolerance to MTC instability than the OFF setting. • 2 ............. This setting allows the maximum tolerance. Use this setting if the MTC master is an external MIDI device that has significant instability. HINT • If the accuracy of the incoming MTC becomes unstable when the AW2400 is functioning as an MTC slave and is synchronized to an external MIDI device, the AW2400 will make slight adjustments in playback pitch in an attempt to maintain synchronization. The SYNC AVERAGE parameter specifies the range of MTC variance that will be tolerated. OFFSET = +00:00:05:00.00 Incoming time code 00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00 00:00:20:00.00 Time code display (ABS) 00:00:15:00.00 00:00:20:00.00 00:00:25:00.00 Song OFFSET = –00:00:05:00.00 Incoming time code 00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00 00:00:20:00.00 Time code display (ABS) 00:00:05:00.00 00:00:10:00.00 00:00:15:00.00 Song HINT • The OFFSET setting has no effect on MTC output via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector (or USB connector or digital I/O card output port). K SYNC OUT field Selects the type of MIDI message to be used for synchronization. • OFF button ........Engage this button (it will appear inverted) to disable transmission of MIDI synchronization messages. • MTC button .......When this button is ON MTC will be transmitted while the recorder is running. • MIDI CLOCK Button ...............When this button is ON the MIDI clock will be transmitted while the recorder is running. Also, appropriate START, STOP, CONTINUE and SONG POSITION messages will be transmitted when the transport is operated. HINT • MIDI clock operation is based on the tempo specified in the Tempo Map (refer to page 175 for Tempo Map setup details). AW2400 Owner’s Manual 20 MIDI Specifies how the AW2400 operates when synchronized with an external MIDI device using MTC (MIDI Time Code). 199 Connecting to External Equipment Connecting to External Equipment This section will provide some examples of how the AW2400 can be connected to and used with external MIDI devices. Synchronizing the AW2400 With External MIDI Devices ● Example settings for synchronization using MTC and MMC Using MTC AW2400 song playback and recording can be synchronized to external MIDI devices such as a computer-based sequencer application or a workstation type synthesizer with a built-in sequencer. Furthermore, MMC can be used to allow remote control of the AW2400 transport functions from the external MIDI device. 1 Refer to the following diagram, and connect the AW2400 to your workstation synthesizer or computer. AW2400 MIDI OUT/ THRU MIDI IN MTC MMC MIDI IN Workstation synthesizer with a built-in sequencer MIDI OUT or USB cable or MTC/MMC and set the value to match the device number of the external MIDI device. When using MMC, you must set the AW2400 and the external MIDI device to the same MMC device number. For details on the device numbers that your MIDI device can use, refer to its owner’s manual. MTC/MMC MY16-mLAN 5 Move the cursor to the DEVICE No. field, Computer-based sequencer application 6 Use the Work Navigate section [SONG] key to access the SONG screen Setting page. Select a frame rate. IEEE1394 cable 2 Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page. Select the connector(s)/port(s) to be used for MIDI message transmission and reception in the PORT field. 3 Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page. Turn on the MASTER button in the MTC field, and turn on the MTC button in the SYNC OUT field. This sets the AW2400 to function as MTC master. 20 4 Turn on the SLAVE button in the MMC field. MIDI This sets the AW2400 to function as MMC slave. Frame rate HINT • When using MTC with an external device be sure to set both the AW2400 and the external device to the same frame rate. • The frame rate you specify here will affect not only synchronization with the external device, but also the time code that is displayed in the counter, etc. 7 Set the external MIDI device to function as MMC master and MTC slave, and set its MMC device number and MTC frame rate to the same settings as the AW2400. For details on how to make these settings, refer to the owner’s manual provided with the device. 200 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Connecting to External Equipment 8 Play back the external MIDI device. When you play back the external MIDI device, the corresponding MMC commands will be sent to the AW2400, and the AW2400 will begin running. At the same time, the AW2400 will transmit MTC to the external MIDI device, and the external MIDI device will run in synchronization with it. HINT C Scene Move the cursor to this area and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the corresponding program number. D INITIALIZE button Returns the program change assignments to their initial state. HINT • You can synchronize using MIDI Clock and Start/Stop/Continue messages instead of using MTC and MMC. For details on the settings used in this case, refer to “Recording/playing AW2400 mix operations on an external sequencer” (→ p. 202). • In the initial state Program change numbers 1–99 correspond to scenes 1–99, program change number 100 = Initial Data (all scene parameters in their initial state), and program change numbers 101–128 are “NO ASSIGN” (unassigned). 2 Move the cursor to the program change Switching AW2400 scenes from an external MIDI device Here’s how you can transmit program changes from an external MIDI device to switch scenes on the AW2400. ■ Assign scenes to program changes 1 In the Scene/Automix/USB section, use the [SCENE] key to access the SONG screen PGM Assign page. This page lets you assign a scene number to each program change number. number, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the program change number for which you want to change the assignment. HINT • The [INC]/[DEC] keys can also be used to select program change numbers. 3 Move the cursor to the scene in the list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the scene that you want to assign to the corresponding program change number. 4 Repeat steps 2–3 to assign the desired scenes to other program change numbers. HINT • The PGM Assign page settings apply to all songs. • If you want to reset the scene assignments to the initial setting, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press the [ENTER] key. A B C D 1 List 20 MIDI This lists the scenes of the current song. The line enclosed by a dotted frame is the scene currently selected for operation. B Program change number This indicates the program change number (001–128). Move the cursor to this number and use the [DATA/ JOG] dial to scroll the list upward or downward. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 201 Connecting to External Equipment ■ Transmit program changes to switch scenes 1 Connect the AW2400 and your sequencer as shown in the diagram below. Workstation synthesizer with a built-in sequencer AW2400 Program changes MIDI IN MIDI OUT or Recording/playing AW2400 mix operations on an external sequencer Here’s how you can synchronize the AW2400 and your external sequencer, and use the sequencer to record/play the fader and pan operations you perform on the AW2400. Since operating the AW2400’s mix parameters will cause a large number of control change messages to be transmitted, we will use MIDI Clock (which uses less data) as the synchronization signal rather than MTC. 1 Connect the AW2400 and your sequencer MY16-mLAN as shown in the following diagram. USB cable or IEEE1394 cable 2 MIDI Clock Control changes Computer-based sequencer application MIDI OUT/ THRU MIDI IN Workstation synthesizer with a built-in sequencer AW2400 MIDI MIDI IN Control OUT Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page. changes or 3 Set the connector/port and channel to be used for program change message reception in the RX PORT and CHANNEL fields. 4 Turn the PROGRAM CHANGE (RX) field ON/ MY16-mLAN USB cable or OFF button on. If you want to receive program change messages on all channels regardless of the MIDI receive channel setting, also turn the OMNI (RX) button on. This sets up the AW2400 to receive MIDI program change messages. 5 Transmit a program change message from your sequencer to the AW2400 on the MIDI channel that you selected. The scene assigned to that program change number will be recalled. HINT • If you insert program changes into the appropriate locations of your sequencer track, scenes will be recalled automatically as the AW2400 and your sequencer run in synchronization. 20 MIDI 202 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Computer-based sequencer application IEEE1394 cable 2 Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page. Turn on the MASTER button in the MTC field, and turn on the MIDI CLOCK button in the SYNC OUT field. ● Example settings for synchronization using MIDI Clock and Start/Stop/Continue Connecting to External Equipment 3 Use the Work Navigate section [MIDI] key to access the MIDI screen Setting 1 page. Select the connector(s)/port(s) to be used for MIDI message transmission and reception. 4 Turn the CONTROL CHANGE field ON/OFF buttons (TX and RX) on. This sets the AW2400 to transmit and receive control change messages. 5 Select a CONTROL CHANGE MODE (1–3). The CONTROL CHANGE MODE lets you choose one of three combinations (1–3) that specify how control changes will correspond to the mix parameters of the AW2400. (For details on the contents of each choice, refer to page 195.) If you want to transmit and receive messages via separate MIDI channels for each of the AW2400’s track channels, choose 1. If you want all track channels to be controlled via a single MIDI channel, choose 2 or 3. If you chose 2 or 3, you will also need to set the CHANNEL field to specify the MIDI channel that will be used to transmit and receive the control changes. 6 Make the appropriate settings on your sequencer so that it will follow external MIDI Clock messages. Also set the sequencer to record-ready mode. For details on how to make these settings, refer to the manual for your sequencer. NOTE • If your sequencer has a function by which MIDI messages received at its MIDI IN connector are retransmitted from its MIDI OUT connector (a function called “MIDI Echo” or “MIDI Thru”), be sure to turn it off. If this function is turned on while you are recording, the control change messages transmitted when you operate the AW2400 will be immediately returned to the AW2400, causing improper operation. 8 Play back the AW2400 song from the beginning. When the AW2400 begins playback, it will transmit a Start message and MIDI Clock messages to the sequencer, and the sequencer will begin running in synchronization with the AW2400. 9 Operate the AW2400’s mix parameters (fader, pan, etc.) as required. The control changes assigned to each parameter will be recorded on the sequencer. The type of mix parameters that can be recorded will depend on the setting of the CONTROL CHANGE MODE field (→ p. 195). 10 When you are finished recording, stop playback of the AW2400 song. 11 Set the sequencer to the playback standby mode, recall the previously stored scene, and start AW2400 playback from the beginning of the song. The recorded control changes will be transmitted to the AW2400, and the corresponding mix parameters will change accordingly. If necessary, you can use the editing functionality of your sequencer to edit the values and timing of the control changes that were recorded. NOTE • If you set CONTROL CHANGE MODE to 1, operating track channels 1–16 will transmit control changes via the corresponding MIDI channel (1–16). For this reason, you should normally record operations only for a single channel at a time, unless your sequencer is able to record multiple MIDI channels simultaneously. 7 Store the initial fader, pan, and mix parameters as a scene at the beginning of the song. When the following operations are performed this scene will always be recalled at the beginning. Also, if you record a program change number corresponding to this scene at the beginning of a sequencer track the scene will automatically be recalled each time the sequence is played back. (refer to “Switching AW2400 scenes from an external MIDI device” on page 201 for details). MIDI 20 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 203 Using the MIDI Remote function Using the MIDI Remote function Control change number 64 (value= 127) About the MIDI Remote function transmit The AW2400 provides a MIDI Remote function that lets you use the top-panel controls to transmit the desired MIDI messages. By using the MIDI Remote function, you can use the AW2400 as a physical controller for a computer program or MIDI tone generator. MIDI messages can be assigned to the following controls. transmit Alternatively, you can specify that a MIDI message with a fixed value is transmitted only when you press the [ON] key to turn it on (indicator lit). For example if you assign program change #1, that program change number will be transmitted each time you turn on the [ON] key. ● Mixer section • Faders 1–12, 13–16 • [ON] keys 1–12, 13–16 ● Transport section • RTZ [ ] key • FF [ ] key • PLAY [ ] key Control change number 64 (value= 0) Program change number 1 • REW [ ] key • STOP [ ■ ] key • REC [ ● ] key Program change number 1 transmit transmit Of these, MIDI messages assigned to the faders and [ON] keys can be freely reassigned. You can assign the following types of message. ■ Messages that can be assigned to faders A MIDI message whose value changes over a range of 0–127 can be assigned to each fader. For example if you assign control change #7 (volume) to a fader, you can use the fader to control the volume of a MIDI tone generator. Control change number 7 transmit Value = 127 Using the MIDI Remote function presets The REMOTE screen 1–12 page and 13–16 page provide 14 different MIDI Remote presets (ten factory presets and four user presets). These presets have been created with specific devices and computer sequencer programs in mind, and assign the necessary messages to the AW2400’s faders and [ON] keys. You can use the MIDI Remote function immediately, just by selecting a preset in this page and connecting the appropriate external MIDI device. Value =0 Sequencer programs that are supported ■ Messages that can be assigned to the [ON] keys 20 MIDI 204 A MIDI message whose value changes between the two states, 0 and 127, can be assigned to each [ON] key. For example if you assign control change #64 (hold) to an [ON] key and specify that the control change value alternates between 0 and 127, pressing the [ON] key to turn it on (indicator lit) will transmit control change #64 with a value of 127 (Hold on), and turning it off (indicator out) will transmit control change #64 with a value of 0 (Hold off). AW2400 Owner’s Manual ● Windows • • • • Cubase SX 3.0.1 Logic Platinum 5.5.1 (*1) Nuendo 3.0.1 Sonar 4.0.1 Producer Edition ● Macintosh • • • • Cubase SX 3.0.1 Logic Pro 7.0.1 (*1) Nuendo 3.0.1 Protools TDM 6.7 (*2) *1 Use the setting file from the included CD-ROM to map the AW2400’s faders/[ON] keys/transport keys to the Logic key commands. Track assignments must be made within Logic as appropriate for your system. *2 Select the CS-10 settings as the MIDI controller type. For details on the CS-10 settings, ask Digidesign. Using the MIDI Remote function The MIDI channels corresponding to the faders and [ON] keys appears as follows when the REMOTE screen 1–12 and 13–16 pages are selected. ■ When the 1–12 page is showing. Fader/[ON] Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 MIDI Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ■ When the 13–16 page is showing. Fader/[ON] Key 1 2 3 4 MIDI Channel 13 14 15 16 To call the REMOTE screen 1–12 page press the Layer section [REMOTE] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [REMOTE] key. B A C D To call the REMOTE screen 13–16 page press the Layer section [REMOTE] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after pressing the [REMOTE] key (Operation of the 13–16 page is the same as the 1–12 page). N/A The AW2400 provides the following presets. ● Cubase Logic ● Sonar ● Protools These presets let you use the AW2400 as a physical controller for various software sequencers. ● • [ON] key operations will control mute on/off operations on the sequencer software. • Fader operations will control the volume of the sequencer software tracks. You will need to install the appropriate setting file into your sequencer software, and make the necessary settings. For details, refer to the “About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400” (→ p. 266). ● Volume/Rec TR Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone generator or the record tracks of an external recorder. • [ON] key operations will transmit MMC commands to select recording tracks. • Fader operations will transmit Volume control changes (CC#=07). HINT This page contains the following items. 1 MODE box Selects one of the ten presets. Move the cursor to a box and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the corresponding preset for instantaneous MIDI message assignment. ● Volume Use this preset to control the volume of an external tone generator. • When you turn an [ON] key off (indicator out), volume = 0 will be transmitted. • When you turn an [ON] key on (lit green), the volume value corresponding to the fader position will be transmitted. • When an [ON] key is on, operating the fader will transmit Volume control change messages (CC#=07). 20 MIDI • The MIDI Remote function will automatically be on while the REMOTE screen is displayed. The channel faders and [ON] keys will not perform their usual functions, but will work as specified by the preset you have selected in the REMOTE screen. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 205 Using the MIDI Remote function ● XG 1–16 XG 17–32 ● XG 33–48 ● XG 49–64 These presets let you use the AW2400 as a volume controller for an XG tone generator. Each preset will control the XG-compatible tone generator’s parts 1–16, 17–32, 33–48, and 49–64 respectively. ● • [ON] key operations will switch the part on/off. • Fader operations will control the volume of the part. Using User-defined Remote function The REMOTE screen 1–12 page and 13–16 page let you assign your own MIDI messages to each fader and [ON] key. To call the REMOTE screen 1–12 page (or 13–16 page) press the Layer section [REMOTE] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key (or [F2] key) after pressing the [REMOTE] key. ● USER1 USER2 ● USER3 ● USER4 These 4 presets can be set up by the user. Refer to “Using User-defined Remote function”. ● NOTE • USER1–USER4 must be selected in the MODE box in order to set up user-defined assignments. B C D E B TRANSPORT field Select one of the following to specify how the transport section keys will function while using the MIDI Remote function. • NORMAL button ...... The transport keys will perform their normal functions: play, stop, or locate etc. for the current song. MTC/MMC/MIDI Clock messages will be transmitted and received as specified in the MIDI screen Setting 2 page. • LOCAL button.......... The transport keys will play, stop, or locate the current song. However, MTC/MMC/MIDI Clock messages will not be transmitted or received. • REMOTE button....... The transport keys will not operate the recorder, but will only transmit the MIDI messages that have been preset for each key. HINT • These settings will also apply if you use a foot switch to operate the song transport. C ON field D FADER field This field is used when setting up a user-defined preset. A 1 Fader/[ON] key function name Displays the name that is assigned to the currently displayed fader or [ON] key. B RENAME button Edits the name that is assigned to the fader/[ON] key. Move the cursor to the button and press the [ENTER] key, and the NAME EDIT popup window will appear. C LATCH/UNLATCH button Selects one of the following types of operation for the [ON] keys. • LATCH............. The setting will alternate on/off each time you press the [ON] key. MIDI data transmitted (SW=7F) 20 off MIDI 206 AW2400 Owner’s Manual on MIDI data transmitted (SW=00) off Using the MIDI Remote function • UNLATCH ........The [ON] key will be engaged only while held, and will turn off when released. MIDI data transmitted (SW=7F) off on MIDI data transmitted (SW=00) off HINT • The MIDI message assigned to a single fader or key cannot be longer than sixteen bytes. • If a SW byte is not assigned to an [ON] key, the MIDI message you enter will be transmitted only when you turn the key on. (In this case you will normally use the UNLATCH setting.) • When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change message to a fader, the END byte will automatically be entered at the end of the MIDI message. • When you use the LEARN button to assign a control change message to a fader, the FAD byte will be automatically entered as the variable value. D LEARN button When this button is on, the MIDI message received from an external device will be assigned to the currently selected fader or [ON] key. This is a convenient way to assign MIDI messages quickly. HINT • If two or more MIDI messages are received while the LEARN button is on, the last-received MIDI message will be entered in the MIDI message field. NOTE • If you assign a MIDI message manually, be sure to enter END at the end of the message. • When you assign a MIDI message to a fader, FAD must be entered for one of the bytes. If FAD is not entered the fader will not function. • If you enter the values manually, it is possible that an invalid MIDI message will be entered. For this reason, you should use the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages whenever possible. • If a system exclusive message longer than sixteen bytes is received, the first sixteen bytes will be displayed. NOTE • The [ON] key and fader LEARN buttons cannot be engaged simultaneously. E MIDI message This area displays the MIDI message that is assigned to the currently selected fader or [ON] key in hexadecimal form. You can move the cursor to each number box and use the [DATA/JOG] dial to edit the value of each byte (two-digital hexadecimal number). You can select the following values. Remotely controlling a tone generator module Here’s how you can use the AW2400’s MIDI Remote function to remotely control a tone generator module. 1 Connect the AW2400 to your tone generator module as shown in the following diagram. AW2400 MIDI messages MIDI OUT/ THRU MIDI IN Tone generator module • 00–FF (hexadecimal) ............ Corresponds to the actual value of the MIDI message that is transmitted. • SW ([ON] key only) ............ Indicates the on/off status of the [ON] key. The byte you specify as SW will be transmitted as 7F (hexadecimal) when the key is turned on, or 00 (hexadecimal) when the key is turned off. • FAD ........ Indicates the current position of the fader. If the message is assigned to a fader, the byte you specify as FAD will be transmitted as a value of 00–7F (hexadecimal) corresponding to the fader position when you operate the fader. If the message is assigned to an [ON] key, this byte will be transmitted as a value corresponding to the current position of the fader when the [ON] key is turned on, and will be transmitted as a value of 00 (hexadecimal) when the [ON] key is turned off. 2 Use the Layer section [REMOTE] key to call the REMOTE screen 1–12 page or 13–16 page. This enables the Remote function. HINT • While the REMOTE screen is displayed, the functions of the faders and [ON] keys will be disabled; the faders and keys will function as controllers that transmit MIDI messages. • When the MIDI Remote function is enabled, the MIDI messages are transmitted via the connector/port selected in the MIDI screen Setting 1 page REMOTE OUT box. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 20 MIDI • END ....... Indicates the end of the MIDI message. When you operate a fader or [ON] key, the MIDI message starting with the first byte and ending with the byte that precedes END will be transmitted. 207 Using the MIDI Remote function 3 Select the preset you want to use in the MODE box and press the [ENTER] key. For example if you select preset “XG 1-16”, the AW2400’s faders will control the volume of parts 1– 16 of your XG tone generator, and [ON] keys 1–16 will control the on/off status of parts 1–16. 4 If necessary, select the REMOTE screen 1– 12 or 13–16 pages and set the MIDI channel assignments to the faders and [ON] keys as required. The MIDI channel assignments on each page are described in “Using the MIDI Remote function presets” on page 204. 5 Operate the AW2400 faders and [ON] keys. The messages assigned to the faders and [ON] keys will be transmitted via the MIDI OUT/THRU connector, and the parameters of your tone generator module will change accordingly. 20 MIDI 208 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 21 Utility functions This chapter explains the AW2400’s various utility functions. Using the test tone oscillator The Oscillator page of the UTILITY screen lets you send the signal of the AW2400’s built-in test oscillator to the desired bus. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTILITY] as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [UTILITY] key. A C WAVEFORM Selects one of the following oscillator signals. • 100Hz button................... 100 Hz sine wave • 1kHz button..................... 1 kHz sine wave H • 10kHz button................... 10 kHz sine wave • PINK NOISE button ........ Pink noise • BURST NOISE button..... Burst noise (20-millisecond pink-noise bursts as 4-second intervals) D BUS1 L/R, BUS2 L/R buttons Sends the oscillator output to the Bus 1 L/R or Bus 2 L/R. B D E AUX1–4 buttons Send the oscillator output to AUX buses 1–4. E F G F EFFECT1–4 buttons Send the oscillator output to effect buses 1–4. C This page contains the following items. 1 OSC ON button When you turn this button on, the oscillator output will immediately be sent to the specified bus. Use the D–G buttons to specify the bus to which the signal will be sent. G STEREO L/R buttons Sends the oscillator output to the stereo bus. H Level Meter Displays the BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4, and EFFECT BUS 1–4 output levels. NOTE • Sine waves and white noise have a higher actual sound pressure level than perceived by the ear, and may damage your speakers if played at a high volume. Please use caution. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same affect as the OSC ON button. B LEVEL knob Adjusts the output level of the oscillator. 21 NOTE Utility functions • Be sure to lower the setting of the LEVEL knob before turning on the oscillator to prevent sudden high-volume output. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 209 AW2400 Preferences AW2400 Preferences The UTILITY screen Preference page provides a number of basic “preference” parameters for the AW2400 operating environment, including digital input/output setup, copy protection, and others. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTILITY] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after pressing the [UTILITY] key. G L B CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button Enables or disables digital recording from the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack, and importing of digital audio data from an audio CD or WAV file inserted in the CD-RW drive. When this parameter is ON, the following message will be displayed. A B H M C D E F N If you agree to the conditions stipulated in the “Copyright Notice” (→ p. 7), select [OK]. Recording and importing of digital audio data will be enabled when you select [OK]. HINT JK I This page contains the following items. 1 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT button Specifies whether SCMS (Serial Copy Management System) copy protect flags will be written into the digital signal that is output from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack. Protect is enabled if the button is set to ENABLE, and disabled if the button is set to DISABLE. If copy protect is enabled, you will be able to copy the signal from the DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack to an MD or DAT recorder, but it will not be possible to make a secondgeneration digital copy from that data. • The CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button will always be set to the default DISABLE setting when you turn on the power. C NUDGE PLAY MODE Selects the playback method that will be used by the Nudge function (a function that lets you use the [JOG ON] key and [DATA/JOG] dial to search for a location). Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection. • AFTER .......... Play repeatedly for the duration specified by the NUDGE TIME, starting at the current location. • BEFORE ....... Play repeatedly for the duration specified by the NUDGE TIME, ending at the current location. ● When copy protect is enabled MODE: BEFORE AW2400 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT= ENABLE 21 Utility functions 210 DIGITAL STEREO OUT jack DAT or MD, etc. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Digital recording possible Digital recording not possible Current location MODE: AFTER Current location D NUDGE TIME Specifies the duration (Nudge Time) of each repeat played by the Nudge function. The nudge time can be set from 25 to 800 ms in 1 ms (millisecond) steps. E PREROLL TIME Specifies the duration of the preroll (the amount of playback time before the punch-in point) when you use Auto Punch-in from 0 to 20 seconds. AW2400 Preferences F POSTROLL TIME Specifies the duration of postroll (the amount of playback time after the punch-out point) when you use Auto Punchout from 0 to 20 seconds. G DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION Selects the point in the input channel or track channel from which the signal will be taken when using DIRECT OUT. Press the [ENTER] key to confirm your selection. • PRE FADER..........the signal prior to the channel fader • POST FADER .......the signal after the channel fader H STORE CONFIRMATION button Specifies whether the NAME EDIT popup window (allowing you to assign a name) will appear when you store a scene/library. I RECALL CONFIRMATION button Specifies whether a popup window will ask you for confirmation when recalling a scene or library. J SYNC CAUTION DIGITAL ST IN button Determines whether an error message will be displayed when a signal that is not synchronized with the word clock source appears at the DIGITAL STEREO IN connector. L AUTO SAVE button Enables or disables the Auto Save function. When the Auto Save function is enabled the current song state will be backed up to temporary memory when one of the following occurs. If the power is accidentally turned off before the unit is properly shut down, the song will be restored from the backup data in temporary memory the next time the power is turned on. • • • • Recording is stopped. Track editing is ended. Import from the CD-RW drive is completed. Import of a WAV file is completed. M AUTO DISPLAY button Determines whether the display screen related to a key or knob operated in the Selected Channel section will appear automatically (ON), or whether the display will remain as it is and a popup window for the corresponding parameter will appear (OFF). N CD/ST TR PLAY MODE MUTE/MIX button Determines whether the input channels will be output together with CD or stereo playback (MIX), or whether only the CD or stereo track signal will be output (MUTE). K SYNC CAUTION SLOT IN button Determines whether an error message will be displayed when a signal that is not synchronized with the word clock source appears at a digital input on an I/O card installed in the I/O slot. Utility functions 21 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 211 Initializing the internal hard disk Initializing the internal hard disk The UTILITY screen Format page lets you initialize the internal hard disk. Prior to exporting and importing WAV files to or from a Macintosh computer (Mac OS X 10.3) it may be necessary to initialize the hard disk in order to change the hard disk cluster size. NOTE • Executing the Format operation will erase all data from the internal hard disk, and the data cannot be recovered. We recommend that you backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before executing the Format operation. • You cannot abort the Format operation once it has been started. • Never turn off or disconnect the power during formatting, since this may damage the hard disk and cause malfunctions. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [UTILITY] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key after pressing the [UTILITY] key. A 1 CLUSTER field Set the disk cluster size to either 32K or 64K. If you will be using Mac OS X 10.3 for WAV file transfer operations, set the cluster size to 32K. Select the 64K cluster size for maximum speed if you will be using Windows, or Mac OS X 10.4 or higher. When the AW2400 is shipped from the factory, the cluster size is set to 64K. B EXECUTE button Execute the disk initialization. A popup window will show the progress of the initialization operation. The popup window will close when initialization has been completed. B 21 Utility functions 212 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 22 Creating an audio CD This chapter explains how you can use the CD-RW drive to create an audio CD, and how to play back an audio CD. Creating an audio CD You can select one or more songs on the AW2400 hard disk, and write the audio data from the stereo track of each song to a CD-R/RW disc in CD-DA format. The CD-R/RW media to which you write this data can be played by a CD-RW drive or a conventional CD player in the same way as a standard audio CD. NOTE • Some CD players do not support CD-R/RW media, and may not be able to play back CDs created by the AW2400. In order to create a CD, you must first register one or more songs in a “track list,” and then write the virtual track currently selected for the stereo track of each song (the “current track”) to the CD in the order specified by the track list. A maximum of 99 tracks (areas on CD media to which audio data can be written individually) can be written to one CD-R/RW disc, and each track must be at least four seconds long. The maximum length of audio that can be written to a single disc is approximately 74 minutes for 650 MB discs, or approximately 80 minutes for 700 MB discs. HINT • The total size of audio data that can be written to a single disc is 746 MB (approximately 74 minutes) for 650 MB discs, or 807 MB (approximately 80 minutes) for 700 MB discs. The AW2400 CD-RW drive can use two types of media: “CD-R” which lets you record and append data, and “CD-RW” which can be erased and rewritten as required. These types of media have the following characteristics. ● CD-R ● CD-RW You can write data to a new CD-R disc, and append additional data later on. You cannot erase data that has already been written and rewrite the disc. Once you perform a process known as “finalizing the disc,” the audio data written to the CD-R can be played by a CD-RW drive or by most CD players. In addition to writing and appending data, this type of media lets you erase all recorded data and write new data to the disc. Audio data written to a CD-RW can be played back by a CD-RW drive or by CD players that support CD-RW media. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Creating an audio CD Types of media that you can use with the CD-RW drive 22 213 Writing an audio CD Writing an audio CD There are two ways in which you can write audio data to CD-R/RW media. ● Track At Once This method writes the data one CD track at a time. The advantage of this method is that you can add new data to a disc that already contains data. With the Track At Once method, the data from the beginning to the end of a song’s stereo track is written to the CD as one track. (Even if there is a portion during the song that contains no data, it will be written as silent audio.) Since each track is written individually, an interval of approximately two seconds will be created between each track. When using Disc At Once to write a CD, you can use the start point, end point and markers that were assigned within the AW2400 song to divide a single continuous song into multiple tracks. This is convenient, for example, when you have recorded a live performance as a single song and want to assign track numbers while leaving playback in continuous form. Start 1 2 End Song A Marker = on Start Start End 1 2 End Song B Marker = off Song A Start End Audio CD Song B Track 1 Audio CD Track 4 • Tracks shorter than four seconds cannot be written to an audio CD. If you use start point/end point/markers to divide a song into multiple tracks, make sure that each track is at least four seconds long. Track 2 interval (2 seconds) In order for a disc written using Track At Once to be playable by the AW2400 CD-RW drive or a CD player, you must perform a process known as “finalizing” to write track information to the disc. Once you have finalized a disc, no more data can be written to it. ● Disc At Once This method writes all tracks at once. As when using the Track At Once method, the data from the beginning to the end of the stereo track of each song is written to the CD as one track. However since writing does not stop until all data has been written, there does not necessarily have to be gaps between the tracks. Creating an audio CD Start End Song A Marker = off Start Song B Marker = off Audio CD Track 1 Track 2 no gap 214 Track 3 NOTE Track 1 22 Track 2 AW2400 Owner’s Manual End • If the length of the stereo track exceeds the writable length of the media, you can create an audio CD by adjusting the start point/ end point so that the region is within the allowable length. (→ p. 88) Media written using Disc At Once will be finalized automatically, and can be played back by a CD-RW drive or CD player that supports that type of media. However, no further data can be written to a disc that was written using Disc At Once. Basic settings for the CD-RW drive Basic settings for the CD-RW drive Before you actually write data to a CD, you will need to make basic settings for the CD-RW drive. 1 Call the Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [CD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [CD] key. The CD screen Setting page will appear. B A F 2 Move the cursor to the AUDIO WRITE SPEED field, and turn the [DATA/JOG] dial to select the write speed. You can select either x8 (eight times audio playback speed) or x4 (four times audio playback speed). Normally you should use x8, and reduce the speed to x4 only if errors occur during writing. HINT • In addition to the [DATA/JOG] dial, the [INC]/[DEC] keys can be used to make selections. 3 Use the TEST and WRITE buttons of the AUDIO WRITE TYPE field to select the write operation(s). The combination of buttons will determine the operation(s) that will occur, as follows. • Only the TEST button On ...........Only a write test will be performed. • Only the WRITE button On ...........Writing will occur immediately. D E C • Both the WRITE and TEST buttons On ...........First a write test will be performed, and then the actual writing will be performed. 1 AUDIO WRITE SPEED B AUDIO WRITE TYPE Selects the write method to be used when writing audio data to CD-R/RW media. C UNDERRUN PROTECT button Enables/disables the function that prevents buffer underrun (an error that can occur when data transfer cannot keep up with write speed). D DATA WRITE SPEED This indicates the speed at which data other than CD audio (e.g., backup data or WAV files) is written to CD-R/RW media. Normally this will indicate x8, but may be x4 if the media supports a maximum write speed of x4. This field is for display only, and cannot be edited. E DATA WRITE TYPE Selects the write method to be used when writing backup data to CD-R/RW media. If the COMPARE button is on, the original data will be compared with the backed-up data or the exported WAV file after a backup or export operation, to check whether any errors occurred while writing the data. Refer to “Backing up songs” on page 177 for information on backup procedures. Depending on the media and the state of the hard disk, it is possible that an error may occur while the data is being written. (If you are using a CD-R, this will make the media unusable.) You can turn on the TEST button to check whether an error will occur before you actually write the disc. If an error occurs during the test, halt the procedure, and either reduce the write speed or set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ENABLE. 4 If desired, set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ENABLE. The AW2400 CD-RW drive has a function to prevent “buffer underrun” errors that can occur if data transfer cannot keep up with the write speed. Switch the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to the “ENABLE” setting to prevent buffer underruns. HINT • The CD-RW drive factory settings can be restored from the CD screen CD Setting page by pressing the [F3] key (DEFAULT) while holding the [SHIFT] key. NOTE • If the UNDERRUN PROTECT button is set to ENABLE, the TEST button will automatically be turned off. Also, if the TEST button is turned on, the UNDERRUN PROTECT button will automatically be set to DISABLE. Creating an audio CD Selects the speed at which audio data will be written to CD-R/RW media. 22 F CD-RW MEDIA ERASE Erases the data that was written to CD-RW media. For details, refer to “Erasing CD-RW media” (→ p. 221). AW2400 Owner’s Manual 215 Writing audio data Writing audio data Here’s how to write the audio data from the stereo track of each song to a CD-R/RW disc in CDDA format. Audio data write operations are accessed via the CD screen Write page. To call this page press the Work Navigate section [CD] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [CD] key. (only displayed for TRACK AT ONCE) Finalizes the disc so that it can be played on a CD-RW drive or standard audio CD player. ■ If you turn on the TRACK AT ONCE button B G WRITE button Executes the actual CD write operation. H FINALIZE button This page contains the following items. A F DELETE button Deletes the selected song from the list. ■ If you turn on the DISC AT ONCE button C D E F I G H 1 Track list This is a list of the songs containing stereo tracks that will be written to the CD-R/RW media. The line enclosed by a dotted frame is currently selected for operations. If no songs have been registered, this will indicate “-NO TRACK-”. If audio data has already been written to the inserted CDR/RW media but the media has not yet been finalized, “--EXIST--” will be displayed for the already-written data. Creating an audio CD 22 216 B TRACK AT ONCE button Turn this button on to create an audio CD using the Track At Once method. C DISC AT ONCE button Turn this button on to create an audio CD using the Disc At Once method. D ADD button Adds a song at the end of the track list. E INSERT button Inserts a new song in front of the song currently selected in the list. AW2400 Owner’s Manual I MARKER button (only displayed for DISC AT ONCE) For each stereo track, this enables or disables the markers that have been set within that song. When you move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key, the start point, end point and markers within the currently selected stereo track will be enabled. (A “flag” icon will appear at the right of the list.) If markers are enabled for a stereo track, a track number will be written to the CD at the location of each marker. Regardless of any areas of silence, the entire region from the Start point to the End point will be written. Writing audio data Writing Track At Once Here’s how to use the Track At Once method to write stereo tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD-R/RW media. Use this method if you expect to be adding tracks to the disc later, or if you want an automatic two-second gap between tracks. 5 Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the track list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the song that will be written to track 1. 1 Make sure that the appropriate virtual track is selected for the stereo track of the song(s) you want to write. Only the virtual track that can be played by the stereo track (i.e., the “current track”) will be written to disc. If the correct virtual track is not selected, load the desired song, use the TRACK screen Stereo TR page to switch to the correct virtual track, and then save the song. 2 Call the CD screen Write page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [CD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [CD] key. or 3 Insert a CD-R/RW disc in the drive, move The inserted CD-RW will be automatically checked. HINT • If data has already been written on the inserted CD-RW disc, a popup window will appear immediately after step 3 asking whether you want to erase the data. If you want to erase the entire disc move the cursor to the OK button. If you want to cancel the audio CD write operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button. Then press the [ENTER] key. 4 Move the cursor to the ADD button and press the [ENTER] key. The track list will show information (track number/ song name/size of the stereo track) for the song that will be written to track 1 of the CD. HINT • When you move the cursor to the ADD button and press the [ENTER] key, a new song will be added following the existing songs. • By using the INSERT button instead of the ADD button, you can insert a new song immediately before the song that is selected in the list. HINT • Songs in which data has not been recorded on the virtual tracks selected for the stereo track will not be displayed. A current song that was not saved after the stereo track was recorded will also not be displayed. • Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not be displayed. • Songs with the sampling frequency of 48 kHz will not be displayed. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to select the songs that will be written to track 2 and following. HINT • Pressing the [F1]–[F3] keys while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ADD ([F1] key), INSERT ([F2] key), and DELETE ([F3] key) buttons, respectively. NOTE • When you add a song to the track list, the added song will always be initially selected. Change this as required. • You can use the DELETE button to delete the currently selected song from the track list. Creating an audio CD the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button, and press the [ENTER] key. 22 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 217 Writing audio data 7 Move the cursor to the WRITE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm. Writing Disc At Once Here’s how to use the Disc At Once method to write stereo tracks from songs saved on the hard disk to CD-R/RW media. Use this method if you do not want to create silence between each track of the CD, or if you want to write a single song divided into multiple tracks on the CD. 1 Make sure that the appropriate virtual track is selected for the stereo track of the song(s) you want to write. HINT • Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the WRITE button. 8 To begin writing the disc, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will indicate “CD Writing...” while data is being written to the disc. When writing is completed, a popup window will ask you whether you want to finalize. 2 If you want to divide the song into CD tracks at the marker locations specified within the song, check that markers have been set at the appropriate locations. 3 Call the CD screen Write page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [CD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [CD] key. 4 Move the cursor to DISC AT ONCE and press the [ENTER] key. The CD-RW disc inserted in the drive will automatically be checked. HINT NOTE • A “BUFFER UNDERRUN!” error message will appear if a buffer underrun occurs while writing. In this case, either decrease the writing speed to 4x or set the UNDERRUN PROTECT button to ENABLE (→ p. 215). • If you enabled the write test in “Basic settings for the CD-RW drive” (→ p. 215), a write test will be performed before the data is actually written. An error message will appear if a problem occurs during the write test. • Copy-prohibit data will automatically be written into the CD that is created. • If data has already been written on the CD-RW disc that you insert, a popup window will appear immediately after step 4 asking whether you want to erase the data. Move the cursor to the OK button if you want to erase the entire disc, or to the CANCEL button if you want to cancel execution. Then press the [ENTER] key. 5 Move the cursor to the ADD button and press the [ENTER] key. The track list will show information (track number/ song name/size of the stereo track) for the song that will be written to track 1 of the CD. HINT 9 To finalize the disc, move the cursor to the Creating an audio CD OK button and press the [ENTER] key. If you do not want to finalize the disc, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key. This completes the writing process. • By using the INSERT button instead of the ADD button, you can insert a new song immediately before the song that is selected in the list. • You can use the DELETE button to delete the currently selected song from the track list. 22 218 • When you move the cursor to the ADD button and press the [ENTER] key, a new song will be added following the existing songs. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Writing audio data 6 Move the cursor to the dotted frame in the track list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the song that will be written to track 1. 8 Repeat steps 5–7 to select the songs that will be written to track 2 and following. HINT • Pressing the [F1]–[F3] keys while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the ADD ([F1] key), INSERT ([F2] key), and DELETE ([F3] key) buttons, respectively. NOTE • When you add a song to the track list, the added song will always be initially selected. Change this as required. 9 Move the cursor to the WRITE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm. or HINT HINT • Songs in which data has not been recorded on the virtual tracks selected for the stereo track will not be displayed. A current song that was not saved after the stereo track was recorded will also not be displayed. • Songs with a stereo track shorter than four seconds will not be displayed. • Songs with the sampling frequency of 48 kHz will not be displayed. • Pressing the [F4] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the WRITE button. 10 To begin writing the disc, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will indicate “CD Writing...” while data is being written to the media. When writing is completed, the CD-R/RW media will be ejected, and the following popup window will appear. 7 If you want the stereo track of the selected song to be divided into CD tracks at the location of each marker, move the cursor to the MARKER button and press the [ENTER] key. Markers will be enabled for that song, and a “flag” icon will appear at the right of the list. • Markers can be enabled/disabled independently for each song. • When you use markers to divide a stereo track, the location of the divisions will be specified in units of 1/75 second. NOTE • Note that if markers are enabled, the track numbers shown in the list will not match the number of tracks written to the CD. • A maximum of 99 tracks can be written to an audio CD. If, for example, markers are enabled for the song you write to CD track 1, and this song contains 98 markers, it will not be possible to write any more songs to that CD-R/RW disc. NOTE • If you enabled the write test in “Basic settings for the CD-RW drive” (→ p. 215), a write test will be performed before the data is actually written. An error message will appear if a problem occurs during the write test. • Copy-prohibit data will automatically be written to the CD. 11 If you want to create another CD with identical contents, insert a new disc, and move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. Creating an audio CD HINT 22 Writing will begin again. Alternatively, you can move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key to exit the write operation. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 219 Finalizing CD-R/RW media Finalizing CD-R/RW media Here’s how to finalize CD-R/RW media created using Track At Once so that the disc can be played by a CD-RW drive or a CD player. HINT • CD-R/RW media written by the AW2400 using Track At Once (and not yet finalized) cannot be played by another CD-RW drive or a CD player, but it can be played by the AW2400’s CD Play function. (→ p. 222) 1 Insert the CD-R/RW disc that you want to finalize into the CD-RW drive. 2 Call the CD screen Write page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [CD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [CD] key. 4 Move the cursor to the FINALIZE button, and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the finalize operation. 3 Move the cursor to the TRACK AT ONCE button, and press the [ENTER] key. The track list will show the tracks that have been written to that CDR/RW disc. Already-recorded tracks will be displayed as “--EXIST--”. 5 To finalize the disc, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. If you decide not to finalize the disc, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • The finalize operation cannot be halted once it has been started. Perform this operation with care. Creating an audio CD 22 220 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Erasing CD-RW media Erasing CD-RW media Here’s how to erase all data that has been written to CD-RW media so that the CD-RW disc can be used to record new data. You will need to perform this operation on a disc that has been used to store data from a computer or other equipment if you want to use that disc with the AW2400. HINT • Since data is erased as necessary when you back up AW2400 data to CD-RW media or when you write audio data to CD-RW media, you do not need to perform the following procedure each time you re-use the disc. NOTE • The erased data cannot be recovered. Perform this operation with care. 1 Call the CD screen Setting page by either ● If you turn on the SIMPLY button pressing the Work Navigate section [CD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F3] key after pressing the [CD] key. 2 Move the cursor to the CD-RW MEDIA ERASE field, and press the [ENTER] key to select the desired erasure method. The buttons select the following erasure methods. ● If you turn on the PERFECTLY button • SIMPLY button ...........Only the TOC (Table Of Contents) data written to the CDRW disc will be erased. This is the quickest way to erase a CD-RW disc. Move the cursor to the appropriate button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the erasure. HINT • Pressing the [F1]–[F2] keys while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the SIMPLY ([F1] key) and PERFECTLY ([F2] key) buttons, respectively. 3 To execute the erasure move the cursor to the OK button. If you decide not to erase the disc move the cursor to the CANCEL button. Then press the [ENTER] key. Erasure will begin if you selected the OK button. (This operation cannot be halted.) Creating an audio CD • PERFECTLY button ...All data written to the CDRW disc will be erased completely. This method erases all data from the media and thus will take longer than the SIMPLY option. 22 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 221 Playing an audio CD Playing an audio CD The AW2400 CD Play function lets you play back a conventional audio CD or CD-R/RW media to which audio data has been written via the CD-RW drive. HINT • The CD Play function can also be used to play mixed-mode CDs (tracks 2 and above) and CD Extra CDs (1st session only). • CD-R/RW discs can also be played prior to finalization. 1 Call the CD screen Play page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [CD] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F2] key after pressing the [CD] key. In this page you can play back an audio CD inserted in the CD-RW drive. 2 Insert the audio CD that you want to play into the CD-RW drive. 3 Move the cursor to the CD PLAY MODE button and press the [ENTER] key. The CD Play function will be activated, and the CD track data will be read. HINT • Pressing the [F1] key while holding the Display section [SHIFT] key has the same effect as the CD PLAY MODE button. 4 To play the CD tracks, press the PLAY [ A During playback the audio output of the CD-RW drive will be sent directly to the stereo output channel. Use the STEREO fader to adjust the volume. When the CD Play function is on, the transport section keys have the following functions. B C Key PLAY [ Operation ] key Play 1 CD PLAY MODE button STOP [■] key Switches the CD Play function on/off. REW [ B INPUT CH MUTE/MIX button [DATA/JOG] dial Select tracks (Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selection) [ Select tracks Use this button to specify whether the signals from input channels 1–16 will be output together with CD playback (MIX button), or whether only the CD signal will be output (MUTE button). C List Creating an audio CD Displays the tracks on the audio CD that is inserted in the CD-RW drive. ] key/[ Stop ] key/FF [ ] key ] key Rewind/Fast-forward 5 To exit the CD Play function, move the cur- sor to the CD PLAY MODE button and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • The CD PLAY MODE button can be switched on/off only while CD playback is stopped. • While the CD PLAY MODE button is on, the CD-RW drive will be locked and it will not be possible to eject the disc. 22 222 ] key. To stop, press the STOP [■] key. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 23 Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings This section covers settings that apply to digital I/O and optional I/O cards. Wordclock and Cascade Settings Wordclock source selection and settings for Vari-pitch and cascade connection are made via the DIO screen Setting page. B A C This page includes the following items. 1 WORDCLOCK SOURCE field Selects the wordclock source to which the AW2400 will synchronize. The condition of the received wordclock and synchronization status are also displayed here. B VARI field Provides fine adjustment of the internal clock in order to control the Vari-pitch function. Select the Wordclock Source “Wordclock” refers to the clock signal that provides the basic timing for all digital audio signals. When transferring digital audio signals between the AW2400 and an external device such as a computer-based DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) or HDR (Hard-Disk Recorder) it is necessary to ensure that both devices are synchronized to the same wordclock signal. If the wordclock used by the two devices is not perfectly synchronized the digital audio cannot be accurately transferred and severe noise will often be the result. The normal procedure is to designate one device that will be the source of the wordclock signal for the entire system as the “wordclock master,” or simply “clock master”, and all devices that receive and synchronize to the wordclock master as “wordclock slaves”. The AW2400 can be set to function either as the wordclock master or slave. 1 Call the DIO screen Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [DIO] key. Wordclock settings are made in the WORDCLOCK SOURCE field. B A C D EF C STEREO BUS CASCADE field Provides settings that allow an external device connected to the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to cascade-connected to the AW2400 stereo bus. Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F1] key after pressing the [DIO] key. 23 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 223 Wordclock and Cascade Settings 1 INT button When this button is on the AW2400’s internal clock is selected as the wordclock source. Use this setting when using the AW2400 on it’s own, or when using the AW2400 as the wordclock master for other devices. HINT • When the internal clock is selected the sampling frequency of the current song becomes the sampling frequency for the entire system. B D.ST IN button When this button is turned on the clock signal included in the digital audio signal received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector is used as the wordclock source. Use this setting when you want the AW2400 to function as a wordclock slave that synchronizes to the signal received via the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector. Choose this setting when, for example, you will be cascade-connecting the digital audio from an external device to the AW2400 stereo bus, or when receiving digital audio from a DAT recorder or similar digital audio source. C 1/2–15/16 buttons When one of these buttons is turned on the clock signal included in the corresponding digital audio signal received via the rear-panel slot is used as the wordclock source (i.e. the clock signal included in one stereo pair: 1/2, 3/4–15/16). Use one of these settings when using an external HDR or other digital audio source as the wordclock master to which the AW2400 will be synchronized as the wordclock slave. The CLOCK and SYNC rows show the condition of the received wordclock signal and the synchronization status, respectively. Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings • CLOCK ... A “●” symbol will appear when an appropriate wordclock signal is detected. • SYNC ...... A “●” symbol will appear when the AW2400 is properly synchronized to the incoming wordclock signal. A “ ” symbol will appear when an appropriate wordclock signal is not detected. NOTE • Buttons that appear gray indicate that an appropriate digital signal is not available at the corresponding connector or slot, and cannot be used. 23 224 AW2400 Owner’s Manual D SLOT When an I/O card is installed in the rear-panel slot a graphic symbol that indicates the type of card will appear here. “NO CARD” will appear when no card is installed. E IN, OUT Indicates the number of input channels (IN) and output channels (OUT) available on an I/O card installed in the rear-panel slot. F Fs Indicates the sampling frequency of the wordclock signal currently selected as the wordclock source. NOTE • When using the AW2400 as wordclock slave, check that the sampling frequency of the current song matches the sampling frequency shown in the Fs filed. For example, a song that was recorded with a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz will play back with the wrong pitch and tempo if slaved to a 48 kHz wordclock signal. • “Unlock” in the Fs field indicates that proper synchronization with the wordclock source has not been achieved. In such cases check that an appropriate wordclock signal has been selected as the source. Wordclock and Cascade Settings 2 Select a wordclock source via the WORDCLOCK SOURCE field. The wordclock source setting will depend on how the AW2400 is being used. Here are a few examples. ● AW2400 As Wordclock Master When the AW2400 is used on its own, or when it is used as the wordclock master for an external HDR, DAW, or similar digital audio device, turn the INT button on. The external device(s) must be set to synchronize to the master wordclock from the AW2400. [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector Wordclock [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector or Wordclock I/O slot AW2400 (Wordclock master) WORDCLOCK SOURCE=INT HDR (Wordclock slave) Digital I/O card ● Using an HDR or DAW As Wordclock Master Set the HDR or DAW to use it’s internal clock in order to function as wordclock master so that the AW2400 can synchronize to the digital signal received at a digital input on an I/O card. Select the 1/2–15/16 button corresponding to the digital input at which the master signal is being received. I/O slot Digital I/O card Wordclock HDR (Wordclock master) AW2400 (Wordclock slave) WORDCLOCK SOURCE=1/2–15/16 Connect the digital audio output of the MD or DAT recorder to the AW2400 [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector, and turn the D.ST IN button on so that the AW2400 can synchronize to the received digital signal. [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] connector [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector Wordclock DAT recorder, etc. (Wordclock master) AW2400 (Wordclock slave) WORDCLOCK SOURCE=D.ST IN 3 Move the cursor to the appropriate button and press the [ENTER] key. The AW2400 clock source will change accordingly, and the sampling frequency of the selected clock source will appear in the Fs field. Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings ● Using an MD or DAT Recorder as Wordclock Master 23 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 225 Wordclock and Cascade Settings Fine Adjustment Of Overall Song Pitch (Vari-pitch) When the AW2400 is set to use it’s own internal clock as the wordclock source it is possible to adjust the sampling frequency over a small range to adjust the pitch and tempo of song playback (Vari-pitch). This function can be useful to match the playback pitch of an AW2400 song to an acoustic instrument, or to adjust the length of a song. 1 Call the DIO screen Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [DIO] key. 2 Move the cursor to the WORDCLOCK SOURCE field INT button and press the [ENTER] key. This selects the AW2400 internal clock as the wordclock source. 3 Move the cursor to the VARI field. Vari-pitch settings are made via the VARI field. 6 To disable the Vari-pitch function move the cursor to the FIX button and press the [ENTER] key. The Vari-pitch function will be turned off and the sampling frequency will be fixed at the value shown to the right of the FIX button. NOTE • When the Vari-pitch function is enabled and sampling frequency is adjusted, any external devices slaved to the AW2400 wordclock signal will be affected. Some slave devices may not be able to synchronize properly to the AW2400 wordclock signal when it is adjusted using the Varipitch function. Cascade-connecting External Devices Digital audio signals received at the AW2400 [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector can be mixed directly into the AW2400’s stereo bus (cascade connection). The output from a digital mixer could be cascade-connected in this way to allow the mixer’s inputs to be mixed to stereo along with the AW2400’s own inputs. ● AW2400 Cascade Connection A B C External device (Wordclock master) AW2400 (Wordclock slave) Stereo bus Digital audio output 1 FIX button When this button is turned on the sampling frequency is fixed at the sampling frequency shown to the right of the button (default). Input channels Track channels Effect return channels [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector Stereo output channel B VARI button Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings The Vari-pitch function is active when this button is turned on. C VARI knob Adjusts the sampling frequency of the current song in a range of -5.97 to +6.00%. 4 Move the cursor to the VARI button and press the [ENTER] key. This activates the Vari-pitch function. 5 Move the cursor to the VARI knob and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to set the sampling frequency as required. 1 Connect the digital output from the device to be cascade connected to the AW2400 [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector. 2 Call the DIO screen Setting page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [DIO] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [DIO] key. 3 Move the cursor to the D.ST IN button in the WORDCLOCK SOURCE field and press the [ENTER] key. 23 226 Stereo track [STEREO OUT] jack, etc. This selects the signal received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector as the wordclock source. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Wordclock and Cascade Settings • Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal 4 Move the cursor to the STEREO BUS CASCADE field. Cascade connection settings are made in the STEREO BUS CASCADE field. 5 Move the cursor to the STEREO BUS CASCADE button and press the [ENTER] key. This connects the digital audio signal received from the external device directly to the AW2400 stereo bus. 6 Use the ATT knob to adjust the level of the received digital signal as required. B A You can now mix and record the signals from the AW2400’s own inputs along with the digital audio received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector to the AW2400 stereo track. 1 STEREO BUS CASCADE button NOTE Enables or disables the cascade connection. • In order to record the signal received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector the UTILITY screen Preference page CD/ DAT DIGITAL REC button must be set to ENABLE. B ATT knob Adjusts the level of the signal received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector. Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal You can visually check the status of the signals received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector as well as signals received via an I/O card installed in the rear-panel slot in the DIO screen Status page. A B C D This page contains the following items. 1 Status Indicates the status of received digital signals. The meanings of the displays are as follows: NOTE • The following status displays will appear as “----” when a MY8-AT, MY8-TD, MY16-AT, or MY16-TD I/O card is installed. • Fs (Sampling Frequency) Indicates the sampling frequency of the received digital signal. Parameter values 44.1k 48k None UNLOCK Description Sampling frequency = 44.1kHz Sampling frequency = 48kHz Unknown sampling frequency No input signal, or inappropriate input signal. • EMPHASIS Indicates whether emphasis is on or off for the received digital signal. Parameter values Description On Emphasis ON Off Emphasis OFF ??? Unknown AW2400 Owner’s Manual Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F2] key after pressing the [DIO] key. This is a display-only page that does not include any editable settings. 23 227 Check the Status Of the Digital Input Signal • Plug-in Card Settings • CATEGORY Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format. This parameter can display the following values: Parameter values General Laser Optical Description OK Laser optical device Prohibit D/D Conv Magnetic Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device Instrument AD Conv AD Conv with (c) Digital broadcast reception Musical instrument, microphone, and sources that generate string signals A/D converter (without copyright information) A/D converter (with copyright information) Solid Memory Solid memory device Experiment Experimental device Unknown Parameter values Temporarily used. Digital - Digital converter and signal processing device D.Broadcast • COPY Indicates the status of copy protection information included in the IEC958 Part2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format signals. Unknown device Description Copy allowed Copy prohibited B [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector status Indicates the status of the digital audio signal received at the [DIGITAL STEREO IN] connector. C SLOT When an I/O card is installed in the rear-panel slot a graphic symbol that indicates the type of card appears here. “NO CARD” will appear when no card is installed. D Digital I/O card status Displays the status of the digital audio signal received via a digital I/O card. HINT • The status of digital signals received via a digital I/O card is displayed in odd/even channel pairs. NOTE • “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are monitoring IEC958 Part 3 (AES/EBU-Professional) format signals (that do not include Category Code Bit). Plug-in Card Settings Settings for plug-in DSP cards installed in the rear-panel slot are made via the DIO screen Plugin page. Digital Input/Output & Optional Card Settings To call this page press the Work Navigate section [DIO] key as many times as necessary, or press the [F3] key after pressing the [DIO] key. • Waves .................. Y96K Check the following Yamaha website for the latest information on plug-in cards. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 23 228 The content of the display will depend on the plug-in card installed. Refer to the plug-in card owner’s manual for details. As of July 2005 the available plug-in card is: AW2400 Owner’s Manual Chapter 24 USB This chapter explains operation and use of the AW2400 USB interface. What You Can Do With USB The AW2400 USB interface can be connected to a personal computer to allow data transfer between the AW2400 and the computer. The following types of operation are possible. ● MIDI Message Transfer (Normal Mode) ● WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) In this type of operation the USB connector performs the functions of the three MIDI connectors usually used for MIDI data transfer, allowing efficient MIDI communication with the computer. The USB port is normally in this mode immediately after the AW2400 power is turned on. Audio data recorded on the AW2400 can be transferred to the computer in the form of WAV files for storage or further manipulation. Conversely, WAV files can be transferred to the AW2400 from the computer. For example, you might transfer a recording made on the AW2400 to the computer and use a computer-based waveform editing program to edit the waveform. Once edited the WAV file can be transferred back to the AW2400 where it can be processed and mixed with other audio data. It is also possible to directly access data on the internal AW2400 hard disk from the computer and directly edit the data “in place”. • In order to use the USB connector for MIDI communication the MIDI port settings must be correct. Refer to “Basic MIDI Settings” on page 194 for details on the MIDI port settings. • Before connecting the AW2400 USB connector to the computer the appropriate USB-MIDI driver must be properly installed on the computer (→ p. 266). NOTE • Either the Windows XP SP1 or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher operating system is required for computer WAV file management with the AW2400. ● USB Storage mode WAV files AW2400 WAV files (Direct audio data editing is also possible.) Computer USB NOTE 24 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 229 WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) In this mode you can directly access the AW2400 hard disk from the computer to manipulate and manage the audio data (WAV files). The following two methods can be used. ■ Using the Transport Folder ■ Directly Accessing AW2400 Audio Data This method uses the “Transport” folder on the AW2400 as the transit point for transferring files to and from the computer. In this case the AW2400 and computer are connected via a USB cable, and the target WAV files in specific folders on the AW2400 hard disk are directly accessed from the computer. Waveform editing software running on the computer can be used to directly edit WAV files residing on the AW2400 hard disk, and complete songs can be backed up (copied to) the computer hard disk. Refer to “Song Folder Organization” on page 166 for details on how the folders are organized. WAV files are first exported to the “Transport” folder on the AW2400 hard disk from the audio tracks. The AW2400 is then connected to the computer via a USB cable, the “Transport” folder is accessed and opened from the computer, and the WAV files are copied to the computer hard disk. Files to be moved from the computer to the AW2400 are first copied from the computer to the AW2400 “Transport” folder, and then imported into the audio tracks from there. ● Transfer ● Directly Accessing Audio Data to Computer via the “Transport” Folder Computer Backup of Song Data etc. (USB) Direct Editing of Audio Data (USB) Computer AW2400 WAV file transfer (USB) “Transport” folder AW2400 “Transport” folder Export Audio tracks/ stereo track HINT • Files in the “Transport” folder can also be directly accessed and manipulated from applications running on the computer. ● Transfer Audio tracks/ stereo track to AW2400 via the “Transport” Folder Switching to the USB Storage Mode To directly access files on the AW2400 internal hard disk, first follow the procedure outlined below to switch to the USB Storage Mode. 1 Make sure that your computer meets the following requirements. • OS ...........................Windows XP Professional/ Home Edition SP1 or higher, or Mac OSX 10.3 or higher. Computer • USB Interface.........USB 2.0 WAV file transfer (USB) NOTE AW2400 • A USB 1.1 interface can also be used, but in that case file transfer will occur at USB 1.1 speed. “Transport” folder Import USB • To use Mac OS X 10.3 you will need to re-initialize the AW2400 hard disk and set the hard disk cluster size to 32K (→ p. 212). 2 Make sure the POWER switch on the 24 230 Audio tracks/ stereo track AW2400 is set to OFF, then connect the AW2400 to the computer via a USB cable. AW2400 Owner’s Manual WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) 3 Turn on the AW2400. No driver installation is necessary for WAV file transfer. If it is the first time you have connected a USB cable on a Windows machine, however, you may see a message prompting you to install a USB MIDI driver. Even if you will not send and receive MIDI messages via the USB cable, install the USB MIDI driver as described on page 266. 7 Display the AW2400 internal hard disk on the computer screen. ● In the case of Windows XP: The two windows will appear. 4 Call the USB screen USB page by pressing the SCENE/AUTOMIX/USB section [USB] key. NOTE • If the windows shown above do not appear, choose to display the “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” drives from the Windows Start → My Computer menu. CONNECT button 5 Move the cursor to the CONNECT button, and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you whether you want to save the current song. ● In the case of Mac OS X: The “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” drive icons will appear on the desktop. NOTE NOTE • If the icons are not displayed properly, use the Disk Utility to temporarily un-mount the appropriate volume, and then mount it again. • Before turning the USB Storage Mode on, make sure that no MIDI data is being transferred via the USB connection with your computer. 6 Move the cursor to YES (to save the current song) or NO (if you don’t want to save the current song) and press the [ENTER] key. USB The AW2400 USB Storage Mode will be engaged, and the button will change to “CANCEL”. Most of the AW2400 functions are temporarily disabled while this mode is engaged. 24 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 231 WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) 8 Open the appropriate drive/folder and copy the required WAV files or directly edit the WAV files using a waveform editor application. To access the Transport folder open the “AW2400-2” drive. To directly access WAV files on the AW2400 open the “Song1” folder on the “AW2400-1” drive and the “Song2” folder on the “AW2400-2” drive. These folders contain folders bearing the names of the recorded songs (extension .AWS), and those folders further contain folders labeled “Audio” that contain the actual audio data. To backup a complete song to the computer simply copy the folder bearing the name of the song you want to backup to the computer. Refer to “Song Folder Organization” on page 166 for information on how the folders are organized. Exiting the USB Storage Mode Use the following procedure to exit from the USB Storage Mode. 1 Be sure the “unmount” the AW2400 hard disk from your computer after closing all AW2400 windows. ● In the case of Windows XP: Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the taskbar and remove the corresponding two “USB mass storage devices”. NOTE HINT • Verification and repair of the internal hard disk can be carried out from the computer. From a Windows computer enter the “chkdsk” command at the command prompt, or from a Macintosh computer running OS X use the Disk Utility First Aid function. NOTE • For 24-bit songs, the audio data contained in the “Audio” folders is stored in 32-bit WAV format. If your waveform editor application cannot handle 32-bit data, first export the WAV file(s) to the “Transport” folder. WAV files imported or exported via the “Transport” folder are automatically converted to 24-bit format that can be edited using most waveform editor software. • Do not change the names of any folders/files other than those in the Transport folder. Any folder/file names that have been added or changed outside the Transport folder from the computer will be automatically deleted. Be especially careful not to change a song folder or song file name. • If an error message appears, execute “Safely Remove Hardware” one or two more times. You should then be able to remove the device without seeing an error message. ● In the case of Mac OSX: Drag the “AW2400-1” and “AW2400-2” icons from the desktop to the trash. 2 In the AW2400 screen, move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window confirming whether the AW2400 has been safely removed from the computer will appear. • Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied. Be sure to carry out the steps outlined in “Exiting the USB Storage Mode” when disconnecting the AW2400 from the computer. 3 To return to the normal mode move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. USB 24 232 AW2400 Owner’s Manual WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) Copying Exported WAV Files To the Computer The WAV files corresponding to the audio tracks you want to transfer to a computer must first be exported to the “Transport” folder on the internal hard disk drive. Once these files have been exported they can be edited using appropriate waveform editing software, or imported into a DAW application for further processing or integration with other projects. 1 Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. 1 From TR Selects the source track for the export operation (1–24, 1&2–23&24, ST, ALL). B From V.TR Selects the source virtual track for the export operation (1–8). C From Start Specifies the start point of the data to be exported in counter format. D From End Specifies the end point of the data to be exported in counter format. E File Name Displays the name of the WAV file to be exported. The default name is the name of the virtual track (the oddnumbered virtual track in track pairs) to be exported. F EXECUTE button Executes the export operation. Edit commands 4 Move the cursor to the From TR field, and select the audio track that you want to export. If you select “ALL,” the current tracks 1–24 will be exported as separate monaural WAV files. If you select “1”–“24,” the single specified track will be exported as a monaural WAV file. If you select “1&2”–“23&24” or ST, the specified pair of tracks (or the Stereo track) will be exported as a stereo WAV file. 5 Move the cursor to the From V.TR, From 2 Move the cursor to the edit command field and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select EXPORT. 3 Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selected edit command. Start, and From End fields, and specify the virtual track number and region to be exported. NOTE • If you selected “ALL” as the export source, all the recorded tracks will be exported automatically. It is not possible to specify the virtual track number for each. The display will appear as follows. C D E USB A B F 24 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 233 WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) 6 When you have finished setting the param- eters, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. If a source other than “ALL” is selected the NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to enter a file name. If you select “ALL” as the source the NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to enter a folder name. The WAV files (“TRACK_01.WAV”– “TRACK_24.WAV”) will be stored in the new folder, which will be created inside the “Transport” folder. Importing Copied WAV Files From the Computer This procedure allows you to import WAV files transferred from a computer to the “Transport” folder to be imported into specified audio tracks. 1 Switch to the USB Storage Mode (→ p. 230) and display the AW2400 internal hard disk on the computer screen. 2 Copy the WAV files from the computer to the AW2400 “Transport” folder. The “Transport” folder is located in the “AW2400-2” drive. 3 When the files have been copied, disconnect the AW2400 from the computer and exit the USB Storage Mode (→ p. 232). 4 Call the EDIT screen Edit page by either For details on how to enter a name, refer to page 32. pressing the Work Navigate section [EDIT] key as many times as necessary, or by pressing the [F1] key after pressing the [EDIT] key. 8 To execute the export operation, move the 5 Move the cursor to the edit command field 7 Enter an appropriate file or folder name via the NAME EDIT popup window, as required. cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The export operation will begin. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button (instead of the OK button) and press the [ENTER] key, the export operation will be cancelled. (However, it is not possible to abort the export process once it has been started.) and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select IMPORT USB WAV. 6 Press the [ENTER] key to confirm the selected edit command. The display will appear as follows. C NOTE D E • Since the AW2400 does not keep track of the date and time, dummy values will be written as the file creation date and time of the WAV files. • Tracks that do not contain data in the specified region will not be exported. 9 B Switch to the USB Storage Mode (→ p. 230) and display the AW2400 internal hard disk on the computer screen. A 10 Open the “AW2400-2” drive to access the “Transport” folder. 11 Copy the WAV files exported to the “Transport” folder to the computer. WAV files in the “Transport” folder can also be directly accessed from computer applications. USB 24 234 12 When the files have been copied, disconnect the AW2400 from the computer and exit the USB Storage Mode (→ p. 232). AW2400 Owner’s Manual F G H I WAV File Transfer (USB Storage Mode) 1 File list This shows the WAV files and folders (directories) in the “Transport” folder. Move the cursor to the list, and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or the [INC]/[DEC] keys to specify the WAV file that you want to import. B FILE This indicates the name of the WAV file or folder. The icons shown here have the following meaning. • .............Indicates a WAV file. • .............Indicates a folder in the same level. You can select this icon and press the [ENTER] key to move down one level. • ..............You can select this icon and press the [ENTER] key to move up one level. C TOTAL Indicates the playback length (in units of hours/minutes/seconds/milliseconds) of the WAV file selected for importing. This field is for display only, and cannot be changed. D TYPE Indicates whether the WAV file selected for importing is monaural ( ) or stereo ( ). The numerical value at the right indicates the bit depth of the WAV file. This field is for display only, and cannot be changed. E LISTEN/ENTER/UP button This display will change according to the selected file or folder in the file list. 7 Move the cursor to the file list and use the [DATA/JOG] dial or [INC]/[DEC] keys to select the WAV file that you want to import. When a is included in the field enclosed by the dotted frame you can press the [ENTER] key to move down one level. To move up one level display the icon and press the [ENTER] key. NOTE • Only 16-bit or 24-bit, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, mono or stereo WAV files can be imported. Also, WAV files having a different bit depth or sample rate from the song cannot be imported. 8 Use the To TR, To V.TR, and To Start fields to specify the track number, virtual track number, and starting location into which the WAV file will be imported. NOTE • Any existing data at the import destination will be overwritten. Be careful not to accidentally overwrite important data. 9 When you have finished making the required settings, move the cursor to the EXECUTE button and press the [ENTER] key. A popup window will ask you to confirm the operation. • LISTEN ......If a WAV file is selected, you can move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to repeatedly hear the currently selected WAV file. • ENTER.......If a folder is selected, you can move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to move into that folder. • UP ..............If the icon is selected, you can move the cursor to this button and press the [ENTER] key to move up one folder. F To TR Selects the track number into which the WAV file will be imported. If the import source is a stereo WAV file, only tracks 1&2–23&24 can be selected. 10 To execute the import operation, move the cursor to the OK button and press the [ENTER] key. The import operation will begin. If you move the cursor to the CANCEL button and press the [ENTER] key, the import operation will be cancelled. G To V.TR Selects the virtual track number (1–8) into which the WAV file will be imported. H To Start Specifies the start location (in counter-display and measure/beat format) to which the WAV file will be imported. USB I EXECUTE button Executes the import operation. 24 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 235 USB 24 236 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Appendix Mastering library list No. Description Initial Data Initialize to a state in which EQ and DYN are not applied. 01 VITAL MIX Standard mastering effect that enhances the overall loudness, creating a mix with extended low and high ranges. Use on the two-track mix for any type of song. 02 SOFT COMP Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness without greatly changing the original nuances (dynamics). Ideal for songs in which the mid and low ranges are important. 03 HARD ATTACKY Limiter that emphasizes the attacks and produces an overall “flattened” feel. Ideal for songs that emphasize the rhythm. 04 SOFT ATTACKY Soft compressor that enhances the overall loudness and emphasizes the attacks without greatly changing the original nuances (dynamics). Ideal for songs in which the low and mid ranges are important, and that emphasize the rhythm. 05 LO-FI Limiter that produces a “lo-fi” character. 06 DARK/SOFT Soft limiter that produces the slightly flattened feel characteristic of the 60’s and 70’s. (Ideal for Beatles-type rock of the 60’s and 70’s, or more recently for a Vincent Gallo feel.) 07 DARK/HARD Hard limiter that produces a strongly flattened feel characteristic of the 60’s and 70’s. (Ideal when you want to make the song sound like 60’s or 70’s rock such as the Beatles.) 08 BRIGHT Compressor that produces a boosted high range. 09 LO BOOST Compressor that produces a boosted low range. 10 HARD LIMIT Limiter that produces an extremely flattened feel. Ideal for hard-edged songs. 11 LIMITER Limiter without EQ. Ideal when you need only limiting. 12 NARROW Limiter that produces a sound like that of a small AM radio. 13 DIST Limiter that distorts the sound within the effect. Appendix 00 Name AW2400 Owner’s Manual 237 EQ Parameter list EQ Parameter list # Parameter Title 01 Bass Drum 1 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB -3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 02 Bass Drum 2 1.2 10 0.9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF G +8.0 dB -7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON F 80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 03 Snare Drum 1 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz 1.2 4.5 0.11 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +1.5 dB -8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz — 10 0.7 0.1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +2.0 dB -7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz — 8 0.9 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -4.0 dB -2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB F 95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz Appendix 238 — H.SHELF 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz — 4.5 0.56 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz — 5 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz 0.1 5 6.3 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB F 85 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz 0.1 8 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz 1.6 8 2.2 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz Q 14 Piano 2 1 PEAKING -4.5 dB Q 13 Piano 1 0.5 PEAKING F Q 12 Syn. Bass 2 — L.SHELF G Q 11 Syn. Bass 1 0.28 H.SHELF 106 Hz Q 10 E. Bass 2 1.2 PEAKING -2.0 dB Q 09 E. Bass 1 10 PEAKING F Q 08 Percussion 1.4 L.SHELF G Q 07 High Hat — H.SHELF -0.5 dB Q 06 Cymbal 2.2 PEAKING F Q 05 Tom-tom 1 4.5 PEAKING G Q 04 Snare Drum 2 1.4 PEAKING — 8 0.9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB -8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 5.6 10 0.7 — AW2400 Owner’s Manual # Parameter Title 15 E. G. Clean LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB -5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 16 E. G. Crunch 1 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz 8 4.5 0.63 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz -8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz — 10 4 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz 0.9 4.5 3.5 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -3.5 dB -2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz — 9 4.5 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz — 4.5 4.5 0.12 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G 0.0 dB -5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz — 7 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz 2.8 2 0.7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB -5.0 dB -2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz 0.11 10 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz Q 28 Female Vo. 2 — H.SHELF 315 Hz Q 27 Female Vo. 1 10 PEAKING +6.0 dB Q 26 Male Vocal 2 9 PEAKING F Q 25 Male Vocal 1 — L.SHELF G Q 24 Brass Sec. — H.SHELF 355 Hz Q 23 A. G. Arpeg. 2 0.16 PEAKING +5.0 dB Q 22 A. G. Arpeg. 1 0.4 PEAKING F Q 21 A. G. Stroke 2 8 L.SHELF G Q 20 A. G. Stroke 1 — PEAKING +4.5 dB Q 19 E. G. Dist. 2 6.3 PEAKING F Q 18 E. G. Dist. 1 10 PEAKING G Q 17 E. G. Crunch 2 0.18 PEAKING 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q — 0.16 0.2 — EQ Parameter list 29 Parameter Title Chorus & Harmo LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -2.0 dB -1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 30 Total EQ 1 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB 95 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz 7 2.2 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB F 95 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz 7 2.8 5.6 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz — 0.28 0.7 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +3.5 dB -10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz Q 34 Snare Drum 3 2 10 0.4 0.4 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz Q 35 Tom-tom 2 — 4.5 2.8 0.1 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz Q 36 Piano 3 — 4.5 1.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.5 dB -13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 37 Piano Low 8 10 9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 38 Piano High 10 6.3 2.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G -5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz Q 39 Fine-EQ Cass 10 6.3 2.2 0.1 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB F 75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 40 Narrator 7 H.SHELF -0.5 dB Q 33 Bass Drum 3 0.7 PEAKING F Q 32 Total EQ 3 2 PEAKING G Q 31 Total EQ 2 2.8 PEAKING — 4.5 1.8 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G -4.0 dB -1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 4 7 0.63 — Appendix # AW2400 Owner’s Manual 239 Dynamics Parameters Dynamics Parameters Dynamics processors are generally used to correct or control signal levels. However, you can also use them creatively to shape the volume envelope of a sound. The AW2400 features comprehensive dynamics processors for all the input channels, tape returns, and the bus and stereo outputs. These processors allow you to compress, expand, compress-expand (compand), gate, or duck the signals passing through the mixer, giving you unparalleled sonic quality and flexibility. • Out Gain — sets the compressor’s output signal level. Compression tends to reduce the average signal level. Out Gain can be used to counter this level reduction and set an appropriate level for the next stage in the audio path. ■ Compressor dB +20 +10 • Knee — sets the transition of the signal at the threshold. With a hard knee, the transition between uncompressed and compressed signal is immediate. With the softest knee, knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold. Compression ratio = 2:1 Output Level 0 –10 Threshold = –20dB –20 –30 Knee = hard –40 –50 –60 –70 dB –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level A compressor provides a form of automatic level control. By attenuating high levels, thus effectively reducing the dynamic range, the compressor makes it much easier to control signals and set appropriate fader levels. Reducing the dynamic range also means that recording levels can be set higher, therefore improving the signal-to-noise performance. Compressor (CMP) parameters: Parameter Value Threshold (dB) -54 to 0 (541 points) Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points) Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points) Outgain (dB) 0 to +18 (181 points) Knee hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points) Release (ms) 6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points) • Threshold — determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor. Signals at a level below the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and above the threshold level are compressed by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter. • Ratio — controls the amount of compression-the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change in output level. For a 5:1 ratio, a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 2 dB change in output level. Appendix 240 • Attack — controls how soon the signal is compressed once the compressor has been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is compressed almost immediately. With a slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected. AW2400 Owner’s Manual • Release — determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. If the release time is too short, the gain will recover too quickly causing level pumping-noticeable gain fluctuations. If it is set too long, the compressor may not have time to recover before the next high level signal appears, and it will be compressed incorrectly. Dynamics Parameters ■ Expander ■ Compander dB dB +20 +10 +20 Expansion ratio = 2:1 +10 Width Knee = knee5 0 –10 –20 Output Level Threshold = –10dB –30 –40 –50 –10 –20 Threshold –30 –40 –50 –60 –60 –70 –70 dB –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 dB +10 +20 –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level Input Level An expander is another form of automatic level control. By attenuating the signal below the threshold, the expander reduces low-level noise and effectively increases the dynamic range of the recorded material. A compander is a compressor-expander-a combination of signal compression and expansion. The compander attenuates the input signal above the threshold as well as the level below the width. For very dynamic material, this program allows you to retain the dynamic range without having to be concerned with excessive output signal levels and clipping. Expander (EXP) parameters: Parameter Value Threshold (dB) -54 to 0 (541 points) Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points) Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points) Outgain (dB) 0 to +18 (181 points) Knee hard,1,2,3,4,5 (6 points) Release (ms) 6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points) • Threshold — determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander. Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter. • Ratio — controls the amount of expansion-the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. With a 1:2 ratio, for example, a 5 dB change in input level (below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level. For a 1:5 ratio, a 2 dB change in input level (below the threshold) results in a 10 dB change in output level. • Attack — controls how soon the signal is expanded once the expander has been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is expanded almost immediately. With a slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected. • Out Gain — sets the expander’s output signal level. • Knee — sets the transition of the signal at the threshold. With a hard knee, the transition between unexpanded and expanded signal is immediate. With the softest knee, knee5, the transition starts before the signal reaches the threshold and gradually ends above the threshold. • Release — determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. CompanderH (CPH) and CompanderS (CPS) parameters: Parameter Value Threshold (dB) -54 to 0 (541 points) Ratio 1.0, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10, 20 (15 points) Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points) Outgain (dB) -18 to 0 (181 points) Width (dB) 1 to 90 (90 points) Release (ms) 6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points) • Threshold — determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compander. Signals above the threshold pass through unaffected. Signals at and below the threshold level are attenuated by the amount specified using the Ratio parameter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter. • Ratio — controls the amount of companding-the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. With a 2:1 ratio, for example, a 10 dB change in input level (above the threshold) results in a 5 dB change in output level. The hard compander (CPH) has a fixed ratio of 5:1 for expansion and the soft compander (CPS) has a fixed ratio of 1.5:1 for expansion. • Attack — controls how soon the signal is companded once the compander has been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is companded almost immediately. With a slow attack time, the initial transient of a sound passes through unaffected. • Out Gain — sets the compander’s output signal level. • Width — is used to determine the distance, in decibels, between the expander and the compressor. With a width of 90 dB, the expander is effectively switched off and the compander is simply a compressor-limiter. With a smaller width (30 dB) and a high threshold (0 dB), the compander is an expander-compressor-limiter. Appendix Output Level 0 • Release — determines how soon the compander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 241 Dynamics Parameters • Range — controls the level to which the gate closes. It can be used to reduce the signal level rather than cut it completely. At a setting of -70 dB, the gate closes completely when the input signal falls below the threshold. At a setting of -30 dB, the gate only closes so far allowing an attenuated signal through. At a setting of 0 dB, the gate has no effect. When signals are gated abruptly, the sudden cutoff can sound odd. For ducking, a setting of -70 dB causes the signal to be virtually cutoff. At a setting of -30 dB the signal is ducked by 30 dB. At a setting of 0 dB, the duck has no effect. ■ Gate and Ducking dB +20 +10 Output Level 0 Threshold = –10dB –10 –20 –30 Range = –30dB –40 –50 –60 Range = –70dB –70 dB –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level dB +20 +10 Output Level 0 –10 Threshold = –20dB –20 –30 –40 –50 Range = –30dB –60 –70 dB –70 –60 –50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 Input Level A gate, or noise gate is an audio switch used to mute signals below a set threshold level. It can be used to suppress background noise and hiss from valve (tube) amps, effects pedals, and microphones. Ducking is used to automatically reduce the levels of one signal when the level of a source signal exceeds a specified threshold. It is used for voice-over applications where, for example, level of background music is automatically reduced, allowing an announcer to be heard clearly. Gate (GAT) and Ducking (DUK) parameters: Parameter Value Threshold (dB) -54 to 0 (541 points) Range (dB) -70 to 0 (701 points) Attack (ms) 0 to 120 (121 points) Hold (ms) 0.02 ms to 2.14 sec (216 points) Decay (ms) 6 ms to 46.1 sec (160 points) • Threshold — sets the level at which the gate closes, cutting off the signal. Signals above the threshold level pass through unaffected. Signals at or below the threshold cause the gate to close. For ducking, trigger signal levels at and above the threshold level activate ducking, and the signal level is reduced to a level set by the Range parameter. The trigger signal is determined using the KEYIN SOURCE parameter. Appendix 242 • Attack — determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level. Slow attack times can be used to remove the initial transient edge of percussive sounds. Too slow an attack time makes some signals sound backwards. For ducking, this controls how soon the signal is ducked once the duck has been triggered. With a fast attack time, the signal is ducked almost immediately. With a slow attack time, ducking fades the signal. Too fast an attack time may sound abrupt. AW2400 Owner’s Manual • Hold — sets how long the gate stays open or the ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold level. • Decay — controls how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. A longer decay time produces a more natural gating effect, allowing the natural decay of an instrument to pass through. For ducking, this determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain after the hold time has expired. Gate Parameter list • Compressor Parameter list Gate Parameter list (fs = 44.1 kHz) # 1 2 Title Gate Type GATE Ducking DUCKING Parameter Value # Title Type Parameter Value Threshold (dB) -26 Threshold (dB) -11 Range (dB) -56 Range (dB) -53 Attack (ms) 0 Hold (ms) 2.56 Decay (ms) Threshold (dB) Range (dB) Attack (ms) 3 A. Dr. BD GATE Attack (ms) 0 Hold (ms) 1.93 331 Decay (ms) 400 -19 Threshold (dB) -8 -22 Range (dB) -23 93 4 A. Dr. SN GATE Attack (ms) 1 Hold (ms) 1.20 S Hold (ms) 0.63 Decay (ms) 6.32 S Decay (ms) 238 Compressor Parameter list (fs = 44.1 kHz) 1 Title Comp Type COMP Parameter 3 Expand Compander (H) EXPAND COMPAND-H 5 6 A. Dr. BD A. Dr. BD COMP COMPAND-H A. Dr. SN COMP Parameter Value 2.5 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 60 Attack (ms) 0 Out gain (dB) 0.0 8 A. Dr. SN EXPAND Out gain (dB) Knee 2 -23 0.5 2 Release (ms) 250 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) -23 Threshold (dB) -8 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 1 3.5 9 A. Dr. SN COMPAND-S 151 Attack (ms) 11 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Knee 2 Width (dB) 10 Release (ms) 70 Release (ms) 128 Threshold (dB) -10 Threshold (dB) -20 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 1 Attack (ms) 2 Out gain (dB) 0.0 10 A. Dr. Tom EXPAND Out gain (dB) Knee 6 250 5.0 2 Release (ms) 749 -24 Threshold (dB) -8 Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 4 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 25 Attack (ms) 38 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 24 Width (dB) 54 Release (ms) 180 Release (ms) 842 Threshold (dB) -24 Threshold (dB) -12 11 A. Dr. OverTop COMPAND-S Out gain (dB) -3.5 Ratio ( :1) 3 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 9 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 4.5 Out gain (dB) 5.5 12 E. B. Finger COMP Knee 2 Knee Release (ms) 58 Release (ms) 470 Threshold (dB) -11 Threshold (dB) -12 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 1 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) -1.5 13 E. B. Slap COMP Out gain (dB) 2 6 4.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 192 Release (ms) 133 Threshold (dB) -17 Threshold (dB) -10 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) 8 Attack (ms) Width (dB) 7 Type Ratio ( :1) Release (ms) Compander (S) COMPAND-S Title Threshold (dB) Width (dB) 4 # -8 Knee 2 Value Threshold (dB) Out gain (dB) 7 3.5 14 Syn. Bass COMP Out gain (dB) 9 3.0 Knee 2 Knee hard Release (ms) 12 Release (ms) 250 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Appendix # 243 Compressor Parameter list # 15 16 Title Piano1 Piano2 Type COMP COMP Parameter COMP A. Guitar COMP COMP 4 Attack (ms) 17 Attack (ms) 8 Out gain (dB) 1.0 Strings2 COMP COMP BrassSection COMP 238 Release (ms) 354 Threshold (dB) -18 Threshold (dB) -23 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 20 Attack (ms) 7 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Out gain (dB) COMP SamplingPerc COMPAND-S Appendix 25 244 Sampling BD COMP AW2400 Owner’s Manual 27 Hip Comp COMPAND-S 2 174 Width (dB) 15 Release (ms) 163 -8 Threshold (dB) -20 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 7 Attack (ms) 31 Out gain (dB) 2.0 Out gain (dB) 2.5 28 Solo Vocal1 COMP 4 Knee 1 Release (ms) 261 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) -10 Threshold (dB) -8 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 5 1.5 29 Solo Vocal2 COMP 2 342 Attack (ms) 26 Out gain (dB) 1.5 Knee 3 Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) -11 Threshold (dB) -9 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 2 Attack (ms) 33 Out gain (dB) 1.5 30 Chorus COMP 2 331 Attack (ms) 39 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Knee 2 Release (ms) 749 Release (ms) 226 Threshold (dB) -12 Threshold (dB) -33 Ratio ( :1) 1.5 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 93 Attack (ms) 1 Out gain (dB) 1.5 31 Click Erase EXPAND 4 Out gain (dB) Knee 1.35 S 2.0 2 Release (ms) 284 Threshold (dB) -17 Threshold (dB) -14 Ratio ( :1) 1.5 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 76 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 2.5 32 Announcer COMPAND-H 2 Out gain (dB) 1 -2.5 Width (dB) 18 Release (ms) 186 Release (ms) 180 Threshold (dB) -18 Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 3 Attack (ms) 18 Attack (ms) 20 Out gain (dB) 4.0 33 Limiter1 COMPAND-S 1 Out gain (dB) Width (dB) -9 -3.0 90 Release (ms) 226 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) -13 Threshold (dB) 0 Ratio ( :1) ∞ 2 Attack (ms) 58 Out gain (dB) 2.0 Knee 24 6.0 Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) Syn. Pad 8.0 Release (ms) Knee 23 Out gain (dB) hard Knee 22 COMP Knee Release (ms) Strings3 Sampling SN hard Knee 21 26 -18 Knee Knee 20 Value Ratio ( :1) Ratio ( :1) Strings1 Parameter 2.5 Knee 19 Type Ratio ( :1) Knee 18 Title Threshold (dB) Release (ms) E. Guitar # -9 Knee 17 Value Threshold (dB) 34 Limiter2 COMP Out gain (dB) 0 0.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) 319 Threshold (dB) -18 Threshold (dB) -18 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) 8 Attack (ms) 94 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Out gain (dB) 1 Attack (ms) 3.90 s -2.5 35 Total Comp1 COMP Width (dB) 18 Knee hard Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) 447 Threshold (dB) -14 Threshold (dB) -16 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) 6 Attack (ms) 2 Attack (ms) 11 Out gain (dB) 6.0 Out gain (dB) 3.5 36 Total Comp2 COMP Knee 4 Knee Release (ms) 35 Release (ms) 1 180 Effects Parameters Effects Parameters ■ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF, -60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD *1 Gate open time DECAY *2 Gate closing speed *1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz) *2. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) ■ EARLY REF. One input, two output early reflections. Parameter Range Description TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency ■ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. Range Description TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Appendix Parameter AW2400 Owner’s Manual 245 Effects Parameters ■ MONO DELAY One input, two output basic repeat delay. Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency ■ STEREO DELAY Two input, two output basic stereo delay. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time Right channel delay time FB. G L -99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R -99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency ■ MOD. DELAY One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation. Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF, ON Tempo parameter sync on/off ■ DELAY LCR One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right). Parameter Range DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L -100 to +100% Left channel delay level LEVEL C -100 to +100% Center channel delay level LEVEL R -100 to +100% Right channel delay level FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Appendix 246 Description AW2400 Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters ■ ECHO Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB. G L -99 to +99% Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R -99 to +99% Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) L->R FBG -99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) R->L FBG -99 to +99% Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency ■ CHORUS Two input, two output chorus effect. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain ■ FLANGE Two input, two output flange effect. Parameter Range Description 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain Appendix FREQ. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 247 Effects Parameters ■ SYMPHONIC Two input, two output symphonic effect. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain ■ PHASER Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain ■ AUTO PAN Two input, two output autopanner. Parameter Range FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DIR. *1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R Appendix 248 Description AW2400 Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters ■ TREMOLO Two input, two output tremolo effect. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain ■ HQ. PITCH One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter (Available for internal effects 1 and 2.). Parameter Range Description PITCH -12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift FINE -50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision ■ DUAL PITCH Two input, two output pitch shifter. Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift FINE 1 -50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine LEVEL 1 -100 to +100% Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time FB. G 1 -99 to +99% Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) PITCH 2 -24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift FINE 2 -50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine LEVEL 2 -100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time FB. G 2 -99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision ■ ROTARY One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Range Description ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0–100 Low-frequency filter HIGH 0–100 High-frequency filter Appendix Parameter AW2400 Owner’s Manual 249 Effects Parameters ■ RING MOD. Two input, two output ring modulator. Parameter Range Description SOURCE OSC, SELF OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Modulation source: oscillator or input signal Oscillator frequency FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth ■ MOD. FILTER Two input, two output modulation filter. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output level ■ DISTORTION One input, two output distortion effect. Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE -10 to +10 Tone N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction ■ AMP SIMULATE One input, two output guitar amp simulator. Parameter Range Description AMP TYPE *1 Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume BASS 0–100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0–100 High tone control CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ F 100–8.00 kHz Parametric equalizer frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Parametric equalizer gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 Parametric equalizer bandwidth N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction *1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT Appendix 250 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters ■ DYNA. FILTER Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY *1 Filter frequency change decay speed TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output Level *1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) ■ DYNA. FLANGE Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY *1 Decay speed OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G -12.0 to +12.0 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain *1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) ■ DYNA. PHASER Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY *1 Decay speed OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset FB.GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G -12.0 to +12.0 dB High shelving filter gain Appendix *1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) AW2400 Owner’s Manual 251 Effects Parameters ■ REV+CHORUS One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform ■ REV->CHORUS One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform ■ REV+FLANGE One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Parameter Appendix 252 Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform AW2400 Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters ■ REV->FLANGE One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform ■ REV+SYMPHO. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/SYM 0–100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform ■ REV->SYMPHO. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. Parameter Range Description 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform Appendix REV TIME AW2400 Owner’s Manual 253 Effects Parameters ■ REV->PAN One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Reverb time Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DIR. *1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform *1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R ■ DELAY+ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. Parameter Range 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY/ER 0–100% Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections Appendix 254 Description DELAY L AW2400 Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters ■ DELAY->ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections ■ DELAY+REV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. Parameter DELAY L Range 0.0–1000.0 ms Description Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ■ DELAY->REV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. Parameter Range Description 0.0–1000.0 ms DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density Appendix DELAY L AW2400 Owner’s Manual 255 Effects Parameters ■ DIST->DELAY One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series. Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE -10 to +10 Tone control N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN -99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DLY.BAL 0–100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) ■ MULTI FILTER Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave). Parameter Range HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance Appendix 256 Description TYPE 1 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters ■ GATE This is a 2-in/2-out gate that attenuates signals below the specified threshold level. Parameter Range Description GATE ON ON, OFF THRESH -54 to 0 dB Turns the gate function on or off. Sets the threshold level at which the gate begins to affect the input signal. RANGE -70 to 0 dB Sets the level when the gate is closed. ATTACK 0–120 ms Sets the time it take for the gate to actually open after the threshold level is exceeded. DECAY *1 Sets the time it takes for the gate to close completely after it begins closing. HOLD *2 Sets the time it takes for the gate to begin closing after the signal drops below the threshold level. *1. 6–46.0 s (fs=44.1kHz), 5–42.3 s (fs=48kHz) *2. 0.02–2.13 s (fs=44.1kHz), 0.02–1.96 s (fs=48kHz) ■ M.BAND DYNA. Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN -96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN -96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN -96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level -10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. PRESENCE CMP. THRE 24.0 to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold CMP. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack CMP. REL *1 Compressor release time CMP. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay CMP. BYP OFF, ON Compressor bypass L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE -6 to -12 dB Filter slope CEILING -6.0 to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level EXP. THRE -54.0 to -24.0 dB Expander threshold EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio EXP. REL *1 Expander release time EXP. BYP OFF, ON Expander bypass LIM. THRE -12.0 to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack LIM. REL *1 Limiter release time LIM. BYP OFF, ON Limiter bypass LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee SOLO LOW OFF, ON If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output. SOLO MID OFF, ON If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output. SOLO HIGH OFF, ON If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output. Appendix *1. 6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz) AW2400 Owner’s Manual 257 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Power does not turn on, operation not possible ■ Power does not turn on ■ Input sound is not output • Is the signal from the external device being input? • The connection cable from the external device may be broken. • Is the power cord connected to an AC outlet of the correct voltage? • Are cables connected to both the MIC/LINE INPUT XLR connector and the TRS phone connector? • Is the POWER switch turned ON? • Is the [GAIN] knob set to an appropriate level? • If the power still does not turn on, please contact your Yamaha dealer. • Is the input channel fader raised? Is it turned on? ■ LCD display is dim or dark • Use the contrast knob located at the lower right of the screen to adjust the contrast. ■ Can’t use the [DATA/JOG] dial to control onscreen parameters • The input channel may have been set to DIGITAL IN. • When recording, is the recording-destination track fader (which adjusts the monitor level) raised? → If you are recording, the sound of that input channel will not be heard during playback. ■ Recorded sound is not output • The [JOG ON] key may be on. • Has audio data been recorded on the recorder? • Some parameters cannot be operated in certain states, such as while the recorder is running. • Is the virtual track set to the track that was recorded? No sound ■ No sound, or sound is too faint • Are speakers or headphones connected correctly? • Is your amp and other external devices turned on? • Are you using connection cables with built-in resistors? • Does the stereo output channel meter move? • Is the stereo output channel fader raised? Is it turned on? • The EQ gain may be set to an extremely low value. • The dynamics processor may be set to an extreme threshold or ratio. • Is an electric guitar connected to a MIC/LINE INPUT jack directly? • Is the attenuator of the EQ screen or CH VIEW screen raised? → Check the level (meter movement) in the METER screen. → If you move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button and press the [ENTER] key in the CH VIEW screen View page, that channel will be initialized to default values that allow sound to be output. → If DIGITAL IN is enabled in the TRACK screen, and no signal is being input to the DIGITAL STEREO IN jack, a message of “WRONG WORD CLOCK” will appear, and sound will not be output. • A recorded region shorter than 10 msec will not be played back. • Tracks 1–24 will not play back if the AW2400 is in Stereo Track, Sound Clip, or Audio CD playback mode. ■ Can’t play back the STEREO track • Is the ST TR MODE turned on in the TRACK screen Stereo TR page? ■ Metronome cannot be heard • The metronome sound is normally sent only to the MONITOR OUT and headphones. • The metronome will not sound while the recorder is stopped. • In Sound Clip mode, the metronome will sound only during recording. Can’t record, something is wrong with the recorded sound ■ Can’t record • Is there sufficient free space on the internal hard disk? → You can check the remaining recordable time in the TRACK screen View page. • The song may be protected. • The stereo track may be in playback mode. • Is the input signal routed appropriately to the recorder? • Check the recording-source and recording-destination in the RECORD screen. • Is CD/DAT DIGITAL REC set to ENABLE in the UTILITY screen Preference page? • Please read and understand the copyright warning (→ p. 7) before using digital input signals. Appendix ■ Can’t record on the STEREO track 258 • It is not possible to record on the STEREO track while recording on other tracks. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting ■ Noise is present in the recorded signal • The oscillator may be functioning. • Does the word clock setting match for the AW2400 and the external device(s)? • Go to the RECORD screen and check the recordingsource and recording-destination. ■ Can’t select a record track • The number of 24-bit song tracks that can be recorded or played simultaneously is limited. ■ Pairing was specified, but the signal is monaural • Is the odd-numbered channel panned far left and the evennumbered channel panned far right? ■ Pairing was specified, but the signal phase does not match • Even when channels are paired, the phase setting is not linked. ■ Signal is delayed • An effect such as delay may be inserted. Something wrong with the sound ■ Sound is distorted ■ Can’t use the internal effects • Effect BYPASS may be turned ON. • Is the [GAIN] knob set correctly? • The effect may have been inserted into a different channel. • The connection cable from the external device may be broken. • Are the level of effect return channel faders raised? • The fader of the input channel or monitor channel may be raised excessively. • These do not affect the stereo track, sound clip, or audio CD playback. • The stereo output channel attenuator may be raised excessively. • The EQ or dynamics processor may have been set to produce an extreme gain boost. • Did you record at an appropriate level? → Go to the METER screen and check the level (meter movement). • Is the word clock setting correct for both the AW2400 and the external device(s)? • An effect such as Distortion or Amp Simulate may be in use. ■ The volume of a particular channel increases or decreases • Are the dynamics processor settings appropriate? • Is the Automix function engaged? ■ Can’t store a scene • The store-destination scene or song may be protected. • A scene cannot be stored in scene number 00. ■ Can’t reproduce a scene • One or more channels may be set to Recall Safe. ■ Can’t save to a library • It is not possible to save to the factory-preset libraries. • Is the song you are trying to save protected? ■ Meters move even though the faders are lowered • The meter display may be set to PRE FADER or PRE EQ. ■ Moving a fader does not change the level • Have you selected the correct mixing layer via the Layer section keys? • The fader may be set to PRE FADE or PRE EQ. ■ Playback pitch is wrong • VARI PITCH may be adjusted. • Is the synchronized external device operating on the same sampling frequency (44.1 kHz or 48 kHz)? • Is the master device operating in a stable way? • You may have executed the EDIT screen PITCH command. • Is an effect such as HQ.Pitch or Dual Pitch selected for a monitor channel? ■ A small amount of noise is produced when a song is played back on a different AW2400 unit • A small amount of noise may be heard at the beginnings and ends of audio regions when a song created on an AW2400 unit with Version 1.1 firmware is played back on an AW2400 with Version 1.0 firmware. Please update all AW2400 units you are using to the latest firmware version. Information on the latest firmware version as well as update procedure can be found at the internet address below. http://www.yamahasynth.com/ ■ The sound and displays of some effects are different when a song is played back on a different AW2400 unit • When songs that include scenes or effect library using a Gate effect are loaded into an AW2400 with Version 1.0 firmware, Gate effects may be replaced by a Reverb Hall effect and some displays may not appear as expected. Please update all AW2400 units you are using to the latest firmware version. Information on the latest firmware version as well as update procedure can be found at the internet address below. http://www.yamahasynth.com/ Appendix • The stereo output channel fader may be raised excessively. • HQ. Pitch can be used only with EFFECT 1 or 2. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 259 Troubleshooting Recorder operations ■ When you press the [PLAY] key it blinks, and playback does not occur • Is the AW2400 set to MTC SLAVE? → Access the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, and check the setting. ■ Can’t edit a recorded track • The song may be protected. • Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded? ■ Editing results are not heard in the sound • Have you selected the virtual track that you recorded? • Are you using the appropriate editing command? ■ Counter display is not 0 when you return to the beginning of the song • If the display mode is set to RELATIVE (relative time), the start point may be specified. → Go to the SONG screen Setting page and TRACK screen View page and check the settings. ■ Display indicates DISK FULL or REGION FULL, and you cannot record or edit • There is insufficient free space, or too many recording regions. Erase unneeded tracks and then perform the Optimize operation to obtain more free space. • If the “DISK FULL” message appears, erase unneeded songs or WAV files located under the “Transport” folder. The WAV files under the “Transport” folder can be erased from your computer when the USB Storage mode is engaged. ■ The display indicates DISK BUSY during playback • The recorded data might be so fragmented that the read speed is significantly reduced. It might be necessary to backup all hard disk data to your computer and then re-initialize the hard disk. • If you’re using the AW2400 with a Windows (or Mac OS X 10.4 or higher) computer, access performance can be improved by setting the cluster size to 64K when initializing the AW2400 internal hard disk. This reduces the occurrence of DISK BUSY. MIDI operations ■ Can’t exchange MIDI data • Are the MIDI cables or USB cables connected correctly? • A MIDI cable or USB cable may be broken. • Is the power turned on for the transmitting and receiving devices? • Do the channel settings match for the transmitted and receiving devices? • Have the appropriate settings been made in the MIDI screen Setting 1/2 pages? → Select the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector, USB connector port 1-3, or slot) in the Setting 1 page. • Is a scene assigned to the program change number being transmitted? • If a USB connection is being used, is the required USBMIDI driver properly installed on your computer? ■ MTC messages are not transmitted • In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, has the MTC button been turned on? • Is MTC MASTER turned on? ■ The AW2400 does not synchronize to incoming MTC messages • Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector? • In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MTC SLAVE turned on? • Is the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector, USB connector port 1-3, or slot) selected in the MIDI screen Setting 1 page? ■ MTC synchronization drifts • Is a large amount of MIDI data (notes etc.) being received together with the MTC messages? • Does the frame rate match between the AW2400 and the external device? • In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, OFFSET may have been set. • If jumps occur in the synchronized time, change the SYNC AVERAGE setting in the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, and try again. ■ MMC messages is not transmitted • Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI OUT connector? • In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MMC MASTER turned on? Does the DEVICE NO. match? ■ Can’t receive MMC messages • Is the MIDI cable connected to the MIDI IN connector? • In the MIDI screen Setting 2 page, is MMC SLAVE turned on? Does the DEVICE NO. match? ■ Can’t use the preset remote settings • Depending on the sequencer that you want to control, you may need to make settings on the sequencer. For details, refer to page 266. Appendix 260 • Select the connector and port to be used (MIDI connector, USB connector port 1-3, or slot) in the MIDI screen Setting 1 page. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Song operations ■ Can’t save a file • Is there sufficient space on the internal hard disk to create a new song? • Did you perform the correct shut-down procedure when you last turned off the power? → Disconnecting the power without performing the shutdown operation will shorten the lifespan of the hard disk and CDRW drive, may damage the hard disk and CD-RW drive and disc, and may result in loss of data. • Is the internal hard disk be subjected to strong physical shock? ■ AW2816 backup files cannot be saved • Songs with a large data size cannot be saved. Try executing the Optimize function from the SONG screen Song List page. ■ Song file size is unnaturally large • Even after you use recorder editing operations to erase a track or other data, that sound file will remain on the disk. Execute the Optimize command in the SONG screen LIST page. CD operations ■ Can’t create an audio CD WAV File Transfer To and From a Computer ■ The computer doesn’t recognize the AW2400 hard disk • Is the USB cable properly connected? • Is your computer running the appropriate operating system? → Windows XP Professional/Home Edition SP1 or higher, or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Operation is not guaranteed with other operating systems. • To use a Macintosh computer (running Mac OS X 10.3) it is necessary to first initialize the AW2400 hard disk with the cluster set to 32K. • Is the USB storage mode turned ON? ■ Can’t find WAV files copied from the computer to the Transport folder • Have you copied WAV files with a different bit depth from the song? Have you copied WAV files with a different sampling frequency from the song? ■ Can’t find WAV files copied from the computer to the Audio folder • Did you change the bit depth of the WAV file when editing it with waveform editing software? → For 24-bit songs audio data is saved in the Audio folder in 32-bit WAV file format. • Is CD-R/RW media inserted? • Have you changed the file name? • The inserted CD-R may have already been finalized. • Did you copy the file(s) to a different folder? • Is a signal recorded on the stereo track? • The stereo track must be at least four seconds long. • Have you saved a song after the stereo track has been recorded? • Audio CDs cannot be created using data recorded at the 48kHz sampling rate. ■ An audio CD you created does not play back on a conventional player • An audio CD you created you not play back on a conventional player unless the disc has been finalized. ■ Audio recorded on CD-RW media does not play back on some players • In order for audio data recorded on CD-RW media to be played back, the player must support CD-RW. Contact the manufacturer of the player regarding CD-RW support. ■ The sound skips while playing an audio CD that you created ■ Can’t copy files from the computer • Files larger than 4 GB cannot be copied. • When connecting to a USB 2.0 connector of your computer, use a cable specified for USB 2.0. ■ An error message appears when disconnecting the AW2400 from a Windows computer • Before turning the USB storage mode OFF, remove the device via the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the taskbar. • Close all AW2400 windows before removing the device via the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon. • If an error message still appears, execute “Safely Remove Hardware” one or two more times. You should then be able to remove the device without seeing an error message. Appendix • Depending on the CD-R media you use, there may be differences in the quality of the completed CD. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 261 Troubleshooting Pitch Fix operations ■ Can’t hear any pitch change? • Make sure that RATE is NOT set to 0. • Make sure that BYPASS is off. ■ The voice is not recognized • When the voice is high, set TYPE to FEMALE; when it is low, set TYPE to MALE. ■ Pitch correction doesn’t sound right • In some cases, pitch correction may sound unnatural — especially for parts sung with vibrato. To make the pitchcorrected vocal sound more natural and subtle, set DETECT to a relatively short value and set RATE to a relatively slow value. Automix operations ■ Can’t record Automix operations • Is ENABLE selected in the AUTOMIX page? • Is the REC or AUTO REC button on? • Is the type of data to be recorded (fader, EQ, etc.) selected in the OVERWRITE field? • Is the [INPUT SEL], [SEL], or [STEREO SEL] key of the target channel flashing? Trigger Track operations ■ Playback sound is interrupted at the boundaries of the recorded data • Use the EXPORT command to export the required section of audio data as a WAV file, then use the IMPORT USB WAV command to re-import the WAV file to the track. ■ Operating the [ON] key or fader doesn’t start playback • The channel may be turned off before the Trigger Track mode is engaged. → Call the CH VIEW screen and turn on the channel. Appendix 262 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Display message list Display message list A/B POINTS NOT FOUND Repeat Playback cannot be performed because A/B points are not specified. AUTOMIX ABORTED! Automix recording has been aborted. AUTOMIX DISABLED! Automix is currently disabled. Please set to ENABLE. AUTOMIX MEMORY FULL! Not enough memory available for automix. AUTOMIX RUNNING! That operation cannot be performed while automix is running. CANNOT DEFEAT MUTE Mute cannot be disengaged because the simultaneous playback limit will be exceedced. CANNOT REDO Redo (re-execution of an operation) is not possible. CANNOT SET MARK It is not possible to specify a marker at an already-specified position. CANNOT UNDO Undo (cancellation of an operation) is not possible. CD PLAY MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in CD Play mode, this operation cannot be executed. CH. PARAMETER INITIALIZED The mixer parameters of the channel have been initialized. DIFFERENT TC FRAME TYPE MTC of a different frame type than the internal setting is being received. DIGITAL-ST-IN REC PROHIBIT. Recording of digital input signals is prohibited. DISK BUSY!! The reading speed of the internal hard disk is not fast enough, or the reading speed has slowed down because the recorded data has become fragmented. DISK FULL!! There is insufficient space on the internal hard disk. IN/OUT POINTS NOT FOUND Auto-punch recording cannot be performed because in/out points are not specified. IN/OUT POINTS REVERSE ORDER In/out points are set in wrong order. IN/OUT POINTS TOO CLOSE The auto punch-in/out interval is too short. It cannot be set less than approximately 100 msec. LOCATE POINT ERASED The locate point has been erased. LOCATE POINT SET The locate point has been set. MARK POINT ERASED The marker has been erased. MARK POINT SET The marker has been set. MIDI IN: DATA FRAMING ERROR! Invalid MIDI data may have been received. MIDI IN: DATA OVERRUN! Invalid MIDI data may have been received. MIDI: RX BUFFER FULL! Receiving more MIDI data than it can handle. MIDI: TX BUFFER FULL! Attempting to transmit more MIDI data than it can handle. MTC SLAVE MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in MTC Slave mode, this operation cannot be executed. NO DATA TO COPY! There is no data to be copied. NO MARK LEFT The allowable number of marks has been exceeded. NOTHING TO UNDO! Not data available for undo. RECORD TRACK NOT SELECTED Recording cannot be performed because you have not selected a record track. RECORDER BUSY! The operation cannot be executed because the recorder is operating. RECORDER RUNNING NOW Since the recorder is recording or playing, this operation cannot be executed. REDO COMPLETED Redo (re-execution of the previous operation) has been completed. REPEAT POINTS TOO CLOSE The repeat interval is too short. It cannot be set to less than one second. SELECTED CH IS NONE. The selected channel is not available. SET OVERWRITE! Please specify the automix parameters to be overwritten in the OVERWRITE field. SOUND CLIP MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in Sound Clip mode, this operation cannot be executed. STEREO TRACK PLAYBACK MODE Since the AW2400 is in Stereo Track Playback mode, this operation cannot be executed. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Appendix ■ Messages 263 Display message list THIS SONG IS PROTECTED. This song is protected, and cannot be edited or recorded. TOO MANY REGIONS!! The maximum allowable number of regions* has been exceeded. TRIGGER TRACK MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in Trigger Track mode, this operation cannot be executed. UNDO COMPLETED Undo (cancellation of the previous operation) has been executed. USB STORAGE MODE NOW Since the AW2400 is in USB Storage mode, this operation cannot be executed. WRONG WORD CLOCK An inappropriate word clock is being received from the connected device to which you are synchronizing. Y96K COULDN’T RECALL Scene memory numbers 97 or higher cannot be recalled when using a Y96K card. Y96K COULDN’T STORE Scene memory numbers 97 or higher cannot be stored when using a Y96K card. * A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track. ■ Popup messages Appendix 264 Buffer Underrun! A buffer underrun error was encountered while writing to the CD. Can’t Select Current Song! The current song cannot be selected for this operation. CD Import Prohibited! Enable DIGITAL REC. Can’t import from a CD because DIGITAL REC is prohibited. CD or HD Access Error! An error was encountered while accessing the internal hard disk or CD-RW drive. CD-RW Drive Not Found! A problem occurred with the CD-RW drive. Change Media, Not 1st Media. Wrong media order. Please insert media number 1. Change Media, Different Archive ID! The medium contains the wrong backup file. Insert the correct medium. Change Media, Wrong Media Order! Please exchange the media. The order of media volumes is incorrect. Compare Error! The data was not written correctly. Corrupt File! The file is corrupt. Data Mismatch Found! A data mismatch has been found in the song. End of Archive File Not Found! The end of the backup file cannot be located. End Range Over! The operation could not be executed, since the end of the song would be later than 24 hours. File in Use! Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the file is in use. File List Full! The file list is full and cannot be appended. File Name Already Exists! The specified file name already exists. Use a different file name. File Number Full! No more songs can be created or restored, since this would exceed the maximum number of files. File Size Exceeds Limit! The file is too large to be saved. For Effect 1 or 2 Only! The selected effect type is for use with Effect 1 or Effect 2 only. HD Full! The internal hard disk is full and can accept no more data. HD Status is Out of Range! The hard disk reliability status (the number of past errors) has exceeded the threshold. Back up your data and have the hard disk replaced as soon as possible. HDD Error! A problem occurred with the internal hard disk. Illegal/Unsupported Media! An unrecognized or unsupported medium has been inserted. Invalid Parameter! The parameter setting exceeds the allowable range. Invalid Region! An invalid region has been specified. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Marker Interval Under 4 sec! Since the song length divided by the markers would be less than four seconds, you cannot divide it with a marker. Media Too Small. Cannot Save! The medium does not have enough space available to save the data. No Data to Backup! No data is selected for backup. No Data to Restore! No data is selected for restore. No Data! No data exists, or there is no data (region*) in the selected area. No File! Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because no file is found. No Media! Media has not been inserted. No Region! No region* is found. No Song to Write! No songs to write to the CD have been selected. No Stereo Track! There is no song that includes a master track longer than four seconds. Not 44.1kHz/16Bit Song! The song cannot be restored since it is not a 44.1 kHz/16-bit song. Number Ejected Media, Insert Blank Media. Make a note of the number of the medium which has been writen to, then insert a blank medium. Number of Media Exceeds Limit! The maximum numberof media that can be handled at the same time has been exceeded. Protected! Can’t edit the file because it is protected. Read Only File! Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the file is read-only. Read Only! Read-only library! This library cannot be saved, erased, or title-edited. Recall Channel Data Conflict! The selected library data cannot be poperly loaded into the specified channel. Recognized AW2816Formatted Media! The media is written in AW2816 format. Recognized AW4416Formatted Media! The media is written in AW4416 format. Region Full! The maximum allowable number of regions* has been exceeded. Selected Channel has no Comp! There is no compressor on the selected channel. Selected Channel has no EQ! There is no EQ on the selected channel. Selected Channel has no Gate! There is no gate on the selected channel. Song Too Large to Export! The song file is too large to be exported. System Error! An internal system error has occurred. This Song is Protected! Can’t save, erase, or edit the title because the song is protected. Too Long Data! No more data can be written because the capacity of the CD has been exceeded. Too Many CD Tracks! No new tracks can be added because the maximum number of allowable tracks has been exceeded. Track Not Recorded! The track you selected does not contain any recorded data. Used As Effect Insert! This port is already in use as an effect insert. Wave File Link Error! A WAV file link error has been found. Wrong Bit Depth! The bit depth of the selected file is incorrect. Wrong File Format! The selected file is not PCM format. Wrong HD Format! The internal hard disk is incorrectly formatted. The disk cannot be formatted from a computer. Wrong Number of Channels! The number of channels in the selected file is incorrect. Wrong Sampling Frequency! The sampling rate of the selected file is incorrect. Wrong Wav Chunk Data! The WAV file’s chunk data is incorrect. Wrong Wav File! The WAV file cannot be used. * A region is a continuous segment of audio data recorded on one track. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Appendix Display message list 265 About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 Special Notices Installing USB MIDI driver • The software and this owner’s manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of this manual before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. If you are connecting the AW2400 to your computer via a USB cable for MIDI message transmission and reception, you need to install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver. ■ System Requirements OS: Windows XP Professional/Home Edition SP1 or higher, or Mac OS X 10.3 or higher ■ Installing on Windows XP 1 Start your computer to launch Windows, then log in as Administrator. 2 Click the [Start] button, and then click [Control Panel]. If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click “Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed. 3 Go to [System Hardware] ➝ [Driver signatures] ➝ [Driver signature options], select “Ignore — Install software without asking for confirmation,” and then click [OK]. 4 Click [OK] to close the “System Properties” window, and then click the Close button to close the “Control Panel” window. 5 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 6 First, make sure the POWER switch on the AW2400 is set to STANDBY, then use a USB cable to connect the USB connector of the computer to the USB connector of the AW2400. When the AW2400 is turned on, the computer automatically displays the “Found New Hardware Wizard.” 7 If the “Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software?” is displayed, select “No, not this time”, and then click [Next]. 8 Select “Install software automatically (recommended) (I),” and then click [Next]. The system starts the installation. • This disk is a CD-ROM. Do not attempt to play the disk on an audio CD player. Doing so may result in irreparable damage to your audio CD player. • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. Contents of the CD-ROM The included CD-ROM contains a backup file that you can use to restore the AW2400 to its factory-set condition, setting files that let you use the AW2400’s MIDI Remote function with various DAW software, and a USB MIDI driver that is necessary to allow MIDI message transmission and reception via the USB connector. Folder/ file name AW24_000.TAR Remote USBdrv_ Software name Demo song Backup file for restoring the internal hard disk to its factory-set condition. Cubase/Nuendo remote setup file Setting file for remotely controlling the Cubase/Nuendo software from the AW2400. Logic preference file Setting file for remotely controlling the Logic software from the AW2400. SONAR template file (Windows only) Setting file for remotely controlling the SONAR software from the AW2400. Yamaha USB MIDI Driver Driver file for exchanging MIDI messages between the AW2400 and a computer via a USB cable. Appendix 266 Contents AW2400 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Some computers may take a few minutes to show this screen. About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 9 When the installation is complete, the system displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard.” Click [Finish]. 5 Click [Continue]. The “Select a Destination” is displayed. 6 Select a destination for the driver installation, then click [Continue]. The message “Installing this software requires 100MB of disk space” may appear. However, the actual required free disk space is 2MB. 7 A window opens, displaying the message “Click install to perform a basic installation of this software.” Click [Install]. If the driver has already been installed, the [Upgrade] button is displayed instead of the [Install] button. The driver is installed, and message “The software was successfully installed” is displayed. 8 Click the [Close] button. The driver installation is complete. You can check the following locations to confirm that the driver has been installed: NOTE • Some computers may take about a few minutes to show this screen after the installation is complete. 10 Restart the computer. The driver has been installed. ■ Installing on Macintosh computer 1 Start your computer, then log in as Administrator. To confirm that the Administrator account is available, select [System Preferences], then [Users (Account)]. 2 Double-click the “USBdrv_” folder on the included CD-ROM. 3 Double-click “YAMAHA USB-MIDI Driver v1.*****.mpkg” (***** represents the version number). An “Authenticate” window opens, prompting the password. If the window does not prompt you to enter the password, click the lock icon. • Library ➝ Audio ➝ MIDI Drivers ➝ YAMAHAUSBMIDIDriver.plugin • Library ➝ PreferencePanes ➝ YAMAHAUSBMIDIPatch.prefPane Enter the password for the Administrator’s account. If you have not set the password, click [OK]. The “Welcome to the YAMAHA USBMIDI Driver Installer” window is displayed. Appendix 4 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 267 About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 Restoring the internal hard disk to the factory-set condition In order to restore the internal hard disk to the factory-set condition, you will need to perform the following two procedures. 5 Move the cursor to the RESTORE button and press the [ENTER] key. 6 A popup window will ask you for confirmation, so move the cursor to the OK button or CANCEL button, and press the [ENTER] key. While the Restore operation is being executed, the state of progress will be shown in a popup window. When this popup window closes, the operation has been completed. A Initialize the internal hard disk B Load the demo song ■ Initializing the internal hard disk Initialize the internal hard disk. (→ p. 212) When you initialize the internal hard disk, the system settings will return to their factory-set state. NOTE • Executing this operation will erase all data from the internal hard disk, and the data cannot be recovered. We recommend you to backup all data on the internal hard disk to a computer before executing this operation. ■ Loading the demo song You can load the demo song from the included CD-ROM to restore the AW2400 to its factory-set condition. 1 Appendix 268 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-RW drive of the AW2400. 2 Call the SONG screen Restore page by either pressing the Work Navigate section [SONG] key as many times as necessary. 3 Make sure that the cursor is located at the READ CD INFO button, and press the [ENTER] key. Loading from the CD-ROM will begin. When loading is finished, the contents of the display will change as follows. 4 Move the cursor to the list and press the [ENTER] key. The symbol at the left of the list will change to “●”. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Installing a remote file ■ Supported DAW software • Windows • • • • Logic Platinum 5.5.1 (*1) Cubase SX 3.0.1 Nuendo 3.0.1 Sonar 4.0.1 Producer Edition • Macintosh • • • • Logic Pro 7.0.1 (*1) Cubase SX 3.0.1 Nuendo 3.0.1 Protools TDM 6.7 (*2) *1 Use the setting file from the included CD-ROM to map the AW2400’s faders/[ON] keys/transport keys to the Logic key commands. Track assignments must be made within Logic as appropriate for your system. *2 Select the CS-10 settings as the MIDI controller type. For details on the CS-10 settings, ask Digidesign. About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 ■ Windows users NOTE 5 6 Click the [Import] button. 7 Close the Device Setup window. Fader and [ON] key operations can be used to control Cubase/Nuendo audio tracks. Create new projects with more than 16 audio tracks. • In order to use a remote file, the corresponding software must be installed. • Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in the explanation below may differ depending on the software you are using. A dialog box like the following will appear. Select the Cubase/Nuendo remote setup file (Yamaha AW2400 Remote.xml) from the included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] button. ● Installing the Cubase/Nuendo remote setup file 1 2 Start up Cubase/Nuendo. 3 The Device Setup window will appear. Select [Add Device] ➝ [Generic Remote]. In the menu bar, select [Devices] menu ➝ [Device Setup...]. ● Installing the Logic preference file 1 2 The Generic Remote setting display will appear. Set the “MIDI Input” and “MIDI Output” filed. MIDI Output : your MIDI output device MIDI Input : your MIDI input device In the menu bar, select [Options] menu ➝ [Preferences] ➝ [Key Commands...]. 3 The Key Commands window will open. In the menu bar, select [Options] ➝ [Import Key Commands...]. 4 A dialog box will appear. Select the Logic preference file (Logic32.prf) from the included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] button. When you import the file, the following settings will be made. NOTE • The content that is shown for “MIDI Input” and “MIDI Output” will depend on the MIDI device(s) you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the MIDI device(s) you are using. * Please note that all the previously-specified key commands will be initialized. If you do not want to change your existing user key command settings, you can manually make the MIDI channel and CC# settings shown above. AW2400 Owner’s Manual Appendix 4 Start up Logic. 269 About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 ● Installing the SONAR template file 1 2 3 4 Copy the SONAR template file from the included CD-ROM to the folder in which SONAR is installed. ■ Macintosh users NOTE • In order to use a remote file, the corresponding software must be installed. Start up SONAR. • Please be aware that the menu names and screens that appear in the explanation below may differ depending on the software you are using. In the menu bar, select [File] menu ➝ [Open]. The “Open file” dialog box will appear. Choose Cakewalk template files as the type of file to be loaded. From the list in the dialog box, choose “Yamaha AW2400 Remote” and click the [OK] button. ● Installing the Cubase/Nuendo remote setup file For Cubase/Nuendo, the procedure is the same as for the Windows version. (→ p. 269). 5 In the menu bar, select [Option] ➝ [MIDI Devices]. ● Installing the Logic Pro preference file 6 The MIDI Ports window will open. In the Input Ports field, assign the MIDI device that you are using. 1 2 Start up Logic Pro. 3 The Key Commands window will open. In the menu bar, select [Options] ➝ [Import Key Commands]. 4 A dialog box will appear. Select the Logic preference file (Logic Preferences) from the included CD-ROM, and click the [Open] button. When you import the file, the following settings will be made. If you changed the track structure from the default settings of the template ... With the Yamaha AW2400 Remote template started, click the [CONFIG] button in the StudioWare panel window. A cluster will open at the right. Drag the [SET MIDI First Track] knob to the first track number of the MIDI tracks. * If you use this template, you will not be able to control the tracks correctly from the AW2400 unless the MIDI tracks are continuous from 1–16. * If you set the value to an invalid track (an unused track), the panel knobs, buttons, or sliders may be shaded. If this occurs, set the value back to the correct track. In the menu bar, select [Logic Pro] menu ➝ [Preferences] ➝ [Key Commands...]. * Please note that all the previously-specified key commands will be initialized. If you do not want to change your existing user key command settings, you can manually make the MIDI channel and CC# settings shown above. Appendix 270 AW2400 Owner’s Manual About the CD-ROM included with the AW2400 ● Setting Pro Tools remote control You can remotely control the Pro Tools software from the AW2400. No special setting file is required. Use the following procedure to make settings. 1 In the menu bar, select [Setup] ➝ [Peripherals...]. 2 The Peripherals window will open. Click the [MIDI Controllers] button. In the MIDI Controllers window, make the following settings. In the Receive From field and the Send To field, specify the MIDI device you are using. Type #1 CS-10 Receive From Your MIDI input device Send To Your MIDI output device #ch’s 16 Appendix This completes preparations for using the AW2400’s MIDI Remote function to control the Pro Tools software. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 271 MIDI data format MIDI data format 1. Functions 2. MIDI data flow diagram 1.1. Scene Change The settings of the [MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] specify the scene that is recalled when a Program Change message is received. The settings of the [MIDI PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] specify the program number that is transmitted when a scene is recalled. If more than one program number has been assigned to that scene memory number, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. MTC SLAVE USB-1 IN USB-2 IN USB-3 IN MIDI IN SLOT IN MTC (MTC Slave) EFF MIDI NOTE ON/OFF (Effect Control) PGM CHG PROGRAM CHANGE (Scene Recall) CTRL CHG CONTROL CHANGE (Parameter Edit) ECHO ECHO OUT MMC SLAVE 1.2. MMC Control These messages allow basic recorder operations such as STOP/ PLAY/REC/LOCATE. If you select the MIDI SETUP menu item MMC MASTER, MMC commands will be transmitted according to the operation of the transport. If you select MMC SLAVE, the internal recorder will operate according to the received MMC commands. 1.3. Effect Control Depending on the type of effect, note-on/off messages can be used for control. These settings are made for the parameters of each effect. MMC (Transport Control) LEARN Channel Message/Exclusive Message (MIDI REMOTE Learn) THRU SW2 REMOTE Transport USB-1 OUT USB-2 OUT USB-3 OUT MIDI OUT SLOT OUT SW3 REMOTE Fader/Sel PGM CHG SW1 PROGRAM CHANGE CTRL CHG CONTROL CHANGE MMC MASTER 1.4. Pitch Fix Control MMC When the Pitch Fix mode is engaged, note-on/off messages can be used to control pitches. MTC SW4 MIDI SYNC (MTC) MIDI SYNC (CLK) 1.5. MIDI Clock transmission If you set MIDI OUT to MIDI CLOCK, MIDI clock messages can be transmitted during playback or recording. In MIDI Clock transmission mode, Song Position Pointer and Start/ Stop/Continue commands will also be issued, and during playback or recording, MIDI Clock will be transmitted according to the MIDI Tempo Map. 1.6. MTC transmission (MTC Master) If you set MIDI OUT to MTC, MTC can be transmitted during playback or recording. MIDI CLOCK ECHO ON ECHO OUT SW1 : REMOTE OFF SW2 : REMOTE ON (Remote) SW3 : REMOTE ON SW4 : REMOTE OFF or REMOTE ON (Normal) 3. AW2400 settings and operation 3.1. MIDI Setup 1.7. MTC reception (MTC Slave) Set basic MIDI operation. If you set MTC MODE to SLAVE, the internal recorder will operate in synchronization with MTC messages received from the MIDI IN connector. 3.1.1. Tx PORT 1.8. Realtime control of parameters Control changes can be used to send/receive internal parameters in realtime. 1.9. MIDI Remote The faders, ON keys, and RTZ / FF / REW / STOP / PLAY / REC keys can be used to control an external MIDI device. In PRESET mode, operating the above controllers will transmit MIDI data according to the preset settings of the AW2400. In USER mode, operating the above controllers will transmit the MIDI data that you specify. Specify the output port for MIDI communication. 3.1.2. Rx PORT Specify the input port for MIDI communication. 3.1.3. MIDI Tx Ch This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for transmission. 3.1.4. MIDI Rx Ch This sets the MIDI channel that will be used for reception. 3.1.5. PROGRAM CHANGE MODE Enable/disable reception and transmission. If MIDI Rx Ch is set to OMNI, these messages will be received regardless of their MIDI channel. If MIDI Tx Ch is set to ECHO, the received messages will be echoed at the transmission port. 3.1.6. CONTROL CHANGE MODE Appendix Enable/disable reception and transmission. If this is enabled, you can specify the correspondence between control numbers and operations of the mixer section. Three modes are available for correspondence with control numbers. For mode 1, transmission and reception will occur without regard to the MIDI Tx Ch and MIDI Rx Ch settings. For modes 2 and 3, reception will occur without regard to MIDI channel if you set MIDI Rx Ch to OMNI. If MIDI Tx Ch is set to ECHO, the received messages will be echoed at the transmission port. 272 AW2400 Owner’s Manual MIDI data format 3.1.7. OTHER 4.4. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE If this is set to ECHO, the received MIDI data will be echoed at the transmission port. However, Program Change and Control Change will follow their own settings. 4.4.1. REALTIME SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE 4.4.1.1. MMC Command 3.1.8. REMOTE PORT Rx/Tx function 01 STOP Rx/Tx Transport stop 02 PLAY Rx Transport play 03 DEFERRED PLAY Rx/Tx Transport play 04 FAST FORWARD Rx/TX Transport fast-forward 05 REWIND Rx/Tx Transport rewind 3.1.10. MMC MODE 06 RECORD STROBE Rx Transport punch-in record Select whether the AW2400 will be the MMC MASTER or SLAVE. 07 RECORD EXIT Rx Transport punch-out 0F RESET Rx/Tx MMC reset 44 LOCATE Rx/Tx Transport locate Specify the output port when the MIDI remote function is engaged. 3.1.9. THRU Set the MIDI through function. 3.1.11. MMC Dev. Specify the ID number that will be used when transmitting or receiving MMC commands. 3.1.12. MTC SYNC MODE Select whether the AW2400 will be the MTC MASTER or SLAVE. 5. MIDI format details 5.1. NOTE OFF (8n) < Reception > 3.1.13. MTC SYNC AVERAGE When the AW2400 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE, this setting specifies how it will follow the MTC data. Set this to 0 if the incoming MTC data has a highly accurate timing; set this to 1 or 2 if the timing of the incoming MTC data is not as accurate (such as when receiving MTC from a software sequencer). 3.1.14. MTC SYNC OFFSET When the AW2400 is functioning as a MTC SLAVE, this setting adds an offset to the received MTC data. The received time code value shifted by this amount will correspond to the location indicated by the internal time code of the AW2400. 3.1.15. SYNC OUT Received when [Rx CH] matches. Used to control Effects/Pitch Fix. Refer NOTE ON for details. STATUS DATA 5.2. NOTE ON (9n) < Reception > Received when [Rx CH] matches. Used to control Effects/Pitch Fix. Refer below for details. Velocity of 0x00 is equivalent to Note-Off. STATUS DATA Turn on/off the output of MTC/MIDI CLOCK. 1000nnnn 8n Note Off Message 0nnnnnnn nn Note No. 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored) 1001nnnn 9n Note On Message 0nnnnnnn nn Note No. 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:On, 0:Off) 4. MIDI format list 4.1. CHANNEL MESSAGE Command Rx/Tx function 8n NOTE OFF Rx Control the internal effect 9n NOTE ON Rx Control the internal effect Bn CONTROL CHANGE Rx/Tx Edit parameters Cn PROGRAM CHANGE Rx/Tx Switch scene memories * Effect control by Note 1: Dynamic Flange/Dynamic Phase/Dynamic Filter When the SOURCE parameter is set to MIDI, the note velocity (both note-on and note-off) is used to control the Modulation frequency width. 5.3. CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) < Reception > 4.2. SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE Command Rx/Tx function F1 MIDI TIME CODE Rx/Tx MTC transmission F2 SONG POSITION POINTER Tx Song position transmission If [Control Change Rx] is On, control change messages will be recevied when [MIDI Rx Ch] matches. However, if [MIDI Rx Ch] is OMNI or [Control Change Mode] is 1, reception will occur regardless of MIDI channel. < Transmission > Command Rx/Tx function F8 TIMING CLOCK Tx MIDI Clock transmission FA START Tx Start command transmission FB CONTINUE Tx Continue command transmission FC STOP Tx Stop command transmit FE ACTIVE SENSING Rx Check MIDI cable connections FF RESET Rx Clear running status If [Control Change Tx] is On, control change messages will be transmitted on the [MIDI Tx Ch] channel when you operate a parameter. STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn Control Change 0ccccccc cc Control No. (0-95, 102-119) 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) The control value is converted into a parameter value according to the following equation. S= total number of steps in the parameter’s variable range 128 / S = X remainder Y INT((Y+1)/2) = Z If (MIDI DATA - Z) < 0, then Value = 0 If ((MIDI DATA - Z)/X) > MAX, then Value = MAX Otherwise, Value = INT ((MIDI DATA -Z)/X) Appendix 4.3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE AW2400 Owner’s Manual 273 MIDI data format 5.4. PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn) 5.10. STOP (FC) < Reception > < Transmission > If [Program Change Rx] is On, program change messages will be received when [MIDI Rx Ch] matches. However, if [MIDI Rx Ch] is OMNI, this message is received regardless of the channel. A scene memory will be recalled according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] settings. If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when the recorder stops. < Transmission > If [Program Change Tx] is On, a program change will be transmitted on the [MIDI Tx Ch] according to the [PROGRAM CHANGE TABLE] settings when you recall a memory. If the recalled memory number has been assigned to more than one program number, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. STATUS DATA 1100nnnn Cn Program Change 0nnnnnnn nn Program No. ( 0-127) STATUS 11111100 FC Stop 5.11. ACTIVE SENSING (FE) < Reception > Once this message is received, subsequent failure to receive any message for a period of 300 ms will cause Running Status to be cleared, and MIDI communications to be initialized. STATUS 11111110 FE Active Sensing 5.12. RESET (FF) < Reception > 5.5. MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME (F1) < Transmission > When a Reset message is received, MIDI communications will be initialized by clearing Running Status etc. If [SYNC OUT] is set to MTC, Quarter Frame messages will be transmitted according to the time code movements of the recorder when the recorder is playing or recording. STATUS < Reception > 5.13.1. MMC 5.13.1.1. MMC STOP This message is received if [MTC SYNC MODE] is set to SLAVE. Quarter Frame messages received in realtime are internally assembled into time code that controls the recorder. STATUS DATA 11110001 F1 Quarter Frame Message 0nnndddd dd nnn = message type (0-7) dddd = data 11111111 FF Reset 5.13. EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0-F7) < Transmission > When the STOP key is pressed, this message is transmitted with a device number of 7F. < Reception > 5.6. SONG POSITION POINTER (F2) < Transmission > If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, a song position message will be transmitted when STOP or LOCATE is performed on the recorder, to indicate the song position from which the song should start at the next START or CONTINUE message. STATUS DATA 11110010 F2 Song Position Pointer 0ddddddd dd0 data ( H) high 7 bits of 14 bits data 0ddddddd dd1 data ( L) low 7 bits of 14 bits data 5.7. TIMING CLOCK (F8) < Transmission > If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted according to the MIDI Tempo Map from when the recorder begins playing or recording, until it stops. STATUS 11111000 F8 Timing Clock 5.8. START (FA) < Transmission > If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the first measure. STATUS 11111010 FA Start 5.9. CONTINUE (FB) < Transmission > If [SYNC OUT] is MIDI CLOCK, this message is transmitted when the recorder begins playing or recording at a location other than the first measure. Appendix STATUS 11111011 FB Continue If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will stop when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F. STATUS ID No. Device ID Command EOX AW2400 Owner’s Manual F0 7F dd 06 01 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Stop (MCS) End Of Exclusive 5.13.1.2. MMC PLAY < Reception > If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will begin playback when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F. STATUS ID No. Device ID Command EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000010 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 02 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Play (MCS) End Of Exclusive 5.13.1.3. MMC DEFERRED PLAY < Transmission > This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the PLAY key is pressed. < Reception > If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will begin playback when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F. STATUS ID No. Device ID Command EOX 274 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000001 11110111 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000011 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 03 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Deferred play (MCS) End Of Exclusive MIDI data format 5.13.1.4. MMC FAST FORWARD 5.13.1.8. MMC RESET < Transmission > < Transmission > This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the FF key is pressed and the Cue mode is engaged. This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when song loading is finished. < Reception > < Reception > If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will begin fast-forward when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F. This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. MMC-related internal settings will be reset to the power-on state. STATUS ID No. Device ID Command EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000110 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 04 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id STATUS ID No. Device ID Command Fast Forward (MCS) End Of Exclusive EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00001101 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 0D F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Reset End Of Exclusive 5.13.1.5. MMC REWIND 5.13.1.9. MMC LOCATE (TARGET) < Transmission > < Transmission > This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when the REWIND key is pressed and the Review mode is engaged. This message is transmitted with a device number of 7F when a locate-related key such as MARK SEARCH/IN/OUT is pressed, a FF/REW operation is performed, when the transport returns to the auto-punch pre-roll point, or when repeating. < Reception > If the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave, the transport will begin rewind when this message is received with a matching device number or a device number of 7F. STATUS ID No. Device ID Command EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000101 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 05 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Rewind (MCS) End Of Exclusive < Reception > This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches. The transport will locate to the time code position specified within the command data. STATUS ID No. Device ID Command 5.13.1.6. MMC RECORD STROBE < Reception > This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. If the transport is stopped, then recording will begin. If the transport is playing, then punch-in will occur. STATUS ID No. Device ID Command EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000110 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 06 F7 System Exclusive Message EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 01000100 00000110 00000001 0hhhhhhh 0mmmmmmm 0sssssss 0fffffff 0sssssss 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 44 06 01 hh mm ss ff ss F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Locate byte count “target” sub command hour (Standard Time Code) minute second frame sub-frame End Of Exclusive Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Record strobe End Of Exclusive 5.13.1.7. MMC RECORD EXIT < Reception > This message is received if the AW2400 is operating as an MMC Slave and the device number matches or is 7F. If the transport is recording, then punch-out will occur. EOX 11110000 01111111 0ddddddd 00000110 00000111 11110111 F0 7F dd 06 07 F7 System Exclusive Message Real Time System Exclusive Destination (00-7E, 7F:all call) Machine Control Command (mcc) sub-id Record Exit End Of Exclusive Appendix STATUS ID No. Device ID Command AW2400 Owner’s Manual 275 MIDI Implementation Chart MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA [ Professional Audio Workstation ] Model AW2400 MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted Date :21-JUL-2004 Version : 1.0 Recognized Remarks Function... Basic Channel Default Changed 1 - 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 1 - 16 Memorized x x ************** 1, 3 x x Memorized Mode Default Messages Altered Note Number x : True voice ************** Velocity Note ON Note OFF x x x x After Touch Key's Ch's x x x x x x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable Assignable o 0 - 127 ************** o 0 - 127 Assignable o o *1 o x x x x x *2 System : Clock Real Time: Commands o o x x *2 *2 :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF Mes- :All Notes OFF sages:Active Sense :Reset x x x x x x x x x x o o Pitch Bend Control Change Prog Change 1-16 21-27 33-34 41-56 63-79 91-93 102-117 : True # System Exclusive Common : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune Aux Notes: Cntrl Cntrl Cntrl Cntrl Cntrl Cntrl Cntrl Appendix MTC quarter frame message is transmitted. MTC quarter frame message is recognized.(When MTC Slave mode) *1 :MMC *2 :When BCLK Sync mode For MIDI remote, ALL messages can be transmitted. Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY 276 0 - 127 x AW2400 Owner’s Manual Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO o : Yes x : No Specifications Specifications ■ General Specifications Frequency Response 0 +1/-3 dB @20 Hz–20 kHz (MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT, GAIN: max.) Master Section (Total 16 Bus) BUS : 4 CH (stereo x 2) AUX : 4 CH STEREO : 2 CH (stereo x 1) SOLO : 2 CH (stereo x 1) Total Harmonic Distortion (measured with 20 kHz LPF) Less than 0.05 % @20 Hz to 20 kHz/+4 dBu (MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT, GAIN: min.) Built-in Hard Disk Drive 40 GB, 3.5" IDE Dynamic Range (measured with IHF-A) 115 dB typ. : DA Converter (STEREO OUT) Maximum Number of Songs 100 Songs 109 dB min. : DA Converter (STEREO OUT, INPUT CH SEL: all off) 110 dB typ. : AD+DA (MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT) 104 dB min. : AD+DA (MIC/LINE INPUT to STEREO OUT, GAIN: min.) AD Converter 24-bit Linear, 128-times Oversampling EFFECT : 4 CH Recording Resolution 16-bit/24-bit Maximum Number of Simultaneous Recording/ Playback Tracks 16 Recording Tracks/24 Playback Tracks (16-bit) 8 Recording Tracks/12 Playback Tracks (24-bit) DA Converter 24-bit Linear, 128-times Oversampling Number of Tracks 208 Tracks (24 Tracks + Stereo Tracks) x 8 Virtual Internal Processing 32-bit Faders 100 mm x 13 (motorized) Sampling Frequency Internal : 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (-6%–+6%) Display 320 x 240 dot LCD (with contrast control) External : 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz (-10%–+6%) Audio Input Section MIC/LINE INPUT : 8 CH (XLR & phone) MIDI MTC (Master/Slave), MIDI Clock (Master), MMC (Master/Slave), Program Change, Control Change DIGITAL STEREO IN : 2 CH (coaxial stereo x 1) Audio Output Section MONITOR OUT : 16 CH : 2 CH (stereo x 1) PHONES : 2 CH (stereo x 1) STEREO OUT : 2 CH (stereo x 1) OMNI OUT : 4 CH DIGITAL STEREO OUT : 2 CH (coaxial stereo x 1) Mini-YGDAI SLOT Memory Scene Memory, EQ Library, Compressor Library, Gate Library, Effect Library, Channel Library : 16 CH Audio Insert I/O Section INSERT I/O : 2 CH Mixer Input Section (Total 48 CH) MIC/LINE INPUT : 16 CH Internal Effect Return : 8 CH (stereo x 4) Track : 24 CH Power Consumption 85 W Dimensions (W x H x D) 533 x 153 x 503 mm Net Weight 11.5 kg Operating Temperature 5–35 °C Optional Accessories Foot switch Yamaha FC5 Appendix Mini-YGDAI SLOT Internal Effect Section 4 Built-in Multi-Effect Processors AW2400 Owner’s Manual 277 Specifications ■ Mixer Section ● Digital Mixing Functions ● Input/Output Input Channels (INPUT 1–16) Phase (Normal/Reverse), Gate, Compressor, Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Pan, Bus Assign (STEREO, SOLO, BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4, EFF 1–4) MIC/LINE INPUT 1–8 (balanced XLR & phone) Phantom Power Supply : +48 ± 3 V Input Impedance : 3 kΩ Nominal Input Level : -46 dBu to + 4 dBu Minimum Input Level : -56 dBu Maximum Input Level : +24 dBu INSERT I/O 1, 2 (unbalanced phone) Input Impedance : 10 kΩ Nominal Input Level : 0 dBu Maximum Input Level : +20 dBu Output Impedance : 600 Ω Nominal Output Level : 0 dBu Maximum Output Level : +20 dBu STEREO OUT L, R (balanced phone) Output Impedance : 75 Ω Track Channels (TRACK 1–24) Attenuation, Phase (Normal/Reverse), Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Compressor, Pan, Bus Assign (STEREO, BUS 1–2, AUX 1–4, EFF 1–4) Internal Effect Return Channels (EFFECT RETURN 1-4 (stereo)) Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Pan, Bus Assign (STEREO, AUX 1–4) Master Channels STEREO L, R : Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Compressor, Balance Nominal Load Impedance : 600 Ω BUS 1 L/R, 2 L/R : Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Compressor, Balance Nominal Output Level : +4 dBu AUX 1–4 Maximum Output Level : +24 dBu : Attenuation, Equalizer (4-Band PEQ), Compressor, Balance EFF 1–4 : Compressor MONITOR OUT L, R (balanced phone) Output Impedance : 75 Ω Nominal Load Impedance : 600 Ω ■ Recorder Section Nominal Output Level : +4 dBu Maximum Output Level : +24 dBu Overview Recording Resolution : 16-bit/24-bit Sampling Frequency : 44.1 kHz/48 kHz OMNI OUT 1–4 (unbalanced phone) Output Impedance : 150 Ω Edit Functions Song Edit : OPTIMIZE, DELETE, COPY, IMPORT Nominal Load Impedance : 10 kΩ Nominal Output Level : +0 dBu Maximum Output Level : +20 dBu PHONES (unbalanced TRS phone) Load Impedance : 8–40 Ω Maximum Output Level : 25 mW (8 Ω load) 75 mW (40 Ω load) DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT (coaxial) Mini-YGDAI Cards MY8-AT, MY8-TD, MY8-AE, MY4-AD, MY8-AD, MY4-DA, MY16-AT, MY16-TD, MY16-AE, MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S, MY8-AD24, MY8-AD96, MY8-DA96, MY16-mLAN, Y96K * 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms Other Functions Locate point/Marker Locate : RTZ, A/B, LAST REC IN/OUT, Quick Locate 1–9 MARK : 1–99 Punch-In/Out : Manual, Auto Pitch Fix CD-RW Drive Data Backup, Audio CD Burning and Playback, Audio CD Import, WAV File Import ■ External Control Appendix 278 Track Edit : ERASE, DELETE, INSERT, COPY, MOVE, EXCHANGE, TIME COMP/EXPAND, PITCH CHANGE, IMPORT CD AUDIO, IMPORT CD WAV, IMPORT USB WAV, IMPORT TRACK, EXPORT MIDI IN MIDI OUT/THRU FOOT SW USB AW2400 Owner’s Manual : : : : 5-pin DIN 5-pin DIN phone USB 2.0 Dimensions Dimensions 153 145 13 503 497 533 Unit: mm * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Appendix For European models Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2. Inrush Current: 35A Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 279 Index Index A B D A/B keys ................................ 27, 89 Backing up ................................. 177 DATA/JOG dial.............................25 A/B points .................................... 88 Bit depth..................................... 165 Demo song ...................................41 A-B repeat ................................... 93 Block diagram ............................ 284 DETECT .....................................125 ABS ........................................... 174 Bounce................................... 74, 79 Digital input signal ......................227 AC IN connector .......................... 28 BURST NOISE button ............... 209 Digital input/output .....................223 Accessing a screen/page ............ 31 BYPASS .................................... 121 DIGITAL OUT COPYRIGHT button ...................210 Adjusting the input level .............. 39 C DIGITAL STEREO IN/OUT connectors ..............29, 104 AMP............................................. 95 CANCEL key................................ 27 Dimensions ................................279 Assigning input signals to tracks Direct recording.................. 51, 99 Mixed recording ............... 54, 102 Card ............................. 13, 104, 223 DIO key ........................................21 Cascade connection .................. 226 DIO screen Plug-in page............................228 Setting page............................223 Status page.............................227 Additional Function buttons ......... 31 Audio CD ................................... 213 Basic settings ......................... 215 Creating ................................. 213 Disc At Once .................. 214, 218 Erasing ................................... 221 Finalizing ................................ 220 Playing ................................... 222 Track At Once ................ 214, 217 Writing methods ..................... 214 Audio tracks............................... 128 AUTO DISPLAY button ............. 211 AUTO PUNCH key ................ 27, 70 Auto punch-in/out ........................ 70 AUTO SAVE button ................... 211 Automix ..................................... 181 AUTOMIX key ............................. 24 Automix Library.......................... 190 AUTOMIX screen Automix page ......................... 181 Edit page ................................ 186 Event List page ...................... 188 Library page ........................... 190 CD key ......................................... 21 CD Play function ........................ 222 CD screen Play page ............................... 222 Setting page ........................... 215 Write page .............................. 217 DIRECT OUT EXTRACT POSITION ................211 CD/DAT DIGITAL REC button ... 210 Direct recording ......................49, 99 CD/ST TR PLAY MODE MUTE/MIX button ...................... 211 Disc At Once ......................214, 218 CD-RW drive.......................... 12, 29 Access indicator ....................... 29 Basic settings ......................... 215 Eject hole.................................. 29 Eject switch .............................. 29 Handling ................................... 12 Handling CD-R/RW media ......... 6 Removing in an emergency...... 12 Writing methods ..................... 214 DITHER ........................................75 CH VIEW screen Library page ........................... 108 View page............................... 105 Channel Library ......................... 108 Cluster size ................................ 212 Display message list ..................263 DUCKING...........................151, 242 DYN key .......................................24 Dynamics ...................................151 Dynamics Parameters ................240 DYNAMICS screen Comp Edit page ......................152 Comp Lib. page ......................155 Gate Edit page........................151 Gate Lib. page ........................155 E EDIT key ......................................21 Appendix AUTOREC button ...................... 182 COMP (Compressor) ......... 153, 240 AUX ........................................... 111 Compander ........................ 153, 241 AUX key ...................................... 24 COMPARE button...................... 215 AUX screen Input/RTN page...................... 112 Track page ............................. 112 Compressor ......................... 61, 152 EDIT screen Edit page.................................136 Mark Adj. page..........................91 Tempo Map page....................175 Compressor Parameter list ........ 243 Editing a value in the display........31 Connection................................... 37 Editing command .......................138 COPY......................................139 DELETE..................................138 ERASE....................................138 EXCHANGE............................141 EXPORT .................................233 AUX send level .......................... 112 AW2816..................................... 177 Control change .......................... 194 CONTROL CHANGE MODE ..... 195 Copyright Notice ............................ 7 280 DIRECT OUT .............................100 AW2400 Owner’s Manual Index G GAIN knobs ................................. 21 GATE ................................. 151, 242 Gate Library ............................154 Mastering Library ......................75 LOCATE keys ............25, 32, 88, 89 I Locate points/Markers..................88 A/B points .................................88 Adjusting the position..........91, 92 Erasing......................................93 In/Out points .............................88 Locate points ............................88 LOCATOR button .....................91 MARKER button .......................91 Markers .....................................90 Quick Locator points .................88 Relative zero point ....................88 Start/End points ........................88 Effects ....................................... 115 BYPASS................................. 121 Insert .............................. 115, 119 INSERT EFF .................. 107, 119 MIX BALANCE ....................... 121 Send and Return ............ 115, 117 USED AS ............................... 121 IN 1-8 key .................................... 26 Locate section ..............................27 Effects Parameters .................... 245 EMPHASIS ................................ 227 ENTER key.................................. 25 Entering text ................................ 32 EQ ....................................... 60, 149 EQ Library ................................. 154 EQ Parameter list ...................... 238 Internal Effects ........................... 115 EXPAND (Expander) ......... 153, 241 Internal hard disk ....................... 212 EFFECT key ................................ 24 Gate Library ............................... 154 Gate Parameter list .................... 243 Ground screw .............................. 28 GROUP...................................... 134 Effect Library ..................... 116, 122 EFFECT screen FX Edit page .......................... 121 FX Input page ........................ 117 FX Lib. page........................... 122 FX Track page ....................... 117 H Hard disk.................................... 212 IN 9-16 key .................................. 26 IN/OUT keys .................... 27, 70, 89 M In/Out points ................................ 88 Manual punch-in/out.....................69 Included CD-ROM ..................... 266 MARK key ..............................27, 90 INITIALIZE button ...................... 106 MARK SEARCH keys ............27, 90 Initializing ................................... 212 Markers ........................................90 INPUT CH MUTE/MIX button .... 222 MASTER key................................26 INPUT SEL keys .......................... 21 MASTER TUNING .....................126 INSERT EFF ...................... 107, 119 Mastering library...........................75 INSERT I/O jacks......................... 28 Mastering library list ...................237 Inserting effect ................... 115, 119 MASTERING LIBRARY popup window ..............................76 External effects.................. 113, 120 External MIDI devices ............... 200 F F1-F4 keys ............................ 22, 31 Fader Group ................................ 82 J JOG ON key .......................... 25, 94 K L Features ...................................... 15 FF key ......................................... 27 FINALIZE button........................ 220 Finalizing ................................... 220 FOOT SW jack ............................ 29 FORMANT................................. 125 Front panel .................................. 29 METER screen .............................97 Input/RTN page ........................97 Master page..............................98 Output page ..............................98 Track page................................97 Meters ..........................................97 Metronome .............................44, 62 KEYIN SOURCE........................ 151 Fader Start ................................ 134 Faders ......................................... 23 METER key ..................................22 LAST SOLO ................................. 84 LATCH button ............................ 206 Layer section ......................... 26, 33 LEARN button ............................ 207 Level meters ................................ 97 Library Automix Library ...................... 190 Channel Library ...................... 108 Effect Library .................. 116, 122 EQ Library .............................. 154 MIC/LINE INPUT jacks.................28 MIDI............................................193 Basic settings..........................194 CHANNEL...............................194 CONTROL CHANGE MODE ..195 DEVICE NO. ...........................199 MMC ...............................198, 200 MTC ................................199, 200 OFFSET..................................199 PORT......................................194 SYNC AVERAGE ...................199 SYNC OUT .............................199 THRU ......................................198 Appendix IMPORT CD AUDIO............... 143 IMPORT CD WAV.................. 143 IMPORT TRACK .................... 145 IMPORT USB WAV ............... 234 INSERT .................................. 138 MOVE .................................... 140 PITCH .................................... 142 TIME COMP........................... 141 MIDI Clock..................................202 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 281 Index MIDI Data Format ...................... 272 MIDI Implementation Chart........ 276 MIDI IN connector ....................... 29 MIDI key ...................................... 21 MIDI OUT/THRU connector......... 29 P Pairing.......................................... 58 Pan ............................................ 147 PAN/EQ key................................. 24 MIDI screen Setting 1 page ........................ 194 Setting 2 page ........................ 198 PAN/EQ screen EQ Lib. page .......................... 154 EQ/Att. page ........................... 149 Input/RTN page ...................... 147 Track page ............................. 147 MIX BALANCE .......................... 121 PATCH key .................................. 21 Mix parameters.......................... 105 PATCH screen ........................... 104 MIX SOLO ................................... 84 Patching ....................................... 99 Mixdown ................................ 73, 75 PEAK HOLD button ..................... 98 MIXDOWN SOLO........................ 84 PEAK indicators ........................... 21 Mixed recording ................... 50, 102 PHANTOM +48V switches........... 29 Mixing layers................................ 33 PHONES jack .............................. 28 MMC .................................. 198, 200 PHONES knob ............................. 24 MONITOR key ............................. 21 Ping-pong recording .............. 74, 79 MONITOR knob........................... 24 PINK NOISE button ................... 209 MONITOR OUT jacks.................. 28 Pitch Fix ..................................... 124 MONITOR screen Fader Grp. page....................... 82 Mute Grp. page ........................ 83 Pair page.................................. 58 Solo page ................................. 84 PLAY key ..................................... 27 MTC................................... 199, 200 Preroll time........................... 70, 210 MULTI CONNECTION............... 100 Program change ................ 194, 201 MUTE CLEAR ................... 100, 102 Punch-in/out................................. 69 MIDI remote............................... 204 Plug-in card................................ 228 Postroll time ......................... 70, 211 POWER switch ...................... 28, 38 Q Quick Locator points .................... 88 Nudge function ............................ 94 Remote file .................................268 REMOTE key ...............................26 REMOTE screen ........................205 REPEAT key ..........................27, 93 Restoring ....................................178 Return time.................................185 REW key ......................................27 RTZ key..................................27, 89 S SCALE .................................95, 125 SCENE key ..................................24 Scene Memory ...........................159 SCENE screen Library page............................159 PGM Assign page...................201 RCL Safe page .......................162 Sort page ................................163 SEL keys ......................................23 Selected Channel knobs ..............24 Selected Channel section ......24, 33 Send and Return ................115, 117 Sequencer..................................202 SET key..................................27, 89 SHIFT key ..............................22, 31 SHUTDOWN button .....................38 Slot ...............................................29 Solo ..............................................84 R SOLO key.....................................23 NUDGE PLAY MODE................ 210 NUDGE TIME ............................ 210 RATE ......................................... 125 NUM.LOCK key ........................... 87 Rear panel ................................... 28 SONG screen Backup page...........................177 Restore page ..........................178 Setting page............................174 Song List page........................167 REC key....................................... 27 O OFFSET .................................... 199 OMNI OUT jacks ................. 28, 104 ON keys....................................... 23 Optimizing ................................. 172 Appendix Optional card ............... 13, 104, 223 Output signal patching............... 104 Overdubbing ................................ 65 OVERWRITE............................. 182 RECALL CONFIRMATION button ......................................... 211 Recall Safe ................................ 162 RECORD key............................... 21 RECORD screen Bounce page ............................ 79 Direct page ......................... 51, 99 Mixdown page .......................... 75 Mixed page ....................... 54, 102 PITCH FIX .............................. 124 RECORDING SOLO .................... 84 282 Relative zero point .......................88 Shut down ....................................38 Mute Group ................................. 83 N RELATIVE ..................................174 AW2400 Owner’s Manual SONG key ....................................21 Songs .........................................165 AW2816 ..................................177 Backing up ..............................177 Bit depth..................................165 Copying...................................171 Deleting...................................171 Editing settings .......................174 Editing the song name ............169 Folder Organization ................166 Importing data.........................173 Index Loading .................................. 170 New song ......................... 47, 168 Optimizing .............................. 172 Protection ............................... 172 Restoring................................ 178 Saving .............................. 57, 170 Tempo map ............................ 175 Sound Clip ................................... 43 SOUND CLIP key ........................ 27 TRACK screen Stereo TR page ...................... 131 Trigger page ........................... 134 View page............................... 128 Virtual TR page ................ 63, 129 Transport section ................... 27, 87 Trigger track............................... 133 Troubleshooting ......................... 258 Turning the power on/off .............. 38 SOUND CLIP screen................... 44 SOUND CLIP TIME ..................... 47 U Specifications ............................ 277 Start/End points ........................... 88 STEREO fader ............................ 23 STEREO ON key......................... 23 STEREO OUT jacks .................... 28 STEREO SEL key ....................... 23 Stereo track ............................... 130 STOP key .................................... 27 STORE CONFIRMATION button ........................................ 211 UNDERRUN PROTECT button . 215 UNDO LIST popup window.......... 64 UNDO/REDO key .................. 25, 64 UNLATCH button ....................... 206 USB connector..................... 29, 229 USB key ....................................... 24 USB MIDI driver ......................... 266 USB screen................................ 231 USB Storage mode ............ 229, 230 Switching a button on/off ............. 31 USED AS ................................... 121 SYNC AVERAGE ...................... 199 User-defined .............................. 206 SYNC CAUTION DIGITAL ST IN button ............... 211 Utility functions........................... 209 SYNC CAUTION SLOT IN button ......................... 211 UTILITY key ................................. 21 Synchronizing ............................ 200 UTILITY screen Format page ........................... 212 Oscillator page ....................... 209 Preference page ..................... 210 T V Tempo Map ............................... 175 VARI .......................................... 226 Test tone oscillator .................... 209 Vari-pitch.................................... 226 THRU ........................................ 198 VIEW key ..................................... 24 Tone generator module ............. 207 Viewing the display ...................... 30 Top panel .................................... 20 Virtual tracks ................................ 63 SYNC OUT ................................ 199 TRACK 1-12 key ......................... 26 Track At Once ................... 214, 217 Track editing .............................. 135 Basic procedure ..................... 136 Editing command ................... 138 TRACK key.................................. 21 Track recording ........................... 47 Direct recording............ 49, 51, 99 Metronome ............................... 62 Mixed recording ......... 50, 54, 102 W WAV files ........................... 233, 234 WAVE DISPLAY popup window .. 95 Waveform .................................... 95 Wordclock .................................. 223 WORDCLOCK SOURCE........... 223 Appendix TRACK 13-24 key ....................... 26 AW2400 Owner’s Manual 283 SLOT Stereo Track In Sound Clip In RECORDER RECORDER INPUT 1(...24) INSERT SEND EFFECT1(...4) 54 24 2 ON [DIGITAL STEREO IN] [SLOT] [INSERT I/O] (1-2 ONLY) [MIC/LINE INPUT] (1-8) OFF AD PEAK CD-RW DRIVE RECORDER to INSERT RETURN 2 2 24 CD Playback CD-RW DRIVE Stereo Track Out Sound Clip Out RECORDER INPUT RECORDER REPRO 1(...24) MONITOR Connection Type Select METER EFFECT 1(...4) METER DIGITAL STEREO L/R SLOT 1-16 AD 1-8 INPUT PATCH DIGITAL STEREO IN (BUS CASCADE) 2 16 GAIN +48V (1-4ch/5-8ch) SELECT ATT INSERT TRACK 1(...24) Stereo Configuration ATT Keyin Self or Stereo Link COMP METER METER (Gain Reduction) (Out Meter) 4BAND EQ Keyin Self or Stereo Link COMP METER METER (Gain Reduction) (Out Meter) INSERT METER 4BAND EQ METER EFECT RETURN 1(...4) Keyin INPUT (1...16) AUX 1(...4) EFFECT 1(...4) GATE METER INSERT 4BAND ATT EQ (Out Meter) METER METER (Gain Reduction) INPUT 1(...16) PAN PRE/ POST OSCILLATOR ON PAN PRE/ POST ATT TRACK CH DIRECT OUT 1(...24) ON AUX/EFFECT SOLO ENABLE ON AUX/EFFECT SOLO INPUT CH DIRECT OUT 1(...16) METER LEVEL SOLO ON AUX/EFFECT METER PRE FADER/ AFTER PAN PRE/ POST PAN DIGITAL STEREO IN L (BUS CASCADE) R ON LEVEL INSERT ON LEVEL ON INSERT LEVEL PRE FADER/ AFTER PAN METER SOLO L STEREO R STEREO L SOLO R Same as BUS1 L INSERT INSERT ON LEVEL (Out Meter) METRONOME (Out Meter) AUX1(...4) STEREO ATT 24 4 2 STEREO 4 DA DA STEREO L 54 24 16 STEREO R INSERT SEND TRACK CH DIRECT OUT 1(...24) AUX1(...4) 2 TRACK CH DIRECT OUT 1(...24) ON DA DA INPUT CH DIRECT OUT 1(...16) BUS1,2(L,R) INSERT INSERT ON LEVEL COMP METER METER SOLO LOGIC (Gain Reduction) 4 INSERT ON LEVEL BAL Same as BUS1 L except PAIRING 4BAND EQ METER COMP METER METER Same as STEREO L StereoTrack out Sound Clip out RECORDER CD Playback (Gain Reduction) SOLO TRIM INSERT CD-RW DRIVE 4BAND EQ ATT INSERT ATT INSERT METER COMP METER METER (Out Meter) OUTPUT PATCH AW2400 Owner’s Manual OUTPUT PATCH Appendix 284 16 2 DA DA DA DA PHONES LEVEL R L 4 3 2 1 R L [STEREO OUT] [DIGITAL STEREO OUT] [OMNI OUT] [PHONES] [MONITOR OUT] RECORDER INPUT 1(...24) EFFECT 1(...4) AUX1(...4) BUS1 R(...2) BUS1 L(...2) STEREO TRACK In R Sound Clip In R RECORDER STEREO R STEREO TRACK In L Sound Clip In L RECORDER STEREO L SLOT DITHER DITHER MONITOR OUT LEVEL 24 METER METER METER SELECT (Gain Reduction) Block diagram Block diagram BUS1 L BUS1 R BUS2 L BUS2 R STEREO L STEREO R SOLO L SOLO R AUX 1-4 EFFECT 1-4 ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 3. TERMINATION 8. GENERAL This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. AW2400 Owner’s Manual 285 MEMO 286 AW2400 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria, CEE Department Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 ASIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Sp.z. o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-868-07-57 Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. POLAND CANADA MEXICO Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 080-004-0022 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2441 PA18 Yamaha Web Site (English only) http://www.yamahasynth.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2005 Yamaha Corporation This document is printed on chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink. WE25170 710POCPx.x-02B0 Printed in Japan